Israe اثراء

King Adbulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture
Schematic Design II Report

Chapter 01 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 02 ARCHITECTURE
Chapter 03 ENGINEERING
Chapter 04 COST PLAN
Chapter 05 LIST OF DRAWINGS FOR SD
Chapter 06 VALUE ENGINEERING
Chapter 07 PROCUREMENT, LONG LEED ITEMS
Chapter 08 DD DESIGN SCEDULE AND DELIVERABLES
GENERAL INDEX
Chapter 01 01.1 Executive Summary
01.1.1 Introduction
01.1.2 Development Summary
01.1.3 Outstanding Issues Summary
01.1.4 Key Dates & Events of Schematic Design
01.2 Introduction
01.2.1 The Team Structure
01.2.2 Meetings
01.2.3 Communication
01.2.4 Reporting
01.2.5 The Brief
01.3 The Project Team

01.3.1 The Design Team - Snøhetta
01.3.2 The Design Team – Buro Happold
01.3.3 The Design Team – Sub-Consultants
01.3.4 The Design Team Distribution by Discipline
01.3.5 The Design Team Manpower Distribution
01.4 Requests For Information (RFIs)
01.1 Executive Summary: 01.1.2 Development Summary
The Schematic Design Phase for the design of the King Abdulaziz Center for During the course of the Schematic Design period there have been a number of
Knowledge & Culture has been successfully completed and this report provides the significant design developments, these are reported on in detail in the individual
details of the architectural, structural and mechanical engineering of the current sections of the report and can be summarized as follows:
design. Since the start of the design phase both the Client and the Design Team
have worked collaboratively to achieve the aims of the brief and contract. The • The mono-surface of the Landscape has been developed from an inaccessible
below highlights the key activities of the phase: desert to being a publicly accessible park.
01.1.1 Introduction • The main entrance has become an open landscaped approach as opposed to
the original underground entrance.
The grand ambition for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture is that of
marking a new era in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. It will subsequently be a great • In addition to the main entrance a secondary entrance has been added in
achievement for the oil company Saudi Aramco. The Centre is their gift to the association with the Auditorium. The possibility for a third entrance from the
country at their 75th anniversary and will be an important contribution to the landscape is outlined in the Tower chapter.
cultural development of future generations in the Kingdom.
• The individual volumes of the Auditorium and the Library have swapped in
As the Kingdom today is still living with a strong moral codex, censorship and position to create a new composition and clarified entrance. This redesign
limited cultural offers, their understanding and experience of other cultures, has allowed the Keystone to be situated above the Source.
traditions and religious beliefs are limited compared to the rest of the world.
• The Library and the Museum have been reduced in area.
The cultural centre is aiming at changing this.
• The Keystone has changed from being the Children’s Discovery Zone and is
The architecture of this new cultural centre should encourage the vision of now a centre for meeting and debate.
development; insight and communication on a grand scale, and at the same time
preserve and expose the history of the Kingdom and Saudi Aramco. • The Tower functions are now reserved for Life Long learning
Saudi Arabia prior to finding the oil, was a tribal community dispersed around the • At the ground floor the concept of the Plaza has been introduced as the
vast desert. The finding of oil in well No. 7 made all the difference. The Kingdom of primary unifying public space from which all the key functions can be
Saudi Arabia has greatly prospered and is one of the largest oil producing accessed.
countries in the world today.
• The Children’s Discovery Zone has been re-located to the ground floor with
The competition called for a design that could announce the cultural centre in an direct access to the gardens.
outstanding way.
• The landscaping concept has been enriched by the inclusion of two public
Snøhetta intends to answer this challenge by means of an architectural concept gardens accessible from the main Public Plaza. The opportunity for
that will link the ambitions for the future with the history of the past and that of establishing a third garden associated with the administration is discussed in
the present. the Tower chapter.
• The Musalla has been replaced by a 450 m² Mosque to be situated in the

park serving the whole cultural campus.
01.1.3 Outstanding Issues Summary 01.1.4 Key Dates & Events of Schematic Design:
AREA: CHAPTER: 25.02.08: Signing of Contract for the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge
& Culture.
Landscape: 02.2.4.1 Parking.
27-28.02.08: Initial Schematic Design Workshop, Oslo.
02.2.4.2 Mosque.
12-13.03.08: March Design Team Workshop, Oslo.
Auditorium: 02.3.4.1 Acoustics.
26-27.03.08: MEP, Structures and Ground Works Design Team Workshop,
Great Hall and Cinema: 02.4.4.1 Multipurpose Cinema. Dubai.
Library: 02.5.4.1 Program and utilization. 27.03.08: Design Team Workshop, London.
02.5.4.2 Conveying system. 02.04.08: April Design Team Workshop, Oslo.
02.5.4.3 Library structure. 07.04.08: Completion of Schematic Design Phase I
Museum: 02.6.4.1 The Source. 18.04.08: Design Team Workshop, Glasgow.
02.6.4.2 Suggested areas of expansions. 28-29.04.08: Initial Value Engineering Workshop, Oslo.
Plaza and Children’s: 02.7.4.1 Entrance situation. 29-30.04.08: Design Team Workshop, Oslo.
02.7.4.2 Program Children’s Discovery Zone. 20.05.08: Foundation Stone Laying Ceremony, Dhahran.
Tower and Keystone: 02.8.4.1 Tower scope. 21.05.08: Design Team Workshop, Bahrain.
02.8.4.2 Tower core. 22.05.08: Value Engineering Follow-Up Workshop, Dhahran.
02.8.4.3 Access from top of Source. 03-04.06.08: Design Team Workshop, Oslo.
02.8.4.4 Tower structure. 13.06.08: Completion of Schematic Design, 30% Submission.
02.8.4.5 Third Oasis.
02.8.4.6 Keystone scope.
01.2 Introduction held in Oslo. There have been and will continue to be Design Team Workshops
throughout the rest of the design phases; normally held in the first full week of
01.2.1 The Team Structure: each month.
In undertaking the design for the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture, At each monthly workshop a Principals Meeting involving the Project Leaders of the
Snøhetta has developed a Design Team of the leading industry experts from Design Team is also held. The Project Leaders also hold weekly progress
around the world. The Design Team has been split into design groups based on meetings, either using videoconferencing facilities, or through teleconferences.
areas of the project; with an architectural team leader from Snøhetta, and Additionally there have been weekly update meetings held between the Client’s
structural and mechanical engineer from Buro Happold assigned to each design Representative, Nour Al Hussein and Snøhetta’s Project Director, Robert
group, and then additionally by specialist services. Details of the individual design Greenwood.
groups are provided in the following pages. However, briefly they include:
• The Master Group, responsible for the co-ordination of both 2D and 3D Increasingly, as the project has developed, the individual design teams have
architectural designs. begun to act more independently; organising smaller more specific workshops in
• Landscape & Infrastructure Group. Oslo, London and Glasgow to examine a specific area of the building, arranged as
• Auditorium Group. and when they are needed.
• Tower & Keystone Group.
• Library Group. 01.2.3 Communication:
• Plaza & Back of House Group.
• Façade Group. The Design and Project Teams have been fortunate to have established an efficient
• Museum Group. and transparent communication protocol that has enabled both teams to progress
• Interiors & Children’s Discovery Zone Group. through Schematic Design and will continue through the future design phases.
• Great Hall Group.
Official communication with the Client must be through the Client’s
The other design team services have been provided by Buro Happold, Lord Cultural Representatives, Khalid Al Rashid or Nour Al Hussein. The Client’s presence in both
Resources, Theatre Projects Consultants Ltd, Davis Langdon, Davis Langdon Snøhetta’s Oslo and Buro Happold’s Glasgow offices has enabled the Design Team
Schumann Smith and Saudconsult as follows: to get clear directions efficiently.
• Indoor Environmental Simulation (CoSA) – Buro Happold.
• Sustainability (SAT) – Buro Happold. Communication between the various elements of the Design Team has been
• Fire Engineering (FEDRA) – Buro Happold. through email, telephone and videoconferencing facilities. Additional design and
• Façade Engineering – Buro Happold. cost information has been shared with the entire team through the web-based
• Specialist Lighting – Buro Happold. Project Collaboration Site (PCS). The PCS also serves as the conduit by which
• Acoustic Engineering – Buro Happold. design and cost information primarily, are issued to the Client in addition to the
• Security Consultancy – Buro Happold. required hardcopies.
• Cost Management – Davis Langdon.
• Facilities Planning – Lord. 01.2.4 Reporting:
• Theatre & Auditorium Consultancy – Theatre projects.
• Design Project Management – Davis Langdon Schumann Smith. Reporting to the Client has taken the form of Weekly and Monthly Progress
• Architectural Service – Saudconsult. Reports. Information is gathered from the individual design groups and specialist
services using weekly progress forms which detail the completed tasks from the
01.2.2 Meetings: previous week, those tasks yet to be accomplished and those tasks to be
undertaken over the next two weeks. The form finishes up with an “Areas for
Team Meetings and Design Team Workshops have been central to the progress of Concern”. This affords the design groups to raise points to be discussed amongst
the design. From the very beginning of the design phase the Team has benefited themselves as well as providing a platform from which Requests for Information
from close communication with the Client’s Project Team. Full scale workshops (RFIs) can be made to the Client. The latest RFI table can be found at the end of
involving large numbers of both the Design, and the Client’s Project Team were
this chapter. The weekly progress forms are the basis of the Weekly Progress The Tower: Subjected to extensive re-evaluation, following the agreement with
Reports. the Client that the Tower should be, as far as possible, accessible to the public.
The Weekly Progress Forms in turn inform the Monthly Progress Reports which The Keystone: The Keystone is central to the entire project and as such has been
detail not only information on the activities of the individual design groups and examined and discussed in great detail. The Client and Design Team have been
specialist services of the past month, but also what is expected to occur over the extremely pleased to reach a mutual understanding and appreciation of the
next two months. Additionally the Monthly Reports include a synopsis of minutes concept of the Keystone as a “Dialogue, Thinking and Discussion Space”.
from meetings held over the past month. The minutes give details of actions to be
undertaken and how these actions are progressing. The Administration Oasis: This new oasis, to be located within the landscape
will house the administrative facilities for the majority of the Center’s staff.
The progress of the Design Team has been mapped using web graphs. With an
overview web in each Weekly Report and then additionally individual webs The Mosque: To be developed, during the Design Development Phase of the
covering each design discipline in the Monthly Reports. The webs provide a graphic project, a mosque set within the landscape, in order to enhance the visitor’s
illustration of the design development mapped against monthly targets. experience of the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture.
Importantly they illustrate how inter-related the various design groups and
specialist services are.
01.2.5 The Brief:
The Team started with an extensive aspirational brief that has been developed
together with the Client over the past four months of the Schematic Design Phase.
Precise details of the brief are reproduced in the architectural chapter that follows.
As with all projects of this size and scope, the finer details will continue to be
developed into the Design Development phase.
There are a number of areas which have been particularly closely re-assessed in
the run-in to the completion of Schematic Design. This has led to some late
changes in functionality, which the Design Team have been delighted to
incorporate into the design as the will prove to be entirely beneficial to the project
and to the enjoyment and education of the future users. Additionally, as the design
process has matured towards the end of the design phase, the Design Team,
acting on instructions from and working hand-in-hand with the Client, have
undertaken to provide studies for additional areas that have evolved during
Schematic Design.
The additional scope items have been incorporated into the report, as agreed with
the Client, but not to the same level as those items which have remained
unchanged since the completion of Schematic Design Phase I in mid-April 2008.
They will be subjected to an accelerated design assessment during the early weeks
of Design Development, thereby bringing the entire project up to the same level of
design.
These areas will be examined in-depth in the following chapters, but as brief
synopsis they include:
01.3 The Project Team:
Aramco
Overseas
Company
(AOC) B.V.
Snøhetta
(Lead Architect)
Buro Happold
Davis Langdon (Civil/Str. + MEP. Lord Theatre Projects
Schumann Smith Engineers and Davis Langdon (Museology (Theatre Saudconsult
(Design Project Specialist (Cost Consultant) Consultant) Consultants)
Manager) Engineers)
01.3.1 The Design Team - Snøhetta:
Kjetil Thorsen Frode Degvold Peter Dang

kjetil@snoarc.no frode@snoarc.no peterd@snoarc.no
T +47 241 560 60 M+47 901 02 419 T +47 241 560 60
Robert Greenwood T +47 241 560 76 Nina Solsrund
Robert@snoarc.no Amund Siem Utne nina@garnesdata.no
M+47 932 00 017 amund@snoarc.no T +47 916 621 68
T +47 241 560 60 T +47 241 560 20 Principal Director Eli Synnevåg
Astrid Van Veen Harriet T. Rikheim eli@snoarc.no
astrid@snoarc.no harriet@snoarc.no T +47 241 560 60
M+47 917 137 797
KJETIL THORSEN Peter French
M+47 911 36 424
T +47 241 560 45 T +47 241 560 56 peterf@snoarc.no
Project Mailbox Erik Vitanza T +47 241 560 60
Kac200801@snoarc.no erikv@snoarc.no Filippo Gazzola
Bjørg Aabø T +47 241 560 60 filo@snoarc.no
bjorg@snoarc.no Tine Hegli Project Director M+47 452 27 872
M+47 992 89 300 tine@snoarc.no T +47 241 560 52
T +47 241 560 46 T +47 241 560 60 Stephanie Sixt
Frank Nodland Bård Stagnes ROBERT stephanie@snoarc.no
frankn@snoarc.no bard@snoarc.no T +47 241 560 60
T +47 241 560 60
GREENWOOD Anne Cecilie Haug
M+47 482 59 676
T +47 241 560 54 Maria Svaland annececilie@snoarc.no
Rune Veslegard maria@snoarc.no T +47 241 560 43
runev@snoarc.no T +47 241 560 71 Romana Suitner
T +47 241 560 60 romana@snoarc.no
T +47 241 560 60
Project Manager
ASTRID VAN VEEN
Master Group Auditorium Group Library Group Plaza and Back of Museum Group Great Hall Group
House
FRANK NODLAND (2D) HARRIET T. RIKHEIM MARIA SVALAND FILIPPO GAZZOLA ANNE CECILIE HAUG
RUNE VESLEGARD (3D) ERIK VITANZA PETER DANG ELI SYNNEVÅG STEPHANIE SIXT ROMANA SUITNER
Landscape & Tower & Keystone Façade Group Interiors &

Infrastructure Group Group Children’s Discovery
PETER FRENCH Zone Group
FRODE DEGVOLD TINE HEGLI
AMUND SIEM UTNE BÅRD STAGNES BJØRG AABØ
Drawing Co-
ordinator
NINA SOLSRUND
01.3.2 The Design Team - Buro Happold:
Rod Manson Glasgow Damien Kane Glasgow Linda Mansouri Glasgow Ron Scaglione Glasgow
Rod.manson@burohappold.com Damien.kane@burohappold.com Linda.mansouri@burohappold.com Ronald.scaglione@burohappold.co
M+44 07710116790 M+44 07525766030 M+44 07912670680 m
T +44 0141 419 3000 T +44 01414193000 Project Principal T +44 01414193000 M +44 07912670594
Graham Hayne Glasgow Graham Knowles Glasgow Stephen Burrows Belfast T +44 01414193000
Graham.hayne@burohappold.com Graham.knowles@burohappold.com Stephen.burrows@burohappold.com Gavin Irvine Bath
M+44 07753829631 T +44 01312482617 ROD MANSON T +44 02890315292 Gavin.irvine@burohappold.com
T +44 0141 419 3000 Gavin Loy Dubai Jake Williams Glasgow T +44 01225320600
Simon Curtis Belfast Gavin.loy@burohappold.com Jake.williams@burohappold.com Ian Fowler London
Simon.curtis@burohappold.com M+971 0505037269 M+44 07786852232 Ian.fowler@burohappold.com
M+4407912670685 T +971 043358280 T +44 01414193000 M+44 07894172903
T +44 0289 051 7010 Bill Coupe North America Steve Cowan Glasgow T +44 02079729700
Project Director Steve.cowan@burohappold.com
Nicole Waterman Glasgow Bill.coupe@burohappold.com
Nicole.waterman@burohappold.com M+1 6472984812 T +44 01414193000
M+44 07912475879 T +1 4162041100 GRAHAM HAYNE Hugh McNamara Edinburgh
T +44 01414193000 Ying Tay Dubai Hugh.mcnamara@burohappold.com
Allan Follett Glasgow Ying.tay@burohappold.com M+44 07921495362
Allan.follett@burohappold.com M+971 0502970685 T +44 01312006033
M+44 07720413129 T +971 043358280 Roberto Fabbri London
T +44 01414193000 Richard Green Glasgow Roberto.fabbri@burohappold.com
Scott Baird Glasgow Richard.green@burohappold.com Project Leader T +44 02079279700
Scott.baird@burohappold.com M+44 07921740554
M+44 07803029138 T +44 01414193000
T +44 01414193000 SIMON CURTIS
Structural Engineer Structural Engineer Geotechnical Civil Engineering MEP

Job Leader Job Leader YING TAY Infrastructure co-ordinator Job Leader
BILL COUPE SIMON CURTIS Dubai NICOLE WATERMAN ALLAN FOLLETT
North America Glasgow Glasgow Glasgow
Richard Green
Tower & Keystone
Glasgow
CAR PARK
Linda Mansouri Team Leader Team Leader Team Leader Team Leader
Library SCOTT BAIRD DAMIEN KANE GRAHAM KNOWLES GAVIN LOY
PLAZA Glasgow Auditorium Library Tower Museum
Great Hall Glasgow Keystone Plaza
Cinema Glasgow Glasgow Dubai
Stephen Burrows
Auditorium
Belfast
MUSEUM
Simulation Sustainability Fire Engineering Façade Engineering Specialist Lighting Acoustics Security
“COSA” “SAT” “FEDRA” Robert Fabbri Ron Scaglioni Gavin Irvine Ian Fowler
Jake Williams Steve Cowan Hugh McNamara London Glasgow Bath London
Glasgow Glasgow Edinburgh
01.3.3 The Design Team - Sub-Consultants:
Davis Langdon Schumann Davis Langdon – Cost Lord Cultural Resources – Saudconsult – Architectural
Smith – Design Project Management: Facilities Planning Services Consultants:
Managers: Consultants:
Steve Gee Catharine Tanner Sami Abdulghani

Nick Schumann steve.gee@davislangdon.com ctanner@lord.ca sce@saudconsult.com
nick.schumann@schunmannsmith.com M+973 3974 9083 M+1 466 (5) 0789 9040 M+966 3 845 0000
M+44 (0) 7976 252 434 T +973 1758 8796 T +1 416 928 9 292 Amr Al Azzazi
T +44 (0) 207 061 7000 Raj Tailor Blaire Fiset amr@snoarc.no
Gerard Daws raj.tailor@davislangdon.com bfiset@lord.ca T +47 241 560 60
gerard.daws@schumannsmith.com M+973 3934 4622 T +1 416 928 9 292 Abed Alwahab Antar
M+44 (0) 7946 623 155 T +973 1758 8796 Christina Sjoberg abed@snoarc.no
T +44 (0) 207 061 7000
csjoberg@lord.ca T +47 241 560 60
Mark Schumann
T +1 416 928 9 292
mark.schumann@schumannsmith.com
M+44 (0) 7966 262 816
T +44 (0) 207 061 7000 Partner
Ned Barran
ned.barran@schumannsmith.com
M+44 (0) 7747 021 710 Stephen Gee Project Principal Executive Vice
T +44 (0) 207 061 7000
Alex Sargent President
alex.sargent@schumannsmith.com Catharine Tanner Sami Abdulghani
M +44 (0) 7764 744 408
T + 44 (0) 207 061 7000
Associate
Raj Tailor Project Manager/ Architect/ Project

Consultant Manager
Partner
Amr Al Azzazi
Blaire Fiset
NICK SCHUMANN
Theatre Projects Consultants
Ltd – Theatre & Auditorium Architect
Project Leader Consultants: Project Manager/
Consultant Abed Alwahab
GERARD DAWS Antar
Christina Sjoberg
Mark Stroomer
ms@tpcworld.net
T +(0)207 482 4224
Senior Project Tom Davis
Manager td@tpcworld.net
T +(0)207 482 4224
MARK SCHUMANN
Project Manager Project Principal

NED BARRAN Mark Stroomer
Project Manager Project Manager

ALEX SARGENT Tom Davis
01.3.4 Design Team Distribution by Discipline: 01.3.5 Design Team Manpower Distribution:
Buro Happold – Glasgow/ Buro Happold –

Edinburgh/ Belfast: Glasgow/ Edinburgh/
Snøhetta - Oslo:
Belfast: Snøhetta - Oslo:
MEP/ Infrastructure/
Architectural Design cbcbcbcbcb
Structure Saudconsult - Oslo: cbcbcbcbcbcbcbc
cbcbcccbcb
bcccbcbcbc
cbcbcccbcb Saudconsult - Oslo:
Architectural Production cbcbcccbcb
cb
Theatre Projects -
London:
Theatre Projects
Auditorium Saudconsult - - London:
Consultant Dammam: bb Saudconsult -
Architectural Dammam:
Production
Lord - cbcbccbcbc
Toronto: Lord - cbcbcb
Toronto:
Museology
Consultant Davis Langdon - cbb
Bahrain:
Davis Langdon -
Bahrain:
Cost Consultancy Buro
Buro
Happold – cb
Happold –
Toronto:
Toronto:
c
Structure
Buro Happold -
Buro Happold Dubai:
Buro Davis Langdon - Dubai:
Buro Buro Davis Langdon cccccccc
Happold – Schumann Smith
Buro Happold - MEP/ Happold – Buro Schumann
cccc
New York: - London: Buro cccccccc
Happold - London: Infrastructure New York: Happold - Smith - London:
Structure Bath: Happold London:
cccccccc
Design Project / Structure cb - Bath: c
Acoustics Facades Management cbc
cb cb
01.4 Request For information Register:
The spreadsheet below forms the basis by which the Design Team has liaised with the Client when there has been a requirement for information or clarification so that the
design can progress.
Chapter 02 02.1 Introduction architecture
02.2 Landscape
02.2.1 Introduction
02.2.2 Program Brief
02.2.3 Description
02.2.4 Outstanding issues
02.2.4.1 Parking
02.2.4.2 Mosque
02.2.5 Conclusions - recommendations
02.3 Auditorium
02.3.1 Introduction
02.3.3 Description
02.3.4.1 Acoustics
02.4 Great hall and Cinema

02.4.1 Introduction
02.4.1.1 Great Hall
02.4.1.2 Cinema
02.4.2.1 Great Hall
02.4.2.2 Cinema
02.4.3 Description
02.4.3.1 Great Hall
02.4.3.2 Cinema
02.4.4.1 Multipurpose cinema
02.5 Library
02.5.1 Introduction
02.5.3 Description
02.5.4.1 Program and utilization
02.5.4.2 Conveying system
02.5.4.3 Library structure
02.6 Museum
02.6.1 Introduction Chapter 02 ARCHITECTURE
02.6.3 Description
02.2.6.1 The source
02.2.6.2 Suggested areas of expansions
02.7 Plaza and Childrens

02.7.1 Introduction
02.7.3 Description
02.7.4.1 Entrance situation
02.7.4.2 Program Children’s
02.8 Tower and Keystone

02.2.1 Introduction
02.2.3 Description
02.8.3.1 Tower
02.8.3.2 Keystone
02.8.4.1 Tower scope
02.8.4.2 Tower core
02.8.4.3 Tower structure
02.8.4.4 Accsess from top of Source
02.8.4.5 Third Oasis
02.8.4.6 Keystone scope
02.9 Facade
02.2.1 Introduction
02.2.3 Description
02.10 Interior - overall concept
02.11 Architectural Specification
Chapter 02.1 INTRODUCTION ARCHITECTURE
Intentions
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowlegde and Culture is a bold new initiative on the part of the Saudi
Aramco oil company to promote cultural development within the Kingdom. Following an invited ar-
chitectural design competition in 2007 Snøhetta has been selected to design this prestigious cultural
facility.
Located in Dahran in the Eastern Province the Cultural Center will provide for a wide range of activities
serving the local population and becoming a cultural landmark on both a regional, national and global
horizon. When completed the project will contain some 45 000m2 of diverse cultural facilities, includ-
ing an auditorium, cinema, library, exhibition hall, museum and archive.
The auditorium will seat 1000 visitors and will provide for a wide range of events ranging from op-
era, symphony concerts, musicals and speeches etc. Together with the smaller cinema this will be an
unrivalled venue for the performing arts in the Kingdom. The library will become a center of learning
containing some 300 000 books on open access and catering for all ages and categories of users. The
great exhibition hall will accommodate large scale travelling exhibitions as well as providing the set-
ting for social events, banquets and conferences. The museum and archive facilities connect the vi-
brant cultural life of the center to the past and to the very roots of the society from which this center
is conceived.
On May 20th 2008 The foundation stone was laid by King Abdullah and the Cultual Center is expected
to be completed in 2011.
Foundation Cermony, team in front of model - foto: Hisham Mailaka

Introduction
The grand ambition for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture is that of marking a new era
in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. It will subsequently be a great achievement for the oil company Saudi
Aramco. The centre is their gift to the country at their 75th anniversary and will be an important con-
tribution to the cultural development of future generations in the Kingdom.
The content of this new cultural centre should encourage the vision of knowledge; insight and com-
munication on a grand scale, at the same time preserve and expose the history of the Kingdom and
Saudi Aramco.
Saudi Arabia, prior to finding the oil, was a tribal community dispersed around the vast desert. The
finding of oil in well no 7 made all the difference. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia has greatly prospered
and is one of the largest oil producing countries in the world today.
The competition called for a design that could announce the cultural centre in an outstanding way.
Snøhetta intends to answer this challenge by means of a contemporary architectural concept that will
link the ambitions for the future with the history of the past.
Architectural concept - six principles:
The Past and the Future

Culture grows out of the past, without culture no community or company can create a future.
The design for the Saudi Aramco Cultural Center embraces both past and future, captured in
the present.
Both in terms of architectural expression and internal logic this proposal digs down into the
past and reaches up in to the future.
Introvert and Extrovert

The concept is both introverted and extroverted. Below grade the museum and archive
functions are grouped around the inner void looking inwards to the truths and knowledge to
be found within Saudi Aramco and the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Above grade the composition
reaches out of the ground, connecting to the world beyond.
Repository and Beacon

Located below grade the Museum and Archive becomes a true repository of knowledge, in
protective surroundings and stored for posterity. In contrast the Library, Children’s Exhibit
and Visitor Centre are expressed as beacons to scholars across the world.
Diversity and Unity

This design takes the form of a complex composition, consisting of a number
of individual and discrete components. Balance and harmony is created through interdependence. Each
component is fashioned as a unique and tailor- made entity, conforming to and expressive of its own
individual needs and requirements.
Teamwork
No one component can be removed. All are interdependent and rely upon each other. The
resulting composition is an expression of team work. Each part can be endlessly adjusted to
suit the individual and specific needs. This form for flexibility is not general or universal but
specific and individual.
Energy
The balance and harmony of the composition is not static but dynamic, expressive of the
team work and above all of the energy to be found in the people that comprise Saudi Aramco and
Saudi Arabia. Evoking wonder and bearing memory of the steadfast endurance and hard labour
under severe conditions in the pioneer striking of oil.
Chapter 02.02 LANDSCAPE
02.01 Introduction
The initial idea of the preserved desertscape was to pursue equalibrium between the existing and new,
and to develope this dualism in a symbiosis with the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture.
The essence of this approach is maintained, and has been further developed to create a significant and
generous
Refined garden - untouched desert
Inclusion of existing facilities within the scheme
(Description of concept from the competition)
Image by Futurebrands
02.02 Program Brief
In the competition there was no distinct program relating to the Landscape, except for the parking. The Monosurface:
The Project Scope Definition was general, and described to “Apply landscaping with features to reflect Recreational area
the significance of the center.” and the area to “..be developed to have a nice view and pleasant atmo-
sphere by providing landscaping materials together with the required irrigation system.” However, the Oases:
design should “...consider minimal maintainance and low water consumption.” Childrens Oasis
The Great Hall Oasis
As the project progressed, in dialogue and through workshops with the client, a more clarified scope
was established. Lush Garden - The Heart
Entrance Plaza and walkways
The Monosurface was former described as an enclosed, artificial desert. As the discussion progressed Recreational garden area
some parts of this interpretation did not succeed to be established as a common reference. Still some Existing garden and parking
qualities from the original concept are found well suited for the Monosurface: The simplicity of the fea-
tures and the beauty of the seasonal contrasts, according to climatic conditions. Lush Garden - The Lower Part:
Bus parking
Another major change is the full accessibility to the monosurface. There will be a system of dedicated Optional external car park
pathways to accomodate equality, independent of your mobility. The flexible scheme and the shaping Garden area
of the surface will encourage a more random pattern of movement.
The Voyage:
New Oases are added, connected to the Childrens Experience zone and The Great Hall. Their program Main road
reflects the adjacent interior functions. Secondary (ring)road
Pedestrian walkways
For the SDII submission we have programmed the site relating to three distinct characters as stated
below. This is based on a development from the competition and the input given from the client.
THE VOYAGE THE MONOSURFACE WITH LUSH GARDEN - LUSH GARDEN -

THE OASES THE HEART THE LOWER PART
02.03 Description
Monosurface
The refined design concept is inspired by the attraction of a solitary tree in the savannah. The tracks
from people and animals seeking the cooling shade from the tree, is interpretated into a graphic pat-
tern on the monosurface with The Source as a subtle focal point.
This flexible scheme provides the surface with a diversity of lines, areas and junctions allowing a great
range of qualities and functions to fit in.
The design parametres are supporting the concept of a tranquil surface emphasizing the outstanding
features of the landscape – the Pebbles. This implies a modesty in verticality in the overall scale.
Inspirational images: Tree of life

Paths on the Monosurface
The are two metaphors or typologies for the paths: “To make way for...” and “To bridge over...”. The
division of the two depends on their purpose, and how they relate to the surface.
The main pathways are according to the first typology. Their function is to bring people on to the
Monosurface from some central points along the outline. This will also be the principle for the area
adjacent to the top of the Source, as well as requirements such as fire exit routes from the Pebbles.
Their dimensions and paving will reflect the purpose. The ramping will provide full accessibility.
Paths connecting the main routes create “ring” walkways, where people can take a stroll and enjoy
the changing views, will follow the same logic. Dimensions will be adjusted to allow for a more spread
out crowd. The paving will be smooth and have a wider range of
finishes.
Diagram of path typologies: “Making way for...” (left), “To bridge over...” (right)
Materials: Concrete, stone.
Differentiated finishes, warm colours Ref. Accessibility

A third type in this category will be paths for experiences.
Peeling off layers on a surface means carving out history of both mankind and nature. Some dedicated
routes could tell different stories to the visitors. The dimension of these paths should be adjusted to
smaller groups of people to stimulate curiosity and to leave time and space to unwind.
Main materials: Patterned stone and concrete
Carving out also means elevated side areas, adjusting the adjacent elements to a human scale and
bringing them closer to peoples senses. By this you encourage to see, smell and touch the features of
flowers and materials.
Ref. images. Story telling walkways Bringing features up to your senses (Ref. images above)
These sidewalls will also be functional. Seating will be integrated and located in accordance with the
purpose of the path; to provide both places to break, to give the opportunity to socialize with others
and to sit down in quiet to experience the adjacent features.
Lighting will also be integrated. By lighting up according to this principal, paths will appear as light
streams and make the graphics of the Monosurface visible even in the night situation. The paving of
these paths will, through material finish and color, emphasise the glow of the light.
Necessary technical installations will also be integrated in the sidewalls, so no vertical elements need
to be added.
Main materials:
Sidewalls: Stone and concrete
Furniture: Stone, concrete, wood
As earlier mentioned the shaping of the surface will encourage a more random pattern of movement.
Visitors breaking out from the defined walkways to discover by themselves, will after some while leave
traces on the Monosurface.
Ref. image. Man leaving traces
Integration of elements to achieve coherence and experience, ex. seating (right over), lighting (right under) and ventilation (ref. left over)
The principal of “bridging over” has in some cases a pure practical function. The Monosurface is pro-
vided with drainage canals for storm water that needs to be crossed. On days of rain these bridges
will be an attraction themselves.
The main purpose of this metaphore though is to emphasise the contents and qualities of the surface
beneath. This could be the roughness of a certain material that people would normally not walk on. It
could also be the vulnerability of a plant.
Main materials: Wood
Ref. image. Emphasising beauty and vulnerability
Ref. images. Bridging over

Surfaces
The Monosurface will be an arrangment of elements blending with each other to create a coherent
area. When you dive into this composition of features you will experience the subtle difference in
meaning, colour, feeling etc. Like a piece of music more nuances will be added, and develop the un-
derstanding as you keep on investigating them. Due to seasonal shifts, and changes throughout the
day, the physical appearance of the features will be dynamic.
Nature is fascinating, adaptable, and can live under harsh conditions. The individuals ability to grow
and blossom even when the circumstances seem hostile is reflected in the treatment of the Monosur-
face. No irrigation system is provided, but there will be an established system for collecting and con-
taining water. This can be individually adjusted, which widens the range of plants to use.
Increasing the spectre of elements to compose with, widens the options for the conceptual approach.
The former concept was to treat the Monosurface as an interpretation of a desert. Although the “arti-
ficial desert” is history, there are still essences of the concept with great potential. The context of the
site is the semi-arid landscape primarily dominating the lowland of the eastern province. By extracting
the properties and qualities of this in a new set of tools, we gain a rich palette of colours, tones, tex-
tures and patterns. We manage a coherence in the added elements and with their external setting.
Themes for the composition of these are unlimited. One option is to reflect the Country, such as the
geographical and cultural diversity of the different provinces.
(For the dualism with the paths, see chapter above.)
Images on the following pages aim to visualize a range of conceptual approaches for the Monosurface.
The architectural intent is to give the visitors subtle clues from which they can interpretate individual
as well as common referances, or just experience it’s richness.
PLANTS
SOIL
ABSORBENT
FOIL
PLANTS
SOIL
ABSORBENT
STORAGE
FOIL
Principal for incorperating the drainage canals with the vegetation system Ref. Principal for vegetation systems for sloaping and flat roofs
Culture and Tradition
Saudi Arabia has a rich variety of folk-art in weaving, decorative
arts, furniture and jewellery making. The people also have a
tradition of celebrating their cultural heritage in splendour fes-
tivals such as the annual Jenadriyah cultural festival. This rich-
ness could be reflected in the design of the Monosurface.
Reflecting the brightness of traditional textiles and festivities

Flora
Saudi Arabia contains one of the diverse floras of this region. Al-
though Saudi Arabia has a significant number of wild plants, the
number of species occurring in a square kilometer area is rela-
tively small, especially in areas such as the Central, Eastern and
Northern regions.
The northwestern and southwestern regions are densely veg-

etated and contain the highest number of species.
However, plants have several adaptations that help them to

survive in the desert, such as ability to collect and store water,
features that help reduce water loss, etc. Their lifes are highly
dependent, and each one is of crucial help for the survival of the
others.
Reflecting the importance of coexistence

Desertscape
The desert and semi-arid landscape can appear monotonous,
but by investigating the features of these harsh environments
you experience a richness in colours, texture and patterns.
Emphasising the nuances, and experiencing scale in the desertscape

Oases
There are two oases perforating the Monosurface: The Childrens Oasis and The Great Hall Oasis. A
third oasis for the staff is under discussion as an option.
The shaping of these Oases is reflecting the overall concept of a clear impact from the Cultural Centre,
as well as the diverse inner functions they are attached to. The design guidelines are influenced by a
natural oasis: The appearance of water is essential, both as refreshing water elements and in the rich-
ness of plants.
Though the two oases are diverse due to their adjacent interior functions, they have a common set
of parametres in their design. They are vibrant and fertile, and they provide various spatial experi-
ences, both areas for arrangements and activities which require more space, and places for gathering
in smaller groups.
Ref. Shaping of the Oases - impact of cultural influence Ref. Layers of green, presence of water
Childrens Oasis
The Childrens Oasis’ dynamic openess is conjured by the Plaza café and outdoor serving.
Although there is a distinction in function between the two zones, the physical transistion will be
subtle to achieve good visual contact and a coherencee in atmosphere. The Oasis will consist of dif-
ferent levels to accomodate both this distinction and to add more dynamic to the overall shaping. The
childrens zone will be on app. level +1m with the terrain sloping down towards the outdoor serving on
Multifunctional elements f.ex. for the zoning of the two functions
level 0.
The childrens zone will be an extension of the indoor areas, and the qualities provided will reflect the
concept of the interiors. The design intends to stimulate experiencing and learning through physical
activity and sensing. Elements added will in a great extent be integrated and multifunctional to en-
courage unbound activities for both interaction and individual investigation.
The outdoor area will be subdivided according to the interior, to provide diverse spaces for activities
with different requirements, for example loud vs. silence, younger vs. older children, openess vs. inti-
macy. The sloping terrain will contribute to this spatial differentiation.
Children playing outdoor increases the need for proper shading. The shading will, as far as possible,
have additional functions such as elements for playing or a playfull expression, for wondering and
story telling.
Main materials:
Outddoor serving: refined extension of the the Plaza floor backdropped by lush trees.
Childrens Experience Zone: Lawn, sand or rubber tiles according to safety requirements.
Integrated playground elements and equipment. Integrated and multifunctional installations for shad-
ing. Lush vegetation.
Ref. Stimulating interaction, learning and sensing
Integration of experience and function ex. by combining installations with vegetation Ref. Appealing to curiosity and investigation
Childrens Oasis, and Cafè outdoor serving. Image by MIR
The Great Hall Oasis
The Great Hall Oasis is a place for many occasions; from private celebrations to major public arrang-
ments and festivals. The outdoor space and features will emphazise and complete the flexibility and
the qualities of The Great Hall. The oasis will be provided with power outlets and water utilities for
outdoor exhibitions and arrangments.
In addition to the duality in function, the oasis will accomodate a refreshing atmosphere for relaxation
and contemplation, as a breakout spot for the indoor activities. Water fountains will contribute to this
lush impression.
The sloping edges will be activated through their design. A ramp, carved out in the slope, will con-
nect the oasis with the Monosurface. The starting point from ground level is by the entrance from the
Plaza, and the walkway is ramping up towards the intersection of the Great Hall and the Monosurface.
The perspectives, and the spatial experiences will change as you walk, from the enclosed oasis to the
openess of the Monosurface.
The shading will be a combination of trees and fabric spanned from the ramp
construction to the Great Hall
Main materials:
Oasis: Lawn backdropped by lush vegetation. Fabric on wires for shading
Fountains: Tile covered concrete
Ramp: Concrete
Section from the Great Hall Oasis. Ramping diagram above Ref. Fabric shading, outdoor cinema and chinese lantern festival
Lush Garden - The Heart
The Monosurface and the existing Lush Garden merge where the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge
& Culture connects to the Saudi Aramco Exhibit. The tangent of the Lush Garden defines the outline
for this transition zone. The architectural intent of this center-piece is to create a spatial and mental
shift in experience for the visitors as they enter.
In an Islamic garden the emphases are on water and shade. Gardens in Islam are not so much places
for walking in, as places of rest and quiet contemplation hence the need for a place to sit is also an
important consideration. The aim is to strive towards spiritual and physical refreshment.
Surrounding the existing Saudi Aramco Exhibit, is a well established, green park. This park gives the
visitor a frame of relaxing and pleasant atmosphere, an atmosphere which is an essential part of the
experience while visiting the site.
Part of the intention is to maintain as much as possible of the existing. To enhance the atmosphere,
the park will be developed and extended until it meets the Monosurface edge. It will also be adjust-
ed towards the edge of the ring road. All in all this Green Heart will act as a connector between the
buildings on the site. It will also be a pleasant element to walk through on the way between the exist-
ing and new center.
The park will be developed as an attraction in itself; a welcoming area for evening strolls or for any
visitors who will enjoy staying in these lush surroundings.
EXISTING PARK TRANSITION ZONE SHADED WALKWAY

Section
The existing entrance road to the Saudi Aramco Exhibit will be relocated, in order to get one common
entrance for both buildings, and the area occupied by that entrance road will be transformed into a
park to blend in with the rest of the area. Next to the exhibit, the area for parking will basically stay
as it is, but an adjustment is needed towards the ring road. The drop-off zone next to the entrance
will remain.
Within the Lush Garden there are two peculiar and solid rock formations. A ten metres high hill along
the west side of the exhibit is visible and will be a contrast to the surrounding green carpet. If de-
sired, it could be possible to walk up to this mountain and enjoy a fine view. Outside the main en-
trance of the existing exhibit, there is a smaller hill with a monument attached. This hill will be kept
as an element within the garden and paths will be led arround it.
To enrich the feeling of being in this tender and well established garden, the garden should be sup-
plemented with bushes and low flowering vegetation. It will give the visitors a feeling of being in a
blooming environment, with rooms and low vegetation creating diverse spatial experiences.
In shaded meeting points and where the paths cross, benches are placed. This will give the visitors
opportunity to rewind and enjoy the atmosphere.
Ref. image. Rewinding Ref. image. Seeking the shade from a tree
Walking from the existing exhibit, through the established park, towards the new King Abdulaziz Cen-
ter for Knowledge and Culture, you slide over to the new part of the park. This part of the green Heart
is an extention of the old park, and can be seen as a transition zone between “leaving the existing”
and “entering the new”. This zone has an open, green character beneath a foliage of trees. Walking in
this zone, people will have glimpses of the pebbles.
The green Heart provides the visitors with walkways from the adjacent facilities, accumulating outside
the entrance. The Entrance Plaza is on a lower level than most of the surrounding terrain. This em-
phasises the feeling of being led towards the entrance. The terrain will be modeled to strenghten this
experience.
A drop-off zone is incorporated in the entrance Plaza.
The contents and the qualities of the Plaza will reflect it’s function and the purpose of beeing a place
to gather. Trees, and additional installations will accomodate shade on the Plaza. Water features in the
entrance area will contribute to the refreshing atmosphere.
The underground parking is connected to the entrance Plaza through ramps and stairs leading you up
to a shaded walkway along the tangent of the Lush Garden.
(More about parking in the Voyage chapter)
Main materials:
Walkways and Plaza: stone paving backdropped by schrubs and trees
Adjacent areas: Lawn, schrubs and trees
Ref. image. Shading construction Ref. image. Modeling the terrain

Lush Garden - The lower part
The existing Lush Garden consists of the Al Ghawar Multipurpose Center south of the Saudi Aramco
Exhibit. The area has a grade of formality and expresses generosity. These qualities are extended to
the new border lines of the Lush Garden to close the shape and create a subtle distinction between
inside and outside, as a modern interperetation of the Persian pairidaeeza a ‘surrounding wall’. This
perimeter is also partly the outline for the access roads, framing the visitors journey to the Cultural
Centrer.
This part of the lush garden is suited for multiple functions. The area is convenient for a bus- and car
park, due to the space and the distance from the cultural center in the northern part. By modeling the
terrain, the parking area is well incorporated in the setting without disturbing the impression of lush-
ness. This principal is suitable for other situations as well.
Principal for modeling the terrain to accomodate a lush framing in arrow spaces, and for maintaining certain atmospheres. Ref. image. Formal lush garden
The Voyage
Visiting the Cultural Centre is a journey in a series of experiences. The starting point is the mental im-
age created from the individual expectations.
The first response to this is given as the visitor approaches the site. Entering from the nearby high-
way, the silhouette will soon rise and the metal covered volumes will appear like a mirage in their
context.
The new main access is located to the south east, and the visitors will enter the site through the exist-
ing and welcoming alley road to the Al Ghawar Multipurpose Centre. The alley will be extended along
the main road in the western tangent of the Lush Garden pointing towards the Cultural Centre.
Main materials main road: Asphalt, stone curbes.

Median: lawn, schrubs and trees.
A Mirage
Approaching
MAIN ROAD
The Alley MAIN ACCESS

The secondary road has a one-way traffic system turning west. The intention of this is to guide you
through the site with all it’s contents and qualities. The glimpses provided as you travel will be added
to your mental image and link the pieces together.
The first junction is where the main and the secondary road connect. This is the intersection of the
The Lush Garden and The Monosurface, and the first close up to the Cultural Centre. From this point
you will overview the entrance setting: The Heart. Standing out in the foreground is also a landscape
formation linking the project to it’s context.
Turning west will lead you through the Lush Garden. The curved road and the intimacy will bring down
scale and speed, and prepare the visitors as they are approaching the main entrance area. As you
reach the second intersection of the Lush Garden and The Monosurface the view will open up and your
attention will again be directed towards the Cultural Center.
A central drop off zone will bring you right to the delicate and shaded Entrance Plaza.
Main materials secondary road: Asphalt, stone curbes
SECOND JUNCTION -
THE DROP OFF ZONE
FIRST JUNCTION -
SECONDARY ROAD
THE OVERVIEW
Overviewing the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture from the first junction Ref. image. Filtering through the lushness of the garden approaching the entrance area
As you continue from the drop of zone you enter a completely new setting. The Monosurface, rising
from the entrance Plaza giving the visitors only glimpses of it’s features, and then sloping slowly as
you move along it’s outline giving you a series of perspectives. A parking lane will provide you with
multiple opportunities for stopping up and have a closer look.
From this part of the journey the visitors will also experience the context of the site with the adjacent
semi-arid areas and how they are linked together in a new setting. The vertical curvature of the road
will adjust to the topographie of the landscape and emphasise this context.
As you are about to close the circulation, you approach the parking areas consisting of both external
and internal parking spots. (Parking is described in the last chapter.)
This location brings you back to the origin of the drive through the Lush Garden and completes this
part of the voyage.
Viewpoint 3
VIE
WP
2T
OIN
IN
PO
T3
VI
IEW
EW
>
PO
<V
IN
T
4>
1
INT
WPO
<VIE
5>
N T
POI
EW
VI
Viewpoint 1 Viewpoint 4
Changing perspectives, viewpoint 2. Images by Snohetta Viewpoint 5

Masterplan
In SDII we have pointed at locations for MEP utilities, infrastruc-

ture and an optional solar park outside the ringroad. Location
for the sand fencing is given by the dominant wind direction
SAND FENCING - OPTIONAL from north and north-west, and one option is to incorporate this
SOLAR PARK
in the solar park.
The emplacment of these utilities should balance their visual

MEP UTILITIES impact on the surroundings with convenient accessibility.
The cooling towers requires to be placed within a certain dis-

tance from the energy plant, app. 150m, and on a higher level
to accomodate descent. The position of the energy plant is be-
MEP UTILITIES ing discussed. The apperance of the cooling towers from differ-
ent perspectives needs to be investigated further in DD.
Other utilities have less impact on the experience of the site.
A security fence is to be recessed from the roads to emphasise

COOLING TOWERS the open character of the cultural center. The exact position and
design is yet to be researched.
02.04.1 Parking
The program brief asked for a number of 250 covered staff parking spaces and 750 external parking
spaces for visitors. SDII has integrated app. 900 parking spaces. 500 of these are covered beneath
the Monosurface in two levels (350 on level 0, 150 on the mezzanine). The adjacent external parking
provides 300 spaces, and another 100 is located along the ringroad.
SDII point at an additional location for external parking. A parking for 15 buses is shown on this loca-
tion, and the number of possible parking spaces needs to be investigated according to this. Whether
the existing parking to the Saudi Aramco Exhibition Center is relocated to accomodate more space for
the Lush Garden will affect this discussion.
A shuttle bus system from external parking spaces is to be further developed.
COVERD PARKING
EXISTING PARKING Covered parking on level 0

EXTERNAL PARKING
BIS PARKING - ADDITIONAL

EXTERNAL PARKING
External parking Covered parking on mezzanine (level 2)

02.04.2 The Mosque
The competition brief contained a Mussalla to be located within the Culture Center. For SDII it has
been requested to look at alternative locations for a 450sqm Mosque.
The primary purpose of the mosque is to serve as a place of prayer. Nevertheless, mosques are
known around the world nowadays for their general importance to the Muslim community as well as
their demonstration of significant Islamic architecture. Most mosques have elaborate domes, mina-
rets, and prayer halls. OPTION NR. 1
Even though the Mosque will be a smaller, privately owned mosque, primarily for staff and visitors to
the Cultural Center, the content and qualities of the location should reflect the Mosques importance for
it’s users.
OPTION NR. 3
The Lush Garden represents these qualities, and two options appear to be suitable.
Option nr. 1:
Adjacent to the Entrance Plaza, in the Heart of the Lush Garden, the Mosque will have good access-
ability, both from the Cultural Center and the Saudi Aramco Exhibit. In this location the Mosque will
contribute to the framing of the plaza. The Mosque should be placed out of the sightlines towards the
main entrances of the Cultural Center and the Exhibit to keep the clearance.
OPTION NR. 2
Option nr. 2
A location south of the ring road provides more space and has less limitations regarding the adjacent
new, and existing features, which means the atmosphere could have a more detached character. It is
needed to discuss whether the distance to the Cultural Centre is acceptable.
This location is also pinpointed as an possible parking area, but this isn’t necesseraly a conflict.
Option nr. 3
Locating the Mosque “under the same roof” as the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
has the benefit of convenient accessibility. However, this location would mean full integration in com-
pletion date, and influence the paring and entrance situation
The concept for a Mosque will be investigated at a later stage, after SDII. However, the design must
take into consideration the impact on the adjacent areas given by the location.
02.05 Conclusions - recommendations
The monosurface design has developed in this phase, from an inaccessible and tranquil desertscape
scenery in concert with the pebbles, to a public space with a refined character. The monosurface has
become an activator for visitors.
The design tools provided by the redefined concept, will be materialized into a generous space for
experience and reflection, attracting people repeatedly. A wide usage of plants, suitable for the harsch
climate, will contribute to this richness.
The two oases have their different shapes and character. Their contents and qualities reflects the adja-
cent interior functions, and will be developed as the project progresses.
The Heart of the Lush Garden will be link between King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture,
and the Saudi Aramco Exhibit. It has kept the same clear consept. The drop-off zone incorporated in
the Entrance Plaza needs to be developed to provide a convenient and pleasant arrival.
The white pavillions next to the existing exhibit, and the access road serving them, will have great
impact on the impression of their adjacent area. This issue should be further discussed.
The covered parking is emphasised as an essential part of the voyage to the Cultural Center; the
framed view out in the Lush Garden from the parking, and then the filtering through the refreshing
atmosphere. With the reduction of the covered parking former located in the northern back of house,
and the added external parking, this consept lost some of it’s clarification. The covered parking has
many advantages (security, shading, cooling and close connection with the project etc.), but this issue
has more options to be investigated.
Three optional places for locating a mosque is presented. This issue will be discussed further in DD.
A second entrance has been added to the project in SDII. The accessability needs further researc. One
option is to provide the entrance with a drop-off zone. How to incorporate this, or other options, will
be investigated as the project progresses.
Chapter 02.03 AUDITORIUM
02.3.1 Introduction Facing South, Auditorium due West. Ill. by MIR
The King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture introduces a new type of venue to the Saudi
Arabian public. As a space dedicated to dialogue, transmitting knowledge and to communication, the
auditorium is intended to display a wide range of performances from seminars and lectures presented
by both state and business dignitaries to plays and musicals more directed toward a family audience.
02.3.2 Program - Brief

The brief for the auditorium, originally defined in the competition, has since been developed in a con-
sultant-advising-client based manner; driven and influenced by the teams collected cross-disciplinary
specialist competence, knowledge and experience. Key to this process, has been input provided by
Theatre Projects Consultants. Both their Main Theater Design Report (1) and Area Schedule Lyric The-
atre (2) have been fundamental to the development of the design of the theater complex scheme.
During the course of SD, the program brief has been an object of discussion, and has been tailored
toward an assumed use, but also toward an anticipated evolvement of the venues’ program over the
course of its lifespan. Our aim has been to accommodate for present foreseeable needs as well as pro-
viding for a flexibility in use as the audience and house management together grow accustomed to the
theater as a natural element of the cultural establishment of Saudi Arabia.
The process of the brief discussions is recorded in, among others, Minutes of meetings/ workshops
(Sno), Design note 080430gi SACC Acoustic requirements for the Auditorium (BH Acoustic), Note on
brief March 1 2008, Main Theater Design Report June 9 2008 and Area Schedule (Theatre Projects 1. Main Theatre Design Report has been included in this report chapter both as supplementary
text and also directly quoted e.g Acoustics paragraph.
Consultants). However, these disciplinary specific issues will be addressed in corresponding chapters
of this report. 2. Area Schedule Lyric Theatre, please refer figure next page.
Brief Outline T 100
Net Area
Auditorium and Stage
T 101 Auditorium 1000 Seat count held to 1000 seats
The main theater at the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture is conceived as a high qual- T 102
T 103
Orchestra Pit / Forestage
Stage
50 Only covered area scheduled
270
ity venue to house a wide variety of events for the performing arts. The theater should be designed to T 104 Wing Space 270
T 105 Understage - trap room 150
accommodate the following primary performance types and should, to a lesser extent, be suitable the T 106 Grid 540 subject to QS method of measurement
listed secondary types. T 107
T 108
Stage galleries
Chair and Rostra Store
Included in grossing factor
140 increased pit size,/ 3 wagon stores
T 109 Quick change Rooms 10 2x curtained areas can be within stage
Primary uses: T 110

T 111
Projection/ Viewing Room
Lighting Control Room
9
9
T 112 Sound Control Room 12
T 113 Broadcast Control Room 15 Includes Audio Description
- Musicals T 114 SM position in control suite 5
- Traditional dance T 115
T 116
SI Booth
SI Booth
8
8
- Classical ballet T 117 SI Booth 8
- Medium scale drama

T 118 SI Booth 8
T 119 Understage Piano Store 18
- Amplified music Total this section 2530
T 200 Technical Areas

Secondary uses: T 201
T 202
Dimmer Room
Audio Rack Room
15
12
T 203 Follow spot room 21
- Orchestral concerts T 204
T 205
Actors Assembly Areas
Stage Rigging Store
25
15
- Acoustic concerts T 206 Lighting Equipment Store 25
- Traditional acoustic music

T 207 Sound Equipment Store 25
T 208 Musical Instrument Store 25
- Conferences and lectures. T 209
T 210
Properties Store and Kitchen
Scenery Store
25
260
T 211 Concert Shell Store 80
To cater to this span of events, the auditorium will, in short, require T 212
T 213
Electricians Office
Electricians Workshop
10
15
T 214 Carpenters Office 10
T 215 Scenery / Props workshop 20
- Multi storey seating T 216 Visiting Company office -1 12
- Stage complete with fly tower T 217
T 218
Stage Manager/Senior Technicians office
Gun Store
12
8
- Trap room Total this section 615
- Orchestra pit T 300 Performers Spaces
- Performers facilities T 301 Solo Dressing Room - 1 15 at stage level with wheelchair access
- Technical - and storage spaces

T 302 Solo Dressing Room - 2 15 at stage level with wheelchair access
T 303 Two Person Dressing Room - 1 16 at stage level with wheelchair access
T 304 Two Person Dressing Room - 2 16 at stage level with wheelchair access
T 305 Two Person Dressing Room - 3 16
The latter correlating to a suited area for loading and unloading. The theater shall house a total seat- T 306 Two Person Dressing Room - 4 16
ing capacity in the range of 900 - 1.100 seats, including removable rows on the orchestra pit, remov- T 307
T 308
Four Person Dressing Room - 1
Four Person Dressing Room - 2
20
20
able seating for wheelchair locations and VIP areas. The wide range of performance types will require T 309 Four Person Dressing Room - 3 20 Add this room
an adjustable acoustic. Simultaneous interpretation for floor language plus four other languages. Indi-
T 310 Eight Person Dressing Room - 1 50
T 311 Eight Person Dressing Room - 2 50 Dressing rooms for 38
vidual SI booths will be required with compliance to SI codes of working. T 312 Conductor 25
T 313 Leader 20
T 314 Musicians Changing - 1 50
The nature of this auditorium is that of a visiting venue or a so called ‘Road house’ and not that of a T 315
T 316
Musicians Changing - 2
Musicians Lounge
50
50
Musicians Changing for 85
production theater. The supporting facilities are therefore set at a minimum and is not intended in any T 317 Chorus Changing Rooms - 1 60
way for a full production venue. However, the type of venue we are developing, necessitates a certain
T 318 Chorus Changing Rooms - 2 60 Changing rooms for 80
T 319 Green Room 60
degree of operational facilities such as performers dressing rooms and lounge areas, costume mainte- T 320
T 321
Maintenance Costume / Laundry
Wardrobe
30
40
nance, small workshops and storage. This is further defined in the Area Schedule developed by The- T 322 Wigs 10
atre Projects Consultants upon which the design of the theater complex has been based. T 323
T 324
Store room
Toilets & showers - male
10
20
T 325 Toilets & showers - female 30
Issues pertaining to this brief description, are narrated in more detail throughout this report.
Total this section 769
Total Lyric Theatre 3914
Auditorium Area Schedule, developed by Theatre Projects Consultants

02.3.3 Description
The auditorium forms an integral part of the Knowledge and Culture Center. Populating the western
corner of the center development, the footprint of the full theater complex extends over 3600m2 at
ground level.
The area schedule comprises three subdivisions; auditorium with stage, performers facilities and tech-
nical facilities. In general, we apply the terms Front of House areas and Back of House areas to the
theater complex, indicating public accessible spaces and privileged areas for management, performers
and crew.
The auditorium pebble is embedded in the plaza floor. It then extends upward, breaking through the
covering Monosurface to reach its full expanse several storeys above. At a slight tilt, it leans towards
and touches the tower pebble, forming the westernmost end component of the signature pebble for-
mation comprising the Cultural Center.
On the inside, the public entrance of the auditorium pebble faces the western entrance and cinema
lobby. Eastwards, the pebble dips toward and becomes tangent to the depressed levels of the muse-
um, where it meets daylight streaming in through the inclined glazed walls of the source. At this point,
one can touch the cheek of the pebble when moving past it, descending the ramp into the museum.
Back of House functions line the northwestern perimeter wall of the Cultural Center; allocating softer
operational functions such as performers areas towards the West and the harder functions; technical
and stage set storage areas interfacing the loading bay towards the East.
The external pebble encompasses the internal auditorium and flytower structure yielding intermediary
spaces used for public mingling and circulation.
Theater complex location within Knowledge and Culture Center
Auditorium pebble
Guiding Design Principle
The Auditorium is perceived to be an iconic space within the Knowledge and Cultural Center and also
within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. This is reflected by a high set, contemporary architectural ambi-
tion for this space with high-end finishes and state-of-the-art solutions, furnishings and equipment.
Offering events to be remembered, we hope to create an inviting and intimate auditorium that will
induce the public to recurring visits.
Originating from a geological morphology, the pebble arouses curiosity as to its concealed core. Will,
perhaps, the inside reveal an exquisite form of quartz, as a geode hiding a cluster of amethyst crys-
tals? Being a structure within a structure, with elegantly lined interfacing surfaces, the Fabergé egg
also lends valid analogies for the architectural and interior concept of the auditorium pebble.
The architectural intent of the lobby spaces is mainly allowing the audience to both transform and ad-
just to the internal space for drama; invoking such emotions as anticipation, suspense and joy. Once
inside the Auditorium, surprise and wonderment and a sense of being part of an exceptional space are
prevailant. The impressions collaboratively generated by shape, colors, materials and lighting effects
shall offer the visitor an inspiring sense of revelation.
Fabergé Easter Egg for Tsar Nikaolai
External and internal structural correlation Agate geode with amethyst

B B B
C B C C B
B
A
Level 00 Level 01 Level 02 Level 03
Audience circulation diagram
Entrance and Galleries
The audience share a generously sized, common entrance (A) directly off the plaza with its freely ex-
tending floor continuing in through. Two feature staircases (B) flank each side of the auditorium and
convey the audience further to the upper galleries (C). Elevators facilitate secondary means of vertical
communication, prioritizing physically challenged guests. The lifts are located so that they are slightly
hidden from view from the plaza, thus not to create entrance ambivalence or hesitant audience move-
ment.
Gallery lobbies at levels 01, 02 and 03 guide visitors further towards their designated auditorium en-
trance. Sound locks interfacing the galleries and the auditorium, lead the audience in to the seating
areas at the various levels.
The galleries also provide meeting spaces for the audience during intermissions. Horizontal slits in
the pebble wall create visual contact with plaza at level 01. At levels 02 and 03 the visitors will enjoy
views to the outdoors due southwest. Various refreshment facilities will be located at several levels,
serving the audience during breaks. Restrooms are required in the near vicinity of the auditorium,
3D rendering illustrating entrances to; auditorium, elevators and stair core
preferrably at all levels.
View at gallery level 02. Ill. by Snøhetta
A significant feature of the gallery spaces is the opulent and continuous lining of the entire inner
pebble wall. Dressed with a beautiful textile or leather, acoustic panels make up a faceted surface
conjuring the sense of being inside a space with strong analogies to the previously mentioned quartz
formation of the geode core. At the same time resembling the exquisite velvet lining of a Fabergé egg.
The encompassing wall instil in the audience a feeling of entering a world beyond; a space of enchant-
ment. The panelling facilitates an acoustically controlled space, absorbing background noise and al-
lowing comfortable conditions for conversation during intermissions.
Stair cores to each side of the auditorium and next to the flytower, constitute the main means of fire
Panels in a faceted pattern line inner pebble wall. Ill. by Snøhetta
escape. These lead down to plaza level and up to level c+95 with direct access to the outdoors at the
covering monosurface. The stairs will ordinarily be used by staff.
The Auditorium
Introduction - design development
The auditorium shall be a lyric format in a contemporary style. During SD the shape of the auditorium
has thus far progressed through two stages. Initially (March 2008) a horse shoe configuration, the
submitted layout (May 2008) is more elongated and rectilinear yielding a dignified, yet less intimate
space. Reflecting on the stronger formality of this space and on the distance to stage, the auditorium
consultant team has, in alignment, decided to further the auditorium design in DD aspiring again to-
ward a shorter and more rounded shape though keeping the 900-1.100 seat design target.
Nevertheless, this schematic design deliverance provides a complete auditorium scheme including a
cost. All drawings and description relate to the delivered scheme and are based on the issue date May
9th. The auditorium layout is a separate, on-going design development and we intend to improve the
auditorium with a new SDII drawing set by June 25, to be further developed in phase DD. All design
issues described in this report are developed in part independently and are therefore fully valid re-
gardless of final auditorium layout.
Section sketch showing proposed new scheme, to be developed (ill. TPC)
Submitted schematic design layout described in this report and in auditorium drawings based on issue May 9th 2008 Plan sketch showing proposed new scheme, to be developed (ill. TPC)
Description
The auditorium shape and seating layout is in general designed by optimizing sightlines to stage and
overall acoustic conditions of the space corresponding to the nature of its employment. The rectan-
gular base shape, propagates the acoustical energy produced on stage or in the orchestra pit. Every
surface in the auditorium yields an acoustic effect and is specifically detailed to further cultivate the
acoustics of the space. Tailoring sightlines from each and every seat in the auditorium ensure a visual
experience of a high quality. The distribution of seats throughout, further impact the sense of intimacy
and feeling of contact within the body of the audience. Furthermore, an auditorium with this sense of
spatial intimacy implies an acoustical surround quality that is an aspired parameter for most theaters.
In general, seating will be 900-950mm row spacing with an average width of 540mm measured center
of arm to center of arm.
flytower
technical bridges
second balcony
proscenium
lightlines
first balcony
sightlines
parterre
back of stage stage front of stage

stalls
orchestra pit / lift
Auditorium sightlines and lightlines, illustration Theatre Project Consultants

Rendering depicting faceted balcony fronts and lining of interior pebble wall at galleries. Material and color study. Ill. by Snøhetta
In this auditorium the seats are distributed at four levels: stalls, parterre, first and second balcony.
Stalls are located nearest to stage, parterre toward the back, first and second balconies above. Stalls
and parterre represent a capacity of 55% of the audience, 25% and 20% are accommodated for at
balconies 1 and 2 respectively. This will give flexibility in the perceived seating by allowing the variable
audience attendance to appear larger than actual through careful design and lighting. OECBMDPOZ
In order to lower the treshold for enjoying and using the auditorium, we have paid close attention to
cultural sensitivity, providing physical conditions conducive to the genders sharing space.
At present, genders do not share public space in Saudi Arabia. There are generally two solutions to
this; physical partitioning dividing male and female audience (or families and bachelors) and the more TUCBMDPOZ
liberal move by creating dividing aisles. Definition and physical separation is key. Although the bal-
conies could be used for the sake of segregation, every production will not fill the house entirely and
segregating aisles at stalls and parterre levels are still required. The two off centered aisles will not
represent any artistic impediment for the performers on stage. 4UBMMTQBSUFSSF
The rake of the stalls rises up, meeting the vertical break of parterre. At this location and at the balco-
nies, the seat levels are secured by balcony fronts.
The balcony fronts are a significant architectural feature of the auditorium interior. Their shape is driv-
en by design aspirations, sightlines and acoustics. We have launched the process of exploring design
typologies and trying their architectural expressions and behaviour in the auditorium. Present visual-
ization of the auditorium, depicts faceted balcony fronts echoing a quartz like configuration envisioned Auditorium seat distribution
in the interior concept.
Aisles
Balcony front typologies

The three lighting bridges cap the space and define the visual limit of the auditorium. Concealed by
a cladding that strongly interacts with the interior and simultaneously integrating carefully designed
house lighting.
The walls and fixed parts of the proscenium are clad with a high quality hardwood finish. The prosce-
nium will be covered by a specially designed signature house curtain.
Areas for VIP and VVIP shall not be segregated from the main audience by boxes or divisions. The
front row of first balcony shall be designated for these seats and shall be designed for increased com-
fort and excellent viewing and acoustic conditions. This location offers privacy and at the same time
some of the best seats in the house. Furthermore, this area may be conveniently supported by service
facilities at the corresponding, adjacent gallery. First circle is preferred to second circle in the case of
smaller events not entirely filling the house. It is assumed that the seats will be used by the general
public in the absence of VIP guests. Special requirements or specifications may be accomodated for in
a flexible manner e.g special seats or a mobile seat platform that may be fit in place when VIP visi-
tors are expected. Conversely the seats may be fixed, a design aim at 12-15 seats. Seats should be a
minimum 650mm in width with individual arm rests and a minimum row spacing of 1100mm.
The auditorium is equipped with control room, individual SI booths and a follow spot enclosement at
technical level.
Rendering of intreior from initial auditorium scheme, horse shoe shaped balconies. Material and color study. Ill. by Snøhetta Rendering of intreior from proposed new auditorium scheme. Material and color study. Ill. by Snøhetta
Orchestra Pit, Proscenium, Stage and Flytower
The proscenium zone is the most critical part of the theater design where audience, musicians and
technology meet. There will be 3 parts to this area to cope with the diversity of the performance
types; on-stage proscenium, architectural proscenium and forestage lifts.
plant room
flytower
The on-stage proscenium is part of the stage rigging system and will provide masking for a range of
performances from 12-16m wide and 6-8m high. It will be completely demountable as desired accord- technical bridges
ing to the show. second balcony
monosurface
first balcony (VIP area)
The adjustable architectural proscenium represents the architectural opening which frames and de-
fines the view to stage. It is flexible in that it is adjustable in width from 16-20m and 9-11m in height
masking a structural opening of 22m wide and 12m high. Thus allowing e.g. more focused views to a scenery passage
control room
smaller ensemble or a wider throat for a larger orchestra. interpreter booth
parterre
There will be 2 forestage lifts to enable 3 purposes; forming audience seating, orchestra pit and ex- stalls
stage door
tending the stage into the auditorium. When required, the lifts may be brought to stage level thus proscenium
extending the stage floor into the auditorium. This ties the audience closer to stage which is beneficial orchestra pit
and necessary when hosting e.g special lecturers or putting on a smaller lyric play. Subject to design, trap room
the lifts will have 4 preset positions; stage level, auditorium level, orchestra pit and seating wagon
storage level. Intermediate positions must be achievable.
Located next to proscenium, the orchestra pit bridges auditorium and stage. At its largest configura-
tion, it has a maximum area expanse of 108m2, conversely 80m2 at the minimum. It is located ap- Section through galleries, auditorium and stage with flytower
proximately 3m below stage level so as to not obstruct audience sightlines to stage. Adjacent to the
pit, seating wagon storage is tucked in under the last rows of stalls, conveniently parking and conceal-
ing seat rows when the stage is in an extended configuration.
Alternate orchestra pit configurations
First and second lift at orchestra pit level First lift at auditorium level First lift at stage level First and second lift at stage level
The stage currently drawn, is at 30m wide by 16m deep, however the stage depth will need an in-
crease of 2m due to the equipping of the flytower (to be provided for in auditorium scheme submitted
by June 25). Underneath there is a trap stage covering approximately 55% of the stage floor above,
yielding a vertical flexibility for stage sets.
Above stage the flytower extends 25m to the underside of technical grid. The grid shall be a fully
accessible walk-on grid with 2.2m minimum clear headroom. The flytower is used for flying scenery
down towards stage or up, concealed from view. It will be fully equipped to best serve the produc-
tions visiting the venue. The large stage door is located at the backstage wall, directly correlating to
the scenery passage and storage areas lying adjacent behind stage. An orchestra shell is employed
when there is a music performance on stage, reflecting the acoustics back to the auditorium. There is
a separate shell store directly off back stage.
Back of House Facilities
Surrounding auditorium and stage (A), are the operational facilities of the theater complex. They com-
prise of dressing rooms and lounge areas, technical facilities and storage.
A - auditorium/ stage
B - musicians lounge with surrounding dressing rooms
C - actors’ green room with surrounding dressing rooms
D - costume maintenance/ laundry, wardrobe and wigs
E - orchestra shell store
F - scenery store
G - main scenery passage
H - loading/ unloading
I - staff entrance
Performers dressing rooms, musicians’ lounge (B) and actors’ green room (C) are all allocated in the
back of house areas adjacent to auditorium and stage. Their location is based on their respective need
for stage proximity and expected need for change and frequenting a dressing room during a perfor-
mance. Artists dressing rooms are thus given the closest position to stage. Musicians are expected to
stay in the orchestra pit for the duration of a play, except during intermissions and have been allotted
space beyond the actors dressing rooms. These rooms are clustered around their respective lounge
area and are partly located across two levels. Skylights set in the monosurface, illuminate these core
spaces with natural and diffused light.
Costume maintenance, wardrobe and wigs (D) are located nearer to stage, adjacent to actors assem-
bly areas directly to the side of the wings.
The staff entrance (I) connects the dressing room areas to the plaza of the center, constitued by a se-
curity lock with waiting lounge for visitors.
To the back of stage are the main scenery passage (G), scenery storage (F), shell store (E), technical
facilities and loading/ unloading (H) set at the back of the northwestern perimeter wall. These areas
all have higher floor to ceiling requirements and are thus collectively located to the North of the the- Back of house facilities correlation, plan level 00.
ater footprint, ultimately connecting to the loading bay.
Being the main artery, the scenery passage (G) ties into all of these spaces. It requires space to ma-
neuver scenery cases at 4m width by 4m height by 12m length and a clear height at 9m above fin-
ished floor level.
The loading bay (H) includes for two truck parking spaces, designated auditorium use.
Scenery storage (F) is located with excellent connectivity both to scenery passage and stage door.
Shell store (E) location is dictated by the need to minimize distance to stage.
Smaller, theater technical related rooms such as offices, workshops and storage all populate the mez-
zanine above loading bay. The rooms overlook the open scenery storage and are reached by a wide
staircase and a lift with necessary capasity to haul e.g. music and lighting equipment. Similar to per-
formers lounge areas, this space shall also be fitted with skylights, transmitting natural, diffused light
to the areas below.
Introduction of a Third Oasis

Dependent on the future development of Tower and final location of areas for adminstration, a recon-
figurement of these areas may affect the back of house facilities of the theater complex. This may be
achieved by introducing a third oasis (due northwest of the perimeter wall next to auditorium support
facilities) and applying the intermediary space for administration purposes. This would entail a rede- Rendering of back of house facilities supporting auditorium
sign of auditorium back of house layout. Without having gone into detail, we see this as a potentially
interesting and viable solution, given the following:

- Area target is kept
- Proximity to stage is kept or improved
- Sufficient spatial footprint available, supporting a conglomeration of rooms (and less of a linear
configuration)

MEP
A complex set of services ensure comfortable air conditions, integrated and indirect house lighting
as well as guide lighting during a performance. The intricate and unitary auditorium interior requires
streamlined and seamless interaction between services and interior finishings.
Acoustics
The acoustic break surrounds the auditorium and generates the need to provide for sound locks at
all entrances. This is especially critical in lieu of the multi-functionality of the Knowledge and Culture
Center in order to prevent any break-in noise from the surroundings.
The following acoustic brief formulated by Theatre Projects Consultants.

“The wide range of performance types will require an adjustable acoustic. It should be possible to vary
the acoustical reverberation time of the room within a range of 0.8-1.0 and 1.4-1.6 seconds at mid-
frequency. Ideally, this should be achieved by introduction of absorbent materials. The use of coupled
volumes should be carefully considered as the closing off can involve considerable capital and mainte-
nance costs.
Based on the range of performance types listed for this theatre a background noise criteria of no less
than NC15 should be the design aim.
An orchestra pit will be required for certain performances like live musicals or non-taped dance. The
pit should be flexible to accommodate between 12-60 musicians in optimised conditions. A stage over-
hang could be considered provided that this does not exceed 2m of closed pit or 1/3 of the total pit
depth; whichever is the lesser.
Orchestral concerts are considered a secondary performance type but there will be need to optimise
the staging facilities to accommodate an orchestra of up to 80 musicians. This should be considered
in part by bringing the orchestra through the proscenium on the forestage lifts and into the audience
chamber giving better direct communication and intimacy. A demountable orchestra shell, of the
Wenger type, should be supplied with suitable off stage storage. Overhead reflective soffits shall be
suspended within the stage house when this shell is in place. It is recommended these are tippable to
a vertical position and flown within the stage house for storage.”
Figure depicting extent of acoustic break around auditorium
Phased Equipment and Finishing
Although less costly to provide all at once, the team has taken into consideration what are essential
provisions and what may be included for in a later phase. One strategy may be to make provisions for
solutions to be equipped at a later stage. This is mainly reflected in equipment specifications provided
by Theatre Projects Consultants and later fed into the cost plan.
Interior
Entering the auditorium pebble from the plaza should be a threshold into another world, - a world that
encloses around you. The mood and atmosphere should highlight the wonders of the imaginary world
of the theatre.
Light and sound are lowered and emphasize the feeling of being inside a volume.
The characteristic feature of the auditorium pebble is the object within the object, like a Fabergé egg
or a Chinese box. In this pebble the outer and inner skin are one object and the auditorium is the
other. They are both important, but the auditorium is still the main object.
The Inner Skin
This pebble has an inner skin, or lining, of triangular shapes that is visually dramatic and at the same
time has an acoustic function that will give the requested reverberation time for a foyer and break out
zone. (This skin is referred to as the inner wall of the pebble structure in chapter 02.03.)
So far we have discussed the inner skin to be shades of red. The materiality should have a sophisti- Interior conceptual sketch - Inner skin of pebble encompassing second object
cated, yet challenging look that will make the visitors anticipate the auditorium.
The construction of the triangular shapes should work both as an acoustic reflector and absorbent by
means of perforation or surface. This and the various directions of the triangular planes will give rich-
ness to the experience of this skin, - a sense of drama.
The surface material should be further developed, but different coatings or the quality of various tex-
tiles could be directions to study. One way to go is working with coatings of different sheen. Another is
studying the effect of textile surfaces and how they perform when illuminated.
The Second Object - the Auditorium
The auditorium is the object the skin and lining is encircling. Since hardwood is a very appropriate
material in auditoriums acoustically, we have so far worked with the outer wall and galleries as wood-
en surfaces.
The shine and surface of the outer shell of the auditorium should be of high sophistication and slender
detailing, like a precious box. The galleries could be seen as drawers pulled out of the box. The atmo-
sphere of walking around on your way to a show should heighten the feeling of circling inside a gigan-
tic volume.
The inside of the Auditorium is still under development but will be strongly linked to the atmosphere in
the foyer. The colour red will be a predominant feature and possibly wood as the contrasting material.
However, we want to leave an opening for changing the second material in the Auditorium during DD.
The choice of material will have a great impact on the atmosphere.
Interior of New Royal Theatre in Copenhagen DK, Lundgaard & Tranberg Architects 2008
Secondary Walls and Cores
These are all within the auditorium structure not exposed in the public areas.
The interior of all the public functions should have a degree of sophistication related to the overall at-
mosphere in the Auditorium pebble.
Back Of House Functions

So far in the project these areas are not studied in detail. The finishing will be of more informal char-
acter and emphasizing the functions rather than design.
Finishes
Supporting Public Area Auditorium/ Foyer

Floor: High quality surfaces, e.g. oiled hardwood, wool carpets in all public areas
Walls: Oiled hardwood panels / painted plasterboards / textile clad panels
Ceiling: Suspended oiled hardwood ribs / suspended acoustic panels
Doors: Oiled hardwood
Main Auditoium and Balconies

Floor: Oiled hardwood
Walls and balcony fronts: Oiled hardwood
Ceiling: Suspended oiled hardwood ceiling, painted plasterboards
Seating: Hardwood construction, high quality upholstered textile
Back Of House Functions Auditorium

Floor: Linoleum
Walls: Painted plasterboard
Ceiling: Suspended seamless acoustic plasterboard ceiling
Doors: laminate
Interior of Theatre Agora, Lelystad NL, UNStudio 2007 Material palette study Auditorium interior visualization by MIR
02.3.4 Outstanding Issues
02.3.4.1 Acoustics
During the course of SD, there has been some discussion as to design target relating to the back-
ground noise criteria of the auditorium. The main reason being to disclose whether a low criterion will
generate any significant cost implication or not. In response to raised Item no. 46 in RFI list to client
with reference to Item no. 23 of Value Engineering list, final decision pending Cost study of NC15 vs.
NC20 by the Contractor.
The issue of background noise is further illuminated in Chapter 3.10 Acoustic Engineering by Buro
Happold Acoustic. Also please refer to BH Design Note no. DN001 issued June 11th titled “Reviewing
the implications of changing from NC15 to NC20”.
The Schematic Design Cost Plan identify items aimed at reducing background noise generated through
Mechanical and Electrical services, Cost Plan Auditorium:
- Mechanical Services - Auditorium/Air Treatment Installations/Air Treatment, items 4-5.

- Electrical - Auditorium/Electrical Installations/Electrical
These items are associated with the cost implications of designing to a target at NC15.
02.3.5 Conclusions and Recommendations

02.3.5.1 Acoustics
Based on the preceding Outstanding Issue item and under advisement of information made available
through both cross disciplinary reports and the conducted Cost Study of a background noise criteria
NC15 vs NC20, we have taken the issue of noise criteria design target for the auditorium under careful
consideration.
We have reviewed the cost implications and considered potential savings in changing from a NC15
target in terms of simplified mechanical services based on slight reduction in AHU acoustic treatment
and acoustic lining to supply air ductwork. The cost relating to this will only be in the region of USD
23,000. In addition there may be some extra savings associated with reducing areas for plant rooms
and possibly also for structural load, although this has been designed to carry a load and therefore, it
would make no difference to the cost. Moreover on acoustic treatment, there may be some cost dif-
ference depending on materials required to achieve each rating, however these are dependent on
detailed design. Potential savings relating to electrical services is a matter of selecting the right equip-
ment and the cost difference would be negligible. (Source DLSS Bahrain office).
Our recommendation is that cost savings are insignificant in relation to the functional benefits in
maintaining NC15 as target and we therefore recommend continuing design towards NC15.
Auditorium interior visualization by MIR
Chapter 02.4 GREAT HALL AND CINEMA
02.4.1.1 Introduction Great Hall

“The Great Hall is an elegant architectural masterpiece; a large multi-purpose gallery with
spectacular artistic interior decoration and access to Oasis outside”
From Aramcos description of the Great Hall 26th of March 2008
The Great Hall is a freestanding pebble in the conglomerate of pebbles known as King Abdulaziz Cen-
ter for Knowledge and Culture. The Great Hall is not the largest, nor the tallest of the pebbles, but it
contains very important functions. The Great Hall will be hosting major travelling exhibitions and it will
be the venue of choice for large, high-level receptions, banquets and conferences.
The great hall entrance is next to the main entrance and is one of the first elements to greet you
when entering King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture.
The Great Hall is expected to draw approximately 500,000 visitors per year, and will be one of the
most attractive and dynamic components of the cultural centre. With its intriguing architecture, and
exciting program, the Great Hall will be a destination of choice and a source of pride for the nation
and Aramco. The Great Hall is not a conventional convention center nor is it suitable for major perf-
mances or commercial exhibits.
The Great Hall lives in a symbiosis with its Oasis. The Oasis complements the Great Hall by of-
fering additional space for events taking place in the Great Hall. While the Great Hall has a sinister
and controlled atmosphere, the oasis is excessive and lush.
The Great Hall exists to support King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture achieve its
mission and goals by being a gateway to world cultures and to promote cross-cultural understanding Table 02.4.1.1b The great hall in the presentation model
through major international exhibits; inspiring a passion for knowledge, curiosity and creativity. The
exhibits will also aim to foster multicultural understanding by underlining the unity of humankind, and
a better understanding of our planet.
Table 02.4.1.1c Great Hall siteplan
Table 02.4.1.1a Section through the Great Hall and plaza

02.4.2.1 Program Brief The Great Hall Table 02.4.2.1a

The Great Hall is one large open floor of 1500m² with a small mezzanine of about 100m2. Great hall back of house functions
The width ranges from 30 to 38m and the interior ceiling height varies between 4 and 13m.
Name m2 Comments
The operating hours are assumed to 10 AM to 10:30 PM, and expected Visitor Count to 500,000 annu-
ally level 00
security booth 10 shared with museum
secure transit storage 125 shared with museum
The main function of the Great Hall is to house international blockbuster traveling exhibits. These ex- photo documentation
hibitions will come and stay for 3 to 6 months at a time and will be ticketed events. registration 40 shared with museum
The Great Hall will also be used for large corporate/non-corporate receptions and seated isolation fumigation 19 shared with museum
crating/uncrating 100 shared with museum
banquet dinners, large conferences, graduation ceremonies, retirement parties and other social ven- collections workroom 40 shared with museum
ues. packing supplies 14 shared with museum
Travelling exhibitions come in a variety of sizes and with different requirements. To accommodate a carpentry workshop 136 shared with museum
wide range of exhibits the room is without any permanent obstructions and the room can be divided shipping receiving area shared with museum and auditorium
staff toilets / maintenance
using movable partitions. With a high-level ventilation system the environment can be controlled with- great hall storage 268 chairs, tables, partitions
in a band of +/- 2 degrees at a relative humidity of 50%. Direct sunlight is diffused and can be shut great hall reheat 110
out if necessary. garbage 37 cooled

level 01
The adjacent oasis acts as an extension to the great hall during events. When there are such exhibi- crate storage 100 shared with museum
tions inside (and if the season and time of day permits), the garden can host exhibit-related activities, plant room 370
as performances, workshops or other programs initiated by King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and
Culture. During a banquet or conference, the oasis also provides a break-out space (refreshments, en-
tertainment, lobby space). For more elaborate information about the Great Hall oasis, please see the
landscape section 02.2.2. LOADING DOCK
MUSEUM, GREAT HALL
& AUDITORIUM & LIBRARY
PLANT ROOM/
The program dictates numerous back of house functions. Several of these functions are shared with
STORAGE
LOADING DOCK+
SERVICE ENTRANCE
T2 age
GREAT HALL
St
05
the museum (see table 02.4.2-1). These rooms are located directly behind the great hall on two
88m2
T2 ENE S
F.F. -1.00
MUSEUM
SC OP KSH
15 RY
Collection Storage
PR OR 2
Plantroom Museum
floors. All doors and corridors between these rooms are large enough to accommodate maximum
W m
SECURE 293m2 General Artefacts
20
507m2
/
TRANSIT
STORAGE
OP STORe,25m2
125m2
sized crates. Some storage, like container storage, could be off-site.
LIGHTING
EQUIPMENT
T206
Security
Booth COLLECTIONS
10m2 PHOTO/
Garbage/Waste 37m2
cooled?
"CLEAN WORK
DOC./ ROOM"
REG. ROOM 40m2 PACKING
40m2
SUPPLIES
14m2
The Great Hall accommodates seated dinners for 1,000 people, with speech giving capabilities for
ISOLATION/
MUSICAL
INSTRUMENT
STORE,25m2
T208
FUMIGATION
19m2
CRATING/UNCRATING
2000 people during events. For these events there is a storage area for chairs and tables. The back of
100m2
F.F. 4.50
house area also accommodates catering services (the food will be prepared elsewhere), climate con-
EQUIPM.
MOVING
20m2
STORAGE
SHIPPING/RECEIVING AREA
F.F. +0.00
Frightelevator
Museum
trolled delivery, holding area and loading dock.

&Greathall
4x6m F.F. 4.50
Frightelevator
Museum
Audio visual components are also available. The electrical infrastructure for wireless simultaneous
&Greathall
4x6m
CORRIDOR GREAT HALL

CARPENTRY
WORKSHOP
19,5 m2
maintenance
STAFF toilet/
CRATE STORAGE
translation services, video and conference will be incorporated, but the hardware will be brought in
136 m2
100 m2
GREAT HALL
REHEAT
when needed. The acoustics allows for all sorts of amplified music or speech capabilities.
110 m2
GH PLANT ROOM
GREAT HALL
370 m2
STORAGE
Exhibitions require trained, professional guards in sufficient number to protect objects adequately VOID to 268 m2
ELEVATOR LOBBY F.F
Gallery 2 88
.00
throughout the time that the exhibition is on site; during unpacking, installation, deinstallation, and V
G OID
M
EZ
ZA
NI
re-packing, as well as during the actual showing of the exhibition to provide crowd control.
AL NE
V LE
G OID RY
AL
LE 2
RY
2
plan 00 plan 01
Table 02.4.2.1b Great Hall back of house functions.

GR
EA
TH
AL F.F
L 84
.00
Garbage/
Waste 37m y
cooled?
COLLECTIONS
"CLEAN WORK MOVING
ROOM" EQUIPM.
40m2 F.F.+84.00
STORAGE
PACKING 20m ²
SUPPLIES
14m2
CRATING/UNCRATING
100m ²
GREAT HALL
REHEAT
110M ²
ISOLATION/
FUMIGATION
F.F.+84.00
recieving CORRIDOR
52m2 GREAT HALL
CARPENTRY
WORKSHOP
136m ²
SHIPPING/RECEIVING AREA
STAFF/
Frightelevator MAINT.
Museum
&Greathall GREAT HALL VESTIBULE
4x6m STORAGE
268m ²
VOID to GREAT HALL

ELEVATOR LOBBY
Gallery 2 C+84.00
OASIS;
VOID SOCIAL FESTIVALS /
GALLERY 2 AMFI
1460 M2
VIP
181 m2
02.4.3.1 Description The Great Hall F.F.+84.00

MAIN ENTRANCE

C+84.00
Intentions Table 02.4.3.1b Great Hall plan with entrances/exits RETAIL

320m2
The Great Hall is as its name reveals - GREAT. That implies that it is a room out of the ordinary, that
it is exclusive, stunning and an appropriate setting for celebrations and exceptional experiences. The
Great Hall should not resemble something familiar or domestic, but live up to the expectations of a
very distinctive and beautiful space. The spacious qualities of the room is the main attraction and
a foundation for the interior grandeur. When there is an exhibition present the room acts as a quiet
backdrop, without compromising the experience of the space. When there are social events the room
becomes a solemn frame and a more prominent part of the occasion.
Architectural aspirations
When inside the Great Hall one should experience the feeling of being inside this distinct pebble. The
round corners and double curved surfaces give the room a special atmosphere and a sense of quality,
timelessness and harmony. There is no defined border between wall and ceiling. Mechanical and struc-
tural elements will be “hidden” behind and between the panels that make up the wall/ceiling. The ceil-
ing height, that varies between 13 and 4 meters, underlines the dynamic shape and gives the space a Table 02.4.3.1b section through the Great Hall and the oasis
dramatic and unpredictable atmosphere. The Great Hall consists of one large room and a small mez-
zanine. The openness of the room helps to emphasize the spacious qualities and allows for a great
flexibility in use.
The Oasis adjacent to the Great Hall has the same footprint as the great hall, but while the great hall
closes in to provide shelter from the elements, the oasis opens up to display the beauty of the Arabic
sky. The experience of the great hall is further accentuated with a visit to the Oasis. The hall and the
garden works in a symbiosis and enhances each others qualities.
The Great Hall shall be able to withstand time with dignity. The materials used should be durable and
keep their appearances for a long time. The details should be well thought of and of good craftsman-
ship, to keep the overall impression of quality over time.
INSPIRATIONAL PICTURES
Entrances Mezzanine
The exterior of the Great Hall is the same as the other pebbles and a prominent part of the cultural The mezzanine is a small balcony (100m2) located between the
centre composition. The Great Hall pebble has one major opening (the main entrance), this is only outer and the inner shell. The mezzanine offers an overview
visible from inside the plaza area. This main entrance to the Great Hall should have a visual expres- over the great hall. It is a place to experience the spectacular
sion that makes it obvious to the visitors looking to enter. By setting the doors off to the side of the shape of the great hall alternatively to the floor. The mezza-
entrance, a piece of the great hall wall is the main focal point. This wall will have unique attributes, nine will not be used for exhibition space. The mezzanine can
maybe it is semitransparent- giving a hint of the life inside the great hall or maybe it is decorated by be used for VIP events, a band can be located here during a
a Saudi artist? This also allows the entrance to have two double doors. The vestibule that occurs be- banquet or media can use the space for broadcasting. The mez-
tween the doors will act as a transit zone between the experience of the plaza and the great hall. Due zanine is accessed by stairs from the great hall or from the back
to the strict temperature and humidity requirements in the Great Hall, the entrance needs to consist of house (elevator accessible)
of a double door system. During an exhibition it is assumed that people will enter and exit in smaller The mezzanine walls and ceiling are light in color and with a
groups. When there is a banquet or a reception, the temperature requirements are not so strict and smooth surface (no panels).
the doors could be left open to welcome a larger number of people entering or exiting at the same
time. Dining/Conference
The Great Hall accommodates up to a 1000 people for a sit-
The windows towards the oasis is the main link between the inside and the outside, but the inside down dinner. Depending on the seating plan the room can also
surface is glass and the outside facade is mesh (similar to the rest of the facade, only a more open function well for a dinner with 100- 200 persons. The food will
mesh). The mesh creates shadows and keeps the exterior unified. From a distance the windows will be prepared elsewhere and catered to the Great Hall which will
be invisible during the day but noticable at night. Doors in the glass wall can be opened when hosting have reheat and cooling facilities in the back. During dinners
events that don’t have strict temperature requirements. The mesh will have gaps so that people can and banquets the doors to the outside oasis can be opened and
move freely between the inside and the outside. (See illustration) There will be blinds between the people can move freely between inside and outside. For a con-
glass and the facade so that all lights could be shut out if necessary to protect installations. ference or speech, the Great Hall can seat up to 1500 people.
During an exhibition with high temperature requirements, access to the oasis will be through a vesti-
bule in the back of the hall. This vestibule is concealed underneath the landscape and is there to pro- Lighting
vide a functional way of letting people in and out when there is a 25 degree difference in temperature.
It is also possible to enter the oasis from the plaza. The oasis has a separate access independent of
the Great Hall so it can be used for private or public arrangements without having to pass through the
Great Hall. The windows (or the vestibule) and the oasis/plaza entrances together make it possible for
crowds to move in a circulation on busy days.
The last entrance is the back of house entrance. This is mainly a service entrance and the doors would
close and “disappear” when an exhibition is open to the public.
Table 02.4.3.1d Great Hall with a 1000 people

seated for dinner
Table 02.4.3.1c entrance to garden sketch/ inspiration

The Great Hall should have a lighting system that works for both banquets, receptions and exhibitions. Likewise the two layer construction can provide for integrated
Most traveling exhibitions come with their own lighting systems and the ceiling will be very flexible so doors or openings within the panel structure that can open onto
as to hang trusses with light fixtures up at any given place. The natural light from the garden can be the oasis.
totally shut off if necessary.
There should be provided a secondary system of lighting mounted between the layers of the inner There will be a continuous floor material throughout the entire
skin. When the inner skin panels are illuminated from behind you get a backlit skin that reveals rich- hall. This has so far been discussed as natural stone or terrazzo.
ness in pattern and possibly ornamentation. The material surface is subdued and the pattern and We might have to study other materials as the concept of the
ornamentation is the adornment of the Great Hall. walls or inner skin develops during Design Devolpment.
Additional lighting is provided with lighting fixtures that can be mounted in the technical joints be- The floor should provide for recessed technical boxes with elec-
tween the panels or they are simply recessed in them. trical outlets. These may or may not be part of some decorative
feature in the floor.
Interior description with illustrations and references
The Great Hall is constructed as a column free space and will have an outer skin and an inner skin, All supporting technical equipment is located within the struc-
expressing the pebble shape. The inner skin will hide the structural, technical and acoustical facilities. ture of the outer and inner shell thus is not visible as volumes in
This pebbles’ foremost characteristic is its multipurpose program which requires that the space has to the main space.
function as a subdued backdrop and then with simple means be converted into a hall for great occa-
sions and receptions on a grand scale. This versatility is inspiring us to work with change and transfor- Due to the curved walls of the great hall, posters and other ma-
mation within the same concept. terials are better suited for hanging on wheeled partitions.
The material finishes have previously in SD I been described as wooden walls and ceiling with stone or
terrazzo floor. However, there is an inherent expectation for this component to be made of materials Table 02.4.3.1f material study, wood and metal.
that can perform on many levels. Additionally, the material should provide for a continuous shape that
expresses the form as one piece. The use as event and exhibition hall calls for a background that is
neutral and can provide for exhibition mounting systems and for lighting. A rather technical room, that
is! The banquet hall, however, calls for grandness, ornamentation and elegance. The ornamentation
could be as a modern take on a more traditional Arabic pattern. It could also emerge from technical
requirements rather than a deliberate intention to decorate.
Wood might still be an answer, but the uniqueness of the Great Hall may better be expressed in a ma-
terial and atmosphere more distinct and exeptional. Lately we have been discussing the possibility to
work with metal as the main material used in a double layer construction. Metal opens up for variet-
ies of treatments. We can print, etch, perforate, emboss, cut, fold or bend. The first layer of the con-
struction should take care of all technical devises, while the visible inner skin layer may be construct-
ed of panels. These panels will have the means to emphasize the shape of the inner skin. A panel
construction with joints gives room for suspension and mounting within the same surface at the same
time expressing character to the shape of the space. The joints will also work as the seam connecting
the wall elements. The acoustic requirements need perforation of the inner skin.
This can be achieved by perforation of the panels.
Table 02.4.3.1e Perforated metal panels for inspiration
FINISHES
02.4.5.1 Conclusions – recommenda-
MAIN HALL AND MEZZANINE
Floor: Natural stone / terrazzo with pattern inlays, including electrical floor boxes as part of the pat- tions - The Great Hall
tern
Mezzanine: hardwood / painted We will continue to explore the interior finishings of the Great
Wall / inner skin: Oiled hardwood panels with technical joints / double layered structure with perfo- Hall and the possibilities that live in the metal option. We will
rated metal panels on acoustic background, lighting integrated research how the metall will endure Saudi conditions and how
Ceiling: Same as wall / inner skin the materials can be sculpted and prosesseed. We will keep
Doors: Oiled hardwood / perforated metal panels within wall structure wood as an option.
Table 02.4.3.1g inspirational picture

02.4.1.2 Introduction Cinema Table 02.4.1.2.a

The cinema will be the first public cinema in the country of Saudi Arabia. This is a major historic
event. The cinema will be an arena of shared experiences and a source of learning and knowledge
distribution. The cinema plays an important role in King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
because it is a great way to share culture, it is easily available for people of all ages and genders, it is
not very costly to run and it adapts easily to change.
In this cinema, Saudi people will be able to show their work and children and families equally can
come together for an evening of quality entertainment.
The cinema will also host lectures, conferences and will be suitable for small scale amplified music.
The cinema is not a good place for acoustic (non-amplified) speech or music or live performances like
theatre and dance.
The cinema is located by the west entrance. It is next to the auditorium and in a good position off the
main plaza (see table 02.4.1.2.a).
The cinema seats about 320 people and may have as many as five shows a day. The cinema will have
state of the art equipment and architecture that converges with function and acoustics.
02.4.2.2 Program Brief cinema

The Cinema is 440m² net, with generous seating for 320 people in a one level room with two Table 02.4.2.2.a
aisles.
The width is 20m, the length 25m and the interior ceiling height varies between 5 and 8 m.
The operating hours are assumed to be 10 AM to 10:30 PM. Cinema net areas

Name m2 Comments
The main function of the Cinema is to show movies. The cinemas main attractions will be movies for
children, educational movies, art films and movies made by Saudi people (for instance in an Annual level 00
Saudi Amateur Film Festival). The cinema will also be used for small conferences, ceremonies, speech- Cinema 440 incl. translator boxes and projection room
Foyer 390 incl. consession stand
es and small amplified music recitals VIP area 160
Toilets 90 Shared with auditorium
The Foyer outside the cinema is the place to wait before the show starts or to meet again after the
level 01
show. In the foyer there will be a concession stand that sells soft drinks and popcorn and maybe also Plant room 520 Shared with plaza
a designated movie ticketing booth.
The program requires no back of house functions. If a wardrobe is needed for a speaker, the audito-
rium facilities might be used. The plant room for the cinema is located on top of the cinema.
The cinema will be a concrete box, structurally separated from the plaza walls for acoustical reasons.
There are two translating booths located in the back of the cinema for simultaneously translating.
02.4.3.2 Description Cinema Lighting
The cinema will have a soft and comfortable approach to light-
ing. When the movies are showing almost no light will be visi-
There has been an alteration between the drawings of May 9th and the current layout of the cinema
ble. A modern chandelier (or an architectural custom made light
area. The placement in the overall plan is still the same but due to design qualities, the elements have
fixture) is a good option for a functional decorative element that
shifted internally. The foyer is larger and more open, the toilets are more easily accessible from the
enhances the cinema and have both light-technical and acousti-
plaza and the VIP area should have the possibility of a private entrance both from outside and the in-
cal advantages. There will be a rack in the ceiling that can be
side. There is still some work to be done to maximize the efficiency of these spaces.
mechanically lowered to adjust or mount lighting equipment.
Intentions Interior description

The cinema is first and foremost a state of the art movie theatre. It is the first cinema in Saudi Arabia The interior will be soft with fabric on the walls and carpet on
and it should have a distinct style and set a good example for future movie theatres in Saudi Arabia. the floor to create an acoustically silent room in order to provide
the best possible movie experience.
Architectural aspirations
It will be a nice, good quality, ingenious space that looks good in all its settings. The quality of the CINEMA
materials (in the seats, carpet and doors) and the nature of the wall finishing, makes this space Floor: High quality carpet
unique and interesting. The seats are to be generous and comfortable. Walls: Specially designed acoustic panels (hardwood or painted)
Ceiling: Specially designed acoustic panels (hardwood or paint-
Entrances ed) / painted perforated plasterboard
There are two entrances to the cinema located on the top wall from the foyer. These entrances are Doors: Same material as walls
double doors to provide a good sound and temperature controlled environment. Seating: Upholstered high quality textile
Foyer CINEMA FOYER

The foyer is the transit zone between the plaza and the cinema. There will be no doors between the Floor: off plaza quality
plaza and the foyer. It is a double height space designed in the spirit of the cinema, but without the Walls: off plaza quality
fabric on the walls and the carpeted floors. Ceiling: Acoustic panels
Technical Table 02.4.3.2 Plan over cinema area

The surround speakers will be built about 200mm from the wall, in addition there are larger bass
speakers that can be placed underneath the screen. Reverberation time is set to 08 – 1 sec., which
implies a very silent and “noise dead” room. The screen will be framed on the back wall, and cannot
be moved, only hidden with curtains. The cinema will most probably be fully digital if it is to be state
of the art when it opens in 2011. The cinema is designed with a projector room in case older equip-
ment will be used.
Tr
an
VIP area sla
to
r
St
age
The VIP area is several lounges made for VIP guests visiting the centre. This space is designed for a VIP Lounge
Pr
high level of security and privacy. There are three possible exits from the VIP area, one is through a
oj
ec
to
r
separate door in the public entrance, one is to the cinema Foyer and the last one is through the en- Tr
an
sla Bar /
ergy plant and into the back of house area.
to
r
Lounge
Foyer
Toilettes Cinema & Auditorium

02.4.4.2 Outstanding issues
02.4.4.2 Consideration has been given for a multi purpose theatre, instead of only a cinema.
This solution requires far more space than the cinema currently holds. It is also a very costly solution
to build with all the extra mechanical fixtures. Buildings that are made to have many different func-
tions tend to be less used because it is time consuming, challenging and expensive to switch between
the different uses. It also requires very specialized and skilled staff to run it. King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge and Culture has a large auditorium, a great hall, a museum and a library. Combined, these
spaces allow for a very wide variety of performances without compromising the quality of each space.
For the cinema, running costs are low and the occupancy can be high. Mentioning again that this is
the first cinema in Saudi Arabia, so it should be a very good one indeed.

02.4.5.2 Conclusions – recommendations- Cinema
Continue to work with a purpose built cinema.
Keeping in mind the historical significance this room will have.
Chapter 02.05 LIBRARY
02.5.1 Introduction
Our insight and knowledge of the world we live in, is the basis of how we understand the development
of human existence. A common knowledge among all people gives a bases for communication thus
transcending humanism. The future communication between the worlds population seems more and
more important. The expansion of knowledge allows the expansion of culture.
A library can be seen as the symbol of the knowledge and represents the acknowledgment of its own
culture. The library in the new King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture of Saudi Arabia will
represent the future knowledge of all the people living in the country. It can be expressed as the
enlightenment of the people that are searching for answers and all people that are curious to learn
more. The Library will be the cornerstone of knowledge, insight, and lifelong learning. It should inspire
people to find the desire for learning. This gives a great responsibility for the planners of this library.
The library should be of such an interest that it is a place where people want to meet, where they
want to communicate, and where they want to come back to. It is therefore important that both the
program and the space works together so that this goal can be achieved. The library should be innova-
tive and as flexible as possible to meet the future challenges of technology. It should represent progress on
past models and typologies. Thus, this library will provide the foundation for adapting and transcending
forward into this century through user-focused spaces, unconventional yet evolving programs, and
moreover will ultimately support diversity that is crucial for the global community.
The library team in Saudi Aramco has given a clear directive of what the future library should be.
This is an extract from the missions and visions of the project given by the Saudi Aramco planning
team:
“The Library will nurture a love of reading and provide user-focused, high-quality programs and ser-
vices to support a diverse community. Consistent with the mission of the Cultural Center, the Library
helps members of the community become information-competent, critical thinkers, and lifelong learn-
ers.
The Four Passions
To make a tangible and positive impact on human development by inspiring a passion for knowledge,
creativity, volunteerism and cross-cultural engagement, for the future of the Kingdom and the planet.
Human Development: Maximize the potential of the Kingdom’s people
Knowledge: Create a supportive social and intellectual environment that encourages inquisitive minds,
and provide access to information and life-long learning resources to satisfy that curiosity
Creativity: Spark innovative thinking and an ability to develop creative solutions; nurture artistic tal-
ents and expression; and cultivate a profound appreciation for art and the humanities
Volunteerism: Instill a spirit of commitment and service to local communities and the people who live
there, on both an individual and an institutional level
Cross-Cultural Engagement: Build bridges of greater understanding among different cultures and
societies and foster an appreciation of the value of diversity, through individual and institutional col-
laboration and dialogue”
text
02.5.2 Program - scope
The library
Following text is given by the client in their presentation of the project:
“The Library and Archive will be a welcoming and vibrant community center that fosters individual and
collaborative learning and the open exchange of ideas. A highly-competent staff and a wealth of docu-
ments, artifacts, print and digital resources will equip users to meet the complex information challeng-
es of the future while building on the lessons of the past.
Identify, acquire, organize, preserve, and provide access to pertinent recorded knowledge to support
teaching, research, and creative activities.
Recruit, employ, and retain, quality staff committed to delivering excellent services in response to the
rapidly changing needs of the diverse user community.
Apply state-of-the-art technology to deliver exceptional information retrieval experiences to local and
global users.
Provide archival assets to illustrate the emergence of the Kingdom, quest for oil, and the emergence
of Saudi Aramco as a defining power in energy technology.”
“The Cultural Center targets the Kingdom’s community at large, with special focus on the following
categories:
The young generation: males and females aged 2 to 21 years

Educators, intellectuals and thought leaders throughout the Kingdom
International visitors and tourists
The global cultural and artistic community”
Library
with capacity for 300,000 volumes and numerous reading nooks
E-library
with computer workstations providing access to the digital collection
Archive
for preserving and viewing valuable artifacts and documents relating to both the Kingdom and Saudi
Aramco
Study areas for independent learning or quiet lessons
Soundproof booths to view films and listen to recordings
Research area outfitted with printers and photocopiers
Cafe serving light refreshments
Scope for the library May 9th
*Media and teens area:
Net areas for the library
-DVDs, CDs, audiobooks
Level 01_MEDIA AND TEENS LEVEL -Media viewing areas (enclosed) for individuals and
Media and teens area*: 1398 m2 small groups (perhaps 6-8 persons)
Cores: 91.3 m2 -Multipurpose meeting room
Void: 226 m2 -Library instruction area (Cultural Center staff training, RESEARCH
Stairs: 14 m2 teaching library visitors how to use the Internet, how to
Total area: 1729.3 m2 use the catalog, etc., ) for 15-20 persons LIBRARY COLLECTION
-Area for teen progams
ENTRANCE
Level 02_ENTRANCE LEVEL -Some parts of the book collection - perhaps young
Common area**: 2226.2 m2 adult materials, paperbacks and oversize books (or we MEDIA AND TEENS
Cores: 91.3 m2 might think about spreading out the collection even
Void: 235 m2 more--and having room for more reading areas and
Stairs: 14 m2 computer workstations on levels 4-5)
Total area: 2566.5 m2 -Plenty of movable, comfortable seating (e.g. small so-
fas in addition to chairs/tables)
Level 03_LIBRARY COLLECTION LEVEL
Common area/ books***: 2186.3 m2 ** level 2 will have a the main reception/information
Cores: 91.3 m2 desk, cafe, an Internet cafe, magazines and newspa-
Void: 186.5 m2 pers, and a section for travel resources--books, videos,
Stairs: 14 m2 maps.
Total area: 2478.1m2
***-at least one photocopier/scanner/fax machine per
Level 04_RESEARCH AREA level
Common area/ books***: 1106.9 m2 -at least one network printer per level
Core: 68.6 m2 -comfortable seating
Stairs: 14 m2 -occasional small tables to be used for individual/small
Total area: 1189.5 m2 group work areas
-occasional Internet-access workstations on floors 2, 4-5
This scope was worked out by the client after the workshop at Saudi Aramco in Saudi Arabia with
Snøhetta held on April 16th and 17th, 2008. This scope is what the printed drawings are based on. On
June 14th and 15th there was another workshop held at Snøhetta´s office with the library team from
Saudi Aramco and Snøhetta. The scope based on this workshop is shown in the chapter 02.5.3 under
Description, the functions.
The general collection
“At the library, you will find current and classic works of fiction and literature alongside non-fiction
publications on a wide assortment of subjects pertaining to Saudi Arabia, the Gulf region and the
rest of the world. Books may be borrowed for two weeks, free of charge. A digital e-library will offer
free Web access to the texts of many books and periodicals, including the many publications in Saudi
Aramco’s collection, such as Saudi Aramco World and Al-Qafilah.”
The special collections

Many volumes in the Center’s collection are irreplaceable and extremely valuable, both for their rarity
and the knowledge they preserve. Rare books and documents like these require special handling and
will be stored in the special collection.
Here, you will find hundreds of original and digital copies of books, reports, periodicals and documents
relating to the history, culture, economy and politics of the Kingdom, the Middle East and Saudi Aram-
co. Some of the Center’s treasures include fine 19th century translations of literature and histories
from Arabic, Farsi and other languages published by the Oriental Translation Fund; an early edition of
William Starbuck Mayo’s 1849 novel Kaloolah and a number of books belonging to the Harry St. John
Philby Collection. The Center is in the process of restoring these materials and adding important vol-
umes to the collection.”
The adult education program

The Adult education program will now be named the Life Long Learning Program. This area is placed
at the back of house area at level 00, and the size of the area is 500 m2 on the drawings. At the
workshop the client informed that this area most likely will be placed in the tower. The program for
the life long learning was given Snøhetta June 1th 2008, and has not yet been checked when it comes
to the given 500 m2 for this program. The consequences has to be checked out in the DD phase.
Program given by the client June 1th 2008 is shown in chapter 02.8.4 Outstanding issues 02.8.4.1
Tower scope
The archive
“See authentic records — documents, drawings, photographs and films — that tell the story of our
shared human history. In the Center’s state-of-the-art archive, valuable artifacts chronicling notewor-
thy developments of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and of Saudi Aramco will be available for the first
time.
Equipped with facilities to preserve, catalog and process artifacts — including archival tools, photog-
raphy and computer equipment — the Center’s archive will house irreplaceable treasures, preserving
them for future generations in a climate-controlled and monitored storage space. Workspaces will be
available where historians, researchers and all who are interested in the artifacts of the Kingdom and
Saudi Aramco will be able to view archived materials.
The collection includes historical documents from the Kingdom. Saudi Aramco documents available for
viewing include the Company’s Concession Agreement, Royal decrees, shipping logs and operational
reports. The archive provides an opportunity for each visitor to learn about the close relationship
between the development of Saudi Aramco and the history of the Kingdom as a whole, to conduct in-
depth research about the energy industry, and to better understand his or her own place in the King-
TOTAL ALLOCATION OF RECORDS STORAGE SPACE BY TYPE
dom and the world.”
Storage type Capacity Space
TOTAL ALLOCATION OF RECORDS STORAGE SPACE BY TYPE 3
General archives storage 164 m 276 m2
The archive program Cold archives storage

Storage type
Subtotals
Capacity
72 m3
236 m3
Space
104 m2
380 m2
General archives storage 164 m3 276 m2
Cold archives storage 72 m3 104 m22
Additional archives storage to accommodate oversize flat files surveyed in 20 m
Subtotals 236 m3 380 m2
Geology and Exploration Cartographic Vault
REVISED SPACE NEEDS SUMMARY Total 400 m22
Additional archives storage to accommodate oversize flat files surveyed in 20 m
ALLOCATION OF RECORDS STORAGE SPACE FOR KNOWN ARCHIVAL MATERIALS ALLOCATION OF READING ROOM SPACE
Total 400 m2
Unit Surveyed Volume EST Space Space Guideline Capacity Space

ALLOCATION OF READING ROOM SPACE
Saudi Aramco Exhibit 0.1 m3 0.1 m 2 Research 50 square feet (5 m2) per researcher 20 100 m2
Community Heritage Gallery 11 m3 19 m2 Exhibit Equal to area allocated to research -- 100 m2
Space Guideline Capacity Space
Expec (Geology and Exploration). Geology and Exploration 3 m3 6 m2 Total 200 m22
Research 50 square feet (5 m2) per researcher 20 100 m
Cartographic Vault Exhibit Equal to area allocated to research -- 100 m2
Government Affairs. Saudi Aramco Affairs Services Dept. 0.5 m3 0.7 m2 ALLOCATION OF OFFICE AND PROCESSING SPACE
Total 200 m2
Legal. Records Management and Research Services 20 m3 33 m2
Media Production Division. Film and Video 17 m3 29 m2 Office Guideline Area
ALLOCATION OF OFFICE AND PROCESSING SPACE
Media Production Division. Photo Lab 14 m3 22 m2 Department head 100 square feet (9 m2) per person for permanent offices 9 m2
2
Public Relations Department. English Language Publications 1 m3 2 m2 Administrative assistant 100 square feet (9 m ) per person for permanent offices 9 m2
Office Guideline 2 Area 2
Technical Information Center. Saudi Aramco Historical 9 m3 15 m2 Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m ) for individuals responsible for 14 m2
Department head 100 square feet (9 m2) per person for permanent offices 9m
Collection/Special Collections processing collections
Administrative assistant 100 square feet (9 m2)2per person for permanent offices 9 m2
Transportation 0.1 m3 0.1 m2 Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m2 ) for individuals responsible for 14 m22
Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m ) for individuals responsible for 14 m
Subtotals 76 m3 127 m2 processing collections
processing collections2
Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m ) for individuals responsible for 14 m2
Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m2) for individuals responsible for 14 m2
processing collections
Additional archives storage to accommodate oversize flat files surveyed in 20 m2 processing collections2
Photograph archivist 150 square feet (14 m ) for individuals responsible for 14 m2
Geology and Exploration Cartographic Vault Processing/cataloging archivist 150 square feet (14 m2) for individuals responsible for 14 m2
processing collections
Total 147 m2 processing collections2
Photograph archivist 150 square feet (14 m2 ) for individuals responsible for 14 m22
Photograph archivist 150 square feet (14 m
processing collections ) for individuals responsible for 14 m
ALLOCATION OF RECORDS STORAGE SPACE BY TYPE (KNOWN ARCHIVAL MATERIALS) processing collections2
Manuscript archivist 150 square feet (14 m2 ) for individuals responsible for 14 m22
Photograph archivist 150 square feet (14 m
processing collections ) for individuals responsible for 14 m
Storage type Capacity Space processing collections
Total 102 m22
General archives storage 44 m3 73 m2 Manuscript archivist 150 square feet (14 m2) for individuals responsible for 14 m
Cold archives storage 32 m3 54 m2 processing collections
Subtotals 76 m3 127 m2 Total 102 m2
Additional archives storage to accommodate oversize flat files surveyed in 20 m2

Total 147 m2 SUMMARY
ALLOCATION OF RECORDS STORAGE SPACE BY TYPE (ANNUAL ADDITIONS) General archives storage 276 m2
Cold archives storage 104 m2
Storage type Annual additions 20 years Space Additional archives storage to accommodate oversize flat files surveyed in 20 m2
expansion Geology and Exploration Cartographic Vault
General archives storage 6 m3 120 m3 203 m2 Reading room space 200 m2
Cold archives storage 2 m3 40 m3 50 m2 Office and processing space 102 m2
Total 253 m2 Total 702 m2
02.5.3 Description
Key elements
The library is one of five “pebbles”, and it is one of eight main functions. The library can be seen as
the symbol of knowledge and insight. All the pebbles are somehow connected to each other, and they
are bound together with the same architectural concept. Saudi Aramco´s idea is that the program for
the pebbles is linked together, so that all pebbles will have an interconnection. The visitors will, for
example, experience that the great hall will have one exhibition, where you will find elements of the
same theme in the library and the museum. The visitors will have a rich and varied experience when
they are visiting the cultural centre. All the elements that are put together will make the visitors curi-
ous to learn more, and the library will be one of the pebbles where visitors can search, communicate
and open their eyes for new topics.
FUTURE
PRESENT
PAST
INTERCONNECTION
The relation to the plaza.
The form of the “library pebble “ appears like an object that has landed on the landscape, without
hitting the ground. It appears as if it is floating above the plaza area, and the volume is held up by
columns. This creates an abstract atmosphere underneath the pebble. What you first meet when you
enter the plaza area is the light from the source. What you experience after the source, is the main
entrance to the library. There is one escalator coming down from the void. source that is cut through
the library volume. The idea is that when visitors enter the “library pebble” they will entry the library
in a space full of light.
There is also a connection in form of an escalator from the museum area level -02 to the plaza level
underneath the escalator for the library. This makes the connection stronger between the museum,
the plaza and the library.
TOWER
LIBRARY KEYSTONE AUDITORIUM
BACK OF HOUSE
PLAZA
PROCESSING
ARCHIVES
TOWER
The relation between the library, keystone, tower and the back of
house
The “library pebble” is connected to the keystone, “the reading room”, and it is also connected to “the
lifelong learning” area, that at this stage is placed in the back of house area. It is important that these LIBRARY KEYSTONE
functions are well connected. The keystone will be the heart in the cultural centre, and the reading READING
ROOM AUDITORIUM
room will represent the importance of learning. The lifelong learning will have a program where the
visitors learn how to use their knowledge, and they can develop their knowledge further. The three
functions: the library, the keystone and the lifelong learning will together give the possibility for visi-
tors to get deep into a common cultural understanding. The archives are also of great importance for
the library.
BACK OF HOUSE
Program of the archives and the deep storage at level -01 PLAZA
The program for the archives is detailed and well organized. Snøhetta has the technical information
that is needed for these areas at this stage. The client and Snøhetta went through the organization of
the areas, and both the organization and the program seem clear. The latest drawings show 1080 m2
for the archives and the deep storage, while the latest program shows 700 m2.
TOWER
BACK OF HOUSE: LIBRARY: KEYSTONE: TOWER:

LEARNING/ SEARCHING READING/ COMMUNICATION GRAND READING ROOM MEDIA LIBRARY KEYSTONE AUDITORIUM
ARCHIVES
BACK OF HOUSE
PROCESSING PLAZA
LIFE LONG LEARNING
ARCHIVES
A possible relation between the library, keystone, tower and the
back of house
The “library pebble” is connected to the keystone as a possible “dialog, thinking and discussion space”,
and it is also connected to “the lifelong learning” area, that may be placed in the tower. It is important
that these functions are well connected. The keystone will be the heart in the cultural centre, and the
talking room will represent the communication between all people. The lifelong learning will have a
program where the visitors learn how to use their knowledge, and how they can develop their knowl-
edge further. The three functions: the library, the keystone and the lifelong learning will together give
the possibility for visitors to get deep into a common cultural understanding. (ref. outstanding issues
for tower chapter 02.8.3 Description 02.8.1. Tower. Media Center and 02.8.4.6. Keystone scope. Out-
standing issues.
BACK OF HOUSE: LIBRARY: KEYSTONE: TOWER:

LEARNING/ SEARCHING READING/ SEARCHING COMMUNICATION/ MEDIA/
MEDIA LEARNING
KEYSTONE TOWER
LIBRARY MEDIA/ MEDIA/
DIALOG- LIFE LONG LEARNING
ROOM
AUDITORIUM
BACK OF HOUSE
PLAZA
PROCESSING
ARCHIVES
The void
The original concept of the void in the library was to visually cut away at the
large pebble in order to visually connect views down to the source. Surround-
ing that “cut” were wooden balcony-fronts also acted as work-stations and other
functional means. In order to not compete with the light from the source, the
re-positioning was allow a “different” light down to the plaza area while main-
taining the openess and feeling of the library as initially envisioned. The illus-
trations on the right show the process after the competition stage to the most
The library pebble above is from the competition stage
current position of the void. Note that the pebble volume and the void volume where the void shape resulted in a greater open space.
negotiates the overall balance of the library programme both in terms of useable
floor area and strategical lighting due to the fact that there is a large floor plate.
1.) The goal is to reflect natural light (that will be filtered and shaded)
down to the plaza but also light the entire pebble through indirect natural
and artificial light through the 2 Inner skins of the library.
2.) Rendition by MIR of the initial visualization. (Now superceeded!)
The library pebble above is the current position and

shape. Note that angle of the void in comparison to
the shape.
A diagram of the strategy in “cutting” the void to arrive The Image above was provided by MIR.
3.) The view looking through the source. This is roughly the current design
at the balcony-front conditions. that will be further developed. Illustration above by Snøhetta.
The “Void Balcony Fronts” are the main architectural component that could draw attention from the people at the plaza level to investigate their curious-
ity! Thus, it is crucial that this major component of the library holds a very strong architectural gesture and integrity. From the competition stage, we
can see that the balcony fronts utilize activities such as workstations and casual meeting points. The main goal of “forming” and moulding additional rings
is to keep the attention and perhaps noise away from the quiet areas. The essential key is that the void shape and angle could absorb some noise (the
ceilings on each floor can be seen from the plaza) however, the critical element is that this piece of architecture has to be performative. Further design
development and focus must be taken after the programme is confirmed such that this element can perform specifically on each floor.
workstation / counter (moulded)
moulded + uphoulster seating
sound absorbation underlay
concrete floor slab (structural)
moulded glossy white “void” balconyfront
ceiling below
raised floor system with accoustical
sound absorbation underlay
The inner skin
The inner skin should take care of four areas of concern:
The light
The void is the strongest element within the space. It is placed centrally in the library, and it brings in
the indirect daylight through the four levels. The inner skin is important when it comes to the general
lightning within the space. The skin is thought of as perforated metal, where both indirect daylight and
artificial light is hidden behind the surface. The idea is to use led lights to give the general light to the
library, both in daytime, and after dark.
The acoustics
The inner skin should be treated so that perforations in the surface could give benefits to the acoustic
control within the space.
The ventilation
The perforated surface would make it possible to hide all the ventilators behind the inner skin.
The aesthetic
The pattern of the surface should be studied well, and should be related to the double curved surface
in a intelligent way. There are several architects that has used this theme in their projects. This proj-
ect has to find a pattern that can relate to this specific project.
The use of metal gives a challenge when it comes to the joints of the material. It could either be that
the joints and the perforations would work out a system that is related to each other, or it could be
that the pattern of perforation is so strong that it will make the joints disappear.
“Inner Pebble Skin” to have all

four of the above qualities.
The aesthetics and patterning

will be further developed in the
design development stage.
Organization principles
The sequences below illustrate the concepts from inspiration to literal strategies based on diagrams and
principals of different organizations. Based on a centralized focal point, the “void”, these
arrangements may have some clues to how functions expands or disappear over time.
Concept 3D only! To be further developed.

A 3D comparison of the organizational models shows the the various configurations relative to the floor plate and void.
Some key elements can be drawn from this study and further developed based on clarifications of programme and
circulation studies.
3D Sketch and reference only. Furniture, shelving,..etc, not to be taken literally!

A development model based on the combination of
the three principals.
3D Sketch and reference only. Furniture, shelving,..etc, not to be taken literally!

Another development model based on the
combination of the three principals and further to
the development driven by the shape of the void
and the shape of the library pebble.
3.) Using shape and perforations within the “inner skin” to locally distribute air flow as illustrated.
Reference projects
There are a lot of architects that have gone deep into the study of how to organize a li-
brary according to the architectural concept. The reference pictures to the right shows
projects with the three different angle of incidences that we have chosen to highlight.
Ref. P-A-T-T-E-R-N-S, Sci-Arc Library, Ref. Toyo Ito, Tama Art University Library, Tokyo
Los Angeles, California.
Ref. OMA, Seattle library Ref. British museum. library
Ref. Normann Foster, Free University Library, Berlin Ref. Snøhetta, Alexandria library
Examples of different seating and reading areas
In a modern library, there is a need for a variety of seating and reading areas. Some areas are per-
haps areas where you can listen to audio books or music. The examples that are shown are just indi-
cations of how other architects have used the theme in different ways. In this project, it is needed to
develop an architectural concept for these spaces. This can give a strong identity to the library.
Ref. intermedia station, Toyo Ito, Tama Art University Library,

Tokyo
READING/ RELAXING AREA
WORKSTATIONS/ E-BOOKS
VIOD
TEAMWORK STATIONS
SOUND STATIONS
VIOD
Ref. workstations, OMA,

Seattle library
Ref. reading, relaxing, listening area,

3XN, Ørestad College, Copenhagen
The functions
At June 14th and 15th there was held a workshop at Snøhetta´s office with the library team from Sau-
di Aramco and Snøhetta. The following scope and drawings are based on this workshop.
Number of books
The amount of volumes given from the client is 170 000 books, 365 magazines, 57 newspapers and
700 media RESEARCH
The children´s library has a volume of 20 000 books that will be included in the library program.
LIBRARY COLLECTION
The client has given Snøhetta the following information:
The library should be planned for 108 volumes per m2. This leaves the bottom and top of the shelves ENTRANCE
open.
One section of shelves with 6 heights gives 180 volumes if both the top and bottom shelves are used. MEDIA AND TEENS
This gives 30 volumes per meter. Snøhetta has also been told to calculate 3,05 meters for 100 vol-
umes. This means that it should be planned for 33 books per linear meter.
Snøhetta still needs to know the number of magazines per linear meter.
The distance between the shelves should be 1,1- 1,2 meters. The standard distance between the
shelves is 0,9-1 meter. This means that 108 volumes per m2 would be a misleading way to count the
books. Snøhetta has counted 33 books per linear meter. This is according to 3,05 meters for 100 vol-
umes. (100 volumes/ 3,05 meters = 33 volumes/ meter)
The library organization of the library has been developed between the library team at Saudi Aramco
and at Snøhetta, and there two library workshops have been held within the SDII period. The program
of the library has developed the use of four different floors with four different sections:
Level 01: the media and teens level

Level 02: the entrance level
Level 03: the library collection level
Level 04: the research level
L-01- the media and teens level:

- 2 media viewing rooms ca 3x3 meters for ca 8 persons
- Small amphitheatre for media viewing. This place could be organized flexible with walls to divide dif-
ferent sections. The dividing walls should only be a visual division of the areas. The planning should
include for screen displays within this area.
- 3 offices and one desk connected to the stairs
- multipurpose meeting room
- lounge area for listening to music
- display area connected to “the void”
- 10. 000 books should be placed within this area (workhop May 14th and 15th)
- 220 m2 daily processing area for the library in the back of house area is accepted by the client
Reviced program according to client´s brief per June 2nd 2008 suggests 42 400 books on this floor
L-01- the media and teens level

shown with 38 500 books
L-02- the entrance level:
This is the main entrance to the library, and connects directly to the plaza level via an escalator
- coffee shop next to the garden view
- 3 offices
- desk for 3-4 persons close to the escalator
- lounge area around “the void” which contains reading area, music listening area, working spaces
- reading areas
- comfortable seating areas
- work areas
- internet-access workstations
- copy/ printing area
- 4000 books of new arrivals
- travel collection, 7500 books
- small exhibition
- 365 volumes of magazines and 57 volumes of newspapers
Revised program according to client´s brief per June 2nd 2008 suggests 52 100 books at this floor
L-02- the entrance level

L-03- the library collection level

This is the floor for the main collection. The amount of books should be 200 000 volumes (workhop
May 14th and 15th). This number was studied by Snøhetta as to how the books should be distributed
throughout the floors.
- 3 offices and one desk
- searching stations
- reading areas
- work areas
L-03- the library collection level

L-04- the research level
- 3 offices and one desk
- searching stations
- reading areas
- work areas
- ca 50 000 volumes of books if this is possible according to the area given (workhop May 14th and
15th)
- possible the floor with the main access to the reading room in the keystone
L-00- the book drop area

- it will be placed one book drop area next to the elevator core in the back of house area at plaza
level.
BOOKS
Adult-Totals
Biography 4000
L-04- the research level

Fiction 50000
001-099 4000

100-199 4000
200-299 6000
300-399 15000
400-499 2000
500-599 4000
600-699 21000
700-799 9000
800-899 9000
900-999 22000 ***
Oversize 4000
Reference 6000
New 4000
Paperback 6000
Est. total 170000
***TRAVEL is about 30% of the 900 collection; ~7500 books will be on level 3 instead of in the traditional library
Need workstations scattered throughout the stacks allowing the public to access the library catalog
Magazines
English 250
Arabic & oth 115
Total 365
Above total includes newspapers; plan to display ~350 magazine titles (with room for 1-year backfile)
Newspapers
English 33
Arabic & oth 24
Total 57
Display 50-70 (with room to keep 1-week backfile)
Other Media
Music CDs 300 300
DVDs 300 50
Audiobooks 1000 700
The numbers above for "other media" reflect what is in the current collection; we expect other media to be a significant resource in the new library but believe the delivery medium will not take up much more space than is required for the current collection.
Dhahran Recreation Library collection used as basis for forecasting.
The teens program

The program for the teens is now incorporated in the Adult education program. Snøhetta has up until
now showed these 690 m2 areas at level 01 in the back of house areas. These areas are used as plan-
troom for the library.
Alternative organization
Library pebble:
258 800 books
Children´s library in children´s area:

60 000 books
Total amount of books:

318 800 books
L-01- the media and teens level L-02- the entrance level
shown with 38 500 books shown with 62 640 books
L-03- the library collection level L-04- the research level

shown with 103 680 books shown with 54 000 books
The flexibility
A library planned for the future should have the possibilities to change with time. This means that the
library should be prepared to both expand, and to increase the amount of books to give place for new
functions, or technology. The given program for this library of 300 000 books, means that there is no
space for expansion within the given size of the library pebble, ref. chapter 02.5.5 Conclusions.
The flexibility of each floor is within the floor plates, where it is planned for a grid arrangement of the
electrical, the internet and for the ventilation systems. This means that the arrangement of furniture
can be rearranged over time. The lighting system in the ceilings will be evenly spaced, so that the
space will be lit as a general surface, and not fixed to the layout of the plans.
Each section of book shelves should be planned to have a certain percentage of open shelves, in order
to give flexibility to adding books over time. There are some examples in modern architecture where
this aspect has been used as a drive for the overall concept. Snøhetta believe that this is the best way
to plan for expansion. If the areas for reading and studying should be replaced with books, the li-
brary will loose important functions. It is also much more flexible to fill in more books in a empty book
shelve than to make or order new ones.
The diagram indicates the The diagram indicates the Ref. Toyo Ito, Tama Art University Library, Tokyo
flexibility to add bookshelves flexibility to remove bookshelves, The open bookshelves have been a part of the architectural concept
and to replace it with a new program.
The divergence in expanding and changing the pro-

gram within a given space
Interior description with illustrations and references
The library pebble is the only pebble elevated from the plaza.
Its strongest, spacious feature is the escalator that descends from the plaza floor to take you up
through the sizable void leading into the pebble and a world of books.
As you enter the pebble, a bright white space allows daylight to seep through the inner skin, flowing
through the void down to the plaza.
As the pebble consists of 4 floor plates with considerable depth, it is important to keep the view out to
the inner skin as visually open as possible.
The inner skin / lining

The library skin has an inner lining, or inner skin, that sets the atmosphere for the library. The lining
is bright and shiny white and should give off an extended impression of daylight exposed through the
void. In order to give depth to the inner skin, the finish should have a mother of pearl finish.
The lining material could be high gloss painted metal panels perforated with holes to let in extra light.
Alternatively, artificial light sources could be recessed in the holes to give a sparkling feeling, not
unlike the ceilings in many hamams.
The void
The void is shiny white and has a refined finish that allows the light to bounce off the surfaces down to
the plaza floor.
Columns
The columns are going to have a white semi-matt finish. The final shape, position and size of the
columns are not yet set, but will be important features in the library.
Secondary walls and cores

There are other wall structures in the library that should appear as secondary to the overall structure
of the pebble.
There are two cores containing egress stairs, lift, toilets, shafts and possibly, supporting rooms.
Their finish should be like the columns, white with a semi-matt finish.
Then there are the walls around office spaces and meeting rooms that should appear light and
transparent but still provide secluded areas for the people working in the library.
Floor material
The floor outside the inner offsets of the void, will be oiled hardwood. This is a surface that gives
warmth and when oiled, provides acoustic softness to the space. The hardwood will work as a
backdrop to the light and shiny surfaces of the constructive elements.
Furniture concept
As libraries are very organized spaces, the groups of furniture typologies should read clear and be an
important means of orientation for the user.
There are four typologies of furniture concepts in the library pebble:

• The void offsets - moulded furniture structure around the void
• Counters and work stations
• Shelving
• Loose pieces of furniture
As the work proceeds, these typologies will be developed. The content of the program for the library
allows for different typologies.
- The void offsets

The offsetting rings around the void are finished in the same material as the void in order to give a
feeling of continuity. However, it is important to note that the rings are the same typology as the void
balcony fronts (double curved surfaces).
These rings contain moulded and integrated pieces of furniture, such as reading tables, sofas, benches
and shelves for displaying books and other media relevant to the library program.
The integrated sofas and benches could be upholstered. The upholstered material may be leather or
another strong durable quality textile.
The floor between the rings will be a light material connecting the rings. For instance we may need to
inlay an acoustical absorbing carpet. If so the detailing and transition between the white surfaces and
the flooring should be precise and read as one piece. This formation is vital to the flow and circulation
in the library around the void.
- Counters and work stations

The counter should read clear and be a natural point of orientation as you enter the library on every
floor. They should be large forms of clear design and be illuminated in a way that will make them
stand out in contrast to the shelves, the wooden floor and the bright backdrop of the shiny inner skin.
The work surfaces should have a soft and sound absorbing quality, such as desk top linoleum.
The smaller, yet numerable work stations should be part of the same design concept as the counters
and add richness to the areas of shelving and books.
- Shelving
Obviously, the shelves will be a predominant feature and set the organization for the spaces on each
floor.
The shelves may be made of the same oiled hardwood material as the floors. They should have a
simple design, yet formally strong, and be flexible as how to distributed the shelf plates within the
frame. The shelf construction could be metal for duration and minimal dimension.
There should be integrated lighting in the frames. This will give a warm glow throughout the space
and enhance the tactility of the books.
We will have to further develop the typology of the shelving systems after having agreed with the
client to which layout strategy would work the best.
- Loose pieces of furniture
Due to the structured layout of the library, the loose pieces of furniture will represent the softness and
small scale elements throughout the space. They will include easy chairs, comfortable reading chairs,
loose seating elements, reading and work tables and meeting tables. It is very important that all
surfaces will be durable and withstand the heavy use expected in this environment.
We may use colour as a way of connecting these elements.
SIGNAGE
The signage in the library is of great importance and a major feature in the interior. In this pebble
maybe more so than in any other of the components. There should be a consistent program of
signage as far as position, colour, font and sizes go, in order to maximize the orientation for the users.
Lighting principles
Lighting of the inner skin and daylight through the void should secure the impact of light and shininess
at daytime. During long hours and on days of less light the secondary lighting is of great importance.
Since the floor plates are rather deep, there will be a constant need of additional illumination from the
ceiling.
The underside of the floor plates will be the second source of light.
The materials of these surfaces are probably metal panels with a high gloss surface related to the
inner skin. There may be larger holes with integrated recessed lighting fixtures.
Whenever needed we should use indirect lighting to enhance the inner skin and building structures.
The last lighting principle will be light fixtures integrated in the furniture components.
FINISHES
Main areas
Floor: Modular raised wooden access flooring covered with flat woven carpet tiles or oiled hardwood
Inner shell pebble (continuous walls and ceiling): Shiny white surface, possibly high gloss painted
metal panels with integrated lighting
Perimeter balcony fronts and void balcony fronts: Shiny white surfaces
Common ceilings: Seamless stretched acoustical ceiling with indirect or direct lighting
Secondary areas
Floor: Technical flooring with carpet tiles
Walls: painted plasterboard
Ceiling: Suspended acoustic T-bar ceiling
Doors: Glass or wall material
Back of House areas

Floor: Linoleum
Walls: Painted plasterboard
Ceiling: Suspended T-bar ceiling
Doors: Laminate
Rendition by MIR
View from Cafe area on L02 of the Library. Rendition by Snøhetta.
02.5.3.10 Floating diagrams
Floating Diagrams or “exploded views” shows us the layers, in this case, the
library has four. It is important to note that the shape of the library pebble
as each floor is cut changes. As you go up in elevation, the floors take on
contoured shapes (just like a topography map). The floor plates then are
derived by a non-linear offset driven by the concepts stated at the begining
of this section.
The key pricipal is the diagram of vertical transitioning relative to the

functions within the library (refer to next page for diagram). In general,
the further you go up, the more quiet the space. However, we have pushed
the typology of this tectonic such that the floors are recessed from the
pebble envelope and will attempt to strategize the noise to the void areas.
Crtical to this typological approach is the understanding that the library
typology must be flexible over time. A “free” plan and open concept (with
as few closed rooms as possible) will allow for greater flexibility and better
performance of the functions as these functions will change and adapt with
changing technologies, use of space, and overall perceoptions of what a
library actually will be in the future.
L03 Sno Brief (Client Approved)
Specific for this diagram!
Elevator / Core Location
Stairs
Circulation
Sectional cut of library showing the floor plates and void with the escalator skipping the first floor. Exploded View of the Library. Note that the 1st floor plate is relatively smaller due to the shape. Stepping up or ramping can resolve
this tectonic issue and further advance the floor design.
Circulation diagram showing the current scheme and strategy of circulation. Note that the first floor entry is either
from the elevator in the plaza of from the 2nd floor going down the side stairs. Further investigations based on
ramping and/or stepping (using the teared steps as shown on the drawings) will need to be investigated.
to KEYSTONE
L04
L04
L03 L03
L02
L02
L01 t or
c ala
Es L01
FIRE EXIT
P00
DOWN to (-) LEVELS
P00
ELEVATORS DOWN to (-) LEVELS
DOWN to (-) LEVELS

Circulation (Main)
Stairs (Egress Exiting)
Elevators
L04 = Library Levels

Technical principles
The following sections illustrate common principals discussed with our engineers and thus are
representative only in their general strategies. These technical principals thus have an effect
on the architecture and the way the structure and ventilation may best suit the shape. Please
refer to Buro Happold’s section for more detailed investigations and strategies.
The ventilation
The concept of the ventilation system in the library was initially derived from the idea that the
entire form of the Library “pebble” is one open volume. This can allow warm air to freely rise
up around the inner skin and through perforations and/or exhaust vents carefully placed so
that the inner skin pattern aesthetics are not compromised. Illustration 1 and 3 on this page
shows the general strategy around the shape of the library.
The illustration below (2) shows the general ventilation strategy in section. The void openings
give a larger ventilation and loading both up and down (to the plaza). This in turn, called off-
loading, can help balance large quantities of air needed.
1.) The slabs are “floating” to give free circulation
around the entire shape.
Surrounding the “inner skin” of the library pebble, a strategy of using

the perforations beyond the aesthetical values will add performative
values and essentially lead to a combination of light filtration, venti-
lation (both in and out), acoustical buffering, and localized solutions
that will not be so obvious due to the strategy of the patterning of the
“inner skin”.
FIRE EXTRACT /
EXTERNAL VENTILATION
hOT AIR RECIRCULATE
MAIN MECHANICAL PLANT SPACE BELOW LIBRARY “NOSE”.

VENTILATION THROUGH THIS SIDE.
2.) A Section showing the general strategy of the ventilation. Refer to Engineering report for more details. 3.) Using shape and perforations within the “inner skin” to locally distribute air flow as illustrated.
THE STRUCTURE
Supporting 4 floors of dense books, media, and live loads

is not easy especially when the shape must retain it’s
“floating” features particularly in the plaza. The columns
and general strategy for the structure of the library needs
further investigation and development as there will need
to be a point where the organization will have to follow the
structural grid contraints and vice versa. The sequence of
images bellow and on the following pages depict our very
first attempt in coordinating with Buro Happold’s strategy.
It is important to note that an open floor with fewer
columns is desired for it allows optimum flexibility.
However, this is challenged by the concept of “floating” the
floor slabs such that they are not meeting the exteriority of
the library pebble shape! Thus, we must understand that
the library pebble shape is its own structure and the slabs
floating inside can be another structure. This is our goal for
it allows for a holistic experience of the shape, performative
ventilation strategies, and ultimately, gives the best
opportunity for flexibility.
The following are sketch renditions and diagrams illustrate

the structural assembly of the current model. Please note
that the engineers developments on the structure (and
various options and/or strategies) may superceed these The illustrations above show the library structural components as
images. These images are for reference only and not to be they fit with the library envelope. Note that the rounded balcony
fronts on L02, L03, and L04 is not a structural component.
taken literally!
The illustrations above show the library structural components in a sequence NOT to be taken directly and literally! They only serve a visualization of the current model. (Renditions by Snøhetta)
The illustrations above show the library structural components in a sequence NOT to be taken directly and literally! They only serve a visualization of the current model. (Renditions by Snøhetta)
The library structure and floors behind the pebble “shell”. Visualization of the current model. (Renditions by Snøhetta)
The library structure as seen from right underneath the keystone pebble. Visualization of the current model. (Renditions by Snøhetta)
The structural integrity of the library is a key issue but
also, the tectonics of the floor plate, in particular, the
1st floor. The section below shows the gentle rise of the
library “nose” where one of the characteristics of the
pebble is that it sticks up into the sky and also over the
oasis below (as seen on the right).
It must be stated that this area has many advantages

both inside and outside. Further investigations like
sloping the floor and incorporating a ramp idea along
a processional path must be investigated since we are
aware of the shrinking floor area due to the nature of the
exterior envelope construction and assembly.
A secondary void or perhaps glazed area beneath the

corner of the library nose (where it will be out of visibility
from outside the site) could be an option so that views
can look down into the oasis while they read, work, or
socialize. Visual connections are key components in the
project overall thus it is vital that these architectural
strategies are followed through in order to achieve the
best solutions.
The renditions depicting the space beneath the library “nose” inside the oasis.
(Both renditions by MIR)
To be developed
02.5.4.1 Program and utilization
The drawings in this report show maximum capacity of books in the bookshelves for each level. This
means that there is no flexibility for expansion of books in the library as it´s defined. The brief for
the organization of the library sent to the client May 30th, shows a library literally packed with books.
With this layout unfortunately the library space will appear as a bookstore more than a library, im-
portant spacial and architectural qualities are lost. The architecture should reflect the goal of making
people curious to learn more. Snøhetta do not believe that the goal will be achieved with the 300 000
books in the library as it is shown now.
The size of the library pebble has decreased from 13000 m2 net area to 6900 m2 net area. Level 2 for
the library is thought as an unconventional level, with only 51 200 books. The idea of this level is to
be the heart of the library, and to be the main attraction of the library. Being the introduction to the
library as a whole, we would like the atmosphere of this area to make visitors wanting to come back,
and to stay for further investigations into the other levels of the library. Still, with a area of 2226 m2,
level 2 does have a higher capacity of books.
Finally, we would like to pinpoint the qualities of unprogrammed space. By leaving space for future ex-
pansion, for unprogrammed action and interaction, the library will truly become a space for the future
as well as the past.
02.5.4.2 Conveying system

The client is asked to consider what kind of technology it should be planned for in the library. At the
workshop with the library team from Aramco May 14th and 15th 2008, Saudiconcult had a short brief
of the conveying system that is used for the King Fahad Library in Saudi Arabia.
The client was not familiar with this kind of technology, but were aware of the costs. Saudiconsult
suggested to provide some cost numbers for the SD report. Unfortunatly Snøhetta has not received
the documentation for this, and this issue has to be stressed early in DD. Furthermore the team also
discussed the technology that is used for the automatic book drop in the library of the University of
Oslo. The client is asked to consider what kind of technology the CC library should have for the future.
Costs for this type of technology is not included in the SDII report.
02.5.4.3 Library structure

The thight distance between the colums has several negative sides:
-flexibility in library
-flexibility in museum
-rather crowded on plaza
02.5.5 Conclusions_ recommendations
Following changes in design will be considered in early DD:
SNØ/ BH:
Columns and overall structure: as delivered in SD the thight spacing between the columns is not ideal
for library, plaza and museum. We would like to investigate possibilities or a more integrated system
in library to get fewer columns within structural library space and spaces underneath.
SNØ/ CLIENT: Capacity of books is to be evaluated together with quality of space.

Chapter 02.06 MUSEUM
02.6.1 Introduction
The Museum, within the structure of the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture will host “
Exhibitions of art and artifacts from Saudi Arabia and the world.”
The following is an extract from the Aramco website:

“A celebration of culture”
Exhibitions of art and artifacts from Saudi Arabia and the world
“Innovative and creative museum exhibitions (…) will showcase and celebrate the rich history and
legacy of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, the Middle East, and civilizations around the world. The ex-
hibitions will include Islamic architecture, calligraphy, painting and ceramics; Islamic science and its
influence; the Saudi Arabian cultural heritage; the natural history of a variety of environments on our
planet and international cultural treasures.”
“By showcasing the best of Saudi Arabian and other cultures, the Center will spark cross-cultural en-
gagement and appreciation.”
“Captivating art and artifacts from the museum’s collection will be presented in conjunction with an
abundant array of supporting materials including text, graphics, video and audio to create exhibits
that are not just passively viewed but interactively experienced. Throughout the year, the museum will
highlight different parts of its collection through rotating exhibits and will also stage exhibitions with
works on loan from other institutions, bringing culture from around the Gulf and around the world for
visitors to explore.”
“The museum’s permanent and temporary exhibits will be curated to bring to life the stories of many
peoples and cultures. Exhibitions under development include a celebration of the many diverse life-
styles of the Arabian Peninsula, an examination of classic Islamic art and its international influences,
and an in-depth view of the region’s natural ecosystem.”
“Contemplating our shared Saudi and human history at the Center, visitors will learn to appreciate cul-
tural differences as well as the similarities that we, as human beings, all share.”
Architectural Concept
Future
The museum is developed as a spiralling descent around a sunken courtyard. This excavated portion
of the landscape is far more than a lightwell, as it represents the center of gravity around which the
different functions of the cultural center are gathered. It is a metaphor for the origin of the prosperity
of the kingdom, the Source of life from which the history of modern Saudi Arabia unfolds. The Source
of wealth that contributed to the modernizing of Saudi society and the betterment of the Saudi people
Present
but also a symbol of the local cultural tradition which is the foundation upon which to build the future.
In the same way, this excavation in the heart of the Cultural Center unveils a rich source of knowledge
that will enable all who frequent the Center to more fully realize their potential.
The juxtaposition of the Tower and the Source creates a vertical axis along which past present and
future unfold. The iconic composition above grade springs from under the ground and the past, and
reaches into the sky and the future.
Past
The experience of visiting the museum is a journey around this Source, where a large ramp invites Museum:
the visitor into a descent deep into the origins of local cultural tradition. A path which opens into three Education of Life
separate exibition areas and reaches to the bottom of the Source; a place for quiet contemplation as a Life Experience
which turns the sense of arrival into a deeply introvert experience.
The spatial and architectural qualities of the museum are interweaved and interdependent with the
Plaza, the hub that holds together the various elements of the Cultural Center and functions as an ac-
tive meeting place for the visitors of the different elements. Museum and plaza are carved out of the
same volume, and are one part of the other. This interpretation is the foundation for the visual intent
of these two areas and the functions relative to them.
Within this one common space, sheltered by the domed roof, the visitor will enjoy a controlled climate
throughout. Moreover a large portion of the museum will be provided a full museum quality climate
control, thus ensuring the possibility of a tight collaboration with other institutions in the kingdom and
in the world.
Concept: The source of life and wealth - the origin of the cultural history Source of life - Illustration by Snøhetta
02.6.2 PROGRAM BRIEF
nett area nett area nett area The program brief for the museum area has been modified and
level FOH Museum FOH Museum BOH BOH sum nett amended within the course of SD II. The nett area of exhibition
Location: Tower Museum Museum, Great Hall programme area
spaces has been reduced from 4000 sqm to 3000 sqm and by
restricting the scope of the institution to a non collecting one,
level 01 crate storage 100 100 the back of house areas have also been reduced.
level 01 plant room museum 293 293
level 01 Collection Storage General Artefacts 507 507
The back of house synergy with both the Great Hall and the Au-
ditorium has been maintained and improved, thus improving the
level 0 security booth 10 10 overall efficiency of the cultural center.
level 0 secure transit storage 125 125
level 0 photo documentation registration 40 40
level 0 isolation fumigation 19 19 The Gallery spaces have been reduced in number going from six
level 0 crating/uncrating 100 100 platforms down to three. One of these amounts for half of the
level 0 collections clean workroom 40 40
level 0 packing supplies 14 14
exhibiting area and is fully climatized to museum quality stan-
level 0 carpentry workshop 136 136 dards.
level 0 staff toilets / maintenance 20 20
level 0 garbage 37 37
level 0 Orientation Theatre 87 87 By reducing the size of the Source and the lenghth of the ramp
spiralling around it we have also reduced the volume of exca-
vation. Moreover many of the BOH functions previously below
level -1 Gallery 1 732 732 grade have been raised above grade around the perimeter of
level -1 Gallery 2 516 516 the plaza.
level -1 Museum Ramps 458 458
level -1 Special Artefacts 71 71
level -1 Sevice Corridor Museum 347 347
level -2 Gallery 3 1378 1378

level -2 Sevice Corridor Museum 355 355
level -3 Concession Agreement 53 53

level -3 Museum Lower Foyer 332 332
level -3 Toilettes/Washrooms 32 32
02.6.3 Description
The timber screen

A key element for the perception of the museum spaces is the facade surrounding the source. A fa-
cade which is to generate the appropriate conditions for the inner climate, protect the artefacts from
direct sunlight and create the appropriate atmosphere for the visitors throught the cultural center.
The similarity with the traditional mashrabiyya led the team towards the design of a timber mesh. An
element which can be both structural and decorative, while offering the necessary protection from di-
rect sunlight. A number of different variations are being tested with the intention of arriving at a de-
sign which performs as required, while satisfying the aesthetics of the surrounding spaces.
The structural principles, the location in relation to the climate barrier, the sun screening performance
and the visual intent are the driving factors for the development. The quality of the indirect lighting
genereated by the sun shining onto the timber and the projected shadows are also key factors in the
decisiona-making process.
Source of life - Illustration by Snøhetta

View from the bottom of the source - Illustration by Snøhetta Concept wooden mesh
The source columns
The geometry of the excavation forming the source is reflected in nearly all of the parts forming the
plaza and off plaza areas. It influences all elements and is reflected and emphasized onto the struc-
ture supporting the area surrounding the source itself.
These columns are therefore not only supporting the roof, the ramp, part of the galleries and the fa-
cade, they are also helping to define the area around the source and the way the visitor perceives it.
Each column raises in parallel to the nearby side of the mashrabiyya and has a rectangular section
which is skewed radially to the center of the source.
This approach allows for a system which has a constant connection to the ever-changing position of
the spiraling ramp. This visual identity reinforces the presence of the source at plaza level by differen-
tiating itself from the surrounding vertical elements.
The source columns - Illustration by Snøhetta

The rammed earth wall
One of the key elements throughout the museum is the perimeter wall which it shares with the plaza.
Galleries one and two in particular are defined by this element for nearly half of their area. The Verti-
cal continuity between plaza level and the first two gallery spaces makes it nearly impossible to con-
ceive other solutions which will effectively split the volume in to two visually separated portions.
The strong character of this technique makes it a potentially difficult alternative for a museum which
might require neutral surfaces. In this eventuality we recomend that a secon (more neutral) partition
is added along the perimeter wall of the affected gallery space.
Examples rammed earthwall

Museum Back of House Areas
T2 UN PME
T2 P A
PR OR EN
SO UI E
07 D N
09 ER ND
EQ OR 2
ST TCH
PLANT ROOM/
O
KI m2
ST m
T2 ISITI PAN M 2m
STORAGE
25
Back of House - Museum
25
V
16 NG Y A 2
E
TIE
CO FFIC
T2 N E 15m
S
O m2
M
GU OR
T
18
12
ST 2
T2 age g
E
8m
T2 GE GE 1
St ggin
05
Front of House - Museum
ST NA
17
Ri ore
A
St 2
1
T2 EC T E 1 0 m
T2 ENE S
MUSEUM
EL FFIC
12 R. OF 2
OPEN TO T210
15 RY
SC OP KSH
R 0m
Back of House - Museum + Great Hall
PR OR 2
AND BOH TECH Plantroom Museum Collection Storage
W
T2 RP E
General Artefacts
20
293m2
CA FIC
1 4 EN
2
/
m
507m2
OP STORe,25m2
Back of House - Great Hall, Library + Auditorium
T2 ECT K-
TE W HOP 2
ELRS OR
13 R.
LIGHTING
EQUIPMENT
T206
S m
15
OPEN TO T211
Main circulation Museum

Circulation Back of House - Museum
MUSICAL
INSTRUMENT
STORE,25m2
T208
Circulation Back of House - Great Hall, Library + Auditorium SCENERY PASSAGE
F.F 88.50
Frightelevator
Fire escape routes Museum

&Greathall
F.F 88.50
4x6m
F Freight elevator Museum, 4 x 6 m F

CRATE STORAGE
100 m2
Name m2 Comments
GH PLANT ROOM
370 m2
level 00
security booth 10 shared with Great Hall

secure transit storage 125 shared with Great Hall
photo documentation
registration 40 shared with Great Hall F.F 88.00
isolation fumigation 19 shared with Great Hall
crating/uncrating 100 shared with Great Hall
collections workroom 40 shared with Great Hall
packing supplies 14 shared with Great Hall
carpentry workshop 136 shared with Great Hall
garbage cooled 37 shared with Great Hall and Auditorium
shipping receiving area shared with Great Hall and Auditorium

level 01
crate storage 100 shared with Great Hall

BOH Museum - level +01 - Illustration by Snøhetta
The museum back of house has been reorganized in order to minimize the
excavated areas while mintaining its functionality.
The synergy with the Great Hall has been maintained and strengthened. LOADING DOCK
MUSEUM, GREAT HALL
& AUDITORIUM & LIBRARY
Moreover, the museum is now sharing the loading dock with the Auditorium LOADING DOCK+
SERVICE ENTRANCE
for increased flexibility. GREAT HALL
88m�
F.F. 83.00
F.F. 83.00
The freight elevator combined, with a service corridor, allows for deliveries SECURE
directly into all three galleries at three different levels. The delivery route is TRANSIT
STORAGE
secure and at museum quality climate all the way between delivery and gal-
125m�
Security
lery space. The presence of this service corridor around the perimeter allows Booth
10m� PHOTO/
COLLECTIONS
Garbage/Waste 37m�
cooled
"CLEAN WORK
for exihibitions to be prepared nearby their final placement before they are DOC./
REG. ROOM
ROOM"
40m� PACKING
placed on display. 40m�
SUPPLIES
14m�
ISOLATION/
FUMIGATION
An outer service corridor connecting the back of house function to all the sep- 19m�
arate elements within the cultural center, allows for maximum flexibility and CRATING/UNCRATING
100m�
synergy.
EQUIPM.
MOVING
20m�
STORAGE
F.F. 84.00 SHIPPING/RECEIVING AREA
These same service corridors are directly connected with emergency exits F.F. 84.00
and can therefore be used as way of egress in case of fire from both front
and back of house. Frightelevator
Museum
&Greathall
4x6m
An additional back of house area is suggested directly under gallery two at
CORRIDOR GREAT HALL

CARPENTRY
19,5 m�
WORKSHOP
maintenance
STAFF toilet/
level f.f. 75.9. This could be a workshop area visible through a glazed wall to 136 m2
F
the general public on the ramp, thus fullfilling the wish to display the muse- GREAT HALL
REHEAT
um as a living institution 110 m2
VOID
GALLERY 1
GREAT HALL
STORAGE
VOID to 268 m2
ELEVATOR LOBBY
Gallery 2
VOID
GALLERY 2
F.F 84.00
GREAT HALL
BOH Museum - level +00 - Illustration by Snøhetta

F.F. +81.00
F
MUSEUM Freightelevator
Gallery 1 Museum
992 m2 &Greathall
4x6m
F.F.81.55
LOBBY
MUSEUM TO
GALLERY 1
F.F.81.55
F.F.79.50
SERVICE
CORRIDOR
LIBRARY
Freightelevator
F
Museum
MUSEUM &Greathall
Gallery 2 4x6m
576 m2
F.F.80.38
LOBBY
Special MUSEUM
Artefacts GALLERY 3
'SOURCE'
Outdoor
LOBBY Climate Ramp
MUSEUM TO
GALLERY 2
F.F.80.38
MUSEUM POSSIBLE ADDITIONAL AREA: MUSEUM

CORRIDOR TO
Concession WORKSHOP GALLERY 3
Agreement
+ MUSEUM LIVE STORAGE AREA F.F.75.90
'SOURCE' 523 sqm
SERVICE F.F.80.38 F.F.79.50
CORRIDOR Outdoor
Climate Ramp F.F.75.90
KITCHEN STORAGE Void

600 m2
Museum
Lower Foyer F.F.71.80
443 sqm
F.F.74.80
Double Escalator from F.F.74.80 F.F.75.90
Museum Gallery 3 to Plaza Level
F.F.80.38
Fire Escape
Route
MUSEUM
Gallery 3:
Full Climate Controll
SERVICE CORRIDOR F.F.79.50 1.323 sqm
LIBRARY CORE 330m2
70 m2 F.F.75.90
Double Escalator from
AHU PLANT ROOM SORTING / ARCHIVE & DEEP STORAGE
GALLERY 3 700m2
240m2
F.F.78.50
STAFF Fire Escape

FACILITIES Route
BOH Museum - level -01 - Illustration by Snøhetta BOH Museum - level -02 - Illustration by Snøhetta
The visiting sequence
The visitor’s experince of the museum starts from the plaza. By

Gallery 1 Gallery 2 the time they get to the start of the ramp, they have already
been informed about the visiting collection theme. From the
foyer located adjacent the Great Hall they will have a clear view
over the permanent collection within gallery one and two.
Orientation As they start descending the ramp towards the source the first
Theatre threshold is offered within the volume of the tower. Here the
Source ramp extends its width and forms the Orientation Theatre
The ramp continues past the protruding volume of the Auditori-

um and reaches the access to gallery one after a half revolution.
From here the visitor will proceed to acces gallery two after
Plaza one more lenghth of ramp.The possibility of a shortcut between
these two levels is under evaluation.
Museum
Entrance Continuing down from this platform the visitor ramps further
down and first experiences overlooking gallery three from above
and right after a second passage, through the volume of the
tower, directly below the orientation theatre.
Here we have a level floor, intimate exibition room which will

host one or more special artefacts from the collection.
The sequence continues with two stretches of ramp before the

Gallery 1 visitor reaches the entrance to gallery three. Possible ways of
Gallery 2
making this transition area more active are being evaluated in
this phase. The suggestion of a wider stretch of ramp to be used
as gallery space, and a glazed wall overlooking some type of
Plaza
BOH workshop would be a preferred solution.
Concession
Source After visiting Gallery three the journey continues ramping down
Agreement to the lower foyer and the adjacent Special Collection and Media
Gallery 3
Room. From here it ramps down once more throught the tower,
at this point we pass through the last exhibition space which
will display the Concession Agreement. From here the visitor
starts the last portion of descent which will bring him/her to The
Media Foyer Source, a quiet and contemplative place from which to experi-
ence the entire project at its lowest point.
The entire lenghth of the ramp is designed and built for univer-
sal accessibility.
Diagrams galleries and circulation - Ilustration by Snøhetta

Once the visit to the museum has ended the visitor is presented
with a series of options for egress.
The first is to take an express lift within the body of the tower
which can stop at plaza level or at the 3 top floors of the Tower,
bridging the gap betweent the two most spectacular settingsof
the Cultural Center.
The second is to use the escalator that shortcuts between Gal-

lery three and the foyer at plaza level
The third is to make the reverse journey through the museum

and out via the ramp again. This appears to us as an unlikely
option and it somehow seems to create a “negative” flow in the
flow of visitors.
Diagrams vertical circulation - Ilustration by Snøhetta

The museum entrance - Illustration by Snøhetta
Concept orientation theatre
The orientation theatre
The orientation theatre is the first threshold the visitor passes through when accessing the museum
from plaza level. It is suggested to keep the sloped floor, effectively turning it into an extension of the
ramp.
Furnished with a series of simple upholstered benches it offers seating for approximately 30 to 35
people.
The room does not need to be seen solely as a traditional orientation theatre but also as a gathering
point for classes and groups.
The lighting and the finishes are aimed at showing off the overall organic envelop of the room.
The orientation theatre - Illustration by Snøhetta

ORIENTATION THEATRE
LATEST AQUISITION
CONCESSION Content tower rooms - Illustration by Snøhetta

AGREEMENT
Circulation tower rooms - Illustration by Snøhetta
The tower rooms
As the ramp passes through the tower on its way down to the source it defines three intersecting
spaces.
Because of their location within the volume and of the lack of windows, these spaces have minimal
direct or indirect daylight. These factors, togeher with location and size help establish their function
within the context of the museum.
All three spaces are accessed directly from the ramp and therefore have to tackle the challenge of a
pitched floor. The orientation theatre follows the same slope as the ramp itself and is in essence just
an extetion of the ramp. The two other floors directly below are instead level and manage the differ-
ence by mean of a pass-through. In order to avoid any possible problem with the difference in levels a
handrail is highly recomended.
Alternative floor stategies - Illustration by Snøhetta

Gallery 1 and Gallery 2
The first two gallery spaces we encounter during the journey towards the source are meant to be used
for permanent exibition which will be created by an external Exhibit designer. It`s therefore extremely
important that Snøhetta is involved throughout this developement to guarantee the consistency that is
key for the experience of the Cultural Center as a whole.
The natural light, reflected through the timber screen aquires a warm tone which permeates the gal-
lery space in proximity to the source.
These spaces are undoubtly two of the most dramatic in the complex, with great height and a tight-
spatial relation to the Source. The Auditorium and the Great Hall, penetrating through the landscape
represent two very powerful features within these platforms. The relationship between these massive
volumes and the museum area needs to be constantly evaluated in order to avoid them to become too
imposing or at worst, become a barrier to the fruition of the spaces.
It is important to take into consideration these key elements and volumes, jointly with the strong ma-
teriality of the rammed earth wall when developing the design of the exhibits any further.
View from the plaza down to museum gallery 2 - Illustration by Mir
View at the plaza - Illustration by Snøhetta

Gallery 3
While the exhibition approach for Galleries 1 and 2 will be a

combination of museum qualtiy collection and high tech display
there will be some agreement with other museums to borrow
some of their collections and exhibiting them in the museum.
In order for such a cooperation to operate the Museum needs a
Gallery space that can guarantee a high degree of international
standards during the entire borrowing period, from delivery to
return and throughout the entire area where artefacts will be
housed and transported. Gallery 3 and the relevant BOH areas
are designed to meet these standards and ensure the desired
international cooperation with the Cultural Center.
The amount and degree of direct sunlight and UVA protection
within the room will have to be carefully evaluated within the
course of DD.
The gallery is located directly below the main entrance foyer at

plaza level and is directly connected to it through a double es-
calator. These will normally draw visitors outwards after their
descent along the ramp. In the event ofan exhibition of a special
artefact, of great international importance the direction of one
of these escalators can be reversed thus providing direct access
from the main foyer and into the heart of Gallery 3.
Gallery 3 - Illustration by Snøhetta

02.6.2 Interiors
The Museum is the continuation of the Plaza down towards the Source. The main intention for the Mu-
seum is to exhibit the rich history of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and the history of the Saudi Aramco
company which to a large extent coincides with the history of the Kingdom.
The source
The source is the central core in the cultural centre and maybe one of the most powerful of the many
metaphors related to the architectural concept. The Source represents the well from which the mate-
rial richness of Saudi Arabia was fetched, - the oil from Well No. 7 and the origin to the Saudi Aramco
company initiating this cultural centre. The Source is also, on a mental level, the history of the past
from which present and future, learning and knowledge should be derived.
The atmosphere drawing the visitors down to the Source should be a feeling of descending further
down the excavated volume, into the history and the past.
The Source should give a feeling of arrival and destination. There should be an air of meditative calm-
ness and allure as of whether the Source itself is water or oil… The Source should not have the ap-
pearance of a pool.
The water should be shallow, with dark shiny and glimmering tiles, possibly glass mosaic, to give the
impression of depth.
There is an ongoing discussion in the project to whether the Source should be accessible for walking
out to or just view from inside.
The museum wall from the plaza
As the excavation is continuing down to the Source, there will be the same wall finishes for the perim-
eter walls. They should not have any artwork but be simpler and even a little rougher than the plaza
walls as they are viewed from further away.
Secondary walls
As you get off the ramp and into the galleries, the walls secondary to the perimeter walls, should be
light smoothly finished plaster walls that are comfortable to brush against.
References atmospheres, materials and finishes

The ramp
The main entrance from the Plaza down to the Museum is down the ramp spiralling around an enor-
mous wooden screen wall or mashrabiya. This is a traditional filtering wall structure in Islamic archi-
tecture. It is filtering sun and light and adding shadow, texture and ornamentation to the room.
The ramp is the connecting element between the Source and the Plaza and will have the same finishes
as the plaza floor, a warm, earthy stone finish or possibly polished concrete floor pigmented in a warm
colour.
The tower rooms
As visitors descend the ramp they are also passing through the tower, entering three succeeding
rooms on their way down.
All these tower rooms contain different features which are important to the museum experience.
These rooms are all dark in order to give more focus to the exhibited artefacts and documents and
create an atmosphere which differs from the rest of the galleries.
The first of these rooms is an orientation theatre and will provide simple benches for seating.
The galleries
There are three galleries that are in themselves separate spaces.

Two of them have the perimeter walls as their outer limit. For exhibition purposes there should be a
second layer wall system that is positioned with some distance from the perimeter walls. These sec-
ondary walls should be semi matt white painted plasterboards.
The third gallery is fully acclimatized to museum standard. This gallery will have glass walls and door
to separate it from the rest of the Museum.
The atmosphere of the galleries could either be very light, almost white, with white floors and white
plaster board walls or a more concentrated, natural palette of wooden floors and concrete walls.
This depends on the mood of the artefacts included in the collection.
The gallery ceilings
As there should be a high degree of lightness and neutral background in the spaces functioning as gal-
leries, the ceiling throughout should be almost invisible, or rather not draw too much attention from
the room itself. The main lighting principles could be integrated into the ceiling system, either as a
separate system suspended from the ceiling, or an integrated recessed or indirect lighting system.
This needs to be further developed in DD. The same goes for acoustic treatment throughout the Mu-
seum. There are several options for integrating this as a part of the ceiling.
References atmospheres, materials and finishes

FINISHES
General galleries
Shell and core on Gallery 3 – 6, no finishes
Gallery 1 and 2
Floor: Limestone / pigmented concrete / hardwood (treated)

Walls: As plaza
Ceiling: Perforated, painted plasterboard with seamless joints
Doors: Concealed doors within the wall surface
Ramp floor: As plaza
Railing: Glazed with metal hand rail
Ceiling over ramp: Perforated painted plasterboard
Back of house area museum
Floor: Linoleum / polished concrete

Walls: Painted plasterboard / painted concrete
Ceiling: Suspended acoustic T-bar ceiling, painted concrete
Doors: Steel / laminate
Lightconcept: natural - artificial lightning

02.6.4 Outstanding Issues
02.6.4.1 The source

The Source is without doubt one of the central elements of the Cultural Center, and as such is bound
to open for strong opinions and diverging interpretation. It wants to be quiet yet active, open yet
sheltered, far yet within reach, hidden yet obvious. A place where the visitors will find the tranquillity
required to fulfill the journey started at the top of the ramp.
As an architectural experience it seems to gain a lot of depth from the addition of an outer walkway
reminiscent of a cloister. This approach creates a new shaded area that whishes to eliminate the cli-
mate barrier and become an outdoor space.
The practical and technical implications of this solution are far from simple and will need to be ana-
lyzed and solved during the course of DD.
View at the bottom of the source - Illustration by Mir Content of the source
02.6.4.2 Suggested areas of expansions
One of the areas of concern raised during the museum workshop held in Dhahran in the middle of
April was that during the transition between the access to gallery 2 and gallery 3 the visitor could ex-
perience a “drop of attention” and experience the exhibition as too scattered.
In order to avoid this situation while creating a more flexible structure we suggest the interested por-
tion of ramp to be widened by 2 meters. This has been confirmed by the proponent’s museum consul-
tant to be sufficient to transform a “transition area” into a usable exhibition space.
Rampp as a gallery space - Illustration by Snøhetta
2m
Rampp as a gallery space - Illustration by Snøhetta

Freightelevator Two other suggested areas of expansion are illustrated in the
Museum
& Greathall
4x6m
diagram.
One being a BOH function, possibly a restoration workshop to
MUSEUM be visible from the ramp while descending towards Gallery 3.
Lobby
Gallery 3 This is an area which in the current scheme is more than likely
F.F.75.90
excavated but not utilized.
The other area is the one defined as the “Lower Foyer”, which
Outdoor
Climate Ramp is too small for the functions thereby located in the current
scheme. These functions are:
Media room
MUSEUM Special collection
Concession Workshops
Live Storage Area
Visitors rest rooms
Agreement
'SOURCE'
523 sqm
By excavating a larger area around the tower we would also
Outdoor
Climate Ramp F.F.75.90 MUSEUM
allow the visitor to perceive its massive volume penetrating
Corridor to
Gallery 3
through the plaza and into the lowest areas of the museum.
MUSEUM
Lower Foyer
443 sqm
F.F.74.80
MUSEUM
Restrooms
MUSEUM
Gallery 3:
Full Climate Controll
1.323 sqm
F.F.75.90
Double Escalator from

Possible area expansions - Illustration by Snøhetta

02.6.5 Conclusions And Recomandations
02.6.4.1 Recommended lighting levels
At this stage the acoustic and lighting level design criteria needs to be reevaluated and established in
accordance with the current program and scope. This needs to be carried out in accordance with the
appointed exhibition designers and lighting specialists.
Moreover a further development of the timber screen will require a new sun study in order to offer the
best balance of daylight illumination and protection from direct sunlight.
02.6.4.2 Expansion options are recommended
We recommend the suggested expansion in museum areas to be developed further into the scheme.
More specifically, increasing the width of a section of the ramp will offer an increase in functional flex-
ibility with a minimal investment and guarantee a better variety of spatial experiences along the de-
scent to the source.
The creation of a back of house workshop directly below gallery two is achieved by making good use
of an area which is likely to be excavated anyway during construction. The possibility of a two step
intervention, where the bare shell is finished and made functional after the completion of the main
museum areas makes it an interesting alternative for an institution that desires to grow over time. Its
location in relation to the ramp makes it an ideal window for the public to experience the museum as
a living institution.
Lastly we recommend that the platform directly around the tower is expanded on the other side of the
tower itself. This will allow for a better placement of the Special Collection and Media Room functions
and for the much necessary rest rooms at level -3. More importantly this will set free the volume of
the tower from the excavated envelope around it, allowing for a better experience and understanding
of the Cultural Center as a whole.
02.6.4.3 The source as a space for quiet contemplation
The location and symbolic value of the Source as intended by our team makes it a natural destination
for the journey in history and culture that this museum will offer. As such it deserves a spiritual value
which is unique within the context of the complex. The research and understanding of this atmo-
sphere is the first step towards the definition of its physical boundaries.
02.6.4.4 Tower rooms floor issues
We recommend that for the orientation theatre and lower balcony floors, be designed as part of the
museum and ramp core and not dealt with as an integral part of the tower. This in order to provide a
good balance between ease of access to each of the platforms and highest possible degree of flexibil-
ity.
02.6.4.5 Gallery 3 climate control

While this is not a direct architectural priority we feel there is reason to reconfirm the desire to clima-
tize the entire area of Gallery 3 to museum quality standard. This question generates from a discus-
sion which took place during the museum workshop in Dhahran where two of the present museum
consultants stated that a fully climatized area of 600 to 800 m2 should prove to be enough for most
museums. If this is confirmed we recommend a reduction of the planned 1500 m2 to a lower target
which would allow for other priorities in the museum budget and a higher level of flexibility in the
placement of the necessary climate barriers.
View at the bottom of the source - Illustration by Mir
Chapter 02.07 PLAZA and CHILDRENS
02.07 Plaza and Childrens Discovery Zone
02.07.01 Introduction
The Plaza is the place within the Cultural Center where all the elements meet, both physically and
mentally. The space functions as a large foyer for all the cultural functions in the complex and can
accommodate large groups of people. Like a clearing in a forest it opens up and reveals it treasures.
At the same time this vast space dug out under the monosurface is the most urban in the whole cul-
tural center. The Plaza has strong urban qualities and can be understood as a square in a city.
In a conceptual interpretation of the Cultural Center the Plaza is located in the world of the “present”,
connected to the “past” below and the “future” above. In this context the Plaza becomes a meeting
point for reading the past and looking into the future. The Plaza itself functions as a reference box, a
space for understanding, preparing, reflecting and digesting the different experiences in the Cultural
Center
The plaza is strongly connected to the two entrances, the main entrance giving the visitor the experi-
ence of a grand procession from the outside to the inside of the Cultural Center, the second closely to
the Auditorium and the Cinema. The main entrance gives the visitor time to enhance the great
perspective of the exterior shapes prior to entering the large foyer, a platform from which to start the
exploration of the cultural content inside the pebbles and the historic journey down to the Source.
The Plaza itself will also function as a space to display the different activities in each part of the
Ariel view of Saudi Arabia
complex, and create an open public arena in the heart of the project. The plaza ties the diversity of
the Cultural Center together.
Persceptive of the Plaza, view from main entrance, illustarion by MIR Diagram: The mental worlds of the project
02.07.02 Description
Plaza concept
The Plaza is an urban space, and conceptually it relates to a

classic urban square. The two entrances create streets into
this grand open space, not unlike the narrow streets of Siena
into the Piazza del Campo. The contrast in the dimensions of
the street and the open square enhances the experience of the
space.
Narrow streets towards Piazza del Campo, Piazza del Campo, Siena, Italy
Siena, Italy
Diagram: The Plaza as an urban square Diagram: The Plaza concept

Program - scope
In the competition and Schematic Design (SDII) there has been no scope or program relating to the
Plaza area.
In the competition the area was defined as an “in between” area, functioning as a lobby, circulation/
mingling space. Due to the many different functions of the center, the scale and the amount of ex-
pected visitors is it necessary to provide a large space for circulation, meeting and orientation. In the
Cultural Center the Plaza has been given this role. In SD it was necessary to clarify and strengthen
the understanding of the size and layout of the Plaza area.
The functions relating to the Plaza can be divided in these main areas;
• The Plaza; Lobby zone on plaza dedicated to each function

(Library, Great Hall, Museum, Auditorium), Cafeteria,
ticketing and information
• “Off Plaza”; retail, lifelong learning, cafeteria serving, VIP, toilets, cinema,
• Children’s Discovery zone (see separate chapter)
• Back of house functions (BOH)
Inspirational image: The Foyer The Norwegian Opera House, by Snøhetta
For the SDII submission we have programmed areas relating to the Plaza on level 00 and level 01
as stated in the area summary below. This is based on a development from the competition and the
input given from the client.
Back of House
Plaza and “Off Plaza” nett area gross areas

level 0 Plaza 3950 3970
level 0 Retail 320 322
level 0 Toilets 170 171
level 0 VIP1 180 182
level 0 Storage 250 252
“Off Plaza”
level 0 Lobby core 60 61 Cinema VIP
level 0 Lifelong Learning 500 503 Toilets
level 0 Cafeteria serving 430 432
level 0 Storage / kitchen 400 402
level 0 Childrens 1550 1555
level 0 Cinema 440 442
level 0 Toilets 100 101 The Plaza
level 0 VIP2 150 152
level 0 Lobby cinema 130 132 “Off Plaza”
sum 8630 8677 Retail
Toilets
VIP
level1 Daily processing 220 222 Cafeteria serving
level1 Childrens, mezzanine 500 503 Storage / kitchen
sum 720 725 Childrens
Discovery Zone
Diagram: The Plaza and “Off Plaza” functions

The Plaza in SDII has a net floor area of approx 4000 square meters. The dimension of the space is
110meters by 80 meter and a height of 9-11 meters to the slightly domed ceiling. “Off Plaza” function
is about 2500m2 including the cinema. BOH is about 3000m2, on ground level 00nand 2300m2 on
level 01. In addition are plant rooms and loading dock area.
Development
In SDII the plaza area has been given a clear spatial boundary. The space is defined as a rectangular
box with a domed ceiling following the curvature of the landscape surface. The space becomes a refer-
ence box to understand and read the organic shapes of the different pebbles. It is important that the
Plaza contains this quality and functions as a background for the protruding objects.
Due to cost and functional requirement in SDII it was necessary to relocate many of the functions Inspirational image: Alhamra, Cordoba, Spain
from the lower level (level -1 to -3). The aim was to minimize the excavation on lower levels, with all
its implications. This exercise demanded an additional zone around the defined plaza wall, to accom-
modate these areas. This zone had to be on two levels, level 00 (c+84m) and on level 01 (c+88.5m).
In SDII it creates a two level area for “Off Plaza” function, directly linked to Plaza, Children’s Discov-
ery zone around the west oasis and BOH function for Auditorium, Museum and Great hall.
The loading dock layout has been clarified, now there is one loading dock for large vehicles (12me-
ters) on the north side on level 00 and one smaller on the south side on level -01 for 6meters vehi-
cles.
All staff parking has been moved to the south side, on level +1, not to mix public and non- public
functions, with its security and functional implications. These programmatic changes have been incor-
porated in SDII and have to be further investigated in DD, with direction from the client on car park-
ing and the solution for staff area.
Inspirational image: Caixa Forum, Madrid, by herzog & de Meuron
View at The Plaza, towards GH and main entrance, illustration by Snøhetta View at The Plaza, towards Tower and Auditorium, illustration by Snøhetta
Lobby zoning
The Plaza will be naturally divided in to different dedicated
lobby zones. It is one large space but can be subdivided in spa-
tial zone without using physical barriers like walls. At the main
entrance there is an area to the right creating an entrance
lobby zone for the Great Hall and the Great hall Oasis. The light
from the library void creates a space for the introduction of
the Library in plaza level. The floor area in front of the wooden
Mashrabiya makes an entrance zone from the Museum. Like-
Lobby zone Auditorium Lobby zone GH wise, the corner and area located around the second entrance
gives space for a lobby to the Auditorium.
Lobby zone Museum Cafeteria

Lobby zone Library The cafeteria is located in the southwest corner of the plaza,
and designed as a café with loose furniture towards the glass
wall of the oasis and floating into the terrace outside in the gar-
den. The cafeteria has a serving area adjacent behind the plaza
wall. The cafeteria seating area is approx 800m2, with a serving
capacity of 350 persons.
Diagram: Lobby zoning at Plaza

Ticketing/information
The ticketing and information stands will be a part of the heavi-
er furniture at plaza level. They will be located close to the two
entrances and be of be simple form with a design relating to the
material qualities of the floor.
Ticketing / information stand
Ticketing / information stand
Cafeteria seating area

Cafeteria seating area, on terrace in garden
Diagram: Cafe and Ticketing at Plaza Inspirational image: Cafeteria at Plaza

Key elements
The plaza is architectural defined by some key elements;
• The Entrances,
• The Plaza wall,
• The Columns
• The ceiling
Entrances
The main entrance is located in the same area as it was in the
competition. In SDII a second entrance has been introduced, in
a diagonal position to the main. The main entrance serves as
a procession, and is connected to the lush garden and existing
building on site. The area in front of the main
entrance is close to the drop off zone and the paths from the
garden. The entrance cuts into an elliptic wall shaped by the
interception of the two ovals in the site plan.
It is shaped like a valley, with vegetation on one side and a wa-
ter feature wall on the other. The entrance slopes slightly from
entrance level at c+86meters to plaza level at c+84meters.
The second entrance was incorporated both from a functional

and overall design point of view. The two entrances creates a
dynamic throughout the space, and a movement that links the
garden and the rings road together, not making the Cultural
Diagram: Cafe and Ticketing at Plaza
Center a dead end, but keeping it open to a wider spectre of
functional possibilities. A second entrance makes it possible to
organize the use of the cultural centre in different ways, for
instance one could close of the plaza at night time and have
one entrance open for the Cinema and the Auditorium. The two
entrances may also be used differently by frequent visitors and
those who visit the Cultural Center for the first time.
The design and functional layout for the entrances will be fur-
ther discussed in the last chapter, Outstanding issues. Due to
comment from client and our own design intent we will state
some possible changes for the entrances in further development
of the project. The aim to design an entrance that engages all
the senses.
Perspective: Main entrance view, illustration by Future Brands Inspirational image: Entrance water feature wall
Plaza wall
One of the main architectural features on the Plaza is the plaza wall. The plaza is high mural wall
ranging from 9-11 meters high. It is rustic in character, and is described as a rammed earth wall. This
is an ancient building technique, well known in the Middle East and Arabic world.
Rammed earth, also known as pisé de terre or simply pisé, is a type of construction material. It is an
age-old building method that has seen a revival in recent years as people seek low-impact building
materials and natural building methods. Traditionally, rammed earth buildings are common in arid re-
gions where wood is in scarce supply.
Rammed earth is one of the oldest building techniques on the planet, and began appearing in China
and Central Asia about 5,000 years ago. Portions of the Great Wall of China were made with rammed Earth walls in Petra, Jordan
earth, and the ancient Egyptians were skilled practitioners as well. These basic recipes use native soil
and about 3-5 percent of some kind of stabilizing agent, typically cement, but historically animal blood
and lime were used. This mixture is then compressed to about half of its original size and left to dry.
Due to its thickness and mural character we find it works naturally with the depth of the wall creating
ornaments and openings. One can find many great examples of this in Saudi Arabia and the Gulf re-
gion, such as the “Madain Salih” at Hegra and Petra, in Jordan. Our design intent is not to copy these
historic masterpieces, but reinterpret in a modern vision. We think this can be one of the areas in the
project that could be further developed as an integrated collaboration with an artist. The aim is to give
this architectural feature qualities of richness and cultural storyteller, giving a graphical tribute to the
history of the kingdom and the achivement of Saudi Aramco.
Rammed Earth wall in modern architecture
Rammed earth wall under constructionl
Diagram: Outline of Plaza wall Earth wall “Madian Salih, Hegra, Saudia Arabial
Colums
The columns of the Plaza are an important feature. There are three typologies of columns each related
to different structural systems; the columns around the source, the columns for the Library and the
general columns for the Plaza.
In the diagram for the different worlds of the project, the plaza is in the “present”. The columns can
be seen as representatives from each of the world, reflecting different material qualities relates to the
origin.
• Type 1: The columns for the Source _ “the past”, Rectangular and skewed
• Type 2: The Library columns_ “the future”, Circular shaped, (1100-1300mm in diameter)
• Type 3: General Plaza columns_ “the present”, Circular shaped, (900-1000mm in diameter)
Columns, straight or angled?

In SD II and in the Value engineering session there has been discussion whether the columns should
be straight or angled. In all the images presented from the competition and also during SDII the col-
umns of the Plaza have been slightlyangled. In and structural understanding it is important to divide
the different typologies of columns. The columns for the source follow the angel of the Mashrabyia and
the ramp so they have to be in a tilted and fanned composition, with a centerpoint in the middle of the
source. For the Library columns they have been placed due to an overall structural and design idea, Type 1:
and have cantilevered areas on both ends of the volume. Based on this the columns from the Library Columns around
the Source
are angled differently according to the structural system. At a design session we have looked into both
a straight version and an angled version of the general columns for the Plaza. Our conclusion is that
the rigged columns maintain the dynamic quality of the space and, works well with the overall pattern Type 3:
of movement throughout the plaza floor. A layout with straight columns would from an architectural General Plaza
point of view, create a more static space, especially towards the second entrance. columns
Type 3:
General Plaza
Type 2: columns
The Library
columns
Type 1:
Columns around
Inspirational image: Columns in the Foyer
The Norwegian Opera House, Oslo; by Snøhetta the Source
Columns study 1; Angled solution
Columns study 1: View from entrance with angled columns Columns study 1: View from second entrance with angled columns Columns study 1: View from entrance with angled columns
Columns study 2: Straight solution
Columns study 2: View from entrance with straight columns Columns study 2: View from second entrance with straight columns Columns study 2: View from entrance with straight columns
General ceiing, domed
Ceiling
shape in acoustic plaster
The domed ceiling over the Plaza is an internal offset of the
domed monosurface. It covers both the Plaza area and Museum
Gallery 2 and Gallery 3. There are many reqirements relating to
the ceiling, it will be a suspended ceiling ( 1200mm) from the
Ceiling joints in random
structure of the dome. It needs to accomadate ventilation, light-
pattern, recessed stripes
for lighting, ing, sprinklers and acoustic treatment. The large surface has to
air circulation etc. be subdivided and have expandtions joints for material move-
ment. We would like to work with an integrated design solution
to give the ceiling a simple expression yet with character.
Shadow gap in
ceiling
Diagram: Ceiling Plaza
Domed Ceiling over

The Plaza wall the Plaza
Section: Plaza ceiling Inspirational image: Dry desert

Off Plaza
The “Off Plaza” refers to function not located on the Plaza on
level 0, and is not included in BOH area. Functions such as;
• Retail
• VIP
• Toilets
• Cafeteria serving
• Life long learning
The retail is close to the main entrance and the escalator up to

the Library. It is 320 m2 on one level. VIP are found in two dif-
ferent locations both connected to the entrance situation. VIP1
are 180m2 and placed so it can be reached from the main en-
trance, the Plaza and the Great Hall oasis. VIP2 are 150 m2 and
serves the second entrance adjacent to the Cinema and close to
the auditorium. The detailed layout of these areas will be
developed in DD.
“Off Plaza”
Cinema VIP
Toilets
“Off Plaza”
Retail
Toilets
VIP
Life long learning
Cafeteria serving
Inspirational images: “Off Plaza” functionsl Diagram: “Off Plaza” functionsl

Openings
In the plaza area we need to design a lot of openings, both in the plaza wall and into each pebble.
• Openings in plaza wall

• Openings in pepple
• Openings towards oasis
We will develop an overall strategy for dealing with these openings, distinguishing the form of an
opening in the curvature of the pepples from an entrance through the earthy depth of the plaza wall.
We also have to address the design of the glass wall both to create a structure that is transparent and
gives a good view to the oasis, and to accommodate the necessary vestibule between inside and out-
side. This may be solved in a glass façade with two layers, where the variation of distance between
the layers creates the vestibule. The build up of the glass façade towards the oasis has to be worked
into an overall concept for the continuous edge around the oasis, both handling the need for sun
shading and other functional requirements for the landscape façade. Inspirational images: Openings in Plaza wall
Opening in pepple, void up to Library, illustration by Snøhetta
Opening in pepple, by Museum through Tower, illustration by Snøhetta Inspirational images: Transperant glass wall towards oasis
Meeting of the elements
As described in the introduction of this section, the Plaza is the space where all the elements of the
projects meet. In the design it will be necessary to separate the different elements from each other.
As an overall strategy there will be a detail with a shadow gap where the shape of the pebble meets
the plaza wall, and the same where the object protrudes the ceiling. This is very important for the un-
derstanding and separation of the elements in the project, to avoid them melting together.
Section: Gaps relating to objectl
Shadow gap Shadow gap

object and ceiling object and wall
Sketch Plaza: Gaps between wall and object, object and ceiling
Diagram: Principle sketch l
Shadow gap
object and wall
Section: Gaps relating to objectl Library and Childrens Oasis, illustration by MIRl
Childrens Discovery Zone
02.7.1 Introduction
In the competition project the Children´s Education Center was located in the Keystone. This was a
strong architectural statement with their location in the Cultural Center cradled between the Audito-
rium and the Library. This is a symbolic position stating their vulnerable size and constitution, but yet
their component had the function as a keystone that holds the composition together. A strong position
of the children´s component was also giving hope for the future success of the Cultural Center.
This component is important to the Cultural Center and represents a new function in the Kingdom that
is greatly anticipated and wanted.
During SD they have changed name to The Children´s Discovery Zone. Their program has also been
studied in different locations. The client strongly wanted the children moved down to the Plaza floor,
where they for some time during SD occupied the space under the Library pebble. An argument for
this location was easy access and adjacency to the oasis and the cafeteria so parents could observe
them.
Childrens
In addition, this component would be more exposed for the public. Discovery Zone
A final shift of the positions for the Library and Auditorium pebbles opened for reconsidering the
Children´s component. The current location is outside the Plaza wall in the space enveloping the oasis Childrens
and thus arranging for a natural flow between the indoor and outdoor playground area. Oasis
In addition, this location gives significance to the oasis as the “pebble” for The Children´s Discovery
Diagram: Location of Childrens Discovery zone and Oasisl
Zone. This “inverse pebble” like an indent in the ground making room for the oasis, represents a com-
ponent strongly related to outdoor activities. The indoor space located around the oasis will give some
privacy from all the people visiting the centre. The freedom to play and explore without being con-
stantly watched, is essential for children in order to develop self confidence and integrity.
Inspirational images: Childrens Discovery Zone and Childrens oasistr

The current indoor space for the Children´s Discovery Zone oc-
cupies a 77 by 40 meters space with the oasis cutting in on one
side with a ground floor area of 1500sqm. There is a 500sqm
mezzanine running the full length of the back space with a lift
and staircase connecting the two levels. There needs to be an-
other egress stair from the mezzanine. The overall free room
height is approximately 8-9 meters.
The first program brief accommodated for a total indoor area

of 4000sqm but was reduced to a total of 3000sqm indoor with
2000sqm outdoor area. They expect to draw close to 1000 chil-
dren pr day.
During the course of SD this component has undergone an-

other reduction and is now a total of 2000sqm where 1500sqm
is ground floor area and 500 sqm is mezzanine. In addition the
1000sqm outdoor area in the oasis which is being discussed in
the landscape chapter.
The program at this stage contains:

• permanent exhibitions ( 8 individual exhibition areas)
• children ´s library, to be dispersed throughout the exhibi-
tion areas
• office space
• common space (classrooms, labs, conference room, etc)
• support areas (kitchen, laundry, toilets, storage, etc)
Many of their functions call for minimum 6 meters free room

height. Parts of the area can accommodate for this given a
Plan proposal dated 080519, based on layout from client study of how to position the mezzanine.
Inspirational images: Childrens Discovery Zone and Childrens oasis

02.7.3 Description
Currently the Children´s Discovery Zone occupies a large floor
space with a mezzanine overlooking the oasis and the cafete-
ria terrace. The floor in the indoor space is ramping up to give
more view out to the oasis.
The Children´s Discovery Zone should be a vital component in

the Cultural Centre and accommodate for good learning experi-
ences through active participation, where learning by doing is a
major pedagogical approach.
Their exhibition spaces should give room for a playful and di-
verse environment appropriate for learning on many levels. The
need for children to be able to learn through experience and
practise is vital to mature their personality. In the Discovery
Zone they will be able to engage in all kinds of activities speci-
fied for the different age groups, spanning from age 0-12 years.
In the last part of SD we have worked on the relationship with

the indoor area and the oasis. (See Landscape description of the
oasis). The indoor area of the Discovery Zone has an approxi-
mate free height of 8-9 meters which allows for a mezzanine to
run the full length of the area. Here the offices and classrooms
can be located.
The layout at SD is based on a sketch from a design workshop

in Dhahran were a number of descending levels connect the
indoor with the oasis. Several ramps run around the perimeter
of the oasis and make easy access to the different levels. The
classrooms and offices are to be located on a mezzanine over
Plan proposal dated 080523, current layout for SDII submission the lower level of the exhibition space. The first layout diagram
show the client consultant´s sketch on program in this layout.
However, this layout was eventually not relating to the overall
plan and section and has been revised.
The current layout shows ascending levels from plaza through

the oasis and into the indoor space, giving the children an over-
view rather than sink them into the ground. This layout has to
be considered by the client and consultants to whether this can
work for their program.
Plan proposal dated 080523, cuurent plan for SDii submission

Inspirational images: Childrens Discovery Zone and Childrens oasis
Perspective of the Childrens Oasis, view ftowards terrace, illustration by MIR
Interiors_The Plaza and “Off Plaza”
The Plaza is the frame that holds the big picture of the cultural centre together. It is the central
underground Plaza, literally speaking, and the heart that distributes all of the visitors out into the
different components. It connects all the functions and is the point of departure for the experience of
the cultural centre as a whole.
This predominant position and function is set in an excavated volume in the ground under a slightly
vaulted roof. The roof is reflecting the underside of the mono surface landscape around the source.
We have yet to decide whether the suspended ceiling will follow the shape of the roof or be a
horizontal surface emphasizing the box shape of the Plaza volume.
As the Plaza is representing present time in our mental diagram and also the link between the past
and the future, the concrete and the abstract, it holds a special position in the architectural concept
of the centre.
It is connected to the ground, to the world of today and therefore should have a literally “down to
earth” atmosphere that can welcome everyone in an inclusive and inviting manner. Still this is the
first impression of the interior of the cultural centre and should have a slight air of overwhelming
surprise. “So this is what you find inside!”
The impression of surprise should rather lie in the urge to explore than in the more shocking effects
that burns out after the first encounter. The Plaza should help secure the future return of the visitors
Diagram: Concept _Past present, future
and their friends and family.
Inspirational images: Interior Plaza

Entrances
There are currently two entrances to the Plaza. They are cut like sloping corridors into the Plaza, or
like veins into the heart. One leads from the lush garden, the other one from the ring road circling the
site.
These veins into the heart should build up an atmosphere of anticipation and joy to what hopefully will
be an inspirational journey into culture, knowledge and learning.
Nevertheless, the visitors will mostly enter the Plaza through the main entrance from the lush garden.
The second entrance is more an evening entrance, directly leading to the auditorium which will have
evening shows.
The first impression as you come to the threshold between the garden outside and the Plaza itself will
be of great importance and will have to be further studied and developed in DD.
The Plaza wall

As the visitors enter the Plaza itself, the feeling of urban activity and of the many elements that pro-
trude the space, will be the most predominant impression. The cultural centre is expected to draw
large groups of people. Therefore the large space should provide a strong background for the many
activities.
Inspirational images: Piazza del Campo, Siena, Italy
As we are in the “earthy” part of the cultural centre the monumental Plaza wall made of rammed earth
should emphasize this dimension through materiality and texture. The presence of the rougher surface
of the wall should dramatise the contrast between an “earthy” material quality linking to the vernacu-
lar architecture of Saudi Arabia, set against the high tech facades of the protruding pebbles.
To add richness to the wall we have discussed engaging artists, local or international, to collaborate
on artwork integrated in the wall surface. This can be expressed as murals or as relief imprints on the
wall surface. This has to be further developed in DD.
Inspirational images: Plaza wall

Ceiling
The concept of the Plaza ceiling is that of dry and cracked earth, which has a non-linear and non-di-
rectional structure. Due to the many elements coming together in the Plaza, the ceiling grid is of ut-
termost importance. Since the abstraction of the Plaza elements are high due to only partially exposed
elements, a grid of non-linear and non-directional panels are the most preferable solution.
To stress the earthy quality of this area, the finish of the ceiling panels should be acoustic plaster
which is a cotton plaster airbrushed onto plasterboard to ensure a seamless surface with high absor-
bent performance. The panels should be large but needs expanding joints throughout the vast sur-
face, These joints should be utilized as technical positions for ventilation, sprinklers and lighting.
Floor
As the “earthy” texture and atmosphere should express the Plaza volume, the floor is the most
“grounded” surface of them all. The impression of the excavated box should also be felt by the floor
material.
Due to heavy use and wear the floor material needs to be sustainable and have strong durability.
We should in DD explore the different quarries in Saudi Arabia for stone material that can meet these
requirements and provide the colour and texture connecting to the wall.
There can also be artwork integrated in the floor, for instance to emphasize the areas around and un- Inspirational images: Ceiling plazal
der the different pebbles.
Lighting principles
The lighting principles of the Plaza should be integrated in the
architecture of the different elements.
Each meeting between the Plaza box and the pebbles should
have a borderline that has recessed lighting to enforce the form
of this meeting.
The ceiling concept gives room for recessed lighting in the depth
of the expansion joints between the ceiling panels.
The wall should probably be lit from below by lighting recessed

in the floor or possibly another recessed transition detail be-
Inspirational images: Floor plazal tween wall and ceiling.
Furniture Elements
There will be a need for a few solid furniture elements on the Plaza floor, such as Retail
ticketing and information counters and possibly information stations for individual Floor: Natural stone
digital search for information about the program of the cultural centre. They need Walls: Glass and painted plasterboard
to be visually dominant with strong form and design, yet convey a certain calmness Ceiling: Suspended acoustic plasterboard
of expression in the midst of the rumble and activities of the Plaza. Doors: Glass and laminate
Natural stone cladding “growing” straight out of the floor is an obvious option. Co- Toilets and rest rooms in public areas
rian is another possibility, a very flexible and seamless composite material of great Floor: High quality ceramic tiles / natural stone
durability. Coloured glass panels in painted steel construction or even a rough Walls: High quality ceramic tiles / natural stone
wooden design could work. No cubicles, only solid walls
Ceiling: Seamless acoustic treatment
The loose furniture of the cafeteria and adjoining cafeteria terrace could have a Doors: Sound proofed, high quality material
vivid colour on chairs and table tops to contrast the earthy palette of the Plaza box.
The loose furniture groups should “spill” out on the Plaza floor to provide human Lifts
scale to this manifold space. Floor: Hardwood
Walls: Hardwood frame with additional glass / mirror
Ceiling: Hardwood, indirect lighting
“Off Plaza” functions
These functions are placed behind the Plaza wall on two sides.
VIP room
Their material finishes need to be further explored but should be connected to the
Floor: High quality carpet / oiled hardwood
Plaza by earthy
Walls: Oiled hardwood panels / polished plaster walls / stucco finishes
references of a lighter hue and finer texture than the main space.
Ceiling: Oiled hardwood ribs / glass / suspended seamless stretch ceiling
Interior Materials Plaza
Royal toilet:
Plaza Floor: Natural stone
Floor: Limestone / polished and pigmented concrete Walls: Natural stone
Walls: Rammed earth No cubicles, only solid walls
Ceiling: Acoustic plaster Ceiling: Seamless acoustic treatment
Doors: Concealed and recessed doors within the wall material / glass fronts Doors: Sound proofed, high quality material
Cafeteria
Floor: Same as plaza
Walls: Same as plaza
Ceiling: Same as plaza
Doors in main walls: Concealed within the wall surface
Children´s Discovery Zone

Floor: White concrete, linoleum / carpet in rooms
Main walls: White concrete
Secondary walls: Glass, soft material partition wall system, painted plasterboards
Ceiling: Suspended acoustic T-bar ceiling in separate rooms / under mezzanine.
Doors in main walls: Concealed within the wall surface
Secondary doors: Glass, laminate
02.07.03.1 Entrance situation
The design of the main entrance has changes from the com-
petition scheme to SDII. From arriving to the Cultural Center
through an entrance pebble, into the Entrance lobby with sky-
lights to the exterior, a visitor will now be entering through an
open “valley that cuts into the monosurface along a water fea-
ture wall on the right hand side.
The change in the design was mainly based on a negative re-

sponse on the entrance proposal from the client. The general
impression stated that the entrance was too dark and had an
“underground” atmosphere. The distance and content of the
Entrance lobby were also questioned.
As a design solution we believe that the competition proposal

had many advantages. It created a covered and climatized en-
trance with the Entrance pebble as a clear first signal of the Cul-
Entrance situation in Competition, illustration by MIR
tural center. The Entrance lobby can be used as transition zone
and a introduction to the activities of the Cultural Center.
It should be possible to combine the qualities of the competition
layout within the present scheme.
Another important design issue is the angle and position of the
walls creating the entrance space. In the current entrance solu-
tion is wide towards the lush garden and narrows towards the
internal plaza, as a contrast to the large space within the Plaza.
This creates a strong verticality to the entrance opening.
However it might seem that the competitions scheme more
horizontal entrance created a grander and more democratic
approach to the project.
The Entrance pebble in the competition scheme streched the

spatial presence out of the Cultural Center and into the lush
garden. Functioning as a thershold and a transition area be-
tween the outer world and the CC.
We recommend investigating this design issue in the beginning

of DD, as we experience that important qualities have been lost
in the present scheme.
We have looked into this and it can be solved with a covered
climatized solution or a semi-covered solution. To proceed with
the investigation we need response and direction from the
client.
Entrance situation in Schematic Design, illustration by Future Brands

Diagram: Angled and position of entrance wall in SDII Sketch: Vertical, dimension and view in current scheme
Diagram: Angled and position of entrance in possible change, Sketch: Horizontal, dimension and view in Competition scheme
competition solution in current plan
02.7.4.2 Program Children’s
Program
There is a need to state a final program and a definition of
needed room heights and areas for the different elements in the
program.
Loading dock
There have been comments from the client about the need for a
loading dock dedicated for the Children´s Discovery Zone. Dur-
ing SD the number and location of the loading docks throughout
the centre has been an ongoing issue. The need to make this
more optimal has resulted in two locations. The one bordering
on the Children´s Discovery Zone is now the Library loading
dock located at level -1. There is currently no program or ex-
cavated area underneath the Children´s but this can be further
discussed in DD. The Library loading dock can also function for
the Children´s Discovery Zone given that the elevator is the
main access up to the area.
Aquarium
In a more recent program brief there has been plans for an
aquarium in the Children´s Discovery Zone. This will be located
near the entrance to the Children´s space. Such a feature may
need a technical room connected to the space. This has to be
investigated in DD.
02.07.04 Recommendations – conclusions
Conclusions
• Entrance situation has to be redesigned.

• Further input from client relating to program for “Off Plaza” functions.
• Program for The Children´s Discovery Zone has to be finalized.
• Layout for The Children´s Discovery Zone has to be finalized.
Recommandations
• Client/Snøhetta: Start DD with a design process and workshop relating to the entrance
situation with necessary input from client.
• Design team: Further development of structural strategy for columns on the Plaza, from a
structural and design point of view.
• Snøhetta: Investigate materials suitable for the Plaza, floor wall and ceiling.
• Client: Upgrade the Plaza area to category 1 for material finishes.
• Client/Snøhetta: Develop the Plaza wall as an integrated art project.
• Client/Snøhetta: Develop the content and design of the oasis in close relationship with plaza
functions.
• Client: Clarify the car parking situation and staff area (possible third oasis) in the beginning of
DD.
• Client/Snøhetta: Start DD with a design workshop where all important issues relating to the
development of The Children´s Discovery Zone are the topics.
• Design team: Further development of the structural system and general layout for The
Children´s Discovery Zone closely related to the development of the adjacent oasis.
Perspective of Plaza, view from main entrance, illustration by MIR
Chapter 02.8 TOWER and KEYSTONE
02.8.1 Introduction Tower & Keystone
The vertical volume of the Tower Pebble will make the The King
Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture a landmark in the
dessert landscape. The Tower structure can be considered the
spine of the complex, raising from the below grade spaces of
the Museum and Source and up to a light and airy atmosphere
in the top 85 meters above the Landscape level. The Tower is
positioned in the very centre of the site and is a point of refer-
ence both horizontally and vertically.
The Keystone plays the role of being the Key to the geom-
etry of the Pebble composition. The only pebble lifted off the
Landscape level, cantilevering over the Source reflecting the
historic site. It’s symbolic value on the site is striking, and the
content of the volume is given great importance. The Keystone
represents the Future and has the potential to develop into it’s
own typology.
The cross section from the Library to the Auditorium through

the Keystone and the Tower is an important connection in the
understanding of the overall architectural concept. Ideally the
Keystone would be programmatically linked both to the Library
and Tower - dependent on both. The Tower´s potential link to
the Auditorium will be addressed in the further development of
the Tower brief (DD).
FUTURE
CROSS CONNECTION
PAST
Keystone
Tower
The Tower brief is a mix of public and administrative areas. The process of finding the optimal use to The Keystone has been subject to intense discussions regarding
serve the intention of the center is still ongoing and will be discussed further in the chapter Outstand- its programmatic use. We will touch on this matter under the
ing Issues 02.8.4.1 (progress into DD). In this chapter, based on the SD drawings issued the 090508, chapter Outstanding Issues 02.8.4.6. Currently the Keystone is
the Tower holds the administration program of the entire complex as well as the Media Centre (semi the Grand Reading Room of the Library with it’s main entrance
public) and the public section with Restaurant and Observation Lounge on the top three floors. The from the Library on level 4. Secondary entrances on Library lev-
Tower core also serves as an egress route from the Library and Keystone at levels 3-5 down to the el 3, and Tower level 3 and 4 with access to the Media Centre in
Landscape level (2). Technical floors are distributed on three floors, one serving the Keystone volume. the Tower on level 3. Vertical transportation is provided mainly
through the Library, supported with elevators and egress route
Administration: An early estimate done by the client concluded that the Centre would need approxi- through the Tower. The Reading Room will contain 10 000 books
mately 230 staff members; 170 being provided workplaces in the central Tower and 60 distributed in from the Library collection including a collection of rare books.
the public areas (receptions/children centre etc.) Included support functions (meeting rooms/toilets/
central copy- and storage rooms etc.) This gives around 1700 m2 nett area / 7 floors, measuring
around 10 m2 pr employee (circulation and lobbies not included in nett area). Due to the needs of
stabilizing the structure, public- and staff elevators, egress stairs and MEP shafts for a building of this
kind (high rise/mixed use), the core of the building is rather substantial. We will look into this matter
more closely under the chapter Outstanding Issues 02.8.4.2 to discuss options for the use and opera-
tion of the Tower to optimize the usable space. Relocation of administration will be discussed under LEVEL TOWER nett floor area gross floor area
Outstanding Issues chapter 02.8.4.5. level 0 Ground floor 287
level 1 Technical 176 311
TOWER level 2 Admin. 158 335
level 3 Media Center 175 361
14/15 SKY LOUNGE level 4 Admin. 196 394
13 FINE DINING RESTAURANT level 5 Technical 212 418
level 6 Admin. 237 457
12 RESTAURANT KITCHEN level 7 Admin. 251 481
11 TECHNICAL FLOOR
10 EXECUTIVE FLOOR level 10 Admin/Board 275 533
05 READING ROOM
level 11 Technical 280 546
09 ADMINISTRATION
level 12 Restaurant Kitchen/Tech. 292 553
04 READING ROOM 08 ADMINISTRATION level 13 Restaurant 272 529
KEYSTONE
level 14 Observation Deck 229 475
03 READING ROOM 07 ADMINISTRATION
level 15 Observation Deck Mezz. 100 250
06 ADMINISTRATION

05 TECHNICAL FLOOR SUM 3388 6949
04 ADMINISTRATION
LIBRARY
AUDITORIUM 03 MEDIA CENTER

02 ADMINISTRATION LEVEL KEYSTONE nett floor area gross floor area
01 TECHNICAL FLOOR
PLAZA
level 3 Conference Room 130 359
00 GROUND FLOOR
MUSEUM level 4 Dialog & Discussion Space 160 393
level 5 Dialog & Discussion Space 100 421

MASTER SECTION SUM 390 1173

02.8.3 Description
02.8.3.1 Tower
Structure
The Tower can be considered the spine of the complex, keeping the connection from the past, rep-
resented in the Museum below grade spaces, to the light and futuristic Sky Lounge at the top of the
Tower. The concrete core, containing elevators, stairs and shafts, anchors the structure to the founda-
tions and provides stability in the composition. The double skin facade allows for openings in the inner
skin while the outer skin has it’s independent expression, giving the Tower it’s monolithic language.
Columns along the perimeter of the inner skin carry the loads of the slabs which leaves the floors
column free. The structural diagram for the Tower will be discussed in more detail under the chapter
Outstanding Issues 02.8.4.3. See 02.09 Facade for further information and illustrations on the double
skin.
Light
The Tower will strive to maintain it’s monolithic expression, even at night with light seeping through
the facade openings. This requires a close study on indirect daylight that can diffuse the outline of the
openings in the inner skin of the facade when observing the building from a distance. The use of artifi- REF. PICTURE HORIZON
cial light in the facade cavity can camouflage the floors labs for the same reasons. For the tower floors
2-12 the air handling systems (heating/cooling) are based on approximately 30% transparency in the
facade. The top three floors, 13-15, will offer a spectacular experience of the landscape horizon and
changing light of the desert sky.
The Sky Lounge and Fine Dining Restaurant

The very top of the Tower holds the most significant public attractions; a Sky Lounge on two levels
and a Fine Dining Restaurant. The atmosphere is airy and light, but keeps it’s intimacy in emphasizing
the dome of the Tower by playing with light from the sky. The long, soft and quiet desert horizon dra-
matizes as it is split into shorter sequences by the window strips following the perimeter in the verti-
cal direction of the room. The openings will relate to human sizes and become personal experiences of
the surrounding environment.
REF. PICT. TOWER STRUCTURE REF. PICTURES FOR TOWER SKY LOUNGE STRUCTURE AND LIGHT REF. PICTURE SKY AND HORIZON
REF. PICTURE MEDIA LOUNGE Media Centre - A center of information for the press and
public
From the “The King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Cul-
AUDITORIUM
ture” web site:
MEDIA CENTER
“The King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture is pleased to share
GRAND READING ROOM news of our plans and programs with the media and the public — both online
now, and at the state-of-the-art Media Center that will be located at our
landmark museum and cultural center once it opens to the public. There,
we will offer dedicated facilities and programs designed for members of the
press, such as formal media briefings and private tours of the Center.”
LIBRARY
REF. PICTURE FORMAL MEETING SPACE The Media Center’s objectives are as follows:
• Provide a place for the press to do work and file their stories
during the center’s events and activities.
• Provide a place to conduct press conference, press briefing
and media training workshops.
• Provide a place for social interaction amongst media personnel
in a comfortable setting equipped with internet access, TV and
other media-related equipment.
MEDIA CENTER IN RELATION TO ADJACENT FUNCTIONS IN THE
CURRENT SCHEME The suggested place requirements to fulfill the above mentioned
objectives are as follows:
REF. PICTURE INFORMAL MEETING SPACE
• An executive lounge along with catering service (150 m2)
• A press briefing room holding 40 people (100 m2) with live
broadcasting capabilities
• Interviewing room with audio-visual equipment (20 m2)
• A space to accommodate 25 PCs, plus additional wireless lap
tops
Currently, (as shown on the SD set of drawings), the Media

Centre is located on level 3 and 4 in the Tower with direct
access to the Keystone. A different layout will be presented
under the chapter Outstanding issues in connection to future
REF. PICTURE LOBBY AREAS use of the Keystone and a revised layout for the general Tower
floor.
Administration
The general floors of the Tower as shown on the SD set of
drawings indicate the workspaces for the KC Administration.
The areas are open and flexible that invites a variety of use. In
ADMINISTRATION FLOOR IN TOWER - OPEN PLAN OFFICE LANDSCAPE the chapter Outstanding Issues 02.8.4.1 the scope of the Tower
will be reconsidered according to the ongoing discussion on
optimizing the various components in order to reach the best
design and function of each component in the complex.
INTERIOR

The Tower is the spine of the cultural centre. Its form, erected above the Source and into the sky,
make the Tower represents the vision and view out beyond the boundaries of the site. The Tower is a
component undergoing frequent changes and will have to be further developed in DD.
The many discussions about content and distribution of program makes it hard to launch any far
fetched visions around the atmosphere and material finishes at this point.
Developing the program for the observation deck, now seen as a Sky Lounge, will be an ongoing issue
in DD as this is an important experience of the centre as a whole.
SKY LOUNGE
The final destination when going up the elevator from the Plaza, will take the visitors into a volume
that hopefully will not be quite what they expected! In other words there is an element of surprise in
entering the Sky Lounge for the first time.
The room should be light, glazed and shiny and have a slightly high tech expression to it.
The inner skin of the space is seen as glass of transparent and opaque finishes to float flush and
continuously on the entire wall surface.
The window structure is vertical openings in the facade giving a more abrupt and sequenced
experience to the view out. This, we believe, will give some intriguing experiences with the sky,
horizon and light and still provide a magnificent view out on to the landscape below and the view.
There will be a refreshment bar and in addition some comfortable and simple, yet striking, seating
arrangements to add to the feeling of lounge and an almost meditative space.
FINE DINING RESTAURANT

Following on thoughts and discussions around this function, it seems to indicate the link between the
Sky Lounge and the Fine Dining Restaurant.
The wall material should be the same in order to open up for an open plan solution, with a floor plate
cut back to make a strong connection between these two functions.
The interior and pieces of furniture should indicate an aura of exclusiveness and elegance.
There will be artificial lighting arrangements to manipulate the mood and atmosphere after sunset.
FINISHES
Sky lounge floor 14 + mezzanine

Floor: shiny finish hard surface
Walls: Opaque glass panels flush with window openings
Ceiling: As walls
Doors: Glass and metal as part of wall structure
Fine dining restaurant floor 13

Floor: High quality hardwood and carpet inlay
Walls: Opaque glass panels flush with window openings
Ceiling: Stretch ceiling with integrated or backlit lighting system
Doors: Glass and metal as part of wall structure
Representative floors; level 3, 4 and 10 (lounges)

Floor: Oiled hardwood / high quality wool carpets
Walls: Oiled hardwood panels / painted plasterboards / glass / mirror
Ceiling: Painted perforated plasterboards
Doors: Oiled hardwood / glass
Lifts public
Floor: Hardwood
Walls: Hardwood frame with additional glass / mirror
Ceiling: Hardwood, indirect lighting
Lifts staff
Floor: Linoleum
Walls: Stainless steel frame with additional glass / mirror
Ceiling: Stainless steel frame, indirect lighting
Administrative floors; level 2, 6, 7, 8 and 9

Floor: Linoleum or carpets
Walls: Painted plasterboard / glass
Ceiling: Painted plasterboard, suspended acoustic ceiling
Doors: Laminate or glass
Technical floors; Level 1, 5, 11 and 12 (kitchen, see separate list

below)
Floor: Painted concrete / metal grates (high perforation)
Walls: Raw and painted concrete, painted plasterboards
Ceiling: Fireproofed and painted steel construction / raw concrete
Doors: Painted steel doors / laminate
Kitchen
To be further specified in collaboration with kitchen supplier
Floor: Vinyl, safe step / ceramic tiles
Walls: Ceramic tiles
Ceiling: Hygienic, suspended acoustic ceiling
SKY LOUNGE Supporting areas technical and staff, including pebbles and plaza
Floor: Linoleum / industrial wooden floor
Walls: painted plasterboard
Ceiling: Painted plasterboards, acoustic suspended ceiling
Doors: Laminate
Toilets and rest rooms staff

Floor: Ceramic tiles
Walls: Ceramic tiles
Cubicle walls; Laminate or aluminium
Ceiling: Suspended acoustic T-bar ceiling
Doors: Laminate
02.8.3.2 Keystone
Structure
The Keystone is a steel frame structure spanning between the
Tower and Library, cantilevering over the Source. The frames
are faceted to closely follow the shape of the outer skin as
the volume will be experienced as one holistic room. The floor
slabs in the Keystone are supported by the Tower and Library
construction and diminishes as the volume cantilevers. A spi-
raling stair is the main load in the “light” end of the Keystone,
framing the view down into the Source and creating a dynamic
movement connecting the three levels.
REF. PICT. READING ROOM ORGANIZATION
Light
The opening in the “belly” is the main source of daylight in the
Keystone. The set back of the floors lets the light deep into the
room. The interior surfaces will be treated to reflect the light and
emphasise the spectacular shape of the volume. Supplemen-
tary indirect daylight will be considered as we move into DD but
treated in a way where the focus remains at the Source and
Landscape. As seen by night there will be the mysterious play of
light between the Keystone and the Source that draws the at-
VIEW TO THE SOURCE tention and stirs the curiosity.
Connections
The Keystone dependence on both the Tower- and the Library
pebble will be emphasized in the entry situations. Openings
where you enter through the depth of the double skins creates
a transition zone from the one atmosphere to the other. The
development of these architectural elements will proceed as we
REF. PICT. READING ROOM WALLS learn to understand what will be the content and life of the Key-
stone volume.
REF. PICT. READING ROOM MATERIALITY
The Grand Reading Room

The Grand Reading Room is a celebration of the Library atmo-
sphere where the visitors will experience a calm and concen-
trated space. Bookshelves will be integrated into the walls of the
volume, leaving the center of the room to seating arrangements
and study cells. The space is a quite zone and will have limited
access for the general public.
In the chapter Outstanding Issues 02.8.4.6 the scope of the

Keystone is changed to a Dialog, Thinking and Discussion Space
according to an ongoing discussion within the client body. In our
opinion the driving force in developing this spectacular room ex-
ists in the architecture of the pebble. The presented scheme can
GRAND READING ROOM PLAN
be taken into DD regardless of the decision on scope.
LEVEL 05
GRAND READING ROOM
MEZZANINE
LEVEL 04
GRAND READING ROOM
MAIN ENTRY
LEVEL 03
GRAND READING ROOM
RARE COLLECTIONS VIEW TO THE SOURCE
KEYSTONE VOLUME
VIEW FROM THE STAIRS INTO THE KEYSTONE VOLUME

INTERIOR
The Keystone has had throughout the project a number of functions. This is not a surprise given its
strong location and position in the design of the centre itself.
Positioned between the Library and the Tower and not the least, above the Source, gives this volume
an extra strength as symbolic metaphor for the program and ambitions for the cultural centre.
The Keystone is a small and concentrated space related to the other components, and this size allows
for experiencing the whole pebble as you enter there.
One strong feature in the Keystone is the big opening on the lower front wall allowing
for a view down to the Source. In order to be able to see down into it, you have to
spiral around the opening. This makes the staircase an important element and also an
element that through the right material can transport light further into the Keystone.
In the current drawings (SDII), the Keystone is drawn as a “Reading Room” and closely connected
to the Library. Meanwhile, there is a discussion about finding the optimal content of this pebble and
there is a strong ambition for developing the Keystone as a “Dialog, Thinking and Discussion Space”
bridging between the Library the Media Centre and Life Long Learning Program in the Tower. In our REF. PICT. SOURCE OF LIGHT
chapter “Conclusions and recommendations” we will make a recommendation for this concept and
develop accordingly. However, the main concept of either of these options, will be to emphasize the
inside pebble as one holistic form with floor plate mezzanines and a spiralling staircase defining the
inside as an object put into the Keystone volume.
THE INNER SKIN FINISHES
The inner skin exposes the elements that make the shape of the Keystone. By working with these Keystone (Grand Reading Room/ Dialog, Thinking and Discussion
shapes as the main wall elements we are accentuating the volume. The program opens for an air Space)
of exclusiveness in the finishes and surface treatment. In order to clarify the shape of the pebble Floor: Oiled hardwood / high quality wool carpets
through the wall material, we have discussed making each element a refined panel upholstered in Walls: Oiled hardwood panels / leather upholstered panels (not padded)
leather with exposed seams running through defining the panel shapes. It is important that the panels Ceiling: As walls
Ceiling under mezzanines: Treated according to floor material with acoustic
should not be padded but sharp and precise. The matt finish of the leather or likewise material, will treatment incorporated
help diffuse the strong light coming through the low opening out. The colour of the wall panels should Doors: As wall material
be, for instance, a dark aubergine or reddish brown, to make the contrast to the daylight opening
more dramatic.
THE STAIRCASE AND FLOOR PLATE MEZZANINES

These features should appear as one element which is connected through colour or materiality.
The staircase spiralling around the opening to the Source should have deep stairs with low tread, in
order to slow the walk more like a procession. The railing and balustrade could be frosted glass which
will help diffuse the strong light coming from below. The glass will spread the light like a lighting
fixture.
The staircase and the floor plates should be the same material, possibly oiled and bleached hardwood
or even with carpet inlay in the seating areas.
FURNITURE
The overall atmosphere should be that of concentration and focus. If the option will be a “Reading
Room” the focus will be on the books and refined library content. The volumes of shelves can be
SPIRALING MOVEMENT
a strong organizer on the floor plates and the reading tables and chairs should emphasize a more
secluded and private room for concentration and learning. If the option is “Dialog, Thinking and
Discussion Space”, the room will be furnished as a lounge, with comfortable seating, low tables and
bookshelves. In this option a refreshment bar will be integrated on the middle level.
LIGHTING
The lighting principles of the Keystone should be indirect, with possibly individual lamps according to
program. The indirect lighting needs to be integrated in the floor plates and stair giving uplight to the
pebble´s inner skin.
02.8.4.1 Tower scope
Over the last period the Tower has been subject to discussions regarding the program scope. In the
following we present a study where the administration will be relocated and the Tower given a more 15 SKY LOUNGE MEZZ.
public content. A Life Long Learning program developing from the initial Library education scope, gives
the Tower a stronger identity as the spine in the Center and links up to the Library and Keystone. This
strengthens the role of the Keystone as it is more strongly bridging the two neighbouring pebbles. 14 SKY LOUNGE
Text from the document “Life Long Learning June 2008” (ARAMCO):
13 RESTAURANT\KITCHEN
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Cultural - Lifelong Learning Program
Definition: Lifelong Learning is the extension of educational opportunities to members of the community who feel a need
12 TECHNICAL
for further training of any sort, also known as continuing education.
Purpose of the Program: Today, the knowledge and skills acquired in institutions of formal education are typically not
sufficient for a professional career spanning three or four decades. Professionals and job seekers are looking to new forms 11 LIFE LONG LEARNING
of education and interdisciplinary experiences to expand and update their knowledge. The purpose of the King Abdulaziz 10 LIFELONG LEARNING
Center for Knowledge and Cultural Lifelong Learning Program is to provide, in partnership with the government agencies,
and existing adult and community education projects, comprehensive development/training activities for members of the
09 LIFELONG LEARNING
community providing structured programs ‘best practices” and performance criteria for adult education programs related to
Workforce and Small Business Development, Education Support Services and Community Building.
Mission: To foster in a dynamic and robust way life-long learning for social and economic progress by providing the
leadership and support to adult education programs that prepare members of the community to carry out their roles as
workers, parents, family members, responsible citizens and community participants.
Vision: To provide members of our community through digital and conventional means with the knowledge and skills 06 LIFELONG LEARNING
necessary to compete in a global economy, to exercise the rights and responsibilities of citizenship, and to be involved in
their children’s education.
05 TECHNICAL
Goal: Our goal is to: 04 VOLUNTEER CENTER

• Promote stronger families, upward mobility, and active citizenship through effective basic education services.
• Integrate art and culture as an essential component of human development in local community 03 MEDIA CENTER
Strategy: There are three major areas of focus for the Lifelong Learning Program: 02 VIEWING DECK
1. Workforce and Small Business Development
2. Education Support Services
3. Community Building and Civic Engagement 01 TECHNICAL FLOOR
1. Workforce and Small Business Development

The intended target for this area will be the local workforce and small business owners. The aim is to provide the
00 GROUND FLOOR
necessary skills and tools for career advancement with information that will enhance their comprehension of opportunities
in the realm of new business and entrepreneurship through workshops that will assist in guiding their careers and goals.
Recommended courses and workshops for this program will include the following:
English as a Second Language: Academic English / Vocational English Academic English / Technical English
Self Development: Basic Marketing / Basic Communication. / Basic Computer Applications (MS Office) / Basic Computer
Applications (MS Office) / Goals Settings / Leadership Skills / Habits of Excellence.
2. Education Support Service

The target population for this area will be the teachers and educators. The goal is to improve the practitioner’s skills in
order to meet and exceed the standard benchmarks for the local school systems. Teachers will be an important segment of
the community that will play a vital role in facilitating SACC overall mission and objectives.
Recommended courses and workshops for this program will include the following: Staffing requirements
• 1 Department Head
Education Development: Basic Educational Theory / Advanced Educational Theory • 1 Administrative Assistant for Department Heads
Self Development: Incorporating Technology in the Classroom / 7 Habits of Highly Effective People • 1 IT specialist
• 2 Program Facilitators
3. Community Building • 12 Professional Educators
This area will focus on the general public, both Saudi citizens and expats. The primary aim of this project is to benefit -------------------------------------------------
the adult community through collaborative initiatives utilizing the established partnership with the existing adult and 17 total Adult Learning & Training
community education projects in understanding multicultural societies and leading to a more tolerant community that Classrooms
adheres to high standard of civic responsibility. • 10-12 classrooms holding up to 15 individuals
Recommended courses and workshops for this program will include the following: • Computer workstations needed for participants and instructor
• Projection panels and interactive, collaborative whiteboard equipment
Educational Courses: Basic Computer / Arabic as a Second Language / Financial Planning / The Art of Giving: • Videoconferencing capabilities
Volunteerism • Art Studio for up to 20 inspiring artists
Hobby Workshops: Web Design / Digital Photography / Arts and Craft • 15 sq. meter area needed for storage, sending-receiving material,
Self-help: Personal Mastery / Psychology / Fitness photocopying of classroom materials
Offices
• Offices for 12 professional educators
• Offices for 4 adjunct/visiting educators
• Office for 1 full-time IT person (computer set up & maintenance,
filming, AV management)
• Office for Director
• Office for Admin. Assistant
•
Support Services
• Office for 2 Program Administrators—1 to administer Learning
Management System (create catalog of courses, register participants,
coordinate online learning programs, collect evaluations, review
evaluations of courses/instructors) and 1 to host program participants
(help with travel arrangements, welcome attendees, coordinate
luncheons, etc.)
• 15 sq. meter area needed for storage, sending-receiving material,
photocopying of classroom materials
The program will also assess other methods of adult education utilizing
e-learning, distance learning, and live broadcast event. The public relations
and marketing group will facilitate key initiatives relative to improvement in
comprehensive networking capabilities for the strategic goals of the Lifelong
Learning Program.
The Lifelong Learning Program will be an integrated part of the overall

educational program adopted by the Center. It will reinforce the goals of
the Center and promote intercultural understanding, stimulate personal and
community growth, and the development of an atmosphere of innovation
and civic involvement.
Volunteer Center
Another unit to be integrated in the Tower is a Volunteer Center
Text from the KC web site:
“Volunteering
Commitment and service to local communities
The King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture is committed to human
LIFE LONG LEARNING PROGRAM IN TOWER - ART STUDIO development in all its forms. At the Center, you may be inspired to increase
your own knowledge, or you may be inspired to contribute your time and
talents to help others increase theirs. Be part of the meaningful process of
giving and receiving that connects us to our neighbors and strengthens our
communities.”
02.8.4.6 Keystone scope
AUDITORIUM
The Keystone is undergoing a redefinition regarding scope. The
AUDITORIUM
alternative use will be a Dialog, Thinking and Discussion Space
MEDIA CENTER
MEDIA CENTER/LIFE LONG LEARNING having a closer relation to the Tower Media Center and potential
life Long Learning Program. In this context the large conference
GRAND READING ROOM
DIALOG, THINKING room of the Media Center will fill the lower level and serve as a
AND DISCUSSION ROOM break out area for both the Tower, the Library and potentially
the Auditorium. The Media center will then fit in to one floor of
the Tower (also considered the reduced size of the core). The
LIBRARY
more lively communication space will also attract a larger vari-
LIBRARY ety of people linking the adjacent activities together through the
Keystone.
CURRENT DIAGRAM RECOMMENDED DIAGRAM
02.8.5 Conclusions and recommendations

02.8.4.1 Tower Scope
The Life Long Learning Program in the Tower strengthens the Tower as the Spine in the overall compo-
sition. Architecturally we will like to study the possibilities in introducing openings between the floors
to better use the potential in the verticality of the Tower structure.
02.8.4.2 Tower core

We will continue the work on minimizing the core of the Tower in cooperation with Buro Happold.
Dependent on the final scope of the Tower we will have to define the occupancy loads to better deter-
mine the needs for vertical communication and egress.
02.8.4.3 Tower structure

The Tower structure will undergo an evaluation from week 25. The recommendation is to go for a steel
frame construction to optimize the qualities of the Tower areas and architectural expression.
02.8.4.4 Access from top of Source

An access through the Tower will have a minimal impact on the Landscape surface and be a conve-
nient way to enter the Plaza at is central point.
02.8.4.5 Third Oasis

The relocation of the administration around a third oasis in the Landscape surface will ensure a strong
connection to the Center.
02.8.4.6 Keystone Scope

To develop the Keystone volume towards a room for communication will be an intriguing way to
“bridge” the Center in the cross section - linking the Library to the Auditorium through the Keystone
and Tower. The media Center will strengthen its position in this context.
Chapter 02.9 FACADE
Concept
The King Abdulaziz Centre of Culture and Knowledge is to be built in an extremely demanding envi-
ronment. High temperature, frequent sand and dust storms, condensation will take their toll on the fa-
çade. We have investigated a number of options and believe a perforated mesh system is best suited
for this building.
The building is to be clad in 316 grade stainless steel spiral interweaving mesh. Much in the same
way as a traditional mashrabiyya provided social and environmental functions, such as protection,
shade and privacy, so does the mesh. Unsightly vents, outlets, junctions and glazing are hidden be-
hind the mesh, allowing the form to be remain strong. At night, however, glimpses into the building
will show the inner workings as the lit internal spaces create a patchwork on the façade from within.
In the Tower and Keystone the mesh consists of a walkway and is 1.1m wide. Elsewhere, that is below
30m and within reach of a ‘Cherry-picker’ the façade depth is reduced to 200mm. This system is ap-
plied to all the lower pebbles, namely the Great Hall, the Auditorium and the Library.
The mesh, whilst incredibly flexible and able to be easily formed, warped and wrapped on site will pro-
vide the form of the pebbles and the inner sealed wall will provide protection from the elements.
Generally, the mesh is tensioned over a galvanized steel frame fixed to the main building structure.
Behind the mesh a façade system utilizing a standardized insulated sandwich construction separates
inside from out.
The mesh will consist of differing scales of mesh with spirals from 7mm to 40mm in width spaced at
centres ranging from 50-200mm. This will break up the skin whilst still maintaining its form and of-
fering different views of the building in differing light conditions. Strong solid metal bands of wrapping
around the pebbles, similar to those found in stones provide an opportunity to join the differing mesh-
es and their directions in a clean and simple way. The mesh has a maximum width of 8m and is only
limited in length by transportation logistics.
The internal wall system will consist of a prefabricated standardized system of flat 1.50m wide facet-
ted panels that will be parallel to the mesh. The outer facing of the internal will be a stain and fade
resistant PVDF coating with a shiny finish so as to give the mesh a consistent background with. Stan-
dardised glazing units will fit into the panels.
Fitted between the differing mesh scales and where wrapping and joining the mesh would be difficult,
curved metal plates form strong bands across the façade.
The are five different wall types:

Wall Type A:
Mesh on galvanized steel frame with 600mm min. access walkway behind. Glazed internal wall system
(Tower)
Wall Type B:
Mesh on galvanized steel frame with 600mm min. access walkway behind. Solid internal wall system
(Tower and Keystone)
Wall Type C:
Mesh on galvanized steel frame. Solid internal wall system (Great Hall, Library and Auditorium)
Wall Type D:
Solid metal bands
Wall Type E:
Roofs
In addition, there are two other systems at the threshold of interior and exterior:
Source Screen
The Source screen is a structural timber diagrid hanging from the underside of the landscape. In the
language of the mashrabiyya it is angled to allow views to the source as one descends the ramp. It
also provides shade to the museum and affords views from the source into the museum space.
The screen consists of laminated timber with steel nodes which support double glazed glazing units.
The depth of the screen provide shade to the museum and the ramp.
Oases Facades
The facades to the oases are to be as transparent as possible, blurring the line between outdoor and
indoor,. Full height glazed units will span from underside of the landscape to the Plaza level. They will
be supported on glass mullions with a minimum of fixings. On the exterior, concealed retractable roller
blinds will provide shade to the Plaza areas.
Wall Types
Wall Type A
Wall Type A is mesh over glazed lights in the tower, approximately 30 % of the façade area. The mesh
cladding is supported on a galvanized steel structure that incorporates a walkway for maintenance,
cleaning and replacement of façade elements. The galvanized steel support structure is fixed back to
the main building structure.
In these areas, the mesh can become less dense with a slack spiral allowing better views from inside
to out whilst allowing the tower to maintain a purposeful homogenous form, smooth and shiny.
Wall Type A Section
Wall Type A
Wall Type B
Generally Wall Type B is utilised in the tower and keystone. It is essentially that of Wall Type A but
with solid prefabricated panels in lieu of glazing in the inner wall system. The frame supports a walk-
way and consists of approximately 70% of the tower façade and the whole keystone façade, excluding
the large glazed opening.
Wall Type B Section
Wall Type B
Wall Type C
Wall Type C is the majority of the façade system and is confined to the lower pebbles. As with Wall
Types A&B, the mesh is tensioned across a steel frame which unlike the above types is 200mm deep.
Wall Type C Section
Wall Type C
Wall Type D
Wall Type D is where the solid metal panels that are stretched around the façade meet and tie the dif-
fering size and spaced meshes together, much the same way as a garment is stitched together.
The panels allow what otherwise would be challenging junctions of mesh to be joined in a satisfactory
way. The panels are fixed to the mesh support structure and the cut mesh ends fixed behind the solid
panels.
Wall Type D Section
Wall Type D
Wall Type E
Wall Type’s E are essentially the walls carrying up over to become the roofs of the pebbles. The mesh
is not designed to carry weight and cannot be walked upon. It is important that the roof surface ap-
pearance is consistent with that of the walls so structure similar to that of the walls is utilised. The
mesh is raised over the roof weather surface by approximately 2.0m to allow clear access for cleaning,
maintenance and replacement. Access to this service area is provided from with the pebbles.
Wall Type E
Maintenance and Cleaning
The cleaning regime is consists of 2 methods. The tower facade is accessed by the walkway between
the mesh and the inner facade. There will also be provision to lift replacement facade elements within
this walkway.
The lower pebbles are accessed by ‘cherry picker’. The landscape surrounding the pebbles will be rein-
forced to take the weight of not only ‘cherry pickers but also Fire Brigade service.
The Source Mashrabiyya Facade Stripes

Continuing Studies
We are also undertaking the following studies for further development of the facade:
‘Basket weave’ mesh

The mesh material clad addition to Guys Hospital in London has caught our eye. Although it consists
of steel braid woven between stainless steel flat bars, we feel the effect of the ‘weave’ is mesmerising.
Using stainless steel flat wire as in the spiral wound mesh, we feel we could create and equally capti-
vating mesh that would be durable, long lasting, shine from afar and create interest up close.
The Guys Hospital addition is on the itinerary for the Facade Study Trip of the 11 June 2008.
Metal Scales
We are also investigating the use of metal plates fixed to a support frame, not unsimilar to that of the
mesh system. The scales would be tilted to be more open where views are required and tilted closed
where blank walls are behind.
Source Screen Study
Use of this system would give the building’s appearance a more aggressive stance and would show
the ravages of time greater than the mesh because of the increased surface area
Source Screen
The Source screen is at the heart of the complex and should reflect this. A number of studies have
been made and whilst we are still of the opinion that it should be fabricated from timber as a tradi-
tional mashrabiyya would be, we are continuing its development.
Illumesh
During a visit to the GKD Mesh factory in Druren Germany we were shown ‘Ilumesh’. This is a system
created by GKD where groups of red, blue and green LED are distributed over the mesh surface. This
provides the opportunity to display pictures and movies over vast areas of the facade
Next Phase
Source Screen Study
For the next phase we wish to continue investigating mesh facade (as our favoured system). We have
asked GKD Mesh to prepare a number of mock-ups, which ideally we would like to install on site to get
a clearer idea of performance , appearance and durability. The mock-ups will be full size and of areas
that may highlight problems we may encounter.
We would also like, with the client to visit the 2nd Children’s Palace in Ghangzhou, China. We have
identified this building, which is clad in mesh to have a number of similar conditions as we face. Dou-
ble curved surfaces, tight radius corners.
We will also continue to develop our relationship with GKD Mesh to find the optimal mesh arrange-
ment to be used in the project, develop efficient methods of manufacturing the patterns and investi-
gate different mesh weaves and surface qualities such as metal, glossiness, reflection and patterns.
Illumesh
Schedule of Mesh Areas (sq. m.)
Exterior Interior Total
Tower 8174 346 8520
Keystone 2011 2011
Auditorium 4790 758 5548
Library 6962 910 7872
Great Hall 2502 2502
Total 24439 2014 26453

Reference Projects
Guys Hospital, London

Planet M, Hannover
2nd Children’s Palace, Ghangzhou, China
Chapter 02.10 INTERIORS - overall consept
Interior - overall concept
The first basis for describing an interior atmosphere for the Cultural
Centre lies in the reading of the architectural concept and the expres-
sion of the architecture itself.
The other is found within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, - the tradition
and history, the nature, architecture and people.
These two points of departure are not contrary but influential on each
other and articulate both the diversity and the unity of the project.
The architectural concept deals with the past, the present and the
future.
There is a duality between contrasting pairs, such as the concrete and
the abstract, the introvert and the extrovert or tradition and vision.
The architectural project is divided between the components located
below and above grade. The components below are those of the past
that deals with the history of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia in general
and the Saudi Aramco in particular. They are concrete and physically
related to the earthy tactile qualities of the nature in Saudi Arabia,
the sand and the rougher surfaces of vernacular architecture. Also
they are inspired by the vibrant colours of the rare desert flora and
the old textiles of the Arabic heritage culture, the many spices and
flavours of the food and the Islamic ornamentation and handicraft.
The inspiration is articulated through tactility and finish rather than
the intention to copy.
The components above are those located in the pebbles and the area
around the plaza relating to several functions not currently present in
the Kingdom. They also represent an approach to architecture formal-
ly based in the abstract. They draw their inspiration from nature and
cultural features, but are products of modern technology refined and
detailed and contrasted with high quality natural materials.
The overall atmosphere of the Cultural Centre will hopefully expose

and celebrate the diversity of the content and provide a Scandinavian
sense of sensibility blended with the richness of Islamic culture.
Chapter 02.11 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION
02.11 Outline Architectural Specification:
The architectural specification includes details of the systems to be used in the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture:
• The System Type is identified, giving the parameters and characteristics of each specific system.
• The Location has been identified as well, with each functional area having its own specification table. Within the building itself there are a number of systems which
occur repeatedly in each functional area. In order to avoid repetition these common systems have been grouped together under General Architectural Systems
Common Throughout the Project. Hence the systems associated with WC’s, stud walls, door, etc. are recorded in one place. The functional area specification
tables then detail those systems and finishes which are specific to those areas.
• System descriptions have, where possible, been provided. As the design process enters the Design Development phase the descriptions will become increasingly
defined.
• Reference codes are provided as a way of grouping together systems before they become more specific in the next design phase. The codes provide an invaluable link
between the architectural drawings and the full architectural specification that will be developed in the future Design Development and Tender/ Construction
Document Phases.
• As the specification grows in detail during the next design phase, details of mock-ups, prototypes and samples of specific systems and finishes required by the Design
Team will be recorded.
02.11.01 Landscape
System Type Location System Description Reference Codes
Water Feature/ Entranceways “Waterwall” to sides of entrance way. Water to fall continuously over natural stone clad EWS-23/ EXT-29
Stone Cladding structural retaining wall into matching stone channel. Natural stone cladding shall have closed
joints and shall have no visible fixings.
Water Feature/ Children’s Discovery Zone Oasis “Waterwall” falling continuously over natural stone clad structural retaining wall into matching EWS-23/ EXT-29
Stone Cladding stone channel forming artificial stream.
Water feature Great Hall Oasis Fountain – natural stone basin. EXT-12
Pathways Landscape Generally Natural stone paving. EXT-03
Pathways Landscape Generally Metal drainage grilles and channels to paths. EXT-29
Pathways Monosurface Landscape – Natural stone paving with matching stone cladding to side walls. Walls shall include integrated EXT-03/ EWS-23/
sunken paths lighting. EXT-13
Pathways Monosurface Landscape Gravel paths. EXT-21
Pathways Monosurface Landscape Timber decking. EXT-26
Pathways Entranceways Natural stone paving or to match Plaza floor finish – To be confirmed. EXT-03
Roads Landscape Generally Asphalt. EXT-31
Roads Landscape Generally Natural stone kerbs. EXT-01
Furniture Landscape Generally Natural stone benches to match adjacent paving. EXT-07
Furniture Landscape Generally Natural stone seats to match adjacent paving. EXT-07
Furniture Landscape Generally Litter bins. EXT-08
Furniture Landscape Generally Natural stone planters. EXT-11
Furniture Children’s Discovery Zone Oases Bespoke sculptural playground furniture. EXT-27
Surface Monosurface Landscape Gravel/ broken stone surfacing. EXT-21
Vegetation Lush garden/ Heart/ Oases Grass seeding/ turfing. EXT-28
Vegetation Lush garden/ Heart/ Oases Shrubs. EXT-19
Vegetation Lush garden/ Heart/ Oases Trees. EXT-19
Vegetation Oases Flowers. EXT-19
Vegetation Monosurface Landscape Non-water dependent vegetation. EXT-19
Fencing & Gates Landscape Generally Balustrades to Oases and Entranceways: Concrete upstand clad in natural stone. EWS-23
Fencing & Gates Landscape Generally Timber handrails. BAL-04
Shading Landscape & Car Parking Pergola: Steel construction with fabric or timber shading elements. EXT-25
Generally
Cladding Oases Living/ Green walls – To be confirmed. EWS-35
Cladding/ Wall Entranceways Rammed earth to match Plaza wall finish. EWS-22
Finishes
02.11.02 General Architectural Systems Common Throughout the Project
- Fair faced blockwork. BLK-01

- Pain grade blockwork. BLK-02
- Common blockwork. BLK-03
- Plasterboard dry lining. IWS-01
- Plasterboard dry lining – Fire Rated. IWS-02
- Plasterboard dry lining – Acoustic Rated. IWS-03
Wall Systems - Plasterboard dry lining – Fire & Acoustic Rated. IWS-04
- Plasterboard partitions. IWS-05
- Plasterboard partitions – Fire Rated. IWS-06
- Plasterboard partitions – Acoustic Rated. IWS-07
- Plasterboard partitions – Fire & Acoustic rated. IWS-08
- Access panels in walls. AP-01
- Corner protectors. TRM-09
Wall Finish - Ceramic wall tiling. LIN-06
- Hygienic wall finish to kitchen/ food preparation areas. LIN-02
- Modified Screeds. SCR-01
- Sand/ cement screeds. SCR-02
Floor Systems
- Concrete screeds. SCR-04
- Levelling screeds. SCR-05
- Linoleum sheeting/ tiling. FL-02
- Carpet sheeting/ tiling. FL-04
Floor Finish - Epoxy resin flooring. FL-08
- Ceramic floor tiles to WC areas. FL-10
- Hygienic floor finish to kitchen/ food preparation areas. FL-14
- Suspended plasterboard monolithic ceilings. CLG-01
- Plasterboard lining ceilings. CLG-02
- Suspended plasterboard tile ceilings. CLG-03
Ceilings
- Suspended metal tile ceilings. CLG-04
- Suspended mineral tile ceilings. CLG-05
- Access panels in ceilings. AP-02
Ceiling Finish - Hygienic ceiling finish CLG-09
- Glazed doors – framed. DRG-01
- Glazed doors – frameless. DRG-02
- Metal doors – steel-faced. DRG-03
- Metal doors – aluminium-faced. DRG-04
Doors
- Timber doorset – paint finish. DRG-05
- Timber doorset – veneer finish. DRG-06
- Timber doorset – laminate finish. DRG-07
- Roller shutters. DRR-01
- Board finish plaster. PLS-01
- Hardwall plaster. PLS-02
- Emulsion paint. PT-01
- Eggshell paint. PT-02
- Satinwood paint. PT-03
Wall & Paint Finish
- Gloss paint. PT-04
- Dust sealer. PT-07
- Masonry paint. PT-08
- Mineral paint to concrete surfaces. PT-09
- Epoxy floor paint. PT-10
- WCs/ Cistern. SAN-01
- Wash hand basin. SAN-02
- Taps. SAN-09
Sanitary Items
- Accessories – dispensers/ holders/ hooks, etc. SAN-10
- Electric hand dryer. SAN-11
- Disabled toilet suite. SAN-13
- Metal stairs. STR-01
Metalwork
- Metal balustrade/ handrail. BAL-01
02.11.03 Auditorium
Wall Finish Main Auditorium Acoustic panelling with timber or applied finish. LIN-01
Ceiling Finish Main Auditorium – Balconies Acoustic timber ceiling to match adjacent wall finishes. LIN-01
Ceiling Finish Main Auditorium Painted concrete. PT-**
Ceiling Finish Main Auditorium Acoustic barriers attached to metal technical bridges. Barriers to match adjacent wall finishes. LIN-01
Floor Finish Main Auditorium Hardwood timber flooring on battens. FL-05
Door Finish Main Auditorium Acoustic panelling with timber or applied finish. LIN-01
Equipment Main Auditorium Painted metal technical bridges. AM-03
Equipment Main Auditorium Seating – hardwood construction, high quality upholstered textile finish. SPE-06
Wall Finish Entrance Vestibules Textile panelling. LIN-04
Floor Finish Entrance Vestibules Hardwood timber flooring. FL-05
Wall Finish Auditorium Lobby Triangulated flat panels of upholstered textile, no visible fixings. LIN-04
Ceiling Finish Auditorium Lobby Triangulated flat panels of upholstered textile, no visible fixings. LIN-04
Floor Finish Auditorium Lobby Hardwood timber flooring on battens. FL-05
Wall Finish Auditorium Lobby Galleries Panelling with a timber or applied finish. LIN-01
Ceiling Finish Auditorium Lobby Galleries Panelling with a timber or applied finish to match adjacent wall finishes. LIN-01
Floor Finish Auditorium Lobby Galleries Hardwood timber flooring or natural stone flooring. FL-05 or FL-09
Furnishings Auditorium Lobby Galleries Serving point: Counter front to be finished to match adjacent wall panelling. Work surfaces shall SPF-06
be solid natural stone.
Stairs Auditorium Lobby Galleries Feature Stairs: Timber or natural stone (to match adjacent flooring) treads on in situ stairs. FL-05 or FL-09
Stairs Auditorium Lobby Galleries Balustrade – To be determined BAL-**
Elevator Auditorium Lobby Galleries Bespoke finishes. LFT-01
Elevator Common Areas To be determined. LFT-03
Kitchen Common Areas To be determined. SPF-05
Floor Finish Musician’s Lounge & Rooms Carpet. FL-04
Wall Finish Musician’s Lounge & Rooms Acoustic panelling with an applied finish. LIN-**
Furnishings Musician’s Lounge & Rooms Lockers. FX-04
Balustrade Gallery Over Musician’s Lounge Metal balustrade. BAL-01
Finishes Generally Executive Rooms: Conductor’s High quality finishes, acoustically rated - to be determined. **
Room/ Orchestra Leader/ Solo
Artists
Finishes Generally Executive Bathrooms: High quality finishes to be determined. **
Conductor’s Room/ Orchestra
Leader/ Solo Artists
Floor Finish Green Room Carpet. FL-04
Wall Finish Green Room Acoustic panelling with an applied finish. LIN-**
Internal Walls Performers Entrance from Plaza Glazed partitioning to security office. IWS-11
Sanitaryware Performers WCs Showers. SAN-07
02.11.04 Great Hall
Doors Entrance Assisted opening 3m high solid doors, high pressure laminate or other applied finish. DRT-01
Wall Finish Atrium Semi-transparent/ artistic finished wall decoration partition wall system. LIN-09
Floor Finish Atrium Natural stone to match Plaza floor finish. FL-09
Ceiling Finish Atrium Black painted monolithic plaster ceiling. PT-**
Wall Finish Entrance Vestibules Applied wall linings to be determined. LIN-**
Floor Finish Entrance Vestibules To match Great Hall floor finish. FL-09
Ceiling Entrance Vestibules To match adjacent wall finish. LIN-**
Door Finish Entrance Vestibules To match adjacent wall finish. DRT-01
Wall/ Ceiling Finish Great Hall – Pebble Lining Metal, acoustic, wall panels, curved and double curved where shown, open joints between LIN-03
panels, no visible fixings. Where shown panels shall be perforated/ patterned and back lit.
Services to be provided between joints. Additional services equipment to be supported from
fixings through joints.
Floor Finish Great Hall Natural stone flooring with removable, flush metal pattering covering service ducts. FL-09
Glazed Wall Great Hall - Oasis Double barrier of 20m wide, 6m high, structurally silicone double glazed, full height wall system EWS-03
with pivoting opening lights. Framing sections to match adjacent internal wall panels. Minimal
framing sections shall exactly align with the joint of the adjacent wall panelling.
Glazed Wall Great Hall – Oasis Shutters/ Brise Solei to glazed wall. LVR-01
Column Finish Great Hall – Oasis Vestibule Structural columns shall be clad in fire rated protection. LIN-10
Wall Finish Great Hall – Oasis Vestibule Wood panelling to match timber wall finish in Great Hall Mezzanine. LIN-01
Floor Finish Great Hall – Oasis Vestibule To match Great Hall floor finish. FL-09
Wall Finish Garden Vestibule Applied wall linings to be determined. PT-**
Floor Finish Garden Vestibule To match Great Hall floor finish. LIN-**
Ceiling Garden Vestibule To match adjacent wall finish. FL-09
Wall Finish Mezzanine & Stairs Timber acoustic panelling, no visible fixings. LIN-01
Ceiling Finish Mezzanine & Stairs To match adjacent wall finish. LIN-01
Floor Finish Mezzanine & Stairs To match Great Hall floor finish. FL-09
Handrail Mezzanine Stairs Timber handrail, integral with wall finish. BAL-04
Balustrade Mezzanine Concrete upstand timber clad internally to match Mezzanine wall finish, externally to match LIN-01/ LIN-03
adjacent Great Hall metal panelling. Timber capping piece.
02.11.05 Cinema
Wall Finish Cinema Acoustic panelling with an applied finish. LIN-**

Ceiling Finish Cinema Suspended acoustic panels. LIN-**
Floor Finish Cinema Carpet. FL-04
Door Finish Entrance Vestibules To match adjacent wall finishes. DRT-01
Equipment Cinema Seating – hardwood construction, high quality upholstered textile finish. SPE-06
02.11.06 Library
Wall Finish Library – Pebble Lining Bespoke patterned perforated, acoustic metal panels with an applied finish, open joints, back LIN-03
lit, services to be provided from behind panels. Fibre optics where shown. Panels shall be
curved and double-curved where shown.
Ceiling Finish Library – Pebble Lining To match adjacent wall finish. LIN-03
Floor Library – Galleries Heavy duty raised access floor system. RAF-01
Floor Finish Library – Galleries Hardwood timber flooring. FL-05
Balustrade Gallery Balustrades Upstands clad facing voids with curved, non-perforated metal panels, closed joints. Finish to LIN-03
match Pebble Lining finish.
Equipment Library Galleries Solid hardwood shelving with integrated lighting system. FX-03
Equipment Library Galleries Bespoke, solid hardwood reception/ library counters. SPF-01
Wall System Library Galleries Single glazed “boxes” including glass ceiling. Structural silicon bonded, including integral IWS-14
glazed, frameless, pivoting door.
Walls Finish Library Kitchen/ Café Hygienic wall finish to kitchen areas. LIN-02
Floor Finish Library Kitchen/ Café Hygienic floor finish to kitchen areas. FL-14
Wall Finish Library Cores To be determined. LIN-**
Column Finish Library To match Plaza finish – Special concrete finish. CON-01
Wall System Media Rooms – Library Single glazed “boxes” including glass ceiling. Structural silicon bonded, including integral IWS-14
glazed, frameless, pivoting door – acoustically rated.
Fixtures Media Amphitheatre - Library Solid timber “steps and riser” seating/ steps to match adjacent Library floor finish. FL-05
Equipment Media Amphitheatre - Library Media screens - to be developed – includes matching cross-screen to divide seating into smaller SPE-07
areas.
02.11.07 Museum
Balustrade Museum Circulation Ramp Continuous structural glass balustrade mechanically fixed to slab edge. BAL-02
Wall System Gallery 3 Structural glass wall, continuous to balustrade above providing environmental barrier to Gallery IWS-14
3. Includes integrated glazed doors.
Wall Finish Slab Edges/ Ramp Side Walls Stone clad to match Plaza flooring. LIN-07
Floor Finish Ramp To match adjacent wall finish and Plaza floor finish. FL-09
Wall Finish Galleries 1 & 2 Rammed earth to match Plaza wall finish. LIN-11
Floor Finish Galleries 1, 2 & 3 Polished concrete with pigment. CON-04
Wall System Glass Wall between Gallery 1 & Tinted structural glass wall. IWS-14
2
Floor Finish Lower Foyer Polished concrete with pigment. CON-04
Wall System Museum & Tower Junction Full height structural glass wall including integrated sliding glass doors. IWS-14
Floor Finish Tower Rooms off Ramp Floor finish to match ramp floor finish. FL-09
Wall Finish Tower Rooms off Ramp Acoustically rated wall panelling – dark finish. LIN-**
Water Feature Source Water feature – pool formed from concrete upstands, clad in an applied finish, with dark tiling EXT-12
internally.
Floor Finish Source To match Ramp finish. FL-09
Wall System Workshop below Gallery 3 Structural glass wall with integrated glass doors. IWS-14
02.11.08 Plaza & Children’s Discovery Zone
Floor Finish Plaza, Cinema Foyer & Off Plaza Natural Stone FL-09
Areas
Wall System Plaza Entrance & Off Plaza Areas Full height, double, structural silicone bonded glass walls with automatic sliding doors. EWS-03
Wall Finish Plaza & Cinema Foyer Rammed earth with patterned surface finish/ relief. LIN-11
Wall System Plaza – Children’s Discovery Full height curved structural silicone bonded glass wall, with full height glass fins, included 2 EWS-03
Zone Oasis sets of automatic sliding doors giving access to adjacent oasis.
Wall System Plaza – Great Hall Oasis Full height curved and inclined structural silicone bonded glass wall, with full height glass fins, EWS-03
included 2 sets of automatic sliding doors giving access to adjacent oasis.
Ceiling Finish Plaza Suspended ceiling – to be developed. CLG-**
Escalators Plaza Bespoke finishes, underside to be clad in metal sheeting. Balustrades to be glass. SPE-08
Wall Finish Café Decorative ceramic tile finish. LIN-06
Ceiling Finish Café Acoustic – to be developed. CLG-
Wall Finish Children’s Discovery Zone White concrete – special class finish. CON-01
Wall System Children’s Discovery Zone Glass walling system. IWS-14
Ceiling Finish Children’s Discovery Zone Suspended ceiling – to be developed. CLG-**
Floor Finish Children’s Discovery Zone White concrete/ linoleum/ carpet. CON-01/ FL-03/
FL-04
Wall Finish Royal WC Natural stone. LIN-07
Floor Finish Royal WC Natural stone. FL-09
Ceiling Finish Royal WC Seamless acoustically treated – To be developed. CLG-**
Wall Finish VIP Rooms Hardwood finished. LIN-01
Floor Finish VIP Rooms Carpet/ Hardwood floor. FL-04/ FL-05
Ceiling Finish VIP Rooms Hardwood/ glass/ suspended ceiling with applied finish. CLG-**
02.11.09 Tower & Keystone
Equipment Technical Floors Internal lining of façade shall be louvers to suit the mechanical requirements. LVR-02
Floor System Tower Floors Raised Access Floors. RAF-01
Floor Finish Tower Floors Carpet finish. FL-04
Floor Finish Tower Floors Hardwood flooring finish. FL-05
Wall Finish Tower Floors Hardwood panelling. LIN-01
Wall Finish Tower Floors Glass/ Mirror finish. LIN-12
Wall Finish Restaurant Monolithic plaster finish on metal mesh. PLS-06
Floor Finish Restaurant Hardwood flooring finish. FL-05
Wall Finish Observation Curved walls - Monolithic plaster finish on metal mesh. PLS-06
Wall Finish Keystone Leather/ textile upholstered wall panels. Panels shall be curved and double curved to replicate LIN-13
external shape of pebble. Leather shall be fully bonded to backing material.
Floor Finish Keystone Hardwood floor finish. FL-05
Stairs Keystone Curved metal staircase with t5imber treads and risers. Timber to match adjacent floor finish. STR-01/ FL-05
Balustrade Keystone Structural glass balustrade. System includes a timber handrail to match floor finish. BAL-02
Ceiling Finish Keystone Under galleries, hit and miss timber lined ceiling system . LIN-01
Wall Finish Keystone Spandrel panels to slab edges, hit and miss timber lined system. LIN-01
Wall Finish Keystone To be determined – panelling with an applied finish. LIN-**
02.11.09 Façade
Cladding Tower A1) Unitised dry-pressure, sloping, double glazed, aluminium framed units. System shall include EWS-02
tinted glass, and integral anti-glare blinds. System includes solid prefabricated insulated
composite over panels with an external metallic finish (PVDF or other). System shall form a
weatherproof barrier.
Cladding Tower A2) Solid, prefabricated insulated composite panels with external metal finish (PVDF or other) EWS-30
forming weatherproof barrier.
Cladding Library/ Auditorium/ Keystone/ B) Solid, facetted, prefabricated insulated composite panels with external metal finish (PVDF or EWS-30
Great Hall other) forming weatherproof barrier.
Cladding All Rainscreen cladding:
Option 1) Titanium “scales”, fixed back to galvanised steel support frame, fixed back to EWS-31
superstructure.
Option 2) Stainless steel mesh, with solid stainless steel sections (Grade 316) fixed back to EWS-15
galvanised steel support frame, fixed back to superstructure.
Where two pebbles meet, the system shall include a stainless steel gutter. Where rainscreen
covers fire escapes and other apertures in the fabric of the building the rainscreen shall be
formed as an overlapping vent thereby allowing access in and out.
At junction with ground conditions, the rainscreen shall be returned and “tucked-in” to leave a
smooth and level condition over a concrete channel.
Cladding All Stripes: Brushed, solid stainless steel (Grade 316) rainscreen fixed over solid, facetted EWS-15/ EWS-30
composite panels forming weatherproof barrier.
Cladding All Metal maintenance access gantry. Galvanised steel fixed to adjacent slab edges located AM-03
between outer rainscreen and inner weatherproof glazed and solid panel cladding systems.
Cladding - Library Option 1) ETFE (ethylene tetrafluoroethylene) pillow. RFS-15
Roofglazing Option 2) Double glazed, tinted glass, aluminium framed rooflight system. Glass shall be fritted RFL-01
or with opalescent/ translucent finish.
Cladding The Source Double glazed, structurally silicone bonded, full height glazing system. Shall be support from EWS-03
behind by a solid hardwood timber frame with integral metal brackets, obscured behind timber
veneer to match the adjacent timber finish. At base the glass shall continue down to the
ground, being hung from the timber framing above.
Cladding Roof Condition Solid concrete slabs shall be finished with an inverted roof consisting of waterproof membrane RFS-06
fully bonded to the structural slab, with insulation over and finished with ballast or paving slabs
on pedestals. The roof system shall be suitable to take the live loads imposed by plant and the
support framing for the continuous rainscreen cladding.
Cladding Roof Condition Lightweight metal trapezoidal metal decking on supporting metal framing, with concrete over, RFS-06
finished with a fully bonded membrane, with insulation over, finished with ballast or paving
slabs on pedestals. The roof system shall be suitable to take the live loads imposed by plant
and the support framing for the continuous rainscreen cladding.
Chapter 03 3.1 Ground Engineering
3.1.1 The Site
3.1.2 Ground Conditions
3.1.3 Basement Construction
3.1.4 Design for Permanent Works in Basement
3.1.5 Foundations
3.1.6 Summary of Key Issues and Risks
3.2 Structural Engineering

3.2.1 Introduction
3.2.2 The Site Constraints
3.2.3 Design Criteria and Standards
3.2.4 Design Influences
3.2.5 Low-rise and Below Ground Structures
3.2.6 Great Hall
3.2.7 Library
3.2.8 Auditorium
3.2.9 Tower and Keystone
3.2.12 Foundations
3.2.13 Procurement and Long Lead Items
3.2.14 Key Issues and Information
3.3 Civil and Traffic Engineering

3.3.1 Introduction
3.3.2 Bulk Earthworks
3.3.3 Roads and Pavements
3.3.4. Traffic Engineering
3.3.5 Stormwater Drainage
3.3.6 Foul Water Drainage
3.4 MEP Engineering

3.4.1 Executive Summary
3.4.2 Codes and Standards
3.4.3 Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema
3.4.4. Tower and Keystone
3.4.5 Library
3.4.6 Museum
3.4.7 Plaza and Public Spaces
3.4.8 Site Services
3.5 Environmental Simulation

3.5.2 Site Climate Analysis
3.5.3 Wind Comfort & Sand Accumulation
3.5.4 External Comfort: Outdoor Amenity Spaces
3.5.5 Façade Performance
3.5.6 Indoor Climate
3.5.7 Further Work and Work in Progress
3.5.8 Appendix A: Sand Drift & Wind Comfort
3.5.9 Appendix B: Shadow-cast Images
3.5.10 Appendix C: Glazing Precedents
3.5.11 Appendix D: Material Properties
3.6 Sustainebility Engineering

3.6.1 Introduction
3.6.2 Environmental Assessment
3.6.3 Energy/Carbon Emissions
3.6.4 Water
3.6.5 Materials and Sustainable Construction
3.6.6 Waste
3.6.7 Health and Wellbeing
3.6.8 Pollution
3.6.9 External Environment
3.6.10 Education/Demonstration
3.6.11 Conclusions
3.6.12 Appendix
3.6.13 Glossary/References/Figures
3.7 Fire Safety Design (by FEDRA)

3.7.1 Fire Safety Design Executive Summary
3.7.2 Introduction
3.7.3 Fire Resistance Rated Construction
3.7.4 Fire Protection Systems
3.7.5 Means of Egress
3.7.6 Fire Fighting Facilities
3.7.7 Design Risks and Opportunities for Fire
Engineering
3.7.8 Operational Fire Safety Management Plan
3.7.9 Fire Strategy Sketches
3.8 Façade Engineering

3.8.3 Introduction to façade design
3.8.4 Façade Systems to the Pebbles
3.8.5 The Source
3.8.6 Appendix Sketches
3.9 Security Engineering

3.9.2 Introduction
3.9.3 Summary of Risk assessment
3.9.4 Security Methodology
3.9.5 Security Concept Overview
3.9.6 Internal Zoning
3.9.7 Control of Access
3.9.8 Surveillance Systems
3.9.9 Intruder Detection System
3.9.10 Security Management
3.9.11 Security Standards
3.9.12 Indicative Access Control and CCTV Coverage
3.10 Acoustic Engineering

3.10.2 Auditorium
3.10.3 Great Hall Cinema and Cinema
3.10.4 Library
3.10.5 Museum and Plaza
3.11 Specialist Lighting

3.11.1 Document Strategy
3.11.2 How to Use This Document
3.11.3 Introduction
3.11.4 Principle Areas
3.11.5 Architectural Lighting – Interior Spaces
3.11.6 Design Concerns
3.11.7 Design Process
3.11.8 Lighting Standards
3.11.9 Lighting Design Criteria
3.11.10 Landscape and Building Façade
3.11.11 Entrance, Plaza and Public Area
3.11.12 Library
3.11.13 Auditorium
3.11.14 Great Hall
3.11.15 Museum and Exhibition Spaces
3.11.16 Statutory Levels
3.11.17 Lamp Tyres and Sources
3.11.18 Lighting Control
3.11.19 General Notes on Specification
3.11.20 UL Standards
3.11.21 Typical Luminaire Types and Associated
Equipment
3.12 Engineering Discussion of Revised Tower Core

3.12.1 Introduction
3.12.2 MEP Engineering
3.12.3 Structural Engineering
3.12.4 Fire Engineering
3.12.5 Single Stair Arrangement
3.12.6 Vertical Transportation
3.12.7 Single Stair Arrangement Sketch
3.12.8 MEP Engineering Sketches 1-4
3.13 Engineering Discussion of Revised Auditorium

3.13.1 Introduction
3.13.2 Structural Implications
3.13.3 MEP Implications
3.13.4 Specialist Implications
3.13.5 Conclusions/Recommendations
3.1 GROUND ENGINEERING
Table of Contents
3.1.1 The Site

3.1.2.1 General Geology
3.1.2.1 Fractures
3.1.2.3 Cavities
3.1.2.4 Hydrogeology
3.1.2.5 Previous Site Investigations
3.1.2.6 Anticipated Ground Conditions
3.1.2.7 Groundwater
3.1.2.8 Chemical Conditions

3.1.3.1 General Description
3.1.3.2 Construction of the Basement
3.1.3.3 Temporary Retaining Walls
3.1.3.4 Water Pressures
3.1.4 Design for Permanent Works in Basement

3.1.4.1 Basement Walls
3.1.4.2 Basement slabs
3.1.4.3 Basement Columns
3.1.5 Foundations
3.1.5.1 Raft Foundations
3.1.5.2 Shallow Foundations
3.1.5.3 Pile Foundations

3.1.1 The Site
The proposed development is located at the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge &
Culture site to the south west of the Dhahran-Abquiq SAG highway, Dhahran,
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia at coordinates 28020’5.23”N, 5007’13.56”E. It is located
within the Aramco compound and approximately 15km west of the Arabian Gulf.
The site location plan is shown below.
Well
The site is located to the northwest of the existing Dhahran oil exhibit centre and
to the north of a building storage facility. At the centre of the site appears to be
an existing water well as shown on the Site Plan. Several newly built temporary
tarmac roads run through the site and part of the site highlighted in the Site Plan
has been levelled for a stone ceremony at the end of May 2008.
The site covers an area of approximately 260m x 300m. Previous topographical

survey, before the recent site levelling, indicated it to be undulated with ground
levels varying between +83m and +93m above datum.
Previous GI carried
out by Fugro-Suhaimi
(Nov, 2004)
Previous GI carried out by

SA soils and materials
laboratory unit (May, 1982)
Footprint of proposed development

Existing Dhahran Oil Exhibit Centre
Levelled area covered in tarmac for construction of temporary structure
Project boundary
Site Location Plan

Site Plan
Constraints to construction on this site include the existing well and the recent
levelled site which is covered in tarmac for the construction of several temporary
structures. The implications and risk of these site constraints are listed in the risk
register in Section 3.1.6.
3.1.2 Ground Conditions system of cavities above groundwater level (see following diagram showing Karst
Categories).
3.1.2.1 General Geology
The Dammam Dome at the eastern part of Saudi Arabia range in age from
Palaeocene to middle Miocene. It is a result of a subsurface salt diapirism that is
related to Hormuz salt body. The rocks sequence for the Dammam dome from the
top downwards consists of: Aeolian sands, Sabkha plains, Quaternary coastal
deposits, Dam Formation, Hadrukh Formation, Dammam Formation and Rus
Formation.
The subject site is underlain by the Dammam Formation followed by the Rus Approx Site
Formation (after Weijermars, 1999; Stieneke et. al., 1958; Tleel, 1973; Roger, Location
1985) as shown in figure below. The Dammam Formation comprises 33m of marl,
limestone, chalky limestone, dolomite and shale. The Rus Formation consists of
56m of marl, chalky limestone and shale.
3.1.2.2 Fractures
The modes of fracture within the Dammam Dome are Mode I and III. Mode I
fracture is extension or tension fractures and is characterised by the lack of
displacement in both the horizontal and vertical directions. Fracture opening in
Mode I fraction is perpendicular to the fracture planes. Mode III fractures are
normal faults where movement is parallel to the fracture surface and in the vertical
direction.
3.1.2.3 Cavities
The Dammam Dome formations contain solution cavities which are controlled by
predominant joints with orientations of N 50-600 W and N 600 E. Cavities tend to
follow these joints in the formations. Karst features (solution features such as
sinkholes, collapsed dolines and caverns) have been noted throughout the chalky
limestone of the Dammam and Rus formations.
Solution cavities pose a hazard to construction in the central eastern regions of

Saudi Arabia. Solution and collapsed cavities can be developed at any time in
documented formations due to injecting waste water or fluctuation of groundwater.
Case histories at King Fahad University (3km southeast of the site) and at North of General Geology
Dhahran Saudi Aramco construction site suggest that the degree of karstifiation in
the eastern part of Saudi Arabia may be referred to class III (Major karst) to IV The caverns found in King Fahad University were lenticular cavities 1 to 2m wide, 3
(Doline karst) (after Fookes and Hawkins, 1988). Major features of a class III to 5m high and several meters long. One of the two caves found, contained a
(Major karst) is major solution along many joints above groundwater level, and single chamber and the other cave contained a double chamber. At the Aramco
features of a class IV (Doline karst) is the development of solution pipes and construction site, north of Dhahran, the cavern systems were detected in the
limestone of the Dammam Formation. It consisted of several connecting chambers
and passageways, whose height ranged from 1 to 3m with 2 to 5m of roof cover,
and widths ranged from 1 to 9m. Chimneys were observed to extend to within 1m
of the surface and tunnels connected some of the chambers. The carven system
was explored to a distance of 35m. The chamber walls at both King Fahad
University site and Aramco construction site were covered in crystalline gypsum
and calcite deposits. The chambers were dry but humid.
3.1.2.4 Hydrogeology
The Dammam Dome is an important part of the hydrogeological system of the

coastal aquifers in the Eastern Province. The coastal aquifers which extend along
the eastern coasts of the Eastern Province of the Kingdom consist of confined
multi-aquifer system. The major water-bearing units of the area are: the limestone
and Dolomite of Umm Er Radhuma aquifer (UER) which is below the Rus Formation
underlying the site, and the limestone and dolomite of Khobar and Alat members,
the clastics of the Neogene complex which are above the Dammam Formation
underlying the site.
The aquicludes underlying the site are the fine clastics and evaporates of the Rus
Formation and Midra and Saila shale at the top of UER, the marls and shales
(orange marls) of the base of Alat member, and the shales of the Hadruk formation
and marls of the Dammam Formation.
The three main productive coastal aquifers in the Province are: the Umm Er
Radhuma (UER), the Dammam (Khobar and the Alat members) and Neogene
(mainly productive in Al Hassa). These coastal aquifers supply more than 95% of
the water demands in the Eastern Province for domestic, agricultural and domestic
purposes.
These aquifers have been subjected to excessive pumping to satisfy the growing
demands for fast growing developments in all sectors. This has been experienced
especially during the last three decades which have witnessed the rise in
population from less than 1.5 millions to 3.2 millions. Negative impacts have been
experienced in parts of these aquifers such as salt water intrusion, rise in
groundwater salinity and decline in water levels.
Karst Categories
3.1.2.5 Previous Ground Investigations 3.1.2.6 Anticipated Ground Conditions
Subject Site Subject Site
A preliminary ground investigation on site has been carried out in April 2008 by Due to the inconsistency in logging of ground profile undertaken by Osaimi
Osaimi Engineering under the direction of Abdulhadi & Al Moaibed Consulting and Engineering, the suggested ground profile of the site below is indicative only:
Design Engineers which consisted of 13 boreholes sunk to depths between 10 and
50m. In addition to the coring, the investigation also included SPT tests and a GL – 3.0m bgl Granular soils with varying amounts of silt and clay
limited programme of laboratory testing. Unfortunately, the coverage of the 3.0 – 8.0m bgl Fine-grained soils
boreholes relative to the footprint of the development and logging of soil/rock were 8.0 – 20.0m bgl Sandstone*
poor. The ground investigation only gives an indication of ground conditions and no 20.0 – EOB Alternate layers of Claystone, chalky Limestone, Limestone
design parameters can be established.
Note*: Sandstone layer is not anticipated based on ground data of adjacent
Additional ground investigation will be carried out in June 2008, comprising 28 site (discussed in following sections) and published geology of the area. This
boreholes sunk to depths between 25m and 50m, 20 diagraphy holes to depths of may be due to the logging of the ground investigation contractor.
40m, trial pits, borehole logging of the 3 dimension nature of the rock (to include
fractures, joints, bedding), SPT tests, plate load tests, packer tests, pressuremeter The ground elevations at boreholes sunk during the previous ground investigation
tests, CBR tests, seismic refraction, installation of standpipes for groundwater ranged between 87m and 94m above datum, and the rock head (where
monitoring and a programme of laboratory testing. This is to establish the ground encountered) ranged between 81.6m and 86.6m above datum (average of
parameters for the substructure design, the ease of excavation for the basement approximately 84m above datum). Rock was not encountered in boreholes BH1, 4,
construction and the stability of facing. 11 and 13 where boring ended at a maximum depth of 77m above datum.
A second phase of ground investigation comprising geophysical tests such as The drilling is being executed by truck mounted rotary drilling rigs using wash
microgravity survey, ground penetrating radar survey and crosshole tomography boring method.
may only be necessary if the cavities found on site during the ground investigation
to be undertaken in June are significant, and statistical risk analysis shows high The SPTs were carried out at 0.75m centres and suggest the soil were generally
adverse impact to the proposed substructure design. Alternatively, the foundation very dense or hard, however loose soil was observed in some of the boreholes.
(rafts or piles) will need probing and grouting as an alternative to the 2nd phase Total Rock Core Recovery is poor, ranging from 7% to 100% (rare). Similarly, RQD
ground investigation, and may be a better means of managing risk. is very poor, in many cases 0. Fracturing within the rock strata has not been
logged. Physical descriptions of the rock strata suggest that it is highly weathered
Adjacent Sites and fracture, generally moderately weak to moderately strong. A cavity of 1m to
1.5m high was encountered in one of the boreholes (BH3) at 42m below ground
Other previous ground investigations on adjacent sites have also been carried out. level.
They included sites immediately to the southeast (Dhahran oil exhibit centre,
ground investigation by Aramco Soils and Materials Laboratory Unit, 1982) and It must be noted that the site has been recently levelled and covered in tarmac for
southwest (unnamed building, ground investigation by Fugro-Suhaimi, 2004) the construction of several temporary structures. The nature of the fill and the pre
where boreholes were drilled to approximately 10m below existing. The Site Plan and post grading is not known.
in section 3.1.1 shows locations of these adjacent sites.
Adjacent Sites It must be noted that the well on site will be decommissioned for the construction
of the development. More information of the well and the decommissioning
Ground data from the adjacent sites have indicated the following: strategy is required to avoid risk of notable rebound on substructure design
discussed in the following sections.
• Ground conditions encountered by Fugro indicated loose to medium dense
silty fine to medium SAND of approximately 0.3m to 1.5m overlying highly Adjacent Site
weather LIMESTONE (at approximately 87.5m above datum) proven to 10m
bgl. No groundwater was encountered during the fieldwork of both the previous
investigated adjacent sites where boreholes were drilled to approximately 10m bgl.
• Ground conditions encountered within boreholes from the Aramco Soils and However, groundwater table may exist in shallower depths depending on seasonal
Materials Laboratory Unit, 1982 indicated loose to medium silty SAND of changes.
approximately 0.3m to 1.5m overlying LIMESTONE (between 88.5m and 93m
above datum) proven to 10m bgl. However, LIMESTONE was not in the
boreholes north of the existing oil exhibition building, sandy SILT was 3.1.2.8 Chemical Conditions
observed instead (to approximately 82.4m above datum). No explanation
was given as to why the geology is variable. Three numbers of laboratory testing to determine the sulphate and chloride
content of the ground and groundwater have been carried out as part of the
• No cavities and no gypsum were reported from both the previous previous ground investigation by Osaimi Engineering. The results were marginally
investigations of adjacent sites. less than the recommended threshold that dictates the use of epoxy coated rebar
and SRC for foundation concrete. However, ground investigation data of adjacent
site showed results above the threshold.
3.1.2.7 Groundwater
Taking all results into account, the chemical conditions of the area seem to be
Hydrology Dept and Environmental Department of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia has varied and some additional tests in the vicinity of the development will be
clarified that the natural groundwater table at the subject site is approximately 90 undertaken.
m below the existing ground (i.e. around 0m above datum, similar to the sea
level). Given that the site is approximately 15km from the sea, we anticipated a The design mixes for buried concrete will conform to Saudi Aramco Engineering
hydraulic gradient and expect the natural groundwater table to be above the sea Standard SAES-Q-001.
level.
Subject Site
Based on the previous ground investigation, groundwater strikes were observations

at depths between 22m and 41m below ground level. The strike at approximately
40m bgl is consistent across the site and the strike at 22m bgl is only observed in
two boreholes. It is likely that a perched water table exists at approximately 40m
bgl (approximately 51.5m above datum), and another localised perched water level
at 20m bgl (approximately 67.5m above datum).
A number of piezometers will be installed at various depths to monitor the pore

water pressure within the rock as a result of the likely perched water tables
encountered during site works.
3.1.3.1 General Description
The proposed basements are tiered to suit the various buildings of the
development and their requirements. They extend from depths of 4.2m to a
maximum of 12.5m, with a local excavation for the ‘source’ to 17.5m below
ground. The scheme design of the basement is shown in Figure below. Cross
sections of the basements are shown in following Figures.
Basement Dig in King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture
The proposed grade level of the development is 84m above datum, therefore the
lowest excavation at 17.5m below existing ground level is at approximately 66.5m
above datum. For current permanent design purposes, the top of rock is assumed
to be at 84m above datum and the groundwater level at 72.5m above datum (i.e.
5m above the possible localised perched water level encountered during the
previous investigation on site).
It must be noted that the groundwater level stated is conservative and dewatering
is not likely to be required during the construction of the basement.
A
B
A Gallery 1
Gallery 1
Gallery 2 Gallery 2
Auditorium B
B
Gallery 3
B Source Auditorium
Gallery 3
Source
A
Library loading bays Library loading bays
A
Cross section A-A (Northeast-Southwest)
Cross section B-B (Northwest-Southeast)

Some of the basements are to be used as galleries of the museum, therefore they
must be designed to appropriate standard in relation to waterproofing issues. Open Excavation
Given that water will be introduced for the irrigation at the two oasis, there is a
potential of groundwater rise and the basement have to be designed for this. An open excavation may be considered for the very dense soil and more intact
Detailed waterproofing of the basement has to be designed. rock, however further ground investigation is necessary to confirm the nature of
the rock and the side slope angles for the excavation. If the soil is loose at the
The ‘source’ is a void in the basement museum, and permanent propping of the first few meters, open excavation may be adopted with minor supports from
retaining walls in this area needs to be assessed in detail as the floors are not plates, anchors, bolts and nails. This may prove effective with the general terracing
continuous from one wall to the next. The basement tiers with sliding friction of the of the basement areas, particularly if rock is shallow.
slabs may be considered as permanent props to the basements.
The ease of excavation will be established based on the seismic refraction
The walls of the basement will be used to resist soil pressure during construction investigation to be carried out as part of the additional ground investigation, along
and then be lined for continued structural use in the permanent condition. The with point load tests and logging of the discontinuity (fracture) spacing index.
following sections of the report describe the temporary and permanent conditions.
In some cases, walls are required to retain fill that is to be built up to the grade Bottom-Up Construction
level. These walls are to be gravity walls and are discussed in Section 3.2.10.8.
In “bottom-up” construction, the excavation is taken to its final level, with the
perimeter walls holding back ground pressure. The walls are provided with
3.1.3.2 Construction of the Basement temporary supports, either through the use of ground anchors, soil berms or steel
props or a combination thereof. As the anticipated ground water level of the site is
Although the construction method will be the responsibility of the Contractor, it has likely to be lower than the majority of the basement levels and possibly the
to be taken into account by the structural designer (Buro Happold). Thus, in the maximum excavated depth at 66.5m above datum, therefore water level at depth
design, certain assumptions have been made about the method of construction to is not likely to cause instability of the base of the excavation.
be employed.
In view of the ground conditions and basement dig levels, open excavation or part
wall-propped excavation (at top level) with part open excavation (at lower level)
Anchor Stressing
may be considered. This is subject to further ground investigation proving that the
rock is not as fractured as it is currently reported. The poor rock core recovery
and RQD of 0% observed from the previous site investigation may be due to poor
drilling technique and the use of very small sized core barrels. However, if the
rock on site is indeed very fractured with very low TCR and RQD of 0%, excavation
with temporary perimeter wall and propping may be required for the basement
construction.
A “bottom-up” construction method is considered most suitable for the proposed

basement extent, superstructure levels, anticipated ground conditions and the
common basement construction within the Kingdom.
It must be noted that a key aspect for stability of basement walls or facing (open
excavation) is the 3 dimensional nature of the rock (i.e. fractures, joints, bedding)
which needs to be well addressed by the additional ground investigation. Installation of ground anchors Anchor Installation
The preferred method of basement construction is bottom-up excavation sequence, 3.1.3.3 Temporary Retaining Walls
using anchors rather than internal steel props as shown in Figure above. This
method provides an access to the Contractor for unimpeded excavation and is For excavation where water is below the maximum excavated level, the two
widely used. The installation of anchors is relatively slow but, on this project there normal methods of wall construction are king-post walls or contiguous bored pile
is a large plan area for the excavation and this is less critical than for a small walls as shown in figures below.
basement. Another advantage of the usage of ground anchors is that they may be
considered for long-term propping subject to approval of authorities (discussed in King-post walls consist of soldier piles (H-steel piles) that are set in predrilled holes
section 3.1.4). around the periphery of an excavation. These piles are then grouted in place with
weak concrete. Lagging is the concrete panel placed horizontally between the
A bottom-up excavation sequence, using steel props, is shown on figure below. soldier piles to retain the soil behind the excavated area. Propping of king-post
Propping excavation is the most usual method of temporary support. For this walls may be necessary depending on the depth of excavation and soil to be
project, with a large plan area, it involves the use of a very large quantity of steel retained.
and steel in the Middle East may not be readily available. This method of support
does not need the level of specialist sub-contractor required of anchor installation. If groundwater level is above the excavation level, basement wall such as secant
pile wall and diaphragm wall may be considered. The advantages and
disadvantages of different retention types mentioned above is summarised in Table
below.
Basement excavation with internal steel props
King post wall Contiguous bored pile wall - Contiguous

bored pile walls consist of reinforced bored piles
located typically 100 to 200mm apart.
Table: Type of Retention Options
Type of Retaining Advantages Disadvantages Recommen-

Wall dations
Gravity wall • Simple design • Extent of site required -

• Cost effective for open excavation
• Nature of backfill is not
as good as the original
ground
King-post wall • Suitable for the subject • A more flexible wall Recommended
site as wall is not compared to diaphragm option if
(groundwater immediately next to or secant pile wall groundwater is
structures • Do not provide cut off below basement
below basement)
• Fast construction • Not applicable if dig levels
• Cost effective compared to groundwater level is
walls mentioned below above basement level
• Suitable for the subject • A more flexible wall -

site as wall is not compared to diaphragm
Diaphragm wall construction Contiguous bored immediately next to or secant pile wall
structures • Do not provide cut off
pile wall
• Fast construction • Not applicable if
• Cost effective compared to groundwater level is
(groundwater secant piled wall above basement level
below basement) • Additional mobilisation
of piling rig if piles
foundations are not
considered for the
development
Secant pile wall • Provide good groundwater • Expensive wall -

cut off in the short and • Vertical tolerance of
(groundwater long term wall at depth
• Appropriate if groundwater • Longer construction
above basement)
level is above basement time
3.1.3.4 Water Pressures level
• Long term groundwater
control (esp for museum)
Data available to date indicated that the water strike are at depths between 67.5m • Provide higher stiffness
and 50.5m above datum and dewatering is not likely to be required during the • Use as permanent
retaining structure
construction of the majority of the basements. These water strikes are likely to be
related to be localised perched water tables. Diaphragm wall • Provide good groundwater • Expensive wall Recommended
cut off in the short and • Hydrofraise option if
(groundwater long term construction required in groundwater is
However, the pore water pressure within the rock as a result of the perched water • Appropriate if groundwater view of the rock above basement
tables has to be investigation with further piezometer installations and monitoring. above basement)
level is above basement encountered dig levels
This is to ascertain the pore water pressure does not cause instability of the base level
• Provide higher stiffness
of the excavation during the basement construction, and does not cause • Long term groundwater
hydrostatic uplift near the source and museum basement leakages in the long control (esp for museum)
term. • Use as permanent
retaining structure
Table: Advantages and disadvantages of permanent propping system near the
‘source’
3.1.4 Design for Permanent Works in the Basement
Permanent propping Advantages Disadvantages
(at the ‘source’ area)
3.1.4.1 Basement Walls Construction of ‘keys’ • Simple and fast construction • Resistance generated may
• Cost effective not be as high as other
methods
As some of the basements are to be used as galleries of the museum, they are to
be designed to be watertight. Therefore the basement walls proposed comprised of
several layers, i.e. temporary retaining king-post wall (if used instead of open
excavation), a permanent structural wall and an internal lining which could be a
blockwork wall if required. These basements will be fully tanked where
waterproofing is provided between the temporary retaining wall and the permanent
key
structural wall. The blockwork wall may be required to provide humidity control.
Waterproofing details will be developed in conjunction with the structural and
Permanent ground anchors • Can potentially achieve • Long term maintenance, re-
building services engineers. higher propping strength stressing of anchors
than soil nailing • Corrosion given the
• Most suitable option and anticipated ground
The permanent structural walls are supported laterally by the basement floor slabs, allows for a basement of any conditions. Corrosion
and by basement tiers near the ‘source’. If the basement tiers cannot adequately shape in plan protection needs to be
addressed in detailed and
support the basement walls (note that loads from structures located behind designed for
retaining walls will be considered and will impact on the loading of the walls, esp as • Subject to approvals of
authorities
raft is the recommended foundation option for the development discussed in
section 3.1.5), options such as ‘keys’, permanent ground anchors, soil nailing, rock
bolting or jet grouting should be considered. The advantages and disadvantages of Soil nailing, Rock bolting • May be considered for the • Corrosion given the
development anticipated ground
alternative options are listed in the following table. conditions. Corrosion
protection needs to be
addressed in detailed and
designed for
3.1.4.2 Basement Slabs • Propping force achieved
may be low
• Availability of specialist
The basement slabs are generally set at between 150mm and 300mm thick and contractors in the region
are supported on the smallest 9m x 9m grid, but in many locations the grids are
larger to suit requirements. In the long-term condition, temperatures in this large Jet grouting • Suitable for anticipated • Expensive option
ground conditions • Extent of grouting may be
below ground space will be fairly uniform and there are no movement joints. • No long term maintenance large
Following construction, for a period of 6 months to 1 year there will be shrinkage of required
• Corrosion is not an issue
the concrete and this will lead to cracking. Anti-crack bars should be detailed at the • Distribution of vertical
corners of all openings in the slab to reduce the potential for large cracks but some pressures from structures
above to a lower level
cracking is inevitable and should be attended to by the contractor during the
maintenance period.
Jet grout
Hybrid system where permanent • Using the most suitable • Employing two different
ground anchors and jet grouting propping option depending on types of system
are considered in parts depending the depth of excavation and • Additional mobilisation
on excavation depth ground conditions
3.1.4.3 Basement Columns
Basement columns sizes vary depending on load and span requirements. They
measure 450 x 900mm in car park areas, 800mm x 800mm in back of house areas
and 1280mm diameter at the plaza.
3.1.5 Foundations the car park area or at basement levels. This is provided that the foundations are
not founded on the recently placed fill, of which its nature is not known.
3.1.5.1 Raft Foundations
An allowable bearing capacity of 250kN/m2 has been considered for the
In view of the ground conditions and structural loading, a raft is likely to be preliminary foundation design. This assumes the foundation to be located at
suitable to safely support the buildings. The anticipated groundwater level on site approximately 2m below existing natural ground level (not on recently placed fill)
is below the majority of the basements, therefore hydrostatic uplift and tension and that the collapse settlement phenomenon does not exist.
piles to resist uplift are not envisaged at the majority of the basements. However,
this has to be confirmed by further site investigation especially at the location of In order to obviate the collapse settlement behaviour, further testing (i.e. plate
the ‘source’ where the applied load will be minimal. load tests inundated in water) is required. If the collapse settlement phenomenon
exists, foundations would need to be placed at depth below the silty layers.
The thickness of the raft is set at approximately 750mm to 2700mm (under
tower). The raft is thickened under the tower, allowing it to arch when transferring
the loads into the ground. Thus the bearing pressure on the ground will be applied 3.1.5.3 Pile Foundations
in a relatively uniform manner.
Pile foundations may be considered if the above two foundation systems are not
The further ground investigation will provide more information about the stiffness suitable to safely support the proposed structures. The piles may need probing and
and strength of the ground where the raft is to be founded on. At present the grouting during to the likelihood of presence of cavities. This will be an alternative
drawings show the entire development to be supported on a raft or pads. If to the 2nd phase ground investigation and may be a better means of managing
investigations into the underlying deposits indicate low strength and stiffness or risk.
excessive creep under stress imposed by the tower; or significant cavities are
found within the pressure distribution zone of the raft, piles will be introduced to
work in combination with the raft to resist loads from the tower.
To reduce punching effects at the edge of the thicker raft under the tower, it is
tapered at a 30 degree angle to join with the general raft for the rest of the
development.
For a raft foundation, an allowable bearing pressure of 250kN/m2 has been

considered for preliminary design. This assumes the raft is founded at depth
greater than 2m bgl, and not on the recently placed fill. At rock level, a higher
allowable bearing pressure is envisaged. Unfortunately ground investigation
carried out to date is inadequate to ascertain a value greater than 250kN/m2 as
insufficient testing carried had been carried out within the rock layers.
Given that the presence of cavities is likely on site, the grouting in grids to a
certain depth may be required for the raft foundation. This will be an alternative to
the 2nd phase ground investigation and may be a better means of managing risk.
3.1.5.2 Pad and Strip Foundations
In view of the ground conditions and proposed structural loads, shallow

foundations such as isolated pads or stiff strip footings may also be considered for
A ground risk register highlighting the potential ground hazard posed to the
proposed development is given in the following table along with the remediation
measures.
Table: Geotechnical Risk Register
Hazard Engineering Consequence Risk Control Measure
GROUND CONDITIONS
• Underestimation of foundation bearing capacities that may lead
Site levelling recently
to excessive settlement • Undertake topographically survey to establish site levels
being carried out at part Unknown nature of fill, grading and levels
• Unknown volume of cut and fill • Undertake trial pitting as part of the site investigation to establish nature of the fill
of the site
• Reuse of fill that may not be suitable
• Undertake ground investigation to establish the presence and extent of cavities
• Design substructure such that the stresses are distributed away from the small
Dammam formation, Rus • Ground settlement and collapse dissolution features
Presence of cavities (collapsed cavities), dissolution
formation and Karstic • In homogeneous ground conditions, complicate design of • Undertake probing and grouting and locations of foundations or in grids to a
features and caverns
ground substructure certain depth
• Use appropriate ground design parameters for foundation and substructure
design
• Undertake plate load tests inundated with water to establish if the phenomenon
• Collapse settlement of buildings founded on shallow layer within
Wind blown Silt Collapse settlement when saturated in water occurs
the wind blown Silt
• If so, use deep foundations
Nature of chalk resulting in poorly sampled samples • Carry out good quality ground investigation
Chalky Limestone • Over conservative design of foundation
during ground investigation • Pay attention to sampling of chalky Limestone
• Use appropriate ground design parameters for foundation and substructure

Carbonated rock Highly carbonate rock with tendency to crush • Low pile shaft friction and end bearing/ capacities
design
• Undertake adequate ground investigation

Gypsum Dissolution of Gypsum • Lower bearing capacities of foundation • Use appropriate ground design parameters for foundation and substructure
design
• Undertake groundwater level monitoring as part of the additional ground
Groundwater level higher than anticipated
• Ingress of water into pile bore during piling investigation to establish the exact groundwater levels
(note: exact groundwater level has not been established
Groundwater Level • Ingress of water during permanent conditions (esp the basement • Design of concrete foundation to consider aggressive soil and groundwater
and groundwater monitoring has not been previously
museum), hydrostatic uplift chemistry
carried out)
• Maintain steady state groundwater

Planting and irrigation introducing change in • Collapse settlement of the windblown silt • Undertake plate load tests inundated in water to establish if collapse settlement
groundwater regime • Leakage of basement if waterproofing is not designed correctly phenomenon will occur. If so, consider deep foundations
• Establish appropriate waterproofing for the basement
Groundwater rise
• Establish the aquifers and the potential/ risk of future groundwater rise
Future groundwater rise once the substantial pumping • Undermining foundations and retaining wall • Use appropriate ground design parameters
around the region has stopped • Changes in groundwater regime may encourage onset of voids • Design of substructure to take into account of future groundwater rise
• Steady state groundwater to be maintained
Hazard Engineering Consequence Risk Control Measure
• Undertake ground investigation to establish Chloride and Sulphate content
• Recommend appropriate concrete class for the substructure design
Chemical High chloride and sulphate content in the ground • Deterioration of concrete and steel • For ground anchors, use corrosion protection design such as over designing the
sizes of ground anchors to allow for corrosion or to apply coats of material for
corrosion protection
• It is unsure if the groundwater is currently pumped from the well,
• More information of the well is required
Existing well on site Well is to be relocated if so, groundwater rise may be an issue when the well is
• See groundwater rise section
relocated
PILE FOUNDATION and FLOOR SLAB OPTIONS
Presence of groundwater • Groundwater ingress to be controlled

Bored pile Pile bore instability
Loose soil • Use bentonite suspension
Presence of cavities or soft spot
• Undertake appropriate ground investigation, soft spot to be replaced
Presence of collapsible soil
Ground bearing slab Failure of ground bearing slab or excessive settlement • Undertake topographical survey
Existing fill, pre and post grading level on site (for
• Use suspended floor slab option
temporary structures construction) is not known
E A R T H W O R K S, BASEMENT and RETENTION OPTIONS
• Carry out seismic refraction test to establish rock head level and the ease of
excavation
• Carry out point load tests and logging of discontinuity (fracture) spacing index to
Excavation Higher rock level than expected Difficulty in excavation
establish ease of excavation
• Establish suitable machinery for use in excavation (i.e. backhoe diggers, pickers,
rippers, hydraulic breaking, blasting etc)
• Assess the suitability of excavated soil for reuse
Extent of cut and fill Large amount of fill required Imported fill required if excavated soil is not suitable for reuse
• Undertake appropriate ground investigation to assess the ripability and
operation Strong Limestone encountered Delay in construction programme and additional costs
excavability of Limestone
• Construct tension piles to resist uplift if groundwater level is high
No permanent applied load Hydrostatic uplift, floatation of basement if groundwater level is high • Consider construction of ‘keys’, permanent ground anchors, soil nails, rock bolt,
Proposed basement void
No permanent propping across the void Movement and instability of basement wall jet grouting, hybrid system, retaining wall circular in plan (see Table 2 for
advantages and disadvantages of the different permanent propping methods)
King post or contiguous • Dewatering
Groundwater level above basement level Inflow of groundwater during basement construction
wall • Use secant pile wall or diaphragm wall
3.2 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 3.2.5.7 Ground Slabs
3.2.5.8 Retaining Walls
3.2.5.9 Elevated Floor Structures
Table of Contents 3.2.5.10 Roof Structures
3.2.5.11 Gravity Load Resisting Structures
3.2.1 Introduction
3.2.5.12 Lateral Load Resisting Structure
3.2.1.1 Project Description
3.2.5.13 Façade Structure
3.2.1.2 Report Structure
3.2.5.14 Other Structures
3.2.1.3 Accompanying Documents
3.2.5.15 Key Issues and Information
3.2.1.4 Structural description
3.2.1.5 Summary of Key Issues
3.2.6 Great Hall
3.2.6.1 Introduction
3.2.2 The Site Constraints
3.2.6.2 Building Description
3.2.2.1 Location
3.2.6.3 Key Requirements
3.2.2.2 Site Features
3.2.6.4 Geometry and Structure Grid
3.2.2.3 Topography
3.2.6.5 Load Summary
3.2.2.4 Site Access
3.2.6.6 Foundations
3.2.6.7 Ground Slabs
3.2.3 Design Criteria and Standards
3.2.6.9 Mezzanine Floor Structures
3.2.3.1 Design Criteria
3.2.6.10 Roof Structures
3.2.3.2 Design Codes and Standards
3.2.3.3 Wind Study
3.2.3.4 Seismic Study
3.2.3.5 Proposed Waivers to SA Standards
3.2.7 Library
3.2.4.1 Ground Condition and Topography
3.2.4.2 Architecture and Building Geometry
3.2.4.3 Movement Joints
3.2.4.4 Facades
3.2.4.5 Landscaped Rooftop and Loads for Access
3.2.7.6 Foundations and Ground Slabs
3.2.4.6 Design Fire Periods
3.2.7.7 Floor Structures
3.2.4.7 MEP Co-ordination
3.2.7.8 Roof and Façade Supporting Structure
3.2.7.9 Gravity Load Resisting Structure
3.2.5 Low-rise and Below Ground Structures
3.2.7.11 Other Structures
3.2.8 Auditorium
3.2.5.6 Foundations
3.2.8.6 Foundations
3.2.8.7 Ground Slabs (Level 00)

3.2.9.4 Structure Grid
3.2.9.6 Foundations
3.2.9.12 Alternate Core Proposal
3.2.12 Foundations
3.2.14 Key Issues and Information

3.2.1 Introduction The following section 3.2.4 summaries some key design influences from interfacing
issues including; topography and ground conditions, architecture and geometry,
movement joints, facades, landscaping, design fire requirements and coordination.
3.2.1.1 Project Description
The subsequent report sections 3.2.5 through 3.2.9 describe the schematic
Project descriptions are provided elsewhere in this report so it is not appropriate to structural design of each building or use. These sections are ordered commencing
repeat this - reference can be made to the Architecture section for a full with the most central and lower lying buildings or uses and then discuss in turn
description of the project. Instead a summary of the project in terms of the main each ‘pebble’ building; the Great Hall, Library, Auditorium and finally the Tower &
structural components is provided below. Keystone. Each building is given an overall introduction and description, followed
by more detailed sections on the various structural components and proposals.
The project comprises a number of unique buildings conceived as a collection of Geometry and grid are explained, followed by detailed discussion and illustration of
‘pebble’ forms clustered on a landscaped mound, essentially representing desert the primary structural systems; foundations, floor and roof structures, columns
rocks on sand. The uniqueness, complexity and differing building use and and walls, stability systems and façade support systems etc. Where applicable,
requirements give rise to different structure types and solutions and ultimately alternatives are discussed for particular structures that are currently being or can
unique construction procurement. be further evaluated during the subsequent Design Development stage.
The scheme essentially comprises 5 distinct independent building ‘pebbles’

arranged over a low rise subterranean building defined beneath a landscaped dome 3.2.1.3 Accompanying Documents
rising gently 12m or so out of the desert landscape. The landscaped dome,
bounded by the developments perimeter road, measures approximately 300m wide This report is complemented by the structural engineering schematic design
x 350m deep but varies due to the elliptical route of the perimeter road and drawings included as an appendix to this report.
intersecting existing site.
Other documents including structural design criteria, specifications and preliminary
The buildings include a Great Hall, Library, Auditorium and Tower and a fifth calculations have also been prepared and issued to accompany this schematic
building element rests between the Library and Tower - aptly called the Keystone. design report.
Within the landscaped dome Car Parking and Back of House areas surround the
main Plaza which connects to the Museum - all oriented around the Source, the
visionary and geometric centre of the project. The Source is the deepest
component of the project with its reflecting pool at 15.2m below Plaza
approximately 26.7m below highest landscape level.
3.2.1.2 Report Structure
This Structural Engineering report begins in this section, 3.2.1, with an overview of
the project, a description of the structural scheme and summary of the key issues
identified at this current stage.
The next section 3.2.2 provides a summary of the site and its constraints and is
followed, in section 3.3.3, with commentary on the design criteria on which the
design will be based including discussion of proposed waivers to Saudi Aramco’s
standard requirements.
3.2.1.4 Structural Description 3.2.1.5 Summary of Key Issues
While the form of construction is common for certain buildings, each has a unique In the process of completing the schematic design a number of key issues have
function and structural geometry, bringing with it a need for distinct structural been identified which are critical to the Design Development stage of the project.
solutions. The approach to the structural design has drawn from a range of
influencing factors; some are described in section 3.2.4, in addition to clear spans, The key issues are listed in section 3.2.14 of this report and where applicable are
loadings, structural efficiency, building function, architectural intent and considered discussed throughout the main sections of this report.
available technologies.
The items listed below represent a summary of the primary key issues only. Refer
As a structural overview the low rise buildings beneath the landscaped dome, to section 3.2.14 for more comprehensive details.
comprising the Source, Museum, Plaza, Back of House and Car Park areas all share
the same structural form; reinforced concrete structures stabilised by shear walls. • Conclusion of requirements for emergency vehicle access to the landscaped
However, due to the differing functions and spatial requirements the structural roof. A reduction in current requirements will result in structure redesign of
arrangements of these areas do generally differ, occasionally considerably. effected areas but reduction in requirements. Late redirection may result in
significant abortive design work.
The ‘pebble’ buildings, comprising the Great Hall, Library, Auditorium and Tower, • Specific requirements for any other vehicular access to the landscaped roof
including Keystone, by their very title and function each possess significantly i.e. cherry pickers for cladding maintenance
differing requirements and structural form. The Great Hall is essentially a clear • Specific proposals for the ‘pebble’ roof and elevation cladding are required
span space and generates a steelwork braced frame solution incorporating long including materials, installation methodology and support requirements.
span roof trusses. The Library building, supporting heavy book stacks, features • Movement joints to be developed
both regular and irregular column grids often inclined and dictates a reinforced • Setting out of the pebble geometry in particular the definition in space of the
concrete primary system stabilised by shear walls. The Auditorium principally free form surfaces (inner and outer) is critical to the structural design.
comprises a reinforced concrete structure with steelwork trusses employed for the Geometry setting out strategies and principles are required.
long span roof areas over. For the Tower, reinforced concrete comprising post- • Ground Investigation to be concluded and recommendations for foundation
tensioned flat slabs supported on perimeter columns stabilised by a shear core and design criteria confirmed. Foundations to be re-evaluated resulting from this
lower level V-columns is proposed. For the Keystone steelwork primary floor • Site Topographical Survey to be concluded and from that determination of
trusses supporting floor beams and arched roof frames is proposed. the optimum / preferred building levels relative to ground surface.
• Coordination with architecture requirements in particular recent proposals
Each ‘pebble’ building is conceived to be independently stable and isolated from • Coordination with MEP requirements
the low rise Plaza, Museum, Back of House and Car Park areas by use of • Overall review and any necessary update of structural requirements
movement joints where the ‘pebble’ forms pass through the landscaped roof. • Procurement route and tender packages to be defined and coordinated with
Exceptions to this are the Great Hall which part obtains support and stability by design schedule and deliverables.
connection to the adjacent Back of House structure, and the Keystone which is • Strategy for contractor pre-qualification to be defined
stabilised by discrete connection to the Library structure. • All Car Park requirements and setting out to be concluded
• Study to evaluate comparative floor area taken up by tower columns for
Together with service and access tunnels, the various basement levels, loading concrete v steel solution
dock areas and proposed landscaping levels all give rise to significant reinforced • Specific requirements for Auditorium technical galleries and fly tower
concrete sub-structures and retaining walls. • Auditorium requirements and coordination generally
• Proposed ‘waivers’ to Saudi Aramco standards to be agreed
• Conclusion of requirement for wind tunnel testing to assess user comfort,
cladding and structure design forces.
3.2.2 The Site and Constraints
3.2.2.1 Location
The site is located to the south west of the Dhahran-Abquiq SAG highway,
Dhahran, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia at coordinates approximately 12km from the
Arabian Gulf waters. The site is located within the confines of the Saudi Aramco
compound close to ‘Prosperity Well No 7’ understood to be the first commercially
viable oil producing well in the Kingdom.
The project site is located to the northwest of the existing Dhahran oil exhibit
centre and to the north of a building storage facility.
3.2.2.2 Site Features
Several newly built temporary tarmac roads run through the site constructed to
facilitate the corner stone laying ceremony held in May 2008.
A water well exists on the site.
Further details and commentary on the site have been given in the preceding
section 3.1 Foundation Engineering.
3.2.2.3 Topography
The previous site topography survey recorded ground levels varying between
approximately +83m to +93m above datum. However, approximately half of the
site area has recently been graded, in some areas significantly, also to facilitate
the corner stone laying ceremony. Current topography is uncertain and an updated
Topographical survey is required.
3.2.2.4 Site Access
Refer to report section 3.3 Civil and Traffic Engineering for discussion on site
access provisions etc.
Earlier Site Layout showing Topography

3.2.3 Design Criteria and Standards applicable to this project. A list of reference documents in support of the structural
design is also included in the Structural Design Criteria document.

3.2.3.3 Wind Study
A Structural Design Criteria document is prepared to inform the Owner (Saudi
Basic wind speed and wind exposure category for the project site is obtained from
Aramco), the Architect, and others of the assumptions made by Buro Happold in
SAES-A-112, “Meteorological and Seismic Design Data.” Wind loads are
the preparation of the structural design for the project. It includes a listing of the
determined in accordance with Section 6.5, Method 2 – Analytical Procedure per
relevant design standards as well as the assumptions made about floor
ASCE 7-02, as referenced by the IBC 2003. A more detailed discussion of the wind
occupancies, design loads, material strengths and properties, performance criteria,
load determination can be found in the Structural Design Criteria document, as
fire rating requirements for structural members, and the like. The said document is
well as in the Calculations for the specific buildings.
also used internally by the structural engineering team to maintain a current
summary of design assumptions so as to promote consistency in the assumptions
Owing to the unusual geometry and the scale of the structures, wind tunnel testing
made by individual engineers. As such, some of the information included in the
is considered required in order to properly establish wind loading on the main wind
said document may be more technical than needed by Owner or the Architect.
force resisting systems as well as other components and cladding, and also to
Consequently, the Structural Design Criteria is a live document and modifications
assess user comfort.
will be made as the project progresses in to the more detailed phases of design.
The Structural Design Criteria was initially issued in ‘draft’ form to Saudi Aramco
3.2.3.4 Seismic Study
on 25 April 2008. Comments were received through a meeting with Saudi Aramco
in Oslo 30 April. The said Structural Design Criteria document has not been
The site spectral response accelerations and other relevant data are obtained from
included as an appendix to this report since the document will be updated as the
SAES-A-112, “Meteorological and Seismic Design Data.” The Seismic Design
design progresses and more criteria becomes available. However, the Structural
Category and the design base shear coefficient are determined per ASCE 7-02, as
Design Criteria document has been issued to accompany this report and represents
referenced in the IBC 2003. The project is considered to be of Seismic Design
a formal update of the document.
Category A, and as such, the structures are subject to the minimum design base
shear of 1% of the building weight. A more detailed discussion of the seismic load
A summary of the contents of the Structural Design Criteria document is included
determination can be found in the Structural Design Criteria document.
in this section for information. Refer to Structural Design Criteria document for full
details.
3.2.3.5 Proposed Waivers to SA standards
3.2.3.2 Design Codes and Standards
The process of completing the schematic design in conjunction with a review of the
The project is designed to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the 2003 Saudi Aramco ‘standards’ has evolved a number of opportunities where we
Edition of the “International Building Code,” by the International Code Council consider ‘waivers’ will greatly benefit the project in terms of cost, detail and
(ICC), and as modified by the “Saudi Aramco Building Code,” Saudi Aramco arrangement of the structure etc.
Engineering Standard SAES-M-100, dated 9 October, 2006. Editions of relevant
listed references, standards, and other documents used in this project are as The proposed waivers have been submitted to Saudi Aramco, for their
indicated in the IBC 2003 unless noted otherwise. consideration, on issue of this schematic report.
Documents referred to in the Standard SAES-M-100 include Saudi Aramco The proposed waivers have arisen from discrepancies in what we consider
engineering standards, procedures and material specifications, and the like. The appropriate and best practice for a cultural project of this nature compared to the
Structural Design Criteria document outlines lists of key relevant design standards Saudi Aramco standards which are based primarily on the requirements for
industrial and energy process type structures. In certain cases, applying the
specific ‘standards’ will result in a building structure lacking finesse as one would
expect for such a culturally significant project or will result in unnecessary
additional cost.
A detailed description of the proposed waivers is outside the purpose of this report,
however some examples of the waivers proposed are provided below.
Item SA Ref SA requirement Implication

Concrete SAEQ-Q-001 fc’ limited to 4ksi Low concrete strength. Impacts
strength = 28kN/mm2 on cost and results with larger
structural elements. Such
concrete strength is not now
commonly used in building
construction in particular for
columns and walls or post
tensioned floor systems.
Galvanizing 12-SAMSS-007 Galvanise all Not necessary for internal

steelwork steelwork building structures where
humidity and temperature effects
are controlled. Impacts on cost
and procurement.
Post SAES-Q-005 Not allowed Fixing of interfacing systems to

installed concrete structures, e.g. cladding
anchors components, architecture
finishes, MEP services and the
like predominantly uses post-
installed fixings. Impacts on
viability of securing these
systems using standard systems.
Refer to specific waiver application for full details

3.2.4.5 Landscaped Roof and Loads for Access
The structural engineering design is informed and influenced by a wide range of Landscape loads in addition to the onerous requirements for fire vehicle access
issues and interfacing systems. Many of these are discussed in the following report place substantial demand on the roof structures. Rationalisation of the landscape
sections, however some key influences can be summarised as follows. depths from 1m to 0.5m depth has previously been confirmed and in conjunction
with alternate fire vehicle access proposals (but yet to be approved) total system
loads will reduce to approximately 60% of the currently assumed loads. This will
3.2.4.1 Ground Conditions and Topography result in significant reduction in structure requirements and costs for the entire
landscaped roof, its supporting columns and foundations.
The ground conditions determine the foundation and basement design and
construction requirements. The topography and resulting optimisation of floor
levels relative to existing ground will determine the extent of which excavations 3.2.4.6 Design Fire Periods
will be formed in the underlying rock or in the near surface granular materials.
The design requirements and proximity of rock head relative to excavations will be The structure fire rated period for the various buildings is 3 hours, and all buildings
updated on conclusion of the geotechnical investigation and topographical survey. will be provided throughout with automatic sprinkler protection. Proposed fire
compartmentalization within the project is outlined as follows:
3.2.4.2 Architecture and Building Geometry • The Great Hall forms its own fire compartment, separated from the Plaza and
Back of House areas by fire compartment walls (1 or 2 hours fire resistance
The architecture and free form geometry of the ‘pebble’ buildings is unique and to rating);
a large extent will define the primary structures. Internal arrangements for column • The Keystone forms its own fire compartment, separated from the Tower and
free areas and high spaces drive specific solutions and high demand on structure. the Library areas by fire compartment walls (1 or 2 hours fire resistance
rating);
• The Auditorium stage and seating areas will form one fire compartment,
3.2.4.3 Movement Joints separated from the break-out areas by fire compartment walls (1 or 2 hours
fire resistance rating);
Movement joints are considered required at the juncture of building ‘pebbles’ to the • A fire curtain at the proscenium (opening of the Auditorium stage);
Plaza landscaped roof. The requirements will dictate the structure edge condition • The Car Park is fire separated from the remainder of the building by 1 or 2
and thereby adjacent bay requirements. hours fire resistance rated walls; and
• Each floor of the Tower and/or the Key Stone will be designed as fire
Additional movement joints are likely required throughout the extent of the compartment floors (1 or 2 hours fire resistance rating required) for better
Landscaped roof slab namely above the Plaza, Back of House and Car Park evacuation strategy.
buildings. The requirements for these movement joints will need to be coordinated
with landscaping and road / pavement finishes in addition to drainage
requirements for the landscaped roof. Currently movement joints have not been 3.2.4.7 MEP Coordination
fully developed and require coordination.
Coordination of the structural systems with the building services systems has
progressed in terms of main plant room allocation and requirements. However, this
3.2.4.4 Facades requires further progress to establish key requirements for vertical and horizontal
service distribution including structure penetrations.
The building façade solutions, their form, materials, support requirements and
maintenance access provisions etc have a substantial if not the greatest current
influence on the structural solutions.
3.2.5 Low-Rise and Below Grade Structures
The Low-Rise and Below Grade Structures encompass all the buildings and
programme spaces located below the gently slopped landscaped dome. These
structures can loosely be categorized as either ‘cultural’ or related ‘facilities’ in
usage. The latter includes the Car Park, the Energy Centre and the Back-of-House
areas (BOH), while the former includes the Plaza, the Museum, the Source, and the
Oasis landscaping areas. Structurally speaking, separation of these programme
spaces and buildings is difficult to define as most of them significantly interact with
each other. Additional interactions of these low-rise structures include direct
connections to the Great Hall and all other structures rising above the landscaped
dome that symbolizes the desert. The Auditorium, the Library, and the Tower
‘pebbles’ all have lower floor levels and corresponding foundations that reside
within the general Plaza zone that is part of the Below Grade Structures.
All the low-rise and below grade structures are centrally located about the elliptical
landscaped dome and the collection of the building ‘pebbles’. The facilities spaces
are placed further from the centre as to provide programme support functions to
all the cultural spaces.
Viewed from the outside, the collective vision of the below grade structures is to
remain invisible and thus casting full focus on the Pebble structures rising out of
the landscaped desert dome.
Entrances to all structures are located at the ground Plaza level. Public access is
via tapered, embanked entrance valleys or ‘wadis’ that arrive at the open Plaza
space beneath the landscaped dome. Vehicular entrance is through discrete tunnel
passages.
Low-rise and Below Grade Structural Site Plan
Revisions of the below grade spaces have taken place throughout the schematic
design phase as the function and form of all buildings continue to progress into a
systematic and aesthetic vision. Greater efficiencies in overall structural systems Car Park
and reinforcing quantities have been achieved through the refined definition of
these spaces and will continue so into the design development stage. The project parking is understood to accommodate a total of 1000 cars, assumed
at this stage to be split approximately equal between the remote external grade
level parking and the Car Park building below the landscaped dome, this
3.2.5.2 Building Description accommodating parking over two levels. The main entrance is via a tunnel from
the remote car park, adjacent to the main project site. The ground floor parking
The Low-Rise and Below Grade structures vary in overall shape, size and usage. To level comprises a slab-on-grade. The second elevated structure at Level 01 is
better define each of the structures, it is best to separate them by usage, that is, comprised of cast-in-place, post-tensioned concrete slabs supported by reinforced
the facilities structures, and the ones with cultural programme. concrete columns and perimeter retaining walls. The north concrete wall also
forms the southern boundary of the BOH area for the Plaza. The gently sloping roof
slab of the Car Park supports part of the dome landscaping. Due to the heavy roof
loading, use of one-way 300 mm thick post-tensioned slab supported by post-
tensioned band beams is employed.
Energy Centre
The Energy Centre is an industrial-like structure, and is similar in nature to that of

the commercial Car Park. Both structures are comprised of slabs-on-grade,
perimeter retaining walls, repetitious columns on a regular grid supporting roof
loads from the landscaping. The roof slab, owing to similar load demands to that
of the Car Park, is of similar construction. The key difference between the two
structures is that the Energy Centre does not have an elevated slab at Level 01.
This results in a longer un-braced length for the columns and hence requiring them
to be larger than those in the Car Park.
Back-of-House (BOH) Areas
There are multiple BOH areas within the Plaza zone to service the cultural building
programmes. Generally there are BOH spaces at each of the two loading docks
located at the north and south ends of the Plaza. The north end BOH area is Car Park Typical Bay
situated between the Energy Centre, Auditorium and Great Hall. It also services
the gallery spaces of the Museum. The south end BOH area is simpler in shape,
and it supports the Library, and the kitchen facility of the Plaza. All BOH areas are
of commercial design intention. Reinforced concrete is the primary structural
material. Columns are similar in size to those of the Energy Centre; however,
there are partial mezzanine levels in certain areas as required by architecture.
Generally, the roof slab is similar to that of the Energy Centre. The major
differences are the longer span 33m post-tensioned beams over the loading dock
area to eliminate columns interfering with the drive lanes.
Plaza
The Plaza is the main entrance for the entire complex. It is completely covered by
the landscaping that forms the dome architecturally, and is situated at the Ground
Floor Level. From the Plaza, the visitor is able to see the undersides of the building
pebbles, walk out to the Oasis landscaping areas, enter the Great Hall, and spiral
down the ramp to the Museum galleries, which ultimately leads to the Source. The
overall Plaza space is an open structure, comprised of randomly located and sloped
round columns roughly 10m in height. The sparse column arrangement is
accommodated by the use of post-tensioned beams at the Plaza roof, supporting
heavy landscaping and vehicle access loads.
Energy Centre Typical Bay

Museum and the Source
The Museum is essentially various foundation levels within the Plaza. There are
three main galleries, each successively lower in elevation, and are accessed via a
continuous ramp (square on plan) following the passageway towards the Source.
The Source marks the geometric centre of the complex, and emanates upwards
from the foundation base while flaring outwards. The Source programme is an
outdoor space with a reflection pool open to the sky.
The primary structural material for the Museum and Source is reinforced concrete.
The structural system is comprised of a base foundation mat, retaining walls at
various elevations, and sloped round columns aligned with the Source’s geometry.
These columns support the cantilever ramp system.
Oases
There are two Oases adjoining the Plaza at Ground Level. Both of them are
envisaged as landscaped slab-on-grade areas partially surrounded by sloped
retaining wall structures. Aside form the Source, these are the only two
penetrations through the landscaped dome over the Plaza. The floor and retaining
wall requirements of the Oases will be further developed in coordination with the Complex Section Elevation
landscaping requirements.
Back-of-House (BOH) Areas

The key requirement of all BOH Areas is to facilitate support to the Cultural Centres
The key requirements of the Low-rise and Below Grade structures are numerous of the complex. Loading docks provide means of delivering goods to the BOH
and varied. Overall these structures link together all buildings within the complex. Areas.
Car Park Plaza
The Key requirement of the Car Park is to provide parking spaces for both visitors The Plaza key requirements are to provide a visually pleasing entrance and lobby
and employees. The ground level is intended for visitors while the elevated level is for the visitors. The openness of the space aids in accomplishing this key
for the employees. The exact number of required spaces for each is still undecided, requirement.
however the current understanding is 1000 spaces distributed between the building
Car Park and remote external parking facility. Final parking requirements shall be Museum and the Source
completed in the design development stage.
The key requirement of the Museum Gallery spaces is to provide exhibition space.
Energy Centre Each of these spaces varies in size and openness. The Source provides the focal
point of the entire complex and directs the visitor’s path down along the spiralled
The Energy Centre key requirement is to provide space for primary mechanical, ramp. Ultimately the Source’s key requirement is to provide a sense of reason and
electrical and plumbing system equipment for the vast majority of the entire being for the visitor. The specific requirements of these galleries in regard humidity
building complex. control needs to be established and incorporated in the overall design.
from the IBC 2003, the Saudi Aramco Building Code, as well as specific Saudi
Oases Aramco, Architect or other consultant advised requirements.
The key requirement of the two Oases is to provide outside areas full of gardens The roof slabs for the various structures in this section are designed to sustain the
and landscaping to be enjoyed from either the Oases themselves or visually from landscape load equivalent to 1m of soil, in addition to fire truck loading, as directed
the interior of the Plaza or Great Hall. by Saudi Aramco. The retaining walls are designed to resist the lateral pressure
exerted by the surrounding soil, taking into account the assumed design ground
water level and surcharge loads from the landscaped dome.
In addition to the general loading requirement, there are different loading
The Low-rise and Below Grade structures comprise a unique geometry. In requirements for the respective structures. The Car Park loading at the parking
elevation, these structures have a smoothed dome roof surface while below the levels is based on recommendations from the IBC 2003 for passenger cars. The
ground excavated floor level essential mimic an inverted tiered ‘wedding cake’. Energy Centre is designed to sustain loads for an industrial occupancy. The BOH
General and specific grids are established to define and coordinate the plan areas demand the slabs-on-grade to support access of service vehicles, and the
geometries of all Low-rise and Below Grade. mezzanine levels to support usage of light storage. The Plaza serves as the
entrance for the complex, and as such expects a live load of visitor assemblage.
Car Park and Energy Centre Grids The galleries of the Museum are designed to high visitor density acting
concurrently to the weight of heavy artwork at display, whereas the ramps leading
Each of these buildings has a dedicated grid spacing and nomenclature. This is to to the galleries are designed to live loads from visitors only but not exhibits. The
facilitate the economy and coordination and construction of each building. The Oases areas exert loading requirements derived from landscaping and the
typical Car Park grid spacing is currently at 9m x 10m in design. This information gathering of visitors.
shall be confirmed to comply with all Saudi Aramco parking spaces and drive lane
requirements in the Design Development phase. The Energy Centre gird is set at
10m x 10m, allowing room for mechanical equipment while maintaining a relatively 3.2.5.6 Foundations
economical roof slab bay size able to resist the heavy landscape and access loads
above. The Low-rise and Below Grade structures essentially comprise the foundations of
all buildings within the complex. These foundations are generally of similar design
Grid for the Plaza, Museum, the Source and Oases and bear directly upon the soil without the aid of pile type structures. This
assertion will be confirmed though the soil investigation conducted after the
Each of the cultural structures below the desert landscape shares a common Schematic Design phase. Typically bearing support is provided though individual
rectilinear grid. The spacing of the grids is irregular to suit the structural definition pad footings for columns and strip footings for walls and retaining walls.
and hence architectural requirements. Some areas of the structure are more open
while others are more regularly defined. At the ground level of the Plaza, grids for The currently assumed allowable soil bearing capacity is 250 kN/m2, with footings
the pebble buildings are shown to provide coordination of their presence at the placed a minimum of 2 m below original ground surface. This depression of
ground floor. footings, detached from the slab-on-grade, allows for greater flexibility in
coordination and construction of various below-grade utilities and drainage. Most
footings are approximately 1m thick. Some select areas of the foundation include
3.2.5.5 Load Summary basic 1m thick spread mats (rafts) such as at the access corridor beneath the
Great Hall.
The loading requirements for the Low-Rise and Below Grade structures are derived
from their intended usage, namely, either cultural or related facilities. Area- The one exception to these common foundation types as noted is located at the
specific loading is outlined in the relevant sections of the Structural Design Criteria extreme base of the entire Cultural Centre. A deep foundation mat in the form of a
document, and graphically depicted in the load maps in an Appendix of the said hammer head T (on plan) provides the support for not only the lowest Museum
document. The loading requirements are a combination of recommended values foundation walls but the Source slopped columns and entire Tower columns and
shear wall core. This mat slab varies in thickness to facilitate the Source water
feature and Tower V-shaped columns that virtually hang from the Source’s
reflecting pool edge. The overall geometry of the deep mat is designed to minimize
excavation and construction complexity – this rationale ensures more
straightforward foundation and temporary works structures.
The ground slabs within the buildings outlined in this section are mostly slabs-on-
grade of various thicknesses, owing to different usages as outlined below.
Typically, the top of slab elevation is set 200 mm below the finished floor
elevation, to allow for pavers or other floor covering material as dictated by
architectural requirements. The specific finishes requirements need to be
understood and coordinated into the structural design.
The Car Park ground slab is a slab-on-grade of 150 mm in thickness. This is a

standard thickness for passenger car access. In areas where truck access is
expected, such as at the Energy Centre and the loading dock areas, a slab-on-
grade of 200 mm in thickness is employed due to the heavier loading. At the
galleries in the Museum, a 300 mm slab is noted due to the high quality of the
space called for by the intended usage, as well as the potential of ground water
effects exerting additional structural demand on the slab.
Tower and Source Foundation Mat
Since the structures are all located below the landscaped dome, this entire area is
bound by a perimeter retaining wall holding back the lateral pressure exerted from
the adjacent soil and the surcharge from the landscaped dome. Owing to the
geometry of the Source, there are also partial heights, intermediate retaining walls
between levels of excavation.
The lateral restraints of the retaining walls vary in different areas. The retaining
walls at the Energy Centre, the BOH areas, as well as the intermediate retaining
walls separating different levels of excavation, are braced laterally only at the base
and at the top of the wall. The retaining walls at the Car Park however are
additionally braced by the suspended slab at level 01 and thus reduces the
structural demand of the retaining wall.
Typical Retaining Wall

3.2.5.9 Elevated Floor Structures
Despite residing beneath the desert landscaped dome, the Low-rise and Below
Grade structure comprise several elevated slab structures. All the slabs are
reinforced concrete. Some are simple flat plate construction while others are beam
supported. Post-tensioning is employed significantly though out these slabs and
beams to capitalize on greater economy of structure and more desirable
architectural open spaces.
Car Park
The Car Park has an elevated two-way post-tensioned slab at level 01. The typical
slab thickness is a mere 230 mm able to efficiently span 10 m in each direction.
The only exception to this thickness is along the curved drive lane where a larger
end-span condition requires a 300 mm deep slab. Here, flat plate construction was
continued in lieu of a beam system for costing and to maintain the construction
protocol. Finally the two ramps are the only conventional reinforced flat plate
concrete elevated slabs. This is a more common and practical solution for car
parking ramps. Car Park Level 01 Post-Tension Layout
Plaza, Museum and BOH

The Plaza has elevated structural slabs at the ground level as well as for the
excavated portions at Gallery 2, datum elevation -3.82 m, and for areas One of the most striking structural components of the entire Low-rise and Below
immediately surrounding the Tower core and columns at both elevation -4.5 m and Grade buildings is the collection of various roofs supporting the desert landscaping.
-9.3 m. The Gallery 2 slab is a 300 mm one-way post-tension slab supported by These structures however will be unseen from the public as a suspended ceiling in
long span post-tensioned beams. These in turn are supported by prime foundation the Plaza will mimic the dome above.
walls framing out the basic excavation dig. The slabs about the Tower core are
small in scope and therefore are traditionally reinforced flat plate 300 mm slabs. All roofs make the use of post-tensioning to achieve an economical structure that
resist the very heavy landscape and fire vehicle access loads. Further study to the
Relatively small areas of elevated slab exist as mezzanines at level 01 of the Plaza exact nature of these loads will be conducted in the Design Development stage and
and select portions of BOH. These are currently 250 and 300 mm deep appropriate structures will be assessed resulting in the best economy.
conventionally reinforced flat slabs. Given their small and irregular shapes and
likely hood for revisions it is best to avoid more economical post-tension slabs The primary roof slab is 300 mm thick supported by post-tensioned beams. The
which generally require larger programme areas and known constraints. Some of beams are of various sizes given the depth restrictions and span considerations for
these slabs have minor reinforced concrete beams for basic framing purposes such the independent programme areas. Car Park beams are relatively flat and highly
as for stair penetrations. repetitious. These serve to allow clearance of the level 01 slab while effectively
transmitting large shear forces to the columns without the use of stud rail
reinforcement. While of similar span, the Energy Centre beams are slightly deeper
and hence more economical. BOH area beams vary from those similar in size to the
ones of the Energy Centre to much longer spans reaching 33 m. These beams are
even deeper at a minimum of 1500 mm and more closely spaced to reduce
tributary load. The BOH beams are specifically designed to align with beams
spanning across the Plaza and Museum spaces and cantilever beyond the Source
column supports. This detail creates more efficient continuous beam action and
reduces construction forming issues. The deign intention of all the beams spanning
towards the Source are similar in concept. This structural solution ironically mimics
the architectural vision of Source as focal point.
The typical Plaza roof beams near both entrances are most organic in plan. They
enable few and irregular slopped Plaza columns as per the architectural vision.
These beams however do have a set order and are of an economical capacity.
Further study and coordination in the next design stage will dictate the exact
placement of the beams and their supports thought the general Plaza area.
The various buildings covered in this section have similar structures for gravity
loads, namely, reinforced concrete columns and walls. Currently three typical
column sizes have been proposed for simplicity of design and costing, however if
appropriate more specific requirements will be refined in the Design Development
stage.
At the Car Park, the typical column size is set to be 450 mm x 900 mm, whereas at
the Energy Centre and the Plaza BOH areas, they are set to be 800 mm x 800 mm. Low-rise and Below Grade Structure Roof Strategy
The reason for a smaller column size at the Car Park is the presence of a structural
slab at Level 01, which braces the columns against buckling.
In the Plaza area, the typical columns are circular in plan with a diameter of
1250mm. Large columns are needed because these columns are not vertical, and
that they support heavy loading as outlined previously. Similar columns are also
used around the Source to support the ramp in the Museum.
The columns from the Library and the Tower as they penetrate through the Plaza
have different requirements and are discussed in the respective sections in the
report.
Aside from the retaining walls as noted in section 3.2.5.8, there are also concrete
structural walls in the buildings covered in this section that are as tall as 13 m at
some locations. As a potential cost saving option, some of these walls may be
replaced by CMU partition supported by columns and beams.
Car Park Post-Tension Roof Layout

at the base and the roof have been considered and a strategy is to be chosen in
3.2.5.12 Lateral Load Resisting Structures the Design Development stage.
Given that the Low-Rise and Below Grade structures are covered under the Around the Source, the outer walls of the ramp follow the general geometry of the
landscaped dome, wind load is not a design concern for these structures. Seismic Source and flare outwards as they go upwards. Owing to the geometry, the scale,
loads induced from the surrounding soil are transferred by the floor diaphragms and the lateral pressure demand on these walls, it is simpler to construct the
and resisted by the perimeter retaining walls that act as shear walls. Lateral structural retaining walls vertically, and achieve the architectural geometry by the
pressure from soil and ground water are also resisted by the perimeter concrete application of a façade. However, should the conclusion of the Geotechnical
retaining walls. Investigation permit an open excavation (rather than requiring shoring systems)
then it may be feasible to taper the excavation to suit the Source wall inclination
The post-tensioned concrete slabs act as rigid diaphragms for the transfer of and construct constant thickness walls on the exact same inclination. These design
lateral loads, at the same time providing lateral stability to the gravity columns. requirements will be progressed in the Design Development stage.
3.2.5.13 Façade Structures 3.2.5.14 Other Structures
The architectural vision of the project present challenges in the façade support Notable significant structures with in the Low-rise and Below Grade buildings
schemes and at the interfaces between structure and façade support. A few include four distinct items currently. These are discussed below.
important areas for consideration are noted in this section.
Source Ramp
Plaza Inner Façade
The ramp to the Museum Galleries spirals down to the Source. This ramp is to have
At the Plaza area, the Oases, and the entrance valleys, the architecture calls for a a constant gradient and be supported by the Source Columns which rise up from
finished look of a rammed earth profile. Our studies in the structural application of the main foundation mat (raft) to the underside of the Plaza roof beam structure.
rammed earth walls show that given the height and geometry of the walls, it is not The ramp is a conventionally reinforced concrete slab of approximately 300 mm
the most economical solution in terms of construction cost and time. Conventional thick. Deep and tapered corbel beam brackets frame off of the slopped Source
reinforced concrete retaining walls are determined to be a better structural option, columns. The design aesthetic of the Source columns, still in progress, will have an
and the desired finish as required by the architectural vision is to be accomplished impact on the final solution to the ramp. The ramp also runs through successive
by façade attachment to the structural walls in these areas. Tower floors where the differing ramp and floor slab levels will require
coordination.
Pebble Façades
Tower V-Columns
At the interface inside the Plaza area where the building Pebbles penetrate the
Plaza slab, visually there is a continuation of the Pebble façade; however, The pair of V-shaped Tower columns, located at the foundation mat level, are
structurally there will need to be appropriate separation joints at the Plaza roof significant in size. These frame upward and out until they finally split into two
slab that would require close coordination between all relevant disciplines such as separate columns near the ground level. The design intention of the V-columns is
structural, façade, waterproofing, etc. This should be progressed in the Design to direct lateral loads from the slopped tower columns above into each other at the
Development stage. foundation, thereby balancing most of the lateral forces.
Source Façade Oases Retaining Walls
The support strategy of the Source façade needs to be further developed due to its Retaining walls and base slabs are envisaged to form the two Oases and retain the
large span of approximately 23m from the Source to the landscaped dome. Pros landscaped slopes above. These areas are under development and coordination.
and cons of having the façade supported by the ramp levels verses supported only Currently they are envisaged of similar construction to the common slab-on-grades
and retaining walls but may need to allow for a greater variation in elevations and
slopes. Refined structural solutions will be presented in the Design Development
phase. For the retaining structures several options are under consideration but can
be grouped into conventional structural retaining walls or reinforced earth
constructions.
Entrance Valley Retaining Walls
The entrance valleys, or ‘wadis’, comprised landscaped pedestrian routes flanked

by sloped and plan tapered walls. Similar to the Oases areas these are under
development and coordination.
Access Tunnels
Vehicle access tunnels are envisaged for access to the loading docks and Car Park.
These are proposed comprised of simple retaining walls on strip footing and have a
simple one-way concrete beam and slab cover depending on the exact span
required for the drive lanes. The tunnel requirements and structural proposals will
be explored more beyond the schematic phase.
In the process of completing the schematic design we have identified a number of

key issues, information required and areas of coordination – all of which impact on
the structural design.
Museum Ramp and Column Source Detail
These items are important to conclude so that the subsequent Design Development
stage can be satisfactorily concluded and the key requirements for interfacing
systems incorporated within the overall structural design.
The key issues, information and coordination requirements are detailed in section
3.2.14 of this report.
3.2.6 Great Hall 60m. Internal clear heights are as per the Architects proposals, which are
understood to be 12m at the higher north end lowering to 5.5m approximately at
the lower south end approaching the entrance from the Plaza. Including for roof
3.2.6.1 Introduction cladding build-up, personnel access catwalk, structure and ceiling finishes etc, the
overall roof build-up is approximately 5m in the longer span regions and slightly
less for the shortest spans close to the Plaza entrance. Thus building height stands
The Great Hall building will provide a primary venue for exhibitions, banquets and at approximately 10m to 17m overall.
receptions etc. The objective is that this is a space of great architectural quality.
The building envelope features curved outer cladding and inner finishes, both with
walls and roof meeting seamlessly, thus maintaining the impression of the pebble
form.
The Great Hall is located touching the north-east boundary of the Museum and
Plaza; effectively the Great Hall’s south elevation cuts through the Museums
gallery 2 and Plaza spaces. The east elevation bounds the oasis adjacent to the
projects main entrance ‘valley’. The north and west elevations are respectively
bounded by landscaping and back of house areas.
The vision of the Great Hall pebble is that it sits within the ground rising above
landscape level on the north and west elevations but dipping down within the
landscape to the south.
The main public access will be from the Plaza area via an opening 5m to 6m wide.
The Great Hall main room will allow access to the oasis landscape, proposed
through the east elevation. Service access is provided at ground floor level via a
corridor linking the facility to the various back of house area areas and loading Great Hall - Plan View EL. +0.00m
dock.
The Great Hall design has been significantly rationalised since the SD1 design
stage; reorientation, smaller overall, reduced gallery area and relocating the
cinema. Through continued architecture and engineering development a more
efficient structural system has been developed, significantly reducing steel tonnage
and simplifying construction. This revised structure is summarised in the sections
below.
The Great Hall comprises two floors; ground floor will provide the main exhibition
space and a small mezzanine gallery will provide additional area but this will not be
used for exhibits due to its small area and access limitations.
Section B-B
The building dimensions vary on plan and section as generated by the pebble form.
The overall width varies from approximately 25m to 37m and the length is almost
The Great Hall will form a single large but flexible space. The current proposal and
direction is that this will not be subdivided by partitions built into the building Loading is given in the Structural Design Criteria document and related loading
system, but instead stored moveable partitions could be assembled to break up the plans. This includes client advised requirements for the ground floor exhibition area
space for smaller exhibitions. and ceiling level exhibits.
A client requirement is that exhibits may be suspended from the ceiling structure Loads have been allowed for maintenance access at roof level, as has the advised
but that these will not be significant in weight. cladding construction build-up and finishes, access catwalk, services and, acoustic
dampening requirements etc.
3.2.6.4 Geometry and Structure Grid All-in, roof system dead loads (including structure self weight) are approximately
3.1kN/m2 and live loads 1.70kN/m2. The elevation system dead loads are assessed
Geometry to be approximately 2.8kN/m2 (including structure self weight). For an exhibition
hall, these loads are on the moderately heavy side, however the moderate dead
The form of the Great Hall is curved, smooth and random just like a natural loads will negate wind uplift on the roof system thus stress reversal of the roof
pebble. The buildings free form and geometry cannot therefore be replicated from structure is not envisaged.
any conventional geometric object or mathematical or rules. Thus the definition in
space of surface geometry is complicated and impacts on the requirements of In regard to lateral load and building stability the effect of the inclined structure,
external façade, structure, services and internal finishes etc. not wind or seismic loads, will very likely govern the stability system design. Wind
loading will however be taken into account in the design of elements that ‘feel’ the
Structure Grid wind for example elevation columns.
Despite the curved and random form of the building a rectilinear grid has been
selected primarily for two reasons; this best suits the recommended structure
system and the random shape cannot be better defined by any other logical grid.
The structure grid is proposed on 6m x 6m intervals, aligning with the primary

structural elements. Where elements do not coexist directly on grid then ‘x’ and ‘y’
dimensions will be specified to set out the elements in space at a particular datum
height ‘z’.
The 6m x 6m grid is small enough to permit the primary and secondary structural
elements to replicate the buildings form but not too small that the arrangement of
members becomes too dense or congested. A finer grid could be used but this will
require transfer structures to span openings. Exhibition facilities often feature
secondary grids on finer spacing than primary grid from which to hang more
substantial exhibits, however no requirements have been provided.
The grid has been set out from a provisional origin on the wall dividing Museum
gallery 2 from the back of house areas. The grid origin and orientation shall be
ratified with the pebble final form and accurately defined in terms of xyz
dimensions from the overall project grid datum.
Great Hall Plan Grid
3.2.6.6 Foundations significant structure. However a number of alternatives have been considered.
These will be further developed in the Design Development stage. These are
Foundations comprise bearing type foundations including pad and strip footings as summarised below.
appropriate. These have been sized based on the assumed allowable soil bearing
capacity of 250kN/m2 at a minimum depth of 2 m below original ground surface.
A complication for the foundations is the location of the Museum service corridor
which passes beneath the Plaza end of the Great Hall. This intervention results with
a sharp step in footings depths; 2m deep away from the service corridor and
approximately 9m deep for the service corridor. This gives a risk of differential
settlement depending on the soil type and conditions encountered at the relative
depths. Further study and solutions to overcome this are required.
Both suspended and on-grade ground floor slabs are proposed; suspended roof
slabs spanning over the Museum service corridor below and on-grade slabs away
from these. Where the on-grade slab meets the service corridor structure a
granular layer will be placed to isolate the two systems and minimise differential
settlement effects to the on-grade slab at this interface. Further study and
solutions to overcome this are required.
Several elevation columns coincide with the suspended floor slabs spanning over
the service corridor below. At these locations transfer systems will be required in
the form of beams or slabs to effectively transfer out the column base reactions to Great Hall and Museum Service Corridor Slab-Foundation Section
sub-structure below.
Based on the service corridor preliminary proposals, the service ramp to Museum Cantilever Retaining wall with Counterfort (as per drawings)
gallery 2 falls from -2.46m to -3.62m below the Great Hall ground floor,
approximately -3.0m at the critical point to the Great Hall. Considering the This type of retaining wall is made of reinforced concrete and consists of a stem,
preliminary structural requirements the service ramp headroom appears base footing and counterfort. At regular intervals thin vertical slabs known as
inadequate. This needs to be coordinated. counterforts tie the stem and footing together. Counterforts reduce the shear and
bending moments in the stem and footing which are critical for retaining walls of
this height. While this type of retaining wall is both common and effective, but
3.2.6.8 Retaining Walls does require an increased amount of formwork to cast the counterforts. This
solution is currently proposed.
The north end of the Great Hall is approximately 9m below the external
landscaping and considering there are no building facilities in this area, the whole Cantilever Retaining Wall with Dead-man Tie Back and Shear Key
9m or so must be retained by a retaining wall structure. Similar retaining walls are
required at the external perimeter of other low level buildings (Car Park and back This type of retaining wall is typically made of reinforced concrete and consists of a
of house areas etc.), however the Great Hall retaining wall is critical since it cannot stem, base footing, steel tie anchor, and concrete dead man. A diagram of this
be supported laterally by the propping action of an intermediate floor or roof. A design is illustrated below. The concrete deadman and shear key restrain the top
conventional ‘stem’ cantilever wall retaining 9m of earth will necessitate a and bottom of the wall by developing the passive pressure in front of each
element. This type of design is particularly effective for high retaining walls by
minimizing the bending moments within the wall allowing for minimal wall and This arrangement of slabs, beams and support conditions provides an effective and
footing thicknesses. It also allows for easy construction due to reduced formwork simple to build system.
as compared with the counterfort design.
Transfer Systems
Mechanically Stabilized Retaining Walls with Metallic Strip Reinforcement
The current design is not considered to require the incorporation of transfer
This type of retaining wall consists of a cover over the face of the restrained soil structures for floors above ground floor level.
that is connected to thin, wide reinforcing strips at regular intervals all along the
length and depth of the wall. The strips attach to the wall face cover and extend Staircase
as far as necessary behind the wall to mobilize the weight of the soil to resist
overturning forces at the face of the wall. Face covers can typically be made of The staircase giving access from ground floor to mezzanine level is proposed
thin metallic sheets or precast concrete elements. While this is an effective constructed similarly to the mezzanine.
engineering solution, due to the height of the wall it does require a large number
and length of reinforcement strips which could complicate the construction process.
Recommendations
Currently the counterfort type wall is proposed. However, the solutions will be
further developed in the Design Development stage in conjunction with other
perimeter and external retaining wall systems on the project.
3.2.6.9 Mezzanine Floor Structure
The Great Hall comprises just a single mezzanine floor above ground floor level.
Mezzanine Slab
The mezzanine slab is proposed constructed from cast-in-place concrete on a

permanent metal deck formwork spanning up to 3m to secondary floor beams.
Mezzanine Beams
The mezzanine floor beams are proposed constructed in structural steel utilising
composite construction techniques i.e. incorporating top flange shear connectors to
compositely connect together the beam and slab system.
Alternative Retaining Wall Section
Secondary beams supporting the floor slab will span approximately 4m and be
supported by primary beams and columns at the mezzanine edge and directly by
the concrete framed back of house structure at the mezzanine rear.
Primary beams located at the mezzanine edge will span 6m to column grids and
thereby support intermediate secondary beams.
3.2.6.10 Roof Structure where the roof transitions to elevation and then taper further to approximately
0.5m depth (theoretically zero) at foundation supports. The Truss depths may be
The roof structure is the key to providing the vast column free space of the Great reduced for significantly shorter spans. The proposed truss frame is essentially a
Hall. The roof geometry and arrangement have been driven by architectural form, Warren type truss but modified to suit the roof form and specific structure
efficient grid spacing and structure depth. The light to moderate weight long-span arrangement. The buildings free form permits that all primary trusses are similar in
roof system is best suited to a structural steel system. arrangement, but however dictates that no two trusses are identical; span,
geometry and node setting out differ for all trusses.
Options were explored at the SD1 stage and beyond, resulting in the
recommendation to form the roof structure using roof trusses spanning across the
short length i.e. width of the Great Hall. The roof structure therefore comprises
primary trusses supporting either purlins or similar secondary elements directly
supporting the panelised roof cladding system.
Roof Components
The approximately 60m long Great Hall comprises 9 primary roof trusses at 6m
centres spanning 36m maximum and 20m minimum approximately. The primary
roof trusses are integrated with their truss-like column supports on the east
elevation (i.e. oasis side), such that the roof-column trusses form curved ‘truss
frames’ spanning between supports. The first and last primary truss frames
support similar truss-like end frames spanning perpendicular approximately 6m on
plan but 10m to 18m in developed length respectively.
Roof Structure Hierarchy
The hierarchy of the roof system comprises primary truss frames, secondary
structure that supports a tertiary structure to which the cladding and finishes are
directly fixed. In some cases it is feasible that cladding and finishes could connect
to the secondary structure systems depending on the specific requirements.
Primary Truss Frames
The primary truss frames are planar trusses. They are proposed with faceted
bottom and top chords, necessary to comply with and replicate the inner and outer
architectural profiles respectively. For the majority of the roof span just 2 ‘crank’
points are envisaged, at approximately third-points over the inner ceiling form.
Where the pebble form tightens, at the edges, additional ‘crank’ points are Image of Truss-Frame System
proposed; the location varying as necessary so to achieve best fit with the inner
ceiling/wall and outer envelope profile. End Truss Frame
A truss depth of approximately 2.25m between chord centres is proposed or At the building ends, similar planar truss frame elements form the final gable bay.
approximately 2.5m overall for the maximum 36m span. Top and bottom chords These end frames are supported at their top directly on final primary truss frames
are proposed typically from stock W10 and internal elements from stock W8 and at the bottom on a foundation pedestal. These frames are also faceted in
sections. The truss frames are envisaged to taper to approximately 2m depth elevation and effectively frame out each curved ends of the building.
Secondary Steelwork
The secondary steelwork family will either provide support for the tertiary structure
that supports the roof cladding and finishes or will be utilised as direct support for
the roof cladding and finishes. The actual solution must be specific to meet the
determined cladding system requirements. The secondary steelwork family may
comprise cold formed lightweight proprietary ‘purlin’ systems or structural
steelwork, or a combination. An advantage of the proprietary system is that
cladding panel design and installation coordination is more straightforward. An
advantage of structural steelwork is that the same elements could be utilised to
provide building stability and potentially support the access catwalk system and
outer mesh skin. A further advantage is that the additional structure layer will
improve construction tolerance therefore aiding formation of the curved profiles.
With exception of the cladding proposed as a ‘panelised’ system, specific cladding

and support requirements are unknown and need to be progressed in coordination
with the secondary steelwork proposals. This family of secondary steelwork is
internal within the building envelope. Primary Roof Truss Section B-B
Tertiary Steelwork
The tertiary steelwork family includes systems that directly support the cladding
envelope, outer mesh façade and internal finishes back to the secondary systems.
Considering the outer mesh façade requirements, including maintenance access, it
is envisaged that the tertiary steelwork will support the outer façade at least 2m
above roof envelope but nominally on elevations. Thus the tertiary system
requirements differ for roof and elevations so different systems and details will
likely be employed. This family of tertiary steelwork is both internal and external.
Specific cladding requirements are unknown and need to be progressed in

coordination with the tertiary steelwork proposals.
Transfer Systems
Roof transfer systems are not envisaged. This is on the basis that maximum
entrance and elevation openings do not need to exceed approximately 5.5m
between the 6m frame centres.
End Frame Roof Truss Section A-A

Alternative Structural System
The adjacent back of on house reinforced concrete structure, including columns
A potential alternative to the proposed structure is a steel ‘space-frame’ system. and edge beams, will provide gravity support to the Great Hall roof and mezzanine
These structures are efficient for long span requirements, in particular for non- floor structures.
typical geometry where specific and governing grid setting out is not a concern.
Walls
Space frames comprise a system of short struts arranged in three dimensions and
interconnected at node points. A space frame system for the Great Hall could be The adjacent back of on house reinforced concrete structure walls (if provided) will
arranged on say a grid of nodes 3m x 3m of depth 2m or slightly less depending on similarly provide gravity support to the Great Hall roof and mezzanine floor
load and performance requirements. structures
An advantage of space frame systems compared to structural steelwork is a

reduction in fabrication time and complexity. A disadvantage is erection as
conventionally space frames require temporary scaffold platforms to aid
construction. Also, the connection of the cladding and finishes systems will require
specific assessment to establish if a space-frame structure is truly viable.
Rigging Grid
No requirements have been advised for a rigging grid from which exhibits will be
suspended. We envisage therefore that exhibits will be hung from anchor points
located on the length of the primary truss frame lines centred on 6m grids. Anchor
points located at approximately 4m centres along the truss frame will work very
effectively with the structural design, i.e. these coincide with the truss nodes. Thus
the structure readily accommodates exhibit anchor points on a 6m x 4m grid.
Based on the loads allowed, each support point will be capable of supporting
approximately 1,750kg and each primary truss frame approximately 14.0 Tonnes
based on an average span.
Catwalks
Catwalks are envisaged required for maintenance access to the outer façade mesh
above roof level. The catwalk requirements and arrangement of supporting
structure is unknown. This shall be defined and coordinated with the overall
structural and head room requirements.
3.2.6.11 Gravity Load Resisting Structures Alterative Space-Frame Structure
Columns
Elevation columns are provided by the truss frame structure described above.
Structural steelwork columns will be provided to support the mezzanine floor
system.
3.2.6.12 Lateral Load Resisting Structures
Floor Diaphragms
The diaphragm action of the mezzanine floor will provide lateral stability to the
mezzanine columns.
Shear Walls
Reinforced concrete walls, envisaged within the back of house area, will provide
overall stability to the 9 primary truss frames at their west elevation support both
in the longitudinal and transverse directions.
Braced Frames
Bracing members combined with lateral trusses in the plane of the primary truss
top chords in conjunction with elevation bracing complete the buildings overall
stability to resist lateral loads. A second layer of bracing in the truss bottom chord
will provide resistance to the buckling in particular at the bottom chord ‘crank’
points.
3.2.6.13 Façade Structures
Cladding System
The roof and elevation cladding is understood to comprise an insulated panelised

envelope above which an open mesh skin is supported. The mesh is understood to
comprise either titanium shingles or a stainless steel mesh tensioned on the pebble
profile.
Façade Support Systems
These are discussed above in the Secondary and Tertiary Steelwork sub-sections.
The specific requirements for the cladding and their systems are uncertain and
needs to be clarified.
3.2.7 Library structural systems have been adopted. One which supports the internal floor plates
and another which wraps around the library floors and supports the façade.
Detaching the floor plates from the building envelope allows light, sound and air to
3.2.7.1 Introduction circulate within the Library space.
The Library building will provide space for library accommodation, adult education Another feature, particularly for permeating light into the Library space, is the
and an area for teenagers. main central atrium. This light well is an internal space with an irregular form
which penetrates through each of the Library floor plates and allows light to
The pebble housing the Library is elevated above the Plaza in the south east corner transfer indirectly down to the Plaza level 0 below.
of the site and the main public access is from the Plaza level 0, direct by escalator,
to Library level 2. Access to Library level 1 is down from level 2. The Library floor to floor height is currently 5.5m. This allows for a 1.5m floor
build-up which includes a structural zone, a raised floor, and a suspended ceiling
Since the SD1 stage of this project the Library building has been repositioned. for servicing the Library space and providing adequate smoke extract allowances.
Previously it was located adjacent to the Tower on the north west of the site.
However, due to architectural considerations for the Keystone requirements, the
Library and Auditorium have now switched positions and the Library sits on the
south east of the site with the Keystone wedged between the Tower and the
Library, instead of Auditorium, for support.

Level 4
The Library building comprises of four levels of floor area with each floor plate
varying in size. Due to the curved nature of the pebble form, the floor plates all
Level 3
have irregular edges.
Library level 0 equates to the Plaza level 0 and is below the underside of the Level 2
Library pebble. At this level, beyond the Plaza wall, Library facilities such as
storage, archive space, and the loading dock are housed. Level 1
At present no books are shown on the level 1 floor plan but an allowance has been Plaza Level 0
made for this area to carry book stacks, as requested by the architect. This will
allow for re-assignment of internal spaces during detailed design and for future
flexibility for the client. The first floor level currently shows Library staff office Museum
space, a teen area, media and multipurpose zones.
Library level 2 is where the main reception desk is located and includes space for
an exhibition area and café in addition to the allocated book stacks. Level 3 is
Architectural section of Library
predominantly book stacks arranged in clusters, as is Level 4, with an emphasis on
this top floor being a research area.
The architectural intention for the Library is that the floor plates are completely
disconnected from the building envelope and set back from the curved internal
surface of the pebble by several metres. In order to achieve this, two different
The roof loadings for secondary façade steelwork and for access and maintenance
A key requirement in the design of the Library structure is the high imposed have also been assumed to apply around the perimeter envelope.
loading of book stacks. Although the Library is expected to hold approx. 300,000
books, the book layouts currently illustrated on the Architect’s drawings identify Lateral loads applied to the building’s stability system are generated by four
200,000 books. For this reason, and for future flexibility, the entire Library floor applications. These are wind, seismic, lateral forces resulting from gravity loads on
plate has been design to carry book stacks. inclined structural elements, and lateral loads transferred from the keystone into
the library building.
Geometry
The form of the Library is curved, smooth and random just like a natural pebble.
The buildings form and geometry cannot therefore be replicated from any
conventional geometric object or mathematical rules. Thus the definition in space
of surface geometry is complicated and impacts on the requirements of external
façade, structure, services and internal finishes etc.
Structural Grid
Despite the curved and irregular nature of the Library floor plates and overall
building form, a rectilinear grid has been set to align with the main building axes.
The structure is proposed on 9mx9m intervals as this has proven to provide the
most structurally efficient grid for the floor slab supports while providing good
spatial flexibility. Around the slab perimeter and the circular atrium void, supports
are provided off grid to suit the irregular shape.
The loading designed for in the Library structure is detailed in the Design Criteria
document and its associated Loading Plans. This includes the Client advised
requirements and assumptions for the current internal finishes, based on the
Architectural plan of Library Level 2
current architectural scheme. As noted in 3.2.7.3, the imposed loading of book
stacks has been assumed to apply across all areas of each floor plate. The book
stack loads are in accordance with IBC 2003, which assumes that the stacks are no
3.2.7.6 Foundations and Ground Slabs
higher than 2.29m, with shelves 0.3m deep on either side. These stacks should be
a minimum of 0.91m apart.
The elevated Library pebble is supported on columns and cores which penetrate
into the Plaza space below. These columns then become part of the Plaza and
The roof dead loading assumed allows for a secondary steelwork frame to support
Museum supporting structure and therefore, the Library does not have foundations
the façade finish from the primary roof steelwork. The roof imposed load also
or a ground slab directly associated with it.
allows for access and maintenance in a zone between the primary
steelwork/building envelope and the external cladding system.
The library comprises of four suspended floor levels.
Slabs
The Library floor structure has been considered as a reinforced concrete flat slab
solution. This conclusion was reached by first considering a variety of slab and
span alternatives. Waffle slabs, ribbed slabs, and slabs with down-stand beams
were considered but following cost advice and considering the architectural and Floor slab option (recommended option on far left)
servicing requirements, the flat slab solution has been adopted.
The flat slab solution is 400mm thick insitu reinforced concrete supported by
columns on the 9x9m structural grid. Due to the irregularity of the floor plate
geometries, each edge bay of slab is different and the slab edge is cantilevered by
varying amounts, up to 2.5m.
In areas where columns can not be located in their optimum position and increased
spans are a result, additional reinforcement will be required in the slab and in
some cases this may result in additional local thickening of the slab. Any local
thickening requirements will be accommodated within the depth of the suspended
ceiling and coordinated with the servicing strategy.
Transfer Systems
Transfer beams are required in the region of the Keystone support. This is because
the columns which support the Keystone cannot continue up from the 3rd floor in
their same position due to the space required for the Keystone truss bearing detail.
Offsetting the columns which continue up through the building has resulted in a
transfer beam to carry the loads.
Others
To accommodate the irregular shape of the slab edge and to allow for a handrail
around the open perimeter, an upstand has been assumed to all the slab edges, Typical slab arrangement
including the central atrium space.
3.2.7.8 Roof and Façade Supporting Structures
The library roof structure is supported by columns from the uppermost floor plates.
To the rear of the building this comprises columns from the fourth floor and at the
front of the building columns from the third floor level.
Beams
The primary supporting structure for the roof is a grillage of steel beams supported
from the concrete columns on the 9x9m grid. Secondary steel beams are currently
shown dividing the span in two but this may require additional secondary beams
when the material for the building envelop has been finalised. Above the building
envelop line, further secondary steel will be required to support the selected façade
system, an allowance has currently been made for this.
Trusses
The perimeter façade is supported by a series of primary steelwork trusses. These

trusses are supported by the main concrete frame at roof level and first floor and
allow the intermediate floor slabs to be completely separate from the pebble skin.
These trusses have been sized making assumptions on the type of façade material
and system selected; its weight and deflection tolerances. At present the deflection
Façade supporting trusses
is proving to govern the design.
Columns
The gravity loads acting on the Library system are transferred from the reinforced
concrete floor plates and from the roof steelwork and façade trusses, to ground, by
means of reinforced concrete columns. The columns are located on the 9x9m
structural grid and increase in size down the building. The largest columns at the
base are typically 950mm in diameter.
In many cases, around the central atrium and at either end of the Library
structure, the columns are inclined to accommodate the Architecture.
Walls
In areas surrounding the two structural cores, the reinforced concrete core walls
will provide support for the adjacent concrete floor slabs.
Applied loads Member forces Deflected shape
Truss analysis model
3.2.7.10 Lateral Load Resisting Structures 3.2.7.12 Key Issues and Information
Floor Diaphragms In the process of completing the schematic design we have identified a number of
The diaphragm action of the reinforced concrete floor slabs, and the braced roof the structural design.
steelwork, contribute to the lateral stability for the building.
As the external cladding is separate from the floor slabs, and supported by stage can be satisfactorily concluded and the key requirements for interfacing
steelwork connected at roof and first floor level, the lateral load from applied wind systems incorporated within the overall structural design.
forces is transferred to the stabilising cores at roof and first floor levels only.
The lateral load from the seismic forces, and from the inclined structural elements, 3.2.14 of this report
occurs at each floor level and so is transferred through each floor diaphragm.
Shear Walls
The lateral loads applied to the roof and floor plates are transferred through
diaphragm action into the reinforced concrete shear walls of the two core
arrangements.
Others Systems
The inclination of many of the structural elements at the perimeter of the building,
and around the atrium void, creates lateral forces from carrying vertical loads.
However, by balancing the inclination of opposing elements, the induced lateral
forces can be managed and minimised. The net resultant lateral forces are then
transferred through the floor diaphragms into the core shear walls.
3.2.7.11 Other structures
The Library structure provides support for the Keystone building which spans
between the Tower and the Library. Details of the Keystone structure are described
in 3.2.9.8. The main Keystone truss elements span onto the Library at 3rd floor
level, to locations supported by columns that penetrate down to the Plaza below.
The bearing conditions at the Library will allow the transfer of both vertical and
lateral loads from the Keystone into the main Library frame. One bearing will act
as a fully pinned support whilst the other will allow movement in the longitudinal
(North east to south west) direction only. At the interface of the Library and
Keystone slab edges, a horizontal movement joint will be provided. This is only to
allow movement between the concrete slab edges because all lateral loads are
being transferred directly through the frame connections.
3.2.8 Auditorium form and therefore varies on every level. As an acoustic separation is required
between the circulation area and the main auditorium, the circulation floor
structure is to bear onto acoustic bearings which are then supported off a concrete
3.2.8.1 Introduction corbel within the reinforced concrete wall. Each level is accessed with two feature
staircases, two access staircases and two lifts within the circulation areas.
The Auditorium building will provide a high quality venue which will provide the
capacity to house a variety of different types of performances such as theatrical, The shape of the roof is generated from the pebble form and therefore extent and
musical, orchestra and dance, as well as lectures and conferences. The Auditorium levels vary. The inner clad roof is to provide a personnel access walkway and also
is to seat approximately 1000 people. The proposed brief for the auditorium has the support for the façade system.
been developed by Theatre Projects through workshop sessions with
representatives from both the design team and the Owner.
The building envelope features curved outer cladding and inner finishes, with walls
and roof meeting seamlessly, thus maintaining the impression of the pebble form.
The Auditorium is located to the north west of the tower and overlaps with the
boundary of the Plaza. The main entrance is from level 00 (+0.0) of the plaza.
The proposed main auditorium, stage and fly tower are enclosed with a reinforced
concrete wall structure which will provide structural support and stability, as well
as the acoustic separation with the circulation areas and plant room.
Extract Plan showing Auditorium in relation to Tower
The seating within the Auditorium is provided on four levels and include; stalls on
level 00, a parterre on level 01, as well as first and second circles on level 02 and
level 03, respectively. Also removable seating is required between the front of the
stalls and the stage, this will maximise the number of seats, depending on the size
of the (extendable) stage required for the particular event.
The proposed stage is approximately 30m wide x 16-18m deep and located at level
00, with the provision to extend the stage into the main auditorium by up to 5m. A
trap room and orchestra pit is located on level -01. The technical bridges in the
main auditorium are hung from the trusses supporting the main auditorium roof;
the number and extent of these are to be confirmed by Theatre Projects. Also
technical gantries are required at several levels within the fly tower over the stage,
which are also to be confirmed by Theatre Projects.
An enclosed plant room is situated on a platform deck supported off the main
auditorium roof; this covers an area of 350m2, with a 4m floor to ceiling height.
The proposed circulation areas extend from the reinforced concrete wall of the
main auditorium to the inner cladding line, which is generated from the pebble Section through Auditorium
3.2.8.3 Key Requirements The proposed grid has been established from the structural elements of the
foundation layout. The orientation of the grid shall be confirmed with the final form
The proposed Auditorium is to provide an acoustic performance suitable for a of the pebble and auditorium and accurately defined in terms of xyz dimensions
variety of events for the performing arts and therefore will require a reasonable from the overall project datum.
amount of flexibility. The design aims to provide a background noise of no less
than NC15. 3.2.8.5 Load Summary
The main auditorium is required to be a column free space in order to provide Loadings are given in the Design Criteria document and related loading plans.
unobstructed views of the stage from above every seat within the main auditorium.
Loadings have been allowed for maintenance access at roof level, as has the
The provision of technical bridges provides platforms from which the stage lighting advised cladding construction build-up and finishes, access catwalk, services and,
can be projected. acoustic dampening requirements etc.
The fly tower is to provide the flexibility required in order to be able to service a The lateral loading and stability design is not the governing criteria for the majority
large variety of events. Theatre Projects are to advise on the exact requirements of of the structure due to the inherent stability of the reinforced concrete box
these facilities, but they will include several technical gantries, counterweight structure around the auditorium. The structural elements have been designed for
systems and hydraulic systems. the critical vertical loadings imposed on the building. However wind loading will be
taken into account in the design of elements which ‘feel’ the wind for example
The size and finish of the stage is to be flexible in order to host a variety of elevation columns.
different type of events. This also results in the requirement to have removable
seating at the front of the stall seating. The stage must also be accessible from Theatre Projects are to be advice of specialised loadings required, for items such as
below therefore a trap room is essential. technical gantries, block sets, curtains and scenery support.
The Auditorium is required to house its own plant room, in order to provide a
comfortable environment for those within the main auditorium. This plant room is 3.2.8.6 Foundations
located above the main auditorium roof.
It is proposed that the main structural elements are founded on cast-in-place
reinforced concrete ground bearing pad and strip foundations and retaining walls.
3.2.8.4 Geometry and Structure Grid These have been assessed on the assumed allowable soil bearing capacity of
250kN/m2 at a minimum depth of 2 m below original ground surface.
Geometry
The form of the auditorium is curved, smooth and random just like a natural 3.2.8.7 Ground Slabs (Level 00)
pebble. The buildings form and geometry cannot therefore be replicated from any
conventional geometric object or mathematical rules. Thus the definition in space Both suspended and ground bearing slabs are proposed in reinforced concrete. The
of surface geometry is complicated and impacts on the requirements of external circulation area at level 00 servicing the entrances to the auditorium and the area
façade, structure, services and internal finishes etc. at back of the stage are ground bearing slabs. The stage slab is suspended and
spans between reinforced concrete beams. The stall and parterre slabs are
Structure Grid suspended and inclined, with the upper surface stepped as required for seating,
and spans between reinforced concrete beams.
Despite the curved and random free form of the building a rectangular grid has
been selected primarily for two reasons; this best suits the recommended structure The levels of the ground floor slab vary considerably due to the nature of the
system and the random shape cannot be better defined by any other logical grid. auditorium and are indicated on the layout drawings and full sections.
The circles located at the two sides of the auditorium are to provide a level floor
3.2.8.8 Retaining Walls structure, this will consist of a tapering reinforced concrete cantilevered floor slab
spanning up to 4 m, with a maximum depth of 0.6m.
It is proposed that reinforced concrete retaining walls be used to form the
basement structure (level -01) which will house the orchestra pit, seating storage, The circles located at the rear of the auditorium will provide a stepped floor
service corridor and the trap room. These will be required to retain up to structure in order to house fixed seating. This structure will consist of a tapered
approximately 3.5m. reinforced concrete ribbed cantilevered floor slab spanning up to 6m. The ribs will
be at approximately 1m centres with a maximum depth of 0.9m. Due to the large
forces of the cantilever, the ribs will tie through to the outer reinforced concrete
3.2.8.9 Floor Structures wall at the rear of the auditorium, in order to further distribute these forces.
Circulation Areas
The extent of the circulation areas is from the main auditorium wall to the inner
cladding line, which follows the architectural form of a pebble.
The proposed floor slab in this area is a cast-in-place concrete on a permanent

metal deck formwork system spanning up to 4m to secondary steelwork floor
beams.
The proposed floor beams are constructed using composite construction techniques
i.e. incorporating top flange shear connectors to compositely connect together the
beam and slab system. These beams will span up to 8m and will be supported by
primary beams and steelwork columns.
The primary edge beams will span up to 6m to column grids. The internal primary
beams bear onto acoustic bearing supported off a concrete corbel attached to the
main auditorium walls, this internal edge will act as a continuous ring beam and Plant Platform
will wrap around the reinforced concrete wall.
This arrangement of slabs, beams and support conditions provides an effective and
simple to build system.
Circles
It is proposed to have two levels of circles (balconies) on three sides of the main
auditorium structure. As seated areas are to have an unobstructed view of the
stage, no vertical structure can be located within the main auditorium. Therefore
the circles are to cantilever and be supported off the main reinforced concrete wall
of the auditorium. A lightweight parapet is to be provided at the ends of the circles
and therefore is best suited to a steel structure.
The plant platform is located above the main auditorium roof and is to provide an The auditorium roof structure is to be used to hang technical bridges and to
area of no less than 350m2 with floor to ceiling height of approximately 4m. support the plant platform, as well as acting as the acoustic separation. We have
proposed to use steelwork trusses spanning up to 24m at up to 6.1m centres which
The proposed floor slab in this area is a cast-in-place concrete on a permanent support precast hollow-core units bearing onto the top chord of the truss.
metal deck formwork system spanning up to 3m to secondary steelwork floor
beams.
The proposed floor beams are constructed using composite construction techniques
i.e. incorporating top flange shear connectors to compositely connect together the
beam and slab system. These beams will span up to 6m and will be supported by
primary beams and steelwork stub columns which will be split with an acoustic
bearing and supported off the main auditorium roof truss.
A service zone of 300mm has been assumed between the roof slab and the support
structure.
Technical Galleries
Several levels of technical gantries and bridges are required with in the main
auditorium and fly tower. It is proposed that the floor structure of these galleries
will consist of an open mesh flooring system which will span up to 2m.
The open mesh flooring will be supported by secondary steel which spans up to 6m
onto primary beams which span up to 6m. This grid of structural steel beams are Section Through Roof Structure
supported by hangers suspended from the roof trusses.
Stairs The plant platform is located directly above part of the auditorium roof and is
supported on steel stubs which are taken down to the steel trusses supporting the
It is proposed to have two feature staircases between each floor in the circulation auditorium roof. The steel stubs are separated with an acoustic bearing in order to
areas. Currently no details of these have been developed. Two access stairs will be ensure the sound and vibration transfer is at an acceptable level within the
provided between each floor within the circulation levels, with one of these auditorium. A roof is required to acoustically enclose the plant room and will
continuing up to service the plant room. These access stairs have been assumed to consist of cold form purlins spanning between the bottom chord of the middle roof
be precast concrete enclosed in reinforced concrete wall structures. truss.
The middle roof provides support for the inner cladding system which follows the
3.2.8.10 Roof Structures architectural pebble form of the structure. This cladding system to be used is to be
defined by the architect, and we have assumed that cold form purlins at
The proposed roof system is quite complex as it consists of several roofs within this approximately 1.2m will be used to support this. The roof contains several types of
structure; the auditorium roof, plant room roof, middle roof (inner cladding) and structural systems including, simply supported steel trusses, propped cantilevered
the outer façade. The complex arrangement is further due to the architectural steel trusses, and also a braced frame. The top chords and beams supporting the
pebble form. Due to the long spans and the complexity of the roof system a cladding system are to be curved to match the profile of the pebble. The trusses
structural steel frame is most suitable. are supported off steel columns which are taken off the top of the reinforced
concrete side walls of the main auditorium. Part of the bottom chord of the simply
supported truss will be used to support the roof of the plant room.
Hanging Systems
The outer façade is to be supported off steel columns which will project from the
middle roof structure. Structural steelwork will be required to support the façade As several levels of technical gantries and bridges are required within the main
and will span the projecting columns from the middle roof. As details of the façade auditorium and fly tower, it is proposed to use suspended hanging systems to
system is yet to be confirmed the supporting steelwork is not detailed. support these. These will consist of a grid of steel section suspended from the
bottom chord of the auditorium roof truss, as detailed on the drawings.
Slabs
Transfer Systems
The main auditorium roof is to be a 200mm deep hollow-core floor slab with 75mm
concrete topping spanning up to 6.1m. The main function of this roof is to provide Transfer systems will potentially be required to support the elevation columns at
an acoustic enclosure. the main entrance to the auditorium at Level 00 from the plaza, and also at the
scenery passage which is to service the back of the stage. These entrances may
Beams require an unobstructed space.
Curved steel beams shall run in one direction with cold form purlins spanning
between them. This means that the form of the pebble will potentially need to be 3.2.8.12 Lateral Load Resisting Structures
created in the build up of the cladding system in the direction of the purlins.
Floor Diaphragms
Trusses
The diaphragm action of the circulation floors will provide lateral stability to the
The top chord of the trusses is to be curved to follow the profile of the pebble with elevation columns at each level.
cold form purlins spanning between them. This means that the form of the pebble
will potentially need to be created in the build up of the cladding system in the Columns restraints
direction of the purlins.
At the back of the stage there are no floor structures other than the ground floor
slab. This results in the elevation columns spanning between the ground floor and
3.2.8.11 Gravity Load Resisting Structures the roof structure. In order to reduce the effective length of these columns and
transfer the lateral loading in an efficient manner, we have proposed the use of
Columns horizontal bracing systems which will tie in with the steel ring beam at floor levels.
Steelwork columns on the elevation provide support to one side of the circulation Roof Bracing
areas.
The lateral load applied to the elevation structure will be partially transferred into
Reinforced concrete columns are provided within the main auditorium to support the bracing system within the middle roof. This will consist of steel diagonal CHS
the stage floor structure and the ground floor stalls floor structure elements and lateral trusses.
Walls Vertical Load Transfer
The reinforced concrete wall that encloses the main auditorium is used to provide Reinforced concrete walls around the main auditorium will provide overall stability,
vertical support to one side of the circulation areas, the cantilevered floor slabs to the structure.
(circles) and the roof structures.
The forces from the floor diaphragm are partially transferred into the wall and
partially into a steel ring beam which wraps around the perimeter of auditorium
wall at floor levels and then to braced steel frames. This braced steel frame is
required due to the acoustic performance of the auditorium and the requirements
for an acoustic separation from the circulation areas.
The forces within the roof bracing will also be transferred to the wall through
vertical diagonal bracing system of mild steel plate.
Braced Frames
Bracing members combined with lateral trusses in the plane of the roof primary
truss top chords in conjunction with elevation bracing provide stability to the
steelwork structures.
Cladding system
The cladding system is understood to comprise an inner layer comprising an

insulated panelised envelope or glazing; with the outer mesh skin. It is understood
that maintenance access will be provided between the layers in the form of access
walkways.
Façade support system
The specific cladding requirements are unknown at this stage and shall be
progressed during the design development stage in parallel with the cladding
systems. It is envisaged that this shall comprise a tertiary steelwork frame
approximating the profile of the pebble skin.

3.2.14 of this report
The tower is intended to serve a number of uses including administration, media Tower
services, and restaurant facilities. This pebble aims to provide a landmark space
complementing the Source below.
The Tower is located centrally within the development and access to the adjacent
library and keystone structures is provided from the lower levels.
The Tower contains fifteen levels of accommodation above Plaza level; below this
level the tower integrates with the Museum and Source.
The building dimensions vary on every level and are governed by the external form
of the pebble. Typical floor plates are approximately 37m by 13m in plan.
Structural columns have been located around the perimeter of the footprint to
maximise the useable footprint of the structure resulting in clear spans up to 14m. Plaza Source
The upper floors of the Tower are to be used for sky-bar and restaurant facilities Museum
and are envisaged as part of a double height volume. This is bounded by a
lightweight roof structure following the curvature of the pebble form. The space
varies in cross section across the footprint of the tower and will provide a clear
headroom of between 4m and 10m. Longitudinal Tower Section
The Keystone is located to the south east of the tower and spans between the
Library and Tower structure. The volume is three stories in height with its base
access located at level T03.
Tower
The tower is required to provide useable floor space for the office areas through Keystone
use of an economic frame solution. The post tensioned slab solution supported on
perimeter columns provides the clear spans required.
The keystone is required to be a column free space internally, leading to the

requirement for the roof and floor plates to take support from the adjacent tower
and library structures.
Library
Spatial relationship of buildings

3.2.9.4 Structural Grid
The structural grid for the Tower has been driven by architectural constraints at
the lower levels. At Source level the perimeter ramp structure limits locations for
vertical support and has informed the tapering V-column arrangement. This
mirrors the widening footprint of the tower pebble on upper floor plates.
The location of the structural core has been determined by limitations on fire
escape distances and a need to provide column free flexible accommodation where
possible.
Dead loads have been derived as the self weights of structural elements.
Superimposed dead loads have been derived through discussion with the architects
for anticipated finishes and assumptions have been outlined through the loading
plans contained within the Structural Design Criteria document.
Live loads have been derived in accordance with the International Building Code
2003 (Metric edition) and are outlined through loading plans contained within the
Structural Design Criteria document.
Lateral wind and seismic loads have been derived for the Tower structure in
accordance with the International Building Code 2003 (Metric Edition) and SAES-A-
112.
It is known that a water storage facility is to be installed on one of the upper levels
of the Tower. The final location, volume and depth of water have still to be
confirmed. During the design development stage this shall be developed and the
relevant portion of floor slab and supporting structure shall be strengthened to
accommodate the required increase in loading. Indicative foundation section through Tower and Source
3.2.9.6 Foundations
The Tower vertical structure is founded below the lowest Museum level. The Tower
and Source excavation and foundation construction are at similar integrated levels
in order to ensure an effective solution and less complex construction.
The Tower core and columns all are founded on an in-situ concrete raft structure
typically 2.7m deep. This provides a rigid base to spread the large concentrated
point loads applied by the columns.
Analysis of the lateral wind loads and Tower dead loads shows that by utilising a
stiff raft and mobilizing structural dead loads, net tension on the foundations can
be avoided. Tension piles have therefore been removed from the scheme since
SD1. At foundation level there will be no differential movement between the tower
structure and adjacent buildings hence the foundation raft shall form a continuous
foundation linking monolithically to the adjacent structures.
Steel arches
form ribs
Floor plates within the Tower structure are designed as in-situ concrete post-
tensioned slabs. Typically 300mm thick slabs spanning up to 14 metres are
possible for accommodation other than technical space. This solution offers
programme and economic benefits through the use of a flat soffit with simplified
formwork requirements. Floor plates are designed to cantilever beyond the
perimeter columns where required to take up the fluctuating geometry of the
envelope.
When heavier live loads are applied due to technical equipment the slab depth has
been increased to 350mm to control the anticipated deflections and avoid
overstressing the slab.
Within the Keystone; the structure must span between the adjacent Tower and
Library buildings for support and therefore the self weight of this element should
be minimised to provide a more efficient structural form. To achieve this a
composite steel deck has been selected which uses a lower volume of concrete for
Trusses contained
an equivalent span. The decking selected shall be designed to act as a permanent
within skin of pebble.
formwork to the concrete and avoid temporary propping of formwork during
construction.
Beams Schematic diagram of the Keystone primary structural frame
The Tower has been designed to eliminate beams where possible except when
required to act as a transfer structure.
The Keystone structure has been designed as a series of trusses spanning within
the side walls of the space to minimise impact on usable floor space within the
volume. Infill floor structures spanning between these trusses comprise composite
steel beams spanning the full width of the volume.
Transfer Systems
The Keystone relies on the adjacent Tower and Library structures for vertical
support. As these supports do not coincide with appropriate structural elements, Movement
traditional reinforced concrete transfer beams have been designed to pick up any j i t
reactions. At the Tower support these beams are 900mm x 1400mm deep and
shall be co-ordinated with the architectural finishes and servicing requirements.
These beams support pot bearings that allow for the necessary load transfer
between elements while allowing for the relative lateral movements between Proprietary Pot
buildings. Refer to section 3.4.2.9 for a summary of movement joint requirements Bearing
throughout the scheme.
3.2.9.8 Roof Structures Transfer

B
Keystone
The Keystone roof structure comprises a series of arches at 6metre centres. These Detail of Keystone support at Tower transfer structure
act as a series of ribs allowing a secondary grillage to be provided to take up the
curved profile of the pebble to be formed. As the façade of the keystone wraps
around the full pebble this secondary grillage shall be required to form a complete
‘shell’ arrangement around the primary frame.
3 pin arches:
Tower inclined to form
pyramids
The roof of the Tower oversails the restaurant and skybar accommodation and is
intended to form a light and airy structural frame to support the cladding. The
frame comprises a series of 3-pin arches springing from the concrete columns at T15 supported on
levels T14 & T15. The arches are formed from tubular steel trusses and are roof structure
laterally inclined to meet each other to form a series of ‘pyramid frames’.
This geometry provides an inherent stability to the roof structure and allows the
concrete core to be terminated at a lower level. A secondary grillage of curved
steelwork to form the pebble curvature and access walkways is suspended from
the pyramid frames.
Curved trusses
used to follow
curvature of
facade
Schematic diagram of the Tower roof structure

Columns
Columns have been located around the perimeter of the building in order to
maximise the useable footprint of the Tower. To achieve this columns are inclined
between floor diaphragms; following a facetted profile approximating the external
surface of the pebble.
Columns are typically 750mm square on upper levels to control punching failure of
the structural slab and increase up to 900mm square on lower levels.
The inclination of the columns results in an associated horizontal reaction that is to Columns inclined
be transferred through the structural floor diaphragms to the shear walls. in both axes to
follow façade
profile of tower
At the east end of the Tower the columns form a V arrangement in order to
counter balance the associated horizontal thrust and therefore reduce the net force
applied to the stability core.
3.2.9.10 Lateral Load Resisting Structures
Floor Diaphragms
For both the Tower and Keystone elements all floor plates are to form structural
diaphragms to transfer lateral loads from the perimeter façade to the respective
lateral stability elements. Co-ordination will be undertaken during detail design
with the architect and services engineers to co-ordinate floor penetrations that
may compromise diaphragm action.
Inclined Tower column profile following pebble form

Shear Walls
The Tower relies upon the core to act as shear walls to resist all lateral loads
applied to the tower. The core has been designed as single element to control the
lateral deflection of the building. Typically walls are 450mm thick above level T02
and varying up to 750mm thick at lower levels of the structure.
The core is located eccentrically to centroid of the building and is subject to

torsional forces applied by the wind. To control the associated rotational deflection
of the building a braced frame is formed below Plaza level through the use of
inclined columns.
Braced Frames
The Keystone structure relies on a series of braced trusses to transfer lateral loads
back to the level 03 and 04 slabs on the Library structure. The structure is
connected at two locations on each slab permitting a ‘couple’ to be generated that
prevents lateral and rotational movement of the Keystone. Refer to section
3.2.7.11 for further details.
Core acts as shear wall to
resist lateral loads
Cladding system
The cladding system is understood to comprise an inner layer comprising an

insulated panelised envelope or glazing; with the outer mesh skin. It is understood
that maintenance access will be provided between the layers in the form of access
walkways.
Façade support system
The specific cladding requirements are unknown at this stage and shall be Inclined V-column
progressed during detail design in parallel with the cladding systems. It is envisage below Plaza level
that this shall comprise a tertiary steelwork frame approximating the profile of the resists torsion.
pebble skin.
Lateral stability system of Tower

3.2.9.12 Alternate Core Proposal
During scheme design an alternative core arrangement has been proposed which
offers an increase in useable floor area on each level by removing one elevator and
one staircase.
Due to programme limitations it has not been possible to develop this proposal
fully; however an initial assessment has raised the following structural issues.
• MEP risers would need to be co-ordinated such that structural floor plates
connect to the concrete wall elements.
• The proposed core has reduced by approximately a third in length and hence
has a significant reduction in both strength and stiffness of the core. The
revised proposal would not be sufficient on its own without alternate means
of providing stability. This may take the form of reintroduced braced bays or
alternatively considering the external perimeter of the building as a lattice to
form a rigid tube. Forming a rigid tube would form a significant change to the
structural principals currently developed and would need detailed co-
ordination with the architectural envelope to minimise the impact on the
useable floor plate close to facades.
It is planned to investigate the overall viability of the revised proposals against all
considerations in the early stages of the design development stage.

3.2.14 of this report
Ground conditions are discussed in detail in section 3.1 Foundation Engineering of

this report.
The currently available geotechnical investigations and their reports have been
determined as not sufficient as a basis for the design of foundations and basement
structures. Additional geotechnical investigations have been specified and the
satisfactory conclusion of this including the outcome of field and laboratory testing
and interpretative report thereof will be used in the final design of foundation and
basement systems.
Ground water has been noted in the previous ground investigations. The natural
ground water table is understood to be very deep, significantly below the lowest
level of excavation for the basement structures. However, there is suggestion that
a perched water table could exist; the characteristics need to be determined.
The presence of ground based chemicals such as chloride and sulphates has been
noted in the most recent geotechnical investigation report. However, the
concluding recommendation to employ epoxy coated reinforcement for foundations
appeared conservative and in contradiction of the actual results. Further chemical
testing will be required to more accurately determine the design requirements.
Based on the available information it is understood that ground water will not be
encountered during basement excavation. In the long term condition we
understand that the ground water table will most likely be below the lowest
basement level and therefore will not influence the design. Refer to section 3.1
Foundation Engineering of this report for the assumed design ground water level.
This design ground water level is considered to be on the conservative side and will
necessitate that basements are effectively waterproofed. However, this design
ground water level is very likely to be sufficiently high enough to require the use of
tension piles for the basement construction.
3.2.12 Foundations
In summary of the detailed building proposals in the preceding sections, the

foundations for all building components are proposed to comprise bearing type
foundations including pad, strip or mat (raft) type footings as appropriate. In
absence a comprehensive geotechnical investigation report, these have been sized
based on an assumed allowable soil bearing capacity of 250kN/m2 at a minimum
depth of 2 m below original ground surface.
It is envisaged that all foundations will be adequately protected from the effects of
any present ground based chemicals such as chlorides and sulphates, to be
determined in the scheduled geotechnical investigation.
The success of the project construction stage will part depend on a viable and
appropriate contract procurement route. In particular, if the construction is to be
tendered in packages, all packages must be adequately defined at an early stage
and viably phased in full coordination with the project design and deliverables
schedule. Issuing the tender packages before the design requirements are finalised
will put at risk the project procurement and construction success.
Ultimately this is a unique project and requires a unique approach to design,

procurement and construction. Engineering systems, their materials, procurement
and construction that commonly apply to typical projects in the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia do not necessarily apply to this commemorative cultural project. For the
project to be successful and fulfil the key objectives requires an approach
dedicated to the same vision. This is true of the design. It is also true for the
construction. Saudi Arabia contains some highly experienced and adaptive
contractors. However, for the project to be executed successfully the contractors
that best demonstrate their abilities to be the most adaptive and capable to deliver
the projects unique requirements and systems should be considered favourably to
those who do not.
It is understood that Saudi Aramco have very well organised and well tested
procedures for successfully procuring and commissioning buildings, but namely of
the industrial type. What needs to be determined is how best to procure the works
contracts for this project in line with Saudi Aramco’s procedures but also reflecting
the very unique and specialised building requirements. Detailed discussion on this
is outside the purpose of this report section. However, project specific pre-
qualification of contractors for the various packages would seem a prerequisite.
Coordination including materials, installation cladding systems
3.2.14 Key Issues and Information methodology and support
requirements.
key issues, information required and areas of coordination – all of which impact on Gen Information Conclusion of requirement for wind Structure,
the structural design. These items are listed in the table below and categorised tunnel testing to assess user comfort, architecture and
under Issues, Information or Coordination. Any observed Opportunities are also cladding and structure design force cladding systems,
listed. user comfort
Gen Information / Specific proposals and requirements Structure,

These items are important to conclude so that the subsequent Design Development Coordination for the roof level catwalk access architecture and
stage can be satisfactorily concluded and the key requirements for interfacing system are required. cladding systems
systems incorporated within the overall structural design. The list below is not
exhaustive of all items but summarises current key issues identified at this stage. Gen Information / Proposals are required at the juncture Structure,
Coordination of building ‘pebble’ elevation/cladding architecture,
Key to landscape. landscape and
cladding systems
Gen General / all buildings
P Plaza, Museum and Source Gen Information / Setting out of Pebble Geometry in Structure,
C Car Park and Back of House Coordination particular the definition in space of the architecture and
free form surfaces (inner and outer) cladding systems
G Great Hall
and from that the definition of
L Library structure geometry
T Tower
K Keystone Gen Information / Ground Investigation to be concluded Foundations and
A Auditorium Issue and recommendations for foundation structure systems
E Energy Centre design criteria confirmed. Foundations
to be re-evaluated resulting from this.
Gen Information / Site Topographical Survey to be All disciplines

Area Category Description Impacts On
Issue concluded and from that determination
P, C Information / Conclusion of requirements for Structure, of the optimum / preferred building
Issue / emergency vehicle access to the foundation and levels relative to ground surface.
Opportunity landscaped roof and areas / routes for architecture
this as appropriate. Significantly systems Gen Information / Establish location of rock head and Structure and
impacts on structure design Coordination / perched water table (if present) and Foundations
requirements, architecture and costs. Issue any resulting impact on excavation
Reduction in current requirements will requirements. Site Geotechnical
result in structure redesign of effected Investigation, Topographical Survey
areas but reduction in requirements. and determination of optimum building
levels required to conclude vicinity of
P, C Information Specific requirements for any other Structure, rock head and perched water table
vehicular access to the landscaped roof foundation, relative to foundation excavations.
i.e. cherry pickers for cladding architecture and
maintenance cladding systems Gen Coordination Overall coordination of structure with Mainly
other disciplines architecture and
Gen Information / Specific proposals for the ‘Pebble’ roof Structure, MEP systems
and elevation cladding are required architecture and
Gen Coordination Review of structure proposals across Structure and layout requirements MEP systems
project and update requirements as foundation
required systems P Information/ Requirements and coordination of Structure,
Coordination Plaza column requirements; location, architecture, and
Gen Information / Movement / separation joint strategy Structure, dimensions, inclination foundation
Coordination and requirements to be developed in architecture, systems
suspended floor and roof slabs (mainly landscape and
Plaza and Car Park roof) cladding systems P Information/ Specific proposals for the escalator Structure,
Coordination penetrating from Plaza to Gallery 3 architecture
Gen Information / Coordination and development of Structure,
Coordination external structures requirements in architecture, P, C, Opportunity Review concrete wall proposals and Structure and
particular, Oases slabs and retaining landscape and G where possible specify CMU masonry Foundations
walls/earthworks, finishes etc. cladding systems walls with post and beam or other
suitable restraint systems.
Gen Information / Specific information on floor finishes; Structure and
Coordination thickness, material type and any architecture P Information / Source façade requirements to be Structure,
particular performance requirements systems Coordination developed in conjunction with architecture and
structure/architecture coordination and cladding systems
Gen Information / Requirement for rammed earth façade Structure, conclusion of roof vehicle access
Coordination application if applicable architecture, requirements
landscape and
cladding systems P Information / Specific requirements for Cinema All disciplines
Coordination
Gen Information / Procurement route and tender package All disciplines
Issue definition and schedule coordination GH Coordination / Further coordination and optimization Structure,
Opportunity of the pebble geometry is necessary in architecture,
C Information / Parking requirements to be concluded All disciplines particular architecture-structure landscape and
Coordination optimisation, including agreement on cladding systems
the primary truss frame support
C Information / Car park tunnel requirements to be Structure, conditions.
Coordination defined and structure developed architecture, civil,
and MEP systems GH Information / Resolving the varying cladding- Structure,
Coordination landscape detail where the GH dips architecture,
C Information / Coordinate car park layout, stall and Structure, below landscape level. landscape and
Coordination aisle dimensions architecture, civil, cladding systems
and MEP systems
GH Opportunity Evaluate preferred landscape retaining Structure,
C Information Specific requirements for the remote Structure, wall solution foundations
car park architecture, civil,
and MEP systems GH Coordination Resolve headroom requirements to Structure,
service corridor below GH floor slab architecture
P Information / Specific design requirements for Structure,
Coordination moisture/humidity control to Museum Foundation, GH Coordination Resolve slab-foundation detail / Structure,
Galleries in particular Gallery 3 to be Architecture and performance at ground slab interface architecture
determined MEP systems with Museum service corridor
E Coordination Coordinate structure with specific Structure, GH Information Establish any specific requirements for Structure,
architecture and the ceiling level exhibition grid /
rigging architecture A Information / Vertical transfer of lateral loads from Structure,
Coordination the diaphragm floor slab of the architecture and
LB Coordination Further coordination of column Structure, circulation areas. acoustics
locations around central atrium void, architecture
particularly into Plaza, and with A Information / Extent size and levels of the required Structure,
regards to the void form. Coordination technical galleries. architecture and
theatre
LB Coordination Further coordination of the Keystone Structure, requirements
structure points of support and the architecture
Keystone/Library slab boundaries. A Information / Support for the floor at the front of the Structure,
Coordination stage where columns are not architecture and
LB Information/ Specific proposals for the open Library Structure, permitted. theatre
Coordination escalator penetrating the floor slabs. architecture requirements
LB Coordination Review of the Library core locations Structure, A Information / Storage and support of removable Structure,
architecture Coordination seating at the front of the stalls architecture and
theatre
LB Coordination Structural requirements, if any, within Structure, requirements
Library perimeter mechanical zone architecture,
services. A Information / Storage and support of extendable Structure,
Coordination stage. architecture and
T, P Coordination Coordination of proposed V-columns Structure, theatre
with Source requirements architecture and requirements
cladding systems
A Information / Plant requirements, including loadings Structures,
T Coordination Coordination of Source ramp with Structure and Coordination and service zone requirements. architecture and
Tower architecture services
systems
A Information / The requirement for transfer systems Structure and
T Coordination / Complete study to evaluate Structure and Coordination at entrances. architecture
Opportunity comparative floor area taken up by architecture systems
tower columns for concrete v steel systems
solution A Information / Double reinforced concrete wall at the Structure,
Coordination rear of the auditorium- openings and architecture and
K Co-ordination Coordinate requirements for movement Structure, roof closure to be clarified. theatre
joints at Keystone interfaces with architecture, requirements
finishes and services cladding systems
and services A Information / Further development of the main Structure,
Coordination auditorium shape. May require architecture and
K Coordination/ Further coordination of keystone Structure, structural redesign. theatre
Opportunity geometry is required to ensure primary architecture, requirements
structural frame is concealed in wall cladding system.
construction. A Information / Specific requirements for fly tower Structure,
Coordination facilities; technical gantries, architecture and
K Information/ Review façade construction for Structure, counterweight systems and hydraulic theatre
Co-ordination keystone and associated structural architecture, systems etc requirements
support requirements. cladding system.
3.3 CIVIL AND TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
Table of Contents
3.3.1 Introduction
3.3.2 Bulk Earthworks

3.3.2.1 Site Topography
3.3.2.2 Earthworks
3.3.2.3 Cut and Fill
3.3.4 Traffic Engineering
3.3.5 Stormwater Drainage

3.3.5.1 General
3.3.5.2 Sustainable Urban Drainage System

3.3.6.1 General
3.3 Civil and Traffic Engineering
3.3.1 Introduction
The King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowlegde & Culture is a multi use complex
including a tower, museum, plaza, library, children’s centre, cinema, auditorium,
great hall and associated car parks and infrastructure. The proposed site is located
to the north west of the existing Saudi Aramco Exhibit buildings and the Al Ghawar
Multipurpose Centre in Dhahran.
The civil infrastructure associated for the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowlegde &
Culture covered in this section will include:
• Bulk Earthworks
• Roads and Pavements
• Traffic Engineering
• Stormwater drainage, and
• Foul water drainage
Structural, mechanical and electrical, acoustic and fire engineering will be covered
in other Buro Happold sections of this report.
The intention of this schematic report is to set out the civil engineering design
philosophy for design development in the following stage.
3.3.2 Bulk Earthworks A 3D computer surface model of the excavation has been developed. The model
has been developed with due consideration of finished basement floor levels and
3.3.2.1 Site Topography raft slab thicknesses of 2.0m below the basements and 1.0m below the car park
areas. We have also allowed 500mm for road build up. There has been no
The proposed building site area consists of approximately 140,000m2 located to allowance for topsoil stripping.
the north west of the existing Saudi Aramco Exhibit buildings and the Al Ghawar
Multipurpose Centre at the Saudi Aramco complex in Dhahran. The original site At this stage there has been no allowance to balance the cut material quantities
topography consists of large flat areas with localised high points scattered with the fill material quantities. A current topographical survey will be required to
throughout the site. A large hill 25m higher than the surrounding area sits to the complete this exercise accurately. Buro Happold will undertake this exercise as
west of the proposed building site. The proposed building area average dimensions soon as the current topographical survey is issued. The current survey is
measures 375m x 375m. anticipated to be received in late June.
A site survey was issued in January 2008, however, the site has since been We have calculated the bulk cut excavation between the first survey issued in
reshaped to create a level platform for the ground breaking ceremony in May January and the architectural design levels as approximately 350,000m3. We have
2008, therefore, the only survey received reflects the original natural surface and calculated the lost fill quantity external to the building foot print to create the
not the later excavated levels. architect’s mono surface is approximately 170,000m3. A bulking factor of 1.1 has
been adopted. The geotechnical site investigation will need to confirm this factor.
The site is bound by desert and a number of roads of varying hierarchy for access Please note that these values are based on an old survey and should be used with
to the existing Saudi Aramco Exhibit building and the Al Ghawar Multipurpose care.
Centre.
An isopachyte plan that shows relative depths of cut across the site relative to the
The original site reduced levels range from 82m to 93m on a local datum adopted original survey is shown on Buro Happold drawing SD2-C -030 and an extract is
by the surveyor. below in figure 3.3.2.3.
3.3.2.2 Earthworks
The approximate proposed building basement levels consist of:
Description Reduced
Level
Plaza Level +00 84.00m
Museum and Auditorium -01 80.40m
Museum -02 75.90m
Museum -03 71.80m
Museum Source 68.80m
As shown above the proposed lowest finished surface basement level is 68.80m.
3.3.2.3 Cut and Fill

Figure 3.3.2.3 Isopachyte Extract
Road 01 has been designed with a two-way crossfall and Road 02 has been
3.3.3.1 Grading designed with a one-way crossfall, falling to the inside of the ring road.
Proposed access to the site is via a two-way dual carriageway link road off the The road longitudinal grading has been undertaken to suit the original
existing access road to the Al Ghawar Multipurpose Centre. At this point there will topographical survey and the architectural design levels. The maximum grade is
be a security gatehouse. This road is labelled Road 01 on Buro Happold drawings 3.86% for 25m and the minimum grade is 0.50%. These grades are within best
SD2-C -001. practice design guidelines.
This link road joins a dual carriageway one way ring road around the proposed
buildings. This road is labelled Road 02 on Buro Happold drawings SD2-C -001. 3.3.3.2 Vehicle Turning Movements
Road 01 has 4 lanes of carriage width 3.65m each, shoulder verges of 2m and a Heavy Goods Vehicle (HGV) access is required to the auditorium, museum and
central median of 2.5m. Adjacent to the verges are stormwater drainage swales. great hall areas and is provided at plaza level +00. Refer to Buro Happold drawing
The overall road right of way width for Road 01 is 31.10m. Refer to figure SD2-C -040 for details of HGV turning movements. The HGV turning movements
3.3.3.1A below. show that the roundabout and turning areas designed are satisfactory for a WB 15
Intermediate Semi Trailer.
Deliveries to the library area are through the car park and lower basement level
-01. It is anticipated that the vehicles to service this area will be smaller fixed
single unit trucks. The turning movement on Buro Happold drawing SD2-C -040
shows that a 9m single unit vehicle can not make the 3 point turn to reverse to the
loading dock but a smaller 6.5m vehicle can. A larger turning area can be provided
to the north west of the current turning area to accommodate the larger vehicle
and we recommend this is undertaken. Refer to figure 3.3.3.2 below.
Figure 3.3.3.1A Road 01 Typical Cross Section
Road 02 consists of two lanes of carriage width 3.65m, an outside shoulder verge
of 2.5m, an inside shoulder verge of 2.0m, intermittent shoulder parallel parking of
3.0m and a drainage swale of 5.0m. The overall road right of way width for Road
02 is 19.8m with parking bays and 16.8m without parking bays. Refer to figure
3.3.3.1B below.
Figure 3.3.3.2 Library Loading Dock
3.3.3.3 Road Pavement Design
Figure 3.3.3.1B Road 02 Typical Cross Section without Parking The road pavement build up will be designed to Saudi Aramco standards and the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Road and Bridge Guidelines, taking into consideration
Please refer to Buro Happold drawing SD2-C -020 for further details. granular sub-base and base materials available in Saudi Arabia.
3.3.4 Traffic Engineering
A full Traffic Impact Assessment is to be provided by Saudi Aramco but has not
been available to date. In its absence Buro Happold has undertaken a trip analysis
to confirm traffic volumes.
The likely trip attraction to the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowlegde & Culture site
was undertaken using standards taken from ITE (US) and Riyadh Trip Rate
Manuals. US standards are used in cases where the data is more robust due to the
number of samples. We used US standards for the following categories:
• Auditorium
• Cinema
• Library
We have used a trip rate for museums to estimate the trip rate to the tower.
The trip rates have been estimated for the AM and PM peaks. As can be seen in
Table 3.3.4 below, the PM peak far exceeds the AM peak; this is largely due to the
nature of the development including a large auditorium and library. The results
show that the PM peak will see around 1150 vehicles arriving and 930 departing.
The total flow may be less than this as people are likely to visit more than one
element of the development, for instance someone visiting the museum may also
visit the discovery centre.
Usage Area Class Unit No. AM peak trip PM peak trip AM peak trip PM peak trip
(m2) Size Units rate rate rate rate
Arrivals Departures Arrivals Departures Arrivals Departures Arrivals Departures
Auditorium 6,632 443 100m2 66 0.000 0.000 6.530 6.530 0 0 433 433
Great Hall 4,215 6.11 1m2 4,215 0.000 0.000 0.049 0.028 0 0 208 117
Cinema 737 443 100m2 7 0.000 0.000 6.530 6.530 0 0 48 48
Museum 6,659 7.2 1m2 6,659 0.007 0.013 0.013 0.007 47 87 87 47
Library 11,480 590 100m2 115 0.809 0.315 3.607 3.908 93 36 414 449
Tower 6,674 7.5 1000m2 7 0.395 0.213 0.370 0.470 3 1 2 3
Discovery 4,422 3.12 12m2 368 0.424 0.376 0.365 0.323 156 139 134 119
Plaza 5,895
Support 6,573
Total 53,287 298 263 1326 1216
Table 3.3.4 Trip Generation

3.3.5 Stormwater Drainage 3.3.5.2 Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems
3.3.5.1 General The drainage strategy incorporates principals of Sustainable Urban Drainage
Systems (SUDS). SUDS take account of the quantity and quality of surface water
The surrounding site area does not have an existing stormwater drainage network, runoff and the amenity value of surface water in the urban environment. These
all stormwater drainage is directed to the road network or open areas. systems aim to provide a more sustainable solution than conventional drainage
and should:
The stormwater drainage system will be provided to collect rainwater runoff from
the site. This will include runoff from building roofs and surrounding grounds. • Manage runoff flow rates, reducing the impact of urbanisation on flooding
Primarily runoff from the grounds will be from hard impermeable surfaces such as • Protect or enhance water quality
roads, car parks, and hard landscape areas. To a lesser extent runoff can also be • Be sympathetic to the environment setting and the needs of the local
expected from soft landscape areas. community
Collection of surface runoff will be by a system of swales and wadi-like open There are several advantages to using SUDS that may include:
channels which connect to the road swale drainage system.
• Effective control of peak flows
The site surface levels have been designed to provide positive fall toward the ring • Improved water quality
road swales. Culverts are required for the swale drainage to continue across • Water conservation through rainwater harvesting and re-use
access roads. Culverts will be designed in accordance with AASHTO HDG-3 Vol IV.
Stormwater disposal via groundwater infiltration has also been considered and is
The drainage wadis and swales channels have been designed using Manning’s subject to geotechnical investigation results.
Equation in accordance with SAES-S-030 and the rainfall calculations have been
undertaken in accordance with SAES-A-112. A rainfall intensity of 65mm/hr for a
10min storm has been used in the calculations. The depth of water in the channels
is limited to 300mm deep for safety.
Small attenuation ponds have also been identified to slow the discharge rates from
the site.
SAES-S-030 stipulates that the design storm recurrence interval is 5years;

however, Buro Happold will also confirm that no flooding occurs in the 30 year
storm event.
Rainwater runoff collected in the sunken oases will be collected and pumped to the
energy centre for reuse within the building.
The schematic design is shown on Buro Happold drawing SD2-C -004.
The road swales grade to the low point in Road 02 at approximately chainage
950m where a culvert is designed to discharge water to the open area to the north
of the site. The location of the culvert may change subject to the receiving the
updated topographical survey.
3.3.6.1 General
Saudi Aramco is to provide a foul water pumping station and rising main from the
proposed development to their existing system.
The foul drainage system will be provided to collect foul water generated from the
King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowlegde & Culture.
All foul water drainage within the building will be designed by public health
engineering and directed to a small sewer treatment plant. The treatment plant
will treat the effluent to a suitable level for reuse in the buildings grey water
system and the remainder will be discharged to the proposed foul water pump
station.
External foul water drainage will be provided to convey the sewer treatment outfall
by gravity to the Saudi Aramco provided pumping station. The external foul
drainage system will include pipes sewers, concrete and brick manholes, vent
pipes, connector pipes and associated works in accordance with SAES-S-010.
A schematic layout of the foul drainage system is shown on Buro Happold drawing
SD2-C -005.
3.4 MEP ENGINEERING
Table of Contents

3.4.6 Museum
3.4.6.2 Tenant Fit-out of Retail Spaces
3.4.6.3 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems
3.4.3 Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema
3.4.6.4 Public Health
3.4.6.5 Life Safety Systems
3.4.6.6 Building Management Systems
3.4.6.7 Electrical Distribution
3.4.6.8 Lighting
3.4.6.9 Emergency Lighting
3.4.6.10 Security and Access Control System
3.4.3.7 Lighting
3.4.6.11 Data and Communications System
3.4.7 Plaza and Public Spaces
3.4.7.2 Tenant Fit-out of Retail Spaces
3.4.7.8 Lighting
3.4.4.7 Lighting
3.4.8 Site Services
3.4.8.1 Central Energy Centre
3.4.5 Library
3.4.8.2 Service Corridor
3.4.8.8 Lighting
3.4.5.7 Lighting
3.4.8.12 Lightning Protection and Earthing System
3.4.8.13 SCADA System
3.4.8.14 LPG System
3.4.8.15 Metering
Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema
Introduction The Mechanical and Electrical Services have been discussed in terms of the
proposed systems, as per the list below, and options suitable for the project.
The following is intended to provide an overview of the mechanical, electrical and
public health systems and design parameters being used for the new King Systems discussed
Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture building. The systems descriptions, in
conjunction with issued drawings and sketches are to be used to provide an • Utilities – Power, Water and Telecoms/Data
understanding of the systems proposed. • Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Hot and Cold Water Services
The Buro Happold scope of works covers the following areas: • Foul Water Drainage Systems
• BMS Systems and Controls
• Museum • Sprinkler Systems
• Emergency Lighting Systems
• Library • General Lighting Systems
• Standby Power Systems
• Auditorium • Small Power Systems
• Fire Detection Systems
• Great Hall • Lightning Protection Systems
• Cinema Tower & Keystone
• Tower & Keystone The Mechanical and Electrical Services have been discussed in terms of the
proposed systems, as per the list below, and options suitable for the project.
• Children’s Zone
Systems discussed
• Cafeteria and Kitchen
• Utilities – Power, Water and Telecoms/Data
• Plaza
• Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Car parks • Hot and Cold Water Services
• Foul Water Drainage Systems
• Utilities • BMS Systems and Controls
• Sprinkler Systems
Site Wide MEP Strategy • General Lighting Systems
A central energy center is proposed which will be located at the edge of the • Small Power Systems
complex to provide all chilled water and power distribution to the site. This also • Fire Detection Systems
acts as a main incoming services point. • Lightning Protection Systems
A service corridor from the central energy centre is routed at level -1 to serve all
buildings on the site carrying all site services with access each building below
ground level.
All main electrical substations, water tanks, chilled water heat exchangers and fire
supplies are contained within the energy center.
Library Plaza and Public Spaces
The Mechanical and Electrical Services have been discussed in terms of the The Mechanical and Electrical Services have been discussed in terms of the
proposed systems, as per the list below, and options suitable for the project proposed systems, as per the list below, and options suitable for the project.
Systems discussed Systems discussed
• Utilities – Power, Water and Telecoms/Data • Utilities – Power, Water and Telecoms/Data
• Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) • Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Hot and Cold Water Services • Hot and Cold Water Services
• Foul Water Drainage Systems • Foul Water Drainage Systems
• BMS Systems and Controls • BMS Systems and Controls
• Sprinkler Systems – Schematic principals only • Sprinkler Systems – Schematic principals only
• Emergency Lighting Systems • Emergency Lighting Systems
• General Lighting Systems • General Lighting Systems
• Standby Power Systems • Standby Power Systems
• Small Power Systems • Small Power Systems
• Fire Detection Systems • Fire Detection Systems
• Lightning Protection Systems • Lightning Protection Systems
Museum
The Mechanical and Electrical Services have been discussed in terms of the
proposed systems, as per the list below, and options suitable for the project. It is
recognised that the REC drawings are to be delivered later than the remainder of
the project and therefore some of the systems discussed are to be re-visited and
re-issued in the near future.
Systems discussed
• Utilities – Power, Water and Telecoms/Data

• Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Hot and Cold Water Services
• Foul Water Drainage Systems
• BMS Systems and Controls
• Sprinkler Systems
• General Lighting Systems
• Small Power Systems
• Fire Detection Systems
• Lightning Protection Systems
3.4.2 Codes and Standards • SAES-A-102 Air Pollutant Emission Source Control
• SAES-A-104 Wastewater Treatment, Reuse and Disposal

Code Requirements
• SAES-A-105 Noise Control
The MEP systems will comply with the latest editions of the following codes and • SAES-A-112 Meteorological and Seismic Design Data
standards, and all applicable Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards:
• SAES-B-053 Machine Safety Guarding, Elevators and Conveyors
• AABC Associated Air Balance Council
• SAES-K-001 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• ANSI American National Standards Institute
• SAES-K-002 Air Conditioning Facilities for Essential Operating Facilities
• ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
• SAES-K-003 Air Conditioning Systems for Communication Buildings
Engineers
• SAES-K-100 Saudi Aramco Mechanical (HVAC) Code
• ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
• SAES-G-005 Centrifugal Pumps
• AWWA American Water Works Association
• SAES-J-700 Control Valves
• UBC Uniform Building Code
• SAES-P-100 Basic Power System Design Criteria
• UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
• SAES-P-116 Switchgear and Control Equipment
• UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
• SAES-P-103 Direct Current and UPS Systems
• NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
• SAES-P-104 Wiring Methods and Materials
• NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
• SAES-P-113 Motors and Generators
• NFPA National Fire Protection Association
• SAES-P-114 Power System and Equipment Protection
• SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National
Association • SAES-P-119 Onshore Substations
• UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. • SAES-P-121 Transformers and Reactors
• SAES-P-123 Lighting
The Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards are extensive and detailed. Consequently • SAES-M-100 Saudi Aramco Building Code
these have not been reviewed fully at this stage. Once a detailed review of these
standards has been conducted, it may be necessary to request deviations from • SAES-S-010 Sanitary Sewers
these standards to suit the best needs of this project. All requests to deviate from
• SAES-S-020 Industrial Drainage and Sewers
the Saudi Aramco Standards shall be conducted in accordance with Saudi Aramco
Standard SAEP-302
• SAES-S-030 Storm Water Drainage Systems
Based on a preliminary review of the Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (SAES)
the following SAES’s have been identified as relevant to this project: • SAES-S-040 Saudi Aramco Water Systems
• SAES-S-050 Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems in Buildings
• SAES-S-060 Saudi Aramco Plumbing Code
• SAES-S-060 Saudi Aramco Plumbing Code
• SAES-S-070 Installation of Utility Piping Systems
We would be happy to discuss the contents of these standards and others that
Saudi Armco may feel are directly relevant to the project during the future phases
of the design.
It is anticipated that further review of the SAES’s will identify other pertinent
standards that are relevant.
External Design Criteria Should the project need to be LEED certified then it will have to comply with
ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Project Location:
Buildings to achieve the mandatory Energy and Atmosphere credits. This standard
specifies the requirements for the building envelope for varying climate zones
• Location Dhahran, Saudi Arabia
throughout the World. This standard also considers the space conditioning category
• Latitude 26°19’ N
and the class of construction for the building.
• Longitude 50°08’ E
• Elevation 89 m AMSL
There are three approaches to compliance as follows:
• ASHRAE Climate Zone 1
• The Prescriptive Path
External Design Criteria based on SAES-A-112 Meteorological and Seismic Design
• The Building Envelope Trade-Off Option
Data.
• Energy Cost Budget Method
• Summer
The method of compliance shall be determined in conjunction with the Architect
and the Facade designers however, it is expected that extensive external shading
44°C/25°C (design dry bulb & coincident wet bulb at 2.5% used to size air
and minimal glazed areas will be required to satisfy this standard and to provide
side equipment) acceptable levels of indoor comfort.
35°C/30°C (coincident dry bulb and design wet bulb at 2.5% used to size Reference should be made to the site wide study of the Building Façade
chilled water equipment) Performance. The recommended Best Practice performance from the Building
Façade Performance study is as follows;
• Winter
8°C (design dry bulb at 99%) Thermal Element U-value G-value

Infiltration 0.25 ach Walls 0.25 W/m2K -
Floors 0.25 W/m2K -
Solar Load 1600W/m²
Roofs 0.25 W/m2K -
Notes:
• (1) Air side equipment serving the Buildings shall be sized based on Glazing 1.80 W/m2K 0.30
2.5% exceedance values in accordance with SAES-K-001 section
4.2.1.1 and SAES-A-112 unless stated otherwise.
The façade has been assumed to be covered by a reflective stainless steel mesh
• (2) Chilled water equipment serving the Buildings shall be sized based with a free area of 50%. A 30% reduction of the glazing G-value has been
on 2.5% exceedance values in accordance with SAES-K-001 section assumed at this stage due to the external mesh. It has been assumed that the
4.2.1.5 and SAES-A-112 unless stated otherwise. average ratio of windows to walls shall not exceed 30%. Infiltration at 0.25ach/hr
is assumed for all spaces with exterior walls and windows.
Building Envelope It should also be noted that compliance with ASHRAE standard 90.1 would require
that mandatory measures concerning the efficiency of building services equipment
including HVAC, lighting and power systems would have to be implemented. This is
Saudi Aramco has advised that there is the potential for this project to be certified often very onerous and will have significant have cost implications.
by both LEED and BREEAM. This needs to be verified by Saudi Aramco as soon as
possible as this will have significant impact upon the building envelope and
engineering systems design.
Internal Design Criteria Restrooms 24°C+/-4 10ac/h 1/stall 10 W/m² ---
exh
Reference should be made to the following report sections where the Internal RH not 45
Design conditions are detailed. controlled
These will be further ratified with the Client at the next stage of the design for final Server 24°C+/-2 --- --- --- 6,000 W
sign off. Rooms assumed
50% RH+/-10 N/A
Design Mech. Internal Gains Storage 24°C+/-4 2 ac/h

Temperature Vent. exh
Space (1) RH not N/A
and Humidity
controlled
Summer People Lights(5) Misc. (5)
Noise Conference 24°C+/-2 --- 1/2m² 13 W/m² 10 W/m²
Level Room
50% RH+/-20
(NC)(6)
Admin 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m² Library 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m²
50% RH+/-20 40 Admin
50% RH+/-20
Media Centre 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m²
Circulation 24°C+/-2 --- 1/20m² 10 W/m² --- 50% RH+/-20
RH not 45
Museum 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m²
controlled
Admin
Elevator 29°C+/-4 2 ac/h --- --- 6,000W 50% RH+/-20
Machine exh assumed(3)
RH not N/A
Rooms General 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m²
controlled
Common
Foyer 24°C+/-2 1/6m² 11 W/m² 5 W/m² 50% RH+/-20
Area
50% RH+/-20 40
Cafe 24°C+/-2 --- 1/2m² 12 W/m² 5 W/m²
Kitchen 32°C+/-4 20 1/5m² 12 W/m² --- (4) 50% RH+/-20

(reheat) ac/h
RH not 50-55
exh Refreshment 24°C+/-2 --- 1/2m² 12 W/m² 5 W/m²
controlled
Areas
50% RH+/-20
(2)
Mechanical 29°C+/-4 2 ac/h --- --- ---
and Electrical exh
RH not N/A
Rooms
controlled
Restaurant 24°C+/-2 --- 1/3m² 12 W/m² 5 W/m²

50% RH+/-20 35
Notes:
Minimum outside air ventilation is 8 l/s/person or 0.8 l/s/m², whichever is greater.

Infiltration at 0.25ach/hr is assumed for all spaces with exterior walls and
windows.
• (1) Mechanical ventilation rates are based on cooling and heating requirements
unless otherwise noted.
• (2) The equipment loads for individual electrical rooms shall be based on
information from the Electrical Engineer.
• (3) The equipment loads for the elevator machine rooms shall be based on
information from the Vertical Transportation specialist consultant.
• (4) The equipment loads for the kitchen shall be based on information from the
Kitchen Equipment specialist consultant.
• (5) Lighting and miscellaneous gains have been adapted from ASHRAE
Standard 90.1 where applicable.
• (6) NC criteria to be confirmed against the Acoustical Consultants

recommendations.
3.4.3 Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema Infiltration
3.4.3.1 Design Criteria The façades shall ensure that the external environment is controlled and the
ingress of air is limited. The following figures shall be assumed for the purpose of
External Design Conditions the thermal performance calculations:
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Peak Infiltration Loads (i.e. for plant sizing)
Large volume areas <0.5 air change per hour
Mechanical Internal Design Conditions Smaller volume areas <1 air change per hour
Notes: Mean Infiltration Loads (i.e. for purposes of seasonal energy calculations)
1. Humidity of fresh air will be controlled at the central plant. Humidity will not Large volume areas <0.25 air change per hour
be controlled within the spaces other than condensation on the fan coil unit Smaller volume areas <0.5 air change per hour
cooling coil process. Temperature control is the overriding mechanism and
will provide a high degree of dehumidification. Plantroom Locations
2) Cooling load figure allows for specialist lighting and equipment at high level
in the Great Hall and Auditorium. Plantrooms have been located to minimise distribution runs. This has resulted in
3) Fresh air rates are generally based upon ASHRAE “Ventilation for Acceptable plantrooms located at high level in the Great Hall, Auditorium and Cinema. Access
Indoor Air Quality” 2007. Additional fresh air has been added in the Great to the plantrooms shall require vertical transportation and opening areas of façade
Hall and Auditorium as this appears to more closely match the aspirations of or removable louvres to ensure future plant access and replacement can take
the spaces. place.
4) Assumptions have been made for the Great Hall, Cinema and theatre on the
total occupancy and equipment heat gains. As the brief strengthens in the Electrical Services Criteria
design development phase these figures will be reassessed.
The electrical design will be based upon the following electrical supply criteria
Water Storage Design Criteria Medium Voltage (MV) 13.8kV / 3 phase / 60 Hertz (incoming)
Medium Voltage (MV) 4.16kV / 3 phase / 60 Hertz (Outgoing)
The potable water consumption has been based upon the following daily storage
recommendations: From the main incoming networks within the energy centre, medium voltage rings
will run via the service tunnel to the MV/LV plantrooms serving the Great Hall,
Restaurants (Great Hall) 7 litres / cover, based on 1 full occupancies per Auditorium and Cinema. The transformers will be grouped together within a cooled
day and ventilated plantroom with LV cabling running to main LV switchboards within
Drinks Areas (Auditorium) 4 litres / person the building. All transformers will be located within a plantroom directly accessed
Conference (Great Hall) 40 litres / person from the loading bays to allow future maintenance and access to remove and
Admin 45 litres / person replace transformers as required.
Fabric Emergency generators have not been assumed necessary for the local plant but
will be provided within the overall central energy strategy.
For the fabric elements of the building the thermal performance figures, based
upon good practice and energy conservation, would be recommended as a
minimum, and have been used to develop the SD1 design:
3.4.3.2 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems Notes:
Minimum outside air ventilation is 8 l/s/person or 0.8 l/s/m², whichever is greater.
Generally, the Great Hall, Auditorium and Cinema Buildings shall be served by Infiltration at 0.25ach/hr is assumed for all spaces with exterior walls and
variable air volume (VAV) air handling systems as discussed below. windows.
• (1) Mechanical ventilation rates are based on cooling and heating requirements
Table 2-1 Internal Design Criteria
unless otherwise noted.
The following internal design criteria have been used when developing the • (2) The equipment loads for individual electrical rooms shall be based on
calculations and designs for each of the respective spaces ventilation, cooling and
heating loads. These will be further ratified with the Client at the next stage of the information from the Electrical Engineer.
design for final sign off.
• (3) Lighting and miscellaneous gains have been adapted from ASHRAE
Design Mech. Internal Gains Standard 90.1 where applicable.
Temperature Vent.
Space (1)
and Humidity • (4) NC criteria to be confirmed against the Acoustical Consultants
Summer People Lights(3) Misc. (3) recommendations.
Noise
Level
(NC)(4)
Foyer 24°C+/-2 1/6m² 11 W/m² 5 W/m²
50% RH+/-20 40
Refreshment 24°C+/-2 --- 1/2m² 12 W/m² 5 W/m²

Areas
50% RH+/-20 35
Auditorium 24°C+/-2 15 1000 12 W/m² 25 W/m²

50% RH+/-20
Auditorium 24°C+/-2 --- --- --- 6,000 W

Control assumed
50% RH+/-10
Rooms
Great Hall 22°C+/-1 25 --- 800 11 W/m² 25 W/m²

50% RH+/-5
Cinema 24°C+/-2 25 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m²

50% RH+/-20
Cinema 24°C+/-2 --- --- --- 6,000 W
Control Room assumed
50% RH+/-10
Cooling and Heating Loads
Each secondary pumped circuit will have duplicate run and standby pumps with
All loads have been based on the load analysis calculations carried out to date. automatic changeover on failure. The secondary pumps will be inverter driven
During the detailed design computational thermal modelling techniques will be speed controlled pumps which will vary the flow of chilled water depending upon
used to determine the cooling loads for the development. The loads for the various the demand.
spaces have been estimated as follows:
Great Hall
Base Load Summary
Based on the design criteria outlined above, the load breakdown for the Tower and The environmental control for the Great Hall shall be determined by the most
Keystone Buildings is shown in the table below. onerous mode of use. This shall be in the Temporary Exhibition mode where the
environment will have to meet museum standards to allow international lending of
Area Cooling Load Heating Load world class exhibitions. The plant systems and ventilation design have been
developed to ensure the environment within the Great Hall can be maintained as
Great Hall 900 kW ---
noted in the table above
Auditorium 850 kW ---
It is recognised that the Great Hall will also have various other modes of use that
Cinema 225kW ---
may not require the same environmental or acoustic control. To allow the reduction
TOTAL(1) 1975 kW --- in the environmental control and provide a more energy efficient solution the
Ventilation and Air conditioning systems proposed are an all air variable volume
Notes: system. This system will also allow all wet services to be contained out with the
• (1) The total loads given are peak values, they are not additive. Great Hall and therefore reduce any future risk of pipework failure to exhibits or
internal architectural finishes.
Energy Transfer Stations and Distribution Network To achieve this a designated plantroom has been identified that will contain the
plant and systems necessary to maintain the internal environment for both
The chilled water to the buildings will be taken from the common primary circuit in temperature and humidity.
the service trench fed from the energy centre.
The proposed solution for the Great Hall is to locate central air handling units
Due to the large chilled water demands associated with the project. Large chilled (AHU) within the designated plantroom. Each AHU will distribute air through
water flow rates and hence pipes sizes will be required. From the central energy ductwork co-ordinated with the structural and rigging systems. Air will be supplied
centre (or possible district cooling) network temperatures have been given as via high capacity swirl diffusers mounted on the underside of the Great Hall ceiling.
6.6°C flow and 13.3°C return. Typically for this type of development chilled water Return air to the air handling units will be extracted from the roof void. Fresh air to
temperatures of 4.5°C flow and 12.5°C return would be suitable to reduce the pipe the Great Hall will be delivered to the spaces via the re-circulating AHU’s using a
sizes and hence capital and pumping costs. mixing chamber within the units. Fresh air will be drawn from the internal skin of
the ventilated façade via louvres located in the internal lining. To provide energy
Within each of the buildings, pump and heat exchangers are required, known as efficiency fresh air quantities will be controlled with CO2 sensors depending on
energy transfer stations (ETS). These will provide the interface between the central occupancy.
chiller plant and the building operator. The operator will be responsible for
maintaining the building side of the system and will have to adhere to various Exhaust air will discharge at the same location as the incoming fresh air however
parameters set by the landlord / central cooling provider. See also value the louvres will be located at a suitable distance away from the fresh air to avoid
engineering section in the site services chapter. short circuiting.
As there is a heat exchange process required there is a loss in energy i.e. a It is currently proposed to use variable volume AHUs to suit the different modes of
temperature rise in the chilled water supply. Typically the heat exchangers can use. Room air temperature and humidity will be controlled by varying the chilled
provide a 1.0 to 1.5°C temperature differential between the central cooling and water flow rate to the cooling coils, hence varying the supply air temperature. In
building chilled water system. The secondary pumped circuits have been divided the detailed design stage further analysis will be carried out to model the
into zones in order to keep the pipe sizes manageable and to respond to variations performance of using a variable air volume system to control air temperature. This
in demand due to orientation and occupancy uses. will have considerable fan energy savings at part load conditions but thermal
modelling will be required as the diffuser performance is critical due to the large Auditorium
volume and height of the spaces. The diffusers and their layout should to be
analysed to verify their performance at reduced air volumes. The Auditorium ventilation system shall be based on the induction ventilation
principal of providing conditioned air to the space from ductwork at high level and
The air handling units shall be provided with separate supply and return air fans. to the underside of each Gallery. Due to the high levels of humidity it is deemed to
Each fan shall be provided with a variable frequency drive (VFD) to provide be more energy efficient to drop cool air from above rather than cooling and
variable air volume (VAV) flow. The unit shall incorporate a return air fan with reheating the air to allow displacement to be provided in the occupied zone. This
exhaust air section, an outside air and return air mixing box with separate outside will be fully tested in the Detailed Design stage.
air and economizer inlet dampers, a sand filter, a 30 percent filter, an 85 percent
filter, a cooling coil with access section, an electric re-heat coil with access section The acoustic criteria to be achieved within the space shall be to world class
and a supply fan section. performance level and has been agreed at NC15. In development of the design it
has been crucial to ensure the ductwork is suitably sized to allow the air to be
Outside air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of the distributed at very low velocities and final grilles to be selected so we can minimise
Great Hall Building via a sound attenuator. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an any regenerated noise at the supply diffuser
external louvre on the envelope of the Building via a sound attenuator. In the
event of a sand storm, the air handling units shall go into full recirculation mode. Air from each air handling unit shall be heated or cooled to meet comfort
conditions in the occupied zones only. Several AHUs shall be provided from the
suspended technical room above the Auditorium. These air handling units shall be
Great Hall Lobby and Plaza Areas provided with separate supply and return air fans. Each fan shall be provided with
a variable frequency drive (VFD) to provide variable air volume (VAV) flow. Each
The lobby and adjoining plaza areas are large volume spaces therefore it is unit shall incorporate a return air fan with exhaust air section, an outside air and
proposed to cool these spaces using central all air constant volume systems. return air mixing box with separate outside air and economizer inlet dampers, a
Branches of ductwork will be provided from the Air handling units located in the sand filter, a 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a cooling coil with access
roof void of the Great Hall and will provide conditioned air. Fresh air quantities will section, an electric re-heat coil with access section and a supply fan section.
be controlled with CO2 sensors depending on occupancy. Supply air will be ducted
at high level in the Great Hall to feed large drum type diffusers located on the Outside air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of the
internal partition of the concourse at high level. Return air will be extracted from Auditorium Building via a sound attenuator. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an
the Lobby and Plaza areas using a linear grille arrangement through the internal external louvre on the envelope of the Building via a sound attenuator. The air
partition and ducted back to the units at high level in the expo halls. intake louvre shall be sited as high as possible above the ground level and ideally
at a height of 8m or more to minimize the impact of sand ingress. In the event of a
Great Hall Back of House sand storm, the air handling units shall go into full recirculation mode.
Back of house areas will be served by a fresh air and fan coil units system. The conditioned fresh entering the space shall be heated approximately three
Tempered fresh air will be supplied to the various spaces from central fresh air degrees centigrade above the room temperature set point or cooled to
handling units. It is proposed to locate the units in the ceiling within the back of approximately three degrees centigrade below the room temperature set point and
house areas and duct fresh air from through louvres located in the building façade. delivered to the occupied zone at low velocity to ensure thermal comfort conditions
Air will exhaust via toilet and changing room ventilation systems. A general extract are maintained within the occupied zones of the space.
system will be required to avoid over pressurising the building. The general
exhaust fans will be located adjacent the fresh air units. Local temperature control The auditorium shall be served by a series of air handling plant. The supply and
within the various spaces will be provided by ceiling concealed fan coil units. extract air handling plant shall be located in a plantroom above the main
auditorium area behind the fly tower. The air handling units shall provide
conditioned air to the ground floor stalls area via vertical ductwork located in riser
shafts on the north and south sides of the auditorium before connecting to the
ductwork under the side galleries. Low noise jet nozzles will push the air from both
sides into the stalls area. The galleries will be supplied from the underside of the
gallery above or from the technical gallery at the top level to provide full and
distributed control to all audience areas.
Extract air handling plant shall be located in the plantroom behind the fly tower. Cinema
The extract air handling plant has been centralised to reduce plant space
requirements. The Cinema will be completely underground. Air shall be provided from the Air
It has been shown from CFD studies that heat build up at the rear of the stalls area Handling Units contained within the technical room adjacent the cinema. This air
and balcony areas can be reduced and subsequently thermal comfort conditions handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and return air fans. Each fan
improved by extracting air at the rear of each individual floor level. Air shall also be shall be provided with a variable frequency drive (VFD) to provide variable air
extracted through the ceiling level at top of the auditorium to help remove the heat volume (VAV) flow. The unit shall incorporate a return air fan with exhaust air
gains created by house and stage lighting at source. section, an outside air and return air mixing box with separate outside air and
economizer inlet dampers, a sand filter, a 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a
All air handling plant serving the auditorium shall be variable speed. The amount of cooling coil with access section, an electric re-heat coil with access section and a
fresh air entering the space shall be controlled based on the number of occupants supply fan section.
when the space temperature parameters are met for the space. When the
temperature set point for the space is not met then the amount of fresh air Outside air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of the
entering the space shall vary to achieve the desired set-point. Cinema Building via a sound attenuator. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external
louvre on the envelope of the Building via a sound attenuator. In the event of a
sand storm, the air handling units shall go into full recirculation mode.
Stage Areas
The air path for the cinema shall be to use displacement ventilation under the
One of the main requirements for the stage areas is to maintain a constant thermal seating of the cinema grilles shall be placed on the horizontal space of each seat
balance between the auditorium, stage areas and below stage areas to help with extract provided at high level.
prevent downdraughts and changes in temperature at stage level.
To maintain a constant temperature at stage level it is proposed to provide a

general ventilation system using induction ventilation outlets to the underside of
the lowest technical gallery level at the both sides of the stage ensuring that
scenery is unaffected from grille outlet velocities. Exhaust air shall be removed
from the fly tower to ensure that heat build up is minimised due to lighting heat
gains.
Dressing Rooms
Dressing rooms shall be provided with fresh air from the main air handling plant.
Fan coils units shall be provided within each room to control the local environment.
Electric heater batteries will be provided within the fan coil units to provide heating
should it be required during the winter months.
Storerooms
All storerooms shall be mechanically ventilated to meet minimum ventilation

requirements. Some storerooms shall also require full air conditioning due to their
use and storage content. Examples of this are the musical equipment store and
sheet music store.
3.4.3.3 Public Health exceed 5.0m where possible. Where this is not possible the dead leg shall be trace
heated to maintain the minimum circulation temperature specified.
Domestic Cold and Hot Water Distribution Each wash hand basin and shower shall be fitted with a thermostatic mixing valve,
capable of balancing incoming water pressures. The thermostatic mixing valve shall
From the central energy centre distributed mains water shall be connected to each come complete with check valve, isolating valve plus strainers.
building. It is currently proposed to have separate tanks for the Auditorium,
Cinema and Great Hall as the number of operators is unknown at this stage. Electric water heaters shall be provided for each toilet area of the Auditorium and
Great Hall Buildings.
Booster pumps and central filters shall be located within the pump room adjacent
the water tank if necessary to provide additional pressure from the distributed
main. Rainwater Drain System
An above ground gravity rainwater drainage system shall be provided to collect

Hot Water Generation and discharge all rainwater from the roof levels, etc. Pipework shall be routed to
discharge flows via gravity, vertically down through the Buildings.
It is envisaged that there will be limited hot water requirements to the Auditorium,
Great Hall and Cinema which will be associated to small cafes, kitchens and toilets. Access will be provided on all vertical internal rainwater pipes at 1200mm above
Hot water supply to these areas shall be through individual electric hot water each finished floor level, to the centreline of the access door and on horizontal
heaters located above the false ceiling in the respective areas. pipework.
Fire sleeves shall be provided on all horizontal and vertical plastic pipework passing
The system will be designed to provide a minimum of 2 bar (g) at the most remote through fire compartment floors or walls. The fire sleeve shall have a fire rating
outlet. Water piping will be sized in accordance with the following criteria: compatible with the floor, wall or cavity barrier to which it is fitted.
• Friction drop per meter of pipe shall not exceed 200 Pa/m. The design of the below ground drainage system shall be undertaken by the civil
• Pipe velocity shall not exceed 2.0 meters per second. engineer and all details relating to the below ground drainage will be provided by
• Minimum pipe size shall be 15mm, serving one plumbing fixture. them.
Pipe and fittings shall be in compliance with local codes and sized upon local
Shut-off valves will be provided to isolate the following: rainfall intensity and as identified in SAES-A-112.
• Each vertical riser (stop cocks)
• Each fixture in toilets (ball fix valves) Rainwater outlets for installation at roof level shall be as detailed on the architects
• Each group of fixtures (stop cocks) drawings.
Eaves rainwater gutters for installation shall be as detailed on the architects
drawings.
Hot Water Service All gratings and channels for use on this project shall be as shall be as detailed on
the architect’s drawings.
The domestic hot water piping system shall be sized similarly to the cold water
system. The distribution system shall consist of a piping system which will Thermal insulation will be provided to internal rainwater pipework to prevent the
connects hot water to all plumbing fixtures as required. Main distribution pipework formation of condensation.
and risers shall installed be copper pipework. Joints shall be made by capillary type
fittings containing lead free solder, or proprietary mechanical crimped fittings, Acoustic insulation will be provided to internal rainwater pipework throughout to
compression joints shall be used only at final connections. All pipework shall be prevent the outbreak and transmission of noise and vibration.
insulated to meet or exceed the minimum energy code requirements.
Rainwater shall either be collected for use in the recycled water system or
The HWS installation should minimise the length of dead legs. HWSR should be discharged to the external sewer.
taken as close to the draw off point as possible. The downstream dead leg from
any TMV shall not exceed 2.0m and the complete length of the spur shall not
Above Ground Foul Drainage System
Access will be provided on all vertical foul drainage stacks at 1200mm above each
The above ground foul drainage systems shall be designed to discharge all effluent finished floor level, to the centreline of the access door and on horizontal pipework.
via gravity from all WC’s, kitchen appliances and any mechanical plant/equipment
etc. Pipework will be routed to discharge flows via gravity for final connection to A number of waste stacks are to be established to collect discharges from waste
the below ground drainage system. pipes. Where stacks are ventilated to the atmosphere, vents shall terminate at roof
Access will be provided on all vertical foul drainage stacks at 1200mm above each level, complete with all weather aprons/flashings at the roof penetration and vent
finished floor level, to the centreline of the access door and on horizontal pipework. termination cowl. Thermal insulation will be provided to internal pipework to
prevent the formation of condensation on pipework immediately below roof level.
A number of foul stacks shall be established to collect discharges from soil pipes.
Where stacks are ventilated to the atmosphere, vents shall terminate at roof level, Automatic air admittance valves shall be provided where appliances are remote
complete with all weather aprons/flashings at the roof penetration and vent from the vertical stacks to prevent siphonage and to protect traps by allowing air
termination cowl. Thermal insulation shall be provided to internal pipework to into discharge pipework without allowing foul air to escape. These shall be installed
prevent the formation of condensation on pipework immediately below roof level. vertically and located in an accessible space suitable for maintenance and above
the flood level of the highest appliance.
Automatic air admittance valves shall be provided where appliances are remote
from the vertical stacks to prevent siphonage and to protect traps by allowing air Generally, the following pipework materials shall apply:
into discharge pipework without allowing foul air to escape. These shall be installed
vertically and located in an accessible space suitable for maintenance and above • PVC-U or high density polyethylene soil pipework - above 50mm diameter
the flood level of the highest appliance. • MuPVC waste pipework - 50mm diameter and below
Generally, the following pipework materials shall apply: Both the waste and vent pipework fittings shall be solvent o fusion welded
throughout. Bends used for stack offsets shall be large radius bends.
• PVC-U or high density polyethylene soil pipework - above 50mm diameter
• MuPVC waste pipework - 50mm diameter and below Traps shall be used for condensate drainage and shall be manufactured from
borosilicate glass. Traps for sinks and wash hand basins shall be tubular P style.
The foul and vent pipework fittings shall be solvent or fusion welded throughout. Showers shall be fitted with a self cleaning trap.
Bends used for stack offsets shall be large radius bends.
Fire sleeves shall be provided on all horizontal and vertical plastic pipework passing
Fire sleeves shall be provided on all horizontal and vertical plastic pipework passing through fire compartment floors or walls. The fire sleeve shall have a fire rating
through fire compartment floors or walls. The fire sleeve shall have a fire rating compatible with the floor, wall or cavity barrier to which it is fitted.
compatible with the floor, wall or cavity barrier to which it is fitted.
Floor drains will be provided in all toilets rooms having two or more WC’s or a General
combination of one water closet and one urinal. Technical rooms will be provided
with floor sinks with minimum 54mm trap. Each technical room will have as a All cold water appliances shall be fitted with flow limiters for water conservation.
minimum, one general floor drain. Floor drains and floor sinks shall be provided Low flow showers, dual flush WC’s connected to the grey water harvesting system,
with trap primers to prevent loss of trap seals. and aerated spray taps are to be provided for this project to reduce the overall
water consumption and sewerage requirements to a minimum.
Elevator shafts will be provided with a sump pump and pit discharging to a 50 litre
holding tank equipped with a high water alarm.
Above Ground Waste Drainage System
The above ground waste drainage systems shall be designed to discharge all waste
water via gravity from all air conditioning condensate pipework, wash hand and
shower appliances. Pipework will be routed to discharge flows via gravity, down
through the building, for collection in the grey water tank.
3.4.3.4 Life Safety Systems Fire Detection and Alarm systems
An analogue addressable fire alarm system will be provided to give comprehensive

The designed solutions for life safety in the building will be a combination of coverage to the whole of the building. All areas will be provided with manual call
services equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems, points and automatic heat and smoke detectors to suit the requirement of NFPA
automatic fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge systems, refuge 101 ‘Life Safety Code’ - 2006 edition, and NFPA 72 ‘National Fire Alarm Code’ -
areas and fire separation. NFPA codes 101 and 5000 will be used as the basis of 2007 edition.
the designs for this project.
The fire alarm panels will allow easy identification of the alarm signal via an
Fire control systems are made up of detection and alarm systems, fire suppression alphanumeric interface which will identify the area, level, zone and type of alarm
systems and fire management systems. signal, e.g. smoke detector, heat detector, break glass manual station, etc. The
mechanical services and ventilation systems will be interlocked where necessary
Fire Detection and Alarm systems comprise: with a local override panel for fire brigade use in the building.
• Smoke and heat detection in all areas of the building The alarm system will be interfaced with a voice evacuation system within large
public areas of the development. A scheme will be developed for an evacuation
• Manual call points strategy in consultation with the Fire Strategy Report.
• Voice Evacuation system

Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema
Fire Suppression systems comprise: A main fire alarm panel will be located within the building main security room
which is expected to be manned 24 hours. The location of the security room has
• Automatic sprinkler systems yet to be determined, however we would recommend that it is directly accessible
to the outside thus allowing the room to be utilised as a fire command centre in
• Fire standpipe and hose systems the event of a major incident.
• Mist and gaseous extinguishing systems in specific areas
The development will be provided with fire alarm repeater panels at each of the
main entrances to the Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema with the number of
devices and cabling loops to suit the final installation. All of the fire alarm repeater
Fire Management systems comprise:
panels will be networked together back to the main fire alarm panel.
• Smoke management systems
General areas will be provided with automatic detectors which will be of the multi-
• Pressurisation systems sensor heat/smoke type and programmed to suit their environment. Due to the
height of the Auditorium and the anticipated services installation(s) being required
• Emergency electric power systems it is proposed that optical beam detectors are provided in lieu of ceiling mounted
detectors.
• Automatic elevator recall systems
Electronic sounders shall be provided in areas of high ambient noise such as plant
• Communication and alarm notification systems rooms with visual beacons throughout.
• A central fire command centre.

Voice Evacuation
Each of the buildings will be provided with a dedicated voice evacuation system
which shall cover all public areas and general staff back of house areas to give
indication of a fire alarm and instructions for fire evacuation.
Emergency messages will be pre-recorded onto voice integrated circuits and Emergency Generator Supply
broadcast in at least 2 different languages. The exact composition of the messages
and the number of broadcast languages will be agreed during the design Standby generation is required to support essential applications and ensure that
development stage. the buildings function in a manner that is conducive to the requirements in the
event of power failure or disruption from the incoming utility supply. The standby
The content of the voice alarm shall be determined in consultation with Saudi generation will be provide as part of the central energy centre supply. The
Aramco. There will also be an override facility and zoning control from the main following lists the proposed systems that would be supported by a standby supply;
fire control room to allow additional alarms or zones to be activated and voice
messages sent. • Life safety systems - smoke extract, fireman's lifts, etc.
• Fire alarm and voice alarm systems

Fire Suppression Systems
• For operational purposes the generator shall also support a percentage of the
Fire protection systems will be required in accordance with NFPA 13 and as lighting circuits within the Auditorium, Great hall and Cinema.
indicated in the Fire Engineering report.
The provision of Life Safety systems shall be provided in accordance with the Fire Communication Systems
Strategy Report. These include the following:
A public address and voice alarm system will be provided to all areas of the
• A passive approach has been proposed for the Great Hall, Auditorium and building, to provide high-intelligibility messages for purposes of both paging and
Cinema Buildings. No smoke exhaust or pressurization of the Building floors is evacuation in the event of an emergency. Both the fire and voice alarm systems
will be from the same manufacturer and form an integrated system.
therefore required. The air handling unit fans shall be controlled such that they
can assist in smoke clearance after a fire. In the event of a fire signal being received by the fire alarm system, the alert or
evacuation alarm will be signalled by a recorded message played over a system of
• Kitchen extract canopies shall be provided with ANSUL fire suppression loudspeakers. These will be located throughout the building, with a loudspeaker in
every space. This system will be equipped with an amplifier rack together with a
systems “hot standby” amplifier in each rack. The equipment racks for the project will be
networked together with a bi-directional data loop on a peer-to peer basis to
• Sprinkler systems to cover all areas.
ensure the system will continue to fully function in the event of damage to one leg
of the network. A fireman’s microphone will be located at each rack and also at
the building security room which will be at a main entrance to be agreed.
Fire Management Systems
The system will be designed and installed to NFPA codes.
All main electrical plantrooms, server rooms and areas with water sensitive
equipment will be provided with a gaseous fire suppression system to NFPA 2000.
In addition to the requirements for the voice alarm system, the system will also
It is envisaged that these will be Inergen systems or similar in occupied rooms,
function for purposes of public address. Microphones will be provided in areas to
with carbon dioxide in unoccupied ones. Where such a system is provided, rapid
be defined. Paging zones will be selectable from the paging microphone. Paging
extract ventilation and pressure relief flaps will be provided.
messages will be preceded by a paging tone.
When the kitchen brief is formed, it is envisioned that all kitchen extract hoods
A two way fire department communication system will also be provided for the
shall be provided with a local fire suppression system, such as Ansul.
exclusive use of the civil defence fire fighters to permit liaison with the fire control
centre personnel. These two way communication devices will be installed in each
fire fighting lift elevator lobby and elevator lobby in accordance with NFPA
regulations.
The fire fighting command centre will contain:
• Voice fire alarm system panels and controls
• Fire department communication systems controls
• Fire detection and alarm system panels
• Elevator status indications
• Sprinkler valve and water flow status indication
• Emergency generator status indication
• Fire pump status indication
• Controls for HVAC system interfaces
• Control interfaces for all floor dampers
• Telephone for fire department use

3.4.3.5 Building Management Systems Other services within the core areas such as the lifts and mechanical plant will be
serviced from main and sub main MCCP distribution panels.
Refer to Section 3.4.8.6
All wiring will emanate from the local distribution board will be cabled using LSF
3.4.3.6 Electrical Distribution (low smoke & fume) single core cables within PVC conduits concealed in the
building fabric.
The main incoming supplies to the substation for the Auditorium, Great Hall and
Cinema will run from the central energy centre via the service tunnel. This will Single gang small power outlets will also be provided within the corridor areas for
enter the substation at high level and drop to each transformer from above. It is cleaning purposes, wired from the landlords local core distribution board. These will
generally expected that all LV distribution panels will be top entry, and that access generally be spaced at 20 metre intervals to allow for general cleaning equipment
for maintenance and future modifications will all be carried out from the front of cable radius.
the panels. Outgoing low voltage cabling will run out into the car park level via Metering shall be provided at the main LV switchboards and shall cover the main
single core cables laid on cable ladder, and into the risers from where it will feed incoming supply as well as each outgoing way excluding lifts supplies and fire
main LV switchboards. All basement LV switch rooms will be mechanically cooled. alarm panel supplies. All metering will be supplied with volt free contacts to allow
remote monitoring by the BMS system.
LV Distribution Where main switchboards that serve loads that require standby power in the event
of mains failure, then a motorised bus section switch will be provided enclosed in
The LV distribution system will commence at the substations located within the the main switchboards to split the essential and non-essential supplies. Control of
service corridor plant rooms. Sub main distribution will comprise sub main cabling these bus section breakers will be carried out by the site wide control system in the
to items of plant and equipment. event of a mains failure in order to provide automatic changeover of supplies.
In general sub mains will be installed in vertical electrical risers throughout the Auditorium
building.
The switchboard for the Auditorium shall be located on the basement level.
Any submains running externally to the buildings or where subject to a risk of Submain distribution shall provide power interfaces to all items of equipment
mechanical damage will be in XLPE/SWA cables. including performance equipment and specialist lighting.
The main LV distribution switch panels at each substation will comply with category Power shall be provided around the stage from the undercroft area creating
Form 4 Type 2 construction. A bus section switch will be provided within each maximum flexibility for various modes across the stage.
panel to split the essential and non-essential supplies, allowing essential
equipment to be maintained from a central generator input in the event of mains Great Hall
failure.
The switchboard for the Great Hall shall be located at ground floor level. The Great
Each main LV switchroom and main switchpanel will incorporate power factor Hall shall have three main service arteries running the length of the hall. Trenches
correction equipment to achieve an optimum p.f. of 0.95 lagging. The power factor with a size of 500x500mm shall run the width of the hall and shall be provided
correction cubicles will form an extension to the main switchpanels and contain every 9m. The service arteries will contain Distribution boards which will be used to
staged correction equipment to respond to varying load requirements, to ensure supply busbars with tap-off points to allow for exhibitors to take power connections
that at all times the power factor is at an optimum level. to their stand.
Where appropriate the transformer MV and LV isolators and enclosures will be Distribution boards will also be provided on the high level walkways to support the
fitted with Castell keys for interlocking purposes to prevent the parallel operation lighting installation and exhibitors high level power requirements.
of systems and supplies and to prevent transformer enclosure doors being opened
without MV and LV circuit breakers being isolated.
All outgoing sub main cabling from LV distribution panels will generally be carried
out using multicore XLPE-SWA-LSF cables.
3.4.3.7 Lighting 3.4.3.8 Emergency Lighting
The general lighting and Back of House lighting (BOH) installation and distribution The emergency lighting system will be designed to provide safe passage from the
is part of the electrical engineering package. A lighting scheme will be developed building in the event of a mains failure. All escape routes will be provided with
with the Architect for the main public and general circulation areas to highlight the maintained illuminated emergency exit signage with ‘EXIT’ logo to indicate escape
architectural features and maximize the ambiance of the space. routes.
Specialist lighting in the public areas such as the Front of House for the
Auditorium, Great Hall and Cinema will be designed by our in house lighting
consultant and will be detailed within the lighting consultants report.
Lighting will be selected wherever possible to comprise low energy compact source
lamps, to improve energy efficiency. The selection of common lamp sources for as
much lighting as possible across the development will also ease maintenance, and
reduce the range of lamps which have to be held by the client’s maintenance team.
All lighting unless indicated otherwise will be wired using single core LSF (low
smoke & fume) cabling within PVC conduits concealed within the building fabric.
External lighting will be addressed by the specialist lighting consultant at the next
stage of this project.
Lighting Levels
Lighting levels for the various areas are tabulated below and generally follow the
Saudi Aramco recommendations:
Area Average Lighting

Level (Lux)
Corridors 100
Stairs 150
Car Park 100
Plant Rooms 200
Entrance Lobbies 200
3.4.3.9 Security and Access Control System 3.4.3.10 Data and Communications System
It is proposed to include a full security review in the next stage of this project with All data and communication system cabling for the Auditorium, Great Hall and
the appointment of a security consultant who can examine all aspects of security Cinema will be installed as part of the basic fit out, with all containment, fibre and
including the design of the building, building fabric, people movements as well as category 6 cable installed. Designs will take into account current demand as well as
security systems and procedures. This will also include details of all buildings a spare capacity for future upgrades and extensions.
CCTV, access control and intruder detection systems.
Incoming data and telecom links will enter the central energy centre and be
This building will be fitted out by an operator and as such, security will fall distributed to the main buildings via the service trench. Links to each building will
ultimately under their remit to install as they wish. be in single mode fibre with a dedicated link to each building for resilience. Fibre
The following recommendations can be made for the building: will terminate within the main IT hub room with ongoing distribution in fibre to
each of the IT hub rooms within the building. Within each hub room the fibre link
• A combination of CCTV and access control only is appropriate as the building will be linked to a 10Gb data backbone. This will link all horizontally distributed
will be manned at all times and so there is limited requirement for intruder category 6 UTP data cabling to the main fibre network for all data and voice
detection on a building wide basis. services on each floor.
• Meeting and conference rooms as well as bars will benefit from local intruder
detection however these are at the discretion of the building operator. Services to be carried over the infrastructure cabling are:-
• Each lift should have CCTV installed to prevent damage to the lift cars
through vandalism. • All data services including operator services and customer services
• Al CCTV systems will be linked to Aramco for offsite monitoring • Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony
• Access control will include door access control for all rooms including • IP Television (IPTV) including all interactive and video on demand services
bedrooms, meeting rooms, offices etc. • Security services
• Minimal CCTV coverage will be required for the Auditorium and Cinema as • Security and access control services
the will be secured through locked doors when not in use and staffed when in
use. Access will be controlled to back of house areas. Clean earths will be available for all IT hub rooms and it is recommended that a
• The Great Hall will require full high level security when it the temporary UPS system is considered for major hardware systems. The security and BMS
exhibition mode to satisfy the international lending standards agency. systems will be powered from sockets on the generator backed side of the LV
supply including all associated data cabling distribution equipment such as switches
and hubs.
Wireless networks will also be installed to cover 100% of the hotel and selected
areas with the remaining building. This will include at least two wireless access
points on each floor and additional coverage for areas of higher populations such
as restaurants and meeting rooms.
All active equipment such as servers, VoIP call managers, IPTV equipment and end
user equipment will not be included within this installation and will be the
responsibility of the end user to fit out.
Segregated containment will be made available for the GSM mobile network
transmitters which will be installed at each level within the corridors of the
complex.
3.4.4 Tower & Keystone Sky Bar 24°C+/-2 --- 1/5m² 14 W/m² 15 W/m²
50% RH+/- 40
3.4.4.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
20
External Design Criteria
Storage 24°C+/-4 2 ac/h
Refer to Section 3.4.2 exh
RH not N/A
controlled
Internal Design Criteria for Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning View/ VIP 24°C+/-2 1/2m² 12 W/m² 10 W/m²
Systems
50% RH+/-
The following internal design criteria have been used in the preliminary 20
assessments of ventilation, cooling and heating loads within the Tower and
Keystone Buildings. These will be further ratified with the Client at the next stage Notes:
of the design for final sign off. • (1) Mechanical ventilation rates are based on cooling and heating
requirements unless otherwise noted.
Design Mech. Internal Gains • (2) The equipment loads for individual electrical rooms shall be based on
Temperat Vent. information from the Electrical Engineer.
Space (1)
ure and • (3) Lighting and miscellaneous gains have been adapted from ASHRAE
Humidity Standard 90.1 where applicable.
Summer Noise People Lights(3) Misc. (3) • (4) NC criteria to be confirmed against the Acoustical Consultants
Level recommendations.
(NC)(4)
Digital 24°C+/-2 1/6m² 14 W/m² 15 W/m² Outside Air Ventilation Rates
Library
50% RH+/- 35
20 SAES-K-001 requires that the minimum amount of outside air shall equal the
greater of the following;
Foyer 24°C+/-2 1/6m² 11 W/m² 5 W/m²
50% RH+/- 40 a) 5% of supply air plus all exhaust air.
20
Media 24°C+/-2 1/10m² 12 W/m² 25 W/m² b) The ventilation air requirements listed in Table 2 of ASHRAE STD 62.
Centre
50% RH+/- 40 ASHRAE Standard 62.1 stipulates a default minimum outdoor ventilation rate of
20 8.5 l/s/person in office type spaces based on a default occupancy density of 20
m2/person. This correlates closely with the recommended outside air ventilation
Observation/ 24°C+/-2 --- 1/5m² 12 W/m² 10 W/m²
rates per person given by CIBSE Guide B2 of 8 l/s/person which is the industry
Mezzanine
50% RH+/- 40 standard in the United Kingdom. BREEAM requires that office outside air ventilation
20 rates are provided in compliance with the British Council for Offices (BCO)
recommendations i.e. 12 l/s/person at an occupancy density of 10 m2/person. It is
Reading 24°C+/-2 1/6m² 14 W/m² 15 W/m² possible that this project may need to be BREEAM certified subject to verification
Room from Saudi Aramco.
50% RH+/- 35
20
This project is to be designed to World class standards and the majority of the
Restaurant 24°C+/-2 --- 1/3m² 12 W/m² 5 W/m² areas within the Tower and Keystone buildings are proposed to be provided with
50% RH+/- 35 minimum fresh air only ventilation systems. Increasing the outside air rates for
20 minimum fresh air only systems also improves the ability of the system to control
humidity levels via the air handling units. It is therefore proposed to provide
outside air to office areas at a rate of 12 l/s/person based on an occupancy density
of 10 m2/person to ensure good levels of indoor air quality. Emergency Load Summary
Demand control ventilation is proposed for areas that are served by an air handling The emergency load summary is shown in the table below.
unit that has an air side economizer namely the restaurant, the sky bar and the
observation/ mezzanine areas. Air handling systems for these areas shall be Area Requirement Power Cooling
equipped with CO2 sensors to monitor the level of occupancy in the space and Chilled Water System Emergency duty equipment Yes ---
reduce outside air quantities accordingly down to a minimum of 800ppm. The
design fresh air rates for these spaces shall be based upon the greater of 8.5 Server Rooms Full operation of the cooling Yes 60 kW
l/s/person or 0.85 l/s/m2. Proposed occupancy density levels are per those given in system
the previous table of design criteria. The minimum fresh air rate could be adjusted
to 12 l/s/person should BREEAM accreditation be required providing the air Staircase Supply fans Yes ---
handling unit cooling coils are suitably sized. Pressurization
System
Saudi Aramco has confirmed that smoking will not be permitted within the Tower Lift Motor Rooms Full operation of the cooling Yes 60 kW
and Keystone Buildings. system
TOTAL EMERGENCY COOLING LOAD 120 kW
Heating and Cooling Systems Load Summary
Base Load Summary
Based on the design criteria outlined above, the load breakdown for the Tower and
Keystone Buildings is shown in the table below.
Area Cooling Load Heating Load

Tower 1900 kW 900 kW
Keystone 200 kW 50 kW
TOTAL(1) 2,100 kW 950 kW
Notes:
• (1) The total loads given are peak values, they are not additive.
• (2) It is anticipated that heating shall be provided via electric air heating
coils in AHU’s, FCU’s and VAV boxes.
Over-Time Load Summary
Areas of the complex which will require 24 hour / 7 day cooling or will operate
after general business hours shown in the table below.
The total of the peak cooling demands based on this table is approximately 120
kW.
Area Requirement Cooling

Server Rooms 24 hour cooling 60 kW
Lift Motor Rooms 24 hour cooling 60 kW
TOTAL OVER-TIME COOLING LOAD 120 kW
Design Criteria for Electrical Systems Lighting Levels
Electrical Plant and Equipment will be selected to suit the appropriate Minimum Lighting Working Plane
environmental conditions for the location they are to be installed in. The Location
Levels (Lux) (mm)
environmental conditions for the SACC project are defined as follows:
Offices 500 760
Average Monthly CAD Work Station 500 Task
Maximum Daily
Location Normal Maximum Conference Room 500 760
Peak (°C)
(°C)
Elevators 200 Floor
Outdoors (Air) 45 50
Corridors 75 Floor
Earth (Soil) 40 40
Stairways 75 Floor
Indoors – well ventilated building 40 50
Washrooms 150 900
Indoors – air-conditioned See note 1 below See note 1 below
building Control Rooms 500 Floor
Non-ventilated enclosure 56 56 Instrument Panels 500 1700

exposed to sun Consoles 500 760
Back of Panels 100 900
Note 1 – As per the design temperature of the air-conditioning system or 30°C,
whichever is greater. Dining Area (leisure, light 150 760
environment)
Service Area 300 900
Food Preparation / Kitchen 500 900
Entrance Halls 200 Floor
Vertical Face of Switchgear 300 1700
Battery Room 300 Floor
Telephone /IT Equipment Room 500 460
Plant Walkways, Stairs, Platforms 50 Floor
Pump Rows, Valves, Manifolds 50 Ground
Locker Room 100 Floor
Lavatory (Hammam) 200 Floor
Capped off connections to the general and emergency chilled water systems shall
3.4.4.2 VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS be provided on every floor in the Tower and Keystone Buildings. This will allow
flexibility to add special spot cooling equipment in the future.
Hydronic Systems
Heating
The hydronic systems comprise cooling circuits to serve the peak, after-hours and
emergency design loads stated previously. In accordance with SAES-K-001 section 4.8.8.2 and the proposals for the Central
Energy Centre, it is proposed to provide electric re-heat coils within air handling
The hydronic cooling system is designed to circulate chilled water at 9°C/13.5°C in units. Electric re-heat coils are also proposed for terminal fan coil units and VAV
accordance with SAES-K-001 section 4.4.3. Friction drop per meter of pipe shall boxes. The use of electric re-heat is in line with convention within the Middle East
not exceed 200 Pa/m. due to the relatively low heating loads and the un-availability of town’s mains
piped natural gas for heating.
Chilled Water
Chilled water pipework shall be generated at the Central Energy Centre and shall Electric re-heat coils shall be provided with air flow switches and thermal cut-out
enter the Tower Building via the level 1 technical room to serve pumps and heat devices.
exchangers.
Ventilation Systems
Two separate chilled water systems shall be provided to meet the general and General Ventilation Systems
emergency cooling requirements of the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
Two options for serving the general areas including administration/ office areas of
Tertiary pumps shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings. Duty and the Tower and Keystone buildings have been considered. These options are;
standby pumps shall be provided for each system with each pump sized for 100
percent of the maximum design duty. These pumps shall be end-suction types with • Minimum fresh air ventilation with fan coil units (FCU’s)
close coupled drives. • Variable air volume (VAV) air systems.
Variable frequency drives (VFD’s) shall be provided for each pump to allow The following is a discussion on the principles and comparative advantages and
significant energy savings at part load. disadvantages of each of these systems.
Principles of Minimum Fresh Air System with Fan Coil Units

Air handling units, fan coil units and other items of equipment requiring a chilled
water supply shall be provided with 2-port modulating control valves with the • FCU’s are mounted in the ceiling void for each area required
pumps operating on a constant pressure basis. Differential pressure control valves • Each FCU serves one zone
shall be provided on each floor sub-circuit and at each air handling unit to maintain • Chilled water coils and electric heating coils in the FCU’s allow the zone
hydraulic stability of the system. temperature to be controlled
• Room air is re-circulated by the FCU’s and mixed with the fresh air
Plate and frame heat exchangers shall be provided for each chilled water system • Air is supplied to each area via high level diffusers from the FCU’s
serving the Tower and Keystone Buildings between levels -3 and 16. This shall • Minimum fresh air is supplied to each FCU via ductwork from the air handling
provide hydraulic separation from the Tower Building reducing the static pressure units within the technical rooms
on the Central Energy Centre equipment and other buildings chilled water systems. • Minimum fresh air to the FCU’s is cooled and heated by the air handling units
in the technical rooms –heating, cooling, humidification and dehumidification
Each chilled water system shall be provided with a water make-up and can be provided.
pressurization system with an automatic de-gassing facility and an air and dirt
separator. Advantages
• Significantly smaller ductwork shafts required when compared to centralized
Chilled water shall be distributed in conventional steel pipework and connect to the air systems for example, VAV systems.
various air handling units and other locations including unitary air conditioning • High cooling capacities
units throughout the building. All pipework shall be insulated to meet or exceed the • Local and individual room control possible
minimum energy code requirements. • No floor space requirement in office space (assumes ceiling concealed FCU’s)
• Good space flexibility for space planning (partitioning, etc)
• Proven, well-known system
• Reduced size of air handling units in technical rooms floor plate outweighs the negative effect of having de-centralised maintenance of
• Copes well with high levels of humidity expected in this climate. fan coil units in the occupied space.
Disadvantages There are other options for serving such spaces including a constant volume
• Maintenance for FCU’s within ceiling space is required system or a minimum fresh air and chilled beam system. Due to the number of
• Removal of condensate needs to be carefully considered. individual spaces / zones that require individual control a constant volume system
is considered wasteful and will be less energy efficient than a VAV system. Room
Principles of Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems temperature is controlled by reheating the supply air to a space to suit the internal
load. Additionally, constant air volume systems do not benefit from reduced fan
• Variable air volume units are mounted in the ceiling void for each area
power at part load conditions. Chilled beam systems can provide a low energy
required
solution and a very comfortable environment however, they also have the potential
• Each VAV unit serves one zone
to encounter condensation problems due to the high ambient humidity levels and it
• Air is supplied to each area via high level diffusers from the VAV units
is thought that this solution would not be appropriate in this climate.
• Air (fresh and recirculated) is supplied to each VAV unit via ductwork from air
handling units with the technical rooms
Other areas including the restaurant, kitchen, sky bar and observation/ mezzanine
• Supply air to the VAV units is cooled and heated by central plant – heating,
will require a different approach. The following are descriptions of each of the
cooling, humidification and dehumidification can be provided.
proposed systems for the Tower and Keystone buildings:
Advantages
Tower Levels -3 to 0 and 2 to 4
• High cooling capacities
The Tower Building level 1 technical room shall contain an air handling unit to
• Local and individual room control possible
serve levels -3 to 0 and 2 to 4 of the Tower Building. This unit shall be referenced
• No floor space requirement in office space
AHU-01. This air handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and exhaust
• Good space flexibility for space planning (partitioning, etc)
air fans in a double height stacked configuration. Each fan shall operate on a
• Room void contains ductwork and VAV units only – no fans, filters, etc
constant air volume basis but shall be provided with variable frequency drives
• Good filtration
(VFD’s) to assist in commissioning, maintain a constant positive pressure
• Centralized location for maintenance outside of occupied areas
relationship between supply and extract and, to allow some future adjustment in
• Proven, well-known system.
the outside air ventilation rate.
Disadvantages
The air handling unit shall incorporate an outside air inlet damper, a sand filter, a
• High ducting space requirements – large riser and deep ceiling void space 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a supply fan, a cooling coil with access
requirement – all cooling and heating is by air (water is a more effective and section, an electric re-heat coil with access section, an electrode humidifier and an
thus compact carrier of energy). extract fan section. Heat recovery shall be provided by using either a run-around
• Problems with minimum fresh air rates on turn-down can be experienced coil or rotary thermal wheel depending upon available space. Sound attenuators
• Maintenance for VAV units above office space is necessary but is less than shall either be provided at the inlet and outlet of the supply and extract sections or
that for FCU’s shall be duct mounted depending upon available space.
• Large air handling units required in technical floors
• Controls are more complex than minimum fresh air systems with fan coil Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of
units. the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on
the envelope of the Tower Building. The air intake louvre shall be sited as high as
For general areas including admin/ office floors, it is proposed that the Tower and possible above the ground level and ideally at a height of 8m or more to minimize
Keystone Buildings shall be served by minimum fresh air systems with fan coil the impact of sand ingress. Air intake louvers shall be sited on the South Western
units. Foyer and circulation areas at levels -3 to 0 of the Tower Building which are side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly wind to
outside of the museum environment shall also be served from these HVAC reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be located
systems. These proposals have been made on the basis that a VAV system would on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of short
require significantly larger vertical risers when compared to a minimum fresh air circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams.
system. Due to the high ratio of core to usable space within the Tower Building, a
minimum fresh air and fan coil unit system helps to make the core more viable by
increasing usable floor space. It is proposed that this increase in efficiency of the
Re-circulating fan coil units with chilled water cooling coils and electric re-heater located on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of
coils shall be provided in the ceiling voids of each zone served with supply and short circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams.
return air ductwork and grilles. Chilled water pipework shall be run in the ceiling
voids of these areas with valved connections at major pipe branches and at each Re-circulating fan coil units with chilled water cooling coils and electric re-heater
fan coil unit. Consideration shall be given to the use of pre-assembled valve kits to coils shall be provided in the ceiling voids of each zone served with supply and
improve reliability, accelerate installation and improve the balancing and return air ductwork and grilles. Chilled water pipework shall be run in the ceiling
commissioning process. Each zone shall be provided with a wall mounted voids of these areas with valved connections at major pipe branches and at each
temperature sensor for the control of the fan coil units. fan coil unit. Consideration shall be given to the use of pre-assembled valve kits to
improve reliability, accelerate installation and improve the balancing and
Outside air shall be supplied to the rear of each fan coil unit and returned in commissioning process. Each zone shall be provided with a wall mounted
externally insulated galvanized sheet metal ductwork from the air handling units temperature sensor for the control of the fan coil units.
and shall route through levels -3 to 4 of the Tower Building in dedicated vertical
shafts. Air shall be returned via ceiling mounted grilles and slots into bellmouth Outside air shall be supplied to the rear of each fan coil unit and returned in
openings in the ceiling void plenums or shall be hard ducted to the return air externally insulated galvanized sheet metal ductwork from the air handling units
system in acoustically sensitive locations. It may also be desirable to provide and shall route through façade cavity between the Tower and Keystone Buildings
additional fan coil units to supply air over areas of exposed glazing by using linear as agreed with the Architect. Air shall be returned via ceiling mounted grilles and
air slots at ceiling level. slots into bellmouth openings in the ceiling void plenums or shall be hard ducted to
the return air system in acoustically sensitive locations. It may also be desirable to
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each provide additional fan coil units to supply air over areas of exposed glazing by
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy using linear air slots at ceiling level.
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire
damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings. Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy
Keystone Building Levels 3 to 5 Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire
The Tower Building level 5 technical room shall contain an air handling unit to damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
serve levels 3 to 5 of the Keystone Building. This unit shall be referenced AHU-02.
Tower Levels 6 to 10
This air handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and exhaust air fans
in a double height stacked configuration. Each fan shall operate on a constant air The Tower Building level 5 technical room shall contain an air handling unit to
volume basis but shall be provided with variable frequency drives (VFD’s) to assist serve levels 6 to 10 of the Tower Building. This unit shall be referenced AHU-03.
in commissioning, maintain a constant positive pressure relationship between This air handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and exhaust air fans
supply and extract and, to allow some future adjustment in the outside air in a double height stacked configuration. Each fan shall operate on a constant air
ventilation rate. volume basis but shall be provided with variable frequency drives (VFD’s) to assist
in commissioning, maintain a constant positive pressure relationship between
The air handling unit shall incorporate an outside air inlet damper, a sand filter, a supply and extract and, to allow some future adjustment in the outside air
30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a supply fan, a cooling coil with access ventilation rate.
section, an electric re-heat coil with access section, an electrode humidifier and an
extract fan section. Heat recovery shall be provided by using either a run-around The air handling unit shall incorporate an outside air inlet damper, a sand filter, a
coil or rotary thermal wheel depending upon available space. Sound attenuators 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a supply fan, a cooling coil with access
shall either be provided at the inlet and outlet of the supply and extract sections or section, an electric re-heat coil with access section, an electrode humidifier and an
shall be duct mounted depending upon available space. extract fan section. Heat recovery shall be provided by using either a run-around
coil or rotary thermal wheel depending upon available space. Sound attenuators
Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of shall either be provided at the inlet and outlet of the supply and extract sections or
the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on shall be duct mounted depending upon available space.
the envelope of the Tower Building. Air intake louvers shall be sited on the South
Western side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of
wind to reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on
Western side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of
wind to reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on
located on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of the envelope of the Tower Building. Air intake louvers shall be sited on the South
short circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams. Western side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly
wind to reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be
Re-circulating fan coil units with chilled water cooling coils and electric re-heater located on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of
coils shall be provided in the ceiling voids of each zone served with supply and short circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams.
return air ductwork and grilles. Chilled water pipework shall be run in the ceiling
voids of these areas with valved connections at major pipe branches and at each Air shall be supplied and returned in externally insulated galvanized sheet metal
fan coil unit. Consideration shall be given to the use of pre-assembled valve kits to ductwork to these zones from the air handling unit and shall route through levels
improve reliability, accelerate installation and improve the balancing and 11, 12 and 13 in either dedicated vertical shafts or within the façade cavity in
commissioning process. Each zone shall be provided with a wall mounted locations to be agreed with the Architect. Air shall be supplied into these zones via
temperature sensor for the control of the fan coil units. ceiling mounted supply air diffusers and slots. Air shall be returned via ceiling
mounted grilles and slots into bellmouth openings in the ceiling void plenums or
Outside air shall be supplied to the rear of each fan coil unit and returned in shall be hard ducted to the return air system in acoustically sensitive locations. In
externally insulated galvanized sheet metal ductwork from the air handling units the event of a sand storm, the air handling unit shall go into full recirculation
and shall route through levels 5 to 10 of the Tower Building in dedicated vertical mode.
shafts. Air shall be returned via ceiling mounted grilles and slots into bellmouth
openings in the ceiling void plenums or shall be hard ducted to the return air VAV terminal boxes with electric heating coils shall be provided in the ceiling voids.
system in acoustically sensitive locations. It may also be desirable to provide Main return air ducts for the air handling unit shall be provided with carbon dioxide
additional fan coil units to supply air over areas of exposed glazing by using linear sensors to provide demand based control of the outside air resulting in significant
air slots at ceiling level. energy savings. Using this approach, the fresh air rates can be varied and free
cooling can be used with full fresh air when the external conditions are suitable.
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each Varying occupancy levels can also be taken account of. Each VAV box shall either
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy be provided with a temperature sensor mounted on the walls within the space or
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire within the return air ductwork.
damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each
Other Areas, Ancillary Areas and Equipment Rooms
Restaurant Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire
damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
Restaurant facilities are indicated on level 13 of the Tower Building. These facilities
shall be served by an air handling unit located in the technical room at level 11 of Sky Bar
the Tower Building. This unit shall be referenced AHU-04.
The technical space within the Tower Building level 11 shall house an air handling
unit for the Sky Bar area at level 14 of the Tower. This unit shall be referenced
The air handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and return air fans in a
AHU-05.
double height stacked configuration. Each fan shall be provided with a variable
frequency drive (VFD) to provide variable air volume (VAV) flow. Each unit shall
The air handling unit shall be provided with separate supply and return air fans in a
incorporate a return air fan with exhaust air section, an outside air and return air
double height stacked configuration. Each fan shall be provided with a variable
mixing box with outside air and economizer inlet dampers, a sand filter, a 30
frequency drive (VFD) to provide variable air volume (VAV) flow. Each unit shall
percent filter, an 85 percent filter, an electric heating coil with access section, an
incorporate a return air fan with exhaust air section, an outside air and return air
electrode humidifier, a cooling coil with access section, and a supply fan section.
mixing box with outside air and economizer inlet dampers, a sand filter, a 30
Heat recovery shall be provided by using either a run-around coil or rotary thermal
percent filter, an 85 percent filter, an electric heating coil with access section, a
wheel depending upon available space. Sound attenuators shall either be provided
cooling coil with access section, electrode humidifier and a supply fan section. Heat
at the inlet and outlet of the supply and extract sections or shall be duct mounted
recovery shall be provided by using either a run-around coil or rotary thermal
depending upon available space.
wheel depending upon available space. Sound attenuators shall either be provided
at the inlet and outlet of the supply and extract sections or shall be duct mounted the envelope of the Tower Building. Air intake louvers shall be sited on the South
depending upon available space. Western side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly
wind to reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be
Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of located on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of
the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on short circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams.
Western side of the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly Air shall be supplied and returned in externally insulated galvanized sheet metal
wind to reduce the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Exhaust louvers shall be ductwork from the air handling unit and shall route through levels 11 to 15 in
located on the North Eastern façade where possible to minimize the occurrence of dedicated vertical shafts or within the façade cavity in locations to be agreed with
short circuiting outside air and exhaust air streams. the Architect. Air shall be supplied into the space along the perimeter at low level
via linear slot diffusers, and, at mid and high levels via nozzles to provide spot
Air shall be supplied and returned in externally insulated galvanized sheet metal cooling of the envelope. This will remove heat gains at source and help to reduce
ductwork from the air handling unit and shall route through levels 11 to 14 in radiant heat issues. Return air shall be collected at mid and high levels of the
dedicated vertical shafts or within the façade cavity in locations to be agreed with space to avoid the build up of excessive temperatures and resulting discomfort due
the Architect. Air shall be supplied into the space via a pressurized floor plenum to radiant heat. The Observation/ Mezzanine will be subject to further micro-
with swirl diffusers to create a comfortable micro-climate within the occupied zone climate studies to verify this approach in conjunction with the Sky Bar proposals.
of the Sky Bar. This type of system creates a gradient of air in the room, with
warmer, staler air being confined to the upper, unoccupied section of the room. Main return air ducts for the air handling unit shall be provided with carbon dioxide
Return air shall be collected at mid level of the space to avoid the build up of sensors to provide demand based control of the outside air resulting in significant
excessive temperatures and resulting discomfort due to radiant heat. The Sky Bar energy savings. Using this approach, the fresh air rates can be varied and free
will be subject to further micro-climate studies to verify this approach in cooling can be used with full fresh air when the external conditions are suitable.
conjunction with the Observation/ Mezzanine proposals. Varying occupancy levels can also be taken account of.
Main return air ducts for the air handling unit shall be provided with carbon dioxide Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each
sensors to provide demand based control of the outside air resulting in significant penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy
energy savings. Using this approach, the fresh air rates can be varied and free Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire
cooling can be used with full fresh air when the external conditions are suitable. damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
Varying occupancy levels can also be taken account of.
Kitchen
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each The technical space within the Tower Building level 12 shall house an air handling
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy unit for the kitchen at level 12. This unit shall be referenced AHU-07. The supply
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire fan shall be operated on a constant air volume basis to ensure a constant pressure
damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings. relationship within the kitchen. The unit shall incorporate a supply air fan, an
outside air inlet damper, a 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a cooling coil with
Observation/ Mezzanine access section, and an electric heating coil with access section. This unit shall be
The technical space within the Tower Building level 11 shall house an air handling interlocked to the kitchen exhaust fans. Kitchen air shall not be re-circulated. The
unit for the observation/ mezzanine area at level 15 of the Tower. The air handling air supplied to the kitchen shall be cooled to improve comfort and productivity of
unit shall be provided with separate supply and return air fans in a double height kitchen staff however, internal temperatures shall be elevated above normal
stacked configuration. This unit shall be referenced AHU-06. The supply and comfort conditions due to the high internal heat gains expected.
extract fans shall be operated on a constant air volume basis to ensure effective
performance of supply air devices. The unit shall incorporate a supply air fan, an Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of
outside air inlet damper, a 30 percent filter, an 85 percent filter, a cooling coil with the Tower Building. Air intake louvers shall be sited on the South Western side of
access section, an electric heating coil with access section, and electrode the façade in the opposite direction to the prevailing North Easterly wind to reduce
humidifier, and extract fan, a mixing box and an extract air outlet damper. the occurrence of sand and dust ingress.
Outside air shall be ducted from an external sand trap louvre on the envelope of The kitchen exhaust canopies shall be provided with a dedicated exhaust fans and
the Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on associated ductwork, operating at constant speed. Ductwork shall be constructed
from either stainless steel or black steel to increase the longevity of the systems. a sand filter, a 30 percent filter, an electric heating coil, a cooling coil, a run-
Ductwork shall be provided with fire rated enclosures outside of the kitchen with around coil heat exchanger, attenuators and, supply and extract fans.
separation from combustible materials. Kitchen exhaust ducts shall be routed in as
short and efficient way as possible, provided with access doors as required by code Outside air shall be ducted to external sand trap louvres on the envelope of the
and in accordance with good design practice. Due consideration shall be given to Tower Building. Exhaust air shall be ducted to external sand trap louvres on the
maintenance of these systems. envelope of the Tower.
Kitchens shall be provided with at least 20 AC/hr of extract ventilation via exhaust Floor Plate Communications Rooms
hoods and some ceiling areas. Kitchen canopies shall have exhaust rates at no less The cooling requirements for the floor plate communications rooms shall be met
than 0.3m/s over the face of the canopies and more depending upon the via the emergency chilled water system via close control units. These units shall be
application. The exact requirements for exhaust ventilation and supply air make-up wall mounted within the rooms served.
shall be tailored to suit the requirements of the kitchen canopies and equipment
once this information becomes available. The close control units shall provide temperature and humidity control of the
environment inside the floor plate communications rooms. The building
These fans shall be located in the façade cavity on an accessible gantry in a management system shall maintain a historical log of the environmental conditions
position to be agreed with the Architect. These fans shall be belt-driven centrifugal within these rooms for future analysis.
types and discharge to atmosphere at the top of the Tower in a location where the
risk of contaminating outside air intakes and staining the building envelope is All connecting supply and return air ductwork shall be acoustically lined. Flexible
reduced and in accordance with code requirements. Dishwasher extract system(s) duct and pipe connections shall be provided on all units that do not have internally
shall be serviced in a similar way to the kitchen extract system. isolated fans.
These fans shall be referenced EF-2 and EF-3. Elevator Machine Rooms
Restrooms The elevator machine rooms shall be provided with cooling via dedicated fan coil
units. The cooling requirements shall be met via the emergency chilled water
A twin motor extract fan shall be located in the ceiling void of the Tower Building system. The heat load for the equipment shall be based upon information provided
level 14. This unit shall be referenced EF-1. by the vertical transportation specialist consultant.
Air shall be extracted from the restrooms via galvanized sheet metal ductwork Domestic Hot Water Boiler Room
from the fan and shall route through the Tower Building in dedicated vertical
Combustion and ventilation air shall be brought into the level 12 domestic hot
shafts. Air shall be extracted from these zones via ceiling mounted grilles and
water heater room via external sand trap louvres on the envelope of the Tower
slots. This fan shall operate on a constant air volume basis.
Building.
The fan shall be provided with sound attenuators at the inlet and discharge
The domestic hot water boiler flues shall be routed to the top of the Tower Building
locations. The fan shall be ducted to an external sand trap louvre on the facade.
via the façade cavity. Each flue shall terminate with a vent cap.
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each Acoustics and Vibration
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire Acoustic and vibration control shall be provided for the building services
damper system shall be provided for the Tower and Keystone Buildings. installations. This shall include sound attenuators, duct and pipe velocities, diffuser
selections, terminal unit selections, vibration isolation etc. Internal and external
Mechanical and Electrical Technical Rooms noise levels resulting from building services equipment shall be in accordance with
recommendations of the Project Acoustical Consultant.
Mechanical and electrical technical rooms located within the Tower Building levels
1, 5, and 11 shall be provided with packaged supply and extract air handling units.
The use of internal duct lining shall be kept to a minimum.
These units shall be referenced AHU-08, AHU-09, and AHU-10 respectively.
The following criteria used for the design of ventilation systems in accordance with
These AHU’s shall provide air to deal with heat gains from equipment, ventilation
SAES-K-001:
requirements and background fresh air for personnel. These units shall incorporate
• Main Supply Ducts 10 m/s
Air Handling Units Summary
• Branch Supply Ducts 7.5 m/s
• Main Extract Ducts 7.5 m/s Reference Description Location Area Served Vol
• Branch Extract Ducts 5 m/s. m³/s
AHU-1 Custom Built Tower Tower Levels -3 to 0 and 2 to 4 – 3
Pipework velocities shall be sized in accordance with the following criteria: Minimum Fresh Level 1 Museum Circulation and Foyer,
Air S&E AHU Tower Admin
• Pipes ≥ 150ø 2.0 m/s AHU-2 Custom Built Tower Keystone Levels 3 to 4 - Library 2
• Pipes ≤ 100ø 1.5 m/s. Minimum Fresh Level 5
Air S&E AHU
AHU-3 Custom Built Tower Tower Levels 6 to 10 - Admin 4
Air Side Systems Summary Minimum Fresh Level 5
The tables below summarize the approximate sizes of the air handling equipment Air AHU
and fans for the Tower and Keystone Buildings based on the assumptions stated in AHU-4 Custom Built Tower Tower Level 13 - Restaurant 8
this report. Reference should be made to sub-sections of this report for AHU VAV S&E AHU Level 11
components and systems descriptions. AHU-5 Custom Built Tower Tower Level 14 – Sky Bar 7
CAV S&E AHU Level 11
AHU-6 Custom Built Tower Tower Level 15 – Observation/ 9
CAV S&E AHU Level 11 Mezzanine
AHU-7 Custom Built Tower Tower Level 12 - Kitchen 8
CAV S Only Level 12
AHU
AHU-8 Packaged CAV Tower Tower Level 1 – Technical Room 2
S&E AHU Level 1
S&E AHU Level 5
S&E AHU Level 11
Fans Summary
Reference Description Location Area Served Vol
m³/s
EF-1 Twin Motor Tower Tower All Levels 4
Toilet Extract Level 14
Fan
SF-1 Stairwell Tower Tower All Levels 6
Pressurisation Level 16
Fan
SF-2 Stairwell Tower Tower All Levels 6
Pressurisation Level 16
Fan
EF-2 Kitchen Extract Tower Tower Level 15 4
Fan Level 12
EF-3 Kitchen Extract Tower Tower Level 15 4
Fan Level 12
3.4.4.3 PUBLIC HEALTH The system will be designed to provide a minimum of 2 bar(g) at the most remote
The plumbing system for the Tower and Keystone Buildings shall include the outlet. Water piping will be sized in accordance with the following criteria:
following:
• Friction drop per meter of pipe shall not exceed 200 Pa/m.
• Water systems • Pipe velocity shall not exceed 2.0 meters per second.
• Drainage systems • Minimum pipe size shall be 15mm, serving one plumbing fixture.
• Grey water system
• Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) system. Shut-off valves will be provided to isolate the following:
It is currently assumed that stormwater shall be shed off the Tower and Keystone • Each vertical riser (stop cocks)
Buildings for collection by the site infrastructure and landscaping. Consequently, no • Each fixture in toilets (ballofix valves)
provision has been made for stormwater collection within the Tower and Keystone • Each group of fixtures (stop cocks).
Buildings at this stage. Hot Water Service
Water Systems The domestic hot water piping system shall be sized similarly to the cold water
system. The distribution system shall consist of a piping system which will connect
General hot water to all plumbing fixtures as required. Main distribution pipework and risers
All cold water appliances shall be fitted with flow limiters for water conservation. shall installed be copper pipework. Joints shall be made by capillary type fittings
Low flow showers, dual flush WC’s connected to the grey water harvesting system, containing lead free solder, or proprietary mechanical crimped fittings,
and aerated spray taps are to be provided for this project to reduce the overall compression joints shall be used only at final connections. All pipework shall be
water consumption and sewerage requirements to a minimum. insulated to meet or exceed the minimum energy code requirements.
Domestic Cold Water
The HWS installation should minimise the length of dead legs. HWSR should be
Potable cold water service shall be provided from the Central Energy Centre. taken as close to the draw off point as possible. The downstream dead leg from
any TMV shall not exceed 2.0m and the complete length of the spur shall not
A double check valve assembly and a nominal 40m3 sectional GRP domestic water exceed 5.0m where possible. Where this is not possible the dead leg shall be trace
tank shall be located in the Technical Room in level 11 of the Tower Building. This heated to maintain the minimum circulation temperature specified.
shall act as a day storage and header tank for the site wide potable water supply.
This tank shall be sectional GRP with a liner that is suitable for drinking water Each wash hand basin and shower shall be fitted with a thermostatic mixing valve,
usage. A leak detection system shall be provided around the tank to reduce the capable of balancing incoming water pressures. The thermostatic mixing valve shall
risk of water damage to the floors below. come complete with check valve and isolating valve plus strainers.
A triplex pump variable speed domestic water booster system shall be provided for Hot water for the Tower Building, level 12 kitchen shall be generated via LPG fired
the Tower and Keystone Buildings levels 7 to 14. The Tower and Keystone hot water supply heaters with integral storage. This equipment shall be located
Buildings shall be zoned vertically using pressure reducing valves to limit pressures within the Tower Building level 12 technical room. Hot water will be distributed
at fixtures to a maximum of 4 bar(g). around the kitchen through a conventional flow and pumped return domestic hot
water pipework system.
The tank shall be internally partitioned with two sets of valves and connections to
permit routine maintenance. The tank shall be provided with bolt down lids, level Electric water heaters shall be provided on each floor to heat the hot water for
controls, inspection hatches, screened vents and overflows, drip tray and warning each toilet area of the Tower Building.
pipes.
Drainage Systems
Main distribution pipework and risers shall installed be copper pipework. Joints Above Ground Foul Drainage System
shall be made by capillary type fittings containing lead free solder, or proprietary
mechanical crimped fittings, compression joints shall be used only at final The above ground foul drainage systems shall be designed to discharge all effluent
connections. All pipework shall be insulated to meet or exceed the minimum via gravity from all WC’s, sinks, wash hand basins, kitchen appliances and any
energy code requirements. mechanical plant/equipment etc. Pipework will be routed to discharge flows via
gravity, down through the Tower and Keystone Buildings. Soiled waste from above minimum, one general floor drain. Floor drains and floor sinks shall be provided
the Tower level 2 shall be conveyed by gravity to the sewage treatment plant for with trap primers to prevent loss of trap seals.
re-use in the grey water system. Soiled waste from below the Tower level 2 shall
be connected to the infrastructure drainage system. Elevator shafts will be provided with a sump pump and pit discharging to a holding
tank equipped with a high water alarm.
The above ground foul drainage systems shall be dual pipe foul and ventilated
Above Ground Condensate Drainage System
stacks suitable for high rise applications.
The above ground condensate drainage systems shall be designed to discharge all
The Tower Building level 12 kitchen shall be provided with two grease interceptors condensate water via gravity from all air conditioning equipment. Pipework will be
with enzyme injection prior to discharge to the below ground drainage system. The routed to discharge flows via gravity, down through the building, for collection in
grease interceptors shall be cast in the floor slab. the nominal 2m3 sectional GRP condensate water tank in the Tower Building level 1
technical room. A leak detection system shall be provided around the tank to
Access will be provided on all vertical foul drainage stacks at 1200mm above each reduce the risk of water damage to the floors below.
finished floor level, to the centreline of the access door and on horizontal pipework.
A package booster pump set shall pump this water back to the sewage treatment
A number of foul stacks shall be established to collect discharges from soil pipes. plant for re-use in grey water applications. Condensate from below the Tower level
Where stacks are ventilated to the atmosphere, vents shall terminate at roof level, 2 shall be connected to the infrastructure drainage system.
complete with all weather aprons/flashings at the roof penetration and vent
termination cowl. Thermal insulation will be provided to internal pipework to prevent the formation of
condensation.
Thermal insulation shall be provided to internal pipework to prevent the formation Generally, the following pipework materials shall apply:
of condensation.
Vent termination cowls shall terminate no less than 900mm above the top of any PVC-U or high density polyethylene soil pipework - above 50mm diameter
window or opening if within a horizontal distance of 3m. MuPVC waste pipework - 50mm diameter and below
Automatic air admittance valves shall be provided where appliances are remote Pipework fittings shall be solvent or fusion welded throughout. Bends used for
from the vertical stacks to prevent siphonage and to protect traps by allowing air stack offsets shall be large radius bends.
vertically and located in an accessible space suitable for maintenance and above Traps shall be used for condensate drainage and shall be manufactured from
the flood level of the highest appliance. borosilicate glass.
Generally, the following pipework materials shall apply: Fire sleeves shall be provided on all horizontal and vertical plastic pipework passing
PVC-U or high density polyethylene soil pipework - above 50mm diameter through fire compartment floors or walls. The fire sleeve shall have a fire rating
MuPVC waste pipework - 50mm diameter and below compatible with the floor, wall or cavity barrier to which it is fitted.
The foul and vent pipework fittings shall be solvent or fusion welded throughout. Grey Water System
Bends used for stack offsets shall be large radius bends. Grey water service shall be provided from the Central Energy Centre.
Fire sleeves shall be provided on all horizontal and vertical plastic pipework passing A nominal 20m3 sectional GRP grey water tank shall be located in the Technical
through fire compartment floors or walls. The fire sleeve shall have a fire rating Room in level 11 of the Tower Building. This shall act as a day storage and header
compatible with the floor, wall or cavity barrier to which it is fitted. tank for the site wide grey water supply. This tank shall be sectional GRP with a
liner. A triplex pump variable speed grey water booster system shall be provided
Traps for sinks and wash hand basins shall be tubular P style. Showers shall be for the Tower and Keystone Buildings levels 7 to 14. The Tower and Keystone
fitted with a self cleaning trap. Buildings shall be zoned vertically using pressure reducing valves to limit pressures
at fixtures to a maximum of 4 bar(g). This system shall provide water for toilet and
Floor drains will be provided in all toilets rooms having two or more WC’s or a urinal flushing and, possibly for irrigation.
combination of one water closet and one urinal. Technical rooms will be provided
with floor sinks with minimum 54mm trap. Each technical room will have as a
The tank shall be internally partitioned with two sets of valves and connections to
permit routine maintenance. The tank shall be provided with bolt down lids, level
controls, inspection hatches, screened vents and overflows, drip tray and warning
pipes. A leak detection system shall be provided around the tank to reduce the risk
of water damage to the floors below.
Grey water pipework shall be clearly identified to prevent any possible

contamination of potable water supply and human consumption.
Proximity shut-off shall be provided to all WC’s and urinals to avoid un-necessary
waste. This shall take the form of a solenoid valve, controlled by room PIRs.
Liquefied Petroleum Gas

Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) shall be piped to the Tower Building from the
Central Energy Centre.
Gas pipework shall be routed to the domestic hot water boiler heaters and kitchen
at level 12 of the Tower Building. An automatic solenoid valve, linked to the fire
alarm system, shall be provided at the building entry point, adjacent to the
domestic hot water heaters and, kitchen. A gas detection system shall be provided
adjacent to the domestic hot water heaters to automatically isolate the solenoid
valve.
It is expected that kitchen equipment shall require a mixture of LPG and electrical
power therefore, LPG shall also be piped into the kitchen. A gas safety system shall
be provided within the kitchen area to automatically isolate the solenoid valve.
Gas pipework shall be heavy grade steel. All LPG pipework shall be routed in ceiling
voids, pipe ducts etc. with adequate ventilation to allow detection of any gas leaks.
A gas meter shall be provided at the building entry point with provision for remote
BMS monitoring of the gas consumption
3.4.4.4 Life safety systems • Elevator control panels
• Voice evacuation system
The designed solutions for life safety in the building will be a combination of • Mechanical services control panels
services equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems, • Smoke dampers, smoke curtains and automatic doors
automatic fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge systems, refuge • Lighting control and emergency lighting systems
areas and fire separation. The life safety systems shall be developed in line with • Disabled refuge alarm system
the project Fire Strategy Report. • Gas solenoid valve – Kitchen LPG
Fire control systems are made up of detection and alarm systems, fire suppression • Stair pressurisation system.
systems and fire management systems.
The fire alarm system will also be connected to the normally held open automatic
Fire Detection and Alarm systems comprise: fire doors for closure, activate fire shutters, interface with smoke fans and exhaust
fans, send a signal to the local fire department via an auto-dialler using a
• Smoke and heat detection in all areas of the building dedicated telephone line, and monitor the fire sprinkler system. The fire alarm
• Manual call points system will be interfaced with the elevator controller to return the lifts to
• Voice Evacuation system. predetermined levels, and the air handling units are automatically shut down.
A fireman's telephone system will be provided to link the fire control room to each
Fire Suppression systems comprise:
level of each stairwell core of the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
• Automatic sprinkler systems Ionization smoke detection will be provided throughout the Tower and Keystone
• Fire standpipe and hose systems Buildings. Duct smoke detectors will be provided in the supply and return air ducts
• Gaseous extinguishing systems in specific areas. of all air handling units greater than 1m³/s.
Fire alarm break glass units will be provided along all exit routes and at all final
Fire Management systems comprise:
exit doors.
• Smoke management systems In the event of a fire alarm being detected, strobes, audio and combination
• Pressurisation systems audio/strobes will activate throughout the building.
• Emergency electric power systems Disabled refuge points will be provided with a call button and intercom linked to a
• Automatic elevator recall systems separate panel adjacent the fire alarm panel. These will allow disabled persons to
• Communication and alarm notification systems communicate safely with fire fighting personnel during building evacuation.
• A central fire command centre
• Facilities for the disabled. Fire Suppression Systems
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems These include the following:
Automatic Sprinkler System

An addressable fire detection and alarm system will be provided, complete with a
voice evacuation and audio/visual alarm system, throughout the Tower and Automatic sprinklers shall be provided throughout the Tower and Keystone
Keystone Building. Buildings. This includes elevator machine rooms, domestic hot water heater plant
area and technical rooms etc…
The fire alarm system will be networked for the entire project. The system will The Central Energy Centre shall provide central storage and pumping for the
consist of microprocessor-based control panels with manual fire alarm break glass sprinkler system. Zone valves shall be provided on a floor by floor basis.
units, ionization smoke detectors, thermal heat detectors, audio/visual devices,
monitoring switches for sprinkler valves, alarm speakers. All the detection devices Sprinkler pipework shall be heavy grade steel with grooved mechanical couplings.
will be addressable and will be uniquely identified on the indication panel via the
worded message panel. Standpipes and Fire Department Hose Outlets
Automatic wet standpipes will be installed at all exit stairwells. This system shall be
Fire alarm interface devices will be provided for connection to equipment such as connected to the centralized sprinkler system with separate control valves at the
the following: bottom of the Tower and Keystone Buildings.
Each for of the exit stair wells shall be provided with fire department hose outlets. • Smoke control ventilation and curtain systems
Each outlet shall have a removable adapter and cap. Threads and valves shall be • Sprinkler fire-pump systems
compatible with the local fire department requirements. • Sewage and sump pumps where gravity drainage is not present
• Critical communication systems and uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Gaseous Extinguishing Systems in Specific Areas systems
Kitchen extract canopies shall be provided with ANSUL fire suppression systems. • Critical air conditioning systems.
All main electrical plantrooms, server rooms and areas with water sensitive Emergency power supplies will be provided via the Central Energy Centre and
equipment will be provided with a gaseous fire suppression system to NFPA 2000. enter the Tower Building at level T-01 and rise up to terminate in the essential
It is envisaged that these will be Inergen systems or similar. Where such a system services section of the main LV switchboard on level 01. This will provide supply to
is provided, rapid extract ventilation and pressure relief flaps will be provided. essential life safety equipment and other critical equipment in the event of a failure
of the local electricity supplies.
These include the following: The emergency generator supplies will be routed separately to the normal supplies
and will generally be carried out in fire-rated, steel wire armoured cabling or
Smoke Management Systems singles in conduit.
A passive approach has been proposed for the Tower Building. No smoke exhaust
or pressurization of the Tower Building floors is therefore required. The air handling Communication and Alarm Notification Systems
unit fans shall be controlled such that they can assist in smoke clearance after a
fire. A public address and voice alarm system will be provided to all areas of the
The project Fire Consultant has confirmed that special smoke control measures are building, to provide high-intelligibility messages for purposes of both paging and
not required in the Keystone Building. evacuation in the event of an emergency. Both the fire and voice alarm systems
Each elevator hoistway shall be provided with automatic vents interlocked to the
fire alarm system. These vents shall be normally closed to avoid significant energy In the event of a fire signal being received by the fire alarm system, the alert or
losses through the core. evacuation alarm will be signalled by a recorded message played over a system of
loudspeakers. These will be located throughout the building, with a loudspeaker in
Pressurisation Systems
every space. This system will be equipped with an amplifier rack together with a
The high-rise staircases within the Tower Building shall be provided with stairwell “hot standby” amplifier in each rack. The equipment racks for the project will be
pressurization systems. The fans shall duty/ standby and shall be located at the networked together with a bi-directional data loop on a peer-to peer basis to
Technical Room at the top of the Tower Building, feeding down into each stairwell. ensure the system will continue to fully function in the event of damage to one leg
The fans shall be on emergency power. These fans shall be referenced SF-1 and of the network. A fireman’s microphone will be located at each rack and also at the
SF-2. building security room which will be at a main entrance to be agreed.
Emergency Electric Power System
The system will be designed and installed to NFPA codes.
Standby generation is required to support essential applications and ensure that
the buildings function in a manner that is conducive to the final operator’s In addition to the requirements for the voice alarm system, the system will also
requirements in the event of power failure or disruption from the regional function for purposes of public address. Microphones will be provided in areas to be
electricity supply. The following lists some of the proposed systems that would be defined. Paging zones will be selectable from the paging microphone. Paging
supported by a standby supply: messages will be preceded by a paging tone.
• Life safety egress lighting and exit signage A two way fire department communication system will also be provided for the
• Elevator cab lights exclusive use of the fire fighters to permit liaison with the fire control centre
• Each elevator personnel. These two way communication devices will be installed in each fire
• Electrical and mechanical equipment technical floor lighting fighting lift elevator lobby and elevator lobby in accordance with NFPA regulations.
• Fire alarm system
• Stairwell pressurisation systems
Fire Fighting Command Centre
The fire fighting command centre will contain:

• Fire department communication systems controls
• Controls for HVAC system interfaces
• Telephone for fire department use.
Facilities for the Disabled
An alarm system will be provided in all disabled persons toilets in order to summon
assistance to disabled persons in distress.
The system will consist of the following:
• Pull cord activation with reassurance light

• Local audible alarm
• Local visual alarm external to WC
• Remote alarm indication to reception
• Local reset facility.
A desk mounted induction loop system, complete with microphone and amplifier,
will be provided at the main reception, security desk and within meeting rooms.
equipment to respond to varying load requirements, to ensure that at all times the
3.4.4.5 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS power factor is at an optimum level.
LV Distribution
The Tower and Keystone electrical distribution system will consist primarily of
rising busbars routed from the main switchboard, through service risers located in
3.4.4.6 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION the core of the building, serving each floor of the Tower. Two dedicated busbar
systems will be provided, one serving separate lighting and power distribution
panels and the other serving mechanical services plant and control panels.
Main Switchboard
Connection to the rising busbar systems will be via three pole and neutral (TPN)
A new low voltage (LV) electrical supply will be derived from one of the Central tap-off devices. This will permit the maintenance and/or isolation of individual floor
Energy Centre substations and routed through to the Tower building at level T-01. plate panels without affecting other floors.
The incoming supply cables will terminate in the Tower and Keystone building’s
main LV electrical switchboard located in the switchroom on technical floor level Dedicated multi-core, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), steel-wire armoured
T01 of the tower. (SWA) sub-mains cables will be provided to serve the elevator machinerooms
located on the top most floor of the Tower and sprinkler pumps.
The Tower and Keystone building’s total estimated electrical demand and electrical
supply characteristics are as follows: Secondary supply cables will also be provided to serve the life-safety equipment.
These will be routed from the essential services section of the switchboard via a
Phase Power Maximum separate riser to that of the primary supplies.
Voltage Frequency
Factor Demand
Floor Plate Power Distribution
380/220V 3phase 4- 60Hz 0.8 1400 kVA
±5% wire
Each floor plate will be provided with two 380/220V distribution panels, one
provided to serve the lighting loads of that floor and another to serve the small
power loads. These will be located in the central core electrical riser.
In addition to the main supply, a secondary “essential services” supply will be
derived from the Energy Centre generator which will terminate in an essential
An underfloor power busbar and floor box system will be provided within the office
services section of the main switchboard via an automatic change-over bus-coupler
floor plate to serve furniture workstations and other office receptacles. These will
arrangement. This will provide emergency power backup to life safety systems
be arranged at an appropriate grid arrangement to cater for various furniture
(discussed elsewhere) and other essential services.
spacing iterations.
Metering will be provided at the main LV switchboard and shall cover the main
A steel-wire cable tray (basket) system will also be provided on each floor plate
incoming supply as well as each outgoing way excluding lifts supplies and fire
within the raised floor void for routing of telecommunications Cat 6 UTP cabling.
alarm panel supplies. All metering will be supplied with volt free contacts to allow
Flexible steel conduits will extend from the cable tray to each individual tel/data
outlet.
The main LV switchboard will be provided with a motorised bus section switch to
Generally, a floor box will be provided to serve two workstations and will comprise
split the essential and non-essential supplies. Control of these bus section breakers
four 220V floor receptacles and four RJ45 tel/data (structured cabling) outlets.
will be carried out by the site wide control system in the event of a mains failure in
order to provide automatic changeover of supplies.
Individual offices with partitions will be distributed to by using LSF (low smoke &
fume) single core cables within steel trunking and conduits concealed in the
The main LV switchboard will incorporate power factor correction equipment to
building fabric.
achieve an optimum p.f. of 0.95 lagging. The power factor correction cubicles will
form an extension to the main switchboard and contain staged correction
Convenience receptacles will be provided throughout in restrooms, public spaces
and corridors.
Single gang small power receptacles will also be provided for cleaning purposes.
These will generally be spaced at 20 metre intervals to allow for general cleaning
equipment cable radius.
Grounding/ Earthing System
A central grounding system will be provided for the entire project. A ground bus
(earth bar) will be provided in each electrical room and tied to the main ground
bus and structural steelwork at each location. A ground bus will be provided in
each telecommunications room.
Grounding connections will be provided to the following grounding electrodes:
• Main incoming water supply line

• Main incoming LPG pipeline
• Concrete-encased (Ufer) ground
• Structural steel reinforcement/concrete rebar
• Ground ring at main switchboard room.
A separate green ground conductor will be provided for cross bonding of raceways
(containment system).
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
A UPS system is proposed to maintain supplies to IT server and network cabinets.

This will be configured to provide N+1 redundancy.
The battery cubicles and UPS system will be sized on the basis of an uninterrupted,
autonomous supply for 10minutes duration. This will be sufficient to allow the
generator to be brought up to full load capacity and synchronised with the
essential electrical load. It is anticipated that the UPS will be of the rack-mounted
type located within the IT comms room cabinets at T05 floor level.
Batteries will also be configured in parallel arrangement to allow sets to be

removed for maintenance.
Lighting Control Systems
3.4.4.7 LIGHTING
It is proposed that a fully digital addressable lighting control system will be
The main aim of the lighting design is to create both visually interesting and installed to provide for the maximum levels of energy savings and flexibility in the
functional spaces, with an emphasis on human comfort and energy efficiency. The installation.
lighting solution will produce a pleasant, interactive environment for the building
occupants and provide sufficient illumination to undertake the required tasks. Occupancy sensors (manual on, automatic off) will be provided in offices,
conference rooms and similar locations where the number of fixtures justifies their
The type of lamp, luminaire and position of the fixtures will create different lighting use. All areas, especially public areas such as corridors and lobbies, will be
moods for the various spaces but with a similar appearance throughout. Users will controlled through the lighting control system and automatically switched based on
be provided with facilities to adjust lighting levels in specific areas of the building – a preset, scheduled time clock capable of being over-ridden by local switches.
to suit the task they are undertaking or for comfort control. All interior, non-emergency lighting will be locally controllable and operated by
authorized personnel as the situation warrants.
Generally, luminaires will utilise high frequency regulated control gear, comprising
a widely available protocol, such as DALI. Integral sensors will be provided in Where applicable, all rooms will be designed for dual-switching so that at least half
relevant locations to facilitate the dimming of lighting levels to suit the external of the lights can be turned off. Day-lit areas of enclosed spaces will have controls
ambient lighting conditions. In addition, presence or absence detectors will be for at least half of the luminaires in the day-lit areas, as well as controls for the
provided to gain maximum energy savings. This will assist in minimising the luminaires in each vertically day-lit area separately from the luminaires in each
electrical energy consumption by lighting apparatus and inherently reduce heat horizontally day-lit area.
loads within the building.
The lighting installation contributes significantly to the energy consumption of a Areas such as conference rooms and public spaces will have specific lighting
building and as such low energy sources will be used and controlled by a control and/or dimming requirements and these systems will be provided on a
centralised lighting control system. localized, individual area basis, subject to audiovisual requirements.
Lamps will generally comprise of a combination of linear and compact fluorescent The lighting control system will have a facility for night time “scene-setting” to
sources with high quality colour rendering and a minimum colour temperature of enhance the appearance of the façade at night by controlling the internal
4000°K unless different colour temperatures are required by the client to certain (background) lighting as required.
areas. The number of different lamp types will be kept to a minimum and every
effort will be made to use the same wattage, colour rendering and temperature of 3.4.4.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
lamp types in different areas. Selected lamps should also ensure low energy
characteristics and long lamp life. The building will be provided with an emergency lighting system designed to
provide a safe means of escape in the event of an emergency or the failure of the
Corridor, public space, and elevator lobby lighting will be a combination of normal normal lighting system. Escape lighting will be provided to all primary exit routes,
and emergency lighting with approximately two-thirds of the lighting on normal both internally and immediately outside each fire escape door. The escape signage,
service and one-third on emergency service. where possible, will utilise LED lamps to minimise energy consumption and to
maximise lamp life.
Lighting within the offices will generally comprise suspended, slim profile, linear
fluorescents with both up/downlight components. The emergency lighting will generally comprise maintained, self-contained/integral
luminaires with three-hour battery back up. The batteries will be housed within the
Lighting levels for the various areas are tabulated in section 6.03.1 Design Criteria. luminaire body or where not possible, will be fitted in an agreed location adjacent
to the luminaire. Where twin or multiple lamp luminaires are specified, one lamp
Lighting in enclosed stairs and exit signs will remain illuminated on a 24-hour basis only will operate under emergency operation with reduced light output.
and will be served from the emergency system. Exterior emergency egress lighting
will be fluorescent or, in the case of HID, be served from a self-contained UPS In some areas the emergency lighting may require to be provided from dedicated
panel to eliminate restrike time. LED emergency lights comprising self-contained battery units. The batteries will
have three hours autonomy.
Further discussions are required to develop the exit strategy from secured doors in
3.4.4.9 SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS the event of an emergency. Particularly connections to the fire alarm, where door
mechanisms failing safe, i.e. generally open on loss of power or fire alarm signal,
A security system will be provided to give coverage of the Tower and Keystone could be misused.
buildings, and will comprise three main elements:
Block purchase additional passes will be able to be allocated and assigned byt the
• CCTV security personnel on site without the need for involvement of the manufacturer
• Access control other than the occasional replenishment of passes.
• Intruder detection.
Intruder Detection
These main elements will be provided to all areas of the development, but will vary
in scope between each area. However, common control and monitoring will be An intruder detection and alarm system will be provided to give coverage of all
located within the security control room with a link to the building’s central entry and egress points of the Tower and Keystone building.
monitoring station.
The system will be controlled from a main panel located in the security control
The systems will be developed in close consultation with the client representatives room. The panel will be provided with a battery backed supply to enable
in detail at a later stage of the design. continuous operation in the event of a normal mains failure. The panel will
interface to a PC based graphical display system to give the operator real time
CCTV selectable control of the entire system. An associated printer will log and record all
security events.
The CCTV system will consist of a good quality, high definition colour CCTV The panel will have a tamper alarm which will operate when the cover or lid is
surveillance system, and will be sited at all access points to the administrative, removed.
back of house and public areas. The system will also include:
Internal colour cameras will be provided in areas deemed necessary by the client. • Door and window contacts for all protected and externally accessible areas
The clarity and level of camera resolution required will be discussed with the client • Passive infra red detectors in all protected areas
representatives in detail at a later stage of the design. • Fixed personal attack manual actuators (locations to be confirmed at a later
design stage)
The CCTV system will be provided with central monitoring via operators with • Audible alarm sounders.
viewing screens, video recording facilities and camera controls within the security
control room. Alarm sounders will be provided and will be fixed in locations to be agreed with the
client.
Access Control An automatic dialling facility will be supplied to provide remote indication of an
actuation of the intruder detection alarm at Saudi Aramco’s Main Security Control
A complete door access and entry system will be provided in the reception foyer Facility.
leading to the lift and circulation. It will include electronic clocking in terminals for
staff by means of proximity cards. Further levels of secured access will be provided
to restrict access to certain areas such as:
• Security control room

• Energy centres and electrical switch rooms.
All equipment will be linked to stand alone PCs and will allow an attendance record
and general movement to be viewed at any one time. The PCs will be located in
the control room with a link to the Aramco site-wide system.
3.4.4.10 DATA AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Lightning Protection
A lightning protection system grounded to the building steelwork will be provided

for the Tower and Keystone building. The system will safely discharge the passage
of a lightning strike to earth. This will take the form of a network of tapes forming
a grid at roof level, connected to down-tapes run within the façade of the building,
terminated in earth pits at ground level. All down-tapes will be concealed within
the building fabric.
Surge suppression devices will also be installed on the main LV switchboard.

3.4.5 Library 10) Lighting and small power gains are based on the figures stated in ASHRAE
Standard 90.1:2004 pp 65-67 for libraries.
Water Storage Design Criteria
External Design Conditions
The potable water consumption has been based upon the following daily storage
Refer to section 3.4.2 recommendations:
Mechanical Internal Design Conditions 20 litres / person / day
Occupancy: Fabric
1 person/10 m2 (Note 4)
For the fabric elements of the building the following thermal performance figures,
Room Internal Temperature: based upon good practice and energy conservation, would be recommended as a
Summer – 22oC (+/- 2oC) minimum, and have been used to develop the schematic design:
Winter - 21oC (+/- 2oC)
Element Wall Window Roof Roof Exposed
% Relative Humidity: (flat) light Floor
50% (+/- 20%) (Note 1) U-value (W m-2 K-1) 0.568 (note 1) 0.568 (note 1) n/a
SA standard SAES-
Ventilation Rates: N-004 minimum
2.5 litres/sec/person + 0.6 l/s/m2 (Note 2) requirements
U-value (W m-2 K-1) 0.25 1.8 0.25 1.8 0.25
Background Noise Levels: Recommended
NC 30-35 (Note 3) Shading Coefficient n/a 0.30 n/a 0.30 n/a
(note 2 ) (note 2 )
Casual Gains:
Lighting – 14 W/m2 (Note 5) Minimum requirements and recommended requirements for fabric standards that
Small Power – 15 W/m2 (Note 4) the design team has worked to as Schematic Design.
Occupants – 90 W (sensible) 50 W (latent)
Notes:
Notes:
1) No minimum fabric requirements for glazing provided in Saudi Aramco
5) Humidity of fresh air will be controlled at the central plant. Humidity will not standards.
be controlled within the spaces. Temperature control is the overriding
mechanism and will provide a high degree of dehumidification. 2) For purposes of schematic design a resultant shading coefficient of 0.225
has been used assuming a 25% reduction in solar gain from the external
6) Minimum fresh air rates as per ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Table 6-1, p14. Note mesh cladding material.
Saudi Aramco have confirmed that no smoking shall be permitted within the
building and therefore fresh air rates utilised reflect this. It should be noted that the only defined area of glazing within the library is the
rooflight. Therefore the total glazing area within the library is undefined at this
7) Noise criteria as per Saudi Aramco standard SAES-A-105, p.7. stage. For the purposes of schematic design 10% of the overall façade area is
assumed to be glazed to reflect the architectural concept of small porthole glazing
8) Occupancy densities are based on ASHRAE Standard 62.1 to allow schematic to provide natural daylight to the space. The total glazing area will need to be
design to progress. As the brief strengthens in the detail design phase these confirmed and developed during detail design stage. It should be noted that an
figures will be reassessed. increase in glazing area will result in an plant capacity for the space due to the
associated increase in cooling load from additional solar gain.
Due to the solar exposure on the library façade, particularly on the roof area, it is Note 1 – As per the design temperature of the air-conditioning system or 30°C,
recommended that glazing areas should be kept to a minimum within the library whichever is greater.
facade to reduce the solar gains and subsequent cooling requirements. Methods of
reducing solar gains into the space by means of shading devices and integration Lighting Levels
with the façade design shall be investigated in detail design stage.
Minimum Lighting Working Plane
Infiltration Location
Levels (Lux) (mm)
The façades shall ensure that the external environment is controlled and the Offices 500 760
ingress of air is limited. Refer to section 3.8 of this report for further detail on the CAD Work Station 500 Task
building facades. The following figures shall be assumed for the purpose of the
thermal performance calculations: Conference Room 500 760
Elevators 200 Floor
Peak Infiltration Loads (i.e. for plant sizing)
Corridors 75 Floor
0.25 air change per hour Stairways 75 Floor
Washrooms 150 900
Mean Infiltration Loads (i.e. for purposes of seasonal energy calculations)
Control Rooms 500 Floor
<0.25 air change per hour Instrument Panels 500 1700
Consoles 500 760
Plantroom Locations
Back of Panels 100 900
Plantrooms have been located to minimise distribution runs. The library plantroom Dining Area (leisure, light 150 760
is located adjacent to the library at level 01. All primary ductwork distribution from environment)
the plantroom shall be routed through the level 01 car park space to the dedicated
mechanical services riser space. Service Area 300 900
Food Preparation / Kitchen 500 900
Design Criteria for Electrical Systems
Entrance Halls 200 Floor
Electrical Plant and Equipment will be selected to suit the appropriate Vertical Face of Switchgear 300 1700
environmental conditions for the location they are to be installed in. The Battery Room 300 Floor
environmental conditions for the project are defined as follows:
Telephone /IT Equipment Room 500 460
Average Monthly Plant Walkways, Stairs, Platforms 50 Floor

Maximum Daily
Location Normal Maximum Pump Rows, Valves, Manifolds 50 Ground
Peak (°C)
(°C)
Locker Room 100 Floor
Outdoors (Air) 45 50
Lavatory (Hammam) 200 Floor
Earth (Soil) 40 40
Indoors – well ventilated building 40 50
Indoors – air-conditioned See note 1 below See note 1 below
building
Non-ventilated enclosure 56 56
exposed to sun
Outside fresh air will be drawn from atmosphere via sand trap louvers to reduce
the occurrence of sand and dust ingress. Fresh outside air shall be ducted to each
3.4.5.2 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems air handling unit via a common air intake. The preferred location for fresh air
intake louvers is on the shaded north elevation of the library.
The cooling requirements for the library has been analysed by CoSA, Buro
Happold’s specialist computational simulation department. The peak sensible The air handling systems for the library shall also be equipped with CO2 sensors to
cooling load has been derived for these spaces based on information stated in monitor the level of occupancy in the space and reduce outside air quantities
section 6.04.01. The total cooling load for the library has been estimated to be accordingly down to a minimum of 800ppm.
1350 kW.
Exhaust air will discharge via sand trap louvers to the level 01 carpark area.
The proposed cooling solution for the library is to utilise constant volume air Exhaust air louvers shall be located at a minimum of 10 metres from the fresh air
handling units with room air temperature controlled by varying the chilled water intake to avoid short circuiting.
flow rate to the cooling coils, hence varying the supply air temperature. It is
estimated that a total of 4 re-circulating air handling units are required for the Two forms of supply air distribution for the constant volume system have been
library, one unit per floor. investigated. A high level induction system has been explored providing supply air
via high capacity diffusers at ceiling level. Air is supplied at typically 12-13oC and
The four re-circulating air handling units serving the library shall be located within induced with the room air to maintain comfort conditions. Supplying at this
the level 01 plantroom. Each unit will be of varying capacity, sized to suit the temperature also negates the need for additional reheat loads following the cooling
cooling requirements for each level. The library air handling units shall be complete & dehumidification process. The temperature differential associated with a high
with an outside air inlet damper, a 30% pre-filter, an 85% panel & bag filter, re- level induction system (supply air circa 12oC, exhaust circa 22oC) shall help to
circulating mixing box, cooling coil with access section, and electric re-heat coil. reduce plant capacity and duct distribution sizes.
Heat recovery shall be via two energy recovery wheels, a thermal wheel for
sensible heat recovery on the room side of the AHU and an enthalpy wheel on the Further design development will be required during the detail design phase to
intake/exhaust side of the AHU for sensible and latent heat recovery. determine the type, quantity and location of supply air diffusers to maintain the
desired room comfort conditions and optimum air distribution. Options to consider
Sound attenuators shall either be provided at the inlet and outlet of the supply and include supplying air around the column heads and bespoke air distribution
extract sections or shall be duct mounted depending upon available space. solutions for the project will be considered and investigated further.
Each fan shall within the air handling units shall operate on a constant air volume Exhaust air to the air handling units shall be extracted from the ceiling void via
basis but shall be provided with variable frequency drives (VFD’s) to assist in open bell mouths. The return air path can be via strategically located extract points
commissioning, maintain a constant positive pressure relationship between supply in the ceiling.
and extract and, to allow some future adjustment in the outside air ventilation
rate. The second option for constant volume supply air distribution is a displacement
ventilation system. Supply air at between 18-20°C would be delivered via low level
The units shall distribute air through ductwork co-ordinated with the building displacement terminals (typically floor swirl diffusers) utilising the floor void as a
structure and fabric. The primary duct routes from the plantroom to the library pressurised plenum. This air will be gently diffused and displaced by the heat given off from
shall be developed during the detail design phase however it is proposed that occupants and heat generating equipment. The air will rise to high level and will be extracted
horizontal distribution shall be primarily through the level 01 car park with vertical via strategically located extract points in the ceiling.
distribution to each level via riser space located along the south-east facade of the
library.
A floor displacement option is a low noise, architecturally integrated solution that
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each provides a greater degree of flexibility within the space. A displacement system
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy would however increase plant requirements and duct sizing due to the larger air
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire volumes associated with a smaller temperature differential between supply and
damper system shall be provided for the library. return air. A displacement system would also require a greater degree of re-heat
due to the higher supply air temperature associated with a displacement system.
Both options shall require further investigation including more detailed simulation techniques will be utilised further to determine the cooling loads for the
analysis of the system performance of both options during the detail design phase. development. The loads for the library have been estimated as follows:
Variable air volume may also be considered however it is felt due to the large • 1,350 kW
volumes and open plan nature of the library that the internal loads are unlikely to
fluctuate significantly enough to benefit the use of a VAV system. Chilled Water Distribution Network
Toilet Ventilation The chilled water to the library will be taken from the common primary circuit in
the service corridor fed from the energy centre.
The toilet core serving the library shall have a dedicated dirty extract system sized
to provide a minimum of 4 air changes per hour, as per Saudi Aramco standard Chilled water shall be circulated at 6.6/13.6oC (44oF/56oF).
SAES-K-001.
There shall be secondary pumped circuits to the library air handling units located
A run/standby twin fan unit shall be located within the level 01 gallery & retail within the level 01 library plantroom.
plantroom. The unit shall extract air from the toilet spaces via galvanised sheet
metal ductwork and ceiling extract grilles or slots. The toilet extract system shall The secondary pumped circuits will be divided into zones on a floor by floor basis in
exhaust via a common exhaust louvre in the vicinity of the level 01 plantroom. order to keep the pipe sizes manageable and to respond to variations in demand.
A supply air unit shall provide make-up air to the toilet core lobby areas via Each secondary pumped circuit will have duplicate run and standby pumps with
galvanised sheet metal ductwork and ceiling mounted supply air diffusers on each automatic changeover on failure with each pump sized for 100 percent of the
floor shall. This unit shall also be located within the level 01 gallery & retail maximum design duty. The secondary pumps will be inverter driven speed
plantroom. The distance between the fresh air intake and toilet exhaust shall be controlled pumps which will vary the flow of chilled water depending upon the
limited to a minimum of 10m. demand to allow significant energy savings at part load.
Ductwork shall be provided with automatic smoke and fire dampers at each
penetration of compartment walls and floors in accordance with the Fire Strategy Heating
Report and the Architect’s drawings. A centralized automatic smoke and fire In accordance with SAES-K-001 section 4.8.8.2 and the proposals for the Central
damper system shall be provided for the library. Energy Centre, it is proposed to provide electric re-heat coils within air handling
units. The use of electric re-heat is in line with convention within the Middle East
due to the relatively low heating loads and the un-availability of town’s mains
Chilled Water and Heat Rejection Systems piped natural gas for heating.
Central Cooling Plant Electric re-heat coils shall be provided with air flow switches and thermal cut-out
devices.
It is proposed that the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture development
is served from a central cooling plant. The cooling plant will be located in the level Acoustics and Vibration
0 energy centre to the north west of site adjacent to the cinema and auditorium
Acoustic and vibration control shall be provided for the building services
buildings.
installations. This shall include sound attenuators, duct and pipe velocities, diffuser
selections, terminal unit selections, vibration isolation etc. Internal and external
Chilled water will be distributed around the site to the individual buildings via the
noise levels resulting from building services equipment shall be in accordance with
service corridor which runs around the perimeter of the plaza at Level -01. Refer
recommendations of the Project Acoustical Consultant.
to the site services chapter for further details of this design.
The use of internal duct lining shall be kept to a minimum.
Estimated Cooling Loads
The following criteria used for the design of ventilation systems in accordance with
The schematic design cooling loads have been estimated using CoSA simulation
SAES-K-001:
results and bespoke spreadsheet analysis based on the design data stated in
6.04.01. During the design development computational thermal modelling
• Main Supply Ducts 10 m/s
• Branch Supply Ducts 7.5 m/s
• Main Extract Ducts 7.5 m/s
• Branch Extract Ducts 5 m/s.
Pipework velocities shall be sized in accordance with the following criteria:
• Pipes ≥ 150ø 2.0 m/s

• Pipes ≤ 100ø 1.5 m/s.
3.4.5.3 Public Health The HWS installation should minimise the length of dead legs. HWSR should be
taken as close to the draw off point as possible. The downstream dead leg from
Domestic Cold and Hot Water Distribution any TMV shall not exceed 2.0m and the complete length of the spur shall not
exceed 5.0m where possible. Where this is not possible the dead leg shall be trace
From the municipality mains, an incoming supply shall be connected to the mian heated to maintain the minimum circulation temperature specified.
potable water storage tank located within the level 0 energy centre. The main
potable supply is then boosted to high level tanks within the tower where it is then Each wash hand basin and shower shall be fitted with a thermostatic mixing valve,
gravity fed to the library and other spaces below Level 6. capable of balancing incoming water pressures. The thermostatic mixing valve shall
come complete with check valve and isolating valve plus strainers.
The domestic water storage will cover a one day (24 hour) interruption of the
municipal water supply.
Rain Water
Main distribution pipework and risers shall installed be copper pipework. Joints
shall be made by capillary type fittings containing lead free solder, or proprietary Rain water from roof areas will be collected by an internal and underground pipe
mechanical crimped fittings, compression joints shall be used only at final work system and discharged to main rain water network tanks located within the
connections. All pipework shall be insulated to meet or exceed the minimum level 0 energy centre. Rain water will be collected from the library roof at low level
energy code requirements. that will shall be sympathetic to the architectural solution. It is recommended that
each drained area have minimum of two primary outlets to safeguard against
The system will be designed to provide a minimum of 2 bar(g) at the most remote blockage.
outlet. Water piping will be sized in accordance with the following criteria:
Storm water drainage pipe work and roof drains will be designed to 250mm/hr
• Friction drop per meter of pipe shall not exceed 200 Pa/m. rainfall intensity as per Saudi Aramco standard SAES-M-100.
• Pipe velocity shall not exceed 2.0 meters per second.
• Minimum pipe size shall be 15mm, serving one plumbing fixture. Above Ground Foul Drainage
Shut-off valves will be provided to isolate the following: In the building a series of systems will be provided to transport foul and waste
drainage to the external drainage system. The internal network will collect waste
• Each vertical riser (stop cocks) and foul from floor drains, sinks, wash hand basins, and toilets using main vertical
• Each fixture in toilets (ballofix valves) pipe work in the risers to provide noise control and fire protection, as the pipe
• Each group of fixtures (stop cocks). work penetrates the fire barriers of the floor slabs with UPVC and MUPVC
connecting horizontally from the sanitary ware.
Hot Water Generation The foul drainage above ground system will be designed to meet the performance
requirements stated in Universal Plumbing Code (UPC), 2000 edition and Saudi
It is envisaged that there will be limited hot water requirements to the Library Aramco requirements.
which will be primarily for the toilet areas. Hot water supply to these areas shall be
through individual electric hot water heaters located above the false ceiling in the Generally, the following pipework materials shall apply:
respective areas. PVC-U or high density polyethylene soil pipework - above 50mm diameter
MuPVC waste pipework - 50mm diameter and below
The domestic hot water piping system shall be sized similarly to the cold water
system. The distribution system shall consist of a piping system which will connect Access will be provided on all vertical foul drainage stacks at 1200mm above each
hot water to all plumbing fixtures as required. Main distribution pipework and risers finished floor level, to the centreline of the access door and on horizontal pipework.
shall installed be copper pipework. Joints shall be made by capillary type fittings
containing lead free solder, or proprietary mechanical crimped fittings, A number of foul stacks shall be established to collect discharges from soil pipes.
compression joints shall be used only at final connections. All pipework shall be Where stacks are ventilated to the atmosphere, vents shall terminate at roof level,
insulated to meet or exceed the minimum energy code requirements. complete with all weather aprons/flashings at the roof penetration and vent
termination cowl.
Thermal insulation shall be provided to internal pipework to prevent the formation
of condensation. Vent termination cowls shall terminate no less than 900mm above
the top of any window or opening if within a horizontal distance of 3m.
Automatic air admittance valves shall be provided where appliances are remote
from the vertical stacks to prevent siphonage and to protect traps by allowing air
vertically and located in an accessible space suitable for maintenance and above
the flood level of the highest appliance.
The foul and vent pipework fittings shall be solvent or fusion welded throughout.
Bends used for stack offsets shall be large radius bends.
Traps for sinks and wash hand basins shall be tubular P style. Showers shall be
fitted with a self cleaning trap.
Floor drains will be provided in all toilets rooms having two or more WC’s or a
combination of one water closet and one urinal. Floor drains and floor sinks shall
be provided with trap primers to prevent loss of trap seals.
Elevator shafts will be provided with a sump pump and pit discharging to a holding
tank equipped with a high water alarm.
Grey Water System

Grey water service shall be provided from the Central Energy Centre.
A nominal 20m3 sectional GRP grey water tank shall be located in the Technical
Room in level 11 of the Tower Building. This shall act as a day storage and header
tank for the site wide grey water supply. This system shall provide water for toilet
and urinal flushing and, possibly for irrigation.
Grey water pipework shall be clearly identified to prevent any possible

contamination of potable water supply and human consumption.
Proximity shut-off shall be provided to all WC’s and urinals to avoid un-necessary
waste. This shall take the form of a solenoid valve, controlled by room PIRs.
3.4.5.4 Life Safety Systems Fire Control by Sprinklers
Pressurisation of Designated Escape Stairways
The designed solutions for life safety in the library will be a combination of services Electromagnetic Door Closures
equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems, automatic Smoke ventilation
fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge systems, refuge areas and fire
separation. IBC, IFC and NFPA codes 101 and 5000 will be used as the basis of the Stair Pressurisation and Smoke Extract
designs for this project. Refer to Section 3.4.8.5 for further details
The strategy for pressurisation for the libray is as follows:
Reference should be made to section 3.7 of this report produced by FEDRA, Buro
Happold’s specialist fire engineering consultants. Fire control systems within the • Each of the escape stairs is positively pressurised in the event of a fire. This
library are made up of detection and alarm systems, fire suppression systems and is accomplished by run / standby fans supplying air via fire rated ductwork.
fire management systems. Pressurisation is based upon NFPA 92.
• The fire fighting lift shaft shall be pressurised as best practice.

Emergency Generator Supply
Fire Fighting
Refer to Section 3.4.8
Fire protection systems will be required within the library in accordance with NFPA
13 and the local fire authority requirements. Communication Systems
Expected systems will be: A public address and voice alarm system will be provided to all areas of the
building, to provide high-intelligibility messages for purposes of both paging and
• Sprinkler systems to cover all areas. evacuation in the event of an emergency. Refer to Section 3.4.8 for further details.
• Hose reel to cover all areas.
• Wet landing valves to cover all areas. 3.4.5.5 Building Management Systems
• Fire Hydrant (external around the building)
Refer to Section 3.4.8 for further details.
Stand Pipe and Sprinkler Installation
The building will be provided with full sprinkler coverage to NFPA 13. A combined
system shall be provided to Ordinary Hazard Class Two with individual levels of
protection as per NFPA 13 & 14, 2007 Edition.
Under the NFPA 5000 a sprinkler system is required within the library and is to be
designed around NFPA 13.
Refer to the site services and fire engineering section of the report for further
detail.
Smoke Control
Smoke control is required for the library building. It is proposed that active smoke
control measures are used as follows:
Connection to the rising busbar systems will be via three pole and neutral (TPN)
Main Switchboard tap-off devices. This will permit the maintenance and/or isolation of individual floor
plate panels without affecting other floors.
A new low voltage (LV) electrical supply will be derived from one of the Central
Energy Centre substations and routed through to the Library building at level T-01. Dedicated multi-core, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), steel-wire armoured
The incoming supply cables will terminate in the Library building’s main LV (SWA) sub-mains cables will be provided to serve the elevator machinerooms
electrical switchboard. located on the top most floor of the Tower and sprinkler pumps.
The Library building’s total estimated electrical demand and electrical supply Secondary supply cables will also be provided to serve the life-safety equipment.
characteristics are as follows: These will be routed from the essential services section of the switchboard via a
separate riser to that of the primary supplies.
Phase Power Maximum
Voltage Frequency Floor Plate Power Distribution
Factor Demand
380/220V 3phase 4- 60Hz 0.8 750 kVA Each floor plate will be provided with two 380/220V distribution panels, one
±5% wire provided to serve the lighting loads of that floor and another to serve the small
power loads. These will be located in the central core electrical riser.
In addition to the main supply, a secondary “essential services” supply will be An underfloor power busbar and floor box system will be provided within the office
derived from the Energy Centre generator which will terminate in an essential floor plate to serve workstations and other office receptacles. These will be
services section of the main switchboard via an automatic change-over bus-coupler arranged at an appropriate grid arrangement to cater for various spacing
arrangement. This will provide emergency power backup to life safety systems iterations.
(discussed elsewhere) and other essential services.
A steel-wire cable tray (basket) system will also be provided on each floor plate
Metering will be provided at the main LV switchboard and shall cover the main within the raised floor void for routing of telecommunications Cat 6 UTP cabling.
incoming supply as well as each outgoing way excluding lifts supplies and fire Flexible steel conduits will extend from the cable tray to each individual tel/data
alarm panel supplies. All metering will be supplied with volt free contacts to allow outlet.
Generally, a floor box will be provided to serve one workstations and will comprise
The main LV switchboard will be provided with a motorised bus section switch to four 220V floor receptacles and four RJ45 tel/data (structured cabling) outlets.
split the essential and non-essential supplies. Control of these bus section breakers
will be carried out by the site wide control system in the event of a mains failure in Individual offices with partitions will be distributed to by using LSF (low smoke &
order to provide automatic changeover of supplies. fume) single core cables within steel trunking and conduits concealed in the
building fabric.
The main LV switchboard will incorporate power factor correction equipment to
achieve an optimum p.f. of 0.95 lagging. The power factor correction cubicles will Convenience receptacles will be provided throughout in restrooms, public spaces
form an extension to the main switchboard and contain staged correction and corridors.
equipment to respond to varying load requirements, to ensure that at all times the
power factor is at an optimum level. Single gang small power receptacles will also be provided for cleaning purposes.
These will generally be spaced at 20 metre intervals to allow for general cleaning
LV Distribution equipment cable radius.
The Library electrical distribution system will consist primarily of rising busbars Grounding/ Earthing System
routed from the main switchboard, through service risers located in the core of the
building, serving each floor of the Library. Two dedicated busbar systems will be A central grounding system will be provided for the entire project. A ground bus
provided, one serving separate lighting and power distribution panels and the other (earth bar) will be provided in each electrical room and tied to the main ground
serving mechanical services plant and control panels.
bus and structural steelwork at each location. A ground bus will be provided in
each telecommunications room.
Grounding connections will be provided to the following grounding electrodes:
• Main incoming water supply line

• Main incoming LPG pipeline
• Concrete-encased (Ufer) ground
• Structural steel reinforcement/concrete rebar
• Ground ring at main switchboard room.
A separate green ground conductor will be provided for cross bonding of raceways
(containment system).
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
A UPS system is proposed to maintain supplies to IT server and network cabinets.

This will be configured to provide N+1 redundancy.
The battery cubicles and UPS system will be sized on the basis of an uninterrupted,
autonomous supply for 10minutes duration. This will be sufficient to allow the
generator to be brought up to full load capacity and synchronised with the
essential electrical load. It is anticipated that the UPS will be of the rack-mounted
type located within the IT comms room cabinets at T05 floor level.
Batteries will also be configured in parallel arrangement to allow sets to be

removed for maintenance.
3.4.5.7 Lighting Lighting Control Systems
The main aim of the lighting design is to create both visually interesting and It is proposed that a fully digital addressable lighting control system will be
functional spaces, with an emphasis on human comfort and energy efficiency. The installed to provide for the maximum levels of energy savings and flexibility in the
lighting solution will produce a pleasant, interactive environment for the building installation.
occupants and provide sufficient illumination to undertake the required tasks.
Occupancy sensors (manual on, automatic off) will be provided in offices,
The type of lamp, luminaire and position of the fixtures will create different lighting conference rooms and similar locations where the number of fixtures justifies their
moods for the various spaces but with a similar appearance throughout. Users will use. All areas, especially public areas such as corridors and lobbies, will be
be provided with facilities to adjust lighting levels in specific areas of the building – controlled through the lighting control system and automatically switched based on
to suit the task they are undertaking or for comfort control. a preset, scheduled time clock capable of being over-ridden by local switches.
All interior, non-emergency lighting will be locally controllable and operated by
Generally, luminaires will utilise high frequency regulated control gear, comprising authorized personnel as the situation warrants.
a widely available protocol, such as DALI. Integral sensors will be provided in
relevant locations to facilitate the dimming of lighting levels to suit the external Where applicable, all rooms will be designed for dual-switching so that at least half
ambient lighting conditions. In addition, presence or absence detectors will be of the lights can be turned off. Day-lit areas of enclosed spaces will have controls
provided to gain maximum energy savings. This will assist in minimising the for at least half of the luminaires in the day-lit areas, as well as controls for the
electrical energy consumption by lighting apparatus and inherently reduce heat luminaires in each vertically day-lit area separately from the luminaires in each
loads within the building. horizontally day-lit area.
The lighting installation contributes significantly to the energy consumption of a
building and as such low energy sources will be used and controlled by a Areas such as conference rooms and public spaces will have specific lighting
centralised lighting control system. control and/or dimming requirements and these systems will be provided on a
localized, individual area basis, subject to audiovisual requirements.
Lamps will generally comprise of a combination of linear and compact fluorescent
sources with high quality colour rendering and a minimum colour temperature of The lighting control system will have a facility for night time “scene-setting” to
4000°K unless different colour temperatures are required by the client to certain enhance the appearance of the façade at night by controlling the internal
areas. The number of different lamp types will be kept to a minimum and every (background) lighting as required.
effort will be made to use the same wattage, colour rendering and temperature of
lamp types in different areas. Selected lamps should also ensure low energy
characteristics and long lamp life.
Corridor, public space, and elevator lobby lighting will be a combination of normal
and emergency lighting with approximately two-thirds of the lighting on normal
service and one-third on emergency service.
Lighting in enclosed stairs and exit signs will remain illuminated on a 24-hour basis
and will be served from the emergency system. Exterior emergency egress lighting
will be fluorescent or, in the case of HID, be served from a self-contained UPS
panel to eliminate restrike time.
3.4.5.8 Emergency Lighting The CCTV system will be provided with central monitoring via operators with
viewing screens, video recording facilities and camera controls within the security
The building will be provided with an emergency lighting system designed to control room.
provide a safe means of escape in the event of an emergency or the failure of the
normal lighting system. Escape lighting will be provided to all primary exit routes, Access Control
both internally and immediately outside each fire escape door. The escape signage,
where possible, will utilise LED lamps to minimise energy consumption and to A complete door access and entry system will be provided in the reception foyer
maximise lamp life. leading to the lift and circulation. It will include electronic clocking in terminals for
staff by means of proximity cards. Further levels of secured access will be provided
The emergency lighting will generally comprise maintained, self-contained/integral to restrict access to certain areas such as:
luminaires with three-hour battery back up. The batteries will be housed within the
luminaire body or where not possible, will be fitted in an agreed location adjacent • Security control room
to the luminaire. Where twin or multiple lamp luminaires are specified, one lamp • Energy centres and electrical switch rooms.
only will operate under emergency operation with reduced light output.
All equipment will be linked to stand alone PCs and will allow an attendance record
In some areas the emergency lighting may require to be provided from dedicated and general movement to be viewed at any one time. The PCs will be located in
LED emergency lights comprising self-contained battery units. The batteries will the control room with a link to the Aramco site-wide system.
have three hours autonomy.
Further discussions are required to develop the exit strategy from secured doors in
3.4.5.9 Security and Access Control the event of an emergency. Particularly connections to the fire alarm, where door
mechanisms failing safe, i.e. generally open on loss of power or fire alarm signal,
A security system will be provided to give coverage of the Library building, and will could be misused.
comprise three main elements:
Block purchase additional passes will be able to be allocated and assigned byt the
• CCTV security personnel on site without the need for involvement of the manufacturer
• Access control other than the occasional replenishment of passes.
• Intruder detection.
Intruder Detection
These main elements will be provided to all areas of the development, but will vary
in scope between each area. However, common control and monitoring will be An intruder detection and alarm system will be provided to give coverage of all
located within the security control room with a link to the building’s central entry and egress points of the Library building.
monitoring station.
The system will be controlled from a main panel located in the security control
The systems will be developed in close consultation with the client representatives room. The panel will be provided with a battery backed supply to enable
in detail at a later stage of the design. continuous operation in the event of a normal mains failure. The panel will
interface to a PC based graphical display system to give the operator real time
CCTV selectable control of the entire system. An associated printer will log and record all
security events.
The CCTV system will consist of a good quality, high definition colour CCTV The panel will have a tamper alarm which will operate when the cover or lid is
surveillance system, and will be sited at all access points to the administrative, removed.
back of house and public areas. The system will also include:
Internal colour cameras will be provided in areas deemed necessary by the client. • Door and window contacts for all protected and externally accessible areas
The clarity and level of camera resolution required will be discussed with the client • Passive infra red detectors in all protected areas
representatives in detail at a later stage of the design. • Fixed personal attack manual actuators (locations to be confirmed at a later
design stage)
• Audible alarm sounders.
Alarm sounders will be provided and will be fixed in locations to be agreed with the
client.
An automatic dialling facility will be supplied to provide remote indication of an
actuation of the intruder detection alarm at Saudi Aramco’s Main Security Control
Facility.
3.4.5.10 Data and Communications Systems

3.4.6 Museum Museum Galleries Class of Control Description
3.4.6.1 Design Criteria Galleries 1 and 2 – ASHRAE Type B Specification
External Design Conditions With this class of control the risks and benefits to museum collections are deemed
to be as follows; Moderate risk of mechanical damage to high vulnerability
Refer to section 3.4.2 artefacts, tiny risk to most paintings, most photographs, some artefacts, some
books and no risk to many artefacts and most books. Chemically unstable objects
Mechanical Internal Design Conditions unusable within decades, less if routinely at 30°C, but cold winter periods will
double life.
Control Set Point or Annual Average:
Temperature set between 15°C to 26°C

Relative Humidity 50%
Short Fluctuations Plus Space Gradients: +/-10% RH, +/-5°C
Seasonal Adjustments in System Set Point
Up 10% Down 10% RH, Up 10°C but not above 30°C, Down as low as necessary to
maintain RH control.
Notes: Gallery 3 – ASHRAE Type AA Specification

2. Humidity of fresh air will be controlled at the central plant. Humidity will not
be controlled within the spaces other than condensation on the fan coil unit With this class of control the risks and benefits to museum collections are deemed
cooling coil process to be controlled below 60% RH. Temperature control is to be as follows; No risk of mechanical damage to most artefacts and paintings.
the overriding mechanism and will provide a high degree of dehumidification. Some metals and minerals may degrade if 50% RH exceeds a critical relative
3. Museum Gallery 3 requires to be close controlled to protect and conserve humidity. Chemically unstable objects unusable within decades.
special artefacts. It is assumed that the class of control will be `AA’ as set
out in 1999 ASHRAE Applications Handbook. Control Set Point or Annual Average:
4. Museum Galleries 1 and 2 does not require close control; sensitive artefacts
will be kept purpose made display cabinets. These spaces still require Temperature set between 15°C to 26°C
reasonable environmental conditions still to protect artefacts. It is assumed Relative Humidity 50%
that the class of control will be `B’ as set out in 1999 ASHRAE Applications
Handbook. Occupancy is based on information provided by Lord Cultural Short Fluctuations Plus Space Gradients: +/-5% RH, +/-2°C
Resources. Estimated circulation space = gallery floor area / 3. Occupancy =
2.5m²/person x estimated circulation space. Seasonal Adjustments in System Set Point:
Relative humidity no change, Up 5°C Down 5°C.
Water Storage Design Criteria
The potable water demand has been based upon the following daily storage
recommendation:
Museum 20 litres / person

Fabric Electrical Services Criteria
The faced design is under development and is not finalised at this stage. If the The electrical system will be designed in accordance with NEC Wiring Regulations,
client would like the building to be assessed against the USGBC LEED criteria the Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards and applicable local codes. The electrical
building fabric must be constructed to a minimum standard. design will be based upon the following electrical supply criteria
Under the category of Energy and Atmosphere a prerequisite is that the building Low Voltage (LV) 380V/3 phase/60 Hertz
project must be designed to comply with mandatory and prescriptive requirements 220V/1 phase/60 Hertz
of ASHARE/IESNA 90.1-2004. This document sets out the minimum performance
criteria for the building fabric. Outgoing essential and non-essential submain cables/busbars from Substation ‘B’
will be run via the service corridor to a dedicated LV switchboard serving the
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 is used to establish the minimum level of energy Museum.
efficiency for the base building and systems. Improvements made on the minimum
or prerequisite are required to gain credits that to attain a LEED rating.
Infiltration
The façades shall ensure that the external environment is controlled and the
the thermal performance calculations:

Smaller volume areas <0.15 air change per hour

Plant Room Locations
Air handling unit plant rooms have been located to minimise distribution runs and
to facilitate connections to fresh air intake and exhaust louvres. For the Museum
this has resulted in plant rooms located at level 01 in the museum back of house
area.
It is proposed to locate the electric hot water calorifiers locally to toilet areas or
other hot water demands. Depending on the required load these will be located
within ceiling voids or small plant rooms.
3.4.6.2 Tenant Fit-out of Retail Spaces Chilled water
General The Landlord shall provide all cooling systems. The cooling system in non critical
back of house areas shall be provided by a number of fan-coil units. Each fan-coil
This section identifies the split between Landlord installed items and those unit shall be supplied with chilled water from the central chiller plant. The fan-coil
provided by the tenant. Section 3.4.6.3 identifies which HVAC systems are being unit system will be sized to cater for a predetermined cooling load. The cooling
proposed as the most suitable solution to provide environmental control and fresh load will include a lighting, equipment and occupancy load to be confirmed, this
air to a space. figure must not be exceeded by the Tenant.
The split between landlord and tenant spaces within the museum requires further The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the low velocity ductwork from the
clarification from the client. fan-coil units to the supply diffusers within the back of house spaces. Each fan-coil
unit shall have a maximum external static pressure of 75 Pa, the Tenant’s
In summary the anticipated HVAC design for the museum is based around the ductwork installation must not exceed this.
following systems;
The return air path to the fan-coil units and the general / smoke extract ductwork
• Gallery spaces All air constant volume systems with electric must be maintained at all times.
reheat.
• BOH close control areas All air constant volume systems with electric Depending on the fire engineering strategy the general HVAC system could be a
reheat. combined system that can also provides smoke extract. The tenant is responsible
• BOH non critical areas Fan coils, ducted fresh air and extract, specialist for ensuring that the air transfer arrangements are maintained at all times. The
extract systems. Landlord shall provide all extract air systems.
Each system is supplied with chilled water derived from a central chiller plant Should a combined general and smoke extract approach be adopted the extract
located in the energy centre. Chilled water will be supplied via a common primary ductwork shall be constructed of 2 hour fire rated duct and shall comprise of a
chilled water circuit by variable speed pumps, with two port valves controlling the motorised fire smoke damper that acts both to balance the general extract under
flow. normal conditions and motors open fully under fire conditions. The tenants shall
not modify or change the operation of the extract system.
The above system selections are proposed systems which still require further
coordination with the architect. The following sections discuss the selected In a fire situation in a particular area the damper will move to the fully open
systems. Where possible we have tried to incorporate energy conservation devices. position and any other branches on that same piece of ductwork will close thus
ensuring that there is only smoke extract from the shop unit which is in a fire
condition. At this point the normal extract fans will be by-passed and all the
HVAC extract will be via dedicated smoke extract fans. The ceiling void will act as an
extract air plenum and must be maintained as such at all times. The openings
It is currently proposed that the gallery spaces are to be fitted out with blanked off within the ceiling for smoke extract must meet the free air requirement stated by
duct connections from the central AHU plant, sprinklers, and a fused spur for the the fire engineer.
connection of power supplies. The landlord will provide the central air handling
units and associated ductwork. Due to the shell and core approach the tenant will This approach and element of system shall be further developed in coordination
be required to extend the ductwork to grilles and diffusers. Similarly the sprinklers with the architect and fire engineering strategy.
will require to be extended to suit the tenant’s ceiling installation.
Sprinklers
Power supplies will be extended to suit the lighting and any other tenant’s power
requirements. It is proposed that the galleries spaces are provided floor power The space will be sprinklered based on an open layout provided by the Landlord.
grid system. The system requires further development in the next design phase The sprinkler density will be designed to conform to NFPA-13, Light Hazard
and close coordination with the museum specialist and other disciplines. classification. Sprinkler heads shall be fully recessed, concealed type. A flow
switch, isolation valve and flow test connection shall be provided for each zone.
Maximum sprinkler zone shall not exceed 4830 m2 as per the requirements of
NFPA-13. All valves and flow switches will be wired to the building fire alarm Small power 15 W/m²
system. Lighting 20 W/m²
Mechanical 35 W/m²
The Tenant shall be responsible for extending or relocating of the sprinkler heads Total 75 W/m²
to suit the Tenants new ceiling layout. Additional heads required shall be provided
by the tenant. The level of essential power provision is subject to design development during the
next stage of the design.
The Tenant shall be responsible for submitting drawings and calculations of the
revisions and for certifying that the design and installation is in accordance with Lighting
the Saudi Aramco base building specification. The works shall be carried out by the
Base Building Sprinkler Sub-Contractor so that final design responsibility is The Tenant shall provide all lighting and self-contained emergency lighting within
maintained. the museum. Power for the lighting installation shall be taken from the Tenants
distribution boards. The heat gains from the lighting installation shall not exceed
Cold and Hot Water Services 20 W/m2 in gallery spaces.
The Landlord shall provide cold water supply to feed toilet areas and other fixtures Fire Alarms & Smoke Detection
within the museum. At this stage the split between the tenant and landlord in the
museum and back of house areas has not been defined. This information is The Landlord shall provide a fire alarm and smoke detection system comprising an
required from the client early in the next design phase. It may be necessary for addressable loop with sufficient detectors to protect the museum before it is fitted
each tenant to be provided with a capped off branch for future extension by the out.
tenant.
The Tenant shall provide additional detectors and loop cabling to modify the fire
The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the pipework to a sink etc in alarm detection system to suit the Tenants new layout.
accordance with the Saudi Aramco standards.
If the Tenant installs a ceiling system, the Tenant shall be responsible for co-
Hot water if required in the tenant space shall be generated by the tenant. Ceiling ordinating the ceiling and smoke detection installation so that the effectiveness of
hung or floor mounted point- of – use electric hot water heaters shall be provided the smoke detectors will not be compromised.
by the tenant.
Data
Drainage
The Landlord shall provide data points for connection into the Landlords telephone
The Landlord shall provide all below slab drainage capped connection and high and data network.
level vent for tenant use. The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the branch
inside his area and the above ground drainage from a sink or wash hand basin to Security
the drainage point in accordance with the Saudi Aramco standards.
The Tenant shall be responsible for the museum systems.
Small Power
The Landlord shall provide a sub-metered 3-phase non-essential and a 3-phase

essential incoming supplies terminating in wall mounted isolators at the rear of the
galleries and within the back of house area. In order to utilise the supply within the
museum, the Tenant shall provide a suitable distribution boards for connection to
the incoming supplies. The final circuit distribution, wiring sizes, provision of earth
leakage circuit breakers etc must be in accordance with the Saudi Aramco
standards.
The non-essential electrical load comprises:

3.4.6.3 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems systems to prevent fouling. It is even more important in museum applications as
effective filtration will preserve and minimise damage to artefacts. During the
Galleries and BOH Close Control Spaces design development stage the filtration level required and methods will be
investigated further. At this stage it is envisage that fine particulate and gaseous
The proposed air conditioning system for the gallery spaces is a constant-volume filtration will be required.
reheat system. Local zone duct mounted reheat batteries will be provided where
required. It is proposed that each gallery will have dedicated plant to improve For accurate control of museum environments the importance of a quality control
energy efficiency and controllability therefore duct mounted heater batteries may system cannot be exaggerated. For close control of +/-4% relative humidity,
not be required and is subject to further analysis. sensors with a guaranteed accuracy of at least +/-2% are necessary and the
characteristics of response time and hysteresis must be considered. The quality of
In many international institutions, terminal reheat is provided by steam or hot- control will determine the performance of the system. There are two types of
water coils located near or over collection spaces. This can cause chronic problems humidity sensor that meet this standard;
from steam and water leaks and can be avoided if properly applied. In Saudi
Arabia energy is relatively cheap therefore it is proposed to use electric heater • electrolytic resistor type,
batteries to avoid problems with water leaks.
• some thin film capacitor types.
It is currently envisaged that humidification will be required in the winter months
to control the specified gallery environmental design conditions. This will be
investigated further in the design development stage. Efficient zone-level The following diagram illustrates the control logic for the gallery display
humidification often suggests placing the humidifier downstream from the reheat environments to meet specified control parameters and to minimise energy
coil. The strategy of dedicated plant per gallery space, with a constant volume consumption:
reheat system, will allow reheat coils and humidifiers to be installed entirely within
the mechanical space, making the system more effective. If the reheat coil is duct
mounted and located near or over collection spaces, preventive maintenance on
humidifiers further complicates maintenance problems and increases the risk of
damage to artefacts from leaks in the system.
The Dhahran area of Saudi Arabia experiences extensive periods of high external
humidity levels. It is currently proposed to provide dedicated fresh air plant to
serve the galleries. The fresh air will be pre-treated to feed the gallery
environmental control air handling units. This approach allows for better control of
internal humidity levels at part load conditions when the outside air still poses a
significant dehumidification load. It is proposed to provide the minimum amount
for fresh air required for occupants and pressurising the gallery spaces. It is
important to minimise the level of fresh air delivered to the museum to help
control humidity levels and limit gaseous and particle pollutants.
It is proposed to use sensible heat recovery wheels within the AHU’s serving the
gallery spaces. The heat recovery wheel will transfer energy from the return air to
the supply air stream after the cooling coil to provide an element of reheat. It is
still proposed to install an electric heater battery as the thermal wheel cannot be
relied upon for the total reheat requirements of the system. As mentioned earlier
minimum fresh air will be provided therefore room air will be recycled through a
mixing box to make up the supply air required to the space. A mixing box is the
most efficient method of the heat recovery in air conditioning systems.
The AHU’s will include a series of filtration devices to minimise and remove
contaminants from the gallery spaces. Particulate filtration is important in all HVAC
contaminants associated with conservation and restoration works may be required.
Further clarification is required from the client and museum specialist consultant.
Toilet Supply and Extract
For economy of operation it is proposed that these will use transferred air from the
surrounding spaces for air make up together with separate extract system. This
approach will depend on the size of toilet areas where a dedicated make up air
system may be required if the toilets are too large to rely on transfer air.
Distribution Network
The chilled water to the building will be taken from the common primary circuit in
the service corridor fed from the energy centre.
Subject to clarification from the client the museum tenants will be responsible for
maintaining their side of the system and will have to adhere to various parameters
set by the landlord.
Chilled water flow control to air handling unit cooling coils and fan coil units will be
provided by two-port modulating control valves. The primary pumps will be
inverter driven speed controlled pumps which will vary the flow of chilled water
depending upon the demand.
BOH Offices and Administration Areas
It is proposed that these spaces will be served by dedicated fresh air AHU’s to treat
incoming fresh air. The fresh air supply units will be link tot eh exhaust air stream
by suitable heat recovery devices. Fan coil units will be installed to control space
temperature.
Back of House Areas Air handling Systems
It is anticipated that these areas will consist of a number of store rooms, specialist
areas and possibly workshops. It is proposed therefore to serve these areas from a
dedicated fresh air plant and fan coil system. Specialist exhaust systems to remove
Domestic Cold and Hot Water Distribution Rain Water
The space will be served by cold water supply fed from water storage tanks on Rain water from roof areas will be collected by an internal and underground pipe
Level T11. The supply will be by gravity. work system and discharged to MPW rain water network. Rain water will be
collected from the roof area via a number of down pipes. It is recommended that
Hot Water Generation each drained area have minimum of two primary outlets to safeguard against
blockage.
It is envisaged that there will be limited hot water requirements to the museum
which will be mainly associated with toilets. Hot water supply to these areas shall Storm water drainage pipe work and roof drains will be designed to 10” per hour (250mm/hr)
be through individual electric hot water heaters located above the false ceiling in rainfall intensity.
the respective areas or small plant rooms.
Above Ground Foul Drainage
Individual tenants shall provide and install their own electric water heaters to
satisfy their requirements. The drainage strategy is described in site services section.
Centralized hot water generation verses the point-of –use system was evaluated
but due to the distributed location of the washrooms, the central system was not
viable.
The following table identifies the advantages / disadvantages of the various
options.
Hot Water Advantages Disadvantages

Generation Method
Centralised • Lowest total plant • System has to operate at
Generation area high static pressure due to
• Best opportunity for building height
utilising solar water • Large diameter distribution
heating pipework required
• Can apply diversity • Distribution energy losses
across entire building
Distributed • Reduced distribution • Limited diversity can be
Generation network / pressures provided
• Easier to identify hot • Highest plant space
water usage patterns in requirement
the large complex
Local Generation • No central plant room • High maintenance as such

(in ceiling voids required units will typically have a
etc) • No distribution network limited life span
required • Pressure relief is awkward
• Water heaters operate to provide in an obvious,
at low static head safe place in hotel rooms
• No diversity can be
provided
3.4.6.5 Life Safety Systems The fire alarm panels will allow easy identification of the alarm signal via an
alphanumeric interface which will identify the area, level, zone and type of alarm
The designed solutions for life safety in the building will be a combination of signal, e.g. smoke detector, heat detector, break glass manual station, etc. The
services equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems, mechanical services and ventilation systems will be interlocked where necessary
automatic fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge systems, refuge with a local override panel for fire brigade use in the building.
areas and fire separation. The codes set out in the Saudi Aramco standards and
fire engineered solutions will be used as the basis of the designs for this project. The fire alarm and evacuation system will operate in accordance with a strategy
agreed with Saudi Aramco in the event of a fire alarm.
Fire control systems are made up of detection and alarm systems, fire suppression
systems and fire management systems. The alarm system will be interfaced with a voice evacuation system within large
public areas of the development. Corridors within the museum will have combined
Fire Detection and Alarm systems comprise: detectors and sounder bases. It is recommended that a scheme is developed for an
evacuation strategy.
• Smoke and heat detection in all areas of the building
• Manual call points Voice Evacuation
Fire Suppression systems comprise: which shall cover all public areas and general staff back of house areas to give
• Automatic sprinkler systems
• Fire standpipe and hose systems Emergency messages will be pre-recorded onto voice integrated circuits and
• Mist and gaseous extinguishing systems in specific areas broadcast in at least 2 different languages. The exact composition of the messages
and the number of broadcast languages will be agreed during the design
Fire Management systems comprise: development stage.
• Smoke management systems The content of the voice alarm shall be determined by Saudi Aramco in
• Pressurisation systems consultation with the local authorities having jurisdiction. There will also be an
• Emergency electric power systems override facility and zoning control from the main fire control room to allow
• Automatic elevator recall systems additional alarms or zones to be activated and voice messages sent.
• Communication and alarm notification systems
• A central fire command centre. Fire Suppression Systems
Fire Fighting
Fire Detection and Alarm systems
Fire protection systems will be required in accordance with the Saudi Aramco
An analogue addressable fire alarm system will be provided to give comprehensive standard requirements.
coverage to the whole of the building. All areas will be provided with manual call
points and automatic heat and smoke detectors to suit the requirement of the
codes set out in the Saudi Aramco standards. Expected systems will be:
The fire alarm system will be wired in fire resistant cabling to satisfy the ‘Standard’ • Sprinkler systems to cover all areas.
cable requirements of Saudi Aramco. All loops will be permanently monitored to • 25 mm diameter hose reel to cover all areas.
detect any damage at an early stage. Fire alarm cabling will be segregated and • 65 mm diameter wet landing valve to cover all areas.
installed on a separate tray system to the other electrical containment systems or • Fire Hydrant (external around the building).
clipped direct to the building fabric, whichever is the most appropriate. • Foam system to protect diesel generators.
• FM-200 / Clean Agent System to protect electrical low-tension room.
Stand Pipe and Sprinkler Installation evacuation in the event of an emergency. Both the fire and voice alarm systems
The building will be provided with full sprinkler coverage to codes set out in the
Saudi Aramco standards. A combined system shall be provided. In the event of a fire signal being received by the fire alarm system, the alert or
evacuation alarm will be signalled by a recorded message played over a system of
The fire storage tank will be located within the energy centre. Duty and standby loudspeakers. These will be located throughout the building, with a loudspeaker in
pumps (one of them will be diesel driven) will be supported by pressure every space. This system will be equipped with an amplifier rack together with a
maintaining jockey pump. “hot standby” amplifier in each rack. The equipment racks for the project will be
networked together with a bi-directional data loop on a peer-to peer basis to
The building will be subdivided into a series of fire protection zones; the area of ensure the system will continue to fully function in the event of damage to one leg
each zone will be limited to the code dictated in the Saudi Aramco standards. of the network. A fireman’s microphone will be located at each rack and also at
the building security room which will be at a main entrance to be agreed.
In addition to the requirements for the voice alarm system, the system will also
Smoke Control function for purposes of public address. Microphones will be provided in areas to
be defined. Paging zones will be selectable from the paging microphone. Paging
Smoke control is required for this type of building. Depending on the fire messages will be preceded by a paging tone.
engineering strategy which is currently under development, active smoke control
measures could be as follows: A two way fire department communication system will also be provided for the
exclusive use of the civil defence / Saudi Aramco site fire fighters to permit liaison
Fire Control by Sprinklers with the fire control centre personnel.
Pressurisation of Designated Escape Stairways
Electromagnetic Door Closures The fire fighting command centre will contain:
Smoke ventilation from atria
Stair Pressurisation and Smoke Extract • Fire department communication systems controls
The fire engineering strategy will determine if stair is required. If required the • Elevator status indications
system will basically consist of the following: • Sprinkler valve and water flow status indication
• Each of the escape stairs is positively pressurised in the event of a fire. This • Fire pump status indication
is accomplished by run / standby fans supplying air via fire rated ductwork. • Controls for HVAC system interfaces
• Telephone for fire department use
All main electrical plantrooms, server rooms and areas with water sensitive
equipment will be provided with a gaseous fire suppression system to Saudi
Aramco standards. It is envisaged that these will be Inergen systems or similar in
occupied rooms, with carbon dioxide in unoccupied ones. Where such a system is
provided, rapid extract ventilation and pressure relief flaps will be provided.
Communication Systems

3.4.7 Plaza and Public Spaces ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 is used to establish the minimum level of energy
efficiency for the base building and systems. Improvements made on the minimum
3.4.7.1 Design Criteria or prerequisite are required to gain credits that to attain a LEED rating.
External Design Conditions Infiltration
Refer to section 3.4.2. The façades shall ensure that the external environment is controlled and the
Mechanical Internal Design Conditions the thermal performance calculations:


Plant Room Locations
Notes: Air handling unit plant rooms have been located to minimise distribution runs and
1. Humidity of fresh air will be controlled at the central plant. Humidity will not to facilitate connections to fresh air intake and exhaust louvres. Plant rooms have
be controlled within the spaces other than condensation on the fan coil unit been strategically located at level 01 in the plaza to serve the plaza general area,
cooling coil process to be controlled below 60% RH. Temperature control is kitchen, retail area, and childrens area.
the overriding mechanism and will provide a high degree of dehumidification.
It is proposed to locate the electric hot water calorifiers locally to toilet areas or
Water Storage Design Criteria other hot water demands. Depending on the required load these will be located
within ceiling voids or small plant rooms.
The potable water demand has been based upon the following daily storage
recommendations:
Electrical Services Criteria
Museum (excl. staff) 6 litres / person
Admin 40 litres / person The electrical system will be designed in accordance with NEC Wiring Regulations,
Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards and applicable local codes. The electrical
Fabric design will be based upon the following electrical supply criteria
The facade design is under development and is not finalised at this stage. If the Low Voltage (LV) 380V/3 phase/60 Hertz
client would like the building to be assessed against the USGBC LEED criteria the 220V/1 phase/60 Hertz
building fabric must be constructed to a minimum standard.
Outgoing essential and non-essential submain cables/busbars from the Energy
Under the category of Energy and Atmosphere a prerequisite is that the building Centre will be run via the service corridor to a dedicated LV switchboard serving
project must be designed to comply with mandatory and prescriptive requirements the Plaza.
of ASHARE/IESNA 90.1-2004. This document sets out the minimum performance
criteria for the building fabric.
3.4.7.2 Tenant Fit-out of Retail Spaces Chilled water
General The Landlord shall provide all cooling systems. The cooling system in each Retail
Unit shall be provided by a number of fan-coil units. Each fan-coil unit shall be
This section identifies the split between Landlord installed items and those supplied with chilled water from the central chiller plant. The fan-coil unit system
provided by the tenant. The split between landlord and tenant spaces within the will generally be sized to cater for a load of approximately 135 -150 W/m². The
plaza requires further clarification from the client. cooling load includes a lighting load of 90 W/m² and an equipment load of 15
W/m² and an occupancy load of 20 W/m² this figure must not be exceeded by the
Each system is supplied with chilled water from a central chiller plant located in the Tenant. The client should assess if this allowance is suitable prior to
energy centre. Chilled water will be supplied via a common primary chilled water commencement of the next design phase so that any change in allowance can be
circuit by variable speed pumps, with two port valves controlling the flow. incorporated.
HVAC The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the low velocity ductwork from the
fan-coil units to the supply diffusers within the Retail Unit. Each fan-coil unit shall
In the retail area cooling will be provided by fan coil units installed by the tenant. have a maximum external static pressure of 75 Pa, the Tenant’s ductwork
At present there is provision for a fresh air unit to serve the retail area. An installation must not exceed this.
alternative is to provide the retail units will each be provided with a general extract
system only which pulls the fresh air into the shop unit through dedicated air The return air path to the fan-coil units and the general / smoke extract ductwork
transfer arrangements provided in their shop frontages. Depending on the fire must be maintained at all times.
engineering strategy this can be a combined system that can also provide smoke
extract. The tenant is responsible for ensuring that the air transfer arrangements Sprinklers
are maintained at all times. The Landlord shall provide all extract air systems.
The Landlord shall provide a sprinkler system to protect the Retail Unit prior to
Should a combined general and smoke extract approach be adopted the extract Tenant fit-out. The Landlords sprinkler system shall be as detailed on the design
ductwork shall be constructed of 2 hour fire rated duct and shall comprise of a drawings and in the performance specification.
motorised fire smoke damper that acts both to balance the general extract under
normal conditions and motors open fully under fire conditions. The tenants shall The Landlord’s sprinkler system shall comprise a monitored zone isolation valve,
not modify or change the operation of the extract system. together with a sprinkler pipework system and upright sprinkler heads. The
Landlord’s sprinkler installation shall leave provision for future extension of the
In a fire situation in a particular shop unit the damper will move to the fully open Landlord’s system by the Tenant, to ceiling mounted sprinkler heads.
position and any other branches on that same piece of ductwork will close thus
ensuring that there is only smoke extract from the shop unit which is in a fire The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the sprinkler system to suit the
condition. At this point the normal extract fans will be by-passed and all the Tenants new ceiling layout. The Tenant shall use either concealed sprinkler heads
extract will be via dedicated smoke extract fans. The ceiling void will act as an or recessed sprinkler heads.
extract air plenum and must be maintained as such at all times.
The Tenant shall be responsible for submitting drawings and calculations of the
Currently the shop units are to be fitted out with fan coils, sprinklers, and a fused revisions and for certifying that the design and installation is in accordance with
spur for the connection of power supplies. Due to the shell and core approach the Saudi Aramco standards and the base building specification. The works shall be
tenant will be required to extend the ductwork from the fan coil unit to tenant carried out by the Base Building Sprinkler Sub-Contractor so that final design
provided grilles and diffusers. Similarly the sprinklers will require to be extended responsibility is maintained.
to suit the tenant’s ceiling installation.
Boosted Cold Water Service
Power supplies will be extended to suit the lighting and any other tenant’s power
requirements. The Landlord shall provide a boosted cold water installation to give the possibility
of connecting to each of the shop units. Each tenant will be provided with a
capped off branch for future extension by the tenant.
The Tenant shall be responsible for extending the pipework to a sink etc in ordinating the ceiling and smoke detection installation so that the effectiveness of
accordance with local regulations. the smoke detectors will not be compromised.
Drainage Data
The Landlord shall provide all below slab drainage installations (Main Pipe). The The Landlord shall provide data points for connection into the Landlords telephone
Tenant shall be responsible for extending the branch inside his area and the above and data network.
ground drainage from a sink or wash hand basin to the drainage point in
accordance with local regulations. Security
Small Power The Tenant shall be responsible for the Retail Units Security systems.
The Landlord shall provide a sub-metered 3-phase non-essential and a 3-phase

essential incoming supplies terminating in wall mounted isolators at the rear of the
unit. The size of the supply varies according to the size of the unit. In order to
utilise the supply within the Retail Unit, the Tenant shall provide suitable
distribution boards for connection to the incoming supplies. The final circuit
distribution, wiring sizes, provision of earth leakage circuit breakers etc must be in
accordance with the Saudi Aramco standards.
The non-essential electrical load comprises:
Small power 20 W/m²

Lighting 30 W/m²
Mechanical 35 W/m²
Total 85 W/m²
The level of essential power provision is subject to design development during the
next stage of the design.
Lighting
The Tenant shall provide all lighting and self-contained emergency lighting within
the Retail Unit. Power for the lighting installation shall be taken from the Tenants
distribution board. The heat gains from the lighting installation shall not exceed 30
W/m2.
Fire Alarms & Smoke Detection
The Landlord shall provide a fire alarm and smoke detection system comprising an
addressable loop with sufficient detectors to protect the Retail Unit before it is
fitted out.
The Tenant shall provide additional detectors and loop cabling to modify the fire
alarm detection system to suit the Tenants new layout.
If the Tenant installs a ceiling system, the Tenant shall be responsible for co-
3.4.7.3 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems 1. No smoke extract is required from the kitchens as long as the kitchens have
2 hr compartmentation. This design philosophy will need to be clarified in the
Plaza – General & Cafeteria next design phase as the project develops.
The plaza area is a large volume space therefore it is proposed to cool this space 2. The servery and cafeteria sitting area will require smoke extract. The kitchen
using central all air constant volume systems. Air handling units will be located at extract and smoke extract ducts are to be fire rated. A control regime,
level 01 and will provide fresh air and exhaust air through the plaza roof. Further provided by the landlord, operates smoke control dampers in the general
coordination is required with the architects during the next stage to develop a extract where there is a common smoke extract system, to ensure that all
suitable louvre arrangement with the landscaping. The constant volume AHU’s will the extract is taken from the restaurant on fire, in a fire condition. The
control room air temperature by varying the chilled water flow rate to the cooling tenant shall ensure that the resistance to air flow caused by the connection
coils, hence varying the supply air temperature. Fresh air quantities will be of ductwork does not exceed the following:
controlled with CO2 sensors depending on occupancy. Air will be supplied via high
capacity swirl diffusers. Return air to the air handling units will be extracted from Kitchen canopies 350 Pa (allowing for dirty filters)
the roof void via open bell mouths. Fresh air will be delivered to the plaza via the Supply/extract ductwork 125 Pa
re-circulating AHU’s using a mixing chamber within the units. It is proposed to use
a total heat recovery wheel on the fresh air intake. The desiccant part of the heat All kitchen canopies shall be provided with an Ansul type fire extinguishing system
wheel will transfer moisture from the fresh air supply to the exhaust air stream by the tenant.
providing an element of dehumidification before entering the mixing chamber.
Another sensible heat only recovery wheel will provide an element of reheat after Children’s Area
the cooling coil by transferring heat from the exhaust air stream. This process will
aid in improving the performance of the first total heat recovery wheel by lowering It is anticipated that these areas will consist of a number of specialist areas and
the temperature of the exhaust air. possibly workshops. It is proposed therefore to serve these areas from a dedicated
fresh air plant and fan coil system. Specialist exhaust systems to remove
A variable air volume system could potentially have considerable fan energy contaminants associated with workshops may be required. This area of the Plaza
savings at part load conditions compared to a constant volume system. The requires further development by the architect.
proposal for using a constant volume is partly due to the ventilation strategy for
the kitchen and cafeteria area. It will be difficult to inhibit the spread of odours Toilet Supply and Extract
from the kitchen and cafeteria within the plaza if a VAV system is adopted.
For economy of operation it is proposed that these will use transferred air from the
Kitchen surrounding spaces for air make up together with separate extract system. This
approach will depend on the size of toilet areas where a dedicated make up air
It is assumed that the kitchen and cafeteria will adopt a shell and core approach system may be required if the toilets are too large to rely on transfer air.
however this needs further clarification from the client. The Landlord shall provide
a fresh air supply system air handling unit. The unit will supply make up air tot eh
kitchen. A dedicated kitchen extract system will be provided by the Landlord.
The fresh air supply air duct will be capped off at high level at the boundary of the
kitchen for future extension to suit the tenants fitting out requirements. The fresh
air can be ducted by the tenant to serve both the restaurant and the servery area.
It is recommended that a large proportion of the air supplied to the servery is
transferred, via louvres or transfer grilles to the kitchen for exhaust to
atmosphere. The actual configuration of the ductwork serving the restaurant and
kitchen must be designed by the tenant to suit fitting out requirements.
Until further development of the fire engineering it is assumed that the

requirement for smoke extract is as follows:
water usage patterns in requirement
the large complex
Domestic Cold and Hot Water Distribution
The space will be served by cold water supply fed from water storage tanks on Local Generation • No central plant room • High maintenance as
Level T11. The supply will be by gravity. (in ceiling voids required such units will typically
etc) • No distribution network have a limited life span
Potable Water Storage required • Pressure relief is
• Water heaters operate awkward to provide in an
24 hours water storage has been provided for the development. Given the at low static head obvious, safe place in
requirements for potable water storage the following water storage strategy is hotel rooms
proposed at low level: • No diversity can be
provided
Tanks will be formed in concrete and lined with butyl rubber sheeting or similar. Rain Water
They shall be complete with access hatches, and internal and external ladders.
Further investigation shall be required of the local water supply, but it is envisioned Rain water from roof areas will be collected by an internal and underground pipe
that the supply shall be chemically treated, with chlorine dioxide or similar. work system and discharged to MPW rain water network. Rain water will be
collected from the roof area via a number of down pipes. It is recommended that
Hot Water Generation each drained area have minimum of two primary outlets to safeguard against
blockage.
It is envisaged that there will be limited hot water requirements to the plaza with
the exception of the kitchen. Other hot water demands will be mainly associated Storm water drainage pipe work and roof drains will be designed to 2.5 inch per hour
with toilets. Hot water supply to these areas shall be through individual electric hot (65mm/hr) rainfall intensity.
water heaters located above the false ceiling in the respective areas or small plant
rooms. The kitchen will be provided with a dedicated centralised electrical hot
water calorifier. Above Ground Foul Drainage
Individual tenants shall provide and install their own electric water heaters to In the building a series of systems will be provided to transport foul and waste
satisfy their requirements. drainage to the external drainage system. The internal network will collect waste
and foul from floor drains, sinks, wash hand basins, and toilets using main vertical
The following table identifies the advantages / disadvantages of the various pipe work in the risers to provide noise control and fire protection, as the pipe
options. work penetrates the fire barriers of the floor slabs with UPVC and MUPVC
connecting horizontally from the sanitary ware.
Hot Water Advantages Disadvantages
The foul drainage above ground system will be designed to meet the performance
Generation Method
requirements stated in the Saudi Aramco standards.
Centralised • Lowest total plant • System has to operate
Generation area at high static pressure The foul drainage pipe work system will be designed based on a primary ventilated
• Best opportunity for due to building height stack or modified primary ventilated stack arrangement.
utilising solar water • Large diameter
heating distribution pipework
• Can apply diversity required
across entire building • Distribution energy
losses
Distributed • Reduced distribution • Limited diversity can be
Generation network / pressures provided
• Easier to identify hot • Highest plant space
3.4.7.5 Life Safety Systems The fire alarm panels will allow easy identification of the alarm signal via an
alphanumeric interface which will identify the area, level, zone and type of alarm
The designed solutions for life safety in the building will be a combination of signal, e.g. smoke detector, heat detector, break glass manual station, etc. The
services equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems, mechanical services and ventilation systems will be interlocked where necessary
automatic fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge systems, refuge with a local override panel for fire brigade use in the building.
areas and fire separation. The codes set out in the Saudi Aramco standards and
fire engineered solutions will be used as the basis of the designs for this project. The fire alarm and evacuation system will operate in accordance with a strategy
agreed with Saudi Aramco in the event of a fire alarm.
systems and fire management systems. The alarm system will be interfaced with a voice evacuation system within large
public areas of the development. Corridors within the museum will have combined
Fire Detection and Alarm systems comprise: detectors and sounder bases. It is recommended that a scheme is developed for an
evacuation strategy.
• Manual call points Voice Evacuation
Fire Suppression systems comprise: which shall cover all public areas and general staff back of house areas to give
• Fire standpipe and hose systems Emergency messages will be pre-recorded onto voice integrated circuits and
• Mist and gaseous extinguishing systems in specific areas broadcast in at least 2 different languages. The exact composition of the messages
Fire Management systems comprise: development stage.
• Smoke management systems The content of the voice alarm shall be determined by Saudi Aramco in
• Pressurisation systems consultation with the local authorities having jurisdiction. There will also be an
• Emergency electric power systems override facility and zoning control from the main fire control room to allow
• Automatic elevator recall systems additional alarms or zones to be activated and voice messages sent.
• Communication and alarm notification systems
• A central fire command centre. Fire Suppression Systems
Fire Fighting
Fire Detection and Alarm systems
Fire protection systems will be required in accordance with the Saudi Aramco
An analogue addressable fire alarm system will be provided to give comprehensive standard requirements.
coverage to the whole of the building. All areas will be provided with manual call
points and automatic heat and smoke detectors to suit the requirement of the
codes set out in the Saudi Aramco standards. Expected systems will be:
The fire alarm system will be wired in fire resistant cabling to satisfy the ‘Standard’ • Sprinkler systems to cover all areas.
cable requirements of Saudi Aramco. All loops will be permanently monitored to
detect any damage at an early stage. Fire alarm cabling will be segregated and • 25 mm diameter hose reel to cover all areas.
installed on a separate tray system to the other electrical containment systems or
clipped direct to the building fabric, whichever is the most appropriate. • 65 mm diameter wet landing valve to cover all areas.
• Fire Hydrant (external around the building).

• Foam system to protect diesel generators.
Communication Systems
• FM-200 / Clean Agent System to protect electrical low-tension room.
evacuation in the event of an emergency. Both the fire and voice alarm systems
Stand Pipe and Sprinkler Installation will be from the same manufacturer and form an integrated system.
The building will be provided with full sprinkler coverage to codes set out in the In the event of a fire signal being received by the fire alarm system, the alert or
Saudi Aramco standards. A combined system shall be provided. evacuation alarm will be signalled by a recorded message played over a system of
loudspeakers. These will be located throughout the building, with a loudspeaker in
The fire storage tank will be located within the energy centre. Duty and standby every space. This system will be equipped with an amplifier rack together with a
pumps (one of them will be diesel driven) will be supported by pressure “hot standby” amplifier in each rack. The equipment racks for the project will be
maintaining jockey pump. networked together with a bi-directional data loop on a peer-to peer basis to
ensure the system will continue to fully function in the event of damage to one leg
The building will be subdivided into a series of fire protection zones; the area of of the network. A fireman’s microphone will be located at each rack and also at
each zone will be limited to the code dictated in the Saudi Aramco standards. the building security room which will be at a main entrance to be agreed.
Fire Management Systems In addition to the requirements for the voice alarm system, the system will also
function for purposes of public address. Microphones will be provided in areas to
Smoke Control be defined. Paging zones will be selectable from the paging microphone. Paging
messages will be preceded by a paging tone.
Smoke control is required for this type of building. Depending on the fire
engineering strategy which is currently under development, active smoke control A two way fire department communication system will also be provided for the
measures could be as follows: exclusive use of the Fire Department / Saudi Aramco site fire fighters to permit
liaison with the fire control centre personnel.
Fire Control by Sprinklers
Pressurisation of Designated Escape Stairways The fire fighting command centre will contain:
Electromagnetic Door Closures
Smoke ventilation from atria • Voice fire alarm system panels and controls
Stair Pressurisation and Smoke Extract • Fire department communication systems controls
The fire engineering strategy will determine if stair is required. If required the • Fire detection and alarm system panels
system will basically consist of the following:
• Each of the escape stairs is positively pressurised in the event of a fire. This is
accomplished by run / standby fans supplying air via fire rated ductwork.
All main electrical plantrooms, server rooms and areas with water sensitive • Controls for HVAC system interfaces
equipment will be provided with a gaseous fire suppression system to Saudi
Aramco standards. It is envisaged that these will be Inergen systems or similar in • Control interfaces for all floor dampers
occupied rooms, with carbon dioxide in unoccupied ones. Where such a system is
provided, rapid extract ventilation and pressure relief flaps will be provided. • Telephone for fire department use
Refer to Ssection 3.4.8.6

3.4.8 Site Services HV Switchboard ‘B’ provides supplies to transformers serving LV Substation ‘B’
(13.8kV/ 380V) which serves the Museum and the Great Hall.
3.4.8.1 Central Energy Centre
The final electrical system and configuration will be subject to further detailed
The Energy Centre is located in Level -1 below the library and the Oasis ie Option assessment during the next stage of the design. The following will require
1. An alternate location (option 2) which is adjacent to the truck dock has also agreement with Saudi Aramco:
been proposed. Both locations are viable but the economics of one over the other a. The capacity (and number) of the HV feeders to serve the electrical demand
is to be studied by the cost consultant .The preferred location is Option 1. Layouts of the Cultural Centre.
of both options have been presented in the report. Preliminary electrical load calculations for the buildings/facilities (excluding
specialist theatrical loads for the Auditorium and Great Hall) indicate an overall
The Energy Centre houses the following services. maximum demand (diversified) of 7,378 kVA. This will be within the 10,000 kVA
rated capacity of the 2 proposed feeders, as Saudi Aramco report (ref # S.O.
1. Incoming HV Switch Room ‘A’ 387/713-700/001 dated April 2008).
2. Dedicated MV Chiller Switchboard (4.16 KV) to serve the plant and chiller Based on the Theatre Projects report (theatrical consultant), the estimated
pumps/mechanical plant MCC. electrical load requirements for specialist theatre/exhibition equipment (excluding
3. LV Substation ‘A’ general lighting and HVAC is in the order of 3,000 kVA. The additional loads
4. Chiller Plant increases the overall power requirements beyond the 10,000 kVA capacity of the
5. Emergency Generator Supply proposed feeders. The t operational requirements and frequency of hosting
6. Potable water storage tanks and transfer pumps shows/exhibition with consideration/options to support specific electrical demand of
7. Storm water collection tank such events from temporary mobile generators in order to manage and reduce
8. Raw water storage tanks for landscaping use, cooling tower make-up permanent built-in infrastructure.
and toilet flushing.
9. Diesel storage tank and transfer pumps b. Options for diverse underground routes of the incoming HV feeders to the
10. Fire water storage tanks and fire pumps. MV switchboards for enhanced security of the electricity supply.
11. Engineer’s Office/BMS room
Dedicated MV Chiller Switchboard (4.16 KV) to serve the plant and chiller
The above services are described in greater detail in the succeeding sections. pumps/mechanical plant MCC
The minimum height required in the Energy Centre is 6 m. This is to allow Supplies from HV switchboard ‘A’ will be provided to chillers, chiller pumps and
clearance for the chiller compressor removal, and also to accommodate the water mech plant as follows:
tanks. Dedicated 2 x 2000kVA 13.8kV/ 4.16kV transformers will serve the Chiller MV
switchboard.
Incoming HV Switch Room A Dedicated 2 x 1000kVA 13.8kV/ 480V transformers will serve the chiller pumps
and mech plant MCC.
The primary electrical power to the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture
will be derived from Saudi Aramco North Park substation under a separate package LV Substations
of works outside the scope of the engineering design for the Cultural Centre.
HV Switchboard ‘A’ provides supplies to LV Substation ‘A’ which will house 7 x
Incoming HV (13.8 kV) underground feeders from North Park substation will 1500 kVA 13.8kV/ 380V transformers to serve the:
terminate at two 13.8 kV indoor HV switchboards housed within HV switchrooms. • Library
HV Switchroom ‘A’ is located within the Energy Centre and HV Switchroom ‘B’ • Auditorium
adjacent to the Great Hall. • Tower
• Plaza
HV Switchboard ‘A’ provides supplies to transformers serving the chiller MV • Energy Centre
switchboard (13.8kV/ 4.16kV), chiller pumps/mech plant (13.8kV/ 480V) and LV • Basement Car Park
Substation ‘A’ (13.8kV/ 380V) which serves the Library, Auditorium, Tower, Plaza,
Energy Centre and Basement Car Park. HV Switchboard ‘B’ provides supplies to LV Substation ‘B’ which will house 4 x
1500 kVA 13.8kV/ 380V transformers to serve the:
• Museum
• Great Hall
The design proposals have been standardised on the use of 1500 kVA
transformers.
Chiller Plant
Based on the load calculations, five water-cooled, R-134a centrifugal chillers (4

duty and 1 stand-by) have been proposed for the complex. The chillers are 600
tons (2.11MW) each. The current estimated cooling load for the building is 2340
tons(8.22 MW). The breakdown of this load is as follows:
1. Tower and Keystone: 2.1 MW
2. Library: 1.2 MW
3. Cinema/Auditorium/Great Hall 2.0 MW
4. Plaza/Museum/Chiller Yard 2.93MW
Total: 8.23 MW
Or 2340 tons.
The proposed operating temperature of the chillers is 43°F (6.1°C) supply with a
12°F (6.6°C) delta T. The selection will be based on a fouling factor of 0.00025.
The cooling coils in the primary circuit will be sized based on 44°F (6.6°C) chilled
water supply and 12°F (6.6°C) delta T, to allow for temperature pick-up.
The proposed operating temperature on the condenser circuit is 95/105°F

(35/40.5°C). A fouling factor of 0.00075 will be used in the selection.
The chillers will be connected to five cross-flow cooling towers which are located to
the north of the ring road as shown on the site plan. Cross flow cooling towers
have been proposed for its low profile and good maintainability features. The
cooling tower will be selection based on Saudi Aramco Design Guideline SAES-K-
001, ie 1% exceedance plus 2 °F design wet bulb.
Cross Flow Cooling Tower

To optimize chiller efficiency, it is common practice to run the condenser water at a
lower temperature when weather permits.
Emergency Generator Supply
In addition to providing alternate power source to support life safety systems,

standby generation can support other business essential applications to ensure
that the buildings function in a manner that is conducive to operational
requirements in the event of power failure or disruption from the mains supply. At
this stage, a standby power allowance of 20% of the load (excluding cooling)has
been considered. This will be subject to further agreement with Saudi Aramco.
The following lists the proposed systems that would be supported by a standby
supply;
• Life safety systems - smoke extract, stair pressurisation systems, fireman's
lifts, etc.
• Fire alarm and voice alarm systems
• I.T./Data systems including servers, BMS etc.
• Security systems
• A percentage of lighting and small power.
• Kitchens and cold rooms / freezers
It is proposed that a central 1500 kVA standby diesel generator is provided

adjacent to Substation A (Energy Centre) to support associated LV supplies and an
Chilled water from the chillers will be piped and distributed to the building. The 800 kVA generator adjacent to Substation B
proposed distribution layout is shown in the drawing. The chillers will be piped for
variable flow primary and constant condenser flow to prevent fouling of the cooling The generating sets will be diesel engines coupled direct to an alternator to
tower spray nozzles. Flow meters will be provided at each chiller inlet to monitor produce a three phase, 380V, 60Hz output. LV switchgear will be interlocked to
the flow through the evaporator. A bypass line (with automatic controlled valve) ensure the LV switchgear switches out the non-essential load when standby
between the supply and return circuit will be provided. The valve will be modulated generators are in use
open to maintain minimum flow through each chiller during low load conditions.
The locations of the generator have considered the following:
All piping materials and installation methods shall conform to Saudi Aramco SAES- • Exhaust flue routing
K-001 standards. • Inlet and discharge air flow
• Acoustic treatment to exhaust flue and inlet/discharge air
The variable flow pumps will be controlled based on system static pressure control, • Fuel Deliveries.
with differential pressure sensors located 2/3 way down the longest pipe run.
The chillers will be controlled by the chiller manager, which will sequence the
chillers based on cooling demand, as dictated by the primary chilled water flow and Potable Water Storage Tanks and Incoming Supply.
temperature. The chiller manager shall also lead/lag and rotate the chiller
operation to provide even wear. The cooling towers will be interlocked with the The incoming water will be taken from the existing 100 mm dia. Saudi Aramco
chillers such that when a chiller is energized, one cooling tower will be brought on water main as shown on the proposed water utilities drawing. A new 100 mm dia
line. The cooling towers when energized will be controlled by the DDC controller line will be brought to the Energy Centre. The line will run parallel to the ring road
which will operate the fan at medium to high speed and vice versa to maintain a along the new proposed service corridor and enters the building adjacent the truck
constant condenser supply water temperature of 95 °F (35 °C) (adjustable) to the service tunnel.
chillers. One set of low-level water tanks (132 m3 total) and pump rooms will be provided
in the Energy Centre and another set of high level tanks (40m3 total) on level T-
11. The low level tank is sized for one day supply. The high level tanks are sized
based on available space. The high level tanks will gravity feed the entire building Diesel Storage Tanks and Transfer Pumps
with the exception of floors above T11 and floors 7 to 10, which will be boosted by
pumps. Water from the low level tanks will be transferred to the high level tanks A 3750 L double walled, UL listed diesel storage tank and duplex pumpset is
by a set of transfer pumps, which will be connected to emergency power. proposed for the building. The pumpset will be piped to the diesel fire pump day
tank and the emergency generator day tank. The storage tank will be housed in a
The water tanks will be RCC constructed and GRP lined. RCC tanks are proposed to 2 hour fire rated room, and will be equipped with Hi-lo level alarm, fill line, vent
conserve space and minimize cost. line and man-hole. The fuel transfer pumpset will be housed in a separate 2 hr fire
rated room and shall be equipped with explosion proof starter panel with
Storm Water Collection Tank controller.
A storm water collection tank of RCC construction will be provided to harvest rain The storage tank will provide fuel reserve for 8 hours operation.
water which will be used for irrigation, cooling tower make-up and toilet uses. The
water collected will be filtered and pumped to the main raw water storage tanks for Fire water storage tanks and fire pumps.
use. The storage capacity is about 320 m3 based on space availability.
This section is described in the succeeding “Life Safety Systems “section.
Raw Water Storage Tank
Engineer’s Office and BMS Room
The incoming raw water will be taken from the existing 24” (600 mm dia.) Saudi
Aramco RW main as shown on the proposed water utilities drawing. A new 8” (200 The Engineer’s office and BMS room will be located in the Energy Centre. The BMS
mm dia) line will be brought to the Energy Centre. The line will run parallel to the room will house the BMS computers, LPG monitoring panel, elevator computer and
ring road along the new proposed service corridor and enters the building adjacent fire alarm panel.
the truck service tunnel.
One set of low-level water tanks (1300 m3 total) will be provided in the Energy
Centre and another set of high level tanks (20m3 total) on level T-11. The low level
tank is sized for one day supply and will serve the following usage:
• Toilet Flushing - 40 m3
• Cooling Tower Make-up - 710 m3
• Irrigation Reserve - 550 m3
The high level tanks are sized based on available space and will provide water for
toilet flushing. The high level tanks will gravity feed the entire building with the
exception of floors above T11 and floors 7 to 10, which will be boosted by pumps.
Water from the low level tanks will be transferred to the high level tanks by a set
of transfer pumps, which will be connected to emergency power.
The water tanks will be RCC constructed and GRP lined. RCC tanks are proposed to
conserve space and minimize cost.
Due to the high TDS, sodium, chloride and hardness levels in the raw water, we
recommend that water to be used for cooling tower make-up and toilet flushing be
treated using an RO system. This is to prevent scaling, corrosion and clogging of
the cooling tower spray nozzles, plumbing fixtures, piping system and condenser
tubes of the chillers. The water for irrigation use is recommended to be filtered
using turbidity filters to remove any suspended solids to prevent clogging the
dribblers and sprinkler heads of the irrigation system.
3.4.8.2 Service Corridor 3.4.8.4 Public Health
The primary service routes from the central energy centre to the buildings will be Potable Water System
run at high level (both sides) in the service corridor at Level -01.
The incoming potable water will be taken from the existing 100 mm dia. Saudi
Electrical and data services will run on one side of the corridor with chilled water, Aramco water main as shown on the proposed water utilities drawing. A new 100
mains water, sprinkler pipework and other wet services on the other side. This mm dia line will be brought to the Energy Centre. The line will run parallel to the
maintains a separation distance as well as allowing electrical services to cross over ring road along the new proposed service corridor and enters the building adjacent
the mechanical services at high level. the truck service tunnel.
One set of low-level water tanks and pump rooms will be provided in the Energy
The corridor will be sufficient width to allow access for maintenance. Centre and another set of high level tanks on level T-11. The low level tank is sized
for one day supply. The high level tanks are sized based on available space on the
T-11 floor. The high level tanks will gravity feed the entire building with the
3.4.8.3 Ventilation & Air Conditioning Systems exception of floors above T11 and floors 7 to 10, which will be boosted by pumps.
Pressure reducing stations will be installed in the gravity branch mains feeding the
The air-conditioning strategies for the building are described in the preceding floors to limit the pressure to the fixtures.
sections. The Energy Centre will be air-conditioning using exposed fan-coil units Water from the low level tanks will be transferred to the high level tanks by a set
fed from the chillers. A small treated fresh air unit will supply fresh air to the of transfer pumps, which will be connected to emergency power.
engineer’s office and BMS room. These office will be cooled by ceiling hung Point-of-use electric hot water heaters are proposed for the various washrooms in
concealed fan-coil units. the building. The hot water heaters for the kitchen in the tower shall be LPG fired.
Hot water re-circulation system with re-circulating pumps will be installed where
A refrigerant leak monitoring system and exhaust system will be provided in the the distribution piping between the hot water heaters and the fixtures is in excess
chiller area to handle emergency situation. The exhaust rates will be designed to of 25 m.
conform to ASHRAE standards 15-2004.
Sanitary System
A two pipe combined sanitary system (i.e. one soil and one vent) serving foul and
waste water is proposed for the entire complex. All fixtures will be vented. All
podium or deck drains that serve areas which will be washed by detergent will be
piped to the sanitary system.
The sanitary system from the tower will be by gravity to the central sewage
treatment plant. The drainage system serving function areas below level 00 will be
routed to a sanitary lift station located at the base of the Source or level -15.2. The
pump discharge will be piped to the sewage treatment plant located on level -1. A
bypass valve will be incorporated in the design to allow the sewage to be diverted
to the Saudi Aramco sewerage network in the event of a plant failure in the
treatment plant operation.
A sewage treatment plant shall be based on the Moving Bed Bio-Film Reactor
(MBBR) technology is proposed for the building. The purpose of the treatment
plant is to treat and recycle all sewage and waste water from the building for use
in the irrigation system, toilet flushing and cooling tower make-up water system.
Excess water will be discharged by gravity to the Saudi Aramco sewerage network.
Kitchen waste will be discharged to the sewage system by passing through
individual grease separators, which would utilise chemical digesters to break down
grease and food matter before entering the sanitary system
10. Treated Water Tanks
11. Sludge tanks
12. Transfer pumps.
The treatment plant will have odour control on the process treatment and the final
water. The final water quality will be designed to meet the following parameters:
No Parameters Raw Effluent Treated Water Effluent

Value(mg/l) Value
1 BOD5 300 mg/l 10 mg/l
2 COD 3000mg/l (1) 50 mg/l
3 pH 6-8 6-9
4 Suspended 250 mg/l 10 mg/l
Solids
5 NH3-N 50 mg/l 1 mg/l
6 Faecal 500 cells/100ml (2) 20 cells/100ml
Coliform
Notes: (1) Estimated only, actual to be field tested. (2) To be field measured.
The treated water from the Sewage Treatment Plant will be recycled for irrigation
use, cooling tower make-up use and toilet flushing. The distribution system for
The treatment plant shall comprise the following process stages: recycled water will consist of high level water tanks to be located on Level 11.
Booster pumps will be used to feed areas located above the level T-11 and areas
1. Incoming raw sewage collection chamber with bar screen, grit chamber and which are within four floors in height from the tanks. Other areas will be fed by
gravity. Pressure reducing stations will be provided in the supply mains to control
sump pumps the pressure to the fixtures and irrigation system
2. Aeration tanks
3. Nitrification chambers
4. Flocculation Tanks
5. Settling tanks
6. Filter feed tank
7. Disinfection System
8. Multi-media Filters and activated carbon filters
9. Post chlorination system

Irrigation System
No information is available yet on the type of plants and shrubs that will be used in
the landscape areas. But based on the area of greenery it is estimated that the
daily water demand required is 550 m3. This figure will have to be verified against
actual when the landscape design is completed. Raw/recycled water will be
pumped from the storage tanks in the Energy Centre to the landscaped areas and
distributed via valve chambers equipped with automatic isolation valves and
pressure reducing stations. Variable speed pumps with pressure control will be
used. It is recommended that the water be filtered using turbidity filters prior to
usage to remove any suspended solids to prevent clogging of the dribblers and
sprinkler heads of the irrigation system.
Sewage Treatment Plant
Storm Water System
Storm water from the tower curved roof will free fall by gravity to the podium level
roof. From the podium curved roof, the water will cascade by gravity to the ditches
along the ring rood.
Storm water collected in the “Source” will be collected and pumped to the storm
water storage tank for recycle. It is recommended that each drained area have
minimum of two primary outlets to safeguard against blockage.
Storm water drainage pipe work and drains will be designed to 250mm/hr rainfall
intensity as per Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-M-100.
3.4.8.5 Life Safety Systems All isolation valves shall be supervised and wired back to the building fire alarm
panel.
General
The designed solutions for life safety in the building will be a combination of
services equipment and architectural design. This will include sprinkler systems,
hydrant system, automatic fire detection systems, stair pressurisation, refuge
systems, refuge areas and fire separation. NFPA codes 101 and 5000 will be used
as the basis of the designs for this project.
systems and fire management systems.
Fire Detection and Alarm systems comprise:

• Manual call points
Fire Suppression systems comprise:

• Fire standpipe and hose systems
• Gaseous extinguishing systems in specific areas Hydrant Flow Test By Saudi Aramco
Fire Management systems comprise: Sprinkler and Standpipe System
• Smoke management systems Water for the building sprinkler and standpipe system will be taken from the
• Pressurisation systems exterior hydrant ring mains. Two water feeds will be brought into the building to
• Emergency electric power systems supply to the fire water storage systems located in the Energy Centre. Due to the
• Automatic elevator recall systems high TDS, sodium, chlorides and hardness levels of the raw water we recommend
• Communication and alarm notification systems that the water be passed through an RO system prior to using. This is to prevent
• A central fire command centre. future corrosion, scaling and clogging of the sprinkler heads.
The sprinkler and standpipe system shall be designed to conform to Saudi Aramco
Hydrant System standard SAES-S-050 “Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems in Building” and NFPA
codes.
A new hydrant ring system is proposed for the building. The water mains shall run
along side the ring road around the building. Water for the hydrant ring mains shall The complete building will be sprinklered to conform to NFPA-13 and local Fire
be tapped from the 24” raw water mains running closed to the existing highway, as Department requirements. Fire hose cabinets will be provided to conform to NFPA-
shown in the Proposed Water Utilities drawing. The hydrants will be spaced at 90m 14. The building will have one set of fire pumps and water tanks to be located in
apart and 15m minimum setback from any building structure. The complete the Energy Centre.
system shall be designed to conform to Saudi Aramco guidelines SAES-B-017 and Under the Saudi Aramco standard SAES-B-017, the fire water storage capacity
NFPA code. required for a Low Risk area is 4 hours. But we understand that Matthew Bishop of
the Fire Prevention Department of SA has accepted a 60-minute storage reserve.
A hydrant flow test conducted by Saudi Aramco confirmed the availability of flow in As such we are proceeding with the 60 minutes reserve. Each fire water storage
the existing water mains. The test result indicated a flow of 1147USgpm at a tank will have two compartments to allow tank servicing without shutting down to
residual pressure of 20 psig. The required flow for the hydrant system is 1000 complete system. The storage tanks will be required in the as the existing service
USgpm at 20 psig. This is based on 2x 500 USgpm hydrants operating mains does not have the capacity to provide a continuous flow for both sprinkler
simultaneously. and hydrant demand, totalling 2000 USgpm (ie1000USgpm +1000Usgpm). The
available flow of the water mains is 1142 USgpm at 20 psig residual pressure, as Smoke Control
per the flow test.
A combined system shall be provided to Ordinary Hazard Class Two, with individual Smoke control systems will be designed to meet NFPA recommendations for high
levels of protection as per NFPA 13 & 14, 2007 Edition. rise building. As a minimum, the following smoke control systems will be
provided:
a. Stair Pressurization System for all stairs.
Area Hazard Classification b. Smoke evacuation system for each floor of the building, including the parking
garage
Office Light Hazard c. Smoke evacuation system for the grand hall, museums, theatre, Library,
Museum Light Hazard entrance tunnel and plaza
d. Fire fighter‘s elevator shaft pressurization
Parking OH-group 1
Restaurant-seating Light Hazard Fire Detection and Alarm systems
Libraries-hi stack OH-group 2 An analogue addressable fire alarm system will be provided to give comprehensive
Restaurant-service OH-group 1 coverage to the whole of the development. All areas will be provided with manual
call points and automatic heat and smoke detectors to suit the requirement of
NFPA 101 ‘Life Safety Code’ - 2006 edition, and NFPA 72 ‘National Fire Alarm Code’
- 2007 edition and Saudi Aramco standards .
Each set of fire system will comprise one duty, one standby fire pump and one
jockey pump. The pumps will be electric driven, and the standby pump will be The fire alarm system will be wired in fire resistant cabling. All loops will be
diesel engine driven. Each fire pump will be rated for 1000 USgpm (3785 l/min). permanently monitored to detect any damage at an early stage. Fire alarm cabling
The pumps will be UL and FM listed. The fire protection system will be based on a will be segregated and installed on a separate tray system to the other electrical
combined system as defined in NFPA-14. The sprinkler system shall comprise of containment systems or clipped direct to the building fabric, whichever is the most
distribution pipework and standpipe risers with zone control valves, flow switches, appropriate.
isolation valves, feeding sprinklers and fire hose cabinets. Fire hose cabinets will be
installed to the requirement of NFPA-14 and the local Fire Department The fire alarm panels will allow easy identification of the alarm signal via an
requirements. Each floor will be designed as a separate zone and will be provided alphanumeric interface which will identify the area, level, zone and type of alarm
with a supervised shut-off valve and a floor switch, both monitored by the fire signal, e.g. smoke detector, heat detector, break glass manual station, etc. The
alarm system. In addition, a test facility will be provided for each zone. Each fire mechanical services and ventilation systems will be interlocked where necessary
zone shall be no larger than 52000 ft² (4832 m2). with a local override panel for the Fire Department use in the building.
All areas in each building including the enclosed parking but with the exception of
electrical rooms, transformer rooms and telephone rooms, will be provided with The fire alarm and evacuation system will operate in accordance with a strategy
wet sprinkler systems designed to the requirements of NFPA. Electrical rooms and agreed with Saudi Aramco and the Fire Department in the event of a fire alarm.
telephone rooms will be protected by gaseous fire protection systems, i.e. gaseous
canisters, or FM 200 or equivalent. Diesel Generator rooms will be protected by a The alarm system will be interfaced with a voice evacuation system within large
wet sprinkler system conforming to NFPA-13. public areas of the development. Corridors and back of house areas will have
A fire department connection will be provided for the system and will be located combined detectors and sounder bases. It is recommended that a scheme is
at the main entrance (or emergency response entrance) of the building. developed for an evacuation strategy.
Portable Fire Extinguishers

The fire alarm system will be integrated with the building BMS system to allow
Portable Fire Extinguishers will be distributed throughout the building in control of mechanical systems/lifts in the event of fire alarm activation. This will
accordance with NFPA 10 and local Fire Department requirements. also offer full control of systems from the fire alarm command centre to allow the
Fire Department the opportunity to activate systems as required. All automatic
interfaces associated with the operation of mechanical ventilation systems, lifts etc
will operate in accordance with a strategy agreed between the Fire Department
and the specialist fire engineer for the project.
Under a fire alarm activation signal from any source in the building the following
signals will be sent:
• Signal to voice alarm and public address system
• Signal to the Fire Department (subject to further discussions)
• Signal to BMS system
• Signal to Lifts
• Signal to the door access system
• Signal to lighting control panels
• Signal to mechanical services (shutdown of ventilation plant,

operation of smoke extract etc.)
Voice Evacuation
which shall cover all public areas and general staff/ back of house areas to give
Emergency messages will be pre-recorded onto voice integrated circuits and

broadcast in at least 2 different languages. The exact composition of the messages
development stage.
The content of the voice alarm shall be determined by Saudi Aramco in

consultation with the local authorities having jurisdiction. There will also be an
override facility and zoning control from the main fire control room to allow
additional alarms or zones to be activated and voice messages sent.
3.4.8.6 Building Management Systems The supervisor will also support onward transmission of alarms to alternative
locations at different times, e.g. to security desk out of hours. Onward
General transmission to hand held PDA type devices will be supported and implemented to
support building operational management. A printer will be provided for logging
A Building Management System (BMS) will be provided to monitor and control the alarms. A separate colour printer will be provided for screen prints etc.
mechanical equipment to ensure that the mechanical services plant operates The BMS will provide full control and monitoring of the following systems in
efficiently and the required environmental conditions are maintained. the building:
The building shall be provided with one independent BMS system to serve the
complete complex. • Chilled water systems
The BMS system will be supplied with its own desktop PC supervisory package • Local cooling system
provisionally located within the respective designated engineering office with • AHUs and fans
remote access capability through the web. This system architecture shall make • Potable water
interrogation of the BMS simpler since any PC having access to the site BMS IT • STP plant
network could be given access to BMS data. • LPG system
To assist this remote interrogation, the BMS system installed as part of the project • All pumps
shall utilise the same open protocol control strategies and common graphical • Water treatment plants
displays. This allows instant familiarity for a service provider when viewing each
building. In order to support good facilities management sufficient training will be provided
Integration with the other systems such as fire and security will be accomplished to enable a trained operator to, as a minimum:
for operational reasons at supervisor to supervisor level using standard interfaces
based on open protocols such as BACnet • View equipment status
• View and acknowledge alarms
Intelligent Distributed Local Outstation Controllers • Adjust optimised time clocks and calendars
The BMS will comprise of a series of networked intelligent programmable • Adjust setpoints and control parameters
controllers/outstations monitoring and controlling peripheral devices such as • Investigate calculated control values
sensors, switches, pump and fan motors, damper and valve actuators. The • View plant hours run data
controllers/outstations will generally be housed in the Motor Control Centres that • Chart energy usage from the meters
will also provide the electrical feeds to the controlled equipment. Smaller • Create tenant utility bills
controllers will be mounted on equipment such as fan coil units and variable air • Create and view long term Trend Logs of controlled parameters in particular
volume terminals and networked via suitable network controller/routers to the temperature and humidity in critical areas
network backbone. This backbone network will use industry standard open • Export trend log data to standard format spreadsheet packages for analysis and
protocols such as BACnet and TCP/IP with a dual redundant architecture for storages.
resilient communications.
20% spare capacity should be allowed at a local level for hardware I/O points and System Integration
attendant software capability to allow for future flexibility. The BMS network architecture will allow the BMS to be integrated with the other
intelligent systems in the building. Industry standard open protocols will be
Supervisory Software adopted to enable full transfer of data and interoperability subject to user
A full BMS supervisory package will be supplied running on its own PC. A full set of password authorisation. High level integration shall be via open, e.g. OPC and
user friendly graphics will depict the services equipment showing real-time data ODBC standards. Systems should include:
from the field-mounted devices. The graphics will be developed in conjunction with
end user requirements and/or input. The supervisor will also be connected to the • Lighting Control System
general IT network and act as a server for thin client or browser type interfaces at • Fire alarm and smoke ventilation system
multiple locations. • Irrigation control system
The supervisor software package will also supply the main user interface for • Planned Preventive Maintenance system
equipment malfunction and maintenance alarms and trend logging of control data; • Facilities Management software.
e.g. temperatures, humidity and corresponding control actions. • Utility usage Monitoring and Targeting (M&T) software
• Lift management system
• Security and access management systems.
The integration of security and facilities management information on a common
machine would provide single set controls for the development and a common
format relay of alarms and diagnostic information to remote mobile devices out of
hours. The final detail design and network detailing, systems integration of the
common front end information and generation of common format graphics, trend
logs, alarms and management information to provide a full working BMS
installation will be performed by a specialist BMS contractor.
Integrated BMS System
General Metering
All building meters should be provided with volt free pulse output interfaces to
allow remote monitoring of the meters on the BMS. Adequate local BMS hardware
input capacity and appropriate software will be provided to monitor, analyse,
manipulate and display utility consumption and billing information
The BMS will incorporate a monitoring and targeting software package to take the
raw data and organize and analyse it o present in a user-friendly basis to a non-
technical operator.
Outgoing essential and non-essential submain cables/busbars will be run from the
Energy Centre to a dedicated LV switchboard serving each building/facility.
The electrical system will be designed in accordance with NEC Wiring Regulations,
Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards and applicable local codes. The electrical
design will be based upon the following electrical supply criteria
Low Voltage (LV- process) 480V/3 phase/60 Hertz

277V/1 phase /60 Hertz
Low Voltage (LV) 380V/3 phase/60 Hertz

220V/1 phase/60 Hertz
The substations for the respective buildings/areas are discussed within the relevant
sections of this report.
Electrical Load (LV)
The estimated total connected electrical load and maximum demands have been
calculated on a square metre basis.
Summary load table:

(Excluding specialist theatrical loads) (Including specialist theatrical loads)
System Total (kW) Total (A) Total (kVA) Total (kVA) System Total Total (A) Total (kVA) Total (kVA)
+20% (kW) +20%
Sub A Base 2990 5053 3322 3848 Sub A Base 5039 8516 5599 6125
Chillers 3600 4320 Chillers 3600 4320
MCC 1692 2030 MCC 1692 2030
Sub B Base 417 705 463 522 Sub B Base 2901 4903 3223 3282
Sub A Sub A
2264 3826 2515 3018 3698 6250 4109 4931
Diversified Diversified
Chillers 3240 3888 Chillers 3240 3888
MCC 1252 1502 MCC 1252 1502
Sub B Sub B
334 564 371 445 2072 3503 2303 2763
Diversified Diversified
GRAND TOTAL GRAND TOTAL
Connected Connected + Diversified Diversified + Connected

Connected Diversified Diversified +
(kVA) 20% (kVA) (kVA) 20% (kVA) + 20%
(kVA) (kVA) 20% (kVA)
(kVA)
9077 10721 7378 8853
14114 15757 10903 13084
The 13.8kV/380V LV substations shall house the required number of transformers.

As the transformers are located within internal building spaces, we would
recommend the use of dry type transformers for reduced fire risk. The substations
will be mechanically cooled and also provided with nominal mechanical ventilation.
The transformers will be connected to the adjacent LV switch rooms via single core
cables laid in trenches.
Small Power Services
Generally small power services to the buildings will distributed in cable

management systems mounted within ceiling voids and floor screeds and in plastic
or galvanised conduits for final distribution to accessories and outlet points. To aid
re-wireability, plastic conduits will be surface mounted where concealed in ceiling
voids and concealed in the building fabric and floor screed where located in visible
areas. Galvanised conduit shall be used in all plant room areas and shall be surface
mounted throughout. All plastic conduits will be made from high impact resistance,
flame retardant uPVC.
Access floors and floor boxes will be provided in certain IT intensive areas such as
main server rooms to allow flexibility for future modification and expansion.
Cable management systems will allow compartmentation for:
• Power wiring
• Data / telephone wiring
• Security/other services
The type of power outlets will be subject to agreement with Saudi Aramco. Power
outlets will be recessed mounted with white high impact plastic. Power outlets will
generally be wired on a radial principle from the local distribution board using
single core PVC cables. Circuits will be protected using a MCB or a combined
MCB/RCD unit with 30mA sensitivity.
High integrity earthing will be provided to all power outlets.
Power outlets in plant areas will be surface mounted with metal clad finish. Where
required by environmental considerations, IP56 water resistant outlets shall be
provided in plant rooms.
Single gang power outlets will be provided within public areas, circulation areas,
core areas and along corridor routes for cleaning and maintenance purposes.
Cleaning sockets will be spaced at 20 metres (maximum) along corridors.
The car park will be provided with socket outlets incorporating an IP56 hinged
cover. These will be provided external to all substations and at other location to be
agreed.
All small power wiring used will have a minimum size of 2.5mm², and the system
will be fully tested in accordance with Saudi Aramco testing procedures and all
applicable codes of practice.
3.4.8.8 Lighting To maximize energy efficiency, the central lighting control unit will control all
circulation space lighting to switch it off during unoccupied hours, leaving only a
The general lighting and Back of House lighting (BOH) installation and distribution minimal security level during night time hours. Local wall switches will be provided
is part of the electrical engineering package. A lighting scheme will be developed in order to switch circulation lighting back on for a preset period during these
with the Architect for the main public and general circulation areas to highlight the hours.
architectural features and maximize the ambiance of the space.
All lighting within plant areas will be provided using surface mounted or
The lighting installation will be designed in accordance with the relevant codes and suspended, corrosion resistant linear fluorescent luminaires with protective
will take into account the particular Saudi Aramco requirements. diffusers and with local wall switches located adjacent to the main plant area
point(s) of access. The central unit will not control these areas.
Specialist lighting in the public areas will be designed by the lighting consultant
and will be specified in the lighting consultants report at the next stage of this Lighting Controls
project.
The lighting control system shall aim to achieve maximum energy savings by
Lighting will be selected wherever possible to comprise low energy compact source linking to daylight saving measures along with providing a system which can
lamps, to improve energy efficiency. The selection of common lamp sources for as centrally control the building lighting system. Controls will include local manual
much lighting as possible across the development will also ease maintenance, and switching, passive infra red (PIR) detectors to switch lights off when the spaces are
reduce the range of lamps spares which have to be held by the maintenance team. unoccupied, photoelectric control for daylight linking and time switch control for
night time amenity and security lighting control. Daylight linking shall be achieved
All lighting unless indicated otherwise will be wired using single core LSF (low by using photoelectric sensors to dim the luminaires when there is adequate
smoke & fume) cabling within PVC conduits concealed within the building fabric. daylight in the building. Central control units will be stand alone within building.
Apart from stand-alone luminaires such as in plant rooms, all luminaires will be
External lighting will be addressed by the specialist lighting consultant at the next controlled by the central lighting control unit. All inputs such as PIR, photocell,
stage of this project. local switches and timer contacts will be taken to the central control unit.
To maximize energy efficiency, the central lighting control unit will control all
Lighting within the central energy centre, service corridor, plantrooms and circulation space lighting to switch it off during unoccupied hours, leaving only a
basement car park will be T5 fluorescent IP65 rated external grade luminaires minimal security level during night time hours. Local wall switches will be provided
mounted on galvanised steel cable management system to underside of soffits. in order to switch circulation lighting back on for a preset period during these
hours.
External rated power outlets located within the energy centre, service corridor and
other plantrooms will be provided to power task lighting and power of tools and All lighting within plant areas will be provided using surface mounted or
equipment as required by maintenance personnel. suspended, corrosion resistant linear fluorescent luminaires with protective
diffusers and with local wall switches located adjacent to the main plant area
Lighting Controls point(s) of access. The central unit will not control these areas.
The lighting control system shall aim to achieve maximum energy savings by
linking to daylight saving measures along with providing a system which can
centrally control the building lighting system. Controls will include local manual
switching, passive infra red (PIR) detectors to switch lights off when the spaces are
unoccupied, photoelectric control for daylight linking and time switch control for
night time amenity and security lighting control.
Daylight linking shall be achieved by using photoelectric sensors to dim the
luminaires when there is adequate daylight in the building. Central control units
will be stand alone within building.
Apart from stand-alone luminaires such as in plant rooms, all luminaires will be
controlled by the central lighting control unit. All inputs such as PIR, photocell,
local switches and timer contacts will be taken to the central control unit.
3.4.8.9 Emergency Lighting Area Strategy Control Dimming Emergenc
Method y Lighting
Emergency lighting will be centralised within each building and monitored site wide Back of Recommended Timer No Integral
for maintenance and operation. The emergency lighting system will be designed to House Surface and
provide safe passage from the building in the event of a mains failure. The lighting areas fluorescent local
will be designed to NFPA 101 and requirements of the local authority regulations. battens switch
Recessed
All areas within each building will be provided with maintained illuminated compact
emergency exit signage with 'running man' pictograms to indicate escape routes fluorescent
and exits. luminaires
There are three options available for each building; (areas with
ceilings)
Option 1 Circulati Recommended Timer No Integral
on recessed and
Emergency lighting shall be provided by means of integral 3 hour battery units Internal compact local
inside selected fluorescent luminaires. spaces fluorescent switch
The emergency lighting system shall be complete with an automatic testing luminaires
system. Plant Recommended Local No Integral
rooms IP65 surface switch
Option 2 mounted linear
fluorescent
The emergency lighting system shall be by means of static inverter located in luminaires
strategic locations throughout the building to support chosen normal ambient Baseme Recommended Time No Integral
fittings in the event of local circuit failure. nt Car IP65 surface switch
These static inverter systems shall comprise of maintenance free lead acid Park mounted linear
batteries, charger, inverter and control equipment. The size of the units can only fluorescent
be determined on completion of the lighting design and receipt of luminaire luminaires
specifications from specialist designer. Stairs Recommended PIR & No Integral
Each static inverter unit shall be linked to a central monitoring PC located within Compact Timer &
the security room. The plant rooms shall be air conditioned. The emergency fluorescent Local
lighting system shall be complete with an automatic testing system. All cabling luminaires Switch
shall be fire rated. External Recommended Timer No No
Areas Gas Discharge
Option 3 – Recommended solution Luminaires
The emergency lighting system shall be via dedicated maintained exit signs and
non-maintained compact fluorescent fittings supported by central battery systems. All emergency lighting within the energy centre, service corridor and plantrooms
The installation shall consist of a central battery system, dedicated emergency will be self contained, centrally monitored lighting with integral battery with
distribution boards and dedicated emergency light fittings. All cabling shall be fire autonomy of 3 hours.
rated.
Each central battery unit shall be linked to a central monitoring PC located within
the security room.
The plant rooms shall be air conditioned.
The emergency lighting system shall be complete with an automatic testing
system.
3.4.8.10 Security and Access Control System segregated in metal trunking from power cabling to minimise the potential for
electromagnetic interference.
All access to the central energy centre and service corridor will be controlled by
access control systems to allow only authorised personnel access to these areas. Services to be carried over the infrastructure cabling are:-
All access control will be via proximity detection cards, issued centrally and only
following suitable qualification for access to systems. Each plant area will be • All data services
restricted separately to limit access to such areas as main chiller plant and any • Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony
area requiring medium voltage trained clearance. • Security services
• Security and access control services.
All areas of access and main plant will be covered by CCTV monitored locally as
well as remotely. Images will be recorded digitally and stored for a minimum of 3 A “clean” grounding bus (earth bar) will be provided for all IT closets and comms
Months for reference. room.
3.4.8.11 Data and Communications System Wireless networks will also be installed to cover 100% of the Tower office floor
plates and Keystone building. This will include at least two wireless access points
It is presumed that the IT installation will comprise only “passive” equipment, such on each floor and additional coverage for areas of higher populations such as the
as structured cabling, outlets and patch panels, and that “active” equipment, such restaurant and meeting rooms.
as hardware, routers, etc will be supplied and installed as part of the client fitout
works. The IT requirements and provisions will be developed further through All active equipment such as servers, VoIP call managers, Wi-Fi transmitter
discussions with the client. Designs will take into account current demand as well equipment and end user equipment will not be included within this installation and
as a spare capacity for future upgrades and extensions. will be the responsibility of the end user to fit out.
Incoming data and telecom links will enter the central energy centre and be 3.4.8.12 Lightning Protection and Earthing System
distributed to the main buildings via the service corridor on level -01. Links to each
building will be in single mode fibre with a dedicated link to each building for Lightning Protection
resilience. Fibre will terminate within the main IT communications (comms) room
with ongoing distribution in fibre to each of the IT closets within the building. A lightning protection system will be provided to fully protect the buildings, their
Within each IT closet the fibre link will be linked to a 10Gb data backbone. This will contents and occupants against the hazard of lightning strike. It will be designed to
link all horizontally distributed category 6 (CAT 6) UTP structured cabling to the NFPA 780.
main fibre network for all data and voice services on each floor.
The lightning protection system will comprise a ‘Faraday Cage’ system and with
The building will generally be provided with dual RJ45 data outlets located to suit four main elements as follows:
the individual requirements of each space. These outlets will be served with CAT 6 • Air terminal network
UTP cabling from patch panels within central communications cabinets in the • Down conductor network
comms room or satellite cabinet in IT closets on separate floors. The requirement • Earth termination network
for local cabinets will be subject to the length of final cable runs. • Bonding
The main IT comms room will be located central to the Tower building on technical Generally the air termination network across the site shall be an interlinked grid
floor T05 in an effort to minimise cable runs and the need for additional satellite pattern of high conductivity copper tapes, located at roof level.
cabinets. This will also provide direct access link to the Keystone building on the The down conductor network will utilise the reinforcing bar network in the building
same floor. The comms room will be sufficiently sized to accommodate floor structure.
standing communication cabinets and associated cooling, sized to cater for the
buildings proposed and future IT requirements, and equipment provided by others The earth termination network will be provided by the building foundations, which
under the client fitout works. allow the lightning protection down conductors to be suitably connected to earth.
Test links points will be cast into the building columns and located at a point
All outgoing cables and fibre backbones will be routed from the comms room / IT accessible by maintenance staff at ground level, and will be clearly identified.
closets, via dedicated containment systems and service risers, to each outlet in the These points will enable the overall earth resistance of the building structure to be
building. These will be routed on cable basket and in some instances be electrically
tested as well as providing facilities connecting additional earth pits to the system
should post construction tests prove these to be necessary.
3.4.8.14 LPG System
The whole lightning protection system will be fully bonded to include the following To our knowledge no piped LPG or natural gas supply is available for tap off from
elements: the surrounding site. LPG required in the building for kitchen and hot water heating
use shall be brought in and stored and distributed for use. A 4870 L capacity tank
• Equipment exposed at roof level has been proposed for the complex. The tank shall be buried and located adjacent
• Roof level metalwork (supports, etc.) to the entrance of the truck tunnel. This is shown in the “proposed water utilities”
• Façade metallic structures drawing. LPG gas will be piped to the main floor kitchen and to the tower kitchen
and hot water boilers. The system shall comprise of gas detectors to be located in
Earthing (Grounding) System the kitchens and pipe risers to monitor gas leaks and alarm at the LPG monitoring
panel to be located in the Engineer’s office.
The development will have a comprehensive earthing system, which will be
designed in accordance with NEC, Saudi Aramco Standards and all applicable local 3.4.8.15 Metering
codes.
Subject to approval by the client, energy meters are proposed for all tenant areas
The earthing system shall be connected to the general mass of earth by connection in the museum, plaza, cinema and other retail/tenanted. Energy meters shall
to the building structural foundations and via driven rod earth pits. include BTU meter for chilled water, water meters for domestic water and gas
meters for LPG. The meters will be connected to the building BMS.
Each LV switch room will be fitted with a wall mounted main earth bar, for general
connection of earthing systems within the area. A separate LV earth pit(s) will be
provided for each LV switchboard/transformer combination . The earth pits will be
provided at ground level.
The earth bar will allow for the connection of building earth provisions, and will
incorporate a proprietary link facility to enable disconnection for testing. The LV
earthing system has separate earth pits. A connection point to the building
structure reinforcement shall also be provided in each LV switch room.
3.4.8.13 SCADA System
In addition to the BMS, a Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

system will be installed to run in parallel. This will be used to control electrical
devices within the MV and LV network, particularly in an emergency power
situation. The system will be extensible to allow for future additional equipment to
be added as the operators and clients require. By operating electrical devices
embedded within the network, the SCADA system will control load shedding under
emergency generation, switching of normally open point for maintenance or
network load shifting and management of load changes and permanent changes in
the network.
Similarly to the BMS, the SCADA system will be accessible via the data network
allowing operation by authorised persons from any point. All alarms and
emergency conditions will be managed via the system and with access within the
central command centre, be available in the event of a fire condition. All
mechanical devices as well as normal monitoring of other systems will be
undertaken by the BMS system, with the SCADA as an additional level of control
for trained personnel to manage the electrical network.
3.5 ENIVORNMENTAL SIMULATION 3.5.6 Indoor Climate
3.5.6.1 Cinema HVAC Simulation
3.5.6.2 Sky-bar
Table of Contents
3.5.1 Executive Summary 3.5.7 Further Work and Work in Progress

3.5.1.1 Site Climate 3.5.7.1 Mesh Performance Analysis
3.5.1.2 Wind and Sand Accumulation 3.5.7.2 Other Work
3.5.1.3 External Comfort: Outdoor Amenity Spaces
3.5.1.4 Façade Performance
3.5.1.5 Indoor Climate 3.5.8 Appendix A: Sand Drift & Wind Comfort
3.5.1.6 Further Work & Work in Progress
3.5.9 Appendix B: Shadow-cast Images

3.5.2 Site Climate Analysis 3.5.9.1 Entrance A
3.5.2.1 Design Weather Data 3.5.9.2 Entrance B
3.5.2.2 External Climate 3.5.9.3 Great Hall Oasis
3.5.2.3 Solar Analysis 3.5.9.4 Library Oasis
3.5.2.4 Wind Data

3.5.3 Wind Comfort & Sand Accumulation
3.5.3.1 Legislative Background
3.5.3.2 Methodology 3.5.11 Appendix D: Material Properties
3.5.3.3 Boundary Conditions
3.5.3.4 Sand Control Measures
3.5.3.5 Sand Drift Prediction
3.5.3.6 Pedestrian Comfort

3.5.4.1 Shading of External Spaces
3.5.4.2 Reducing Long-wave Radiation
3.5.4.3 Evaporative Cooling

3.5.5.1 Solar Exposure of External Skin
3.5.5.2 Proposed Solar Mitigation
3.5.5.3 Shading Performance of the Mesh Skin
3.5.5.4 Mesh Surface Temperature and Head Build-up in the Cavity
3.5.5.5 Fabric Performance
3.5.5.6 Air Leakage
3.5.1 Executive Summary 3.5.1.3 External Comfort: Outdoor Amenity Spaces
3.5.2 Shadowcast analyses indicated that key external amenity spaces have significant
In this study, building simulation software has been used to facilitate the solar exposure during the hottest portion of the year. Strategic planting and
development of the environmental design concepts for the King Abdulaziz Centre shading devices should be incorporated to extend the usability of these areas.
for Knowledge & Culture in Saudi Arabia. The analysis was conducted using
specialist simulation tools specifically designed for the built environment, namely Evaluation of the site’s climatic conditions suggested that evaporative cooling could
the dynamic thermal modelling package IES Virtual Environment®; the be used to enhance comfort in key outdoor spaces. However, water consumption
computational fluid dynamics (CFD) codes FLOVENT® and ANSYS CFX ®; and the would need to be considered. Legionaella risks would also need to be mitigated.
3D rendering software Autodesk 3D Studio Max ® for shadowcast analyses.
3.5.1.4 Façade Performance
The scope of work included:
Shadowcast analyses were used to identify areas of the façade that suffered from
• A site microclimate analysis significant and prolonged exposure to the sun. The results of this study should be
• Using CFD (i.e. airflow simulation) software to evaluate the external wind noted with a view to avoiding large areas of glazing and fresh air intakes being
environment created around the development, with a view ensuring pedestrian sited at these locations. Recommendations for where additional shading devices
comfort and mitigating sand storm and sand accumulation effects. should be incorporated have also been made.
• Providing advice on creating comfortable conditions in key external amenity
spaces such as the oasis gardens. The surface temperature of the external mesh skin can reach up to 75°C
• Computational modelling to evaluate the thermal performance of the building depending on the material specified and orientation of the surface, giving rise to
façade, including solar control measures and fabric insulation standards. potential safety concerns, as well as concerns relating to thermal performance.
• Detailed indoor climate simulation for specific key areas. Stainless steel, which is understood to be the preferred material choice at this
stage, will reach a maximum of 55°C. With a stainless steel mesh and a concrete
The results of the study are summarised below: façade, the temperature in cavity can potentially reach 3-4°C above the external
ambient in areas where there is maximum solar exposure over sustained periods.
3.5.1.1 Site Climate Fresh air intakes should be located in well shaded areas.
The site has an extreme climate, reaching external temperatures in excess of 47°C Thermal modelling indicated that specifying the fabric standards in the table below
and solar fluxes approaching 1000W/m2. Moreover, these conditions can coincide could reduce annual cooling energy demand by 3,324MWh, and peak cooling loads
with high humidity’s. by 235kW. The below fabric standards have been the basis for the MEP design in
the Schematic Design Phase and should be carefully noted.
3.5.1.2 Wind and Sand Accumulation
Fabric Performance: Design Values
CFD analyses have identified areas of wind acceleration that may result in
discomfort for pedestrians. During the next phase of the project, mitigation Thermal Element U-value g-value
measures will be developed and integrated into the design through workshops with
the landscape architect. The effectiveness of the proposed mitigation measures will Wall 0.25W/m2K -
subsequently be assessed using computational techniques. Roof 0.25W/m2K -
The locations that sand is likely to accumulate have been identified using Ground 0.25W/m2K -
computational modelling. Mitigation measures have been suggested to help reduce
sand accumulation. The precise nature and effectiveness of the mitigation Glazing 1.80W/m2K (including 0.30
measures will assessed during the Design Development phase. frame)
Design Fabric Performance
3.5.1.5 Indoor Climate
HVAC modelling conducted on the cinema suggested a constant air volume

displacement system is likely to be more efficient than a constant air volume high
level mixing system. However, variable air volume systems (VAV) are likely to
offer the most substantial energy saving potential.
Detailed modelling of the Sky-bar demonstrated that there would be significant

benefit in: specifying a lower U-value glass (centre pane U-value <1.1W/m2K) in
this area; limiting the glazing height to 2.5m; and introducing shading fins inside
the cavity between the façade and the mesh skin. Additionally, HVAC modelling
indicated that specifying a VAV system is likely to offer substantial energy savings
(>40%).
3.5.1.6 Further Work & Work in Progress
Work is currently being conducted in Autodesk 3D Studio Max to try and provide an
improved understanding of the shading performance of the mesh skin. Findings to
date are reported.
Additional detailed CFD analyses of key spaces, such as the auditorium will be
conducted to help develop and validate the environmental design concepts.
Further computational wind modelling exercises will be conducted to develop the
mitigation concepts for sand accumulation and wind acceleration effects.
to thermal simulations, weather data is generally required in two different formats
3.5.3 Site Climate Analysis depending on the type of analysis being conducted:
The site for the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture is situated near • Peak design conditions – These are used to conduct ASHRAE heat loss and
Dhahran, on the eastern side of Saudi Arabia and is around 8 miles from the heat gain calculations for plant and emitter sizing. This data has been acquired
Arabian Gulf coast, and 250 miles from the capital city of Riyadh, as shown in the from SAES-A-112 of the Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards and is detailed
Figure below. in the Table below.
• Hourly conditions – A ‘typical’ hourly weather year i.e. Jan 01-Dec 31, with
8760 hourly data points for each weather variable (temperature, humidity,
Prevailing solar radiation etc), that is appropriate for the site location. These ‘typical’
wind from weather years are generated from statistical analysis of historic weather data
North West
taken from meteorological stations, and are specifically configured for use with
dynamic thermal modelling software – which can be used to assess the
performance of HVAC systems and predict building energy consumption.
‘Typical weather year’ files are usually obtained from sources such as the U. S.
National Climatic Data Centre (which is used by ASHRAE) or climate databases
such as Meteonorm.
SAES-A-112 Design Dry-Bulb Wet-bulb

temperatures
Summer: Cooling load 44°C (2.5% 25°C (Mean
calculations based on larger Exceedence) coincident)
of
35°C (Mean 30°C (2.5%
coincident) Exceedence)
Summer: Evaporative cooler 38°C (Mean 32°C (1%
sizing coincident) Exceedence) +2°F
Winter 8°C (99% -
Exceedence)
Table of external design conditions
Investigations concluded that an hourly weather data set does not exist for the
Site plan showing prevailing wind direction and sun’s movement across the site Dhahran area. Normally, in such circumstances, the closest available weather file is
used. In the 1st schematic design phase, a detailed analysis of the available
Superimposed on the image above is the annual sunpath diagram, which indicates weather data from a number of nearby locations was performed to ascertain which
the range of the sun’s movement across the sky for this location. Solar access of would be the most appropriate to use for dynamic thermal simulations. (The
the facades and outdoor areas is considered in greater detail later. conclusion of the investigation was that weather data from Doha, in Qatar was
most appropriate). However, some historic weather data for the site has recently
3.5.3.1 Design Weather Data been provided by Saudi Aramco. This data consists of up to 20 years of hourly
measurements of dry-bulb temperature, humidity and wind speed/direction, but
For successful and accurate formulation of the environmental concepts for the does not include solar radiation or cloud cover data. A 3rd party specialist
building, a comprehensive knowledge of the local climate is required. With regard (Meteonorm) was successfully commissioned to perform a statistical analysis on
data, and subsequently generate a ‘typical’ weather year in accordance with EN
ISO 15927-4:2005 ‘Data for assessing the annual energy for cooling and heating
systems’. This typical weather year forms the basis of the site climate analysis
presented here, and has been used in all dynamic thermal modelling exercises
conducted during the 2nd schematic design phase (unless otherwise stated). The
issue of the absence of solar radiation and cloud cover data was overcome by
sourcing historic measurements from the National Aeronautics and Space
Administration Remote Sensing Validation Data for Saudi Arabia, who have a
measurement site at Al Ahsa (around 100 miles from the site).
3.5.3.2 External Climate
Dhahran has an extreme climate, with peak external temperatures frequently

approaching 45°C and peak solar radiation regularly in the region of 1000W/m2.
The most onerous period of the year exists in the months of July and August when Annual variation in relative humidity
high external dry-bulb temperatures can also coincide with high humidity, giving
rise to significant cooling demand. The figures below show a summary of the
climate data for the site, including average annual rainfall. It is clear from the data
that mechanical cooling will be fundamental to maintaining a comfortable indoor
climate, and moreover will essentially be required throughout the entire year.
Cooling energy will therefore form a major component of overall building energy
consumption, and it is important that appropriate strategies to minimise this
demand are incorporated into the design. Control of solar gain and reducing
conduction gain through the building fabric will be critical if cooling demand is to be
successfully reduced, along with efficient HVAC and lighting system design.
Annual variation in solar flux
Annual variation in dry-bulb temperature

Average Annual Rainfall for Dhahran
25
20.4
20
Precipitation (mm)
15.1
15 13.7
11.7 11.2
10
5.1
5
1.1 0.7
0 0 0 0
0
r
ry
ne
y
r
ly
ch
ril
er
st
ay
be
be
be
ar
Ju
Ap
ua
gu
ob
Monthly climate summary
Ju
ar
m
nu
m
em
M
br
Au
ct
ve
ce
Ja
Fe
O
pt
No
De
Se
Annual rainfall data for Dhahran
3.5.3.3 Solar Analysis
For the majority of spaces, solar gain will be a major contributor to the cooling
demand, and consequently it is imperative that suitable mechanisms for limiting
solar gain are integrated into the architectural scheme. To inform the design and
selection of any solar control devices it is important to gain an understanding of
the solar data for the site.
The figure below shows the sunpath on the day of the highest sun angle (summer
solstice, 21st of June), the day of the mean sunpath (equinox, 21st of March or
September) and the day of the lowest sun angle (winter solstice, 21st of
December), as well as an annual sunpath diagram. The graph shows how the sun’s
altitude varies with azimuth angle for the two solstices and the equinox.
It can been seen that the summer months are characterised by very high solar
angles, suggesting that roof surfaces will have prolonged exposure, but at the
same time indicates that relatively short overhangs will be highly effective at
protecting southern facing glazing at this time of year. However, the data also
indicates that particularly high solar fluxes can also occur in conjunction with the
low angle winter sun – which would make exposed building facades significantly
Psychometric Chart with Dhahran weather data overlaid
more difficult to protect without the use of aggressive shading systems i.e. multi- Solar Data for Dhahran
fin arrangements with narrow spacing. 90
85
80
75
70
65
Solar altitude (deg)

60
55
50
45 21st June
40
21st Sept
35
21st Dec
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
N
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
Solar azimuth (deg E of N)
Graph showing solar altitude vs. azimuth for the solstices and the equinox
While the high solar fluxes experienced at the site create onerous conditions in
terms of solar gain, they do give an excellent opportunity to harvest solar energy
Annual
using solar photovoltaic panels. The graphs below show the potential yield from
monocrystalline PV panels in Dhahran (kWh/m2 of panel) for various angles of
inclination. More details of the renewable energy options can be found in the
sustainability chapter of the schematic design report.
Annual energy yield from a South-facing monocrystalline solar PV panel at

different angles of inclination from the horizontal (45% conversion efficiency)
110
Total Annual Energy Yield (kWh/m2 of

100
N N N 90
80
70
solar panel)
60
50
21st June 21st March 21st December 40
30
3D sunpath diagrams for Dhahran 20
10
0
45deg 30deg 15deg 0deg
Angle of inclination from horizontal
2
Graph showing annual yield per m of PV panel at different inclinations
The wind data was analysed (after translation from the measurement site) to
provide the probability of wind emanating from each of the 12 wind directions. The
Monthly energy yield from a South-facing monocrystalline solar PV panel at data is presented as a cumulative frequency wind rose (see below) and shows the
different angles of inclination from the horizontal (45% conversion efficiency) speed and frequency that the wind originates from a particular direction. The wind
rose indicates that the prevailing wind direction for the site is from the north and
12 north-west - which occur about 23 % and 21% of the year respectively. The less
prevalent wind directions are from the west and north-east.
Energy Yield (kWh/m2 of Solar Panel)
10
Joint Frequency Distribution
8 For Raw Data File Saudi Aramco Site Data
45deg
30deg
6 N
15deg
0deg 21.13
4 23.52
0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul 01- Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 9.12
01-31 01-28 01-31 01-30 01-31 01-30 31 01-31 01-30 01-31 01-30 01-31
Graph showing monthly yield per m2 of PV panel at different inclinations 12.17
4.11
3.5.3.4 Wind Data

W 3.41 0.00 5.37 E
At the time of analysis, the most appropriate wind frequency data available was
from the Meteorological station at Bahrain, located east of Dhahran. Wind data
measurements closer to the site have recently been provided by the client and 1.76 7.15
these are currently being processed, however initial analyses seem to show that it
correlates well with the data that has been mathematically translated from
Bahrain. This will be confirmed during the next design stage. The measurements
2.44 6.15
4.37
obtained from the UK MET Office were for the period spanning 1998 - 2007. The
data supplied is based on hourly average wind speeds from a station 2 m above
sea level, where the measurements were taken by instruments located 10m above
ground level.
Factors such as the variation in average wind speed with height above the ground
plane, specific topography and roughness of the site and the surrounding terrain S
mean that the local on site conditions will vary from those at the site where the
Calms included at center.
data was recorded. These physical factors were taken into account using a 0 2 4 6 8 10
Rings drawn at 5% intervals.
software program (Breve2), to translate the wind speed data from the
Wind flow is FROM the directions shown.
Wind Speed ( m/s) No observations were missing.
measurement site (Bahrain) to the site for the King Abdulaziz Centre for
Wind rose for the site
Knowledge & Culture.
It is therefore necessary to modify the wind data for the site to account for terrain
3.5.4 Wind Comfort & Sand Accumulation roughness and the wind velocity profile.
For the analysis, several boundary conditions needed to be considered. At the front
As part of the schematic design process an assessment of the potential impacts face of the virtual wind tunnel a profile is specified for velocity and turbulence
associated with the proposed King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture has parameters according to:
been undertaken in relation to wind. The assessment considers the effect of u∗ ⎛ z + z 0 ⎞ u∗3 u ∗2
U ( z ) = ln⎜⎜ ⎟ , ε= and k =
topography, building shape, building size and hard landscaping features on wind k ⎝ z0 ⎟⎠ κ ( z + z0 ) Cμ
conditions around the site and how this will influence microclimate. A combination
of desktop assessments and full CFD (Computational Fluid dynamics) studies have Where U(z) is the streamwise velocity at height z, z0 is the reference height, u* is
been carried out to assess aspects related to sand accumulation prediction, sand the friction velocity, k is the von Karman constant and z0 is the roughness height,
control, and pedestrian comfort. These studies are still on-going, but the initial Cμ is a constant in the k-ε model. For each face surrounding the virtual wind
results are presented here. tunnel, the following parameters were used (see below Figure):
• Bottom face (ground): all velocities are set to zero and the turbulent sub-
3.5.4.1 Legislative Background layer is specified using a roughness value consistent with the value used to
calculate the profile at the front face. The approaching wind speed and
International policy and guidance turbulence profile simulates suburban conditions for all directions.
The methodology is based on that developed by Bristol University (Lawson, 1990) • Right and left face (opening): a free slip condition is used. This sets
and is described in further detail later. This method is comparable with velocities in that plane by a zero shear stress condition and the perpendicular
international guidance. velocity is set to zero. This closely replicates the real environment;
• Top face (opening): a free slip condition is again employed
National policy and guidance (Saudi Arabia) • Back face (outlet): a zero relative pressure condition is used
An equivalent roughness was used to simulate the effect of the existing buildings
There is no specific national legislation or policy guidance for the assessment of the and site topography outside of the model boundary. An equivalent roughness was
impact that a new development has on the comfort and safety of the local wind used to simulate the effect of the existing buildings and site topography outside of
microclimate. the model boundary. The terrain surrounding The King Abdulaziz Centre to the
south presents only a small number of buildings a considerable distance away -
3.5.4.2 Methodology which have not included in the model. The terrain in the remaining wind directions,
including the prevailing wind directions, does not present any large obstructions -
This study comprises of both desktop and computational assessments. In a only sand. Thus the site presents one roughness category. Within the outer toroid
desktop type approach, the assessments made are of a qualitative nature and are a roughness length of Z0 = 0.1 has been used in all directions and a minimum
based on the experience of our specialist wind engineers and international height of 1m has been applied. Within the inner circle (shown as a flat plane in the
guidance. In computational studies, the assessments made are of a quantitative Figure) a smooth surface was applied.
nature and predict the magnitude of the wind speeds. The simulations of the wind
microclimate were carried out by Computational Wind Engineering (CWE) using the
computational fluid dynamics (CFD) code ANSYS 11.0 with a virtual wind tunnel.
An unstructured mesh and non-isotropic roughness have been used. This is ideal
for large-scale analysis and allows accurate modelling of small airflow features. The
model has been developed by Buro Happold Computational Simulation and Analysis
(CoSA Solutions).
3.5.4.3 Boundary Conditions
Average wind speed increases with the distance from the ground, so this in
conjunction with turbulence influences the resulting wind profiles around buildings.
INLET
SURROUNDING
Table showing percentage distribution for sand settling
TERRAIN
Fine sand particles can have an abrasive effect that may lead to the disturbance
and breakdown of protective metallic oxides and finishes. Local corrosion can be
BUILDINGS initiated on the base metal leading to early failure. Features liable to suffer from
abrasion should be carefully protected by suitable barriers or heavy duty finishes.
The best methods to use for controlling sand on this site are planting and fencing.
Planting is a well recognized method of stopping and binding sand. Fencing is used
for the destruction or stabilization of sand accumulations, and can also serve the
OUTLET purpose of sand stoppage and diversion.
WALL
Local protection to equipment can be provided by wall or screens that can be
erected around the equipment located outdoors - assuming the protective wall
does not impede air flow to condensers and other ventilation equipment.
For the site the following mitigation strategy has been recommended based on our
Virtual domain extent of the baseline conditions (example is for north-east wind specialist knowledge:
direction)
1- The erection of a fence as shown in the figure below to the Northwest edge of
3.5.4.4 Sand Control Measures the site
• Can be up to 50% porosity
The Middle East Technical Memorandum (1990) gives indication of how sand • Volume impounded by fence varies as the square of the height of the fence
moves during storms. Sand storms normally occur with speeds of about 11.1 m/s • Fence is cheap to build and low maintenance
and dust storms with speed about 6.9 m/s. The duration of sand storms is about 2 2- A second layer with low vegetation
hours while dust-storms last around 5 hours. Sand and dust particles settle at • Prevents unburdened wind from reloading itself after passing the fence
speeds below 4.1 m/s. • Shamal winds can reload themselves within the space of 200 feet
Storms are more frequent during the summer time, but vary considerably 3- Security fence if required
according to location and time of year. The table below shows the percentage 4- Second layer in the inner perimeter of low vegetation
distribution for settling sand during a storm for different wind directions and • Again, prevents wind from reloading itself and carrying sand directly onto the
settling velocities. The data indicates that: site
• There are very few sandstorms on the site (about 4hrs/yr) 5- Flat terrain surrounding sloped terrain near the main buildings
• There are quite a few dust-storms at over 6% of the year. However, the • Any obstructions to the wind will result in sand accumulations around the
settling speed of 4.2 m/s is very frequently exceeded, so there could obstructions. Undulations in the ground surface may result in sand
frequently be small amounts of dust moved around accumulation
The sand will initially have to be kept
Small porous fence wet in order to allow the vegetation to
become firmly rooted
outside site to trap sand
Existing trees
Security fence
at site border
Section A-A
Low vegetation
A
A
Low vegetation
Area around ‘pebbles’
The sand will initially have to be kept
should be kept as flat as wet in order to allow the vegetation to
possible become firmly rooted
Existing trees
Section A-A
Sand control features Fence and vegetation system details
The following figures show further detail of the proposed fence and vegetation
system
If new trees are to be planted
a lower layer bush (within 1m
high can help protect new
This area should remain as
trees from sand scouring
flat as possible to prevent
sand from accumulating in and
around undulations in the
ground surface
There should be no dip

created in the ground before
the trees, as this will only
provide an area for sand to
accumulate
To avoid sand accumulation on roads and walking paths the following

recommendation is made:
• Any paths across the site should be sloping such that the down-wind side of
the path is elevated. This will prevent thin layers of sand from accumulating
on the paths. Curved paths should be slightly cambered such that this same
slope is achieved against the prevalent wind direction. Source: ‘Eolian Sand
Control’, Richard C. Kerr and John O. Nigra, 1952
3.5.4.5 Sand Drift Prediction
A CFD model was constructed using the methodology described earlier. Results for
all 12 wind directions are available, but the two key wind directions are analysed
below.
Ground and below ground areas (‘The Source’)
Incoming wind 330
The figures below show the likely distribution of sand drifts caused by the
prevailing north and north-westerly wind directions for the site (see wind data in
the earlier Site Climate Analysis section) for the largest frequency for sand settling
given in table presented previously. Results for other wind directions can be found
B
in Appendix A. (At this stage we are working closely with Snohetta with regards C
integrating the above recommended mitigation measures into the scheme, and
consequently they have not been included in the below analysis. Modelling of
mitigation measures will be undertaken during the Design Development phase.)
A A
Two figures are shown for each wind direction, one with solid buildings and a
second one where buildings have been made transparent to allow observation of
The Source and other areas below ground level (Oasis Courtyards and entrances).
B
The results show that areas below ground level will be subject to sand D
accumulation (Entrances (A), Courtyards (B), and ‘The Source’ (C)). The results
also show that the south edge of the sloping surface surrounding the buildings it is A
subject to sand accumulation (D)
Incoming wind 330 Areas where sand may accumulate; wind incoming from the north-west –with
transparent buildings.
Incoming wind 0
B
B
A A
B A
A
D
A B
A
Areas where sand may accumulate; wind incoming from the north-west – with
buildings shown.
Areas where sand may accumulate; wind incoming from the north – with buildings
shown.
Incoming wind 330 degrees
Incoming wind 0
C B
A
A
Areas where sand may accumulate on the building surface; wind incoming from the
Areas where sand may accumulate; wind incoming from the north –with north-west.
transparent buildings.
Building surfaces Incoming wind 0
The following images show the areas were it is likely sand will accumulate on the
surface of the building. The results for other wind directions are shown in Appendix
A. The results show that some of the horizontal and semi horizontal surfaces are
likely to be subject to sand accumulation.
Areas where sand may accumulate on the building surface; wind incoming from the
north.
Areas where wind may accelerate during storms, 95th% speed for 330˚wind
direction
3.5.4.6 Pedestrian Comfort The figure below shows the wind acceleration for the northerly wind. Fewer areas
where wind acceleration (A) is expected to occur are found when compared with
The following images show the areas where problematic wind acceleration is the results for wind from the north-west.
expected to occur.
Wind Acceleration
The CFD model used to determine sand drift was also analysed to determine areas
within the site were wind may accelerate at ground level. The position of the site
on the highest point of the terrain may leave some of the areas surrounding the
buildings subject to wind acceleration. No landscape in the form of trees, bushes or D
fences have been modelled.
The following figure shows the areas were wind acceleration may be expected to
occur. To represent the wind speeds on site, the 95th percentile wind speed for the D
prevailing wind directions (north-west and north) was used. The areas of orange
and red show areas were it is likely that wind acceleration will be felt. This wind
acceleration will be characterised by funnelling (A), corner (B) and wake (C)
effects. Areas below ground level showed sheltered conditions.
C Areas where wind may accelerate during storms, 95th% speed for 330˚wind
direction
The following image shows the accelerated air flows around the tallest structure on
the site. Façade downwash (D) can be observed, and will create accelerated air
flows at ground level. The figure also shows how lower speeds (E) are experienced
in the Source, and this may cause sand accumulation in this area.
In order to assess the wind comfort around the site, comfort maps were created.
The comfort maps cover the whole of the site on a plane 1.5 m above the ground
level (i.e. wind speeds measured at 1.5m). The Lawson criteria (Lawson, 2001)
were used to assess the wind speeds for different activities. The criteria are listed
in the Table below.
To generate the comfort map, the CWE model was analysed for 12 wind directions
at 30° angles. The 12 sets of wind speed maps were then combined into a single
comfort map for each set of conditions, capturing the overall picture of the wind
effects. At this stage, no mitigation (such as vegetation) has been placed in any
areas of the model. As stated previously, these will be added during the next phase
of the project.
D
Receptor
D Sensitivity Activity
Classification Beaufort Speed %freq
10 Road &
Car parks B5 10.95 6%
E 9 Pedestrian
Business
walking B5 10.95 2%
8 Pedestrian
Walk
through B4 8.25 4%
6,7 Entrances/
The addition of mitigation measures on site will in general aid to the reduction of Standing
B4 8.25 2%
accelerated flow effects. During the next design stage the placement of mitigation
5 Sitting
elements will be studied in detail. Other wind directions showed lower wind speeds B3 5.6 6%
on site, and these images can be seen in Appendix D. Lawson Comfort Criteria (for receptor sensitivity classification see subsequent
table)
Pedestrian Comfort Criteria

Receptor Sensitivity
Microclimate comfort strongly depends on an individual’s activity so has been
defined separately for each activity in terms of an average (mean) wind speed Impact receptors in respect of wind and microclimate are the occupants of the site.
exceeded for a certain percentage of the year. Their sensitivity and the magnitude of any impact will determine the impact
The wind speed boundary conditions applied in the CWE model were based on the significance.
variation of wind speed with height above ground; a speed of 10 m/s at 10 m
above ground was used. This speed was then scaled appropriately for each The sensitivity of a person to changes in microclimate depends on the activity they
direction in the comfort assessment. are undertaking and the comfort criteria definitions, as shown below.
The pedestrian comfort criteria have been developed around the Beaufort scale
(Lawson 2001), extending its applicability to environments in and around buildings.
Receptor Comfort Activity F
sensitivity classification
Very high 5 Sitting E D
High 6, 7 Entrances / Standing
Moderate 8 Pedestrian Walk through B
A2
Low 9 Pedestrian business
walking D A1
Negligible 10 Roads and car parks A3 C
Activities and receptor sensitivity
Comfort map, results & discussion
The figure below shows the comfort map for the King Abdulaziz Centre for
Knowledge and Culture.
The plot clearly shows three corners where wind acceleration may be expected,
showing a “Roads & Car parks” category on the Lawson scale (see A1, A2, A3).
• The location (A3) shows corner acceleration, which may be caused by wind
funnelling at (B).
• Areas South of the buildings show lower speed categories, suggesting they Pedestrian Wind Comfort Map for King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture
will be sheltered (C)
• Areas below ground level also show lower speed categories Conclusions and Recommendations
• Areas on the North of the building present higher wind categories for people • It is recommended that a strategy of fencing and planting should be applied to
walking fast around buildings (D), people walking (slow) (E) and Pedestrian reduce the movement of sand within the site.
standing (F). • Areas below ground of the proposed development showed different degrees of
sand accumulation (entrances, the courtyards and The Source). The removal
of accumulated sand should be part of the maintenance works.
• Some surfaces of the building within the development have been shown to be
subject to sand accumulation. Hence, with the proposed permeable external
mesh skin, there is likely to be an accumulation of sand in the cavity between
mesh skin and the façade.
• Some areas at the base of the building may be subject to wind acceleration
assuming prolonged pedestrian occupation is not desirable, some mitigation at
ground level will be required.
• During the next stage of design further studies will be carried out to aid the
location of mitigation elements at ground level.
The quality of an outdoor space is directly related to how comfortable it is. The
intention here is to provide qualitative design advice that will help maximise the
quality and usability of key outdoor spaces that form part of the King Abdulaziz
Centre for Knowledge & Culture, such as the Oasis Gardens. The figure below
identifies the key external spaces.
Great Hall Oasis

Factors that influence human comfort
Out-doors, people can usually feel comfortable in a wider range of conditions than
would normally be considered acceptable for indoor comfort, varying their clothing
and activity to suit. Unlike a typical European climate, where hot summers can be
followed by particularly cold winters, Saudi Arabia has a climate that ranges solely
Entrance A from warm to the very hot, meaning the design of such outdoor spaces can
essentially be entirely geared towards the mitigation of excessive heat gains to the
Entrance B
occupants – rather than having to carefully balance both winter and summer
comfort requirements.
Improving thermal comfort in an outdoor environment in a hot climate can be

Library Oasis achieved by:
• Controlling direct and diffuse solar radiation
Diagram showing the key areas in the shadow casting analysis • Reducing the radiant temperature - which is governed by both longwave or
‘terrestrial’ radiation emitted from surrounding surfaces, and by the incident
shortwave radiation from the sun
The factors which affect human comfort are illustrated in the below diagram. • Reducing the local air temperature
• Controlling Air velocity
The radiant temperature is probably the most important parameter governing

human energy balance, especially on hot sunny days, and has the strongest
influence on thermophysiological comfort indexes such as PMV (Predicted Mean
Vote) which are derived from heat exchange models. This is because research has
found that living human skin has a particularly high absorptivity and emissivity –
higher in fact than most other materials, matte-black metals included. The table in
below shows the thermal balance for a person (note the contribution from long and
shortwave radiant heat sources).
summer. Hence, these exposure images can be used to determine optimum
locations for external shading features. A graph showing the hourly percentage of
the outdoor space that is in shade has also been produced for the three key dates
identified above. This graph will help identify when solar exposure peaks occur and
the range of shading throughout the year. A selection of images showing shadows
cast on the highlighted areas at different times of the year can be found in
Appendix B.
Entrance A
A 3D image of Entrance A is shown below.
Table showing thermal balance for a human
3.5.5.1 Shading of External Spaces
Reducing the amount of direct solar radiation on the occupants will be one of the
most effective ways of improving comfort in external spaces, as well as helping to
limit the risk to the health and wellbeing as a result of excessive solar exposure.
Autodesk 3D Studio MAX has been used to generate shadow-cast images to -

determine the availability of beneficial shading within the key external public Diagram showing a 3D perspective view of Entrance A
amenity areas identified in earlier. This computer software utilises raytracing
techniques to produce images of shadows cast on the surface of a 3D model for a This area is located to the South-West of the development and will therefore be
given location in the world set by longitude and latitude. most exposed from midday to evening. During the few hours of low altitude sun in
the morning the area receives a limited amount of shade from the East and South
The following key dates have been selected for hourly shadow-casting: perimeter retaining walls and from the proposed buildings on the development.
• 21st June – Summer Solstice (the longest day of the year with highest However, there are currently no overhanging features above this area and
annual sun altitudes) therefore there is very little shading resource throughout the majority of the day.
• 21st March – Spring Equinox (the average day of the year with average
annual sun altitudes)
• 21st December – Winter Solstice (the shortest day of the year with the A plan view image of Entrance A is shown with contours indicating the number of
lowest annual sun altitudes) hours of shade available on the 21st of March. It can be seen from the image that:
• Shade reduces towards the South-West of Entrance A.
For improved clarity and in order to reduce the number of images that would need • Close to half of Entrance A is red on this diagram which signifies no shading
to be scrutinised by the reader, a single contour plot showing the number of hours will be available on the 21st of March and therefore even less throughout the
of shade received on the 21st of March has been produced for each area. If an summer.
area receives no sunlight on the 21st of March then this area will essentially • An element of shade is only available very close to the South-East wall of
receive no sunlight throughout the winter, and likewise if the area receives some Entrance A and this reduces drastically with increasing distance from the
sunlight on the 21st of March then it will have increased exposure during the development.
• Through the summer and midseason the minimum daily area in shade reaches
0%. This highlights the extreme exposure the pedestrians in this area will
0 hrs
experience.
1 hrs • Entrance A receives most shading in the morning throughout the year.
• The area in shade is never greater than 50% between 0900 and 1700 i.e. the
2 hrs core daylight hours.
• Summer afternoon shading begins to increase earlier than the rest of the year
3 hrs due to the greater shading effect from the North-West retaining wall at the
higher solar azimuths at this time of year.
4 hrs
Entrance A receives the least shade of all the amenity areas in this analysis. If
5 hrs Entrance A is to be occupied for any significant period, additional shading will need
to be added, and concentrated in the red to yellow areas shown above.
6 hrs
7 hrs
Entrance B
8 hrs A 3D image of Entrance B is shown below.
Diagram showing the hours in shade experienced in Entrance A on the 21st of
March
Diagram showing a 3D perspective view of Entrance B
This area is located to the East of the development and is approximately a mirror
image of Entrance A, and consequently will be most exposed from morning to
Graph showing the percentage area of Entrance A in shade at the solstices and midday. During the few hours of low altitude sun in the evening, this area is will
equinox receive an element of shade from the West and South perimeter retaining walls,
and from the proposed buildings on the development. However, there is very little
The above graph quantifies the percentage of Entrance A that is shaded at different shading resource in this area throughout the majority of the day. The figure below
times of the year. The following key points should be noted: illustrates the hours of shade available on the 21st of March.
• Throughout the year minimum values of shaded area vary between 0 and 19%
and occur between 1200 and 1500.
0 hrs
The graph in the figure opposite shows the percentage area in shade for Entrance
1 hrs B, and confirms the following:
2 hrs and occur at different times of day.
• During the summer the minimum area of shade reaches 0% and moreover, is
3 hrs particularly low for a large proportion for the hottest portion of the day. This
highlights the extreme exposure the pedestrians in this area will experience.
4 hrs • Entrance B receives most shading in the evening throughout the year.
• The area in shade is never greater than 50% between 0800 and 1400.
5 hrs • Summer afternoon shading begins to increase earlier than in midseason due to
shading caused by the tower building.
6 hrs
If Entrance B is to be occupied for any significant period, shading devices
7 hrs
concentrated in the red to yellow areas shown above are highly recommended.
8 hrs
Diagram showing the hours in shade experienced in Entrance B on the 21st of Great Hall Oasis
March
The figure below shows a 3D image of the Great Hall Oasis.
The following facts can be identified from studying the above figure:
• Shade reduces towards the East of Entrance B.
• Close to half of Entrance B is orange on this diagram which signifies 1 hour of
shade will be available on the 21st of March and therefore even less
throughout the summer.
• Significant shade is only available very close to the South wall of Entrance B,
and this reduces with distance from the development.
Diagram showing a 3D perspective view of the Great Hall Oasis
This area is located to the North-East of the development and will therefore be
most exposed from morning to midday. During the few hours of low altitude sun in
the morning and evening this area receives an element of shade from the
perimeter retaining walls as well as from the building itself in the evening. As there
are currently no overhanging features above this area, there is limited shading
resource in this area throughout the majority of the day. The perimeter walls are
Graph showing the percentage area of Entrance B in shade at the solstices and angled to face slightly skywards gives reduced shading effectiveness when
equinox compared to vertical walls, and the increased exposure of these elements to the
sun is likely to result in higher radiant temperatures in this area. Techniques for
mitigating the latter of these effects are discussed in subsequent sections.
The figure below illustrates the hours of shade available on the 21st of March.
0 hrs
1 hrs
2 hrs
3 hrs
4 hrs
Graph showing the percentage area of the Great Hall Oasis in shade at the
5 hrs solstices and equinox
6 hrs The results confirm the following:

7 hrs and occur between 0800 and 1300.
• Through the summer the minimum daily area in shade reaches 0%. This
8 hrs
highlights the exposure the pedestrians in this area will experience.
Diagram showing the hours in shade experienced in the Great Hall Oasis on the • The Great Hall Oasis receives most shading in the afternoon throughout the
21st of March year.
The following facts can be identified from studying the above figure: • The area in shade after 1400 during midseason increases at a greater rate
• Peak exposure (0 hours) occurs on the East and West sloping perimeter walls. than at the same time in summer or winter due to shading received from the
• The North-East area of the oasis is the least shaded occupied space with tower building.
around a quarter of the area receiving only 1 hour of shade on the 21st of
March and therefore even less throughout the summer. The Great Hall Oasis receives the most shade of all the amenity areas in this
• The most effectively shaded area of this oasis is a small point on the southern analysis. Despite this, there are still large areas with very little shade and
end partly created by the shallower angled perimeter walls in this location. additional shading elements concentrated in the red to yellow areas shown above
are highly recommended.
Library Oasis
0 hrs
The figure below shows a 3D image of the Library Oasis. 1 hrs
2 hrs
3 hrs
4 hrs
5 hrs
6 hrs
7 hrs
8 hrs
Diagram showing a 3D perspective view of the Library Oasis Diagram showing the hours in shade experienced in the Library Oasis on the 21st
of March
This area is located to the South-West of the development and will therefore be
most exposed from midday to evening. During the few hours of lowest altitude sun The following facts can be identified from studying the above figure:
in the morning, this area is likely to receive an element of shade from the retaining • Peak exposure (0 hours) occurs on the southern, low angle perimeter walls.
walls around the East and South perimeter and from the buildings on the • The South-West area of the oasis is the least shaded occupied space with
development. The Library building overhangs approximately 15% of the oasis around a half of the area receiving between only 1 and 3 hours of shade on the
below. This area is considered to be effectively shaded and is not included in any of 21st of March and therefore throughout the summer.
the following calculations. Out with this 15%, there is likely to be very little • The most effectively shaded area of this oasis - other than directly below the
shading resource throughout the majority of the day. Similar to the Great Hall library overhang - is a small area on to the North East end created by shading
Oasis, the perimeter walls of the Library Oasis are angled to face slightly skywards from the library.
which will mean these surfaces receive significant solar radiation - resulting
increased radiant temperatures. Inclined walls also have reduced shading
effectiveness when compared to vertical walls.
The figure opposite illustrates the hours of shade available on the 21st of March.
Graph showing the percentage area of the Library Oasis in shade at the solstices
and equinox
The figure above confirms the following:

and occur between 1100 and 1400.
• Through the summer and midseason the minimum daily area in shade reaches
0%. This highlights the exposure the pedestrians in this area will experience.
• The Library Oasis receives most shading in the morning throughout the year.
• The area in shade after 1400 during midseason increases at a greater rate
than at the same time in summer or winter due to lower midseason altitudes
at this time.
If the usability of the Library Oasis area (excluding 15% area under the
overhanging Library) is to be maximised, additional shading features need to be
added.
Additional shading features
The shadowcast analysis (based on the proposed form and massing of the
development) has shown that large areas of all key outdoor spaces suffer from
significant direct solar exposure. Currently every area considered in this analysis
will receive less than 10% shading during the height of the summer. In order to
enhance the quality of these spaces strategic landscaping and/or additional
shading features, such as canopies, trees etc should be incorporated to increase
protection from direct solar radiation. Some examples of are provided in the figure
opposite. In particular, shading devices should be concentrated to the areas
highlighted in yellow to red colours in the images above. Examples of solar shading for external spaces
3.5.5.2 Reducing Long-wave radiation
As well as reducing exposure to direct solar radiation, it is also important to

favourably control the longwave radiation falling on the occupants in the space.
The aim should be to maintain the temperatures of the surrounding surfaces, such
as the walls or the ground, below the external ambient air temperature – thereby
reducing the radiant temperature. This can be achieved by:
• Shading the surrounding surfaces from solar radiation. The above shadowcast
analysis indicated that the solar exposure of the surfaces surrounding the key
external spaces is high in many areas – particularly the inclined perimeter
walls of the oasis gardens, which also have reduced shading effectiveness
when compared to a vertical wall of the same height.
• Using materials with high albedo and high emissivity. High albedo materials
reduce the amount of solar radiation absorbed by a surface. Materials with
high emissivities are good emitters of long-wave energy and readily release
absorbed short-wave solar radiation. The use of high albedo materials is a
Albedo and emissivity of selected building materials
traditional technique frequently used in hot climates, as shown in the Figure
opposite – which also includes tables giving the albedo and emissivity of a
selection of building materials.
• Increasing the coverage of surrounding ground and wall areas with plants or
vines. Plants will shade the surface and reflect very little of the incident solar
radiation onto the occupants, while at the same time regulating their own
temperature by evapotranspiration (releasing water vapour to the air) –
making them poor radiators of heat.
Reduction of surface temperatures of the surrounding walls etc will also decrease
(or even generate favourable) conductive and convective heat gain in the area.
The graph shown below, which is taken from research at undertaken by the
University of Seville, illustrates the potential comfort benefits that can be achieved
by effective shading of outdoor spaces.
Graph showing the comfort benefits that can be achieved through effective shading
of outdoor spaces
3.5.5.3 Evaporative Cooling
Evaporative or adiabatic cooling is a process by where moisture is added to the air

to provide a cooling effect. As the water evaporates, energy (the latent heat of
evaporation) is extracted from the air, reducing the air temperature and increasing
its moisture content. Evaporative cooling can be used in both internal and outdoor
spaces to improve thermal comfort, but is most typically used externally, and may
be a worthwhile consideration for improving comfort and extending the usability of
Example of the traditional use of low albedo materials in hot climates outdoor garden spaces in the new King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture.
The effectiveness of evaporative cooling depends on the air’s capacity to absorb External Dry-bulb External RH
moisture and hence this technology is particularly suited to dry, arid climates, and
has in fact been used for generations in the Middle East. Analysis of the climate 50 80
data for Dhahran suggests that highest external ambient temperatures most 45
70
typically coincide with low relative humidity, meaning that the climate would
External Dry-bulb Temperature (°C)
External Relative Humidity (%)

40
generally be suitable for evaporative cooling. This is illustrated in the graphs 60
below, which consider the frequency of occurrences of high temperatures and low 35
humidity’s during the hottest portion of the day (1000-1600) in the height of the 30
50
summer (May-September). The figure opposite looks in more detail at a typical 25 40

week in July, and clearly illustrates how peak temperatures are normally coincident
with low relatively humidity’s. 20
30
15
20
Dhahran: External Dry-bulb Tem perature Exceedence 10
May-Sept; 1000-1600hrs
10
5
100%
0 0
90%
01:00
06:00
11:00
16:00
21:00
02:00
07:00
12:00
17:00
22:00
03:00
08:00
13:00
18:00
23:00
04:00
09:00
14:00
19:00
00:00
05:00
10:00
15:00
20:00
01:00
06:00
11:00
16:00
21:00
02:00
07:00
12:00
17:00
22:00
80%
70% Hot week in July

Graph for a typical hot week in July, illustrating that high external temperatures
Exceedence
60%
50%
normally coincide with low humidity
40%
Evaporative cooling is typically delivered using one of two techniques:

30%
20%
10%
• Evaporative cooling towers, which are prevalent in traditional Arabic
0%
architecture. Some examples of cooling towers are shown below, along with
> 30.00 > 32.00 > 34.00 > 36.00 > 38.00 > 40.00 the principle of operation.
External Dry-bulb temperature (°C) • Misting systems such as fountains, sprayers or nozzles. Misting systems are
particularly effective as there is much greater surface area around the
droplets to take heat from the air.
Dhahran: External Relative Hum idity Exceedence
May-Sept; 1000-1600hrs
100%
A well configured evaporative cooling system may help create small oasis’s that
90%
are 5 to 10°C below the general ambient air temperature. The cooling effect can be
80%
further enhanced by encouraging controlled air-movement within the space, either
70%
by passive or active means (e.g. solar chimneys or fans). It is also important that
Exceedence
60%
50%
landscaping or architectural features such as canopies or courtyard-style
40%
arrangements are created to retain the cool air in the locality of the outdoor space
30% and maximise the efficiency of the system. CFD (airflow) analysis software can be
20% used to develop the evaporative cooling concept during the next phase of the
10% project, should this be considered an attractive design option by the client. A figure
0% below shows an example of some CFD work conducted on evaporative cooling by
< 15.00 < 20.00 < 25.00 < 30.00 < 35.00 < 40.00
Buro Happold on another Middle East project.
External relative humidity (%)
External Dry-bulb temperature and RH exceedence for Dhahran

Evapotranspiration from plants (mentioned earlier) also produces a similar local
cooling effect but on a lesser scale than the active evaporative cooling systems
described here.
Care must be taken when designing and installing any water feature to ensure that
the risk from Legionella bacteria is effectively eliminated.
Water consumption will also need to be carefully considered prior to application of

this technology. Preliminary investigations indicate that water consumption might
be of the order of 1 to 2 litres/hr per m2 of treated outdoor space.
Warm air intake

Wetted pad or
sprayer system
Effective stack height

Water supply & drain
Misting systems for evaporative cooling
Cooled air
supplied to space
Evaporative cooling towers
Example of evaporative cooling CFD analysis conducted on another project

• The impact of material selection on the radiant/surface temperatures of the
external skin
As mentioned earlier, the performance of the building façade or ‘envelope’ will be a Solar Gain Fabric Conduction
fundamental aspect of designing an energy efficient building. However, the building Gain
envelope is also one of the most complex elements of any design, as its influence
stretches beyond just improving thermal performance, having to meet the
requirements of the architect and the client, as well as other engineering
disciplines (such as structures, lighting & acoustics).
Infiltration Gain
Architect
Building Envelope Surface/Radiant
Design
Temperature
effects
Client Engineers
Energy transfer through the building envelope
Significance of thermal envelope design

3.5.6.1 Solar exposure of external skin
Just some of the factors that will be influenced by the design of the building
envelope are: The earlier site climate analysis demonstrates that very large solar fluxes are
• Building energy demand experienced throughout the year. Control of solar gain is therefore likely to be the
• Mechanical servicing strategy most crucial factor when attempting to limit peak cooling demand and reduce
• Plant size and cost overall building energy consumption. However, the vast range of solar altitudes
• Thermal Comfort that occur across the year makes the design of solar control devices particularly
• Access to and quality of natural light challenging, requiring a variety of techniques to be employed. The solar control
• Acoustics measures will also have to be balanced against the requirement for natural light
• Structures and build-ability within the building.
• Architecture & Aesthetics
• Client Aspirations Autodesk 3D Studio Max has been used to identify areas of the façade that will be
particularly susceptible to solar gain, thus allowing informed decisions to be made
These factors need to be carefully balanced throughout the design process in order on the location of glazed elements, as well as flagging up areas where increased
to achieve the overall optimum solution. However, the analysis presented here protection (e.g. higher mesh density) would be advantageous. The following study
focuses specifically on the thermal and mechanical aspects, namely: shows the solar exposure experienced on the external face of the mesh skin.
• Control of Solar Gain
• Fabric performance i.e. U-values The solar intensities generated by 3DS MAX are given in lux, but these have been
• Air-leakage i.e. infiltration loosely correlated with solar intensity (W/m2) - which is a more useful parameter
for the analysis undertaken here. (100lux was taken to be approximately 1W/m2.)
The exposure area and duration has been calculated and plotted for different
orientations and times of year. The contour plots show the number of hours the
external skin exceeds a threshold intensity of 800W/m2 and considered three key
solar dates:
• 21st June – Summer Solstice (the longest day of the year with highest
• 21st March – Spring Equinox (the average day of the year with average
• 21st December – Winter Solstice (the shortest day of the year with the
lowest annual sun altitudes)
Please note that the 3D model available at the time of analysis did not include the
oasis below the Library
Overview of Entire Scheme

The images below show the solar exposure experienced on the external surfaces of
the proposed development for the key solar dates.
Diagram showing solar exposure in number of hours over 800W/m2 on external

surfaces on the 21st of March (the spring equinox)

surfaces on the 21st of June (the summer solstice)
Auditorium
The following figure shows the approximate glazed area and the solar exposure on
the Auditorium from three orientations at the key solar dates. The location of peak
solar exposure has also been highlighted.

surfaces on the 21st of December (the winter solstice)
The following points should be noted:

• Peak daily solar intensities occur on inclined or horizontal surfaces in summer
and southern elevations in winter.
• Where possible, the aim should be to concentrate the glazing in areas of
minimum exposure (e.g. NW/NE elevations of tower).
• Rooflights should be avoided or possibly recessed and inclined to face a Diagram showing solar exposure in number of hours over 800W/m2 on external
northerly direction. surfaces of the Auditorium. Proposed glazing is highlighted in red and the location
• Fresh air intakes should be located in shaded areas to minimise the load on of peak solar exposure is circled in black.
the air handling plant. The majority of the North-East and North-West
facades receive the least solar exposure throughout the year and as a result Some of the glazing in the Auditorium circulation area (indicated in red above), will
would be the ideal location for any glazing or ventilation air intakes. receive up to seven hours of solar exposure over 800W/m2. The majority of this
exposure will occur in the afternoon in winter when solar altitude is at its lowest.
Detailed Examination of Key Areas Solar exposure on the glazing reduces as solar altitude increases through spring
and into the summer.
Through communication with the architect, the desired location of glazing has been
established. Following sections look at the solar exposure of these glazed elements Great Hall
in more detail.
The next image shows the approximate glazed area and the solar exposure of the
Great Hall and the adjacent oasis garden from three orientations at the key solar
dates.
and/or
• A deep recess into the façade construction increase shading of glazing by the
building form.
Glazing concepts for the library(rooflight/façade glazing)

surfaces of the Great Hall. Proposed glazing is highlighted in red.
Peak solar exposure of around seven or eight hours over 800W/m2 occurs in
summer on the roof of the Great Hall. The proposed glazing will be most exposed
to solar radiation in the mid-seasons. The other seasons perform better due to an
element of self shading from high solar altitudes in the summer and low solar
altitudes in the winter.
Library
The image below shows the approximate location of glazing and the solar exposure
of the Library from three orientations at the key solar dates. The architectural
vision for the library is to have a central rooflight and for the façade to be
scattered with small glass portals - as illustrated. The approximate location of the
glazing is highlighted in red and the proposed rooflight is highlighted in blue.
The roof of the library is a large area that is close to horizontal in inclination. As a
result, large areas of high exposure on the roof coincide with the high altitude
surfaces of the Library. Proposed glazing is highlighted in red and the proposed
summer sun. This analysis clearly shows that the rooflight will experience extreme
rooflight is highlighted in blue.
solar exposure during this period and will have to perform to a high specification to
maintain internal thermal comfort. It is recommended that the rooflight should
incorporate either or both of the following design features:
• North facing inclination to reduce the incident solar radiation.
The majority of glazing on the South-East and South-West elevation, and on roof or North-East elevations for the three dates considered. Only the South-East
surfaces will experience prolonged, high intensity solar exposure throughout the elevation receives a measure of exposure, peaking in the mid-seasons. Moreover,
year. The North-East and North-West facades receive the least solar radiation due the peak area is a small and does not exceed six hours.
to their orientation and due to the slightly overhanging building form – which
provides a degree of self-shading in certain areas. As such these elevations would
be the preferred location for glazing and plant intakes. The Tower and The Keystone
The image below shows the approximate location of glazing and the solar exposure
The Source on the Tower and Keystone from three orientations at the key solar dates. The
Sky-bar and restaurant at the top of the tower will incorporate significant glazed
The following figure shows the approximate location of glazing and the solar areas. The aspiration for the remainder of The Tower and The Keystone is to have
exposure on the Source from three orientations at the key solar dates. The around 30% of the façade as glass. The approximate location of glazing is
architectural concept for The Source is essentially for it to be fully glazed. The highlighted in red for the Sky-bar, pink for the keystone and blue for all other
approximate glazing is highlighted in red and peak solar exposure is circled in areas.
black.

Diagram showing solar exposure in number of hours over 800W/m2 on external surfaces of the Tower. Glazing is highlighted in red for the Sky-bar, pink for the
surfaces of the Source. Glazing is highlighted in red and peak solar exposure is Keystone and blue for all other areas.
highlighted in black.
The South and West elevations of the Tower and Keystone are most exposed in
The Source elevations are the least exposed surfaces of all those analysed. A winter and to a lesser degree in mid-seasons. In the summer, the high solar
maximum of one hour’s exposure over 800W/m2 is experienced on the North-West altitudes result in very little exposure on these elevations. The opposite is true for
the North and East elevations, as the peak exposure occurs in the summer months
and there is very little exposure during mid-season and winter. The Sky deck
observation gallery and restaurant are likely to be one of the most challenging
areas in terms of controlling solar gains as a result of the extent of the glazing to Void
these spaces. For the tower, where possible, the positioning of glazing should be
biased towards the lowest annual solar exposure elevations, which are to the North Thermal
Envelope
and East.
3.5.6.2 Proposed Solar Mitigation External

Mesh Skin
The current strategy for control of solar gain encompasses the following:
• Efforts have been made to limit the amount of glazing on the building façade
and the locations of glazed elements are being carefully considered (with due
sensitivity to the architectural vision for the building).
• High performance solar control glazing with a total solar transmission or ‘g-
value’ ≤ 0.30 has been specified. The key advantage of using solar control
glazing is that its thermal performance is independent by solar position. It is
also effective reducing at the amount of diffuse solar radiation transmitted to
the building. A precedent study showing some examples of solar control
glazing that satisfies the performance criterion is provided in Appendix C. Light
transmissions of up to 40-50% can be achieved with glazing of this
specification.
• Further solar protection will be provided by an external mesh skin, which will
form part of the overall façade assembly for all areas of the building. The
concept is illustrated below and will create a void between the insulated
building envelope and the mesh itself. The mesh also has the advantage of
maintaining a ‘clean’ façade, masking building services penetrations (such as
intake louvers etc). The possibility of increasing the mesh density where (for
architectural reasons) glazing has been located in areas of particularly high External mesh skin concept to provide shading
exposure –identified in the above solar exposure analysis - is currently being
considered as a design option.
• Additional local solar control measures such as shading fins are also being
considered as a design option for some areas of particularly high exposure –
such as the observation deck and restaurant at the top of the tower, and
perhaps the rooflight in the library. These could be concealed within the void
behind the external mesh façade if required. The figures below show the
lengths horizontal fins that would be required to protect a 3m high piece of
glazing at different orientations based on a study of the solar position data
provided in the climate analysis section.
Single shade Three shades Six shades
Single shade Three shades Six shades
Sun altitude: 21st Jun 44° 21st Sept 36° 21st Dec 19°
Sun altitude: 21st Jun 53° 21st Sept 42° 21st Dec 27° Diagram illustrating length of solar shading required to shade West facing surfaces
Diagram illustrating length of solar shading required to shade East facing surfaces at 3pm
at 9am
3.5.6.3 Shading performance of the mesh skin
At this stage, for the purposes of plant and emitter sizing the performance of the
mesh has been assumed as reducing incident solar radiation on glazed elements by
25% i.e. a conservative estimation. Analyses using the lighting analysis tool
AutoCAD 3D Studio Max are being conducted to try and give a more accurate
assessment of performance. This is discussed in the Further Work and Work In
Progress Section at the end of this chapter of the report.
Ultimately we would recommend experimental testing is conducted to fully quantify

Single shade Three shades Six shades and validate the shading performance of the mesh system if this is to be the final
external skin solution for The King Abdulaziz Centre.
Sun altitude: 21st Jun 84° 21st Sept 63° 21st Dec 39°
3.5.6.4 Mesh surface temperature and head build-up in the cavity
Diagram illustrating length of solar shading required to shade South facing surfaces
at 12pm It is likely that the mesh system will be of metal construction. In the Saudi climate,
this gives rise to following concerns:
• Depending on the surface finish (colour, roughness etc) of the external mesh
skin, very high surface temperatures could be reached. High surface
temperatures will result in higher radiant temperatures, which may affect the
heat gain through the building fabric, as well as external comfort with regard
to radiant gain to building users in the vicinity of the façade.
• The air temperature in the void behind the external mesh skin could be
higher than the local external ambient due to convective heat gains from the
mesh and from the concrete façade. This could place additional demands on
the air handling plant as the fresh air intakes are likely to be located in this
void.
Mesh surface temperature study
The dynamic thermal modelling package IES Virtual Environment has been used to
predict the peak mesh surface temperatures that will be reached for a range of
different material finishes and orientations. The critical variables that affect the
material surface temperature are the solar exposure of the mesh (governed by the
orientation of the surface), and the solar absorptivity of the material. All material
properties were taken from the UK Chartered Institute of Building Services
Engineers (CIBSE) Guide A: Environmental Design. Full details of the material
properties used can be found in Appendix D.
The graphs below show the hourly external surface temperatures on the peak day
for each orientation and different material finish. The key findings of the study are
as follows:
• Depending on the material type, finish and orientation of the surface, the
potential exists the for mesh skin to reach very high surface temperatures. The Graph showing peak external surface temperatures, by material, for a North facing
worst case is horizontal surfaces, which receive prolonged solar exposure façade
throughout the hottest part of the day. East and west facing surfaces can also
present a risk due to their full exposure to low-angle morning/evening sun. For
north facing surfaces, the solar exposure is low, and as a result the external
dry-bulb temperature principally determines the surface temperatures.
• Materials with high solar absorptivity need to be avoided. It should also be
noted that the material absoptivity is highly dependent on the surface finish,
and a significant concern is that sand abrasion will to roughen or ‘dull’ any
metal finish proposed for the façade, substantially increasing its absorptivity. A
good example of this can be seen when comparing a polished and dull surface
of the same material. In the case of aluminium, a polished surface has a solar
absorptivity of 0.1 however with a dull surface this increases to 0.65. The
impact of this on a horizontal plane is a difference in peak surface
temperatures of nearly 40°C.
• Poor material selection may result in surface temperatures reaching
dangerously high levels with significant risk to building users if surfaces are
easily accessible.
Graph showing peak external surface temperatures, by material, for an East facing
façade
At the time of writing, stainless steel appears to be the favoured material choice
for the mesh. It has not been possible, to find any quantitative data relating to the
resilience of stainless steel to sand abrasion i.e. how this will affect its surface
finish, and hence impact on properties such as solar absorptance (due to increased
scattering from non-planar defects within the surface layer). However, some
sources estimate that ‘rough polishing’ may increase the absorptivity of stainless
steel by 22-27%.
Graph showing peak external surface temperatures, by material, for a South facing Graph showing peak external surface temperatures, by material, for a horizontal
façade plane (i.e. a roof surface)
Heat build-up in the façade cavity
The second aspect that requires consideration is the risk of heat build-up in the
façade cavity caused by convective gains from the air passing across the higher
temperature mesh skin as well as from the outer surface of the concrete façade. A
simplified CFD (i.e. airflow) analysis has been conducted on a section of the façade
cavity to predict the ambient temperature in the void if a stainless steel mesh is
used. The analysis was conducted for an element of façade exposed to 1000W/m2
of solar radiation on a still day, when the external ambient temperature is 45˚C
(i.e. a worst case scenario). Two cases were considered:
• Stainless steel with a good quality surface finish
• Stainless steel where the surface has a ‘rough polish’, increasing its
absorptivity by 25%.
Graph showing peak external surface temperatures, by material, for a West facing The results show that there is limited heat pick up across the stainless steel mesh,
façade with the general ambient air temperature in the cavity being is increased by a
maximum of around 0.5 - 1.0˚C for the ‘rough polish’ case. However, more
importantly, it can also be seen that there is an appreciable heat pick-up due to
convection from the concrete façade (which has a higher absorptivity (0.65) than
the steel). Temperatures directly adjacent to concrete façade can approach 48-
49ºC. This said, it should be noted that as this is a steady state analysis it does not
account for the thermal inertia of the concrete, and hence the results are
conservative if anything. However, it does emphasise the importance of locating
fresh air intakes away from areas of the façade that have been shown to receive
maximum exposure for extended periods of the day (see the preceding solar
exposure analyses).
Virtual Environment. The analysis considered the effect on peak cooling loads
(determined using the ASHRAE calculation methodology), and the likely impact on
annual cooling energy demand has been evaluated. The IES thermal model is
shown below.
Dynamic thermal modelling

involves construction of a 3-
dimensional model from the
architectural drawings;
specification of the design
temperatures, internal gains
and all building fabric
details; and setting of
suitable occupancy profiles
and equipment/ lighting
usage patterns. Simulation
of building operation over
the course of one calendar
Diagram showing external skin and façade cavity concept (left) and sectional CFD year is subsequently
model of the arrangement (right) performed using ‘real’
(statistically generated)
weather data appropriate to
the site location – in this
case the Dhahran weather
file discussed earlier.
IES thermal model of the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture
The graphs below show the reduction in the cooling load that can be achieved by
specifying Best Practice standards for the building fabric, rather than the
minimums detailed in the Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (see tables below).
Fresh air loads have been excluded from this analysis.
The results of the analysis indicate that:

• Peak cooling loads can be reduced by 5%, equivalent to 235kW
Plots from CFD model showing air temperature in the façade cavity for polished • Annual cooling energy demand could be reduced by 18%, equivalent to 3,324
stainless steel (left); and roughened stainless steel (right) MWh
3.5.6.5 Fabric Performance
The large external surface area of the façade means conduction gain through the
fabric will be significant. The impact of improving the thermal performance of the
building fabric over the minimum specifications detailed in the Saudi Aramco
Engineering Standards (SAES-N-004: ‘Design and Installation of Building Thermal
Insulation’) has been assessed using the dynamic thermal modelling package IES
Effect of Façade performance on Cooling Load Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: Minimum Specification
5,000 Thermal U-value g-value

Element
4,500
4,000 Wall 0.568W/m2K -

Peak Cooling Load (kW)
3,500 Roof 0.568W/m2K -

3,000
Ground 0.568W/m2K -
2,500
2,000 Glazing None stated. Standard None stated. Standard

clear double glazing clear double glazing
1,500
assumed analysis assumed for analysis
1,000
3.0 W/m2K (including 0.65
500 frame)
0
Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: Minimum Fabric Performance Specification
BH Recommended Fabric - With Mesh BH Recommended Fabric - No Mesh Aramco Fabric - No Mesh (SAES-N-004)
Plaza, Museum & Cinema Library Tower Auditorium Great Hall
Buro Happold Best Practice Recommendation/Design Values

Effect of Façade performance on Cooling Energy Demand
Thermal U-value g-value
20,000 Element
Wall 0.25W/m2K -
18,000
16,000
Annual Cooling Load (MWhr)
14,000 Roof 0.25W/m2K -

12,000
Ground 0.25W/m2K -
10,000
8,000 Glazing (low-e) 1.80W/m2K (including 0.30

6,000 frame)
4,000 Design values for the building fabric/Best Practice
2,000
0 As well as the U-values and g-values of the various elements, it is also worth
BH Recommended Fabric - With Mesh BH Recommended Fabric - No Mesh Aramco Fabric - No Mesh considering the emissivities and albedo of materials when determining the surface
Plaza, Museum & Cinema Library Tower Auditorium Great Hall finish of building facade. (The albedo of a surface is the ratio of reflected solar
radiation to the incident solar radiation.) High albedo materials reduce the amount
Effect of façade performance on peak cooling load and annual cooling energy of solar radiation absorbed by the external skin of the building. Materials with high
demand emissivities are good emitters of long-wave energy and readily release absorbed
short-wave solar radiation.
N.B. All MEP design has been based on a building that meets the Best
Practice fabric standards detailed in the table below. High albedo, high emissivity materials result in lower surface temperatures, which
reduces heat gain through the building fabric, and also decrease ambient air
temperatures local to the building (due to reduced convection from the outside
surface of the building), potentially reducing the demand placed on air handling
plant (depending on the location of fresh air intakes). The External Comfort
section of this chapter of the report gives the albedo and emissivity of various
building materials – which should be considered deciding the fabric make-up.
3.5.6.6 Air leakage
A key aspect of achieving an energy efficient building is to provide an airtight

envelope and to introduce ventilation in a controllable way. Air leakage is the
fortuitous infiltration and exfiltration of air through the building envelope due to
imperfections in its construction. It takes place, for example, through cracks
around doors, windows and gaps in cladding details, as well as where the structure
penetrates the construction envelope – such as service entries for pipes, ducts and
flues etc.
Buildings with poor air-tightness will incur a significant energy penalty, as well as
suffering the risk that excessive demand will be placed on the HVAC systems,
resulting in poor thermal comfort levels. It can also detract from the thermal
performance of the building fabric, by providing a ventilation path within the
construction for heat gain, therefore `short-circuiting' the thermal insulation, and
reducing the U-value of the construction (see Figure).
Air leakage short-circuiting the insulation, pressure testing and good/best practice
Recent revisions to the building regulations in the UK and many other European standards for different building types
countries mean that all new non-domestic buildings need undergo pressure testing
following completion, and demonstrate that they meet the minimum standard for
air-tightness. In the UK, the minimum standard is currently set at 10m3/hr/m2 of
façade when the building is pressurised to 50Pa. The UK Good and Best Practice
standards for air-tightness for different types of building are given in the table in
the opposite, which also shows an image pressure testing being undertaken.
The feasibility of setting a Good or Best Practice target air-leakage rate and
subsequently pressure testing the building should be investigated. Achieving a
good standard of air-tightness requires both well-thought-out architectural
detailing and a high standard of construction. The main concern for the King
Abdulaziz Centre is likely to be that of build-quality and securing agreement from
construction contractors that they will be contractually obligated to deliver a
certain air-tightness. The logistics of having the building pressure tested would also
need to be considered.
It is worth noting that the BRE Building Environmental Assessment Method

(BREEAM) gives credit for a setting air-tightness targets that are validated by post-
construction pressure testing.
Heating Coil
Fixed
3.5.7 Indoor Climate Thermal Flowrate
Wheel Heat Controller
3.5.7.1 Cinema HVAC Simulation Exchanger 4200l/s
Cooling
Dynamic thermal modelling software (IES) has been used to evaluate different Coil
HVAC strategy options for the Cinema. As the cinema is essentially isolated from Supply
its exterior with the exception of small contributions from conduction gain and Temperature
infiltration, the heating and cooling demand is primarily governed by the internal Fresh Air Recirculated Control
loadings and the fresh air demand. As the internal gains are moderate, this would Air (≥18ºC)
typically suggest that a displacement ventilation strategy would be the lowest
Room:
energy solution for conditioning this space. However, due to the potentially Exhaust
22˚C;
significant dehumidification requirements that exist as a result of the onerous Air
50%RH
Dhahran climate, questions have been raised as to whether mixing systems might
be more appropriate - as this would somewhat reduce any reheat requirement on
the supply air to the space (due the lower supply temperatures that are possible
CAV Displacement ventilation system
with a high level system).
The performance of a constant air volume (CAV) displacement system has been Heating Coil
compared to that of a CAV high level mixing system, with regard to total annual Fixed
energy demand. The HVAC schematics for the two systems are shown below. As Flowrate
the supply temperature for the mixing system is lower, a reduced volume flowrate Thermal Wheel Controller
can be used to achieve the same cooling potential. Heat 3650l/s
Exchanger
A further modification to the above systems was also considered. This involved Cooling
introducing a plate heat exchanger (i.e. sensible heat exchange only) between the Coil Supply
supply air and the room return air to help offset the reheat demand. This will also Temperatur
have the added benefit of reducing the enthalpy of the re-circulated air, in turn Fresh Re- e Control
reducing the load on the cooling coil. This modification is shown on the schematic Air circulated (≥12ºC)
in the subsequent figure. Air
Exhaust Air Room
The analysis was based on the internal loadings for the Cinema detailed in the MEP 1120l/s 22˚C; 50%RH
chapter of this report, and - in the absence of any data on the precise nature of the
building usage - assumed that the space was occupied between 0800 and 2200,
daily. The results are shown in graphical form. In both cases, the specific fan
power for the system was taken to be 2.5W/l/s. CAV High level mixing system
Another factor that must be considered is the realistic operational usage of the
cinema. It is highly unlikely that the space will be operating at its design
occupancy for the majority of the year. Moreover, it is also likely that the lighting
will in fact be off for the duration of the show. For this reason it is suggested that a
70% diversity on occupancy and equipment loads, and a 20% diversity on the
lighting gain might be more representative of the actual usage. Consequently the
system performance has been re-evaluated with these diversities applied, and the
benefit of using a variable-air-volume (VAV) mixing system has also been
considered. The schematic for the VAV system is shown below, along with the
Supply/Ret results. A specific fan power of 2.5W/l/s was used in all cases.
urn Air
Plate Heat Heating Coil
Exchanger Supply
Thermal Wheel Temperature
Modification of HVAC displacement and mixing systems to include heat recovery Heat Control
between the room supply and return air Exchanger (≥12ºC)
Plate Heat Room
HVAC System Performance Comparison for Cinema
Exchanger 22˚C;
Cooling Coil 50%RH
Heating Coil (MWh) Cooling Coil Sensible (MWh) Cooling Coil Latent (MWh) Fan Energy (MWh)
Fresh
700 Air
Re- Variable
Exhaust Air
600 53.7
circulated Flowrate
Annual Energy Demand (MWh)
500
77.2
1120l/s Air Controller
46.6
1120-
76.5
400 3650l/s
46.6
53.7
300
335.1
76.2 Schematic of VAV mixing system
78.3
290.3
200
234.9
212.7
100
159.6
91.6
0 29.4 24.1
CAV Mixing System CAV Displacement System CAV Mixing System w/ heat CAV Displacement System w/
recovery on room return air heat recovery on room return
air
Comparison of HVAC system performance: CAV displacement ventilation vs. CAV
mixing system; with and without heat recovery between the room supply and
return air
The results suggest that the displacement system reduces the annual energy
demand for the space by approximately 5% (19MWh), provided a heat exchanger
is added between the room supply air and return air. Without the heat exchanger,
the energy consumption of the displacement system is considerably higher.
HVAC System Performance Comparison for Cinema
450
400
46.6
350 53.7
300 76.2 46.6
53.7
78.3
250 57.9
59.1 34.8
200
61.8
150 234.9
212.7 183.2
171.7
100
152.9
50
29.4 24.1 40.2 30.0
0 0.0
CAV Mixing System w/ CAV Displacement CAV Mixing System w/ CAV Displacement VAV Mixing System w/
heat recovery on room System w/ heat heat recovery on room System w/ heat heat recovery on room
return air recovery on room return return air; diversified recovery on room return air; diversified Auditorium
air load return; diversified load load
Comparison of HVAC system performance for the cinema with a diversified load
applied and heat recovery between the room supply and return air 3.5.7.2 Sky-bar
The VAV system is shown to offer substantial energy savings when compared to The Sky-bar is located at the top of the tower and the architectural aspiration at
the two CAV systems - a 21% reduction in annual energy demand (equivalent to this stage is for this area to be an observation deck, providing views across the site
65MWh). and the surrounding landscape. Hence there is the requirement for significant
areas of glazing, making the servicing of this area particularly challenging as a
Although not investigated here, it is likely that a VAV displacement ventilation result of the potential for large solar gains. An image showing the architectural
system would also offer equally large energy savings. However, it is more difficult vision for the Sky-bar is provided below.
to vary the flowrate through a displacement system because of the requirement to
maintain sufficient pressure in the supply plenum to overcome the pressure drop
through the displacement grilles.
Again although not considered here, another important energy saving measure
that should be adopted is the use of CO2 sensors to control the fresh air intake in
proportion to the occupancy of the space – as in a climate such as Dhahran, a
large element of the load is associated with conditioning the fresh air supply.
The results of this study are likely to be transferrable to other spaces such as the
auditorium. However, initial assessment of the heat gains from the specialist
lighting and equipment in the auditorium indicate that the loads may be too large
for a displacement system. Additional studies will be performed to determine this.
Architectural vision for the Sky-bar
As significantly reducing the amount of glazing was considered to compromise the The following figures illustrate the effect on the monthly peak cooling loads for the
architectural aspiration for the space, additional design features to reduce peak four cumulative improvements made, and also show a breakdown of the peak
cooling loads lave been explored. cooling load for the space. The annual cooling energy demand is also considered.
Fresh air loads have been excluded from the analysis.
The analysis was conducted using dynamic thermal modelling software (IES). An Peak monthly cooling loads (excludes fresh air loads)
image of the thermal model of the Sky-bar, and how it was zoned is provided.
Glazing was assumed to be 3m high and run around the entire perimeter of the
140
130
space. Fabric performance was as per the design values used for other areas of the
120
building detailed in the Façade Performance section. Internal gains were consistent
110
with the design values given in the MEP chapter of this report. 100
90
Perimeter zone 80
W/m2
north-east 70
60
50
Perimeter zone 40
3m north-west 30
20
10
0
il
ly
t
y
ry
ay
ne
r
h
us
be
be
be
pr
r
Ju
Central
ua
ua
ob
M
Ju
ar
ug
A
m
m
em
b
n
ct
e
e
A
Fe
Ja
pt
ov
ec
O
zone
Se
D
N
Perimeter zone Base model Shading fins Improved U-value and shading fins Reduced glazing, improved U-value and shading fins
south-east Monthly peak cooling loads for the Sky-bar for the four scenarios modelled
Dynamic thermal model of the Sky-bar
Skybar cooling load study

Based on the above information the ASHRAE peak cooling loads and the annual
cooling energy demand were assessed for the following scenarios:
• Base case: As currently designed
• Addition of a 0.8m shading fin located above the glass between the façade
and the external mesh skin. Fins located in front of the glass were not
considered at this stage as this could obscure the view.
• Improving the glazing U-value to a centre pane value of 1.1W/m2K
(1.4W/m2K including the frame)
• Reduction in glazing height from 3m to 2.5m
Cooling loads breakdown for July (excludes fresh air loads) • The addition of a 0.8m shading fin above the glass is only effective at certain
times of the day and year, depending on the solar altitude. It does, however,
140 offer around a 4% reduction in annual energy demand for the space.
130
• Reducing the U-value of the glazing reduces the external conduction gain
120
through the façade, but perhaps more importantly also reduces the internal
110
100
surface temperature of the glass. This helps to reduce radiant temperatures
90
in the space and means that the air temperature and dry-resultant
80 temperature are more closely aligned. The significance of this is that less
cooling of the air is required to achieve the same internal design (dry-
W/m2
70
60 resultant) temperature of 22°C.
50 • As would be expected, the greatest reduction in peak cooling loads is
40 achieved by reducing the glazing height to 2.5m. It is felt that this measure
30 would still provide adequate viewing potential to the outside and should be
20
strongly considered. Around a 16% reduction in annual cooling energy
demand over the base model is achieved with this configuration. Reducing
10
0
-10
the amount of glazing also helps to reduce radiant temperatures in the
Base model Shading Fins Improved U-value and Reduced glazing ,improved space.
shading fins U-value and shading fins
Internal gain Solar gain External conduction gain Internal condiction gain Infiltration gain Dehumidification
The graph below shows the peak difference between the dry resultant and the air
temperature in the space for each of the scenarios modelled. The dry-resultant
Sky-bar Cooling load breakdown for peak month (excluding fresh air load) temperature is the equally weighted average of air and radiant temperatures in the
space, and gives a truer representation of internal temperature as perceived by the
118
116
occupant.
114
112
Annual cooling + dehumidification (MWh)
Dry resultant and air temperature difference for peak summer month
110
108
106 3.1
104
2.9
Dry resultant - air temperature difference

102
100 2.7
98 2.5
96
2.3
94
92 2.1
90 1.9
88
1.7
86
Base model Shading Fins Shading Fins with improved Shading Fins with improved 1.5
glass U-value glass U-value and reduced glass
1.3
Annual energy demand for cooling and dehumidification for the Sky-bar (excluding
fresh air loads) 1.1
0.9
00:00 02:00 04:00 06:00 08:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 16:00 18:00 20:00 22:00 00:00
The graphs indicate that: Base model Shading fins

Improved U-value and shading fins Reduced glazing, improved U-value and shading fins
Graph showing peak difference between the dry-resultant and air temperatures. Heating Coil
Supply
Temperature
Skybar HVAC simulation Thermal Wheel Control
Heat (≥12ºC)
Unlike the cinema, the heat gains to the Sky-bar will be significantly affected by Exchanger Plate Heat Room
the external conditions – in particular solar gain. The sizing of the HVAC system for Exchanger 22˚C;
the space will be based on the peak external design condition and the design Cooling Coil 50%RH
values of internal gains, but the frequency with which these conditions will arise
Fresh
will be relatively low. Hence the energy saving benefit of specifying a variable air
Air
volume (VAV) system over a constant air volume (CAV) system has been
investigated. Although the large floor-to-ceiling height is favourable for Re- Variable
Exhaust Air circulated Flowrate
displacement ventilation, the cooling loads in the Sky-bar are too great for a pure
576l/s Air Controller
displacement approach to be used, and consequently high level mixing systems are
considered here. Typically the maximum cooling potential of a displacement 1500-
system is around 50-60W/m2 due to the practical limits on the number of floor 4000l/s
grilles that can be installed, and the fact that the supply temperature needs to be VAV mixing system for Sky-bar
higher than with a high level mixing system due to comfort considerations.
However, a hybrid/quasi-displacement option is discussed later. The results indicate that annual energy demand is reduced by 45%, equivalent to
103MWh. The ability of the system to ramp down in response to reduced heat
The HVAC schematics for the VAV and CAV system are shown below and the gains offers appreciable energy saving potential. The graph opposite shows the
results are provided in the graph. A specific fan power of 2.5W/l/s was assumed in supply volumes for the two systems for an arbitrary week in the mid season, and
both cases. illustrates this point well.
Heating Coil
Fixed flow HVAC System Performance Comparison for Sky-bar
controller
Thermal Wheel 4000l/s
Heat
250
Exchanger
Cooling Coil
200 51.1

Fresh Plate Heat
14.1
Air Exchanger Supply 150
temperatu
Exhaust Air Re- re control Room 111.4
25.8
576l/s circulated (≥12ºC) 22˚C; 100 9.5
Air 50%RH
74.9
CAV mixing system for Sky-bar 50
53.2
16.5
0
CAV Mixing System VAV Mixing System
Comparison of annual energy demand for Sky-bar: CAV vs. VAV
Supply Volume Comparision for typical mid season condition
CAV Mixing System VAV Mixing System
4500
4000
3500
Supply Volume (l/s)
3000 Supply diffusers

2500 (12degC)
2000
Radiant
1500
effect from
1000 glass
500
0
00:05 16:45 09:25 02:05 18:45 11:25 04:05 20:45 13:25 06:05 22:45 15:25
Week in March
Supply air volume comparison for atypical week in the mid-season illustrating how
the VAV system is able to ramp down to its minimum flowrate.
Sectional plot taken though the Sky-bar showing temperature distribution in the
space for the high level mixing system (4000l/s @12˚C)
Hybrid displacement system for the Sky-bar
As mentioned earlier, one HVAC option that is being considered for the Sky-bar is
the use of a hybrid displacement-type ventilation system, where low level
perimeter slot diffusers supply air at are used to provide supplementary cooling
and mitigate warm radiant effects from the glazing during peak load conditions.
The CFD (airflow simulation) package FLOVENT® has been used to illustrate the
concept. The figures below show the vertical temperature distribution in the Sky-
Perimeter slot
bar for the high level mixing system and the proposed displacement approach.
diffusers blowing
cool air up the
The key advantage of a displacement-type system is that only the occupied portion
glazing (14degC)
of the space needs to be conditioned. On the other hand higher volumes are
required to condition the space due to the higher supply temperatures that are
required. However, this said, it may be suitable to ramp down of shut off the
perimeter system at when the external conditions are less onerous. The space Low velocity
dehumidification requirements may also incur an energy penalty with this type of twist diffusers
system as a result of the increased reheat requirements – although this could be (18degC)
Occupied zone
somewhat offset by recovering heat from the return air from the space. (This
principle was established earlier.)
Sectional plot taken though the Sky-bar temperature distribution in the space for
the low level displacement ventilation system (2600l/s @18˚C) with perimeter slot
diffusers (2000l/s @14˚C):
Ultimately, this concept requires further appraisal in the next design stage.
3.5.8 Further Work and Work In Progress Angle = 150°
3.5.8.1 Mesh performance analysis
Simulations are currently being performed to attempt to quantify the shading

performance of the external mesh skin that is currently proposed for the King
Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge & Culture. A section of the proposed mesh design
is shown below, along with the architectural visualisation.
Diagram showing an architectural visualisation and section of the façade design
Diagram showing renders of the 3D façade model

Methodology
A 3D model was constructed in Autodesk 3DS MAX. This can be seen in the figure A daylight system within MAX allows the 3D model to be placed in the appropriate
opposite, along with the dimensions acquired from the manufacturers. (The world location defined by longitude and latitude and the resulting calculation of the
curvature of the façade was introduced to reduce the required length of model hourly illuminance levels on the surface behind the mesh to be made. The
during extreme sun angles therefore reducing calculation time and CPU memory illuminance calculation includes direct, diffuse and reflected components.
requirement to complete the analysis.) The analysis has been completed on the spring equinox (21st of March) and the
table below shows the periods of the day that illuminance calculations were
performed.
Model Exposure comparison
Orientation Period
East 0700-1000 The percentage reduction in illuminance levels as a result of the mesh skin have
South 1000-1300 been plotted on the graph below.
West 1300-1700
Horizontal 0900-1700
Table showing the periods of analysis for each orientation
The above periods were defined by the duration in which an area approximately
1m x 1m was shaded from the sun solely by the mesh - and not by part of the
curved building geometry. An example of the output from one of the renderings is
shown in below.
Graph showing the percentage reduction in illuminance on the inner skin of the
double façade caused by the mesh outer skin for the given orientations and times
on the 21st of March
Initial inspection of the results shows a fairly consistent performance throughout

the day, however, the reduction is of a higher magnitude than would probably be
expected. The manufacturer states that the mesh will produce a free area of 50%.
This would suggest the percentage reduction in illuminance should not be greater
than 50% particularly if calculation of the reflected light has been complete, as it
has in this case.
This increased performance can be explained by studying the graph below, which
shows the percentage area of the concrete façade that is in direct light i.e. no
diffuse component.
Diagram showing an example rendered image from 3DS MAX of the illuminance on
the surface of the concrete building façade behind the external mesh skin
Illuminance renders similar to that shown above were completed for the periods
and orientations mentioned both with and without the mesh skin. The average
illuminance level was then calculated for each image to allow a comparison of
performance.
• Additional computational wind engineering to develop the mitigation
strategies for reducing sand accumulation and undesirable wind acceleration
effects.
Graph showing the area receiving direct solar exposure for the given orientations
and times on the 21st of March
There are a couple of points to note from the above figure

• For the worst case scenario of a horizontal façade, the area exposed to direct
solar radiation does not reach above 40% of the analysed surface. The
exposure on the horizontal is lower than the free area of 50% because of the
curvature applied to the mesh in this analysis – which improves its shading
efficiency.
• When comparing the exposure to direct light on the horizontal surface with
the south facing surface, there is a drop in direct light exposure. From this,
we can conclude that the shading performance of the mesh is a function of
the angle of the sun in relation to the mesh. So for vertical elements, as
solar angle increases, so does the shading performance of the mesh. In the
analysis performed here, this effect may have been amplified by the
curvature of the model and as such, the performance stated should not be
considered as being completely accurate. At time of writing, this analysis was
work in progress and further models are to be analysed to achieve a greater
understanding of performance.
3.5.8.2 Further work
Other work will include:

• Further dynamic thermal analyses and detailed air flow simulations to
facilitate the development of the environmental design concepts for key
spaces such as the auditorium.
3.5.9 Appendix A: Sand Drift & Wind Comfort On Building surfaces for different wind directions (deg E of N)
On ground and under ground areas for different wind directions (deg E of N)
30 60 90
30 60 90
120 150 180

120 150 180
210 240 270

210 240 270
300 330 360

300 330 360
95% exceedence wind speed for different wind directions (deg E of N)
30 60 90
120 150 180
210 240 270
300 330 360

3.5.10 Appendix B: Shadow-cast images
3.5.10.1 Entrance A
Summer solstice
21st March 1400 21st March 1600
21st June 0700 21st June 0900 21st June 1100

Winter Solstice
21st December 0900 21st December 1100 21st December 1300

Spring Equinox
21st December 1500
21st March 0800 21st March 1000 21st March 1200

3.5.10.2 Entrance B
Summer solstice
Winter Solstice
21st June 1300 21st June 1500 21st June 1700 21st December 0900 21st December 1100 21st December 1300
Spring Equinox
21st December 1500

3.5.10.3 Great Hall Oasis
Summer solstice
Winter Solstice
Spring Equinox
21st December 1500

3.5.10.4 Library Oasis
Summer solstice
Winter Solstice
Spring Equinox
21st December 1500

0.88 0.25
3.5.12 Appendix D: Material Properties Copper Polished Material Properties
Conductivity Density Specific Heat
Aluminium Polished Material Properties Capacity
Conductivity Density Specific Heat 384 W/(mK) 8600 kg/m3 390 J/(kgK)
Capacity Surface Properties
3
45 W/(mK) 7860 kg/m 420 J/(kgK)
Emissivity Solar Absorptivity
Surface Properties
0.02 0.18
Emissivity Solar Absorptivity Copper Dull Material Properties
0.03 0.1
Conductivity Density Specific Heat
Aluminium Dull Material Properties Capacity
Conductivity Density Specific Heat 384 W/(mK) 8600 kg/m3 390 J/(kgK)
Capacity
Surface Properties
45 W/(mK) 7860 kg/m3 420 J/(kgK)
Surface Properties
0.3 0.65
0.3 0.65
Car Paint Material Properties Steel Polished Material Properties
Conductivity Density Specific Heat Conductivity Density Specific Heat

Capacity Capacity
0.5 W/(mK) 1950 kg/m3 837 J/(kgK) 45 W/(mK) 7800 kg/m3 480 J/(kgK)
Surface Properties Surface Properties
Emissivity Solar Absorptivity Emissivity Solar Absorptivity
0.47 0.5 0.086 0.2

Zinc Polished Material Properties
Ceramic Material Properties Conductivity Density Specific Heat
Conductivity Density Specific Heat Capacity
Capacity 113 W/(mK) 7000 kg/m3 390 J/(kgK)
3
1.4 W/(mK) 2500 kg/m 840 J/(kgK) Surface Properties
Surface Properties
Emissivity Solar Absorptivity 0.045 0.55
Definitions
Thermal conductivity: The property of a material that indicates its ability to

conduct heat.
Density: The ratio of the amount of matter in an object compared to its volume i.e.
the mass per unit volume.
Specific heat capacity: The measure of the heat energy required to increase the
temperature of a unit quantity of a substance by a certain temperature interval.
Emissivity: The ratio of energy radiated by the material to energy radiated by a

black body at the same temperature.
Solar Absorptivity: The ratio of the radiation absorbed by a surface to the total
radiation incident on the surface
3.6 SUSTAINABILITY ENGINEERING 3.6.5.4.2 Natural Building Materials
3.6.5.4.3 Sustainable Aggregates
3.6.5.4.4 Finishes
Table of Contents 3.6.5.4.5 Glazing
3.6.5.4.6 Thermal Mass and Phase Change Materials
3.6.1 Introduction
3.6.5.5 Sustainable Construction
3.6.5.5.1 Air Tightness
3.6.5.6 Traditional Construction
3.6.5.7 External Envelope
3.6.3 Energy/Carbon Emissions

3.6.6 Waste
3.6.3.1 Overview
3.6.6.1 Legislation and Policy
3.6.3.2 Creating the Baseline
3.6.6.2 Construction Waste
3.6.3.3 Setting a Carbon Emissions Reduction Target
3.6.6.3 Operational Waste
3.6.3.4 Demand Emissions
3.6.6.3.1 Targets and Aspirations
3.6.3.4.1 Building Design
3.6.3.4.2 Building Construction
3.6.3.4.3 Building Services
3.6.7 Health and Wellbeing
3.6.3.4.4 Building User Appliances
3.6.7.1 Overview
3.6.3.4.5 Building User Education
3.6.7.2 Healthy Buildings
3.6.3.5 Increased Efficiencies
3.6.7.2.1 Indoor Air Quality
3.6.3.5.1 Trigeneration
3.6.7.2.2 Daylight
3.6.3.5.2 Minimising Conversion and Distribution Losses
3.6.7.2.3 Artificial Lighting
3.6.3.6 On-site Energy Regeneration
3.6.7.2.4 Noise
3.6.3.6.1 Concentrating Solar Power (CSP) Overview
3.6.7.2.5 Thermal Comfort
3.6.7.2.6 Green Space
3.6.7.2.7 Legibility/Joy in Use
3.6.4 Water
3.6.4.1 Overview
3.6.4.2 Benefits of Reducing Water Consumption
3.6.8 Pollution
3.6.4.3 Waste Water Plan
3.6.8.1 Overview
3.6.4.3.1 Distributed Wastewater Treatment
3.6.8.2 Low/No Pollution Buildings
3.6.4.4 Irrigation
3.6.8.2.1 Refrigerants
3.6.4.4.1 Smart Irrigation
3.6.8.3 Insulation
3.6.4.5 Leak Detection/Water Metering
3.6.8.4 Light Pollution
3.6.4.6 Water Efficient Fittings
3.6.8.5 Watercourse Pollution

3.6.9 External Environment
3.6.5.1 Overview
3.6.9.1 Native Vegetation
3.6.5.2 Benefits of Sustainable Material Specification
3.6.9.2 Planting
3.6.5.3 Life Cycle Assessment
3.6.5.4 Materials
3.6.5.4.1 Eco-labels
3.6.10 Education/Demonstration
3.6.10.1 Overview
3.6.10.2 Educational Trail
3.6.10.2.1 Energy
3.6.10.2.2 Materials
3.6.10.2.3 Waste
3.6.10.2.4 Water
3.6.10.3 Distinguishing Green Features
3.6.11 Conclusions
3.6.12 Appendix
3.6.12.1 Irrigation Water Demand Calculations
3.6.12.2 Deletrious Materials
3.6.13 Glossary/References/Figures
LEED and BREEAM
There are numerous recognised environmental assessment methods throughout

the world: including CASBEE from Japan, LEED from the US and Green Star from
Australia and BREEAM from the UK.
Saudi Aramco has expressed a preference for carrying out pre-assessment

estimates for LEED (US version) and BREEAM assessments, in order to ascertain
probable ratings for the full assessment. Pre-assessments will be undertaken
following schematic design phase 2.
3.6.3 Energy/Carbon Emissions Step 4: On-Site Energy Generation
Determine the viability of on-site energy generation through renewable
3.6.3.1 Overview energy resources to offset or eliminate the remaining energy use in the
building.
Minimising the energy consumption by the proposed King Abdulaziz Centre for
Knowledge and Culture development will have two primary benefits: The steps outlined above should not be conducted in isolation, as they are required
1. Reduction of running costs through the life of the development. as part of a holistic approach and there may be some overlap e.g. smart
2. Minimisation of carbon dioxide emissions associated with energy use. mechanical system controls that can reduce the demand on cooling systems which
in turn means the chillers work at peak efficiencies for a longer period of time.
Following on from the ‘Mean-Lean-Green’
strategy outlined in the Schematic Design Implementing these steps allows an ‘Energy Conservation Opportunities (ECO)
Phase-1 report, this can be further expanded Framework’ to be developed. This enables factors such as economics, life
by setting out a general procedure for expectancy and occupant comfort to be considered, in addition to less quantifiable
analysing the energy and carbon footprint of areas including how the particular measure aligns with the goals of King Abdulaziz
the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Centre for Knowledge and Culture, the effect on building operation and appearance
Culture. and also the general view of this measure by the public.
This provides a best practise methodology to 3.6.3.2 Creating the Baseline

implement energy savings strategies for the
built environment and can be illustrated by the Prior to considering reducing the energy consumption of a building it is essential to
adjacent typical diagram. set a baseline for the annual energy demand.
Setting the baseline, by predicting the annual energy consumption of a building
Figure 2.1 – Typical energy consumption pre-occupation, is an exercise heavily reliant on assumptions and use of
benchmark data from previous similar projects in comparable climates. Owing to
This demonstrates the reduction of building energy consumption, through lowering the bespoke ‘one-off’ nature of the development and its location in the KSA, these
demand, increased efficiencies, and approach on-site generation. benchmark figures are not readily available, hence assumptions have been made
Based on this energy strategy the following four steps outline the general as to predicted energy demands.
procedure that has been used to analyse and propose the energy saving strategies
described later in this report. The current estimate indicates an annual energy baseline in the region of 13,500
MWh per annum. For the purposes of this report, this figure shall be deemed to be
Step 1: Create Baseline the baseline for the proposed King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture
Create baseline energy demand using established benchmarking tools. development.
Step 2: Reduce Demand It is anticipated that detailed energy profiles for the buildings may be produced by
Compare strategies to baseline performance and make assumptions in order others during the Detailed Design Phase. The calculations can be reviewed and any
to quantifying these strategies. Examples include; improved glazing and necessary adjustments made accordingly at that time.
insulation, increased day lighting and passive solar features.
3.6.3.3 Setting a Carbon Emissions Reduction Target
Step 3: Optimise Performance
Identify efficient building energy strategies, equipment performance and Although there are currently no recognised targets for carbon emissions reductions
system selection. MEP systems, once properly sized, can be optimised. in the KSA, it is possible to set an aspirational target for the development using
Controllability and operational issues can be examined to determine the most internationally recognisable standards.
energy efficient use and mode of operation for the building.
Buro Happold has researched existing standards that have been adopted by
international cities around the world, finding that only the UK currently has 3.6.3.4.1 Building Design
recognised emissions reductions targets in two of its major cities, both of which
now enforce these requirements through local planning. These range from 10% to Passive building design measures are often the lowest cost energy saving
20% depending on location and the scale of the particular development. measures.
Although not strictly a carbon emissions target, the Kyoto Protocol has been Measure Improvement
established to help combat global climate change. All countries that ratify this
protocol commit to reducing their emissions of carbon dioxide and five other green
house gases, or engaging in emissions trading if they maintain or increase Orientation Orientating the buildings correctly reduces demand
emissions of these gases. The protocol now covers more than 170 countries for cooling.
globally, including Saudi Arabia who joined in January 2005.
Orientating buildings to ‘self shelter’ from prevailing
Membership of the protocol shows a commitment to reduce carbon emissions
throughout the particular country. It is easier to reduce the energy requirements of winds reduces infiltration of unconditioned air into
a new building than existing stock and hence it must be viewed as mandatory that the building.
all new buildings have these targets. As such, the proposed SACC should aim to
limit emissions as much as is practical.
Daylighting Daylighting minimises use of artificial light.
In line with the UK, a target of 20% for the development could be adopted. It is
Perimeter zones will require very little artificial light
envisaged that detailed discussions will be required with King Abdulaziz Centre for
Knowledge and Culture to obtain their agreement to aspiring to reach this figure. for much of the year if designed properly.
Therefore, based on the energy consumption baseline prediction presented in
Section 3.02, the reduction target for the development will be approximately 2,700 Solar Minimising unwanted solar gains can help to prevent
MWh per annum. This reduction will be achieved through the steps outlined below
in this report. Shading overheating and reduces loads on active cooling
systems.
3.6.3.4 Demand Emissions
Solar shading can be achieved through self shading,
Mitigation of carbon emissions starts with strategies and solutions to reduce the
energy demand within the building. such as other buildings and deeper window sills.
Within demand reduction there are five key areas that all contribute to overall
energy reduction. These include both passive and active measures: Optimised Optimising glazing ratios requires a balance between
Building Design Glazing many of the factors outlined above.

Building Construction Ratios
Building Services
Building User Appliances
Building User Education
3.6.3.4.2 Building Construction
The energy efficiency and demand reduction measures in this section of the report
set out a framework that should be implemented within the building designs The table below sets out passive building construction measures. It is also vital
wherever technically and economically feasible to help mitigate carbon emissions that the construction of the building meets the specified design standards to
and also to reduce the running costs of the SACC development. ensure energy savings can be realised during the operation of the building.
3.6.3.4.3 Building Services
Measure Improvement Active technologies for energy efficiency include optimising the cooling, ventilation
and other building services to minimise energy consumption.
Improved Air Improved air tightness will help to minimise losses
Tightness of conditioned air through the facades and
Measure Improvement
unconditioned ambient air entering the building.
Low Energy Where mechanical ventilation is required preference will
This includes;
Ventilation be given to efficient low air velocity systems wherever
• Ensuring quality of building process
design constraints allow. Systems should be designed
• Good detailing to avoid thermal bridging. to allow a low specific fan power to be achieved.
• Sealing of joints
Low Energy All buildings in the development should implement low
• Use of infiltration barrier membranes where Lighting energy lighting designs.
appropriate
This should include high efficiency fluorescent tubes in
• Increased testing above building regulations internal and external light fittings (or white LEDs if
commercially viable), high frequency ballasts and mirror
luminaires.
Thermal Moderation of environmental conditions through
Mass use of thermal mass. Task focused lighting to allow lower general lighting
levels.
Thermal mass reduces overheating and helps to
provide a stable, comfortable environment, when Lighting Artificial lighting is often left on whilst not required,
coupled with night time cooling strategies. Controls greatly increasing energy consumption. Effective
controls can reduce this.
Quality of Measured building performance is often worse
Construction than design as poor construction increases Efficient switching layouts to allow selective lighting of
infiltration and thermal bridging. Monitoring of areas.
construction quality to meet design values. Occupancy based lighting controls for public areas
Best practise detailing around joints, services and (passive infrared detectors) including external lighting
penetrations and areas with infrequent occupancy.
Timing controls with default activation and manual

override. Fans process, or if used in conjunction with variable volume
ductwork systems.
Daylighting sensing and dimming to maintain optimum
light levels (photocells) including external lighting.
Automatic Minimising loss of conditioned air from the internal
Door Closers spaces.
Night Cooling The building’s heat can be purged from the building and
the fabric pre-cooled to reduce the demand for cooling
Commissioning Many buildings fail to reach their design intent due to
during the day.
poor initial commissioning of building systems.
Zonal Buffering The building should be zoned logically to allow areas not Follow up commissioning every 3 months over twelve
Controls in use to have their air conditioning requirements months from practical completion is recommended.
minimised.
Maintenance Regular maintenance of plant and systems through an
Intelligent Each building should use intelligent control systems. appropriate maintenance programme shall assist in
Controls plant and system efficiencies over time.
Building Management Systems (BMS).
Sensors (temperature, humidity, light, occupancy etc) Efficient Use of low energy consumption IT and communication
and fully adjustable actuators. Appliances and technology equipment.
Small Power
Power Factor Power factor correction equipment to achieve power
Devices
Correction factor correction above specified levels.
Absorption
Efficient Chiller High efficiency chillers with high COPs.
Cooling
Plant
Variable Speed Variable speed pumping can deliver significant energy

Inverter savings versus constant speed pumping, if the pipework
Controlled systems are designed to be variable flow.
3.6.3.4.4 Building User Appliances
Pumping
The types of applicances and equipment used within buildings, such as office
Variable Speed Higher rated fans will be equipped with variable speed equipment, desktop computers, server rooms, white goods (refrigerators, washing
machines etc) and other small power loads, can have a significant effect on
Inverter drives yielding significant energy savings versus building energy consumption.
Controlled constant speed equipment, either via commissioning
Measure Improvement Educational pack on climate change and energy
efficiency.
‘A’ Rated Appliances used on a regular basis should, where
Energy feasible, be ‘A’ rated under the Energy Star labelling Simple User Over complicated building controls often mean they
Efficient system. Controls go unused. Simplified building controls together with
White proper commissioning can lead to reduced energy
Goods consumption.
Timer Timer switches automate the switching off of User Control User control of the environment within comfort
Switches equipment. This is particularly useful when buildings of the bands (including lower comfort temperatures)
are unoccupied for set periods of time e.g. out of Environment ensures plant is optimised to meet comfort criterion
opening hours. efficiently rather than cooling buildings below
required temperatures.
3.6.3.4.5 Building User Education
The way occupants use a building has a significant effect on energy consumption. 3.6.3.4 Increased Efficiencies
By setting clear policies, establishing clear and simple feedback mechanisms and
through education, building energy use can be significantly reduced resulting fewer 3.6.3.5.1 Trigeneration
carbon emissions.
There is no Energy Conservation Opportunity with greater individual potential for
the proposed King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture development than
Measure Improvement the provision of an on-site trigeneration facility. The environmental impact through
increased efficiencies is far greater than any other measure and would facilitate
Simple User Simple user ‘handbooks’ for buildings allow meaningful reductions in carbon emissions
and help mitigate the effects of global and
Guides for occupants (and facilities managers) to effectively local climate change.
Buildings make changes to reduce energy consumption.
A trigeneration system, providing
simultaneous heating, cooling and power, is
On-Display On-display metering has been shown to make
understood not to be included with the
Metering occupants more aware of their energy consumption current cost plan for development. This would
be the most efficient means of supplying the
and its cost resulting in reductions in energy use.
energy required by the buildings.
Education ‘Soft landing’ building handover from Contractors. Figure 3.3 – Schematic trigerenation
Programme Training for building facilities managers. The design and specification of the central plant, distribution and building systems
and Training will fall under the scope of the MEP design for the project, however SAT will
provide advice on potential concentrated solar power (CSP) systems that can be concentrating solar power an attractive renewable energy option in sunbelt regions
integrated as part of the overall power and cooling systems. CSP technologies worldwide. The amount of power generated by a concentrating solar power plant
allow steam to be produced by circulating oil through distribution pipework, which depends on the amount of direct sunlight. Like concentrating photovoltaic systems,
is then passed through steam generators, driving turbines and producing these technologies use only direct-beam sunlight, rather than diffuse solar
electricity. Waste heat is also utilised to produce chilled water for space cooling radiation.
purposes, via absorption chillers. Refer to section 2.6 of this report for details of
proposed CSP technologies applicable to the SACC development. There are three primary CSP technologies being promoted internationally. For each
of these, there exist various design configurations.
3.6.3.5.2 Minimising Conversion and Distribution Losses 1. Parabolic Trough Systems
2. Parabolic Dish Systems
Ensuring that conversion and distribution losses are minimised where possible, will 3. Power Tower Systems
help to reduce the quantities of energy that require to be produced to serve the
SACC development. The three systems noted above shall be further considered within this report, in
This includes both the design, construction and maintenance of the systems to relation to the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture development.
ensure that the correct types and quantities of, for example, insulation is specified,
installed correctly and also maintained suitably. In terms of environmental benefits of using CSP systems, the majority of the solar
field components can be recycled and re-used. However, this has to be balanced
with the fact that water is required to frequently clean the mirror panels of the
3.6.3.6 On-site Energy Generation collectors in order to maintain their optimum efficiencies.
On the basis of the SD-1 report we understand wind power, traditional solar Suitable plant space will require to be
thermal, geothermal energy and night sky cooling technologies will not be identified for the solar array and
considered at a building scale, however these measures will be utilised for additionally the orientation of the
demonstration purposes. panels will require to be optimised
between achieving the maximum
SAT will, therefore, consider Concentrated Solar Power (CSP) as the main exposure to the sun, while not causing
renewable energy option, with the intention of further developing this at Design any issues with glare from within the
Development stage with Buro Happold MEP to conclude if this type of system is buildings or surrounding areas.
both technically and financially viable for the proposed SACC development.
Based on a report produced by
3.6.3.6.1 Concentrating Solar Power (CSP) Overview Greenpeace, the European Solar
Thermal Power Industry Association
CSP plants produce electrical power by converting the sun's energy into high- (ESTIA), and SolarPACES, the adjacent
temperature heat using various mirror configurations. The heat is then channelled table shows the technical and economic
through a conventional generator. The plants consist of two parts: one that collects potential of solar thermal power plants
solar energy and converts it to high grade thermal energy, and another that throughout the world.
converts the thermal energy to electricity. Waste heat from the electricity
generation process is in turn used to provide heating and hot water or cooling via This demonstrates the economic
absorption cooling process. potential for solar thermal power in
Saudi Arabia is extremely large,
CSP systems can be sized for village power (10 kilowatts) or grid-connected highlighting the viability of this type of
applications (up to 100 megawatts). Some systems utilise thermal storage during technology in this location.
cloudy periods or at night to ensure a constant supply of energy. These attributes,
along with world record solar-to-electric conversion efficiencies, make
The table also highlights the high direct normal irradiance in the KSA compared to Trough designs can incorporate thermal storage—setting aside the heat transfer
other world locations. fluid in its hot phase—allowing for electricity generation several hours into the
evening. Currently, all parabolic trough plants are "hybrids," meaning they use
Figure 3.4 – Solar thermal potential fossil fuel to supplement the solar output during periods of low solar radiation or at
night after thermal storage has been depleted.. Examples date back to 1981 in
Almeria, Spain where a 0.5MWe system was built using troughs and oil as the heat
Parabolic Trough Systems transfer fluid and storage medium.
Buro Happold understands that ‘APS Solargenix Inc’ produce a 1MWe generating
capacity system, examples of which can be found in Spain. This type of smaller
plant may be suited to the proposed SACC development, as opposed to the larger
scale systems the company produces to feed into national electricity grids.
Arizona Public Service (USA) have procured a 1MWe parabolic trough plant for
installation at the company's existing, gas-fired Saguaro Power Plant near Red
Rock, Arizona. The plant has approximately 111,300 square feet of parabolic
trough solar collectors that are designed to produce in the region of 2,000 MWh/yr.
Figure 3.5 – Parabolic trough system
Trough systems concentrate the suns energy via parabolically curved, trough-
shaped reflectors onto a receiver pipe running along the inside of the curved
surface. This concentrated solar energy heats oil flowing through the pipe, and the
heat energy is then used to raise steam, generating electricity in a conventional
steam generator.
A collector field comprises many troughs in parallel rows

aligned on a north-south axis. This configuration enables
the single-axis troughs to track the sun from east to west
during the day by rotating on their horizontal axis, to
ensure that the sun is continuously focused on the Figure 3.7 – Parabolicc dish collector
receiver pipes. Large scale individual trough systems
currently can generate a maximum of around 80 MW of
electricity, but much smaller plants can also be used.
Advantages Disadvantages
Figure 3.6 - Parabolic trough collector
Proven technology- over 12 billion The use of oil based heat
transfer medium limits
Parabolic dish systems are the least mature of the three CSP technologies
kWh of installed system operating temperatures to
described, but offer high conversion efficiencies.
400degC, resulting in only
High potential for annual net plant
moderate steam qualities
efficiency Advantages Disadvantages
Primarily used for larger scale
Commercially proven investment
grid connected plants Stand alone, small off grid power Reliability needs to be
and operating costs
systems. improved
Modularity
Immaturity of technology Not yet mass produced, costly
Best land use factor of all solar
Very high conversion efficiencies Dish tracking systems require
technologies
regular maintenance
Modularity
Storage capability
An example of this type of CSP system is the 0.4MWe eight dish stirling engine
Parabolic Dish Systems system located in Huntingdon Beach, California.
Parabolic dish systems consist of a parabolic-shaped point focus concentrator in
the form of a dish that reflects solar radiation onto a receiver mounted at the focal Power Tower Systems
point. These concentrators are mounted on a structure with a two-axis tracking A power tower converts sunshine into clean
system to follow the sun. The collected heat is typically utilized directly by a heat electricity. The technology utilizes many
engine mounted on the receiver moving with the dish structure. large, sun-tracking mirrors (heliostats) to
focus sunlight on a receiver at the top of a
Stirling and Brayton cycle engines are currently favoured for power conversion. tower. A heat transfer fluid heated in the
Projects of modular systems have been realized with total capacities up to 5 MWe. receiver is used to generate steam, which,
The modules have maximum sizes of 50 kWe and have achieved peak efficiencies in turn, is used in a conventional turbine-
up to 30% net. generator to produce electricity.
Parabolic dish concentrators are comparatively small units with a motor generator Early power towers utilised steam as the
at the focal point of the reflector. Overall size typically ranges from 5 to 15 metres heat transfer fluid; current US designs
in diameter and 5 to 50 KW of power output. For economic reasons systems are utilise molten nitrate salt because of its
currently restricted to unit capacities of about 25kWe, but multiple dish arrays can superior heat transfer and energy storage
be used in order to accumulate the power output upwards to the MWe range. capabilities. Current European designs use
Because of its size, the future for dish technology lies primarily in decentralised air as heat transfer medium because of its
power supply and remote, stand-alone power systems. This type of system would high temperature and its ease of handling.
therefore be suited to the proposed development.
Figure 3.9 – Power tower system
These systems are generally used on a more commercial scale to feed electricity
Figure 3.8 – Parabolic dish system
into national grids in particular countries. As such, further investigation would be
required to ascertain if a smaller, bespoke installation could be viable for the King
Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture development.
Advantages Disadvantages
High operating temperature Generally used for larger scale

potential grid electricity systems
Storage at high temperatures
Hybrid
3.6.4 Water 3.6.4.3 Waste Water Plan
Distributed Wastewater Treatment Systems (DEWATS) applications are based on
3.6.4.1 Overview the principle of low maintenance since most important parts of the system work
without technical energy inputs and cannot be switched off intentionally. DEWATS
Water is the world's most precious resource; life itself depends on it. It is therefore applications provide state of the art technology at affordable prices because most
imperative that we manage this resource as effectively and efficiently as possible materials necessary for construction are locally available.
to ensure a water supply for future generations. King Abdulaziz Centre for
Knowledge and Culture shall be an iconic project and should be seen to set 3.6.4.3.1 Distributed Wastewater Treatment
examples of responsible and efficient use of water.
Systems are designed such that maintenance is reduced to the minimum of
occasional routine work. Daily attendance is not necessary, but, there should be
someone on-site who understands the system. The following is a typical
maintenance schedule:
• Anaerobic Tanks: need to be desludged at calculated intervals (usually 1 to 3

years).
• Anaerobic Filters: need to be flushed every 5 to 10 years. Horizontal Gravel

Filters: require replacement after 5 to 15 years washing of the gravel.
Utilising a recycled water supply, saves potable water that would have been
brought in from an outside source or groundwater wells.
As there is already a local waste water treatment plant, there will not be an on site
treatment facility.
Figure 4.1 – Water feature wall at building entrance.
3.6.4.4 Irrigation
3.6.4.2 Benefits of Reducing Water Consumption
Eliminating the need of potable water for irrigation and reducing the necessary
For the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture development the use of
irrigation requirements of the landscape is a goal for the Saudi Aramco Cultural
non-potable water resources should form a key element in promoting the project’s
Centre. No water will be requested from the local potable water supplier to meet
sustainable achievements and alleviating pressures on the potable mains supply.
irrigation needs as all necessary irrigation water requirements can be met by
Reducing water consumption shall reduce the costs associated with water use, and
utilizing recycled water and raw water. The King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge
can also reduce capital expenditure by reducing the water storage volumes require
and Culture irrigation plan is a fully self-sustaining element of the development
for the development.
plan.
Additionally, the use of water recycling techniques will help to limit the
This goal will be achieved by implementing the following three strategies:
developments reliance on mains water sources, should there ever be issues with
availability of supply within the local area. Again this is an example fo where these
1. Maximize use of native vegetation. Native vegetation requires little to no
measures can add to future proofing of the building, contributing to overall
maintenance because it is adapted to local soil, hydrologic, and climactic
sustainability.
conditions.
Reduced water consumption delivers carbon mitigation through lowering off site
2. Use reclaimed wastewater and stormwater for irrigation. Treated wastewater
and on site pumping energy and waste water treatment.
from buildings can be collected and reused for irrigation. Use of reclaimed
water reduces demand for valuable and limited potable water resources.
3.6.4.5 Leak Detection / Water Metering
3. Utilise efficient irrigation technologies. Smart irrigation technologies are
available that can significantly increase the efficiency of landscape irrigation. Water leak detection and reduction of leakage is a current concern in the province,
Through computer controlled reading of soil moisture and plant although leakage had now been reduced to approximately 18% and District
evapotranspiration rates smart irrigation systems water plants only when Metering Areas are currently being introduced.
required.
3.6.4.4.1 Smart Irrigation
Smart Controllers for irrigation work on a simple principle: provide the appropriate
watering schedule, adjust for weather changes and irrigate based on the needs of
the landscape.
Figure 4.4 – Water meter
Water meters with should be provided to monitor the volume of water consumed
by the development, for both potable water and recycled / grey water systems.
‘You can’t monitor what you can’t measure’
Fitting a water meter raises people’s awareness of how much water they use at
home, and encourages them to avoid wasting water. By saving water, they also
save money on their water bills. Studies show that water meters lead to a 5-15%
reduction in water use.
In the longer term, metering may help change individuals’ water using behaviour
and influence the water fittings and appliances they buy. It is normal in most other
Western European countries for houses to be metered and for those customers to
Figure 4.2 - Smart irrigation system in action. Figure 4.3 – Sensor pay for the water they use, which typically is less than the water we use in England
and Wales.
There are a variety of weather-based "smart" controllers available for commercial

applications. Whether it is real-time on-site weather data or historical weather
data, the new "smart" controllers leave little room for error.
With smart controllers installed over-watering and excessive run-off will be

avoided, by scheduling the amount of irrigation based on the type of landscape and
current weather conditions.
A sensor which directly feeds into a regulator assesses the moisture content of the
soil; this connects to any automatic watering system. This system can deliver a 30-
70% saving in water demand, produce healthier landscaping, save money and
reduce power costs.
Figure 4.5 - Water leak detection unit Figure 4.6 - Solenoid valve in operation
Leak detection systems inside and outside of the building will help reduce water
lost.
3.6.4.6 Water Efficient Fittings
In order to further minimise water requirements for the development, water

efficient fittings should be fitted. Sanitary fittings should include low flush toilets
(2-4 litre), low flow showers (less than 9 litres), column taps or aerated taps.
Figure 4.7 – Aerated tap Figure 4.8 – Dual flush toilet

3.6.5.1 Overview
The design and construction of a building heavily influences energy performance.

Implementing a high performance building envelope will greatly improve building
efficiency, reduce energy consumption and enhance occupant comfort.
3.6.5.2 Benefits of Sustainable Material Specification
The specification of materials should take into account the embodied energy
required to produce the material. This ranges from the energy required to extract
the raw material to that required to process and transport the finished product.
The primary benefits of sustainable construction and specifying materials with low
embodied energy and good whole life performance, is to reduce carbon emissions
and reduce lifecycle costs associated with the materials.
It is often true that the embodied energy of a material is relatively insignificant,

compared to the energy saving potential offers in the long term. The project should
aim to find and use materials which deliver on all aspects of environmental
sustainability.
Figure 5.1 - Preliminary calculation for potential embodied energy of materials

utilised in the construction of the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture
3.6.5.3 Life cycle assessment
A life cycle assessment (LCA) is a comprehensive scientific examination of the

environmental and economic effects of a product at every stage of its existence,
from production to disposal and beyond. It looks at the impacts of the 'product
system', including:
the mining and extraction of raw materials;
fabrication;
transportation;
use;
recycling/ disposal;
energy and ancillary material supplies.
A typical LCA exercise will comprise: 3.6.5.4 Materials
goal and scope definition to describe the application covered, the reasons When selecting materials important factors include durability and low or no
for the study, target audience and a detailed technical description of the maintenance.
"product system”
All materials should be used efficiently, with little or no wastage, and derived from
life cycle inventory analysis which is the compilation and quantification of renewable and responsible sources. Reused or recycled materials (such as
the environmental inputs and outputs for the product system throughout its aggregate) will reduce the demand on raw materials and the associated impacts.
life cycle The environmental issues considered reflect the generally accepted areas of
concern related to the production of building materials
life cycle impact assessment to understand and evaluate the size and
significance of the potential environmental impacts of the product system Climate Change Global warming or greenhouse gases
Fossil fuel depletion Coal, oil or gas consumption
interpretation or the conclusions and recommendations from the findings of Ozone depletion Gases that destroy the ozone layer
the life cycle inventory analysis and impact assessment in line with the Human toxicity Pollutants that are toxic to humans
defined goal and scope. Waste disposal Material sent to landfill or incineration
Water extraction Mains, surface and groundwater consumption
Acid deposition Gases that cause acid rain
Ecotoxicity Pollutants that are toxic to the ecosystem
Eutrophication Water pollutants that promote algal blooms
Summer smog Air pollutants that cause respiratory problems
Mineral Extraction Metal ores, minerals and aggregates
Materials which can be utilised in their natural state, and require little or no
processing will reduce the demand for energy in production. Locally sourced
materials will minimise transport impacts and emissions / pollution associated with
transport. Where vernacular materials can not be used, modern low-embodied
energy materials should be considered.
As well as reducing the impact of transporting materials over long distances, the
sourcing of local materials benefits the communities and economies of the area,
adding to the social and economic effects of sustainable development and ensuring
the benefits of the projects are felt on a wider basis.
The materials selected should be suitable for the local climate, and in particular
should not degrade rapidly in extreme temperatures or harsh desert environments.
The re-use of waste material from the construction process should also be
considered.
3.6.5.4.1 Eco-labels
There are many different labelling systems currently operating in the EU with
Figure 5.2 – Life cycle analysis labels appearing on a wide range of products, however, in the UK there is no
system which specifically represents the construction industry. Standards set by health and lifecycle.
each label differ and are subject to change, and therefore must be checked before
specification. Green Seal is a US based label that also has an expanse of information and a high
level of transparency.
The EU Flower is currently the most common ecolabel in the UK. It was
established in 1992 and is administered in the UK by Defra.The label Although there are many other European ecolabels, not many have resources in
represents many products ranging from detergents to hardwood flooring. English. The Healthy Building Network is useful resource providing information on
As yet, very few UK products carry the EU flower but the system is toxicity and environmental justice.
popular in mainland Europe. The EU Flower aims to be the most
recognised ecolabel in Europe and incorporates environmental issues and 3.6.5.4.2 Natural Building Materials
the precautionary principle into its criteria.
Building with natural materials such as earth, sand, clay, and straw creates long
The Swan ecolabel - developed for the Scandinavian market in 1969. lasting surfaces that have an inherent natural look. The refreshing quality of nature
The website contains useful information in English, such as a list of can be brought indoors with these building methods. Some of these methods can
registered products as well as criteria relating to the standards each be used to construct entire buildings, but they can also be used on a much smaller
product must achieve before being certified. The Swan ecolabel certifies scale for their aesthetic qualities.
a broad range of products including many of relevance to the
construction industry. STRAW CLAY: Rich clay is mixed with wheat straw and tamped down into a
mold from the top. When dried the forms are removed and the wall is
Nature Plus is an international eco-label for sustainable covered with another layer of clay with small bits of straw mixed in and
building products.Founded in Germany by a number of sealed with linseed oil. Makes beautiful interior walls.
specialist building materials suppliers and trade co-
operatives, they only certify products that are comprised RAMMED EARTH: Soil composed of clay and sand is compressed into a
of a minimum of 85% of renewable raw material, or are form, creating a very smooth surface. Walls are usually about a foot thick,
from mineral based materials. There are strict limits placed on the use harmful and provide great thermal control. If done correctly, the resulting structures
substances ensuring that no health risks are posed from the building materials. Life are extremely durable. (The Great Wall of China is made mostly of rammed
Cycle analysis is accounted for through visits to the production facilities and earth!)
through consideration of durability/life span of the product. Initially, only limited
sections of the website were in English, however, this is gradually being updated CORDWOOD: This building process uses small pieces of wood that might
and when completed the site will prove a useful resource. normally be discarded or used for firewood. The small logs are layered into
place with their ends sticking out. Mortar is applied to connect each log.
The German Blue Angel label also contains a vast range of products Other materials can be added to create an interesting surface.
and an information resource on its website. The Blue Angel Label was Greenhomebuilding.com suggests using glass bottles to bring in light. The
the first ecolabel, although criticism has been levelled at it and other end result is a beautiful rustic surface.
systems (such as BRE’s Green Guide to Specification) that they have
become devalued and watered down through too much trade STRAWBALE: Bales of straw are used as insulation in strawbale
influence. construction. The walls are usually framed with wood, filled with straw, and
then covered in a stucco finish. Care must be taken to ensure that the bales
The Austrian Institute for Building Biology and Building Ecology do not retain moisture to avoid rotting. The finished product provides
(Österreichisches Institut für Baubiologie und Bauökologie – IBÖ) excellent insulation qualities.
administers what is considered by most European ecological
designers and specifiers, to be the ultimate ecolabel for
manufacturers to aquire. They set very strict standards for building
products and furnishings which incorporate environmental impact,
3.6.5.4.3 Sustainable Aggregates
Low VOC Latex Paints: The actual amount of VOCs varies among different
There is growing pressure on producers and consumers to move towards a more “low VOC” products, but it is required that the true amount be listed on the
sustainable resourcing of construction aggregates by reducing the consumption of paint can. To be considered “low VOC”, paints and stains must not contain
primary aggregates through switching to recycled or secondary aggregates. more than 200 grams of VOCs per litre, while varnishes must not contain
more than 300 grams of VOCs per litre. For children's exhibits and
Recycled Aggregates: derived from reprocessing materials previously used environments, or people with chemical sensitivity, it is recommended that
in construction. Examples include recycled concrete from construction and you use paints containing less than 25 grams of VOCs per litre.
demolition waste material (C&DW) and railway ballast.
Metal Primer: Low odour, low VOC thermoplastic acrylic emulsion primer
Secondary Aggregates: usually by-products of other industrial processes with rust inhibiting pigments. Designed for non-porous metals, iron, steel,
not previously used in construction. Secondary Aggregates can be further aluminium, galvanized and masonry. Least toxic metal primer on market,
sub-divided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. formulated without heavy metals and other common chemical hazards.
Examples of manufactured secondary aggregates are pulverised fuel ash
(PFA) and metallurgical slags. Natural secondary aggregates include china Sealants: If for some reason it is not possible to buy plywood or sheet
clay sand and slate aggregate. material that is formaldehyde free, sealants are available that will trap the
chemical and prevent it from off-gassing. Interior water-based sealant can be
3.6.5.4.4 Finishes used to reduce toxic off-gassing, for porous surfaces such as particle board,
plywood and processed wood.
Non-Toxic Paints and Finishes
“Non-toxic” is used in the most liberal sense in describing many paints. Even zero- Waxes: A variety of waxes for wood products, furniture made with no
VOC (volatile organic compounds) paints contain small amounts of toxins. Within synthetic chemicals. Includes floor wax, hard wax, beeswax, oil wax and
the interior paint category, there are generally three categories of non to low-toxic drum wax.
paints: Natural, Zero VOC and Low VOC. Natural is the safest, zero VOC second
safest, and low VOC third safest when considering applications for children's Wood and Wood Alternatives: Woods marked as FSC certified (Forestry
exhibits or environments. Stewardship Council) guarantee natural beauty as well as a commitment to
forestland sustainability. Both hard woods and soft woods are available with
Natural Paints are paints made from natural raw ingredients including plant oils, FSC certification in a variety of species. Suppliers of FSC wood are now
resins, dyes; milk casein, natural latex, beeswax, earth and mineral dyes; and plentiful, so a local supplier of FSC timber should be readily identifiable.
natural minerals like chalk and clay. Water based natural paints are the safest
paints for health and the environment. Sustainable Harvested Certified Wood: Sustainably harvested certified
wood products come from well-managed forests. Third party certification
Milk paints are completely natural paints made from milk proteins, lime, organizations create a system of standards to ensure that the product is
and natural mineral pigments. Organic paint ingredients specially designed environmentally responsible.
for people with multiple chemical sensitivities, pregnant women, children's
furniture and toys. Made with lime, clay and earth pigments Reclaimed Lumber and Timbers: Reclaimed lumber is a source of wood
products that are beautiful and strong and that help decrease the demand on
Figure 4.3 - Warning label on toxic substance forest resources. The wood is salvaged from sources such as old buildings,
railway sleepers, or sunken logs at the bottom or rivers.
Zero VOC Latex Paints: Any paint with VOCs in the range of 5
grams/litre or less can be called “Zero VOC,” according to EPA Sheet Materials: Sheet materials make up a significant part of a
standards. Even if a manufacturer calls a product “Zero-VOC,” construction process. There are two important things to consider when
these paints may still contain fungicides or colorants with some buying sheet material like plywood. Firstly establish the formaldehyde
VOCs. content of the product. Formaldehyde is a common component in the binders
used to hold the wood particles together. The gasses produced from this chemical By their nature these materials tend to have low embodied energy, as they can be
are probable human carcinogens. Secondly encourage that the product is FSC locally sourced, require little processing and are readily available.
certified.
3.6.5.4.5 Glazing
Low-e glazing (low emittance glazing) refers to a metallic oxide coating applied to
the inner face of a double or triple glazed unit which reduces heat loss and heat
gains through the glass and thereby improves the thermal performance of the unit.
To keep the sun's heat out of the house (for hot climates, east and west-facing
windows, and unshaded south-facing windows), the Low-E coating should be
applied to the outside pane of glass.
In the climate of Saudi Arabia solar coatings will help reduce the amount of solar
gain in the buildings and in conjunction with solar shading systems, will reduce the
resulting cooling loads. Consequently, energy consumption will be less and plant
requirements reduced.
3.6.5.4.6 Thermal Mass and Phase Change Materials

Figure 5.3 - Example of traditional construction
Usually materials that are specified for thermal mass, have poor thermal capacity
Consideration of these points will lead to a building that is sympathetic to its
and poor ecological credibility. A relatively small amount of water can be a solution
surroundings, whilst being modern and sustainable.
to the provision of thermal storage in lightweight super insulated buildings. Water
is more than twice as dense as concrete, while being ecological, non-hazardous
and available at zero cost. 3.6.5.5.1 Air Tightness
Phase change materials allow the selection of heat take up and temperatures and
Sustainability is ultimately about reducing the carbon dioxide emissions that are
are a much more effective thermal buffer than water or glass. A range of phase
causing global warming and driving climate change, giving us increasingly extreme
change materials products is becoming available for incorporation into ceilings and
and unstable weather conditions. One of the main attributes to this are leaky
walls to increase the thermal capacity of both lightweight and existing buildings.
buildings. Escape routes for air are caused by design flaws and routes where the
There is real potential for the development of phase change materials using plant
air can escape through the services and thermal bridges. The following figures are
derived oils and waxes.
recommended for air tightness and u values:
3.6.5.5 Sustainable Construction
Air permeability value of less than 2m3/hr/m2@ 50 Pa
All aspects of sustainable construction, from minimising and sorting site waste to
U-Value ≤ 0.15 W/m2/K for all components of the exterior shell
recording and monitoring of material waste, should be encouraged on site.
On site this will encompass reduction of pollution through minimising and
U-Values ≤ 0.80 W/m²/K for glazing and frames, combined, with solar heat-
monitoring transport carbon dioxide, airborne pollution, water course pollution and
gain coefficients around 50%1.
carbon dioxide emissions.
3.6.5.5 Traditional Construction
The construction practices and materials which have been borne out of many
generations of expertise should be incorporated into the design wherever practical.
Traditionally foundations and walls were built with coral taken from the seashore or
from the surrounding hills, which were below sea level millions of years ago. The
coral blocks were held together with mortar made by mixing sand and lime, which
was produced by firing coral in large vats. The floors of each level were
constructed by laying unhewn wooden poles side-by-side and covering them with
palm matting and mortar.
Structures built with these materials were not only cheaper than those built with
stone, but are also surprisingly durable. After more than a century of hard use,
buildings are still structurally sound, a testament to the durability of traditional
building techniques and materials.
3.6.5.7 External Envelope
External solar shading protects inhabitants from glare and direct solar radiation.
South facades should be shaded horizontally and east / west facades shaded
vertically; north facades require minimal solar shading. Shading is linked to the
overall strategy for the building and reduces cooling requirements and glare from
the sun.
High albedo roofing surfaces reflect solar radiation and heat off of the roof and
building envelope, reducing the local heat island effect and any increase in
temperature of the micro climate.
profile generic issues such as country wide environmental protection. For example,
3.6.6 Waste in the Basic Law (1992) Article 32 states that "The state works for the
preservation, protection, and improvement of the environment, and for the
This section will identify some of the key areas of concern that should be included prevention of pollution". Following the creation of Public Environmental Law in
and form the basis of a waste management strategy. The strategy will provide for 2001 the Presidency of Meteorology and Environmental Protection (the 'PME')
the long term sustainable management of solid waste generated as a result of the were created in order to facilitate all future matters relating to environmental
King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture. standards.
The area that has been identified to house the development currently generates In light of this lack of information it is proposed that international best policy is
only small quantities of waste. This position of minimal waste generation is a followed.
difficult and highly sought after goal for many developments which were built in
the past and are now in operation. Additionally, the actual construction of any Polluter pays principle (where the producer of the waste pays for the
building generates significant quantities of waste. Both operational and management of the waste materials they have generated)
construction waste should be addressed in a waste management strategy.
Proximity principle (where waste is dealt with as close to its source as
The measurement of sustainability includes possible)
numerous topic areas; energy and water use
being two of these areas. The broad concept of Precautionary principle (when waste infrastructure is put in place to
sustainability is often difficult for the general handle unproven or un-established threats or harm to the environment).
public to appreciate and directly relate to their
daily activities. Waste management is also
influential to a developments measurement of
sustainability, in addition to having other
influential credentials.
Figure 6.1 – Rubbish
The opportunity for waste management to demonstrate visual levels of

sustainability in a development should not be overlooked. Waste and its
management is something easily recognisable as being harmful to the
environment. The average individual can quickly and clearly recognise and relate
to sustainability by simply seeing how much waste is actually produced and how
well it is managed.
3.6.6.1 Legislation and Policy
An important function that should be considered in the creation of a waste

management strategy is its alignment with local and regional waste management
policy and national legislation. For example, the waste hierarchy (Figure 6.2)
adopted by SEPA encourages the adoption of options for managing waste in the
following order of priority:
Information on any regulation that may relate to waste management in Saudi

Arabia is difficult to find. Environmental laws do exist, but are related to more high
Structures Building form analysed to reduce site waste
Construction Site segregation of waste
Design to match standard sizes of supplied

Services
materials
Finishes Take back of packaging waste
Much of this information should be presented in a site waste management plan.

More than a stand alone document it is a fluid reporting process that documents all
measures to reduce waste along the length of the project.
At this stage it is expected that 5383 tonnes of construction waste will be
generated. This will have to be reduced and if a LEED platinum point is needed
then 50% will have to be recycled. Further LEED points may be obtained by
reducing this quantity during the design process and by offsetting the impact of its
production by incorporating recycled materials into the build process.
3.6.6.3 Operational Waste
Based on planned floor areas and development breakdown is expected that 387
tonnes of waste will be generated annually. This equates to approximately 7.4
tonnes per week.
Figure 6.2 – The waste hierarchy
With such a significant local increase in waste quantities, considerations will have
to be made in developing a sustainable waste management system.
3.6.6.2 Construction Waste
Planners and designers will have to think carefully about how waste will flow
The construction of the Cultural Centre will generate many tonnes of construction through and out of the site. Too often only storage of waste is considered and this
waste. However, the application of some simple guidelines at the various stages of is then found to be totally inadequate at facilities management stages.
the project should significantly reduce the quantity of waste generated onsite.
Consideration is needed from the start point of a waste item right through to
Examples of actions to reduce site where it eventually ends up with details of its exact movement planned at every
Development Stage
waste level of movement. This will ensure that management teams and occupiers can
fully adopt the sustainable waste management aims and aspirations of the centre.
Design Offsite fabrication of components
As well as information on the expected quantity of waste generated from King
Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture, the composition of the waste
Demolition Reuse of demolition materials generated should also be detailed in waste strategy documents. Total waste
composition will vary across individual elements of the development however
papers and putrescilble materials should make up a significant proportion of the
waste stream. The chart below makes a basic assessment of the likely waste
stream composition.
Figure 6.4 - Weekly operational waste composition by weight and volumes
As well as following international best practice, successful and sustainable waste

management systems are predominantly formed by a number of other key
features. When merged together they form a reliable efficient waste management
system. Any shortfall in any of the factors involved will reduce the efficiency and
reduce the capacity of the waste system identified for an area. Figure 6.5 – Key system elements to sustainable waste management
As well as following international best practice, successful and sustainable waste The above diagram indicates some the key considerations and infrastructure that
management systems are predominantly formed by a number of other key will need to be developed for King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture
features. When merged together they form a reliable efficient waste management which will go some way in reducing the impacts from waste generated from the
system. Any shortfall in any of the factors involved will reduce the efficiency and development.
reduce the capacity of the waste system identified for an area.
Based on the information presented above it is recommended as basis that the
Site owned and controlled infrastructure is essential in handling the waste development make provisions for the following (depending on waste quantity):
quantities generated from site activities and reducing pressure on municipality
waste infrastructure. The specifications of collection and treatment systems are Mini Materials recycling facility (MRF)
required only after all forms of minimisation techniques and designs have been
exhausted. Separation and processing infrastructure should be centrally located at In vessel composting units
an integrated waste management facility (IWMF) within the site boundary.
Maintenance / service area.
Hazardous waste store

Data Data
capture capture
Current estimated waste composition

SANITARY
COMPOST FOR
Other LANDSCAPING
Metals
WET COMPOSTING
Plastics
DRY REPROCESSED PAPER
Putrescible
DRY
Papers Putrescibl
MRF
DRY
REPROCESSED
PLASTIC
Figure 6.6 - Mini MRF Inert
DRY
3.6.6.3.1 Targets and Aspirations Landfill
Saudi Aramco
procurement
• Creation and adoption of solid waste management system updated every 5
years with yearly annual waste reports
Outside markets
• Recyclable materials procurement
• Yearly reductions in waste generation rates.
• Composting of all food waste.
Waste shall primarily be sorted into 3 categories across the site before collection:
1. Wet waste (organics)

2. Dry Waste (recyclables)
3. Residual (Sanitary)
Waste shall be bulked in a strategically located IWMF near the site. Waste will
either be transported via an underground vacuum based system or via recycling
park and vehicle collections.
Recovered and reprocessed materials are then fed back into the procurement
system or sold to other markets. This system is shown in the following diagram.
3.6.7 Health and Well Being
3.6.7.1 Overview
The design of a building and the materials used to construct it can have a
significant effect on the welfare of occupants and users. It is widely accepted that
providing internal environments which are healthy and comfortable can have
marked effects in boosting productivity and happiness in building users and visitor
experience. Conversely, it is understood that some elements of building design and
Figure 7.1 – Car exhaust
fabric can have an adverse effect on physical and mental health and should be
avoided in the construction of sustainable buildings.
Design/Specification Issues;
3.6.7.2 Healthy Buildings VOCs - VOCs are emitted as gases from certain solids or liquids. They
include a variety of chemicals, some of which may have short and long-term
adverse health effects such as eye, nose, and throat irritation, headaches,
There are a number of areas which should be addressed in the development of nausea, damage to liver and cancer. Concentrations of many VOCs are
healthy buildings. For the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture consistently higher indoors than outdoors. VOCs are emitted by a wide array
development, the following should be considered; of products including paints and lacquers, cleaning supplies, pesticides,
building materials, furnishings and office equipment. The VOC content of
finishes and materials used in the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and
3.6.7.2.1 Indoor Air Quality
Culture development should be considered and, where possible, low VOC
options specified. Ample ventilation to the building will also help to prevent
The quality of the air that we breathe inside buildings is one of the key factors in the build up of concentrations of VOCs.
the health and well-being of occupants. Poor indoor air quality has been associated
with “sick building syndrome”, a collection of symptoms which include headaches, Deleterious materials – in relation to sustainable construction, deleterious
nausea, eye problems and sleep disorders and has been shown to reduce materials are considered to be materials or building techniques which are
productivity and learning. dangerous to health, or which are environmentally unfriendly. A list of such
materials is given in Appendix A.
Indoor air quality may be compromised in a number of ways. These include the
presence of microbial contaminants such as mould and bacteria, chemicals such as Microbial contamination – control of moisture and good housekeeping will
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and nitrogen dioxide, allergens, or any mass or reduce the possibility for microbial growth within buildings. Strategies to
energy stressor that can induce health effects. Indoor air quality can also be prevent microbial growth include the avoidance of wet surfaces, keeping
affected by pollution from external sources such as transport and industrial relative humidity levels below 60%, effective filtration of particulates, proper
emissions. HVAC system operation and maintenance, and good housekeeping. Where
cooling towers and humidification systems are present, these should be
installed in accordance with best practice guidelines for the minimisation of
risk from legionella.
Indoor air pollution from external sources – external pollution is

considered to include other extracts (flues etc.), roads, car parking and
vehicle manoeuvring areas, building and industrial process extracts etc. In
order to avoid affecting indoor air quality, all air intakes serving occupied
areas should be positioned at least 10 metres from outlets and at least 20
metres from other sources of external pollution.
Ventilation - the provision of adequate fresh air within a building is

important in terms of promoting a healthy indoor environment. Minimum
fresh air rates should, therefore, be specified in line with best practice
guidelines. Figure 7.2 – Natural Light Figure 7.3 – External shading
3.6.7.2.2 Daylight 3.6.7.2.3 Artificial Light

The use of artificial lighting in buildings is unavoidable and, in some cases such as
Daylight has a profound effect on the stimulation and regulation of the human museums and art galleries, desirable. Where it is used, however, the health and
body, particularly in relation to emotional well-being. Research has shown that wellbeing of building users should be considered. Prolonged exposure to artificial
good daylight levels in a building reduce stress and promote learning. Effective lighting at inappropriate levels has been associated with a range of health
daylighting has also been demonstrated to save energy and increase the quality of problems. To help to mitigate any such negative effects, there are three key areas
the visual environment, reducing operating costs while improving user satisfaction. which should be examined, as follows;
For the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture development, high levels
of daylight will not be possible in some areas. Where appropriate, however, Design/Specification Issues;
natural light should be maximized and the use of artificial lighting minimized.
High frequency ballasts - some people appear to
Design/Specification Issues; be sensitive to the flicker associated with the low
operational frequency of conventional fluorescent
Daylight factor - rooms with an average daylight factor of 2% give us a feeling luminaires and can suffer health problems as a
of daylight. However, it is only when the daylight factor rises above 5% that we result. The most commonly reported of these are
perceive it as well daylit. For the purposes of the health and well-being of eyestrain and headaches. Flicker associated with
building users, an average daylight factor of at least 2% should, therefore, be high frequency ballasts is totally undetectable,
achieved where possible, with a higher figure being preferable, as appropriate. either consciously or unconsciously, and this type of
ballast should, therefore, be installed in all
Floor plan depth and ceiling height – the area of interior space that can be fluorescent lighting.
daylit using windows depends on both building depth and floor-to-ceiling height.
Useful daylight from typical windows can only reach 4.5 – 7.5m. into spaces Lighting design – it is vital that internal lighting is
with 1.8 – 2.8m floor-to-ceiling heights. Where the design of the building designed to be appropriate to the different tasks
dictates room depths in excess of this, measures for extending naturally lit being carried out within the building.
interior space such as light pipes, prismatic glazing and other reflective systems Minimum/maximum lux levels should, therefore, be
to redirect light should be considered. established for different areas to ensure comfortable
and appropriate lighting at all times.
Glare – to reduce problems associated with glare, an occupant controlled 3.6.7.2.4 Noise
system of glare control such as internal or external blinds should be
incorporated in areas of the building used as office or IT space, on all
elevations.
Unwanted noise can be a source of stress for building occupants and lead to low
levels of building user satisfaction. In a development of this type where many
differing activities will potentially be taking place simultaneously, it is of particular
importance to ensure that noise transmission is kept to a minimum to avoid be given, however, to the provision of
negative impacts on the building users. planters in appropriate internal areas both to
improve indoor air quality and to provide
Design/Specification Issues; visual stimulation.
Figure 7.4 - Internal courtyard planting
Acoustics – indoor ambient noise levels should be carefully controlled in
accordance with the function of each area. For a building of this type, noise
levels should not exceed 55dB LAeqT in any area. Noise from adjacent
3.6.7.2.7 Legibility/Joy in Use
spaces and also noise pollution from building services plant and or external
sources.
How a building is laid out internally and how easy it is to use can have a significant
3.6.7.2.5 Thermal Comfort impact on occupant and visitor satisfaction. Buildings which are not “legible” can
create stress and irritation in the user. This aspect of healthy buildings is primarily
addressed through good design which avoids confusing or labyrinthine layouts.
Thermal comfort is an important consideration for health and satisfaction levels
Providing good signage and building orientation is, however, also of great
amongst building users. Various studies have indicated that overheating can lead
importance and this should be taken into account at an early stage to ensure that
to problems such as headaches, lethargy, irritated eyes and increased accident
adequate space is allocated.
rates. While such problems primarily affect those who spend extended periods
within the building, it is equally important that visitors experience appropriate
levels of thermal comfort as this will enhance their enjoyment of the building and
the development as a whole.
Thermal zoning - thermal zoning within the building should allow separate
control of areas to promote the comfort and well-being of occupants.
Thermal comfort modelling – thermal comfort modelling should be carried

out as part of the design process to identify any potential problem areas.
3.6.7.2.6 Green Space
It is acknowledged that access to green

space within a building or in the
immediate surroundings promotes better
health and wellbeing amongst building
users. The therapeutic effects of green
space include reductions in stress levels
and improvements in indoor air quality.
The King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge
and Culture development already
incorporates a substantial external green
space and this will benefit staff and
visitors alike. Consideration could also
The manufacture and/or composition of some insulation materials can also be
3.6.8 Pollution harmful to the earth’s atmosphere through the release of ozone depleting
chemicals. The environmental impact of insulation materials is measured in terms
3.6.8.1 Overview of Global Warming Potential (GWP) and Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP). Similar
to refrigerants, the use of insulation materials with a high GWP and ODP should be
The construction and operation of buildings is a significant source of pollution, avoided in best practice sustainable construction.
responsible for, amongst other things, particulate emissions and a large number of
water pollution incidents every year. Some of the materials used to construct Design/Specification Issues;
buildings also have the potential to pollute the environment at a wider scale
through the release of damaging, ozone-depleting chemicals. Sustainable Insulant GWP/ODP - insulating materials which use ozone depleting
construction methods require that, wherever possible, developments must avoid substances and substances with a global warming potential (GWP) of 5 or
the use of practices and materials which pollute at a local and/or global level. more in either manufacture or composition should be avoided within the
building. This should be applied to insulation products used in the following
3.6.8.2 Low/No Pollution Buildings areas;
- building fabric including walls, roof, floor, window frames, doors, cavity
There are a number of areas which should be addressed in the development of closures and lintels.
low/no pollution buildings. For the King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and - building services including chilled water pipework, refrigerant pipework,
Culture development, the following should be considered; ductwork, hot & cold water pipes and water tanks etc.
- internal sound proofing.
3.6.8.2.1 Refrigerants
3.6.8.4 Light Pollution
Some refrigerants used in the cooling plants of buildings have high Global Warming
Potential (GWP). The GWP provides a measure of the potential for damage that a Light pollution is excess or obtrusive light created by
chemical has relative to one unit of CO2, the primary greenhouse gas. A substance humans which results in a brightening of the night sky and
with high GWP will have a significant impact on the earth’s stratospheric ozone other forms of nuisance. It is caused by artificial light
layer through the release of damaging emissions. In order to reduce the potential being scattered by small particles in the air such as water
for this type of long-term damage to the global atmosphere, sustainable buildings droplets and dust. Major sources of artificial light include
should, where practical, make use of refrigerants with low GWP. street lighting, security lamps, advertising and display
lighting, floodlights for sporting events and building
Design/Specification Issues; illumination. Poorly fitted lights allow light to shine
upwards, which causes light pollution. Some artificial light
Refrigerant GWP - where practical, refrigerants with a GWP of less than 5 is also reflected upwards from roads, pavements and
should be specified for use in the building. buildings. It is believed that high levels of light pollution
can cause disruption to eco-systems and adverse health
Leak detection/pump down - to reduce the emission of refrigerants to the effects in humans. Unnecessary and ill-directed light is
atmosphere arising from leakages in the building’s chiller plant a leak also a waste of energy.
detection system should be specified covering high-risk parts of the plant. Figure 8.1 – Light pollution
An automatic pump-down system should also be incorporated to collect
refrigerants in case of a leak or for maintenance purposes. This will help to Design/Specification Issues;
prevent possible cross contamination with the watercourse / water supply
and release of gases to the atmosphere. Over lighting - external lighting should be designed to avoid "over" lighting.
This is a major cause of obtrusive light and is a waste of energy. Obtrusive
3.6.8.3 Insulation light limitation values should be determined for the development, in
accordance with best practice guidelines.
Lighting design - specifically designed lighting equipment that minimises infiltration trenches offer a sufficient means of treatment, removing the need
the upward spread of light near to and above the horizontal should be used. for a separator.
Care should be taken when selecting luminaires to ensure that appropriate
units are chosen and that their location will reduce spill light and glare to a Permeable surfaces – these should be used wherever possible to break up
minimum. or replace impervious surfaces as these will allow percolation of water and
prevent increased levels of surface run-off.
Light controls – time clock or daylight sensing controls should be utilised to
ensure non essential lighting switches off during daylight hours.
3.6.8.5 Watercourse Pollution
Surface water run-off from buildings and hard surfaces can have a detrimental
effect on local natural watercourses if polluting agents are allowed to contaminate
the run-off. Watercourse pollution can have a serious impact on aquatic life forms
and can potentially affect the safety of aquatic and terrestrial foodstuffs which
come into contact with contaminated water or sediments. Steps should, therefore
be taken in the construction and operation of buildings to reduce or eliminate the
presence of such contaminants.
Surface run-off is increased where there are large areas of impervious surfaces
such as pavements and buildings that do not allow percolation of the water down
through the soil to the aquifer. Increased runoff reduces groundwater recharge,
thus lowering the water table.
Figure 8.2 – Pollution to water course.
Site Environmental Management Plan (SEMP) – this should be

implemented during construction to reduce the risk of accidental
contamination of watercourses from site activities
Oil separators/interceptors – these should be specified for high risk areas

such as large car parks. For low risk areas such as roofs, smaller car parks
and non-operational areas, control systems such as permeable surfaces or
Paspalum grass is widely used in the Kingdom due to the fact it is salt water
3.6.9 External Environment tolerant, resistant to insect and disease damage, can handle weather extremes and
requires few nutrients to survive.
3.6.9.1 Native Vegetation
The various flora of Saudi Arabia are a vital component of various ecosystems and
they play a key role in maintaining the region's environmental balance and
stability. It also helps in the protection of watersheds, stabilization of slopes,
improvement of soils, moderation of climate and the provision of a habitat for
much of the wild fauna.
In addition to the endemic plants, the influences of the surrounding floristic regions
can be seen in many parts of the plant diversity hotspots of this county.
Figure 9.2 - Drought tolerant species.
In low use areas, a good alternative to grass is seeded wildflowers or native

grasses or other drought tolerant ground covers.
Mulches should be employed at the base of plants to retain moisture. Mulches can
also reduce soil compaction and salt build up. Typical mulches include compost,
Figure 9.1 - Proportion of trees shrubs and herbs native to Saudi Arabia. Source
bark chips and inert materials such as decomposed granite.
[1]
Areas of hardscape should be created in order to minimise the extent of green
The flora of Saudi Arabia has approximately 2243 species in 837 genera; of which
areas - hardscape areas are low maintenance and have no water requirements.
9 species are Gymnosperms and 27 species are Pteridophytes. A total of 142
families are reported from all over Saudi Arabia; among these 37 are represented
each by a single species.
Although Saudi Arabia has a significant number of wild plants, the number of
species occurring in a square kilometer area is less significant, especially in areas
such as in the Central, Eastern and Northern regions. The regions along the
northwestern and southwestern regions, however, are densely vegetated and
contain the highest number of species. Approximately 70% of the country's floristic
elements are reported from these areas.
Figure 9.3 – Examples of soft and hard landscaping
3.6.9.2 Planting
Grass is the main ‘consumer’ of water in the landscape and also requires regular
maintenance, mainly in the form of grass cutting, so it should only be used where
it provides functional benefits, such as a picnic spot.
3.6.10 Education / Demonstration The aim is to create a non toxic, healthy and stimulating learning environment for
children. Although health is an important factor for all visitors, children’s growing
3.6.10.1 Overview bodies and their close interactions with exhibit components, makes health an
important consideration for children’s museum exhibits.
True sustainability embraces a commitment to see the world as interconnected, to
understand the impacts our actions have on others and our environment, and— Improvements like fresh air and the selection of nontoxic materials are part and
most important—to love the children of all species who will inherit the world we parcel of constructing healthy exhibit spaces.
leave behind.
As part of the educational aspect of the development it is important that any
To become truly sustainable, it is important to equally address social sustainability, innovative systems used on the project have a visible element, in order to promote
economic sustainability, and environmental sustainability like three legs holding up the learning experience. We would encourage the client and design team to
a stool. endorse this approach to maximise the benefit of including such measures.
Additionally we hope that the client and design team shall support the use of
technologies which may be deemed unsuitable for mainstream application to the
project. This could include systems which are not feasible at commercial scale, but
applicable to domestic applications – allowing the principles of sustainability to be
taken away from a visit to King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture, and
applied on a wider scale.
Informational signs direct visitors to touch and examine elements of the exhibits
which they might otherwise overlook, such as recycled materials used in the
construction of the educational trail and vegetation used for shading.
Display boards providing information on local and global biodiversity could be

developed and building and landscape details could highlight the plight of
endangered species.
3.6.10.2 Educational Trail

Figure 10.1 – Arial view of the proposed Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre
One way of helping to provide a tangible education and learning element within the
The King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture consists of key elements
development would be to use an ‘educational trail’. This could demonstrate
including; the museum, exhibition halls and auditorium, public library and the
renewable energy generation and waste and water recycling and reuse in an
tower.
interesting and fun way, where all of the elements are inter related and connected.
Along the trail there will be information boards and interactive display points
It is important for any development to maintain the local culture and heritage, but
explaining the processes, how the elements relate to each other, work together
also to look to the future and explore new horizons and opportunities.
and help save precious natural resources. The boards and displays will be powered
by different forms of renewable energy.
Adopting the theme from the Snohetta presentation, the overall approach for the
sustainable aspects of this project should be:
The following types of exhibit could be considered for development;
PAST – Consider the history and culture
3.6.10.2.1 Energy
PRESENT – Review current approaches and lifestyles
FUTURE – Propose forward thinking, but sound and appropriate solutions
A ‘Daily Energy Cycle’ story board could be created, to show where we use energy
and identify areas we can reduce our daily energy consumption.
Leisure Alarm
Activiti Clock
Evening
Meal Bath
Electrical
Equipmen Breakfas
t t Figure 10.4 – Notional positions of renewable technologies around the development
Technologies that could be successfully demonstrated on a small scale are – Solar

Lunch Transportatio PV, Solar Thermal, Wind Turbines and Night Sky Cooling.
n
For example, a simple yet effective interactive display would be PV cells with
Figure 10.2 – Energy Cycle shading device that reduces the solar irradiation reaching the solar PV panel, this
could be demonstrated with an array of LEDs, the greater the solar irradiance the
This could be complemented with an ‘Energy Production’ Story board or a timeline greater the number of LEDs in the array that will light up. In effect the shading
showing how oil is created and how we will produce increasing amounts of energy device will act as a dimmer switch.
in the future from renewable sources. This, in turn, could be linked to the History
of King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture.
Examples of renewable technologies could be positioned around the development.

These should be interactive, where practical, to allow visitors to understand how
the systems operate and visually appealing. All working renewable energy displays
should have a description of the technology and live data on energy generated.
Figure 10.5 – PV display

3.6.10.2.2 Materials within the building and also demonstration examples of systems that can be used
at home. The trail should cover the cycle of water, from source, to use, and re-use,
The building fabric and structure could be used to demonstrate the environmental through recycling.
impact of the development. A cutaway of a wall section that shows the insulation in
the building fabric to demonstrate the construction methods utilised in the centre.
The building itself will, therefore, act as a teaching tool.
Innovative use of a low impact building material or technology, such as building

products made from recycled materials could also be featured.
Furthermore, with use of natural materials and other exhibit components that
establish connections with the natural world, children are exposed to “the sensory
nourishment…on which they thrive”.
A scale model of the Cultural Centre could be displayed. This would highlight the
development’s green credentials and explains the design techniques adopted and
their impact on the energy consumption and operation of the building. This could
be designed to be interactive, allowing for building play.
3.6.10.2.3 Waste
An interactive exhibit addressing waste and recycling issues could be developed.

For example, visitors could walk through a miniature “landfill” and identify different
Figure 10.8 – The Cycle of Water
types of waste and how they might be reused or recycled. There could also be
opportunities to crush cans and create artwork from rubbish. A “What I Used to
Be” display would allow children to examine different types of recycled materials
and guess what they are made from.
Food wastes from the development could also be composted on site and utilised in
the landscaping to enrich the soil and promote recycling and reuse.
3.6.10.2.4 Water
Water has been a key theme in the project brief and forms the heart of the new
development. Water should be utilised in a strategic fashion, with features to Figure 10.9 – Interactive water treatment model Figure 10.10 - Children playing
reflect the natural situation – planting which would be green and flower when there at pump
have been recent rainfall, water features which could operate only for periods after
rainfall. This approach demonstrates responsible and appropriate use of water, Filtered greywater could be used in a number of water features throughout the
which is such a valuable resource in the country. public realm, some of which could also act as a storage mechanism: this should
also include a basic description of how the technology works and its environmental
As well as using water in a responsible fashion, and setting an example to the benefit. This could be in the form of ‘play pumps’ which use children’s merry-go-
visitors and building users, the educational trail provides an opportunity to show rounds to pump water through a system. Kinetic water sculptures can be powered
the life cycle of water. The cycle of water can be demonstrated as part of a trail by energy generated through the movement of the water. For example a solar
through the building and external areas. This can consist of both systems used
fountain which utilises photo voltaic panels to power the water jets could be
installed.
A demonstration scale blackwater recycling plant, in the form of a living machine

could be set in conjunction with the irrigation system
Figure 10.10 - Living machine
3.6.10.3 Distinguishing green features
This exhibition focuses on sustainable design and choices visitors can make to
understand and support sustainable design. This project is supporting the
"Innovation" points we expect to be awarded as part of the LEED certification
process. King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture will be awarded points
for interpreting sustainability for children and families through exhibits and
programs that focus on physical science inquiry and design innovation.
3.6.11 Conclusions
Based on the topics introduced within the SD Phase-1 report, this Phase-2 report
focuses on the following themes as set out in the SAT Scope document:
Environmental Assessments
Energy/ Carbon Emissions
Water
Waste
Materials/ sustainable construction
Pollution
Health & well-being
External Environment
Education/ Demonstration
It is important that the sustainability ideas promoted within this report are
embraced by the design team to ensure the aspirations of the Client brief can be
realised. Implemented properly this will result in not only delivering a development
that can be promoted as leading by example, and therefore enhancing the SA
brand, but also minimising running costs and maximising efficiency of the
development throughout its lifecycle.
During the Design Development phase of the project BH SAT will work with the
design team and King Abdulaziz Centre for Knowledge and Culture to further
develop these concepts and evaluate the renewable energy features proposed as
viable for the development, in line with the current cost plan.
3.6.12 Appendix
3.6.12.1 Irrigation Water demand Calculations 3.6.12.2 Deletrious Materials

- High Alumina cement or concrete
Water Demand Rates - Woodwool slabs as permanent formwork or in structural elements
- Concrete or mortar additives containing calcium chloride
Palm trees = 150l/tree/day
- Calcium silicate bricks or tiles
Typical trees = 80l/tree/day
- Any products or materials containing urea formaldahyde foam or materials
Ground cover/ shrubs = 20l/tree/day which may release formaldehyde
Main Garden Adjoining Existing Garden Asbestos or asbestos containing products

Number of palm trees = 131
Typical trees = 48 Lead or any materials containing lead which may be ingested, inhaled or absorbed
Ground cover/ shrubs = 14221m2 except where copper alloy fittings containing leading or specifically required in
Total Water Demand/ day drinking water pipework by any relevant statutory requirements
= 3131x150l/tree/day + 48x80l/tree/day +
14420m2x20l/m2/day Slipbricks
= 307.890l/day
= 308m3/day Lightweight or air entrained concrete bricks or blocks
Oasis North
Number of palm trees = 19 Vermiculate plaster
Typical trees = 8
Ground cover/ shrubs = 3740m2 Polysicoyanurate foam
Total Water Demand/ day - Extruded polystyrene other than low ozone depletion materials
= 19 x 150l/tree/day + 8x80l/tree/day + 3740m2x20l/m2/day -
= 78,290l/day Materials which are generally composed of mineral fibres either man made or
= 78.3m3/day naturally occurring which have a diameter of 3 microns or less and a length of 200
Oasis South microns or less which contain any fibres not sealed or otherwise stabilized to
Number of palm trees = 32 ensure that fibre migration is prevented
Typical trees = 6
Ground cover/ shrubs = 5080m2 Bitumen coated polythene save that the use of bitumen coated polythene may be
Total Water Demand/ day permitted for tanking and DPM
= 32 x 150l/tree/day + 6x80l/tree/day + 5080m2x20l/m2/day
= 106, 880l/day Concrete open web lattice joists or beams (nailable type)
= 106.9m3/day
Summary Timber trussed rafters manufactured with truss plate connections. Bolted trusses
Total irrigation water required/ day = 493.2m3/ day are permitted
Add 10% allowance, TOTAL = 550m3/ day
All tropical rain forest hardwoods
Any product which contains or uses Montreal listed CFC gases in its manufacture
PTFE fabrics – the only permitted use of PTFE is as a jointing tape in plumbing
applications and on specialist applications such as valve seats
Pre-cast concrete floors at ground floor level or ribbed floors
Resin coated blocks
Spectra glass or similar pre-finished blocks
Other substances or materials generally known to be deleterious at the time of

use.
3.6.13 LEED Assessment – USGBC versus
EBGC
13.00 Glossary\References\ Figures
Life Cycle Analysis: this is a methodology that identifies the environmental

impacts associated with the life cycle of a material or product in a specific
application, thus identifying opportunities for improvement in environmental
performance. Abbreviated LCA.
Passive: a building term describing a structure or component that needs no

mechanical assistance to operate. For instance: passive solar design uses the
structure of the building and it’s solar orientation to collect energy from the sun. A
further example would a thermostatic radiator valve where the air temperature in a
room will cause a wax capsule to expand or contract, thus allowing hot water to
flow or not.
Phase Change Material: a substance with a high heat of fusion which, melting
and solidifying at a certain temperature, is capable of storing and releasing large
amounts of energy. Heat is absorbed or released when the material changes from
solid to liquid and vice versa; thus, PCMs are classified as latent heat storage
(LHS) units.
Thermal Mass: any material that has the capacity to store heat
U Value: a measure of heat transmission through a building part or a given

thickness of insulating material, expressed as (W/m2K) that will follow in 1 hour
through 1 square metre of the structure or material from air to air with a
temperature differential of 1OC
Volatile Organic Compound: VOCs are organic chemical compounds that have
high enough vapour pressures under normal conditions to significantly vaporise
and enter the atmosphere during use, application or drying out of a paint or other
coating.
[1] http://plantdiversityofsaudiarabia.info/Biodiversity-Saudi-
Arabia/Flora/Flora.htm
3.7 FIRE SAFETY DESIGN (by FEDRA) 3.7.4.8 Smoke Pressurisation Systems
3.7.4.9 Fire Command Centre
Table of Contents
3.7.1 Fire Safety Design Executive Summary
3.7.5.1 General Means of Egress
3.7.5.2 Occupant Load
3.7.5.3 Egress Width
3.7.2 Introduction
3.7.5.4 Stairways
3.7.2.1 Design Responsibility and Scope
3.7.5.5 Means of Egress Illumination
3.7.2.2 Limitations
3.7.5.6 Accessible Means of Egress
3.7.2.3 Architectural Drawings
3.7.5.7 Doors, Gates and Turnstiles
3.7.2.4 Project design Team Details
3.7.5.8 Ramps
3.7.2.5 Building Use and Occupancy Classification
3.7.5.9 Exit Signs
3.7.2.6 Specific Building Requirements Based on Use and
3.7.5.10 Exit Access
Occupancy
3.7.5.11 Exit access Travel Distance
3.7.2.7 Occupancy Characteristics
3.7.5.12 Vertical Exit Enclosures
3.7.2.8 Items of Regulatory Risk
3.7.5.13 Horizontal Exits
3.7.5.14 Emergency Escape and Rescue
3.7.3 Fire Resistance Rated Construction
3.7.3.1 Background
3.7.6 Fire Fighting Facilities
3.7.3.2 Building Elements
3.7.6.1 Access
3.7.3.3 Fire Strategy Approach
3.7.6.2 Fire Fighting Provisions
3.7.3.4 Escape Stair Enclosures
3.7.6.3 Standpipe Systems
3.7.3.5 Shaft Enclosures, including Lifts
3.7.3.6 Incidental Use Areas
3.7.6.5 Fire Department Connections
3.7.3.7 Places of Higher Fire Risk
3.7.6.6 Fire Water Supplies
3.7.3.8 Fire Doors
3.7.6.7 Portable Fire Extinguishers
3.7.3.9 Penetrations
3.7.6.8 Smoke Clearance Facilities
3.7.3.10 Fire-resistance Joint Systems
3.7.3.11 Concealed Spaces
3.7.3.12 Fire Dampers
3.7.7 Design Risks and Opportunities for Fire Engineering
3.7.3.13 Interior Finishes
3.7.7.1 Single Escape Stair (Tower)
3.7.3.14 Exterior Walls
3.7.7.2 External Fire Fighting Access
3.7.7.3 Fire Water Supply
3.7.7.4 Library Smoke Control
3.7.4.1 Automatic Sprinkler System
3.7.4.2 Automatic Fire Alarm Systems
3.7.4.3 Public Address Voice Alarm Systems
3.7.4.4 Means of Egress Illumination
3.7.4.5 Standpipe System
3.7.4.6 Smoke Control Systems
3.7.4.7 Smoke and Heat Exhaust Vents
3.7.1 Fire Safety Design Executive Summary Based on the recommendations stated within the International Building Code (IBC)
2003 and the International Fire Code (IFC) 2003 this report identifies those active
Buro Happold FEDRA are the Fire Engineers appointed to work on the Saudi and passive fire safety measures required within the proposed scheme. Where
Aramco Cultural Centre (SACC) project, now known as The King Abdulaziz Center specific design features push the limits of code requirements fire engineering
for Knowledge and Culture (KACK&C). Buro Happold FEDRA are responsible for techniques have been applied.
aiding and developing a comprehensive site wide scheme design fire safety
strategy for the proposed KACK&C development. Tower
Keystone Auditorium
Library
Museum
Figure: Snohetta Architects Image of KACK&C

Figure: Snohetta Architects Image of KACK&C
The proposed KACK&C is a mixed-use development, consisting of auditorium, great The fire strategy presented within this report has been prepared in collaboration
hall, library, cinema, plaza, tower (all above ground accommodation), and a with the other design team members, and should compliment and enable the
museum, car parking provisions and back of house areas (below ground proposed architectural, structural and environmental design concepts.
accommodation). The auditorium, library and tower are all considered to be ‘high
rise’ buildings, as their topmost storey is greater than 22.86m above grade. The The primary objective of the overall fire strategy is to demonstrate adequacy in the
museum is considered to be an ‘underground building’, the difference in height following areas:
between fire department access level and the lowest level is greater than 9.144m.
• Structural Fire Precautions;
The overall fire strategy approach, by Buro Happold FEDRA, will analyse the
• Means of Escape;
potential impact of fire on the proposed structure, life safety and fire fighting
provisions. The fire safety analysis may consist, where appropriate, of complex
• Fire Detection and Warning System; and
computational fluid dynamic modelling, evacuation modelling, and qualitative and
quantitative risk assessment methods. Full details of the overall fire strategy • Fire Fighting Facilities
approach will be presented during the Detailed Design (DD) stage of this project.
The following life safety measures form the basis of the fire strategy approach
The intention of this report is to present the conceptual fire strategy design presented within this report:
solutions and to highlight alternative fire engineered strategies, where appropriate,
which will aid the Quantity Surveyor (QS) in developing an accurate cost plan. Construction (non-combustible fire resistance rated)
The fire resistance rating which will be applied to the structural frame shall achieve
a minimum period of 3 hours.
The structural frame includes columns, girders, beams etc. (those structural Furthermore, escape stairs serving four or more storeys will be enclosed within 2
components having a direct connection to the columns and bracing members hour fire resistance rated construction. Escape stairs serving less than four storeys
designed to carry gravity loads. Floor members, or roof panels which have no will be enclosed within 1 hour fire resistance rated construction.
connection to the columns are considered as secondary members and not part of
the structural frame. The fire resistance rating of the structural frame and bearing All escape stairs will discharge to the open air outside the building in a place of
walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated, where supporting the roof only. safety.
It is assumed at this stage that the type of construction being applied to the entire All escape stairs should be fitted with ‘wet’ (charged) standpipes, with outlets on
development will be ‘Type 1A’. Reference should be made to the structural all levels, in order to aid fire fighting operations.
engineer’s drawings and report for further details.
Spaces designed as ‘accessible’ shall be provided with not less than one accessible
Vertical Means of Escape means of escape. In buildings with four, or more, storeys one accessible means of
egress shall be provided by an ‘evacuation’ lift/elevator. Each escape stair should
A number of escape stairs will be provided throughout the proposed KACK&C. In be provided with an area of refuge (762 x 1219mm) – one per 200 occupants
the instance of an escape stair serving four, or more storeys the stair, or entrance served by each stair. Areas of refuge are not required to evacuation lifts, based on
lobby to the stair, will be pressurised (in the event of a fire) to inhibit smoke the provision of automatic sprinklers throughout the proposed KACK&C.
logging of the stair/lobby enclosure. Escape stairs which serve less than four
storeys will not be pressurised. Horizontal Means of Escape
In the most part horizontal means of escape has been designed to follow the code
requirements. Alternatively, from a variety of locations horizontal means of escape
will be achieved by adopting a progressive escape philosophy, in particular from
the Keystone. The progressive means of escape philosophy is based on occupants
escaping from a room/compartment of fire origin to an adjacent relative place of
safety/fire compartment. In an attempt to satisfy the architectural aspirations this
is viewed as a reasonable approach to adopt, based on the application of automatic
sprinkler protection and the provision of 2 hour fire resistance rated fire
compartment walls.
Image: Typical Escape Core Arrangement (Tower)

At specific locations automatic detection will fulfil the role, in the event of a fire, of
activating door closures, or activating fire curtains.
Public Address Voice Alarm
An emergency voice alarm communication system, linked to the automatic fire

alarm and detection system, shall be provided throughout the proposed KACK&C.
This system is proposed due to the high ‘assembly’ occupancy type, and potential
unfamiliarity of the building and layout by the majority of users.
Emergency Power Systems
Emergency power systems shall be provided for emergency power loads in support
of the life safety systems provided within the proposed KACK&C. Reference should
be made to the Building Services Engineers report and drawings for further details.
Automatic Fire Safety Features
In order to deliver the architectural aspirations and openness of internal spaces

certain automatic closing features will be provided. At specific locations doors,
required to restrict the movement of smoke and spread of fire, will be held open on
magnetic hold open devices (linked to the automatic fire alarm system). Also,
automatic descending fire curtains will be held in the retracted position (linked to
the automatic fire alarm system).
Image: Typical Horizontal Escape (Tower/Keystone)
Automatic Sprinkler Protection
Automatic sprinkler protection systems are to be provided throughout the proposed

KACK&C, with the exception of specific risk hazard rooms, i.e. transformer rooms,
computer server rooms etc. The automatic sprinkler protection system should be
designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13.
Smoke Control Systems
In order to satisfy the prescriptive regulatory requirements the Library and

Museum will by provided with a smoke control system. Additionally, the car park
areas are proposed to be installed with a smoke clearance system.
Automatic Fire Alarm and Detection
Automatic smoke detection and, where appropriate, heat detection, i.e. kitchens,
plant rooms etc. will be fitted throughout the proposed KACK&C.
3.7.2 Introduction 6. Undertaking any fire/smoke/evacuation modelling required as part of any
alternate solution.
The following report has been compiled as a summary of the conceptual fire safety
design development work that has been produced for the proposed KACK&C. 7. Undertaking hazard and risk assessments of alternate solutions.
This report is intended to provide a brief overview of the fire safety design criteria 8. Providing detailed written technical justification for each alternate solution
to be adopted, and also identifies the possibilities which have been explored in proposed.
arriving at the fire safety solutions.
9. Providing a detailed written fire strategy report for the building design.
This document aids in identifying the schematic design approach. The technical
analysis required to support the scheme design will be further investigated and 10. Negotiation with the Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to achieve
sufficiently detailed during the Detailed Design (DD) stage of this project. agreement in principle of the proposed fire strategy.
The objective of the fire safety design approach presented within this report is to The design team are responsible for ensuring that the fire safety performance
maintain an adequate level of life safety within the proposed development in the requirements identified by FEDRA are reflected in the design and construction
event of a fire. The fire safety approach, including active and passive fire information. The main contractor will be responsible for ensuring that the
protection systems, are not purposefully aimed at achieving property protection or construction reflects the design and the performance requirements stated in the
maintaining business continuity, in the event of a fire. However, it should be noted fire strategy. The client is responsible for developing an operational fire safety
that the life safety approach of the proposed fire strategy will also inadvertently aid management plan that reflects the fire strategy for the building and allows the
in providing a level of property protection within the proposed development. building and its systems to operate safely at all times.
Referenced within this report are the appropriate fire safety design codes, as well The detailed design of many of the systems required as part of the site wide fire
as code alternative fire strategies/solutions that will be applied, which the safety strategy is the responsibility of various members of the design team. These
proposed KACK&C design will be based upon. parties are outlined in the table below:
3.7.2.1 Design Responsibility & Scope
FEDRA as fire safety engineering consultants are responsible for:
1. Identification of the relevant and detailed code requirements relevant to the

fire strategy.
2. Specification of the fire safety performance requirements to be achieved by

and implemented by the design and construction.
3. Providing advice to the design team as to how the fire safety performance
requirements can be incorporated in the design.
4. Undertaking smoke calculations required for any smoke management

systems required.
5. Identifying alternate solutions where compliance with code requirements is

not possible, or does not suit the design intentions, or client aspirations.
Building Detailed Designer FEDRA Input Building Detailed Designer FEDRA Input
Component Component
Sprinkler System Sprinkler Contractor Identify that sprinklers are Staircase Smoke Building Services Identify if there is any need
/ Building Services required, the design Pressurisation Engineers for this and the design
Engineer standards applicable & the Systems standards applicable and the
hazard classification. performance requirements.
Provide general advice on
Mechanical Smoke Building Services Identify if there is any need
water supply design if
Extraction Systems Engineers for this and the design
necessary.
standards applicable and the
Fire Detection & Building Services Identify if there is any need performance requirements.
Warning Systems Engineers for these and the design
Car Park Smoke Building Services Identify if there is any need
standards applicable.
Clearance Systems Engineers for this and the design
Provide general advice on
standards applicable and the
differing types of system if
performance requirements.
necessary.
Emergency Lifts Building Services Identify if there is any need

Emergency Lighting Building Services Identify if there is any need
Engineers / Lift for this and the design
Engineers for this and the design
Specialist standards applicable.
standards applicable & the
performance requirements. Fire Fighting Building Services Identify if there is any need
Telephone System Engineers for this and the design
Emergency Power Building Services Identify life safety systems
standards applicable.
Systems Engineers that require emergency
power. Automatic Door Hold Building Services FEDRA to advise on
Open Devices Engineers implications on means of
Table: Fire Safety Design Responsibilities (1) escape.
Table: Fire Safety Design Responsibilities (2)

Building Detailed Designer FEDRA Input 3.7.2.2 Limitations
Component
Code Analysis Form
Security Locks on Building Services FEDRA to advise on
Doors Engineer / Security implications on means of SA LP has provided a copy of the code analysis form to be completed by the design
team prior to submission of the detailed design for approvals/ sign off. The code
Specialist escape and fire fighting. analysis form cannot be completed at this stage as it requires the detailed design
to be developed and also requires input from various members of the design team.
Structural Fire Architect & / or FEDRA to identify periods of The code analysis form will be submitted at the appropriate stage when the
relevant members of the design team have reached a position where the form can
Protection Structural Engineer fire protection required for be completed in full.
Specification of elements of structure.
Building Risk Assessment
Materials
In accordance with SAES-B-014 SA LP have confirmed that a Building Risk
Fire Hydrant System Building Services Identify if there is any need Assessment is required because of the proximity of an existing crude oil pipeline to
the new building. This risk assessment should be undertaken in accordance with
Engineers for this and the design AP1 RP 752 and should be done by an experienced and approved consultant. The
standards applicable and the risk assessment shall evaluate the hazards of explosion, fire and toxic release from
the crude oil pipeline to the new building. The purpose of this assessment is to
performance requirements. identify if a risk exists and if so, identify necessary risk reduction measures for the
building, where the consequences of an event occurring in the pipeline are deemed
Fire Fighting Building Services Identify if there is any need to be unacceptable to people and critical equipment in the new building.
Standpipes & Risers Engineers for these and the design
FEDRA are not experienced in the use of AP1 RP 752 and this specialist element of
standards applicable and the the work is not currently within FEDRA’s remit / scope for the project. It is
therefore recommended that a suitable and experienced consultant is employed to
conduct this risk assessment at the earliest opportunity.
Fire Suppression Building Services Identify if there is any need

3.7.2.3 Architectural Drawings
Systems Engineers / for these and the design
Specialist Contractor standards applicable and the The information provided within this report is based on the architectural drawing
information made available by Snohetta Architects on 9th May 2008. The following
architectural drawings have been referenced during the compilation of this
document.
Table: Fire Safety Design Responsibilities (3)
It should be noted that the drawings submitted by the architects at this stage lack
completeness and as such the fire strategy information provided will require
further refinement during the forthcoming Detailed Design (DD) stage.
Furthermore, this report has been compiled with no knowledge of the ‘Cinema’
proposals, and potential changes to the ‘Auditorium’ layout.
Building/Location Drawing Drawing Title Building/Location Drawing Drawing Title
Reference Reference
Plaza SNO P00 Level 00 Auditorium SNO A00 Level 00
SNO P01 Level 01 SNO A01 Level 01
SNO P Ceiling SNO A02 Level 02
SNO P section A-A Section A-A SNO A03 Level 03
SNO P section B-B Section B-B SNO A04 Level 04
Back of House SNO BOH00 Level 00 SNO A05 Level 05
SNO BOH01 Level 01 SNO A-01 Level -01
Landscape SNO LA_site Site Wide Landscape SNO A roof plan Roof Plan
Great Hall SNO G00 Level 00 SNO A section A Section A-A
SNO G01 Level 01 SNO A section B Section B-B
SNO G Roof Plan Roof Plan

Table: Snohetta Auditorium Drawings Referenced
SNO G section A-A Section A-A
SNO G section B-B Section B-B
Table: Snohetta Drawings Referenced

Building/Location Drawing Drawing Title Building/Location Drawing Drawing Title
Reference Reference
Library SNO L00 Level 00 Tower SNO T00 Level 00
SNO L01 Level 01 Tower SNO T01 Level 01
SNO L03 Level 03 Tower & Keystone SNO T03, T04 & T05 Level 03, 04 and 05
SNO L roof plan Roof Plan Tower SNO T07 Level 07
SNO L section A-A Section A-A Tower SNO T08 Level 08
SNO L section B-B Section B-B Tower SNO T09 Level 09
Tower SNO T10 Level 10

Table: Snohetta Library Drawings Referenced
Building/Location Drawing Drawing Title

Reference Tower SNO T12 Level 12
Museum SNO M00 Level 00

SNO M-01 Level -01

SNO M-02 Level -02

SNO M-03 Level -03

Tower SNO T roof plan Roof Plan
Table: Snohetta Museum Drawings Referenced Tower SNO T section A-A Section A-A
Table: Snohetta Tower & Keystone Drawings Referenced

Regulatory Approach
As confirmed by Saudi Aramco (SA), the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for the This report has been developed following completion of the following tasks:
proposed KACK&C will be the Loss Prevention (LP) Department of SA. The AHJ in
this instance will also be supported by the Fire Prevention (FP) Department of SA, • Regular attendance at design team meetings/workshops through the scheme
with regards to providing technical knowledge and support to the AHJ on specific design process;
fire safety related design solutions/proposals.
• Weekly conference calls with LP and FP engineers and SA PMT;
The objective of the fire strategy is to comply with the requirements stated within
the International Building Code (IBC) 2003, and the International Fire Code (IFC) • A desk top review of the proposed architectural plans (uploaded 9th May);
2003, and, where applicable the relevant Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards and
(SAES). Where this is not possible alternate solutions will be used which are based
on fire engineering principles and best practice measures. • A review of alternative architectural layouts for the Tower (single stair
proposal).
3.7.2.4 Project Design Team Details

3.7.2.5 Building Use and Occupancy Classification
The fire strategy has been prepared as part of a multi disciplinary approach
including, where possible, the AHJ. This report forms a record of discussions which The proposed KACK&C can be defined as a multiple/mixed occupancy
have taken place with members of the design team, including the AHJ. development, which will be designed with ‘non-separated occupancies’. Fire
barriers are not required between the various occupancies, as the area and height
The following parties have been involved with the Schematic Design II fire strategy conditions stipulated within Table 503 (IBC 2003) for the worst-case/most
development: restrictive are achieved.
Design Team The proposed KACK&C includes the following occupancies/building types:
Client - Saudi Aramco

Occupancy, or Use Building
Architect - Snohetta Building Type
Quantity Surveyor - Davis Langdon Schumann Smith A-1 including theatres, Auditorium; Cinema
concert hall, motion
Structural Engineer - Buro Happold
picture theatres
Building Services - Buro Happold
A-2 including restaurants Tower; Plaza
Fire Safety Strategy - Buro Happold FEDRA
Approving Authorities A-3 including art galleries, Museum; Library;

exhibition halls, Keystone
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Loss Prevention Department (SA)
museums, libraries
Technical Support to AHJ - Fire Prevention Department (SA)
Table: ‘Assembly’ Occupancy Types
This report should be read in conjunction with the over-marked fire strategy
sketches (section 3.07.9 of this report).
Occupancy, or Use Building *** - an Underground building is defined as a building having a floor level more
Building Type than 30 feet (9.144m) below the lowest level of exit discharge.
B including educational Tower; Keystone; Library It is clear from the ‘Occupancy Types’ table that the proposed KACK&C will contain
occupancies above the ‘Mixed Uses’ and ‘Mixed Occupancies’. In terms of building design approach, in
order to satisfy the ‘non-separated occupancy’ strategy, the proposed KACK&C
12th grade must satisfy the most onerous (highest risk) design criteria. In this instance the
‘High Rise’ classification is generally viewed to represent the most onerous
E including religious Great Hall conditions and, as such, should be applied throughout the proposed KACK&C,
unless otherwise dictated by ‘specific building requirements based on use and
auditoriums and occupancy’.
educational rooms
This approach must be confirmed by the AHJ.
S-1 including the storage of Tower; Back of House; Building Description
books and paper Library
The key areas/buildings of the proposed KACK&C include:
S-2 including the storage of Tower; Back of House;
• A Tower and Keystone;
food products, porcelain Museum
• A Library;
and pottery
• An Auditorium;
High Rise(*) - Tower; Library;
• A Great Hall;
Auditorium
• A Museum;
Atrium(**) - Library
• A Plaza; and
Underground(***) - Museum
• A Car Park (enclosed).
Table: ‘Mixed’ Use Types
Note:
* - a High Rise building is defined as a building whereby the topmost storey is

located more than 75 feet (22.86m) above the lowest level of fire department
vehicle access.
** - an Atrium building is defined as a building whereby vertical openings connect

two or more stories.
Tower and Keystone
Tower The Tower is defined as a ‘high rise’ building and is directly accessed from the
Plaza. The Tower will contain administration floors, technical/plant floors, a
restaurant, a viewing deck/gallery on the topmost storey and a variety of public
spaces. Means of escape from the Tower is provided via two escape stairs.
The Keystone is directly accessible from the Tower on Levels 03, 04, and 05. The
Great Hall Library is also directly connected to these levels of the Keystone. The Keystone
will typically provide reading spaces. Means of escape from the Keystone is
provided in alternate directions via the Tower and the Library.
Tower
Museum
Image: Project Section A-A
Tower
Keystone
Library
Car Park
Keystone
Image: Tower & Keystone

Museum
Image: Project Section B-B
Library Auditorium
The Library is directly accessed from the Plaza and is provided with four storeys. The Auditorium will be a 900 seated venue, extending upwards from Plaza (level
The Library will house between 200,000 to 300,000 books. An escalator will 00) with 5 upper storeys, and also provided with a single below ground level to
connect from Plaza (level 00) to level 02 of the Library, through a central atrium, accommodate the orchestra pit etc. The upper storeys of the Plaza will
which connects all floors of the Library. Means of escape from the Library is accommodate tiered seating, as well as a projectionist’s room and break-out
provide by multiple escape stairs. facilities specific for theatre performances.
Image: Library Section
Image: Typical Auditorium Footprint

Museum Great Hall
The Museum will be provided with four exhibition galleries/rooms, only one of The Great Hall is predominantly a single storey conferencing/banqueting and
which will be enclosed (for the purposes of climate/environment control). Each exhibition facility, with a mezzanine/gallery floor arrangement located around 30%
gallery will be accessed from a central circulation descending ramp. Access to the of the perimeter. The maximum design occupancy proposed for the Great Hall is
circulation ramp will be provided directly from the Plaza (level 00). The 1000 occupants, plus staff. The Great Hall is accessed directly from the Plaza
underground levels of the Museum back on to the back of house and storage (level 00) and will be provided with perimeter exits connecting directly to the
facilities. outside.
The main feature of the Museum is an external courtyard space, enclosed by Plaza
transparent construction and therefore visible from all levels of the Museum.
The Plaza is the main central ‘hub’ and circulation space for the entire
development. The main entrance to the Plaza is located in the south-east corner of
the site, with a secondary entrance/exit route located to the rear of the Plaza
(north-west corner). The Plaza will accommodate a ticket purchasing facility, for
the various features on show within the KACK&C, as well as a cafeteria, kitchen
and fire command centre – all of which are accessed from level 00 of the Plaza.
Located around the perimeter of the Plaza on level 01 will be a ‘Teens’ area and
ancillary office accommodation.
Car Park
The car park is located over two levels (00 and 01) and is directly accessed for
external ground at two locations (east and west). The car park is fully enclosed on
three sides. However, the south elevation of the car park is open to the external
air. Car parking on level 00 is provided for members of the public. Car parking
provided on level 01 is provided for members of staff.
Landscape
Provided below is a computer visualisation (provided by other members of the

design team), which highlights the different buildings and the proposed site layout.
Image: Museum Visualisation (1 and 2)

High Rise Buildings
Tower
The following notes are provided as a ‘guide’ for the design development Tower
Auditorium Keystone and Teens, the Library, and the Auditorium.
• Any building greater than 75 feet (22.86m) is classed as a ‘High Rise’

Library building;
• ‘Type IA’ construction can be reduced to ‘Type IB’, based on the provision of
automatic sprinkler protection (the required fire-resisting rating of columns
supporting floors shall not be reduced – structural fire resistance rating
Principle period remains as required, i.e. 3 hours);
Main
Entrance • A ‘High Rise’ building shall be fitted throughout with an automatic sprinkler
protection system - monitored sprinkler control valves should be included;
Great Hall
Secondary • For a building height of less than 420 feet (128m) shaft enclosures can be
Main Oasis/Garden reduced to 1 hour where automatic sprinkler protection is provided to the top
Entrance of shafts and at alternative floor levels;
Perimeter • Stairs serving floors greater than 75 feet (22.86m) above Fire Department
Car Park Access access level to be treated as smoke-proof enclosures (refer to section 3..07.4
Entrance Road of this report for further details); and
• A separate zone per floor shall be provided for smoke detectors, sprinkler
Image: Landscape Computer Visualisation water-flow devices, and manual fire alarm boxes.
3.7.2.6 Specific Building Requirements Based on Use Atriums
The design of specific building ‘Uses’, as identified within the IBC, should satisfy The following notes are provided as a ‘guide’ for the design development of the
certain fire safety criteria due to the perceived higher risk associated with these Library (atrium).
building types. The following ‘Uses’ are proposed within the KACK&C:
• The Library will be provided throughout with an automatic sprinkler
• High Rise Buildings (Section 403 – IBC) protection system;
• Atriums (Section 404 – IBC) • The Library will be provided with a smoke control system; and
• Underground Buildings (Section 405 – IBC) • The floor of the Library atrium shall not be used for other than ‘low’ fire
hazard uses.
• Stages and Platforms (Section 410 – IBC)
A summary of the specific fire safety design criteria for each ‘use’ is provided
below:
Underground Buildings Stages and Platforms
The following notes are provided as a ‘guide’ for the design development of the The following notes are provided as a ‘guide’ for the design development of the
Museum. Auditorium.
• An underground building is defined by having an occupied floor level greater
than 30 feet (9.144m) below the lowest level of discharge;
• The construction type required for an underground building is ‘Type I’ • Where the stage height is greater than 15.24m, all portions of the stage shall
construction; be separated from the seating area by a proscenium wall with not less than a
2 hour fire resistance rating (fire safety curtain) extending from roof to floor
• Automatic sprinkler protection is required throughout, including monitored level;
valves and flow switches;
• Emergency ventilation shall be provided for stages greater than 93m2 in
• Each accessible floor should have access to evacuation lifts/elevators; floor area, or for a stage height greater than 15.24m;
• A smoke control system shall be provided to control the migration of • Two, or more automatically opening vents, activated by heat sensitive
products of combustion; detectors, shall be located near the centre and above the highest part of the
stage area;
• Smoke control will restrict movement of smoke to general area of fire origin
and maintain means of egress in a useable condition; • The clear opening area of the vents shall achieve a minimum of 5% of the
area of the stage;
• Smoke detectors shall be provided throughout the Museum;
• Means for manual operation of the vents shall also be provided;
• The activation of the smoke exhaust system shall activate an audible alarm
at a constantly attended location; • The stage shall be separated from dressing rooms, scene docks, workshops,
stores etc. by a 2 hour fire resistance rated fire barrier wall;
• The museum shall be equipped throughout with a fire alarm system,
including an emergency voice alarm communication system; • Dressing rooms, scene docks, workshops, storerooms etc, shall be separated
from each other by a 1 hour fire resistance rated fire barrier wall;
• A minimum of two means of egress shall be provided per floor/gallery;
• The stage should be provided with an automatic sprinkler protection system;
• Stairways serving floors greater than 30 feet (9.144m) below exit discharge and
level shall be designed with smoke-proof enclosures (refer to section 3.07.4
of this report for further details); • Fire fighting standpipe systems shall be provided to the Auditorium.
• Emergency power shall be provided to the Museum; and
• A ‘wet/charged’ fire fighting standpipe system shall be provided to the

Museum.
3.7.2.7 Occupancy Characteristics Single Escape Stair (Tower)
For the proposed KACK&C development occupancy characteristics can be broken- Subsequent to the drawing information issued by Snohetta on the 9th May a single
down into two categories: means of escape stair proposal was issued for the Tower. A conceptual fire
strategy approach was then developed for the Tower’s single stair scheme and
• Members of the public; and submitted to the FP and LP departments of SA (AHJ’s). No formal approval of the
Tower’s single stair scheme has been received as further technical justification has
• Staff. been requested by the AHJ. The instruction from the clients engineering
representative is to proceed with the development of the single stair justification,
Public Areas although there is a risk that this solution may not be approved.
Visitors to the KACK&C will be awake and would typically be unfamiliar with their Reference should be made to section 3.07.7 for further details.
surroundings.
External Fire Fighting Access
From the proposed landscaping arrangement external perimeter fire apparatus

With regards to building use the building as a whole will be used for daily public access routes cannot meet the code requirements. The challenge specifically
events. The facility is desired to be flexible to host a wide range of activities, with relates to the topography of the site. A conceptual fire fighting access proposal
large numbers of children present. Access will be provided throughout for disabled was then developed based on the landscaping access provision shown, with
users. additional routes added where possible, and submitted to the FP and LP
departments of SA (AHJ’s). No formal approval of the fire fighting access has been
Staff Areas received as further technical justification has been requested by the AHJ. The
instruction from the clients engineering representative is to proceed with the
Occupants of the ancillary office accommodation will be awake and familiar with development of the alternative fire fighting access justification, although there is a
their surroundings. The office accommodation will be used as a traditional working risk that this solution may not be approved.
environment and will be provided with open plan accommodation, as well as
enclosed meeting room facilities. Access will be provided throughout for disabled Reference should be made to section 3.07.7 for further details.
users.
Fire Water Supply
3.7.2.8 Items of Regulatory Risk During the development of the scheme design calculations were conducted
regarding fire water demand (sprinklers, standpipes, hose streams, hydrants etc.)
The following items of regulatory risk have been identified from the proposed for the proposed KACK&C. These calculations were based on the assumption that
scheme: fire water tanks and pumps were to be installed on site.
• Single escape stair (Tower); The design team were recently informed that there is an existing underground
water main infrastructure in close vicinity of the proposed KACK&C site, which
• External fire fighting access; and potentially provides a high water flow and static pressure. Therefore, there is the
potential for the existing water main to act as the main supply to the proposed fire
• Fire water supply. water systems. Work is currently ongoing by various parties to confirm the
acceptability of this approach.
At the stage (scheme design II) it is recommended that costs are allocated for the
most onerous situation, i.e. a full hold fire water tank and associated fire pumps.
Codes and Standards
The following codes have been referenced during the development of the fire
strategy approach and for the basis of this report:
International Building Code (IBC) 2003
International Fire Code (IFC) 2003
The following standards, as mostly referenced within the IBC and IFC, have be
referenced during the development of this report:
NFPA 10: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 13: Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14: Standpipe and Hose Systems
NFPA 15: Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
NFPA 20: Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
NFPA 24: Installation of Private Fire Service Mains
Furthermore, where appropriate, Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (SAES)

have been reviewed during the development of this report.
Table: Fire Resistance Rating Period for Building elements
3.7.3 Fire-Resistance Rated Construction Note: * from the previous table Type IA construction has been assumed.
3.7.3.1 Background With regards to the definition of the structural frame:
The occupancy approach proposed for the KACK&C is that of a multiple/mixed ‘The structural frame shall be considered to be the columns and the girders,
occupancy (section 302.3 – IBC). Additionally, it is also proposed that a ‘non- beams, trusses and spandrels having direct connections to the columns and
separated use’ (section 302.3.1) approach is adopted, as this will aid in delivering bracing members designed to carry gravity loads. The members of floor or roof
the architectural aspirations for the internal spaces. panels which have no connection to the columns shall be considered secondary
members and not part of the structural frame.’
By adopting the above approach the most onerous type of construction (Type IA)
must be applied to all buildings. From Table 503 (IBC) the area and height Furthermore, as previously stated: ‘the structural frame includes columns, girders,
limitations must be satisfied. In this instance, Type IA construction (as proposed), beams etc. - those structural components having a direct connection to the
does not require area and height limitations (unlimited). Furthermore the columns and bracing members designed to carry gravity loads. Floor members or
occupancy separations between the various identified ‘uses’ are omitted. roof panels which have no connection to the columns are considered as secondary
members and not part of the structural frame. The fire resistance rating of the
structural frame and bearing walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated, where
3.7.3.2 Building Elements supporting the roof only.
The fire resistance rating requirements for building elements has been achieved Reference should be made to the Structural Engineers drawings and report for
from Table 601 (IBC). further details.
Building Element Fire-Resistance Rating*

3.7.3.3 Fire Strategy Approach
Structural Frame, including columns, 3 hours
girders, trusses With regards to the development of the fire strategy specific items (walls/floors)
have been identified, which are required to fulfil a fire resistance rating, in order to
Bearing Walls: 3 hours (exterior)
limit the spread of fire and smoke. This approach will aid the development of the
3 hours (interior) means of escape strategy and limit the potential overall damage caused to the
building in the event of a fire. The following table provides a break-down of these
items and the associated fire resistance rating period to be applied.
Non-bearing Walls and Partitions 0 hours (exterior)
Non-bearing Walls and Partitions 0 hours (exterior)
Floor Construction (including 2 hours

supporting beams and joists)
Roof Construction (including 1.5 hours

supporting beams and joists)
Building Element Fire-Resistance Rating 3.7.3.5 Shaft Enclosures, including Lifts
Plaza and Car Park/Back of House Separation 2 hours Vertical riser shafts will be provided throughout the proposed KACK&C. Vertical
Keystone and Library/Tower Separation 2 hours riser shafts are represented by lift shafts, plant risers, ventilation shafts etc.
Vertical risers within buildings with four or more storeys require their enclosure to
by 2 hour fire resistance rated. Vertical risers within buildings with less than four
Tower floors 2 hours storeys require their enclosure to by 1 hour fire resistance rated.
Tower and Museum Separation 2 hours

3.7.3.6 Incidental Use Areas
Auditorium enclosure 2 hours
Regarding ‘Incidental Use Areas’ (Table 302.1.1 – IBC) these will be appropriately
fire separated from the remainder of the building. Examples of Incidental use
Museum (Back of House/Storage) 2 hours areas and the associated fire separation required are provided below:
Museum (Gallery 3) 2 hours

Room, or Area Separation (hours)
Auditorium Stage 2 hours Rooms with boiler over 15 psi 1 hour, or sprinkler protection
Laundry rooms (>100sq ft) 1 hour, or sprinkler protection
Backstage Areas to Auditorium 1 hour
Storage rooms (>100 sq ft) 1 hour, or sprinkler protection
Fire Command Centre 1 hour
Waste and linen rooms (> 100 sq ft) 1 hour, or sprinkler protection
Cinema 2 hours
Table: Incidental Use Areas and Associated Fire Separation

Table: Fire Resistance Rating Period for Building elements
3.7.3.7 Places of Higher Fire Risk

3.7.3.4 Escape Stair Enclosures
The building contains areas that could be considered to be places of ‘high fire risk’,
Vertical means of escape provisions are provided in multiple locations throughout when considering a risk management approach. Although there are no specific
the proposed KACK&C. Vertical means of escape from buildings with four or more requirements relating to the enclosure of such rooms, it is recommended that
storeys require the stair enclosures to by 2 hour fire resistance rated. Vertical certain rooms should be identified and separated from the remaining
means of escape from buildings with less than four storeys require the stair accommodation by fire rated construction.
enclosures to by 1 hour fire resistance rated.
Places of ‘high fire risk’ will be identified following further consultation with the
Building Services Engineer, Architect and client during Stage DD. These areas
should be enclosed in either 60, or 30 minutes fire resistant rated construction,
dependant upon risk identification. Such areas likely to be considered as places of passage of fire for a time period not less than the required fire-resistance rating of
higher fire risk include: the wall, floor, or roof in, or between which it is installed.
• Special collection storage rooms; Fire-resistant joint systems shall be tested in accordance with Section 713.3 (IBC).
The void created at the intersection of a floor/ceiling assembly and an exterior
• Kitchen and related stores; curtain wall assembly shall be protected in accordance with Section 713.4 (IBC).
• Dark rooms;
3.7.3.11 Concealed Spaces
• Workshops;
Fire-blocking, or cavity barriers, shall be installed in combustible concealed
• Stores where combustible materials, or flammable materials are likely to be locations in accordance with section 717 (IBC), and in particular section 717.2
present; and (IBC). The permitted use of combustible materials in concealed spaces of non-
combustible buildings shall be limited to the applications indicated in Section 717.5
• Electrical, communications, or IT areas. (IBC).
The client should confirm any places of ‘high fire risk’. For combustible construction buildings, fire-blocking shall be installed to cut off
concealed draft openings (both vertical and horizontal) and shall form an effective
barrier between floors, between a top story and a roof or attic space. Fire-blocking
3.7.3.8 Fire Doors shall be installed in the locations specified in sections 717.2.2 through 717.2.7
(IBC), where appropriate, as stated below:
All fire resisting door-sets in fire resistant walls require to provide the same fire
integrity as the wall in which they are situated, unless indicated otherwise. All fire • Concealed wall spaces;
doors should be self closing unless dictated otherwise.
• Connections between horizontal and vertical spaces;
Reference should be made to the over-marked ‘Fire Strategy Sketches’ for further
details (section 3.07.9 of this report). • Stairways; and
• Ceiling and floor openings.

3.7.3.9 Penetrations
Concealed Wall Spaces
All service penetrations in fire resisting elements should be fire stopped to maintain
the level of fire resistance necessary. Through penetrations shall be protected by Fire-blocking shall be provided in concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions as
an approved penetration firestop system in stalled and tested in accordance with follows:
ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch
(2.49 Pa) of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the required fire- • Vertically at the ceiling and floor levels; and
resistance rating of the wall penetrated.
• Horizontally at intervals not exceeding 3048mm.
3.7.3.10 Fire-Resistance Joint Systems
Joints installed in, or between fire-resistance rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling

assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies shall be protected by an approved
fire-resistant joint system. The proposed system should be designed to resist the
Connections between horizontal and vertical spaces Reference should be made to the architect’s drawings for further details.
Fire-blocking shall be provided at interconnections between concealed vertical stud

walls, or partition spaces, and concealed horizontal spaces created by an assembly 3.7.3.12 Fire Dampers
of floor joists, or trusses, and between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces
such as occur at soffits, drop ceilings, cove ceilings and similar locations. Fire/smoke dampers should be fitted to ducts passing through fire resistance rated
walls and floors. Within the proposed KACK&C development consideration should
be given to the installation of fire and smoke dampers which are addressable, i.e.
Stairways activated via automatic detection (not fusible links), which can be remotely
monitored and controlled. Fire dampers shall have the minimum period of fire
Fire-blocking shall be provided in concealed spaces between stair stringers at the protection rating as stated in the following table.
top and bottom of the run. Enclosed spaces under stairs shall also comply with
Section 1019.1.5 (IBC).
Type of Penetration Minimum Damper Rating (hours)
Ceiling and floor openings
Less than 3 hour fire resistance rated 1.5
Fire-blocking shall be installed at openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys assemblies
and fireplaces at ceiling and floor levels, with an approved material to resist the
free passage of flame and the products of combustion. Table: Fire Damper Rating
Fire-Blocking Materials It should be noted that fire and smoke dampers should be provided with an
approved means of access, large enough to permit inspection and maintenance of
Details of possible fire-blocking materials (and methods) are provided below: the damper and its operating parts. Reset switches should be accessible.
‘Fire-blocking shall consist of a 51mm nominal lumber, or two thicknesses of Reference should be made to the Building Service Engineers drawings and report
25mm nominal lumber, with broken lap joints, or one thickness of 18.3mm wood for further details.
structural panel with joints backed by 18.3 mm wood structural panel, or one
thickness of 19mm particleboard with joints backed by 19mm particleboard.
3.7.3.13 Interior Finishes
Gypsum board, cement fibre board, bats, or blankets of mineral wool, or glass
fibre, or other approved materials installed in such a manner as to be securely Internal wall and ceiling finishes shall be classified in accordance with ASTM E 84.
retained in place shall be permitted as an acceptable fire-block. Such interior finish materials shall be grouped in the following classes in
accordance with their flame spread and smoke development indexes.
Bats, or blankets of mineral, or glass fibre, or other approved non-rigid materials
shall be permitted for compliance with the 3048mm horizontal fire-blocking in walls • Class A: Flame spread 0-25; smoke development 0-450
constructed using parallel rows of studs, or staggered studs. Loose-fill insulation
material shall not be used as a fire-block unless specifically tested in the form and • Class B: Flame spread 26-75; smoke development 0-450
manner intended for use to demonstrate its ability to remain in place and to retard
the spread of fire and hot gases. The integrity of fire-blocks shall be maintained at • Class C: Flame spread 76-200; smoke development 0-450
all times.’
All service penetrations in cavity barriers should be appropriately fire stopped, or

dampered.
The following table confirms the interior wall and ceiling finish requirements per
occupancy:
Group Sprinklered
Vertical exits Exit access Rooms and
and exit corridors and enclosed
passageways other exit spaces
ways
A-1 & A-2 B B C
A-3 B B C
B&E B C C
S C C C
Table: Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Requirements
Reference should be made to the Architects drawings for further details.
3.7.3.14 Exterior Walls
As the proposed KACK&C will be provided with a separation distance (the distance
measured between the proposed building and existing adjacent properties) of
greater than 30m, there is no limit placed on the maximum area of exterior wall
openings (IBC Table 704.8). However, consideration must be given to the
prevention of fire spread from ‘Pebble’ to ‘Pebble’. In this instance, together with
the provision of automatic sprinkler protection, localised areas of the external
façade may require to be fire rated, in order to prevent external fire spread.
• The hydraulic calculation approach should be used to determine the sprinkler
By following the code requirements of IBC 2003 the proposed KACK&C must be system design, as opposed to the pipe schedule approach;
provided with fire protection systems, appropriate to the use and layout of the
building. It should be noted that all fire protection systems should be designed to • The total ‘fire water’ capacity calculation must include sprinklers, hose
satisfy the requirements of the International Fire Code 2003. streams, and external standpipes;
Based on the current architectural proposals the following fire protection systems • For hose streams and sprinklers the lower duration value (for Ordinary
have been identified as being necessary: Hazard systems) can be applied, i.e. 60 minutes as opposed to 90 minutes,
based on the provision of sprinkler system water-flow alarm devices and
• Automatic Sprinkler Protection Systems; supervisory devices are electrically supervised and such supervision is
monitored at an approved, constantly attended location, i.e. the fire
• Automatic Fire Detection Systems; command centre;
• Public Address Voice Alarm Systems; • For hose streams the flow rate value (for Ordinary Hazard systems) is
applied, i.e. 250 GPM; and
• Means of Egress Illumination;
• The completed sprinkler system design must be signed off and approved by
• A Standpipe System; an approved NFPA sprinkler systems design engineer, prior to issuing to
Saudi Aramco (Loss Prevention and Fire Prevention Departments) for
• Smoke Control Systems; approval.
• Smoke and Heat Vents; Furthermore, from the hydraulic calculation approach:
• Pressurisation Systems; and • Hydraulic Calculations (separate calculations for hose streams and
sprinklers);
• Fire Command Centre.
• Hose Stream Hydraulic Calculation = 946 litres per minutes;
3.7.4.1 Automatic Sprinkler Protection Systems • 946 x 60 minutes = 56,775 litres (57m3 stored capacity)
Automatic sprinkler protection systems are to be provided throughout the proposed • Note: fixed flow rate for hose streams (FP to confirm if this includes hose
KACK&C, with the exception of specific risk hazard rooms, i.e. transformer rooms, streams inside and outside the building and fire hydrant supply);
computer server rooms etc. The automatic sprinkler protection system should be
designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. • Sprinkler hydraulic Calculation = design density (mm/min) x area of sprinkler
operation (m2)
During the development of the scheme design fire strategy report various
discussions have been held with LP and FP departments of Saudi Aramco. During • Design Density = 6.1mm/min (worst-case/maximum)
these discussions calculations were submitted by Buro Happold FEDRA regarding
the ‘Fre Water’’ demand requirements for the proposed KACK&C. The following is • Area of Sprinkler Operation = 372m2 (worst-case/maximum)
a break-down of the calculation approach:
• 0.061 x 60 x 60 x 372 = 81,691 litres (82m3)
• The proposed sprinkler system, standpipes, hose systems, and pumps can be
designed in accordance with NFPA 13, 14 and 20 respectively;
• Reduced duration (60 minutes as opposed to 90 minutes) due to provision of System Operation and Control
monitored valves.
The proposed sprinkler protection system should be based on a standard operating
• The proposed standpipe systems are permitted to be combined with the approach (temperature sensitive sprinkler heads operated locally to a fire). It is
automatic sprinkler system; not possible at this stage to confirm whether, or not a deluge/drencher sprinkler
protection system will be required, although this type of systems seems unlikely
• Total stored capacity required from hydraulic calculations = hose stream + within the proposed building.
sprinklers
As a minimum standard approach each floor protected by automatic sprinklers
• ‘Fire Water’ capacity required to feed proposed systems = 57 + 82 = 139m3 should include a controlled/monitored valve arrangement. Where a sprinkler
protected floor area exceeds the limits in the following table, multiple ‘zoned’
During the discussions with the FP Department and Saudi Aramco PMT it was control/monitoring valve arrangements should be provided.
assumed that Ordinary Hazard classification represented the worst-case/most
onerous design criteria for the proposed building(s). Hazard Classification Sprinkler Protected Zone Area
At this stage of the design process it is recommended that a full holding capacity Light
‘Fire Water’ tank is provided (139m3) with duty and standby fire pumps provisions, Ordinary (Group I)
including associated jockey pump arrangement. 52,000 feet2, or 4831m2
The design team are currently investigating and assessing the potential viability of Ordinary (Group II)
utilising existing water mains in the vicinity of the site as a means to supply the
proposed total ‘Fire Water’ demand. The results of this approach will be confirmed
in due course. This will determine if a water storage tank is required for the fire Table: Maximum Sprinkler Protected Zone Area
systems. A water flow and pressure test has been conducted by FP and has
confirmed that the existing main has capacity to provide a good quantity of water,
but concerns exist about the available pressures. 3.7.4.2 Automatic Fire Alarm Systems
Sprinkler Main Distribution and Monitoring In combination with manual fire call pints automatic smoke detection and, where
appropriate, heat detection, i.e. kitchens, plant rooms etc. will be fitted throughout
For the purposes of sprinkler water distribution it is recommended that a ring-main the proposed KACK&C. At specific locations automatic detection will fulfil the role,
is provided round the site, supplying each building/Pebble. The size of the in the event of a fire, of activating door closures, or activating fire curtains.
sprinkler ring-main could range from 100 to 200mm diameter (to be confirmed by
Sprinkler Design Engineer and full hydraulic calculations). Consideration should be given to the provision of flashing warning beacons in order
to a visual warning to hearing impaired people within the building.
In order to supply sprinkler water to each building, sprinkler riser mains should be
provided (located within fire resistance-rating enclosed shafts). It is anticipated Fire rated cabling, or equivalent should be used in the proposed installations.
that a minimum of two sprinkler risers would be provided per building/Pebble. The
size of the sprinkler riser mains, serving each building/area, could range from 100 A main control panel for the fire detection system should be sited in the ‘Fire
to 150mm diameter (to be confirmed by Sprinkler Design Engineer and full Command Centre’, with repeater panels situated at location confirmed by the Chief
hydraulic calculations). Fire Officer.
It is recommended that all sprinkler control valves are monitored, with system A full coverage analogue addressable system should be installed.
signals/status relayed to the main sprinkler control panel (located within the Fire
Command Centre). Reference should be made to the Building Services Engineers drawings and report
for further details.
• Elevator lobbies;
Informative Fire Warning Devices
• Corridors;
In the event of a fire and the evacuation of specific areas of the building,
consideration should be given to the provision of informative fire warning devices • Rooms and spaces exceeding 93m2 in area; and
at appropriate locations to prevent people evacuating into a building, or area of fire
origin. • Areas of refuge.
Consultation is required with client and Building Services Engineer to determine the Further design considerations with regards to public address voice alarms:
specific requirements.
• A manual override for emergency voice communication should be provided
Auto-Dial Facility for all zones;
Confirmation is required from the client with regards to the proposed operation of • The emergency voice/alarm communication system should also have the
the building and procedures for alerting/calling out the fire department. The fire capability to broadcast live voice messages through speakers located in
detection system can be installed such that the fire department will be elevators, exit stairways and throughout a selected floor or floors.
automatically alerted of any fire.
• The emergency voice/alarm communication system should be designed and
Staff Warning/Investigation installed in accordance with NFPA 72.
Further information is required from the project client with regards to incorporating Control equipment should be sited in the fire command centre and a fireman’s
an investigation phase on receipt of the initial fire alarm signal. The introduction of microphone provided at this location.
an investigation period (typically to last two to three minutes) would potentially
reduce the number of false fire alarms and unnecessary call-outs of the fire
authority. 3.7.4.4 Means of Egress Illumination
The means of egress illumination shall be illuminated at all times the building
3.7.4.3 Public Address Voice Alarm Systems served by the means of egress is occupied. Means of egress illumination shall also
include exit discharge.
An emergency voice alarm communication system, linked to the automatic fire
alarm and detection system shall be provided throughout the proposed KACK&C. The illumination level shall not be less than 11 lux, measured at floor level.
This system is proposed due to the high ‘assembly’ occupancy type, and potential Specific exceptions will apply to the auditorium and such like spaces. With regards
unfamiliarity of the building and layout by the majority of users. to the auditorium design reference should be made to the theatre consultants
report for further details.
The operation of any automatic fire/smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow device, or
manual fire alarm box shall automatically sound an alert tone followed by voice The power supply for means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by
instructions giving approved information and directions on a general, or selective the premise’s electrical supply. In the event of power supply failure, an emergency
basis to the following ‘terminal areas’ on a minimum of the alarming floor, the floor electrical system shall automatically illuminate the following areas:
above and the floor below in accordance with the International Fire Code 2003.
• Exit access corridors, passageways and aisles in rooms and spaces which
require two, or more means of egress;
Terminal Areas: • Internal exit access corridors and exit stairways;

• Exterior egress components at other than the level of exit discharge until exit
discharge is accomplished for buildings required to have two, or more exits; • Exhaust method – incorporating smoke curtains of 1.9m at the ceiling edge,
the required exhaust rate is 4.71m3/sec per floor.
• Interior exit discharge locations; and
• Slit extract – located at the ceiling edge, slit extract may negate the need for
• The area of exterior exit immediately adjacent to exit discharge doorway. smoke curtains. The required exhaust rate is 9.628m3/sec per floor.
The emergency power system shall provide power for duration of not less than 90 • Opposed air flow – this solution requires a significant air velocity forced onto
minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment, or an on-site the floor plate. The required velocity is in excess of recommended limits in
generator. The installation of the emergency power system shall be in accordance accordance with IBC: 2003 and is therefore discounted as a feasible option.
with Section 2702 (IBC).
3.7.4.5 Standpipe System
Reference should be made to section 3.07.6 of this report for details on the
provision of the proposed standpipe system.
3.7.4.6 Smoke Control Systems
In order to satisfy the code requirements the Library and Museum will by provided
with a smoke control system. Additionally, the car park areas are proposed to be
installed with a smoke clearance system. It is proposed that the car park is
provide with a smoke clearance system, which forces smoke and heat from a
potential fire towards the open side of the car park.
Image: Potential Library Fire Location
With regards to the Museum and Library the following is provide as conceptual
design guidance to be further investigated during Detailed Design (DD).
This design note investigates various options for the museum and library located
within the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre. Each of these areas incorporates atria
that are complex in nature due to the size and obstructions located within.
At this stage in the design, it is therefore recommended that smoke is contained

and exhausted within the boundary of the floor plate, rather than extracted from
the atria. Alternative solutions may be considered during the development of the
design, with the assistance of a Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD) investigation.
Library Floors
It is proposed to contain smoke within the boundary of the floor plate. Various
Image: Potential Smoke Spill in Library
options have been investigated:
Museum Galleries
• Slit extract – the exhaust rate necessary to contain the smoke layer of the slit was found
The museum is located in the basement and therefore, in accordance with IBC: to be 27.28m3/s.
2003, each floor requires an exhaust rate of 6 air changes per hour.
Image: Example Automatic Descending Smoke Curtains
Image: Open Museum Galleries
Image: Example of Slit Extract Arrangement
Environmental criteria and local geometry are generally ignored in first principle
hand calculations, such as those which have been applied. Therefore, the smoke
and heat exhaust extract rates which have been calculated should be used as the
Image: Potential Museum Fire Location (situation to be avoided) basis for further development, rather than a final solution.
Museum galleries 1 and 2 are open to the circulation ramps and therefore
investigation was required to determine the most appropriate smoke control 3.7.4.7 Smoke and Heat Exhaust Vents
system:
The auditorium will be designed to include smoke and heat exhaust vents located
• 3
Exhaust method – an air change rate of 6ach compares to an exhaust rate of 17m /s. A at the head of the stage. In this instance, smoke and heat vents are typically
zone model has been used to determine the maximum depth of the associated smoke operate via activation of the automatic sprinkler system, due to the potential
layer. The maximum depth of the smoke layer is 6.3m; therefore a smoke curtain that presence of ‘stage smoke’. It should also be noted that the smoke and heat vents
drops 6.3m is required to contain the smoke within the museum gallery. require a manual operation switch located at stage level.
The smoke and heat vents in this instance shall provide a clear opening area,
measured to achieve a minimum of 5% of the area of the stage.
3.7.4.8 Smoke Pressurisation Systems
Smoke-proof enclosures are required at specific locations in order to aid occupant

means of escape in the event of a fire. In this instance, the smoke proof enclosures
will be protected by a means of pressurisation. Due to the provision of automatic
sprinkler protection throughout the building, vestibules to escape stairs are not
required. However, at various locations, in order to aid evacuation, i.e. for
disabled persons, vestibules to escape stairs, or evacuation lifts, will be provided.
In any case pressurisation will be applied to the stair enclosure, or to the vestibule
providing an area of refuge.
The interior exit stairways should be pressurized to a minimum of 0.15 inch of

water (37 Pa) and a maximum of 0.35 inch of water (87 Pa), in the shaft relative
to the building measured with all stairway doors closed under maximum
anticipated stack pressures.
Doors in a smoke-proof enclosure shall be self-closing, or shall be automatic

closing by actuation of a smoke detector installed at the floor-side entrance to the
smoke-proof enclosure. The actuation of the smoke detector on any door shall
activate the closing devices on all doors in the smoke-proof enclosure at all levels.
Smoke detectors should also be provided for the basis for actuation of the
pressurisation system.
provision of a fire command centre.
Auditorium
Escape provisions should be configured to provide all building users with adequate
means of escape from fire. All means of egress provisions should be maintained in Although the Auditorium is entered from the Plaza and can be accessed by staff via
accordance with the International Fire Code. the Museum it is not connected to any of the other buildings in terms of public
access. Means of escape from the Auditorium (public areas) is provided via two
escape stairs and via the Plaza. From the back stage areas horizontal means of
3.7.5.1 General Means of Egress escape, as well as an additional escape stair shall be provided.
The general means of egress strategy will be developed to address the following Museum
areas:
The Museum is an underground building which is located beneath the Tower. The
• Tower Museum is accessed via the Plaza, with occupants having access to the Tower stair,
• Auditorium; and staff having access to the Library stair.
• Museum;
• Library; Back of House Level-01 is adjacent to the Museum.
• Underground car park;
• Back of House; Means of escape from the Museum shall be provided via the main circulation ramp,
• Keystone; an additional escape stair/route (to be added by the architect), and via the Tower.
• Cinema; Means of escape from the Museum also leads through the Plaza.
• Great Hall; and
• Plaza Library
The above buildings are on the same site, many of them are connected and the The Library is accessed via the Plaza, and has connections with the Keystone. Fire
majority of these can be entered directly from the central plaza area. resistance rated construction will be provided where the Library adjoins the
Keystone.
The following is a summary of each building, which will aid to formulate the
evacuation strategy for the proposed KACK&C. Means of escape from the Library shall primarily be achieved via vertical escape
stairs. It will also be possible, on certain floors of the Library to escape via the
Tower Keystone. Means of escape from the Library shall also connect to the Plaza.
The Tower has 15 storeys. The structural frame of the Tower will provide 3 hours Underground Car Park
fire resistance and every floor of the tower will be constructed as 2 hour fire
resistance rated floors. Level 00 of the car park is adjacent to the Back of House storage area. Fire
resistance construction will separate the two occupancies. At level 01 the Car Park
The tower is entered from the Plaza and it can also be entered from the Keystone is adjacent to the Plaza. Escape routes from the Car Park are primarily provided
via the Library. direct to the outside, via the open side of the Car Park and escape stair.
Additionally, means of escape from the Car Park shall be provided through the
2 hours fire resistance separation will be provided between the Tower and the Plaza.
Keystone.
Escape from the tower is provided via escape stairs which will be enclosed in 2
hour fire resistance construction.
Back of House The total calculated occupancy for all 10 of the buildings is 11951. Due to the
number of buildings involved and the total occupancy numbers, simultaneous
The loading docks within this area are provided with perimeter exits in order that evacuation of the development in the event of an emergency would be extremely
occupants do not have to re-enter the building to evacuate. difficult to manage and could be hazardous.
Fire resistance rated construction is provided between the loading docks and the To minimise the affect of a fire, or false alarm in one building on the surrounding
staff areas. This approach is provided to protect the escape routes from a possible buildings a fire emergency evacuation plan should be developed. The evacuation
fire in the loading docks. of the proposed KACK&C development will be such that only the affected buildings
(zones) are evacuated immediately whilst the adjacent buildings (zones) are in
Occupants are provided with an escape route through fire resistance rated alert mode (Staff alarm mode). The staff in such buildings will be made aware of a
construction into the Great Hall, or via an escape stair. potential evacuation/fire alarm. If a fire is confirmed a more general alarm will
sound and the evacuation of those buildings on alert mode will commence.
Keystone
In the event of a fire a phased evacuation process is proposed for the KACK&C.
The Keystone can only be entered from the Library and the Tower at levels 03, 04
and 05. Occupants from the Keystone are required to evacuate through either of The phased evacuation approach should be designed to allow those people not at
these buildings. There will be 2 hour fire resistance rated construction between immediate risk from a fire to delay their evacuation. This can be done by
the Keystone and the Library and the Keystone and Tower at the connecting levels. immediately evacuating the fire floor, the floor above and the floor below. The
other floors can then be evacuated, when required and safe to do so, potentially on
Cinema a floor by floor basis in order to avoid congestion on escape routes.
Further information is required on the means of escape from the cinema. To demonstrate how the proposed phased evacuation plan could work, a fire
scenario has been considered in each of the buildings, showing how the adjacent
Great Hall buildings will be affected.
The Great Hall is connected to the Plaza and the Back of House area. There will be
fire resistance rated construction where the Great Hall adjoins other
accommodation. There are independent escape routes from the Great Hall directly
to the outside. There are also routes provided through the Back of House area and
the Plaza.
Plaza
The Plaza has 2 main public entrances. The Plaza provides direct open access to
the Tower, Auditorium, Library and Cinema.
There are outdoor oasis areas in the Plaza and the means of escape from these
should be provided away from the building.
Proposed Evacuation Strategy
The Plaza is a ‘Hub’ and people will use this route as a primary exit, unless there is
a fire in the Plaza. All areas with a direct connection to the evacuated space
should be evacuated.
Buildings to Buildings On Buildings Not
Buildings to Buildings On Buildings Not be Standby (Alert Affected
be Standby (Alert Affected Evacuated Mode)
Evacuated Mode) Immediately
Immediately
Tower
Tower
Auditorium
Auditorium
Keystone
Keystone
Library
Library
Great Hall
Great Hall
Cinema
Cinema
Plaza
Plaza
Car Park
Car Park
Back of House
Back of House
Museum
Museum
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Library
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Plaza

Buildings to Buildings On Buildings Not Buildings to Buildings On Buildings Not
be Standby (Alert Affected be Standby (Alert Affected
Evacuated Mode) Evacuated Mode)
Immediately Immediately
Tower (Levels 3, Tower

4, 5 only)
Auditorium
Auditorium
Keystone
Keystone
Library
Library
Great Hall
Great Hall
Cinema
Cinema
Plaza
Plaza
Car Park
Car Park
Back of House
Back of House
Museum
Museum
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Great Hall
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Keystone
Tower Tower
Auditorium Auditorium
Keystone Keystone
Library Library
Great Hall Great Hall
Cinema Cinema
Plaza Plaza
Car Park Car Park
Back of House Back of House
Museum Museum
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Back of House Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Auditorium
Tower Tower
Auditorium Auditorium
Keystone Keystone
Library Library
Great Hall Great Hall
Cinema Cinema
Plaza Plaza
Car Park Car Park
Back of House Back of House
Museum Museum
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Cinema Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Museum
Tower (phased Tower

evacuation)
Auditorium
Auditorium
Keystone
Keystone
Library
Library
Great Hall
Great Hall
Cinema
Cinema
Plaza
Plaza
Car Park
Car Park
Back of House
Back of House
Museum
Museum
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Car Park
Table: Phased Evacuation – Fire Scenario in Tower
Phased Evacuation Building/Location Level Occupancy
Phased evacuation is not referenced in the International Building Codes, or the Plaza Level 00 4190
International Fire Codes. However, it is international practice to adopt
phased/staged evacuation in high rise and certain complex buildings. Adoption of Level 01 1156
phased evacuation means that the required escape stair width is based on the
largest occupied storey and not the cumulative of all the storeys that discharge
into the stair. Total 5346
It is good practice to base the stair widths on the three adjacent largest occupied Back of House Level 00 75
storeys. In this instance, the Kitchen, restaurant and sky bar represent the worst-
case/most onerous occupancy.
Level 01 41
The total occupancy at the identified is 280 occupants. An 1100mm wide stair will
accommodate this number of occupants, (280 * 0.15 = 1067mm). For accessible Total 116
means of escape reasons the minimum escape stair width must be no less than
1219mm. Great Hall Level 00 1000 + staff (1050)
On activation of an alarm within the Tower the following actions will be taken:
Mezzanine -
• Immediate evacuation of the fire floor (zone in which the alarm is activated);
Total 1050
• All other floors go into alert mode (staff alarm);
• Evacuate floor (zone) above fire floor; Table: Plaza/BoH/Great Hall Calculated Occupancies
• Evacuate floor (zone) below fire floor;

Building/Location Level Occupancy
• Whilst the 3 affected floors (zones) are being evacuated establish if the
alarm is false or not; Museum Level 00 18
• If it is a false alarm, take other floor off alert mode; and Level -01 361
• If it is a real fire event is confirmed, commence evacuation of the remaining

floors. The floors above the fire floor should be evacuated first. Level -02 276
Level -03 332

3.7.5.2 Occupant Load
The following tables provide information on the occupancy load Total 987
calculated/predicted for the proposed KACK&C.
Table: Museum Calculated Occupancies
Building/Location Level Occupancy Building/Location Level Occupancy
Auditorium Level 00 1461 Car Park Level 00 741
Level 01 8 Level 01 320
Level 02 Seating provided at these Total 1061

levels, proposed 900 seats
Level 03
in auditorium. These have Table: Car Park Calculated Occupancies
Level 04 been included in Level 00)

Tower Level 00, 01, 02, 05, 0
Level 05 12
11, 15
Tower Level 03 30
Level -01 1
Tower Level 04 20
Total 1482
Keystone Level 03 20
Table: Auditorium Calculated Occupancies

Library Level 00 -
Tower Level 06, 07, 08, 09 100 (25 per floor)
Level 01 272
Tower Level 10 30
Level 02 504
Tower Level 12 15
Level 03 496
Tower Level 13 100
Level 04 212
Tower Level 14 50
Total 1484
Total 425
Table: Library Calculated Occupancies
Table: Tower & Keystone Calculated Occupancies
Building/Location Occupancy Egress Width Per Occupant Served
Plaza 5346
Stairways Other Egress Components
Back of House 116 (mm per occupant) (mm per occupant)
Great Hall 1050 5.08 3.81
Auditorium 1482
Table: Egress Width per Occupant
Library 1484
It shall be ensured for areas provided with multiple means of egress routes that
the loss of any one means of egress shall not reduce the available capacity to less
Museum 987 than 50 percent of the required capacity.
Tower/Keystone 425 All escape stairs within the proposed KACK&C shall provide a minimum clear egress
width of 1219mm (measured between handrails).
Car Park 1061

3.7.5.4 Stairways
Total Occupancy 11951
The required width of stairways has been calculated by applying the occupant
width factor from the previous table to the maximum floor occupancies within each
Table: Total Calculated Occupancies building.
The occupancy figures provided in the previous tables have either been calculated Where the occupant load serving a stair is less than 50 the stair width is required
by applying appropriate occupant load factors (Table 1004.1.2 of IBC 2003), where to be no less than 914mm (assuming the stair is not required for accessible means
appropriate, or based on occupancy figures provided by the architect. of egress).
3.7.5.3 Egress Width Where a stair is required as an accessible means of egress the clear width required
by the stair is 1219mm.
In order to calculate the minimum egress width required per person the width
factors provided in the following table should be applied (based on a sprinkler Stairways shall have a minimum headroom clearance of 2032mm, measured
protected building). vertically from a line connecting the edge of the nosings. Such headroom shall be
continuous above the stairway to the point where the line intersects the landing
below, one tread depth beyond the bottom riser. The minimum clearance shall be
maintained the full width of the stairway and landing.
Building Occupancy No. of Min. Stair Width 3.7.5.6 Accessible Means of Egress
at Largest Exits/Stairs (mm) [(occ/No.
Occupied Required exits) * 3.81] In the majority of locations more than one means of egress will be provided. As
Floor the proposed KACK&C is being designed to achieve maximum accessibility, each
space should be served by not less than two accessible means of egress.
Auditorium 550 3 1219mm Each required accessible means of egress shall be continuous to a public way and
consist of one, or more of the following components:
Tower/Keystone 100 2 1219mm
• Accessible routes;
Museum 361 2 1219mm • Stairways within exit enclosures;
Car Park 741 3 1219mm • Elevators;
• Platform lifts;
Library 504 3 1219mm
• Horizontal exits; or
Plaza 1156 3 1468mm
• Smoke barriers.
Great Hall n/a (mezz.) 1 1219mm
In buildings with four, or more storeys, above, or below a level of exit discharge,
at least one required accessible means of egress shall be an elevator.
Back of House 75 2 1219mm*
Where considered as part of an accessible means of egress an enclosed exit
Cinema - - - stairway shall provide a clear width of 1219 mm (minimum clearance between
handrails) and shall either incorporate an area of refuge within an enlarged floor
level landing, or shall be accessed from an area of refuge.
Table: Minimum Stair Width Requirements
An elevator considered as part of an accessible means of egress shall comply with
Note: * - if accessibility is not a requirement of the design for the back of house the emergency operation and signaling device requirements of ASME A17.1.
areas the minimum stair width required is 914mm. This also assumes that Standby power shall be provided in accordance with Sections 2702 and 3003
sufficient means of escape provisions are provided from areas like the Great Hall (IBC).
etc.
Elevators are not required to be accessed from an area of refuge, or horizontal exit
in open parking garages. Furthermore, elevators are not required to be accessed
3.7.5.5 Means of Egress Illumination from an area of refuge, or horizontal exit in buildings and facilities equipped
throughout with an automatic sprinkler system.
provision of the proposed means of egress illumination.
3.7.5.7 Doors, Gates and Turnstiles
In this instance a means of egress from an area/room shall not pass through
Means of egress doors shall be readily identifiable from the adjacent construction kitchens, storage rooms, closets, or spaces used for similar purposes. Additionally,
and finishes, to ensure that the doors are easily recognizable as doors. Mirrors, or an exit access shall not pass through a room that can be locked to prevent egress.
similar reflecting materials shall not be used on means of egress doors. Means of
egress doors shall not be concealed by curtains, drapes, decorations, or similar
materials. 3.7.5.11 Exit Access Travel Distance
The minimum width of each door opening shall be sufficient for the occupant load Exits shall be located such that the maximum length of the exit access travel,
dependant on the door and shall provide a clear width of not less than 813mm. measured from the most remote point, shall not exceed the recommended travel
distances given in IBC.
Gates used for means of egress shall comply with the same requirements for
egress doors. The recommended maximum travel distances within IBC are as follows:-
Turnstiles, or similar devices that restrict travel to one direction shall not be placed Underground Car Park: 23m common path of travel and 122m total travel
so as to obstruct any required means of egress. distance.
3.7.5.8 Ramps Auditorium: 15m common path of travel and 60m total travel distance. (The travel
distance from each seat to the nearest concourse or Vomitory shall not exceed
Ramps used as part of a means of egress shall have a running slope not steeper 60m. The distance from the concourse/Vomitory to the stair on the exterior of the
than one unit vertical in 12 units horizontal (8% slope). The slope of other ramps building shall not exceed 60m).
shall be no steeper than one unit vertical in eight units horizontal (12% slope).
All other building types: 23m in common path of travel and 76m total travel
The minimum width required for a ramp used as part of an escape route will be distance.
1118mm.
Minimum Number of Exits

3.7.5.9 Exit Signs
Where the occupancy load per room/storey/building exceeds those contained in the
Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible table below a minimum of 2 exits are required.
from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily
visible exit signs in cases where the exit, or the path of egress travel is not
immediately visible to the occupants.
Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more
than 30 480mm from the nearest visible exit sign.
3.7.5.10 Exit Access
Egress from a room, or space shall not pass through adjoining, or intervening
rooms, or areas, except where such adjoining rooms, or areas are accessory to the
area served and are not a high-hazard occupancy and which provide a path of
egress travel to an exit.
Occupancy Maximum 3.7.5.13 Horizontal Exits
Occupant Load
A horizontal exit shall not serve as the only exit from a portion of the proposed
A, B, E, F, M, U 50 KACK&C, and where two, or more exits are required, not more than one-half of the
total number of exits, or total exit width shall be horizontal exits.
H-1, H-2, H-3 3
Every fire compartment provided with a horizontal exit shall not be required to
have a stairway, or door leading directly outside, provided the adjoining fire
H-4, H-5, I-1, I-3, I- 10 compartment(s) have stairways, or doors leading directly to outside. These exits
4, R should be arranged to ensure that egress shall not require the occupants to return
through the compartment from which egress originates.
S 30
The area into which a horizontal exit leads shall be provided with exits adequate to
meet the occupant escape width requirements.
Table: Number of Exits
Exit Discharge
All rooms and spaces within each storey shall be provided with and have access to
the minimum number of independent exits required by the table below.
Exits shall discharge directly to the exterior of the building. The exit discharge
shall be a grade, or shall provide direct passage to grade. The exit discharge shall
Occupant Load Minimum Number not re-enter the building.
of Exits
1-500 2
3.7.5.14 Emergency Escape and Rescue
501-1000 3
Generally emergency and escape provisions will be achieved by the proposed
More than 1000 4 escape stair configurations, and horizontal evacuation strategy. There are no
further additional requirements stipulated within the IBC, for the proposed building
use, with regards to emergency escape and rescue.
Table: Number of Exits
3.7.5.12 Vertical Exit Enclosures
Interior exit stairways and interior exit ramps shall be enclosed with fire barriers.
Exit enclosures shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than 2 hours where
connecting four stories, or more and not less than 1 hour where connecting less
than four stories.
The number of stories connected by the shaft enclosure shall include any
basements, but not any mezzanines.
3.7.6 Fire Fighting Facilities • Sprinklers are installed, in which case the minimum distance can be
extended, subject to approval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ); or
Sufficient fire fighting provisions and means of access to and within the proposed
building for fire fighting personnel shall be provided. • Topography prevents road access, and an approved alternative means of fire
protection is provided (sprinklers).
Standard Fire Fighting Operations in Multi-Storey Buildings
An alternative approach to that stated within the IBC 2003 is currently being
Standard fire fighting practice/response in multi-storey buildings is as follows: developed with other members of the design team and LP and FP departments of
Saudi Aramco as it is currently not possible to meet the code requirements for
• Fire initiated and detected; external fire vehicle access. Reference should be made to section 3.07.07 for
further details.
• Fire service alerted;
• Portions of buildings above 30 feet (9m) should have access for aerial fire-
• Fire service arrive at site and deploy; fighting appliances, at least one of which should be between 15 and 30 feet
(5-7m) from the building, and be parallel to one entire side of the building.
• Fire fighters use lift to ascend to floor above fire;
• The gradient of a fire access road should be less than 10%, unless otherwise
• Fire service enter stair and connect onto outlet standpipe; accepted by the Fire Chief Officer as acceptable for the equipment in use
locally and approved by the AHJ. Steeper gradients may therefore be
• Fire service descend to fire floor and conduct fire fighting activity. acceptable.
• Two types of fire vehicles will be used to fight a fire in the building; • Fire access roads should be constructed to support imposed loads of 75,000
pounds (34T).
A general fire truck will be used to transport fire crews and equipment to site. This
truck will also be used for pumping water around and through the building via fie • The fire access roads should be 20 feet (6m) wide generally, or 26 feet (8m)
hoses. at hydrant positions. Clear over-head height should be at least 13 feet 6
inches (4.1m).
A high reach/ladder truck will also be deployed to respond to any call-out in the
buildings. This vehicle will be used to deploy water onto the roofs of the lower • Routes for aerial fire-fighting vehicles should be 26 feet (8m) wide and be
buildings to prevent fire spreading onto the higher buildings. This truck will not be clear of overhead utility, or power lines. A minimum clear over-head height
used for rescuing occupants of the ‘Tower’. is not specified.
• Fire fighting access roads which are dead ends should have turning facilities
3.7.6.1 Access if the dead-end is longer than 150 feet (46m).
Vehicle and pedestrian access should be provided externally to the proposed

KACK&C to aid perimeter fire fighting operations.
Fire fighting access requirements (IBC 2003) can be summarised as follows:
• Fire Service access roads should be provided to within 150 feet (46m) of all
areas of the external walls at fire service access level, unless:
3.7.6.2 Fire Fighting Provisions
Fire hydrants should be Type 509-G, or equivalent.
To aid fire fighting operations the proposed development will be provided, where
required, with appropriate fire fighting measures. The proposed KACK&C will Internal Fire Fighting Standpipe/Hose Stream Systems
include the following fire fighting measures:
Each vertical escape stair will be provided with a charged/wet fire fighting main,
• External fire hydrants; including outlets serving every storey. The outlets for the fire mains will be located
at half landing levels. It should be ensured that all internal floor areas are covered
• Internal fire fighting standpipe/hose stream systems; within 60m of the internal fire fighting hose streams. This will be further reviewed
during DD stage.
• Fire command centre;
• Perimeter access points to the building (escape stair discharge points); 3.7.6.3 Standpipe Systems
• Access to building via main and secondary entrances; Standpipe systems should be provided in the proposed KACK&C. Fire hose threads
used in connection with standpipe systems should be approved and be compatible
• Parking spaces for fire appliances; and with fire department hose threads. The location of fire department hose
connections should be confirmed following consultation with the Chief Fire Officer.
• Parking spaces for high reach appliances.
Standpipe systems shall be installed in accordance the requirements of NFPA 14.
External Fire Hydrants (fire fighting water)
The proposed building should be provided throughout with ‘Class I’ systems, based
Water for fire fighting hoses (standpipe system) shall be designed to deliver a on building height and the provision of automatic sprinkler protection.
maximum 1,000 gallons per minute (3,785 litre per minute), operating at a 100psi
running pressure and a maximum of 175psi static pressure (12.1 bar). Class I standpipe hose connections should be provided at the following locations:
Valves controlling water supplies shall be supervised in the open position so that a • In every required stairway, a hose connection shall be provided for each floor
change in the normal position of the valve will generate a supervisory signal – level above, or below grade. Hose connections shall be located at an
transmitted to the fire alarm system control unit. intermediate floor level landing between floors, unless otherwise approved by
the building official;
To satisfy the code requirements all standpipes within the proposed KACK&C will
be interconnected. • On each side of the wall adjacent to the exit opening of a horizontal exit;
Dry standpipes shall not be installed within the proposed development. • In every exit passageway at the entrance from the exit passageway to other
areas of a building;
Fire hydrant water supply may be dedicated fire water, or combined fire and raw
(utilities) water. • Where the roof has a slope less than four units vertical in 12 units horizontal
(33.3% slope), each standpipe shall be provided with a hose connection
Fire hydrant spacing shall be no closer than 15m and no greater than 90m apart. located either on the roof or at the highest landing of stairways with stair
It is acceptable for some fire hydrants to be positioned more than 30m from the access to the roof. An additional hose connection shall be provided at the top
building. of the most hydraulically remote standpipe for testing purposes;
Fire hydrants shall be positioned to within 6m of roads/parking areas for fire

appliances.
• Where the most remote portion of a sprinklered floor or story is more than • Schematic building plans indicating the typical floor plan and detailing the
200 feet (60 960 mm) from a hose connection, the building official may building core, means of egress, fire protection systems, fire-fighting
request that additional hose connections be provided in approved locations. equipment and fire department access;
Class I standpipe systems risers not located within an enclosed stairway should be • A worktable;
protected by fire resistance rated construction, equivalent to vertical enclosure in
the building. • Generator supervision devices, manual start and transfer features; and
• Public address system.

A ‘Fire Command Centre’ shall be provided for fire department operations, and 3.7.6.5 Fire Department Connections
shall be separated from the remainder of the building by 1 hour fire resistance
rated construction. The room shall be a minimum of 9m2, with a minimum Fire department connections should be provided at appropriate locations
dimension of 2438mm. throughout the proposed KACK&C site, i.e. sprinkler tank, perimeter fire main etc.
Locations for fire department connections should be agreed with the Chief Fire
The ‘Fire Command Centre’ shall be located within easy access for the Fire Officer.
Department (preferably within the Plaza adjacent to the main entrance) and shall
contain the following features:
3.7.6.6 Fire Water Supplies
• The emergency voice/alarm communication system unit;
• The fire department communications unit; provision of fire water.
• Fire detection and alarm system annunciator unit;

3.7.6.7 Portable Fire Extinguishers
• Annunciator unit visually indicating the location of the elevators and whether
they are operational; Portable fire extinguishers should be provided throughout the proposed KACK&C
based on the requirements of the International Fire Code 2003.
• Status indicators and controls for air-handling systems;
• The fire-fighter’s control panel for smoke control systems installed in the 3.7.6.8 Smoke Clearance Facilities
building;
Smoke clearance is typically applied to buildings in an attempt to aid fire fighting
• Controls for unlocking stairway doors simultaneously; operations. There is regulatory requirement to provide a means of smoke
clearance to the proposed KACK&C. However, consideration should be given
• Sprinkler valve and water-flow detector display panels; during the next design stage with regards to potentially utilising environmental air
control systems as a means to aid the fire department vent smoke and heat from
• Emergency and standby power status indicators; the building during/after a potential fire event. There also exists the potential for
the fire department to utilise the proposed smoke control systems (Library and
• A telephone for fire department use with controlled access to the public Museum) as a means of clearing smoke following a potential fire event in the main
telephone system; Plaza.
• Fire pump status indicators;

3.7.7 Design Risks and Opportunities for Fire • Public address voice alarm system provided throughout the proposed
Engineering KACK&C;
The following items of regulatory risk have been identified from the proposed • The single escape stair will be pressurised;
scheme:
• Each refuge area within the Tower will be designated as a smoke-proof
• Single escape stair (Tower); enclosure, i.e. pressurised; and
• External fire fighting access; • A ‘Charged/Wet’ fire fighting main with hose outlets on all floors and located
within each refuge area/stair of the Tower.
• Fire water supply; and
The ‘exit access’ arrangements of the proposed Tower single stair arrangement
• Library smoke control systems. meets the requirements of Chapter 10 of the IBC for means of egress. Horizontal
exits are provided on every upper storey.
The above items also present an opportunity for fire engineering as explained
below. Although a single stair is provided, and independent exits will be provided from
every floor, occupants can turn and move away from a fire and reach a place of
safety.
3.7.7.1 Single Escape Stair (Tower)
The width of the escape stair will be sized to account for the following:
An alternative layout for the Tower is currently based on a single escape stair
arrangement. Although this approach appears to meet the intent of the applicable • Evacuation strategy; and
regulations, concern has been expressed by the AHJ with regards to this proposal.
It has therefore been requested by the AHJ that appropriate justification for the • Maximum occupancy needing to use the stair at any time during emergency;
single stair proposal is submitted for consideration. Full technical justification will and
be compiled and submitted during following the Detailed Design phase (DD).
• Health and safety considerations.
The proposal is to provide a single means of escape stair to the Tower.
Furthermore, it will be ensured that on every floor of the Tower there will be more
than one/alternative direction of escape leading to the single escape stair. This 3.7.7.2 External Fire Fighting Access
approach satisfies the intent of the code.
Based on the proposed landscaping it is not possible to satisfy the International
The following fire protection measures: Fire Code (IFC) 2003 requirements for fire apparatus access to the proposed site in
this instance, based on building shape and topography of the surrounding land.
• The proposed KACK&C building will be equipped throughout with automatic
sprinkler protection; An alternative approach for external fire apparatus access, is presented within this
section and is viewed to achieve an equivalent standard to that stipulated within
• Sprinkler protection will be provided within the Tower refuge areas; the relevant codes.
• Sprinkler protection will be provided within the vertical means of egress The acceptance of the approach presented is based on the provision, both
stair; internally and externally, of active fire fighting and fire protection systems.
• Automatic fire/smoke detection provided throughout the proposed KACK&C;

The active systems in this instance will aid, in the event of a fire, to restrict, if not road will include a level parking area located for use by fire apparatus. Operating
eliminate in some cases, the production of heat and smoke, which could threaten areas for aerial platforms will be provided.
occupant and fire fighter safety.
The roads approaching the building will be designed with regard to avoiding risk to
Code Requirements persons who may be evacuating the building.
From the IFC fire service access roads should be provided to within 150 feet (46m) A Fire Command Centre will be provided convenient to one of the vehicle parking
of all areas of the external walls at fire service access level. Portions of the building positions.
facade greater than 30 feet (9m) in height should be provided with access for
aerial platforms. Access for aerial platforms should be between 15 and 30 feet (5- Fire Protection Systems
7m) from the building, and be parallel to one entire side of the building.
The proposed KACK&C project will be fitted throughout with the following fire
However, where sprinklers are installed throughout a building, an extension to the systems, which will aid fire fighting:
code requirement for fire apparatus access may be approved by the AHJ.
Furthermore, where the topography of the site prevents or restricts fire apparatus • Automatic fire/smoke detection systems;
access, an approved alternative method may be acceptable, for example automatic
sprinkler protection. • Public address voice alarm/evacuation systems;
It should be noted that the purpose of providing aerial appliance access is seen to • Smoke control systems (i.e. atriums, and underground buildings);
be for spraying water onto the roof of the lower buildings and not for fighting fires
in the high rise buildings or, rescuing people. • Automatic sprinkler protection;
Alternative Arrangement • Smoke control systems (where applicable);
Due to site topography perimeter access for fire apparatus vehicles is not practical • External perimeter fire hydrants/standpipes; and
to within 150 feet of all external walls. Where access is achievable within this
distance, the steepness of the approach to some elevations would make any • Internal fire fighting hose streams.
vehicle access provision un-useable.
Based on guidance provide within the code and the application of active fire safety, 3.7.7.3 Fire Water Supply
i.e. automatic sprinkler protection, it is proposed to extend the required perimeter
fire vehicle access road to that presented on the current architectural landscape The design team are currently investigating the potential for utilising an existing
drawing. Furthermore, two additional access points, located adjacent to the main water main in the vicinity of the site as a means to supply the proposed total ‘Fire
and secondary entrance, are proposed high reach/ladder fire fighting vehicles to Water’ demand.
aid external fire fighting operations.
The objective of this study is to determine if a tank and pumps are necessary to
It is proposed to provide a number of access routes for fire apparatus to the provide the fire fighting water to the development. This exercise is still ongoing.
above-ground areas of the development. Each access route will be minimum 26
feet wide, suitable for aerial platforms. Each access road will lead to a building
entry point for fire fighters. 3.7.7.4 Library Smoke Control
All routes will be capable of supporting an imposed load of 75,000 pounds (34,050 The smoke exhaust system in the Library may be reduced in size or omitted based
kg), and will not involve vehicle travel above any underground structure. Each on the results of a study which compares the predicted evacuation time with the
time to untenable conditions.
To predict the time to untenable conditions computational fluid dynamic smoke
modelling will be carried out to model the output of various fire scenarios in the
Library. This study will be undertaken during Detailed Design.
An operational fire safety management plan must be prepared by the client for the
project at the appropriate stage.
Fire safety management has a vital role in ensuring that:
• there are appropriate fire prevention measures so that the possibility of a fire
starting is reduced;
• in the event of fire the various fire safety facilities, installations and systems
within the building, or parts of the building are available and will function as
intended;
• and there are appropriate arrangements to ensure safe evacuation of all

occupants.
It is essential for the successful day to day operation of the proposed KACK&C that
the building is provided with appropriate fire safety arrangements throughout the
operation of the building. As such an operational fire safety management plan, as
well as a full fire safety risk assessment for the premises, should be developed.
Once developed, this must be continually reviewed and updated through the life
cycle of the building to ensure that occupants within the premises are not placed at
risk from fire.
Fire Protection Systems Provided: Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Auditorium
- Automatic sprinkler system Level: -01
- Automatic fire and detection system Date: 6th June 2008
- Smoke clearance to stage Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Pressurisation to stairs
2 hour fire resistance rated construction.

Fire fighting standpipe, inc outlet
(location TBC).
2 hour fire resistance rated

construction.
Fire fighting standpipe, inc

outlet (location TBC).

- Calculated occupancy for Auditorium = 1461. This is based on Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
applying occupancies to the assembly areas. Proposed 900 Building: Auditorium
seats in the Auditorium. Egress widths are based on the Level: 00
number of seats. Date: 6th June 2008
Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Travel distances, 15m and 60m. The travel distance from each
seat to the nearest concourse or vomitry shall not exceed 60m.
The distance from the concourse/vomitry to the stair on the
exterior of the building shall not ecxeed 60m.
- Where the building has 4 or more storeys, at least one

required accessible means of escape shall be an elevator.
GENERAL NOTES : (ALL FLOORS)
Fire resistance rated construction (2 hours)
- Egress, section 1024.6.2 of IBC applies. The clear
Fire resistance rated construction (1 hour) width of means of egress from seating shall be no
less than 1461 * 0.150 = 219inches (5566mm)
KEY:
- The minimum aisle width should be 1219mm for
Fire fighting Standpipe and outlet
aisles with seats on both sides (914mm where there
FD 120 (S) S/C Door
are no more than 50 seats).
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
FD 20 (S) S/C Door FE
Minimum of 2 exits - A minimum width of 584mm should be maintained
provided from stage and between an aisle stair handrail and seating where
Pressurisation required to stair. wing space. the aisle is sub divided by a handrail.
Escape routes must lead - The aisle width should be sufficient to

directly to outside the building. accommodate the persons using it.
- The clear width of aisle accessways serving

1 hour fire seating:
resistance rated * Where seating rows have 14 or fewer seats,
construction. FE the minimum clear aisle accessway shall be no less
FE than 305mm.
* For rows of seating served at both ends, there
FE
shall be no more than 100 seats per row. The
minimum width between rows shall be increased by
7.6mm for every additional seat beyond 14 seats.
Accessible Means of Egress:
At least one evacuation lift required. An evacuation

lift is not required to be accessed via an area of
FE 2 hour fire resistance refuge when the building is equipped throughout
rated proscenium with automatic sprinklers. Evcaution lift(s) should
opening, inc, 2 hour fire open to a place of safety at exit/discharge level.
FE
curtain.
Minimum of 2 exits Pressurisation required to stair.

required from staff area.
Travel distances to be
satisfied. Potential for
Provide 2 hour fire curtain in shown location, to ensure a fire at open stairs to
this level does not affect both open stairs or provide automatic be used as
closing smoke control doors. exits.
Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Level: 01
NOTE: Refer to points on Level 00 drawing in relation to
Date: 6th June 2008
aisle widths etc.
KEY:

FD 120 (S) S/C Door
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
FD 20 (S) S/C Door
Minimum 2 exits required from staff areas.

1 hour enclosure of stair and discharge to
the outside, plus alternative exit required.
Pressurisation required to stair.
Area of refuge (762*1219mm)

required to stair, or stair vestibule
at every level the stair serves.
construction.
Minimum 2 exits required from staff areas. 2 hour fire resistance

rated proscenium
opening, inc, 2 hour fire
curtain.
FE

FE required to stair, or stair vestibule
at every level the stair serves.
Potential to use open stairs as

means of escape.
FE
Control room and projection room to be provided with

their own means of escape.
Provide 2 hour fire curtain in location shown or,
automatic closing smoke control doors.
Fire resistance rated construction (2 hours) Level: 02
Date: 6th June 2008
NOTE: Refer to points on Level 00 drawing in relation to Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
aisle widths etc.
KEY:
2 hour fire resistance
FD 120 (S) S/C Door
rated proscenium
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
opening, inc, 2 hour fire
FD 20 (S) S/C Door
curtain.
FE
FE
FE
Projection room must be provided with a

Provide fire curtain in location shown to seperate means of escape. Projection room
ensure a fire at this level does not affect should be no less than 7.44m2 for a single
the open stairs at other levels or, machine and an additonal 3.7m2 for each
FE
automatic closing smoke control doors. additional machine.
Fire resistance rated construction (2 hours) Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
NOTE: Refer to points on Level 00 drawing in relation to Level: 03
aisle widths etc. Date: 6th June 2008
KEY:
FD 120 (S) S/C Door
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
FD 20 (S) S/C Door
FE
FE

rated proscenium
FE opening, inc, 2 hour fire
curtain.

FE

FE construction (fire barrier)
between Auditorium and
Tower.
FE
Provide fire curtain in location shown to Potential for occupants to

ensure a fire at this level does not affect use open stairs to escape.
the open stairs at other levels or,
automatic closing smoke control doors. FE
Level: 04
Date: 6th June 2008
KEY:
FD 120 (S) S/C Door
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
FD 20 (S) S/C Door
Access and use/purpose of this

level to be confirmed by
SNOHETTA Architects.
Pressurisation required to
stair.
Stairs must discharge to a place

of safety i.e. directly to the
outside of the building.
FE
FE Stairs must discharge to a place

of safety i.e. directly to the
outside of the building.

required to stair, or stair
vestibule at every level the stair
serves.
Level: 05
Date: 6th June 2008
KEY:
FD 120 (S) S/C Door
FD 90 (S) S/C Door
FD 20 (S) S/C Door
A minimum of two automatic
opening vents required providing
Access and use to be confirmed a minimum clear opening of 5%
for this level. of stage area (470m2 * 0.05 =
23.5m2). Situated centrally above
the highest part of the stage.
Manual opening switch also
provided (located adjacent to
stage).
Pressurisation required to
stair.
FE
Details of plant equipment required.
A minimum of 2 exits to be provided from

the plant room.
Proposed new door.

Building: Back of House Area Additional perimeter exits to aid means of FE
Level: 00 escape and fire fighting (direct to the
Date: 6th June 2008 outside).
1. Ground floor occupancy = 75 KEY:

Line of fire resistance rated
2. First floor occupancy = 41 1 hour fire resistance rated construction to protect egress routes
construction from a possible fire in the loading
3. Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 docks. Fire curtains, or shutters,
hours. The structural frame includes columns, 2 hour fire resistance rated provided in locations shown.
girders, beams - those structural components construction
having direct connection to the columns and Fire resistance rated
bracing members designed to carry gravity loads. construction will
Floor members or roof panels which have no provide occupants
Fire curtain
connection to the columns are considered as FE with an alternate
secondary members and not part of the structural direction of escape.
frame.
4. The fire resistance rating of structural frame and FE

bearing walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated
where supporting a roof only.
5. Fire Protection Systems Provided: Fire fighting

- Automatic Sprinklers standpipe
- Automatic fire detection system FE 'wet' main
- Public address voice alarm system and outlet
Fire curtain
- Possible smoke and heat exhaust to loading connection.
dock.
A minimum of 2
independant exits required.
Stair has been Extended travel

considered as an distances. Fire
escape stair. The stair resistance rated
must discharge construction in
directly to the outside location shown
to aid means of would allow
escape. occupants to
escape into the
Great Hall.
FE
- First floor occupancy = 41
Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture -Egress width required = 41 * 0.2 = 8.2 inches (208.3mm)
Building: Back of House Area
Level: 01 Minimum stair width required by IBC is 1219mm.
Date: 6th June 2008
Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII - Travel distances, 23m common path and 76m total
travel distance.
KEY:
1 hour fire resistance rated construction
2 hour fire resistance rated construction
2 exit doors required to aid means of escape. Notional location of

doors shown.
Extended travel distance and single

direction of travel. Possible second exit. FE
Route of extended travel

distance.
Posible fire
exit location
36m
FE
Fire fighting
standpipe
'wet' main
and outlet
connection.
Stair has been

considered as an
escape stair. The stair
must discharge 33m
directly to the outside
to aid means of
escape.
Extended
travel distance.
GENERAL NOTES: Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Great Hall
1. Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 hours. Level: 00
The structural frame includes columns, girders, Date: 6th June 2008
beams - those structural components having direct Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
connection to the columns and bracing members
designed to carry gravity loads. Floor members or
roof panels which have no connection to the
columns are considered as secondary members
and not part of the structural frame.
2. The fire resistance rating of structural frame and - Occupancy = 1000 + staff
bearing walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated - Minimum of 4 exits required at this level.
where supporting a roof only. * if the service access points cannot be used an
additional exits will be required.
- Egress width required (estimate 50 staff)

FE*
1050 * 0.15 = 157.5inches (4000.5mm)
23m
Exit back of house corridor - Travel distances, common path 23m maximum, total
travel distance 76m maximum. The maximum
distance between exits should be >18m
27m
30m
Fire resistance rated construction where Great Hall

meets other accommodation (2 hours)
53m
FE*
Exit directly to outside
FE
Exit directly to outside
FE Exit to plaza
Escape stair required from mezzanine. Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Proposed location (stair should discharge Building: Great Hall
to the outside). Level: Mezzanine Level
Date: 6th June 2008
Accessible Means of Egress:

FE
At least one evacuation lift required. An evacuation lift is not
required to be accessed via an area of refuge when the building is
equipped throughout with automatic sprinklers. Evcaution lift(s)
should open to a place of safety at exit/discharge level.
Fire fighting standpipe 'wet' main and outlet

connection required to proposed escape
stair.
Single direction of esacpe from mezzanine. This

distance exceeds the maximum. An alternative
exit (escape stair) is required from the 60m
mezzanine level or, escape route through 2
hour fire barrier wall.
NOTE: (General) Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Library
1. The library will be provided throughout with: Level: 00
- Automatic fire and detection system; Date: 6th June 2008
- Public address voice alarm; Controlled fire loading at this level (base of atrium) 'Low' Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Stair pressurisation; hazard classification.
- Automatic sprinkler system;
- Smoke control; and
- 'wet' fire fighting standpipe inc. outlet connections
(per stair, per floor)
2. Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 hours. Enclosure of atrium from floor below with auto
The structural frame includes columns, girders, decending 2 hour fire curtain
beams - those structural components having direct
connection to the columns and bracing members
designed to carry gravity loads. Floor members or
roof panels which have no connection to the
columns are considered as secondary members and
Use of space to be defined?
not part of the structural frame.
Library or Plaza?
3.The fire resistance rating of structural frame and
bearing walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated
where supporting a roof only.
KEY:
Pressurised stair inc. refuge
area (762 * 1219mm).
construction (fire barrier)
FD120 (S) S/C Door

FD90 (S) S/C Door
rated construction
FD20 (S) S/C Door
'wet' fire fighting standpipe inc.

outlet connection.
Stair enclosure to Evacuation lift required.

accommodate wheelchair
waiting space (762 * 1219mm)
or provide refuge vestibule to
stair as shown.
Pressurisation of escape
stair/vestibule required.

construction

outlet connection.
NOTE: (this floor)
Building: Library
Level: 01
- Available floor area = 1265m2
Possible alternative location of escape Date: 6th June 2008
- Calculated occupancy= 1265 / 4.65 = 272
stair. Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- A second escape stair required in location indicated.
- Extended travel distances.
- Escape stairs must discharge directly to the outside.
- 2 accessible means of escape required per floor.
- A minimum of 1 evacuation lift required.
KEY:
2 hour fire resistance rated FE

FD120 (S) S/C Door

FD90 (S) S/C Door
FD20 (S) S/C Door

area (762 * 1219mm).

outlet connection.
Evacuation lift
required.
Stair enclosure to
stair as shown.
Pressurisation of escape Stair required to aid means of escape

stair/vestibule required. from this floor.
NOTE: (this floor) Preferred location of third escape stair. Stair to be Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
pressurised and accommodate 'wet' standpipe inc. Building: Library
- Available floor area = 2345m2 outlet, as well as wheelchair refuge area (762 * Level: 02
- Calculated occupancy: 2345 / 4.65 = 504 1219mm). Date: 6th June 2008
- Minimum of 3 exits required at this level. Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Provide an additional escape stair in loctaion indicated, or limit
occupancy to <500.
- 2 accessible means of escape required per floor.
- At least one evacuation lift required.
- Escape stairs must discharge direclty to the outside.
FE
KEY:

FD120 (S) S/C Door

FD90 (S) S/C Door
FD20 (S) S/C Door
area (762 * 1219mm).

outlet connection.
Evacuation lift
required.
Stair enclosure to
stair as shown.
NOTE: (this floor) Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Library
- Available floor area = 2310m2 Level: 03
- Calculated occupancy : 2310 / 4.65 = 496 Date: 6th June 2008
- Minimum of 2 escape stairs required. Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- 2 accessible means of escape required at this level.
- A minimum of one evacuation lift required.
- Stairs will be enclosed in 2 hours fire resistance rated
construction.
- 1 wheelchair space (762*1219mm) per every 200
occupants. Minimum 3 spaces required at this floor.
KEY:

FD120 (S) S/C Door

FD90 (S) S/C Door
FD20 (S) S/C Door
Pressurised stair inc.

refuge area (762 *
1219mm).

outlet connection.
Evacuation lift required.
Stair enclosure to
stair as shown.
NOTE: (this floor) Preferred location of secondary escape stair. Stair Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
to be pressurised and accommodate 'wet' Building: Library
- Availabe floor area: 990m2 standpipe inc. outlet, as well as wheelchair refuge Level: 04
- Calculated occupancy: 990/4.65= 212 area (762 * 1219mm). Date: 6th June 2008
- Extended travel distances. Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Minimum of two escape stairs required.
- Provide additional escape stair at location shown.
- A minimum of one evacuation lift required.
- The stair should be enclosed in 2 hour fire resistance rated construction.
- A minimum of 2 accessible exits required at this level.
KEY: FE

FD120 (S) S/C Door

FD90 (S) S/C Door
FD20 (S) S/C Door
Pressurised stair inc.

refuge area (762 *
1219mm).
'wet' fire fighting standpipe

inc. outlet connection.
Evacuation lift required.

Building: Museum
1. The Museum will be provided throughout with the Level: 00
following active fire safety features: Date: 6th June 2008
- Automatic sprinkler system; Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- Automatic fire and detection system; An exit must be provided away Access to gallery 1 to be
- Public address voice alarm; from the Plaza. confirmed.
- Smoke control within all enclosed underground spaces;
- Pressurised stairs;
- 'wet' standpipes, inc. outlets to all escape stairs; and The museum has 4 storeys, 3 storeys are underground.
- Evacuation lifts.
Level -03 is more than 9.144m below ground. Section 405
2. Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 hours. The of IBC applies (underground buildings)
structural frame includes columns, girders, beams - those
structural components having direct connection to the - Total calculated occupancy of the museum = 987
columns and bracing members designed to carry gravity FE - Calculated occupancy at this level = 18
loads. Floor members or roof panels which have no - Egress, a minimum of 2 exits are required at each level in
connection to the columns are considered as secondary accordance with section 405 of IBC. Additional exit locations
members and not part of the structural frame. shown on plans (FE).
3. The fire resistance rating of structural frame and bearing

walls are permitted to be 1 hour fire rated where supporting a
roof only.
4. 2 accessible means of escape required at this level.
The circulation ramp must be designed

FE
and used as a sterile area; i.e. no fire
loading (all areas).
FE
- Calculated occupancy at this level = 361 2 hour fire resistance Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
- A minimum of 2 exits required from this level. rated construction to Building: Museum
seperate back of house Level: -01
Fire resistance rated construction (2 hours) area and galleries. Date: 6th June 2008
Two independant means of escape routes to 'wet' standpipe
be provided from each gallery. Single escape and outlets
from each gallery via circulation ramp is FE provided in stair 2 means of escape
Extended travel required from staff
non-compliant. enclosure.
distance. Provide new area.
fire exit in loctaion Great Hall
shown (FE).
Provide corridor directly from gallery into stair

26m to satisfy means of escape. Stair must
47m discharge directly to the outside. Alternatively
provide an escape stair for public use only.
Auditorium
Stair to be pressurised, inc.
refuge area (762
35m *1219mm). A minimum of
one evcuation lift required.
'wet' standpipe and outlets

provided in stair enclosure.

rated construction to
seperate storage and
galleries.
Notional position of kitchen door.

Notional kitchen door
location shown. Travel
distance to the door The underground carpark is
within the kitchen should adjacent to the storage area.
not exceed 23m. From
the corridor occupants
have a choice of 2 egress
routes. They can access Library stair.
the library stair through Refer to Library
fire rated construction or sketches for further
they can escape into the comments.
auditorium.
- Calculated occupancy at this level = 276 Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
- A minimum of 2 exits required from this level. Occupants can access the Building: Museum
tower stair or egress via the ramp. Level: -02
- Travel distances, maximum common path of travel 23m and maximum Date: 6th June 2008
total travle distance 76m Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
- 2 accessible means of escape required at this level.
Stair requires to be pressuirised,

inc. refuge area (762 * 1219mm).
A minimum of one evacuation lift
required.
'Wet' standpipe and

outlet per stair.
For Tower stair core

arrangement details refer to New door
Tower Fire Strategy sketches.
Gallery 3 will be
enclosed for
climate/environmental
control reasons.
New door
Occupants at this
level can escape via
the tower stair.
Provide route from
gallery 3 directly into
stair.
- Calculated occupancy at this level = 332 Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
- A minimum of 2 exits are required from this level. Building: Museum
-Travel distances, maximum common path of travel Level: -03
23m and maximum total travle distance 76m. Date: 6th June 2008
53m
54m
New door
New door
Occupants can use the Tower stair. This is

the only egress from this level. Provide a fire Provide 2 hour fire resistance rated
curtain or automatic self closing fire doors in construction or provide a corridor to the
location indicated to guarantee 2 routes to Tower stair in order to satisfy means of
the stair. escape.
- Calculated total occupancy = 5346 (Level 00 + 01) Building: Plaza
Level: 00
- Ground floor occupancy = 4190 Date: 6th June 2008
- First foor occupancy = 1156
Extended travel distance from
- Minimum of 4 exits required per level. remote point. provide 2 new fire
exits at shown locations.
-Egress width required (based on total plaza occupancy at ground floor.
Does not include occupants from other buildings) 5346 * 0.15 = 802inches
(20400mm)
A minimum of 2 additional exits are required. Positions indicated on drawing FE

(FE). Great Hall
- The Plaza is classified as an assembly builidng, section 1024 of IBC
applies. The main entrance should accommodtae 50% of the total
occupancy (i.e. minimum 10.2m width) Outdoor area
Fire resistance rated construction (1 hour)

Auditorium 80m
111m
Further details of Cinema Tower

required. Provide means of
FE Keystone
escape exits as shown.
FE
FE
FE
Fire command centre (minimum 9m2)
19m
proposed location
Library
FE 1 hour fire resistance rated stair

enclosure, inc. refuge area (762 *
1219mm) and 'wet' standpipe and
outlets.
New FE
Outdoor area, means of

escape to continue away
from the building. Extended Travel distance
from cafe. Possible new
exit location shown.
FE
Stair to discharge to a
place of safety outside the Plant room and kitchen provided
building. with exits directly to the outside.
FE
- First floor occupancy = 1156 Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Plaza
A minimum of 4 exits required. Level: 01
Date: 6th June 2008
- Egress width required, 1156 * 0.2 = 231inches (5872mm) Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
Access and egress from

plantroom TBC. Provide a
minimum of 2 means of
escape.
Details of access and egress to these areas

required. Provide means of escape from
each area leading directly to a place of
safety, i.e. outside the building, or fire rated
corridor to the outside.
Escape stairs to be 1 hour fire resistance

rated construction, inc. refuge areas (762 *
1219mm) and 'wet' standpipe with outlets.
Details required on access and egress to

these areas. Provide a minimum of 2
means of escape from these rooms.
Escape stairs to be 1 hour fire resistance

Stair to discharge to a place rated construction, inc. refuge areas (762 *
of safety outside the 1219mm) and 'wet' standpipe with outlets.
building.
Building: Tower
1. Occupancy and Stair Widths: Section AA
Date: 6th June 2008
- Total design occupancy = 350 (SNOHETTA) Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketches SDII
- Minimum stair width required = 350 * 5.08 (width per person) = 1778mm
- Current stair width shown = 2 * 1250
2 hour fire resistance rated core (stairs
- Current stair width provides sufficient escape width.
and lifts).
- Current stair width capacity = (2 * 1250) / 5.08 = 492, therefore the
current escape stair arrangement can accommodtae a total of 492
occupants.
- Tower and keystone = 350 + 80 = 430, increase in tower occupancy (350)

is feasible.
(0)
- The stair width information provided is based on a simultaneous Tower occupancy figures
evacuation (more onerous condition). (50) (Snohetta).
2. Tower and Keystone provided throughout with automatic sprinklers,

automatic fire detection and public address voice alarm systems. (100)
3. 2 hour fire compartment/seperation floors at each level. 2 hour fire resistance rated floors.
(15)
4. Keystone fire compartmented/separated from tower by 2 hour fire
resistance rated walls and doors.
(0)
5. Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 hours. The structural frame
includes columns, girders, beams - those structural components having (30)
direct connection to the columns and bracing members designed to carry
gravity loads. Floor members or roof panels which have no connection to (25)
the columns are considered as secondary members and not part of the
structural frame. (25)
6. The fire resistance rating of structural frame and bearing walls are (25)
permitted to be 1 hour fire rated where supporting a roof only.
(25)
* Keystone occupancy
(0)+ (10)* figures (Snohetta)
(20)+ (50)*
Stairs to discharge direct to a

place of safety (outside) at (30)+ (20)*
grade level.
(0)
(0) Tower fire seperated from Museum

and Plaza (2 hour fire resistance rated
construction).
(0)
External fire fighting access

route.
Building: Tower
KEY: Level: T15
Date: 6th June 2008
2 hour fire resistance rated fire Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketches SDII
barriers (smoke proof enclosure).
1.5 hour fire/smoke door with

automatic self closing devices
(activated by smoke detectors on
floor/accommodation side).
20 minute fire/smoke door.
Refer to 'GENERAL NOTES' Refuge vestibule, ventilation/pressurisation riser.

provided on tower Section AA for
further details.
'Wet' fire main and outlet per stair.

Minimum of one evacuation lift required. Refuge vestibule
Escape stair
ventilation/pressurisation
riser.
Stair enclosure to accommodate wheelchair waiting space

(762 * 1219mm), or provide refuge vestibule to stair.
NOTE: Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Comments provided to drawing T14 Building: Tower
are also applicable to the following Level: T14
levels: Date: 6th June 2008
-T13 Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
-T10
-T09
-T08
-T07
-T06
-T01
Refuge Vestibule
ventilation/pressurisation riser.
Refer to 'GENERAL NOTES' * door opening to be

provided on tower Section AA for re-positioned so as not to
further details. obstruct riser intake and outlet.
KEY:
2 hour fire resistance rated fire


'Wet' fire main and

outlet per stair.
Refuge vestibule
Minimum of one evacuation lift required.
Escape stair
ventilation/pressurisation riser.
Door possibly not required for means

of escape purposes.
Stair enclosure to accommodate wheelchair waiting space

(762 * 1219mm), or provide refuge vestibule to stair.
NOTE: Technical floors (T11, T05 and T01) Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
Building: Tower
Accessibility to be confirmed by Architect/Client, Level: T11
i.e. wheelchair/disabled access at this level and Date: 6th June 2008
all 'technical floors'? Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire Strategy Sketch SDII
If accessibility in not a requirement of the design

on the technical floors: T11, T05 and T01, refuge
vestibules to escape stairs/evacuation lifts may
not be required.
KEY:


floor/accommodation side). Plant equipment to be confirmed.
Escape stair Access to be confirmed, how often and

Door not required for means of ventilation/pressurisation risers. by whom?
escape purposes.
'Wet' fire main and

outlet per stair.
Door not required for means of

escape purposes.
Doors provided along location A - A, tower to keystone, to be 2 hour Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
fire resistance rating with self closing devices. Automatic hold open Building: Tower
devices to fire doors activated to close via smoke detection. Level: T05
Applicable also to location B - B, library to keystone. Date: 6th June 2008
KEY:

NOTE: Comments provided to T05 are also applicable
1.5 hour fire/smoke door with to T04 and T03
Refuge Vestibule
ventilation/pressurisation
riser.
A
'Wet' fire main and outlet per stair.
Refuge vestibule
Access and means of
escape from Keystone to
be confirmed.
Exits required from

Keystone to the Tower
and Library on levels:
T05, T04 and T03
A
Means of escape
to Library.
Stair enclosure to accommodate wheelchair waiting space Escape stair

(762 * 1219mm), or provide refuge vestibule to stair. ventilation/pressurisation riser. Door not required for means of
escape purposes.
The underground car park is an open parking garage. Section 406.3
of IBC applies.
- The carpark is occupancy group S2 The car park is adjacent to the

- Calculated floor area = 13770m2 Archive and Deep Storage at
- Calculated occupancy = 741 this level. 2 hour fire
- Maximum travel distances not to be exceeded, 23m common path resistance rated construction
of travel and 122m overall travel distance. to provide seperation between
- Minimum egress width required, 741 * 0.2 = 148inches (3765mm) buildings.
[assumed method of exit, stairways (multiplying factor of 0.2]
FE
NOTE: (General) 34m
The carpark will be provided throughout with the following:
- Automatic sprinkler system

- Automatic fire detection system
- Public address system
- Smoke control system
Structural frame fire resistance period = 3 hours. The structural

frame includes columns, girders, beams - those structural FE
35m
components having direct connection to the columns and bracing
members designed to carry gravity loads. Floor members or roof
panels which have no connection to the columns are considered as
secondary members and not part of the structural frame.
The fire resistance rating of structural frame and bearing walls are
permitted to be 1 hour fire rated where supporting a roof only. Provide perimeter fire exits to aid means of
escape.
Exits should be positioned to meet travel

distance requirements.
FE
62m
From any point in the carpark,

occupants will be able to access a
perimeter exit or egress via the
ramp.
77m FE

Building: Underground Car Park
Level: 00
Date: 6th June 2008
The underground carpark is an open parking garage.
Section 406.3 of IBS applies.
- Occupancy group S2 The car park is adjacent to the

- Calculated area = 5944m2 Plaza at this level. Means of
- Calculated occupancy = 320 escape from the Car park
- Minimum egress width required - 320 * 0.2 = 64 inches shall be provided through the
(1626mm) Plaza.
- Maximum travel distances not to be exceeded, 23m
common path of travel and 122m overall travel distance. FE
FE
FE
FE
Provide perimeter fire exits to aid means of

escape.
FE
construction between Carpark Exits should be positioned to meet travel
and Plaza. distance requirements.
FE

Building: Underground Car Park
Level: 01
Date: 6th June 2008
Perimeter access road(s)
surrounding site. Proposed
route for standard fire
appliances.
Hatched area indicating 115m

IFC requirements for standard fire
underground/below grade 160m
appliance access (46m from building
accomodation only (typical) perimeter). - Difficult to achieve due to
72m
the building(s) shape and topography of
the site.
Hatched areas indicating

man above ground
accomodation (high rise
storeys/facades)
122m
Proposed access route for Main entrance (principle)

aerial platforms (typical)
Main entrance (secondary) Proposed access route for

aerial platforms (typical)
Outlined area indicating one

and two storey Approximate proposed
accomodation only (typical) location of 'Fire
Command Centre'
(Main central podium/plaza) 88m
NOTES:
Road dimensions:
26' (8m) for aerial fire-fighting vehicles
20' (6m) for standard fire fighting vehicles (26' (8m) at hydrant locations
13'6" (4.1m) headroom
75,000 lbs (34T) loading
Maximum dead-end without turning area 150' (46m)
Maximum gradient 10% unless otherwise agreed
Active fire systems installed:

Automatic fire detection with voice alarm
Smoke control
Sprinklers
Internal hose streams Project : King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge and Culture
External hydrants Fire Fighting Access Provisions
Building fire exits Date: 9th June 2008
Single Stair Considerations: KEY: General floor areas provided Project : King Abdulaziz Center for
2 hour fire resistance rated fire throughout with automatic Knowledge and Culture
1. The Keystone should be fire barriers (smoke proof enclosure). sprinklers, automatic fire Building: Tower
compartmented/separated detection system and public voice
from the Tower (and Library) by 2 hour Date: 6th June 2008
1.5 hour fire/smoke door with alarm system. Title: Buro Happold FEDRA Fire
fire construction (i.e. walls and doors). automatic self closing devices (activated
Strategy Sketch SDII - Tower Single
by smoke detectors on
2. Each floor of the Tower (and where floor/accommodation side).
Stair
possible within the Keystone) should Single Stair Layout
be designed as a 2 hour fire 20 minute fire/smoke door.
compartment/separating floors.
3. Occupant escape from the Tower on A minimum of one evacuation lift required.
levels 3, 4 and 5 also provided via the
Keystone to the Library. <23m
<23m NOTE:
4. Voice alarm warning and
actions/directions to follow in event of
1. Topmost storey >23m above fire
fire/evacuation.
department access level = 'high rise
building'
5. Phased evacuation considerations
(i.e. initially evacuate fire floor and
2. Building (tower) occupancy = 350
each floor above and below fire floor
only, then fully evacuate Tower after a
3. Travel distance limits (23m) not
delayed period).
exceeded, i.e. 'A' to 'B' and 'A' to 'C'
6. Stair sized to accommodate
Sprinklers provided 4. Seperation distance between exits
worst-case scenario
within stairway. not exceeded, i.e. 1/3 of travel
(i.e. restaurant plus gallery and
distance (23m)
kitchen); Assume increased
occupancy of: 100 (restaurant) + 150
5. Accommodation includes, offices,
(gallery/viewing deck) + 30 (kitchen)
restaurant, plant, gallery/veiwing floor
= 280 x 5.08 = 1422mm (clear width
Pressurised 'area of refuge' (members of public and staff).
stair required). including sprinklers.
6. Stair width: 5.08mm per person
(5.08 * 350 = 1778mm)
'Wet' fire fighting Alternative approach required to justify
'Wet' fire main and outlet within stair. main, one outlet per narrowest escape stair width.
storey.
7. Ensure each floor of tower is
designed as a 2 hour fire
barrier/compartment floor.
Mechanical ventilation/pressurisation
shafts, one per refuge area/vestibule, 8. Keystone to be fire separated from
including low and high level (inlet and tower, i.e. walls and doors 2 hour fire
outlet). resistance rated.
3.8 FACADE ENGINEERING
Table of Contents
3.8.3 Introduction to façade design
3.8.4 Façade Systems to the Pebbles

3.8.4.1 Context
3.8.4.2 Architectural Design
3.8.4.3 Precedence
3.8.4.4 Geometry
3.8.4.5 Façade System Description
3.8.4.6 Façade System: Outer Skin
3.8.4.7 Façade System: Inner Skin
3.7.4.8 Façade Structural performance Criteria
3.7.4.9 Façade Environment Performance Criteria
3.7.4.10 Glazing Safety
3.7.4.11 Fire Safety
3.7.4.12 Buildability
3.7.4.13 Durability – Design Life
3.7.4.14 Façade Maintenance and Access Strategy
3.7.4.15 Future Works
3.8.5 The Source

3.8.5.1 Context
3.8.5.2 Architectural Design Criteria
3.8.5.3 Precedence
3.8.5.4 Geometry
3.8.5.5 Structure
3.8.5.6 Building Physics
3.8.5.7 Façade Performance Design Criteria
3.8.5.8 Materials
3.8.5.9 Future work
3.8.6 Appendix Sketches

3.8.1 Executive Summary • Buildability
• Durability – Design Life
Buro Happold Façade Engineering was instructed to provide strategic facades
advice at the Scheme Design Stage for the King Abdulaziz Center for knowledge & • Façade Maintenance and Access Strategy
Culture project in Dhahran, Saudi Arabia. • Future Works
This chapter comprises a summary of the façade design for the Pebbles and the The Appendix contains a set of sketches showing the design as developed to this
Source at the current Design Stage II. point in time
The essential objectives of the façade design throughout the development have The facade criteria in this chapter have been developed in conjunction with other
been: members of the Design Team.
• To satisfy architectural and client requirements.
A suggested approach to façade design and construction is described in this
• To satisfy site requirements and provide optimum performance guidance. chapter. The design represents the optimised solution for the development of the
• To meet cost parameters of the project as far as they have been indicated. buildings at the current Design Stage II and it is intended to facilitate the cost
estimate for the project and address the next stages of the design process.
• To meet a set standard of technical performance that is dictated by a
combination of the above factors as well as other design factors, e.g.
The design is expected to be further developed also in conjunction with specialist
environmental performance requirements.
design input from manufacturers in the next detail design stage.
• To provide a secure Scheme Design that can be taken forwards with confidence
into Detail Design Stage. In order that the Design Team can progress to the design development stage in
accordance with the client’s requirements it is important that this document is
The report is structured in paragraphs as follows: reviewed by all relevant parties and the Client.
• Executive Summary
• Codes and Standards
• Introduction to Façade Design
• Façade System to the Pebbles
• Façade System to The Source
• Appendix: Sketches
The two Façade System chapters are further sub-divided and cover the current
façade design performance criteria:
• Façade Geometry
• Façade System
• Façade Structural Performance Criteria
• Façade Environmental Performance Criteria
• Glazing Safety
• Fire Safety
The design of the facades has been based on the Centre for Window and Cladding
Technology (CWCT) Technical Design Standards and Technical Guidance Notes.
The CWCT is an internationally recognised centre for the development and

publication of standards and guidance notes. Standards are written under the
guidance of the CWCT Standards Committee comprising leading architects,
consultants, contractors and manufacturers. CWCT standards have now been
adopted by National Building Specification and National House Building Council.
It is appreciated that these are focused on UK standards and therefore for the next
design stage we will be investigating options for equivalent American and
International Standards.
Standards used currently are referenced within the text where relevant.
3.8.3 Introduction to façade design The parameters and the process that have been used to lead and monitor the
design can be summarized in the following scheme:
The facades covered in this chapter are those which enclose the Pebbles of the
scheme. The Pebbles are identified as follows:
• Tower
• Keystone
• Library
• Great Hall (also referred to as Concert Hall)
• Auditorium
In addition to the above elements, the façade design also covers the envelope of
The Source at the centre of the scheme.
The following image shows the locations of the parts which are covered in this
chapter:
Library
Keystone
Tower
Buro Happold Façade Engineering (BHFE) Activity Diagram.
Auditorium
The Great
Source Hall
3.8.4 Façade Systems to the Pebbles The prime drivers in developing the façade scheme for the Pebbles have been:
• Geometry – double curved irregular surface.
3.8.4.1 Context • Architect’s vision of the envelope, see Architectural Design paragraph.
• Development of a highly flexible system adaptable to all the Pebbles.
The Pebbles are identified as follows:
• Development of a system which includes opaque walls, windows and
• Tower mechanical plant air intake and exhausts without compromising the continuity
• Keystone of the uniform appearance.
• Library • Access for cleaning and maintenance.
• Great Hall (also referred to as Concert Hall) • Suitability of material to environment: marine environment, large temperature
gradient, sand.
• Auditorium
• Utilise products and materials to produce a cost effective solution.
The Pebbles have different functions. The facades will respond to different
requirements and different structural conditions; however the appearance of the The design represents the optimised solution for the development of the facade at
envelopes should be the same for all of them. the current Design Stage and it is intended to facilitate the cost estimate for the
project and address the next stages of the design process.
The first four Pebbles in the list above are grouped together at the centre of the
scheme and their envelopes have common interfaces, the last Pebble (Auditorium)
stands alone with an independent envelope but with the same appearance as the
other Pebbles.
BHFE: scheme understanding BHFE: scheme understanding

3.8.4.2 Architectural Design - Metal facade – titanium.
- Metal facade – stainless steel.
• Highly reflective metal-like surface. • Environment and climate: marine environment, large temperature gradient,
sand.
• Pebble like surface: the perception of the surfaces, through their reflectivity.
• Façade access.
• Uniform façade throughout the Pebbles.
• Façade cleaning and maintenance strategy.
• Possible patterns to resemble local symbols (stars).
• Materials not linked to tradition and the environment of the scheme, however Among the precedents identified, we mention:
these should be still suitable to the environmental conditions.
• Bertelsmann Pavilion Planet M, Hanover Germany.
• No2 Children’s Palace, Guangzhou China.
• The Serangoon, Serangoon, Singapore.
• Boiler Suit, London.
• Guggenheim Museum, Bilbao, Spain.
• Glasgow Science Museum, Glasgow, UK.
• National Grand Theatre, Beijing, China.
• Cloud Gate, Chicago, USA.
• Universum, Bremen, Germany.
See Buro Happold Memorandum for Pebble Façade Precedents dated June 2008 for
more information.
3.8.4.4 Geometry
The Pebbles consist of shells of typical geometries which resemble a pebble shell. A
pebble geometry is characterized as follows:
• Irregular double curved geometry.
Snohetta model of the current scheme • Large areas approximately flat (i.e. very large curvature).
3.8.4.3 Precedence • Curved edges with relatively small radiuses (i.e. very small curvature).
• Radiuses vary continuously throughout.
A comprehensive research has been carried out on existing buildings, with a
selection driven by the following criteria: • Non repetitive conditions.
• Shape of buildings: Pebble shape, irregular double curvature or free form. Furthermore, the Pebbles in the scheme have individual properties and peculiarities
• Appearance of buildings: due to the configuration of each Pebble in the space and in the environment/site:
- Continuous metallic reflective appearance.
- Possible lighting features. • Tower: tall Pebble, predominant large and approximately flat areas on the
• Façade options currently investigated: metal mesh. walls.
• Auditorium, Library, Great Hall: these are considered the lower Pebbles, which
have predominant large and approximately flat areas on the roofs instead.
• Keystone: even more irregular shape and smaller volume, there are no large
flat areas as in the other Pebbles.
An analysis has been carried out in order to assess the amount of curvature of
each Pebble. This has driven the selection of suitable façade system.
The following pictures show the results of the analysis, which is referred to the
inner shell of the double façade (see Façade System paragraph):
Large radius Small radius

(flat) (max curve)
BHFE: Keystone curvature
BHFE: Great Hall curvature
BHFE: Library curvature
BHFE: Auditorium curvature

each Pebble depending on the inner skin system and the main structure itself. See
Façade System: Outer Skin paragraph for the outer skin system.
The factors which have driven to the choice of the metal mesh option are:
• The metal mesh offers the opportunity to achieve the continuous and uniform
metal appearance with a good reflectivity of the natural light and alas a
reduction of glare toward the outside due to the porosity of the mesh itself.
• The metal mesh works as a sun-shading device on the outside of the glazed
areas – percentage of mesh opening to be selected to meet the shading
coefficient required.
• The metal mesh can be fitted in front of the mechanical plants air intakes and
exhausts – percentage of mesh opening to be selected to meet the overall
opening area required for each vent.
• The metal mesh (of opportune opening percentage) can be fitted equally in
front of the opaque areas, the glazed areas and the mechanical plat vents,
ensuring the continuous and uniform appearance as per Snohetta original
scheme, with no opening or other aperture interruptions (glazed or vents)
express externally.
• The metal mesh, due to its porosity, is expected to retain a reduced quantity of
dust and sand compared to an equivalent continuous metal facade (see the
picture of National Grand Theatre in Beijing below).
BHFE: Tower curvature
3.8.4.5 Façade System Description
The preferred option currently being developed is a double façade which includes:
• An outer continuous metal mesh screen.
• An inner insulated and weather-tight skin.
The façade system for the inner shell varies depending on the requirements of
each Pebble (in particular: shape, type of main structure, type of supports offered
by the main structure, structural movements, presence of glazed areas). See
Façade System: Inner Skin paragraph for the inner skin system.
The system for the outer shell (metal mesh screen) is envisaged as being the same
for all the Pebbles: the metal mesh product selected is to be common throughout
the scheme. The mesh will be fixed to a steel subframe, which is then supported
off the main structure behind the inner skin. Therefore the subframe may vary for
perpendicular to the tension direction), the distance between the ribs, the wind
loads.
A secondary tension perpendicular to the rods will act on the spirals giving a
gradient of dilatation or contraction to the spirals: this, alongside with the size of
the spiral, will provide the percentage of opening required.
Currently, some options are investigated with the manufacturer in order to dress
the mesh with:
• Geometrical pattern to the frame.
• Variations in direction, span and size of the spirals and rods within the same
system.
See following pictures.
However, there are no precedents of these “variations” from the standard product
and this might compromise the warranties given by the manufacturer on the
stability of the final product.
Snohetta double skin system study applied on the Tower It is recommended that the durability of the product is investigated in the
environment of the project – GKD to advise.
3.8.4.6 Façade System: Outer Skin
The design of the outer skin takes into special consideration the accessibility to the
The outer skin consists of: mesh for cleaning and maintenance purpose, as well as to the inner skin behind it.
• A metal mesh screen. See paragraph Façade Access and Maintenance Strategy paragraph.
• A subframe which carries the metal mesh and is supported off the main
structure (though the inner skin).
The metal mesh product currently selected is the Escale manufactured by GKD
Germany. This is a tensioned mesh formed by parallel rods and flat spirals
wrapped between two consecutive rods. The rods are typically made out of plain
circular sections. The material is 316 grade stainless steel. The mesh is stable
when a sufficient tension is provided in the direction of the spirals (or
perpendicularly to the direction of the rods).
The rods can be curved (off site or on site) giving a curvature in the direction of
the rods. The mesh can be fitted on a frame of curved ribs perpendicular to the
rods, giving a curvature in the direction of the spirals (due to the nature of the
tensioned system, this tends to be flat at the mid span between two ribs, therefore
the curvature effect in the direction of the spirals is controlled by the distance
between the ribs).
The tension required is to be advised by the manufacturer and will depend on the
curvature, the geometry (roof or wall conditions, mesh dead load parallel or
Curved rods – metal mesh
Roof condition
Curved ribs - subframe

Props – subframe
Tension
Spirals – metal mesh
Wall conditions
BHFE Tensioned metal mesh application study

GKD Escale specification
GKD Escale application and scheme of rod joint (external continuous mesh
appearance). BHFE: study of application of tensioned mesh to a lower Pebble.
GKD Escale double curved application – internal view with steel subframe
Snohetta pattern study

3.8.4.7 Façade System: Inner Skin
The inner skin shall provide insulation and weather tightness as appropriate to the
buildings.
The prime drivers in developing the façade system for the inner skin are:
• Geometry of the shell: this affects the possibility of repetitive panels.
• Glazed areas: specially curved double glazed units should be avoided for the
benefit of the cost effectiveness of the design. Flat units on a faceted layout are
preferable.
• Main structure: this dictates:
- The movements which should be allowed for by the façade system.
- The type of supports which are available to anchor the skin.
• Environmental performance requirements: these dictate the type, weight and
thickness of insulation required to meet the thermal and acoustic requirements.
• Outer skin: the metal mesh on the outside will be supported off the inner skin.
The loads will be transferred to the main structure through the structural
members of inner skin.
• Façade overall weight: this should be reduced as far as possible in order to limit
the loads on the main structure and achieve a cost effective structural design.
• Buildability: different façade systems will require different logistics in terms of
production, transportation and installation. This also affects the programme of
the works and the cost of the development generally.
Taking into account the criteria above, the Pebbles have been identified as three
different groups:
• Tower: high rise building with floor plates. Glazed areas required.
• Library: low rise structure with free standing shell supported at ground level
and off the columns of the main structure. Glazed areas required (sky lights).
• Great Hall, Auditorium, Keystone: low rise structure with metal trusses or metal
supports behind the roof and floor slabs behind the walls (floor slabs at the
base of the skin for the Auditorium).
Tower:
• Description: in the current design 30% of the façade is to be glazed with
transparent double glazed units. These are to be floor to ceiling high windows.
The windows are expected to be distributed according to a scheme under
BHFE study of possible mesh variations to be investigated with manufacturer development depending on the internal usage and lay out of the floors. Air
intakes and extracts are also to be included in the inner skin, located in the
technical areas at one floor at mid height of the Tower and at the top floor
above the Tower core.
• Envisaged façade system: the proposed façade system is a bespoke extruded
aluminium profile curtain walling unitized system:
- This offers the opportunity to install either insulated opaque panels or double
glazed units within a unique frame.
- It is a light weight system of extruded aluminium profiles.
- It has a very fast installation timeframe and a very high product quality as
most of the assembly is carried out in the factory.
- Due to the engineered flexible weatherproof joints between the units, this
system can also withstand large movements of the main structure.
Weatherproof double barrier and insulation are provided by the engineered
profiles of the unitized panels (thermally broken extruded aluminium profiles,
double barrier externally drained joint system). The insulation will also be
provided with double glazed units and insulated sandwich infill panels with
the U-value required. See Services chapter and Façade Environmental
Performance Criteria paragraph.
- The metal posts which support the external metal mesh are envisaged being
fixed to the brackets of the units in order not to transfer loads directly to the
aluminium profiles. The props are to be located at floor slab level and at the
joints between the units.
BHFE: unitized façade system study and warped glass study for the Tower skin.
- The application of the unitized system is driven by the geometry of the
Tower. Double glazed units are to be identified in the flat areas of the shell
Library:
(see curvature study in Geometry paragraph) with possibly cold bent double
glazed unit. The amount of the out-of-plane deviation should be limited • Description: in the current design the inner skin includes a continuous free form
according to the advice of the glass manufacturer. The opaque areas can be solid shell with random distributed circular opening of relatively small radius
fitted with curved profile units and curved insulated sandwich panels. The (approx. 100 to 300mm diameter) and a large circular skylight above the
design and production of the system is likely to be managed by a 3D central void. Air intakes and extracts are also to be included in the inner skin,
software platform and CNC machine manufacturing processes. located in the technical areas currently on one elevation of the Library and
above the lift shaft. The floor plates are to be set back from the shell leaving a
• The top and bottom section of the Tower present a higher curvature. In these
free void between the floor edge and the shell.
cases the unitized system is likely to be replaced with a triangle base diagrid
façade similarly to the third group of Pebbles (see Great Hall, Auditorium and
Keystone).
See sketches in appendix for façade system current development

See sketches in appendix for façade system current development
Great Hall, Auditorium and Keystone:

• Description: in the current design the inner skin of these Pebbles is a
continuous opaque skin. The only transparent opening is a large circular window
at the base of the keystone internal stair. Air inlets and extracts are also to be
included in the inner skin of the Great Hall and the Auditorium, located in the
technical areas.
• Envisaged façade system: in the current design the inner skin of these three
Pebbles includes:
- Insulated and sealed panels shaped to fit the curvature of the Pebble.
- Steel subframe which provides the mechanical support to the panels. The
subframe may be formed with metal purlins of adequate size fixed to the
main structures (trusses, portals, columns, slabs depending on the Pebble).
Snohetta render of the Library skin. - Where the inner skin is close to flatness (see blue and green areas in the
curvature study in Geometry paragraph), the purlins are expected to lay
• Envisaged façade system: a sprayed concrete (or shotcrete) shell with approximately parallel and the panels to be quadrangular. In the cases of
integrated circular glass blocks. pronounced curvature (see red and yellow areas in the curvature study in
Geometry paragraph) the subframe is envisaged being formed of a triangle
- The sprayed concrete will be high pressure sprayed on a double layer gauged base pre-welded metal diagrid.
metal mesh laid in a grid of structural beams. These will include beams - The diagrid is to be divided in pre-welded sections of a size compatible with
supported off the top of the columns in roof condition and trusses or metal the transportation and installation strategies.
beams to be built between the edge columns and the ground floor slab. - The shape of the diagrid is to be as close to the curvature of the Pebble as
These beams are shaped to fit the shell curvature and will support and possible.
restrain the shell. - The infill panels will be triangular and flat. Where air intakes or exhausts are
- In the scheme proposed a layer of insulation in between a vapour barrier on required, these may be integrated into the panels.
the internal side and a waterproof membrane on the outer will provide the - The metal posts which support the external metal mesh are envisaged being
required thermal and weather barriers. fixed to the nodes of the diagrid or directly to the elements of the main
frame where available.
- The metal posts which support the external metal are envisaged being
supported off the structural beans, in order not to transfer additional loads See sketches in appendix for façade system current development
directly on the shotcrete shell. The props are to be sealed at the interface
with the insulated and weatherproof layer of the shell.
• The skylight is made of thermally broken extruded aluminium add-on profiles
fixed to a pre-welded steel sub-frame. The profiles carry the double glazed
units. The outer surface of the skylight is recommended having a flush finish
(no pressure plates, clips or profile beads) in order to avoid water, dust and
sand traps.
• The outer skin, both shotcrete shell and skylight are to be walk-on surface, this
is due to the cleaning and maintenance strategy of the façade. See Façade
Access and Maintenance Strategy paragraph.
according to maximum movements stated in this report, and no permanent
deformations should occur to the façade system.
• Imposed Gravity Loads:
- Envelope own self weight including infill panels, frames and fixings.
- No elements from other trades shall be fixed to or be supported by the the
façade system unless otherwise specified by Employer or indicated on design
drawings.
• Live Loads: the following live loads should be accommodated:
- All loads resulting from movements in the main structure and the facade
structure.
- Loads acting on the surface of framing members and glazing from
maintenance and cleaning.
- Horizontal line load from occupants.
- Known impact loads acting during façade service life.
- Loads imposed during replacement of panels.
Metal diagrid: British Museum Great Court, London - Wind loads: unfactored wind loading acting perpendicularly to the façade.
- Facade Wind Pressures are recommended being determined by a wind tunnel
test.
• The works must accommodate loads imposed upon the system by movements
from its supporting structure and adjacent elements.
• Thermal Movement:
- Materials and components used in the external facade should be capable of
accommodating internal loads generated by thermal movements due to
psychometric data and changes in dimension and shape due to service
temperatures from differential surface temperatures between the inside and
outside of the building without any reduction in the specified performance.
- Annual surface temperature shall be confirmed during the detailed design
period for both external and internal temperatures when in normal use and
when empty.
• Loading combinations:
- Dead loads, acting concurrently with the maximum wind load.
Metal diagrid: White City Shopping Centre, London - Live loads do not act concurrently with wind loads.
3.8.4.8 Façade Structural Performance Criteria
Loads
• All loads generated by the façade, acting or likely to be placed on the façade
should be transmitted to the building main structure via the points of support
provided for the purpose, without any reduction in the performance of the
façade. To ensure this, all deflections and movements should be limited
The following loads are currently proposed and should be further addressed/refined - Panel sizes
at the next design stages: - Fixings
- Steelwork
- Joints
out
a tunnel test is carried
local wind pressure if
More accurate/refined
equivalent
BS 6399-2 or
In accordance with
Wind maximum wind pressure +2.00
load: perpendicular to wall: KPa • The following tolerances are recommended:
maximum wind suction perpendicular -2.00
to wall: KPa Allowable maximum tolerances for façade generally +/- 2mm
maximum wind pressure +2.00 components, including profiles, frames,
perpendicular to roof: KPa accessories, brackets and infill panels:
maximum wind suction perpendicular -2.00 Allowable maximum tolerances for panel joints: generally +/- 10% of
to roof: KPa joint width
(i.e. +/-1.5mm for a
Glass: 2500
kg/m3
Aluminium: 2700
kg/m3
Steel: 7850
assumed:
Densities
Dead Glazing system: infill panels + façade TBC 15mm wide joint)
load: frame + brackets on roof and walls: kg/m2
* -TBC by the façade subcontractor. The possible primary structural tolerances are to +/- 10mm to target
- Maximum glass thickness: TBC mm. be taken by adjustable connection details. Nodes
position
on steelwork for facade connection are to be
within:
Movements
Walkways + platform + winch + personnel + TBC Kg
t
equivalen
or
EN 1808
ce with:
accordan
In
material: • The works shall not deflect under loading in a manner that will be detrimental
-TBC by equipment manufacturer. to any element of the works.
-Maximum material load: 450 kg..
• All components fixings and couplings shall be capable of accommodating all of
Live Minimum load on roof: In accordance the deflections without any permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
load: with
BS 6399-3 or • Allowable deflections will be reduced if they are detrimental to any part of the
equivalent works, structure or internal finishes.
Impact load on walls: In accordance • The works should minimise cold bridging in any area of the system.
with
BS 8200 or • Thermal movements should not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
equivalen Flow of wind over the façade and associated elements should not cause
Thermal ∆T= +/ -
significant audible noise.
induced 30 C • The façade systems shall be capable of accommodating the following
load:
movements without any reduction in the specified performance:
- Deflection under design loads.
Tolerances - Effects of repeated wind loading.
- Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from anticipated
• There should be special considerations on tolerance issues because of the building movements, including settlement, creep, twisting, side sway and
continuously variable geometry of the elements of the façade due to the curved racking movements.
surfaces, this involving:
- Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
- Façade members and brackets
- Thermal movement.
- Movement due to moisture content, either inside or outside the building
The following maximum deflections are recommended within the facade: • Shading Coefficient - SC
Allowable maximum frontal deflection (orthogonal ≤ the lesser of 1/175 the

to facade plane) for framing members supporting member length or 15mm. Thermal Insulation
double glazed units: • The works should minimise cold bridging in any area of the system.
(according to UK CWCT Standards for Curtain
• A low emissivity (Low-E) coating is usually introduced on face 3 of the double
Walling)
glazed unit in order to obtain a good thermal insulation. Solar control coatings
Allowable maximum deflection in the facade ≤ 5mm. also provide insulation performance. It is proposed that the solar control
plane per facade panel: this depends on the coating previously mentioned in used in lieu of the low-E coating.
facade system adopted and should be confirmed
• Thermal insulation should be continuous and uniform throughout the facade.
by the façade subcontractor:
Thermal breaks should be provided to aluminium frames and any metal
connection which penetrates the facade system (maintenance cradle track
3.8.4.9 Façade Environmental Performance Criteria support, etc).
External Glare • Maximum thermal permitted transmittance (U-Value) for separate elements as
It is recommended that once the outer skin façade system and materials are below:
defined and the shape and orientation of the buildings are confirmed, a glare The following parameters are currently assumed (TBC at next design stages):
analysis is carried out to assess the possible overheating of surrounding buildings
and constructions due to sun energy reflected from the façade. The visual glare Glazing U-value (referred to centre pane location) ≤ 1.30 W/m2K
should also be estimated to prevent unease to surrounding activities (traffic etc).
Solid panel (insulated panel) U-value ≤ 0.25 W/m2K
Facade overall U-value ≤ 1.60 W/m2K
Solar Gain
The solar energy gain through the glazed areas should be further addressed and
co-ordinated with Serviced and Building Physics studies. Ventilation
The solar gain will depend mostly on the final metal mesh to the outer skin, which
acts as a fixed sun shading device. However it is envisaged introducing a solar • The mall roof lights are to be fully sealed.
control coating on face 2 of the double glazed units in order to obtain the g-value • Mechanical ventilation will be provided to the inside.
targeted. This may vary depending on the location and orientation of the specific
glazed areas (Tower, skylights) and the possible shadows overcast by the adjacent
buildings. Weather Tightness
• Additionally, especially in the case of skylight, a solid enamelling may be added • All typical façade systems should be being specifically tested to demonstrate
on face 2 to further reduce the g-value, if necessary. that they meet performance specification unless appropriate testing data can be
supplied by manufacturers.
The following parameters should be addressed at the next design stage to identify
• Two lines of defence should be continuously provided within the envelope and
the final product performance specification
shall not rely on wet sealants unless it can be demonstrated that no other
• Light transmission - LT design is possible.
• External light reflectance • All façade systems should be designed on the pressure-equalised principle with
• Solar radiant heat transmittance externally drained and ventilated cavities between the two lines of defence, and
continuous internal air seals, according to recent good practice.
• External solar radiant absorption
• Except under extreme conditions where internal relative humidity is in excess of
• Solar radiant heat absorption 40%, condensation shall not form on any internal surfaces or interstitially
within the construction of the panel. Condensation is permitted in non-visible - Heat-soaking tests greatly reduces, but does not eliminate the risk of failure
drains and ventilated rebates if there is not an impact on the performance or by the presence of nickel sulphide inclusions.
durability. - The size of the shattered pieces can vary, and glass fragments often remains
• Uncontrolled air leakage (into or out of a building) is easily the biggest single together in bigger clumps, which may weight less than 2 kg but when falling
factor causing heat losses and high energy consumption. Airflow from outside to from height above 5 m, then can accumulate considerable energy and
inside should therefore be minimised by the design of the joints and junctions. represent a high risk.
- Non toughened glass breaks into larger pieces that are held together more
• Air leakage should be distributed and not concentrated in one location.
efficiently by the interlayer and still offer a plastic resistance which delays
• Allowance should be made to control the flow of water that may collect behind considerably the final collapse.
the element and drain the water to the outside so that no water remains
• Generally, where a single sheet of toughened safety glass might be used, a
internally.
laminated heat strengthened solution is proposed as an alternative in order to
• Façade works shall include flashing and junctions with adjacent parts of the eliminate the problems associated with catastrophic failure and nickel sulphide
buildings ensuring weatherproofing and watertightness with full allowance for inclusions for toughened glazing.
deflections and movements.
• Safety issues are also included in the selection of the glass, for the glass panels
• Detailed design of joints, seals, gaskets, etc should eliminate any possibility of to remain in position if broken and to justify the magnitude of force that is
water migration to the inside of the building due to capillarity. required to fracture these panels. This is through a combined process of risk
assessment on likelihood of failure, computational analysis, connection design,
Building air infiltration rate (or air permeability) for ≤ 10m3/hr/m2 appropriate specification and appropriate testing.
the facade at 50 Pa pressure
(on site pressure): In the present design, double glazed units are used:
3 2
Building air infiltration rate facade/glazing prototype Fixed glazing: ≤ 1.5 m /hr/m Outer pane Calculation should be carried out to check that the glass
at 600 Pa Opening windows:≤ 2.0 m3/hr/m2
(testing pressure): Doors: ≤ 3.0 m3/hr/m2
panel resists thermal stresses and that the overall unit is
able to respond safely to the loads applied (wind
pressure/suction, walk-on glass, etc -see loading
Water Penetration: No leakage at P≤600 Pa pressure
paragraph). Heat strengthened laminated glass may be
taken into consideration in lieu of toughened glass due to the
better post-breakage behaviour.
Acoustic Insulation
Inner pane It is strongly recommended that laminated glass is employed
on the inner layer to ensure safe post fracture characteristics
• Acoustic performance of the glazed elements of the façade is requested to
and enhance occupant safety.
satisfy performance requirements as outlined in the acoustic design. Refer to
the acoustic design chapter. The visual performance of the glazing should not
be impaired.
3.8.4.11 Fire Safety
3.8.4.10 Glazing Safety • Refer to Fire Strategy chapter for the fire design adopted.
• Fire and smoke barriers should be designed in co-ordination with the façade
• Glass is specified to all relevant Codes and Standards and for appropriate use, design where the compartmentation is defined by façade elements also, e.g. at
in particular overhead glazing applies to the roof lights. floor slab where floor are fire/smoke compartmented. The junction between the
• Post breakage failure behaviour is an important consideration, especially for a structural element of the compartment (floor plate or wall) and the facade must
overhead glazing at a height of more than 5m above floor level. Recent good preserve the integrity and insulation of the compartment to prevent spread of
practice is to minimise use of toughened glass. This is due to: fire/smoke from adjacent compartments. Materials used must accommodate
movements between structure and façade. All fire and smoke stops shall be The following design life criteria and warranty duration criteria are assumed:
fixed so that they will not become dislodged in the event of a fire. Estimated Facade framing: 40 years
• All elements of the works shall be non combustible or easily ignitable with low design
Aluminium coating, either anodized or powder 40 years
flame spread and shall not produce excessive smoke or toxic gasses. All work life
paint coated:
shall comply with fire safety local Building Regulations.
Stainless steel finishes: 40 years
3.8.4.12 Buildability
Steel coating: 40 years
This criterion assesses the ability of the proposed construction options to: Double glazed units, including coatings: 25 years
• Provide ease and speed of erection. Gaskets, seals, membranes: 25 years
• Provide safety during erection.
• Minimise transportation of materials/ systems. Warranty Facade framing: 25 years
duration
• Control quality and workmanship of the systems during manufacture. Aluminium coating, either anodized or powder 12 years
- typical
• Optimise requirements for access. paint coated:
• Minimise dependence on quality of site workmanship. Stainless steel finishes: 25 years

• Optimise requirements for programme and construction sequence. Steel coating: 15 years
• Be procured and delivered by the facade construction industry on time and on Double glazed units, including coatings: 12 years
budget.
Gaskets, seals, membranes: 12 years
All façade systems have been chosen to minimise on-site construction where
possible. The design currently proposed has been developed to allow the works to
be made weathertight as early as possible, by using pre-assembled elements which 3.8.4.14 Façade Maintenance and Access Strategy
can be fitted in a relative short timeframe and sealed to the concrete structure.
Once the building is weathertight, the outer skin (metal mesh screen) can be The main objective of the maintenance system is to provide access to all the areas
installed from the outside using access from climbing platforms or other of the external building envelope for the purpose of:
equipments, however this phase will not be on the critical path. • Inspection of components and parts and general cleaning.
• Removal and replacement of any defective parts.
3.8.4.13 Durability – Design Life
The proposed facade system has been developed (see Proposed Facade System
paragraph) in order to allow for ease of access during cleaning routine procedures.
• Performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full service life of the works The option proposed includes:
provided that maintenance is carried out as specified.
• All parts of both skins can be reached and should be covered by the Access and
• Works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods without change in Maintenance Strategy
surface appearance. Generally surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist
• The tensioned metal mesh is assumed not to be removed to access the inner
impacts from hand held objects.
skin. The tensioned metal mesh is also assumed not to be walk-on surface.
• The metal mesh is assumed being cleaned with high pressure water. High
pressure water facilities should be provided in the vicinity of the mesh and at
ease of access for the maintenance operatives throughout the buildings.
• The metal mesh is usually reached from inside or underneath, via walkways
distributed in the gap between the two skins. These walkways are therefore
used to access both skins. The gap between the skins is currently designed as
800 to 1000 mm wide at wall condition and 2000mm high at roof condition, to
facilitate access and maintenance operations.
• On the lower areas of the lower Pebbles (Keystone, Library, Auditorium and
Great Hall) the access to the metal mesh is via lifting equipment from ground
level (landscaping). In these areas no glazing is foreseen, therefore it is
accepted that the access to the inner skin for element replacement is unlikely to
occur. The design of the landscaping and the structure below will take into
consideration the additional loads to lifting equipment access and action.
• Elements should be individually removable ensuring access for maintenance
and replacement of glazed units if necessary.
• Removal of glazed units should not affect the performance or safety of adjacent
elements. Method Statement for removal and replacement of glass panels
should be submitted.
• Methodology should be in accordance with Project Health and Safety Guidelines
BHFE: Façade access study from cavity between skins – roof and wall conditions.
BHFE: façade access study.

3.8.4.15 Future Works
• Final Geometry Definition

• Design progress generally due to co-ordination and update with other
disciplines.
• Design progress on outer skin system, especially mesh type, mesh application
and subframe design.
• Design progress on inner skin system affected by outer mesh subframe. Further
curvature study of updated architectural shapes and confirmed locations of
glazed areas.
• Design Life.
• Ventilation strategy.
• Solar/Thermal Performance.
• Acoustics.
• Drainage Strategy.
• Interfaces, between adjacent Pebbles and between Pebble and adjacent
structures (landscaping, plaza).
3.8.5 The Source diagrid and its support. BHFE has considered the design of the timber screen in
conjunction with the design of the glazing which the diagrid will support.
3.8.5.1 Context The prime drivers in developing the façade scheme for The Source screen have
been:
• Geometry
• Architect’s vision of a gradually unveiling view
• Comfort and safety of occupants as well as the safety of maintenance and
construction personnel
• Utilise products and materials to produce a cost effective solution
The Source
The cladding criteria in this chapter have been developed in conjunction with other
members of the Design Team.
The design represents the optimised solution for the development of the screen at
Stage SDII. It is intended to facilitate the cost estimate for the project and address
the next stages of the design process.
3.8.5.2 Architectural Design
The design of the screen for The Source has developed so far under several
The Source is the central void within the plaza which is lined by a timber diagrid
architectural drivers. Whilst there are others, these aspirations have been key to
screen. It forms a four sided basket-like structure, penetrated on one elevation by
the development of The Source:
the tower.
To create a gradually revealing view for visitors

who travel down the ramps that encompass the
Tower screen, emanating from the centre of the sunken
area
The Source To emulate mushrabiya designs

screen
To be entirely made of timber
To have no structure in the final 3meters
Example of a mushrabiya screen

Buro Happold Façade Engineering (BHFE) service has been working in conjunction
with Buro Happold structures and the architects to develop a scheme for this
3.8.5.3 Precedence
Serpentine Gallery, Hyde Park, London, UK
South Bank University, London, UK
The Core, Eden Project, Cornwall, UK

Hounslow Underground Station, London, UK
3.8.5.4 Geometry
Overall
The overall geometry of The Source forms a tapering box. Each elevation is
slanted; lying at approximately 12˚ to the vertical.
Joining the dots of the grid with straight lines then creates the basis of structural
layout. These lines continue over two bays on the grid with each member coming
into the middle of the member running across it. This pattern is called a lamella
and is used to create a two-way grid without the need for a structural hierarchy of
primary and secondary members.
To generate the node locations on each elevation the rectangle with the overall
dimensions is created. On this a grid is formed.
The rectangle is then compressed at the base to from a trapezium, taking the grid
with it.
To produce the gradually revealing view that the architects are looking for all
members of each elevation are on a slightly different rotation. All are focused
towards a point, below the middle of the Source.
L varies with Θ
i.e.
L= D/cos Θ
If member thickness remains

constant then the front face of
Focus point the beam changes in depth
(final location and visa versa.
tbc)
i.e.
If b0=b1=b2 then x0<x1<x2
OR
If x0=x1=x2 then b0<b1<b2
OR
D varies
All members focused to a point in the centre of The Source
Individual Members
The dots must be joined up only after the rectangle is compressed otherwise the
lines become curves which would create an additional layer of complexity in the The effect of changing the angle on the member shape
form of each element.
The intention is to develop the member shape using a set of rules which will define
Each member is a bay and a half long and kept straight over that length with each element. For instance, defining the twisting chamfer edge required to create
facets occurring at each joint (i.e. every other grid) rather than every grid which a flush finish for the cladding to be fixed to and setting a fixed depth and width for
would require a facet at the mid-point of a beam. all members. 3D modelling combined with script generated geometries will be
required to develop the scheme. The aim will be to generate a set of points in a 3D
To simplify the member geometry it is accepted that the rear face of the diagrid coordinate system (approximately 18 for each member) which will define the
will not always be the same distance from the front face. shape. BHFE will work alongside Snøhetta to accomplish this.
Nodes Connection Type 1; Cowley Connectors
It is anticipated that two types of nodes will be required to form the diagrid; one
for the simple pin connection joints that happen across the majority of the façade
and one for the fully fixed connections that form the truss at the base of the
diagrid. The fully-fixed nodes attract considerably more force and need to be more
rigid, hence the requirement for an alternative connection type.
These joints are designed just to transfer shear forces, not moments. They have a
relatively low capacity and given the timber-to-timber connection faces a
significant amount of rotation occurs at the joints.
Cowley Connectors in use on the lamella roof at Hounslow Underground Station

Connection Type 2; Steel nodes with timber cover plates
Marlow Academy roof (London) used steel nodes
These nodes are designed to transfer shear forces and moments. The timber-to-
steel connection faces help to reduce the amount of rotiation that occurs at the
joints.
The shape of the node varies across the face of the screen. This results in each
needing to be fabricated separately. Since this is a costly exercise BHFE will be
working with the architects to try and find ways of rationalising or introducing
some repetition into the geometry during the detailed design stage.
Efficiency of a lamella structure
3.8.5.5 Structure
The structural performance of the reciprocal lamella structure can be compared to
Lamella that of a continuous grillage.
Short, pin-ended, members are used to build up a structural lattice with grid lines Where a lamella structure is being used as a frame, rather than a barrel or a
of one-half of the member lengths, resulting in a stable system. The interlocking dome, significant bending moments are generated. The moment distribution is
members are arranged in a mutually supporting pattern, allowing each individual triangular as a result of the point load applied by incoming members at mid span.
element to have a simple connection, yet maintain the overall bending stiffness of Because of the alternating grid, the moment distribution is twice that generated by
the frame. a similar element in a continuous span.
Some efficiencies could be retrieved by tapering the members to match the
moment distribution profile i.e. tapering the member ends.
The shear forces and member ends are also more significant than in a continuous
grillage and follow the overall bending moment profile.
These inefficiencies are offset by the ability to use smaller members which are
transportable and easier to manufacture and erect.
Loads
Load Catergory Description

Dead Self weight of timber 4.8kN/m3
Self weight of glass 28.5kN/m3
Self weight of fixings etc 0.1kPa
Live Access & Maintenance 1.5kPa^
Water flowing over glass (tbc) 0.2kPa
Impact loading* Tbc
Traditional lamella roofs are assembled from identical elements and used for
barrel-vault or domes structures with in-plane forces. The same structural Balustrade loading from inside 3kN/m
arrangement can be used to from a grillage, as in the case of The Source. Here, due to proximity of ramps
however, the out-of-plane forces in each element are transferred in shear to the
mid-point of the two neighbouring elements, building up a complex looping load- Wind +/- 2kPa#
path.
Thermal 10-50 deg C
Construction 1.5kPa^
* not currently designing for blast loadings. This is to be confirmed by the Client to span between the supports the bottom 2 rows of nodes are fully fixed and not
#Wind loads currently assumed are onerous as some local eddies and funnelling pin-ended as is the case across the rest of the screen. This effectively creates a
expected around the base of the tower. Wind tunnel testing is recommended to truss at the base of the screen supporting the rest of the diagrid above it.
refine these loads)
^ Will depend on final size of glass panes
Analysis
Analysis has been carried out using Robot Millennium. Each member is modelled as
a 1D element with vertical and horizontal rotational releases at its ends.
The stiffness of the supporting structure has also been included in the model and
will need to be refined as its design progresses. The exception to this is the tower,
whose profile acts as a cut out in the screen. The setting out of this profile has not
yet been established and will be added at a later date.
Partially constructed states must all be considered to ensure it can be built safely
and with a reasonable level of temporary works.
The robustness of the structure will also be checked as work progresses. This will
be done by removing single elements across the structure to ensure that the
overall stability is not compromised.
Once fabrication tolerances are established, a selection of random pre-stress loads

will be added to the model to simulate slight lack-of-fit in the structure. Strains can
also be applied to the ends of members, again, to reflect the fabrication tolerances.
Plan showing the four corner columns that support the diagrid in this option
Design Criteria
Design of the timber diagrid is to be to the US timber code. This is known as the
This is the scheme that was originally devised and the scheme presented in the
NDS (National Design Specification for Wood Construction) published by the
SDII sketches.
American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA) and is referenced by the
International Building Code (IBC).
The NDS is based on allowable stress design (ASD). There is also wood design
guidelines published by the AF&PA based on load factor and resistance design
(LRFD). Both will be looked at in the next design stage.
Support
Option 1 – Supported at the base
In this scheme the diagrid terminates approximately 3m above the base of The
Source with only the 4 corner columns continuing to ground. To enable the grillage
Option 2 – Hung from the plaza roof
Image taken from analysis model showing how the behaviour of the supporting
structure is taken into account
The architectural aspiration is for no structure to exist in the final 3m at the base.
To achieve this i.e. the removal of the 4 columns in option 1, the whole structure
must be hung from the plaza roof. The current proposal for this roof structure is a
concrete waffle slab, 1500mm deep. Since this structure already has to support
significant loads at “ground” level (landscaping loads, fire tender access loads etc)
it is anticipated that the additional load from the screen will not be critical.
Section through the screen showing the hung option for the timber screen The structure at the plaza roof is, however, already a significant cantilever (up to
5m) and has large back spans (up to 20m) it is therefore very important that the
behaviour of the roof slab (stiffness and resulting deflection) be included in the
design of the screen.
The base of the screen needs to be propped. Ideally this would be done along the
bottom edge however, in some locations, this will clash with the ramp. This means
it will be necessary to prop the screen away from the edge beams, creating within the depth of the double-skin façade of the tower, and propped by the tower
significant, local shear loads that may affect the design of some members. floors.
Four elevations showing the relationship of the ramp and the screen Further coordination of the two structures, including an assessment of the
This option needs further development in collaboration with the structural differential movements and movement joint requirements will be necessary during
engineers and the architects. the next stage.
Support
Prop locations to along edge
be at base of of tower
screen if possible within the
else to be in line façade zone
with ramp
Tower
The tower penetrates through one elevation of The Source, disrupting the lamella.
In this instance the grid will need to be framed by steel members, most likely
Movement As mentioned above the relative movement of the screen and the tower also needs
to be assessed to determine the need for a movement joint.
For option 1 a horizontal movement joint is required at the top of the screen
between the timber diagrid and the plaza roof slab. It may also be necessary to In general, the façade system needs to be capable of accommodating the following
have a movement joint between the timber diagrid and the glazing for the final 3m movements without any reduction in the specified performance:
of The Source.
• Deflection under design loads
• Effects of repeated wind loading
Movement joint at • Changes in size and shape of components arising from anticipated building
top for base movements, including settlement, creep, twisting, side sway and racking
supported diagrid movements
• Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not
• Thermal expansion and contraction
• Movement due to changes in moisture content either internal or external.
Tolerances
As the glazing system is continuously fixed onto the timber grid, the tolerances of
construction and installation of the timber should be carefully monitored.
There should be special considerations on tolerance issues because of the variable
For option 2 a horizontal movement joint is required between either the base of the geometry of the elements of the façade. This includes consideration of the
screen and the glazing beneath it or between the glazing and the basement raft, following:
depending on whether the glazing at the base of the Source is top hung or bottom • Timber members
supported. • Glazing Panel sizes
• Fixings
• Steelwork nodes
• Joints
Movement joint at The following tolerances are recommended but will need to be further interrogated
base of top-hung in the Detailed Design Stage since fabrication and construction tolerances on the
diagrid timber will need to be established once the member geometry and therefore the
required production stages.
Allowable maximum tolerances for façade components, including profiles, frames,

accessories, brackets and infill panels:
• generally +/- 2mm

In both cases, the overall deflections under imposed load need to be kept within a
range which will not compromise the glazing and the deflections under self weight. Allowable maximum tolerances for panel joints:
Deflections need to be limited so as to eliminate problems of fit upon installation of
the glass. The rotation that will occur at the joints must also be considered (see • generally +/- 10% of joint width
section on nodes). In particular structures of this type are prone to the “diamond” (i.e. +/-1.5mm for a 15mm wide joint)
effect.
The possible primary structural tolerances are to be taken by adjustable connection
details. Nodes on steelwork for cladding connection are to be within:
• +/- 10mm to target position
Construction
As the scheme has progressed issues regarding buildability have been considered;
• providing ease and speed of erection
• providing safety during erection
• minimising transportation of materials/ systems
• controlling quality and workmanship of the systems during manufacture
• optimising requirements for access
• minimising dependence on quality of site workmanship
• optimising requirements for programme and construction sequence
• procurement and delivery by the cladding construction industry on time and
on budget
In either the bottom-supported or hung options the anticipated construction

sequence would be to build the steel frame first, followed by the corner columns,
the top and bottom members and the horizontal props, then build the lamella from
the base up with the need for intermittent temporary props to be determined by
the contractor. Only when the whole timber diagrid is in place should the glazing
be fitted. The time between the glazing being fitted and the timber installation
should be minimised due to the effects of the environment on the timber.
Internal Glare
3.8.5.6 Building Physics From experience it is assumed that the deep, relatively dense timber grid will
be sufficient to control glare internally. An investigation should be performed
Solar gain control at Detailed Design Stage to confirm that this assumption is correct and aligns
with the architectural aspiration for the space and the servicing requirements
It is assumed that the orientation of the timber members will act as a shading of the adjoining gallery spaces.
device and is therefore the primary means of solar gain control. However the g-
value of clear glass (<0.34) can be increased by use of solar control coatings,
typically to face two of a double glazed unit.
Thermal insulation
The final decision regarding the use of double glazing has not yet been made.
Whilst the spaces behind the screen (gallery spaces) have tight environmental
controls with mechanical ventilation the area is often in shade and the current
proposal is to have water continually running over the surface of the glass. The
scheme is currently based on double glazing but this will need to be further
evaluated as the design progresses.
A low emisitivity coating is usually introduced to face 3 of the double glazed unit to View from within the gallery spaces towards The Source
increase its performance. Solar control coatings also help increase thermal
insulation so it is suggested that, should they be needed, these be used in lieu of
the low-E coating rather than in addition to.
Thermal insulation should be continuous and uniform throughout the cladding.

Thermal breaks should be provided to aluminium frames and any metal connection
which penetrates the cladding system (maintenance cradle track support, etc).
Glare Control
External Glare
Since the aspiration for The Source is a bright, light space external glare
issues are not being considered.
glass may be taken into consideration lieu of toughened glass due to the better
3.8.5.7 Façade Design Criteria post-breakage behaviour.
Glazing safety Inner pane

It is strongly recommended that laminated glass is employed on the inner layer to
The design is to be developed in accordance with the UK CWCT Standard for sloped ensure safe post fracture characteristics and enhanced occupant safety.
glazing systems and the BS 5516-2 Patent glazing and sloping glazing for building.
UK CWCT Technical Note 42 and Technical Update 10 give the most updated Access and Maintenance
guidelines regarding the use of safety glass on glazed roofing. All glass shall be
manufactured, designed and installed in accordance with all Codes. Equivalent The main objective of the maintenance system is to provide access to all the areas
American standards will be sought for subsequent design stages. of the external building envelope for the purpose of:
• Inspection of components and parts and general cleaning.
Post breakage failure behaviour is an important consideration, especially for • Removal and replacement of any defective parts.
overhead glazing at a height of more than 5m above floor level. Recent good
practice is to minimise use of toughened glass for the following reasons; A detailed cladding cleaning and maintenance strategy report (include a glass
• Heat-soaking greatly reduces, but does not eliminate the risk of failure by replacement strategy) should be developed at Detail Design stage. This is to be
the presence of nickel sulphide inclusions. included in the Health and Safety Plan.
• The size of the shattered pieces can vary and glass fragments often remain
together in large clumps, which may weigh less than 2 kg but, when falling Internal maintenance
from height above then 5m, will accumulate considerable energy and It is proposed that the ramps immediately adjacent to the screen can be used to
represent a significant risk. carry out internal maintenance. It may be necessary, for the upper areas of the
• Non toughened glass breaks into larger large pieces that are held together screen, to erect a scaffold tower on the ramp.
more efficiently by the interlayer and still offer a plastic resistance which
delays considerably the final collapse. External maintenance
Generally, where a single sheet of toughened safety glass might be used, a Since the current scheme does not provide sufficient space for the use of a cherry
laminated heat strengthened solution is proposed, as an alternative in order to picker from the base of The Source, the options for access and maintenance
eliminate the problems associated with catastrophic failure and nickel sulphide externally are;
inclusions for toughened glazing.
• Telescopic pole from plaza roof level or from base
Safety issues are incorporated for the selection of the glass, in order that the glass • Lanyard system and abseiling
panels to remain in position if broken and to justify the magnitude of force that is
required to fracture these panels. This is through a combined process of risk
assessment on likelihood of failure, computational analysis, connection design,
appropriate specification and appropriate testing.
For the current design, if double glazed units are used, the following build-up of
the units is proposed:
Outer pane
Calculation should be carried out to assess that the glass panel’s resistance
thermal stresses and that the overall unit is able to respond safely to the loads
applied (wind pressure/suction, walk-on glass, etc). Heat strengthened laminated
Glass replacement strategy
If a means of cherry picker access is not established this will also be by a lanyard
system and abseiling. Smaller glass pane sizes will make this strategy far more
preferable.
Weather Performance
Weathertightness
The façade system will be tested to ensure weathertightness under pressurised
conditions
Airtightness
Air leakage (into or out of a building) causes increased heating and cooling loads to
the building. Therefore cladding will be designed to minimise air leakage.
Weathering
Finishes to be reviewed for the environmental conditions which include humidity,
dust, sand and ultra-violet radiation.
Timber (LVL)
3.8.5.8 Materials
Engineered Timber
Glazing
It is extremely difficult to create a structure, such as the diagrid that forms The
Panel size Source screen, in natural wood due to the high strength requirements and the
geometric requirements. An engineered wood is an appropriate alternative. The
With the final geometry still to be determined the size of panel has not been set. most commonly known is glulam. However for this application Laminated Veneer
When making the final choice the following factors will be considered; Lumber (LVL), which is similar to glulam, is recommended.
Large glass panels – less panels, perimeter/area ratio is improved, larger
tolerances required
Small glass panels– lighter and therefore easier to replace, greater length of
joints= weakness in the system, more structural silicon, tolerances on each panel
is smaller
Carrier System
With the intention to run water over the surface of the glazing a flush finish is
required. A capped system, as is typically preferred for timber curtain walling, is
not possible. Instead a structural silicon seal is proposed.
LVL is produced from thin (approximately 3mm thick), rotary peeled softwood
veneers that are glued together to form a continuous billet. The billet is cut to
length and can be sawn into beam, plank or panel sizes.
Such engineered timbers are strong and dimensionally stable, drastically reducing
the tendency that natural wood has to warp or twist. LVL derives its high strength
from the homogenous bonded structure which also keeps the effects of any
defective veneers to a minimum.
Key Features; 3.8.5.9 Future work
Geometry Definition
• High strength characteristics Design Life
• Precise dimensions (CNC machining possible), does not warp or twist Ventilation strategy
• Easy to optimise due to the large variety of sizes available Acoustics
• Lightweight Fire Strategy
• Wood procured according to the Pan-European Forest Certification (PEFC) Drainage Strategy
standard
• Cross veneers improve later bending strength and stiffness
Treatment
As a result of the timber being insider the building, in the long term, changes in
moisture content are not anticipated. Evaluation of the construction programme is
required to determine whether or not the timber is at risk during the construction
period. It is not anticipated that this should be an issue.
Treatment against termites could be very helpful in this region. This should be
checked with local building control. Should it be needed then it is possible to treat
each veneer of the LVL insuring the whole section is impregnated.
It is also possible to add veneers to effectively clad each member. This allows the
finish to be more precisely specified and the internal build-up of veneers to be
hidden. This should be further investigated with various suppliers during detailed
design.
Procurement
Given the complex geometry of this structure and the intricacy of the nodes it is
essential that the structure be developed in collaboration with manufacturers and
suppliers.
The complexity of design development and manufacturing requirements also

affects the lead-in time. Current indication of time scales is as follows but is highly
dependant on the final geometry.
2 months statically design

2 months shop drawing
1 month material disposition
1 month treatment e.g. anti-termite treatment
4 months prefabrication
1 month transport
This makes the lead-in time from placing the order and start on site to be at least
11 months.
3.8.6 Appendix: sketches
3.9 SECURITY ENGINEERING 3.9.7.14 Internal Critical Rooms
3.9.7.15 Fire Exits/Emergency Doors
3.9.7.16 Windows
Table of Contents
3.9.1 Executive Summary 3.9.8 Surveillance Systems

3.9.1.1 Security Overview 3.9.8.1 Strategy
3.9.1.2 Key Recommendations 3.9.8.2 Security Lighting (Responsibility of Others)
3.9.8.3 Infrared
3.9.8.4 Monitoring
3.9.2 Introduction
3.9.2.1 Security Objectives
3.9.9 Intruder Detection System
3.9.9.1 Perimeter Intruder Detection (Responsibility of Others)
3.9.3 Summary of Risk assessment 3.9.9.2 Internal Intrusion Detection System
3.9.9.3 Intrusion Detection Integration
3.9.9.4 Panic Buttons and Duress Alarm
3.9.4 Security Methodology 3.9.9.5 Control System
3.9.9.5 Alarm Monitoring
3.9.5 Security Concept Overview

3.9.5.1 Crime Prevention through Environmental Design 3.9.10 Security Management
3.9.10.1 Command and Control
3.9.10.2 Security Control Room Location
3.9.6 Internal Zoning 3.9.10.3 Security Management and Responsibilities
3.9.6.1 Security in Depth 3.9.10.4 Crisis Management Plans
3.9.6.2 Summary of Recommended Security Mitigations by Zone 3.9.10.5 Disaster Recovery Plans
3.9.10.6 Security Control Room Design
3.9.10.7 Main Control Room
3.9.7 Control of Access 3.9.10.8 Replay Suite
3.9.7.1 General 3.9.10.9 Access Control
3.9.7.2 Perimeter Security (Responsibility of Others)
3.9.7.3 Boundary Demarcation and Defensive Landscaping
3.9.7.4 Vehicle Access Control Points Composition 3.9.11 Security Standards
(Responsibility of Others)
3.9.7.5 Aim
3.9.7.6 Vehicle Barrier 3.9.12 Indicative Access Control and CCTV Coverage
3.9.7.7 Balance of Accessibility v Security
3.9.7.8 Automated Access Control System (AACS)
3.9.7.9 Identity Cards
3.9.7.10 Staff Access to the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge &
Culture
3.9.7.11 Staff Visitors and Contractors Access
3.9.7.12 Public Visitors
3.9.7.13 Deliveries
3.9.1 Executive Summary system. These rooms will also be secured through robust construction and security
tethers and will have no external access.
The fundamental objective of our approach for the Center is to provide security in
depth - by developing multiple layers of security mitigation measures. These Exceptionally high value displays, such as touring art exhibitions, will be treated on
layers consist of physical security measures, technical security equipment, a localised level by creating an enclosed space. The use of pedestrian screening
procedures and security personnel. and searching or cloakroom facilities may be employed to prevent the carrying of
‘tools’ that could damage, or remove the exhibits. Voids within the grounds, public
The objectives of security for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture are: spaces and key areas should be sealed to prevent people, ‘tools’ or stolen items
being concealed. In the car park areas, a secure loading bay will be provided for
• Protection of Life goods delivery and storage.
• Prevention of Crime
• Protection of Property and Premises The Security Strategy for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture has been
• Protection of Reputation designed to provide six layers, thus ensuring security in depth. However,
• Protection and Maintenance of Critical Business Processes fundamental to the success of the Security Strategy is the efficiency and security
• Prevention of Loss and Waste awareness of the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture’s staff and
• Prevention of Incidence Reoccurrence contractors.
The provisional Risk Register revealed no disastrous risks, 2 major risks and 13 3.9.1.2 Key Recommendations:
medium risks. A further 14 minor risks were also identified and 1 negligible risk.
The major risks are: • Number of access points should be kept to a minimum, both internally and
externally
• Damage or theft to property or content within the reception areas, public • Perimeter Security
spaces and specialist areas • Vehicle Access Control Points (AACS) at the outer perimeter (Responsibility
• Visiting children becoming lost within the building footprint and grounds of Others)
• Defensive Landscaping within the building grounds
To achieve the security objectives in line with the proposed security policy and the • Vehicle Barriers on covered car park routes
identified Risk, this Security Strategy has been developed to address the aims of • Automated Access Control System segregating user groups within the
security; being demarcation, deterrence, delay, detection, determine and building
detention. • Identity Cards for staff, contractors and staff visitors or guests
• CCTV Surveillance within the grounds, at the access control points, along
3.9.1.1 Security Overview external and internal roads, within the covered car parks, the public areas
and high value areas such as the museum and library
Externally security will be ‘low key’, provided by a demarcation perimeter, • Security Lighting (responsibility of others) in conjunction with the CCTV
vehicular access and egress control and the fabric of the building, with CCTV coverage areas
camera and lighting coverage of the immediate surroundings. • Intruder Detection System (IDS) on external doors, accessible rooms,
ground floor circulation areas and secure rooms
The building itself has been developed to ensure crime prevention through • Security Control Room covering the whole building
environmental design. Discrete internal CCTV cameras will be deployed
throughout the ground floor, however there will be no coverage on the
administration and technical floors except for specifically identified vulnerable
locations.
Key areas such as the Museum and Library display and storage areas will be
protected by Intruder Detection Alarms and Asset Tagging linked to the CCTV
3.9.2 Introduction as the protection of people, assets and the business processes, ensuring that the
security system applied is deployed in a cost-effective and, where possible, a non-
This chapter presents the development of security for King Abdulaziz Center for intrusive way.
Knowledge & Culture and the immediate surroundings. The fundamental objective
of our approach for the Center is to provide security in depth - by developing Threats facing King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture can only be
multiple layers of security mitigation measures. These layers will consist of countered satisfactorily by a committed and co-operative partnership between all
physical security measures, technical security equipment, procedures and security the stakeholders forming the development team, the government, and the
personnel. All of the security elements will be integrated to provide a coherent and employees working within the site. A seamless and ‘partnership’ approach to
holistic solution to the security requirements of the Project. The external Center security will also be required from all government agencies responsible for security
wide security elements, such as Vehicle Access Control measures, are to be including the police, local government, public services and the emergency services.
developed by others and as yet, a site Security Strategy has not been issued.
Therefore we have made a number of assumptions which will need to be
confirmed. Likewise, this security strategy focuses on concerns relating to the built
environment and although procedures and staff deployments are discussed, they
can only be as recommendations within this process and may not be directly
implemented.
We consider a security system to be a combination of personnel, equipment and

procedures, all working in a coordinated way to uphold the designed strategy, and
to provide the desired levels of security and safety. It is important that all aspects
of the ‘system’ are correctly deployed to provide this integrated solution, without
which, the effectiveness of individual elements of the ‘system’ will not be optimised
3.9.2.1 Security Objectives
The security objectives recommended for the Center have been determined to
ensure the Center provides a safe and secure environment for Staff and Visitors
whilst allowing freedom and relaxation. By applying these objectives it will be
possible to devise a Security Strategy which will in the first instance be likely to
deter crime and if necessary, ensure that any attempted criminal activity is
detected early and thus can be dealt with effectively by the security system.
The objectives of security for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture are:
• Protection of Life
• Prevention of Crime
• Protection of Property and Premises
• Protection of Reputation
• Protection and Maintenance of Critical Business Processes
• Prevention of Loss and Waste
• Prevention of Incidence Reoccurrence
A security system is a blend of people, layout, topography, equipment and

procedures; harmonised to optimise expenditure and capability. We view security
3.9.3 Summary of Risk Assessment
The provisional Risk Register revealed no disastrous risks with an aggregate risk
score greater than 20. Two major risks with an aggregate risk score between 10
and 20 have been identified. These risks have been grouped and summarised
below:
• Damage or theft to property or content within the reception areas, public

spaces and specialist areas
• Visiting children becoming lost within the building footprint and grounds
There are 13 medium risks, with an aggregate risk score between 5 and 10. These
risks have been grouped and summarised below:
• Any catastrophic or dramatic incident, such as a major terrorist incident

within the region
• Critical or single point failures within the general building footprint
• Damage or theft to property or content within the back office
• Emergency procedures being incomplete, unpractised and uncontrolled
• Failure or sabotage of essential services such as power, sewerage, water air
conditioning and telecommunications
• Future changes in the national, regional or location threat levels that require
increased physical security
• Loss of sensitive material
• Overcrowding within the grounds and surrounding areas
• Pedestrian suicide attack within the general building footprint
• Rogue vehicles or trespassers within the grounds
• Serious fire or accidental explosive incidents within the grounds and
surrounding areas
• Single issue activation threat or civil protest within the grounds and
surrounding areas
• Vehicle sized bomb within the general building footprint, service areas and
car parks
A further 14 minor risks with an aggregate Risk ranking between 2 and 5 were also
identified and 1 negligible Risk Register entry. However, these risks have not been
considered as being significant enough for mitigation.
3.9.4 Security Methodology security system. A security system is a mixture of personnel, equipment and
procedures, all working to uphold the designed strategy. It is important that all
To achieve the security objectives in line with the proposed security policy, the aspects of the ‘system’ are deployed to provide the holistic solution if the
Security Strategy has been developed to address the aims of security. Not every effectiveness of the elements of the ‘system’ are to be optimised.
element of a strategy will address each aim; however, any robust Security
Strategy must ensure that all the aims are covered within the proposed integrated
package. DEFLECT DENY DEGRADE
The fundamental aims of security elements are: Demarcation Detect Detain
Demarcation – Outlines the areas of ownership or responsibility. This can be Deter Delay
achieved by creating a physical boundary such as a fence, fabric of a building, raise
in grade level, landscaping, or identification of ownership such as signage. A
breach of this line does not necessarily constitute a determined attack unless it has
been achieved by illegal means. Intruder
Target
Observe Assess Respond
Deter – This aim constitutes a visible deterrent, and as such should dissuade the
opportunist. Security measures to mitigate this aim would include physical Locate
obstructions (fence, doors etc…), overt security personnel and security equipment
(CCTV, access control, etc…). Determine
Figure 1: The elements of a Security Strategy

Delay – Measures in this layer are designed to provide an adequate delay to an
attacker in order for other measures to respond. Therefore, anyone crossing this
layer of defence understands the implications and can be considered as a potential
aggressor. Mitigating this aim involves the use of physical and procedural
measures.
Detect – Having delayed a potential aggressor, measures need to be sited to

detect and identify the incident. These measures can be either covert or overt
depending on the response required. The longer the delay the more successful the
detection layer will function.
Determine – This aim is the provision of the incident management or decision-

making process. Predominantly it will be conducted by a human interaction but
some functions can be pre-programmed on security equipment such as event
signalling for CCTV and airlock systems for access control.
Detain – The level of response will depend on the level of the attack. The usual
response will initially be conducted by the security team but, in certain
circumstances, the Police may be called first.
The developed Security Strategy must allow for overlap in the aims for each
element in order to optimise expenditure and to provide defence in depth for the
3.9.5 Security Concept Overview 3.9.5.1 Crime Prevention through Environmental Design
Externally security will be ‘low key’, provided by a demarcation perimeter, The basic principles of crime prevention through environmental design have been
vehicular ingress and egress control and the fabric of the building, with CCTV embedded into the building design where possible. For example, access points to
camera and lighting coverage of the immediate surroundings. the building have been kept to a minimum and all entrances will be monitored.
The building internal layout has been designed to ensure that there is clear
The building itself has been developed to ensure crime prevention through delineation between public and private areas; through vertical and horizontal
environmental design; all doors and windows will be specified to security standards separation, with the main public areas on the ground floor and private working
and all ground floor glazing will be specified to ‘anti-bandit’ standard. Internally, areas on the upper floors. This will help enhance a sense of ownership and
the main entrance will be monitored by reception and security staff; the general responsibility internally. The ‘public space’ scene has also been designed to
public will have relatively unrestricted access to the ground floor areas. This public provide good ‘natural surveillance’, with clear lines of sight, the use of transparent
private divide will be enforced by the use of an Automated Access Control System materials and maximum staff activity; supported by levels of lighting and CCTV
(AACS), which will ensure the integrity of business operations on the coverage with the avoidance of secluded areas. This internal separation has
administration and technical floors. Members of staff will be issued with security enabled the development of a clear security zoning concept for the three main
photographic identity cards with access permission rights for various building modes of operation (normal business hours, late working/evening use and fully
zones; visitors to the administration and technical floors will also be issued with closed down), which will be enforced through the deployment of technical security
visitor identity cards and will be escorted when necessary. systems and a 24 hour Security staff presence. There is a clear concept of
defensible space during all modes of building operation, albeit achieved through
Discrete internal CCTV cameras will be deployed throughout the ground floor; different physical measures, security systems and operational processes.
however there will be no coverage on the administration and technical floors,
except for specifically identified vulnerable locations. Key areas such as the
Museum and Library display and storage areas will be protected by intruder
detection alarms and asset tagging linked to the CCTV system. These rooms will
also be secured through robust construction and security tethers and will have no
external access.
Exceptionally high values displays, such as touring art exhibitions, will be treated
on a localised level by creating an enclosed space. The use of pedestrian screening
and searching or cloakroom facilities may be employed to prevent the carrying of
‘tools’ that could damage or remove the exhibits. Voids within the grounds, public
spaces and key areas should be sealed to prevent people, ‘tools’ or stolen items
being concealed.
Out of hours the ground floor, fire exits and stairwells will be protected by an
Intruder Detection System (IDS), which will be monitored by the 24 hour in-house
security staff. Security staff will also patrol internal and external areas randomly,
governed and monitored by an automated ‘guard patrol’ system.
In the car park areas, a secure loading bay will be provided for goods delivery and
storage.
3.9.6 Internal Zoning
3.9.6.1 Security in Depth
The Security Strategy for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture has been
designed to provide six layers, thus ensuring security in depth. The proposed
layers and elements are shown later.
Fundamental to the success of the elements outlined, and of the Security Strategy
as a whole, is the efficiency and security awareness of the King Abdulaziz Center
for Knowledge & Culture’s staff. The systems and elements have been deployed to
provide the Security Team and nominated Security Management staff with the
tools to monitor the Center, and to give early identification of an intruder or
incident. It is therefore important that a comprehensive set of Assignment
Instructions and Incident Management Procedures are produced to give guidance
and structure to the Security Management of the Center.
3.9.6.2 Summary of Recommended Security Mitigations by Zone
Back Office and Administration Areas Outer Perimeter – Grounds
• Minimise Entry and Exits • Minimise Entry and Exits

• Pedestrian Access Control • Vehicle Search Facilities
• Sealing of Voids • Sealing of Voids
• Clear Boundary Demarcation • Security Fencing
• Separation of Functions and Service • Vehicle Access Control
• Item Locators and Active Tracking • Vehicle Barriers
• Security Lighting • Clear Boundary Demarcation
• Integrated Security and Building Systems • Defensive Landscaping
• Security Control Room • Separation of Functions and Service
• Enclosures and Secure Storage • Intruder Detection and Alarms
• Prevention of Secluded Areas • Security Lighting
• Security Fixings and Tethers • Public Address System and Signage
• Strengthened Doors, Locks and Openings • Integrated Security and Building Systems
• Natural Surveillance • Security Control Room
• Resilience of Supply and Systems
• Prevention of Secluded Areas
Specialist Areas • Security Fixings and Tethers
• Strengthened Doors, Locks and Openings
• Minimise Entry and Exits • Use of Non-transferable Items
• Pedestrian Access Control • Natural Surveillance
• Sealing of Voids • Passive Remote Surveillance (CCTV)
• Clear Boundary Demarcation
• Separation of Functions and Service
• Intruder Detection and Alarms
• Item Locators and Active Tracking
• Security Lighting Service Areas and Car Parks
• Cloakroom Facilities
• Integrated Security and Building Systems • Minimise Entry and Exits
• Security Control Room • Pedestrian Access Control
• Attack Resistant Screens • Sealing of Voids
• Package and Personal Screening • Vehicle Access Control
• Enclosures and Secure Storage • Clear Boundary Demarcation
• Prevention of Secluded Areas • Separation of Functions and Service
• Security Fixings and Tethers • Intruder Detection and Alarms
• Strengthened Doors, Locks and Openings • Security Lighting
• Use of Non-transferable Items • Public Address System and Signage
• Interactive Remote Surveillance (CCTV) • Integrated Security and Building Systems
• Natural Surveillance • Security Control Room
• Passive Remote Surveillance (CCTV) • Resilience of Supply and Systems
• Security Fixings and Tethers
• Use of Non-transferable Items
• Natural Surveillance
• Passive Remote Surveillance (CCTV)
Reception Areas and Public Space
• Minimise Entry and Exits

• Sealing of Voids
Building Infrastructure and Supply
• Minimise Entry and Exits
• Intruder Detection and Alarms
• Pedestrian Access Control
• Item Locators and Active Tracking
• Sealing of Voids
• Security Lighting
• Integrated Security and Building Systems
• Security Control Room
• Security Lighting
• Integrated Security and Building Systems
• Security Fixings and Tethers
• Strengthened Doors, Locks and Openings
• Passive Remote Surveillance (CCTV)
3.9.7 Control of Access barriers (ha-ha), continuous vehicle barriers or ‘pedestrian friendly’ barriers such
as bollards or planters.
3.9.7.1 General
Sunken Vehicle Barriers (Ha-Ha):
As a key security principle, the number of access points to a site should be kept to
a minimum. Any breach in perimeter/building security represents a vulnerability, • Consists of a low rise sunken wall
therefore the Risk of a compromise increases with each access point. However, • Gives the impression of a continuous uninterrupted vista from the non-attack
this has to be balanced with the legitimate need to gain entrance to the site. The side
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture requires access to be given to • Drop protection is optional, depending upon the perceived risk of personal
members of staff, public clients, visitors, contractors and deliveries. Each group injury
will have different access requirements with different levels of ‘trust’ applied. • The drop can be with furniture items, such as:
Furthermore, the vision for the new King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture
is to encourage access and facilitate integration with the different areas; therefore o Earth banks and landscaping
during working hours, security must facilitate access for the public while protecting o Dense tree planting
the private working environment. o Pedestrian seating
o Pedestrian fencing
The use of limited access points into the Center will force personnel towards o Basement shrubs
predetermined locations, which can then be monitored and controlled as
necessary. Access gained in any other way can be assessed as a ‘forced entry’ and • Pedestrian access across the divide can be achieved via narrow bridges or
appropriate response can be made. The deployment of access control measures infill
ensures that authorised personnel will have access to the areas they have a need • A variety of surface finishes can be achieved on the wall façade
to visit, at the times they are required, whilst allowing management to restrict • The sunken wall can also be incorporated within a water feature
further access as required.
3.9.7.2 Perimeter Security (Responsibility of Others)
The King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture resides within the extended
Saudi Aramco property boundary. Saudi Aramco property boundary should be
secured with a security fence that will provide some degree of difficulty and impose
delay time for the intruder; which will assist with their detection. Typically, these
fences stand at between 2.4m with topping to 5m high without a topping.
3.9.7.3 Boundary Demarcation and Defensive Landscaping
Boundary demarcation, such as a decorative fence around the site will deter
trespassers that are within the Saudi Aramco property boundary from casually
enter the site; however this would not prevent a determined intruder or errant
vehicle.
Defensive landscaping is required to prevent an unauthorised vehicle from crashing

through the security fencing and gaining access to the building façade.
Landscaping can often assist with the boundary demarcation as pedestrian access
is an optional element. Such landscaping is often a blend of sunken vehicle
Figure 2: Sunken Vehicle Barrier (Example)
Continuous Vehicle Barriers: ‘Pedestrian Friendly’ Vehicle Barriers:
• Consists of a substantial low rise wall or barrier • Consists of a number of relatively small, frequently placed posts or objects
• The vehicle barrier must be capable of withstanding a perpendicular vehicle • Planters have traditionally been made of concrete, however brushed steel
impact and stone faced façades are becoming increasingly used
• Typical construction details include: • A variety of arrangements and configurations can be adopted offering
varying degrees of pedestrian freedom
o Steel faced, concrete filled walling • Larger planters can incorporate trees, statues and seating which can improve
o Concrete or stone finished walls the vertical scaling when placed beside tall buildings
o Steel framed structures that can be rendered to form a balustrade • Small planters and bollards can cause people flow issues if incorrectly placed
o Wire rope and ground anchors within crowded areas
o Large sand filled geo-textile lined gabions
• The edge protection can be incorporated into earth banks and other forms of
landscaping
• Narrow gaps within the continuous walling can be provided for pedestrian
access
Figure 4: Pedestrian Friendly Vehicle Barrier (Example)
Figure 3: Continuous Vehicle Barrier (Example)

3.9.7.4 Vehicle Access Control Points Composition (Responsibility 3.9.7.7 Balance of Accessibility v Security
of Others)
To encourage access and community activity, the main reception entrance will be
Vehicle Access Control Points (VACPs) will be an essential element of maintaining free of barriers and access control systems; access will be monitored by
access control at King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture and in defeating reception/security staff and visitors will be directed to public information/customer
the vehicle borne IED threat. VACPs should incorporate all the structures, service areas by clear signage. Although it is an aspiration for the ground floor
equipment and site improvements in and around the location where the access areas to be free of access control, the building will retain the ability for areas to be
control function is to be performed. This will include the following: zoned and if necessary closed, as there may be occasions when the King Abdulaziz
Center for Knowledge & Culture is required to provide an increased duty of care to
• Roadway staff and members of the public.
• Gatehouse/Guard booth
• Traffic Control Devices 3.9.7.8 Automated Access Control System (AACS)
• Search Areas
• Barriers (whether temporary or permanent) An Automatic Access Control System is an electro-mechanical system linked to a
control unit, which on verifying the credentials of the user automatically allows
3.9.7.5 Aim entry by releasing a lock on an entry door or barrier. It should be noted that
despite the term automatic, an Automatic Access Control System still requires a
The aim of a VACP is to prevent unauthorised vehicular access, whilst maintaining measure of human supervision. As with all automatic systems the authorised user
an acceptable traffic flow for authorised vehicles. They should be: must ensure that unauthorised personnel do not follow them in to the building or
compartment (tailgating).
• Be flexible enough to facilitate changes in traffic flow
• Be as safe an environment as possible The proposed strategy for access control within the King Abdulaziz Center for
• Have the operational capability to react to changes in security levels Knowledge & Culture is to deploy automatic access control to the non-public spaces
• Have the correct traffic signage for VACP configurations, including lane and designated critical rooms. The Automatic Access Control System will control
markings, closures or diversions and the speed limits which are required to staff movement through the staff lifts onto the administration and technical floors.
aid the guard force and drivers This will be operated by presenting photographic ID access cards to nearby
• Have adequate capacity/sufficient lanes for peak flow readers. Doors to be provided with automatic access control are shown in the
• Be established separately from pedestrian access points strategy drawings in 3.9.12. Pin or bio-metric readers may be required for more
secure areas
The Vehicle Access Control Area should:
If swipe in/out technology is incorporated into the Automatic Access Control
• Have the ability to cope with an identified hostile vehicle System, it will also provide the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture with
• Allow quick entry to authorised vehicles a valuable Health and Safety management tool, providing an instant record of
• Be able to cope with visitors personnel in the controlled areas of the Center during an emergency. There is also
• Allow access to delivery vehicles and emergency services where required the possibility that time and attendance functions can be incorporated.
• Have the ability to reject unauthorised vehicles
3.9.7.9 Identity Cards
3.9.7.6 Vehicle Barriers
A key component of the Security Strategy is that every member of staff will be
Vehicle Access Barriers, such as rising blockers, will be required at the entrances of issued with a Security Identity Card, allowing authorised access. The identity card,
the covered car parks so that the car parks can be secured during times when the which will include the holders’ photograph, will be programmed with each
building is non-operational, such as at night. individual’s authorised access rights within the King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge & Culture. Visitors that require access to the upper administration and
technical floors will also require a security identity card/ticket (possibly without 3.9.7.10 Staff Access to the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge &
photographic image). Culture
The system will be administered using a PC based database with specific access
control software, networked to each door controller. The PC will be located in the It is anticipated that staff will arrive for work prior to the building ‘opening’ for
main Security Control Room. business to members of the public. Staff will gain access via the Staff Car Park
Entrance, placing their identity cards against an external proximity reader to
The Security Control Room will be responsible for issuing all Personnel identity operate the door. A video intercom will also be provided in case staff have
cards while the reception will be responsible for issuing all visitor identity forgotten their identity card or in the event of equipment malfunction.
cards/tickets. For ease of identification, it is suggested that identity cards are
colour coded, such as green for staff, blue for contractors and red for visitors, Once inside the main ground floor open area, access to the upper floor levels will
etc... be via stairs and lifts, using the same Automated Access Control System. The staff
and public lift and stair lobby areas of each upper floor are separated allowing the
office space to be open plan and free from access control. Although the system
will be capable of separate zoning, it is currently planned for all staff to be able to
gain access to all office space areas, to enhance integration and business
efficiency. Critical areas such as the Finance Office, IT Server Rooms, the Security
Control Center, etc… will have additional restrictions.
3.9.7.11 Staff Visitors and Contractors Access
The administration, technical and back of house areas will not be open to members
Figure 5: Identity Cards of the public; however during normal business hours, ‘Staff Visitors and
Contractors’ i.e. those with legitimate business reasons to visit will have controlled
3.9.7.9 Separation of User Groups access into these areas within the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture.
It is planned for the majority to arrive into the ground floor public space and will
The separation of user groups will enable Security and other staff to quickly be directed internally through clear signage to the staff reception, by the staff
identify personnel and the areas in which they should be visiting/working. The tower lift doors. At the reception desk, Staff Visitors and Contractors will be
automated system will enable centralised control of cards and the authorisation of greeted and their identity will be established. They will then be directed to a
access rights to user groups and individuals. The identity cards will also integrate customer waiting area where they will be collected by the relevant department
with building wide Automatic Access Control Systems, incorporating proximity staff.
readers to gain access throughout the building with a keyless system.
Any Official visitor requiring access to the administration and technical floors will
be issued with a visitor’s identity card and will be escorted throughout their stay.
Contractors may require unescorted access around the Center. They will be
directed to the Security Control Room, where their details will be checked against
the list of known/expected contractors. Contractors will be issued with a
photographic identity card, with authorised access rights commensurate to their
role/appointment only.
3.9.7.12 Public Visitors
Public visitors will enter via two main entrances and will be allowed freedom to
Figure 6: Integrated Access Control circulate within the public areas, such as the gardens and retail spaces. There will
be staff monitored controlled, ticketed or badged access into the Museum, Great also be alarmed and will in the main not be fitted with external door furniture, to
Hall/Oasis, Auditorium and Library areas. Exclusive areas, such as the Center of prevent use in forced opening. All electronic locking will be ‘fail safe’ and will
Excellence and Touring Exhibitions may require pedestrian searching and screening unlock in the event of power loss. A volt free output from the Fire Alarm System
to be deployed in the immediate vicinity. will connect to the Access Control System and cause all networked doors and gates
to unlock in the event of a fire alarm.
3.9.7.13 Deliveries
External doors should be of solid hardwood, solid laminated core or solid multiply
Any deliveries to the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture will be made construction, at least 44mm thick, and they should open outwards. Special
at basement level. High security loading bays will be secured with floor to ceiling attention should be paid to hinges which should be supplemented by dog bolts.
security fencing and with a remotely operated gate. Vehicles will be able to pull External ironmongery should not be provided and the glazing is double
into the vehicle lay-by to temporarily park, thus preventing a tail back on the safety/impact resistant in a steel frame (any accessible glazing should be a
delivery route. Delivery drivers will be able to communicate with the Security minimum of 7.5mm thick laminated and be bandit resistant).
Control Room via intercom and, following authentication, access will be permitted.
At the loading bay area they will be met by a member of the Facilities Management 3.9.7.16 Windows
Team.
All ground floor windows will not be accessible from the outside for a person to
3.9.7.14 Internal Critical Rooms climb through and will be constructed of double glazed laminated and toughened
glass, designed to resist mechanical attack such as hammers, pickaxes and bricks
A number of internal critical rooms and areas have been identified which are (anti-vandal/bandit glass).
essential to the continuance of business practices within the Center. Access into
these areas needs to be controlled and an audit trail available. Therefore primary
access control will be applied to the entrance doors to these areas. In some
instances the room structure will need to be strengthened to prevent or delay
forced entry. Intruder detection will also be deployed.
Rooms initially identified are:
• Plant Rooms
• Artefact and Document Storage Rooms
Consideration should be given to hardening these rooms to delay penetration

under a sustained attack. Walls should preferably be constructed of 150mm block
work or as an alternative, a sandwich of 18mm plywood, expanded metal (XPM)
and a plasterboard finish constructed each side of a timber studded framework,
using the existing solid floor and roof. The door should be a substantial door to
LPS 1174 Class 2, together with a suitable frame and fixing to the walls. Access
from the bottom and the top of the room should be prevented by ensuring the
walls extend above false ceilings and cavities.
3.9.7.15 Fire Exits/Emergency Doors
Fire exit doors shall be provided by electro/magnetic locks in the head of the door
frame (to prevent occasional use), to the approval of the statutory body. They will
3.9.8 Surveillance Systems • Access Control Points – all access control points to King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge & Culture will be covered by CCTV, enabling clear Recognition of
CCTV will play an important role in the provision of a safe and secure environment vehicles and pedestrians wishing to gain access
for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture. It will be a key element of the • Key External and Internal Roads – so that the security operator can
robust inner perimeter layer, it will also be utilised within the Center at key recognise a vehicle and if necessary track its movement or activity into and
locations. Deployment of CCTV cameras may be necessary to mitigate specific around the Center. This will also assist traffic management and incident
Risks, to provide general reassurance (in public areas) or to assist security with management functions.
general surveillance. • Covered Car Parks – to provide security in this vulnerable public area and to
ensure that public visitors remain within public areas. CCTV will also be
3.9.8.1 Strategy monitored to detect suspicious activity and undesirable behaviour. The
entrances will provide images that will identify the car entering and exiting.
The strategy for the deployment of the CCTV system, will be to observe all Pedestrian entry points will provide recognition quality images.
personnel as they enter and move through the Center and, where necessary, • Public Areas – such as the Lobby, for general reassurance and surveillance.
activity of interest. Cameras will also be deployed to observe critical areas and • High Value Areas – such as the Museum and Library display and Storage
high value items. To achieve this, a mixture of fixed and fully functional cameras Areas to assist patrols responding to an incident or alarm.
will be located throughout the grounds, buildings and entry points.
3.9.8.2 Security Lighting (Responsibility of Others)
Cameras will be deployed throughout the grounds of King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge & Culture but, within the security demarcation line. The system will be Maintaining a suitable Light level throughout King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge
linked to parts of the Intruder Detection Systems and will react to any Perimeter & Culture is a major task in ensuring the CCTV system performs to its best ability.
Intruder Detector that alarms. These cameras will be spaced no further apart than The minimum light level required will depend on the type of activity being
100m to ensure that a 10% Rotakin standard is achieved throughout the grounds. monitored. Most cameras can operate at surprisingly low levels, well below 3 Lux
mark generally considered as the minimum for security purposes. Within the
Cameras will be deployed in main circulation areas such as the car park, Center, the light level should be adequate during the daylight hours, but in the
playground, oasis and garden areas to provide 10% Rotakin standard to detect evening this will probably not be the case.
activity. These cameras will be supplemented by fully functional cameras capable
of zooming in and following activity of interest. At every entrance point the Artificial light may be required to maintain an effective visibility level, it should be
cameras will be required to achieve 50% Rotakin standard, this means that the noted that different lighting systems (such as low/high pressure sodium) may have
image will be of sufficient quality for recognition requirements. different levels of lighting/colour rendition, keeping even levels of light across a
scene ensures good contrast.
All external cameras will have a wash wipe facility; therefore, it is imperative that
the means to fill water bottles and carry out general maintenance is in place. To give perspective to the unit of illumination the following guide in Lux is listed
Where cameras are mounted on masts/towers it should be possible to lower them below:
to enable cameras to be serviced from ground level without the use of specialised
equipment. • Direct sunlight - 100,000 Lux
• Overcast - 1000 Lux
It is envisaged that CCTV cameras will be deployed in the following areas: • Office - 350 Lux
• Street lighting - 5 lux
• Perimeter – full coverage inside the security demarcation line. CCTV will • Moon light - 0.5 – 1 Lux
respond to Perimeter Intruder Detection Systems, enable CCTV patrolling • Overcast (night) - 0.001 Lux
and to investigate possible breaches. It will also assist patrols responding to
an incident or alarm The actual Lux measurements throughout the Center will be specified in the
Performance Specification for CCTV.
3.9.8.3 Infrared
Infrared Detection Systems are sensitive to ‘light’ beyond human vision and should
be used (usually integrated with a normal colour camera for daylight use) if the
lighting conditions above are not produced throughout the Center. These systems
tend to produce black and white images at night; during the day their ability to
render colour may be poor unless a supplementary infrared filter is part of the
camera.
3.9.8.4 Monitoring
Viewing of images from the system will be achieved in the dedicated Security
Control Room. Images will be displayed through a mixture of split screen and
main event monitors mounted at desks and on a video wall. Security CCTV patrols
will be established to ensure systematic and effective use is made of the
technology. The main purpose for recording images from the CCTV cameras is to
provide evidence that can be used for determining; who was involved, what has
occurred and when (date/time).
3.9.9 Intruder Detection System (IDS) • Resources available, including CCTV, security staff-available for alarm
verification
The Intruder Detection System will be designed with the assumption that intruders
are expected to have the ability and resources to plan an intrusion in detail and 3.9.9.2 Internal Intrusion Detection System
have a full range of specialised equipment, including means of substitution of vital
components within the Intruder Alarm System. To achieve this level of intruder Internal intruder detection will be provided to all rooms that are externally
detection all devices will be fitted with tamper detection. Internal volumetric accessible, providing security staff with notification of any unauthorised access to
passive infrared (PIR) detectors will be specified to include anti-masking the building. In addition, all major circulation areas will be provided with
technology and range reduction detection. volumetric passive infrared detection devices for the movement detection of
unauthorised personnel around the Center. In addition to passive infrared
The Intruder Detection System shall be designed to allow zones, to be defined and detection devices, the entrances to all critical room will be fitted with contact
set on an individual basis. This functionality will allow Security staff to monitor sensors to detect unauthorised entrance to the identified rooms.
critical areas of the Center during the operational hours, thus allowing visitors
access to designated areas. Intruder Detection Systems provide continuous The systems will also be deployed as follows:
surveillance over protected areas and may extend coverage into areas not usually
accessible to security patrols; for example: roof spaces or in locked compartments. • All external doors to be provided with flush magnetic/electro contacts – fire
Any form of intruder alarm is a passive device. It will only advise that a doors should be programmed as 24hour zones unless otherwise specified
predetermined condition has changed, it will not stop an intruder unless coupled • All accessible rooms should be provided with appropriate movement trap
with some form of mechanical barrier. detection
• Ground floor circulation area and reception area will be provided with
3.9.9.1 Perimeter Intruder Detection (Responsibility of Others) movement detection
• All secure stores, Security Control Room, IT rooms/Data Center, will be
Perimeter Intruder Detection Systems (PIDS) should be integrated with Saudi provided with magnetic/electro flush mounted door contact sensors – if these
Aramco property boundary security fence, to assist with intruder detection and rooms incorporate a window (bars should be considered), a secondary
response force deployment. method of detection should be provided (Passive Infrared Sensor)
• All reception desks and secure meeting room should incorporate silent panic
PIDS are electronic devices for detecting the entry or attempted entry of an buttons
intruder across the external perimeter of an installation and signalling an alarm. • Movement detection will also be applied outside toilet facilities, to detect the
Properly deployed, they can usefully enhance the effectiveness of other perimeter presence of staff or visitors who have remained in toilet facilities until after
defences (such as fences and security staff). However, they are prone to false hours
alarms, (which need to be verified by CCTV or security staff) and, if unsuitably
sited, their rate of detection may be low.
PIDS are expensive and care should be taken in the selection, application and
installation of a system to prevent its usefulness being impaired by: being easy to
evade, and to limit the frequency of technical problems or false alarms. Before
installation of PIDS, the following should be considered:
• The type of fence or defensible landscaping requiring coverage

• The length of each perimeter requiring coverage
• Whether there is sufficient ground available to establish sterile detection
zones (if appropriate) on the attack side of each perimeter
• Local ground surface conditions Figure 7: Intruder Detection (example)
• Prevailing weather and local wildlife
3.9.9.3 Intrusion Detection Integration • Channel 6: Common Sequential confirmed
• Channel 7: Anti-mask
A dedicated Security network for the transmission of CCTV imagery and • Channel 8: GSM Fail
communication/administration of the Access Control System can also be utilised for • Channel 9: Common zone omit
the transmission of Intruder Alarm activations. A distributed network of remote • Channel 10: Automatic Comms. Test
input/output modules should be used throughout the Center for the connection of • Channel 11: Automatic Comms. Test
various Intruder Detection devices and local warning devices. An added benefit of
integrating all separate security networks on a dedicated network is that the Two additional channels to be available for tamper and Mains Fail.
systems can be integrated to complement one another, for example, in the event
of an alarm activation CCTV footage from the location can be displayed to the In addition, the modem unit should be provided with Security Industry Authority
operator for visual confirmation of the alarm activation, allowing the operator to (SIA) Level 3 alarm monitoring. This would enable all zones and areas to be
initiate the appropriate response to the activation. independently monitored, in the event that the client wishes to adopt Remote
Monitoring. The strategy behind both monitoring systems would be that the Red
3.9.9.4 Panic Buttons and Duress Alarms care/GSM system would be used as the primary signalling function, whilst the SIA
L3 monitoring would provide an individual alarm indication at a specific (device)
Staff will be protected by provision of strategically positioned panic buttons/duress location within the Center. This specific and detailed information would be
alarms for emergency use. They will be located in the main reception desk, provided to the key holder/Facilities Manager (not Police) who would know the site
museum galleries and library floors. The panic alarms will sound in the Security well enough to establish the location of the fault/alarm, and thus would be able to
Control Room, who will use the security systems to decide on the necessary action, better deal with the event.
and if appropriate, call for the emergency services.
In addition, the SIA L3 monitoring would provide additional information such as
3.9.9.5 Control System area setting (or not), faults/tampers occurring. A method of dealing with these
would need to be clarified on an individual basis; the responses from each
The Intruder Detection System shall be controlled by key pad/proximity readers zone/area shall be agreed with the Client in advance.
and will be monitored from the Security Control Room. All alarms are to be
monitored by the main control panel also located in the Security Control Room.
The system should be programmed to allow for a number of multi area setting
scenarios.
3.9.9.6 Alarm Monitoring
The alarms will be monitored by the Security Control Room on a permanent basis;
however a DD243 compliant system should be installed to compensate for any
situation when the building may be unoccupied. To retrofit these items can be
expensive whilst at the initial fit-out stage it is negligible. The alarm monitoring
facility should comprise of the following:
Redcare / GSM signalling with the following channels programmed and enabled:
• Channel 1: Fire Alarm

• Channel 2: Panic
• Channel 3: Common Intruder
• Channel 4: Common open/close
• Channel 5: Spare
3.9.10 Security Management • Vehicle and personnel search at access control points and other areas of
pedestrian search
The purpose of Security Management is to provide for the safety for personnel and • Initial incident response
business operation continuity, and to reduce damage by preventing or minimising • Liaison with Police and other emergency and law enforcement agencies
the impact of security incidents. Security incidents are frequently due to the • Monitoring of building security systems
absence of basic security procedures and controls. Poor supervision of staff and • Public reassurance, hosting and communication
lack of proper security management procedures, also increase the risk and impact
of incidents. The provision of Security Officers can either be in-house, contracted out to a
security guarding company or a combination. The debate as to which route to
Fundamental to a positive security culture is the training and awareness of security choose will depend on a number of factors such as quality required, functions,
and its implications. Management staff must ensure that their staff are adequately management, finance and organisation culture.
trained both in Security and Crisis Management. King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge & Culture will need to strike a balance between maintaining high levels 3.9.10.2 Security Control Room Location
of assurance and a robust security regime, while ensuring King Abdulaziz Center
for Knowledge & Culture remains a tranquil and welcoming location. All main elements of the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture’s fire and
security system will have to be controlled and monitored. To achieve this, a
3.9.10.1 Command and Control suitable Security Control Room must be established. The main criteria for the
suitability of a Security control facility are its size and location. The size of the
The Security Command and Control facility for King Abdulaziz Center for facility shall be such that it can accommodate all the terminated security systems,
Knowledge & Culture will be based on a clear plan of providing a central Security communications and operators as well as the emergency services representatives
Control Room with a primary security guarding force. Rather than react to security during an incident, including rest areas and facilities. The Security Control Room
incidents as they occur, a pro-active approach to security actively gathers may be located close to the main entrance, however the probability of evacuation
intelligence about the Center and its surrounding environment. This information is greater, as the public entrance is the most likely location for a security incident.
can be collated and interpreted to detect possible increased levels of threat, or It could also be collocated with other management offices within the Center, which
areas of unusual activity, which can be investigated further. Information can be will enhance communication with business managers and assist with
received from a number of sources such as, security patrols, CCTV patrols, King communications when managing a crisis.
Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture staff and external sources such as
security forums and local/national Police liaison. An alternative Security Control Room should also be established, the location
dependent on availability; however it should be located away from the primary
By using this approach to security, all security operations such as patrols and CCTV Security Control Room so that it can be used if the primary Security Control Room
surveillance can be given specific direction as opposed to ‘coverage at will’. This has to be vacated. Due to the potential size of a cordon for some incidents (500m
will involve having a fully trained and motivated team to conduct security radius) it would not be wise for both the primary and secondary control locations to
operations, however the benefits are tenable. The costs of such a system and be unavailable. This alternative Control Room could be used for large event
culture shall be reflected across the various areas of the Center and the individual management, leaving the primary to concentrate on site security.
business units. Before other aspects of security for the Center can be effectively
determined and structured, King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture will 3.9.10.3 Security Management and Responsibilities
need to consider a security organisation. Independent of the structure decided for
the security organisation, there will be a requirement for security officers to Security within King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture must have a focus,
provide the following functions: so that each member of staff knows who will deal with a particular security issue.
The aim is to provide a security culture that works for all, yet provides optimum
• Patrols (foot, vehicle, observation posts etc) continuity. Although the Security Team will be responsible on a daily basis for
• Control of site access monitoring and reacting to security incidents, it is important that they are directed
• Monitoring of public space, CCTV and alarms and managed by a member of the Business Management Team.
Responsibility for Security Management often falls under the remit of the Facilities • Ensuring all staff and visitors conform to Security policy and procedures
Manager; however, for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture there will be
sufficient security resources and requirements to justify a full time Security 3.9.10.4 Policy and Procedures
Manager position. Duties will include the following:
Developing a secure environment for King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge &
• Provision of tactical security direction Culture is a short-term project, which is normally addressed by deploying security
• Supervision of security procedures equipment such as described in earlier chapters. However, managing security and
• Establishment and review of site Security Risk Management process (to the associated systems is a long-term project that requires clearly defined
assure the management board of the status of identified Security Risks and procedures to ensure security expenditure is optimised. Management should set a
the effectiveness of the Center’s Security Plans) clear direction and demonstrate their support for, and commitment, to security
• Establish and conduct a Center Security Compliance Regime (to ensure that through the issue of a Security Policy that addresses Security throughout King
the Center Security Plans are being implemented correctly) Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture.
• Management of the security budget, and ensuring that Security Risks are
being mitigated in the most efficient and cost effective way Policies define what personnel, assets and business processes are to be protected
• Standards and performance of the in-house or contracted security guard and to what level, whilst procedures define ‘how’ to protect those resources and
force processes. They also provide a framework on which to build the security culture.
• Maintenance of security systems They define what behaviour is or are not acceptable and will often ‘set the stage’ in
terms of the equipment and procedures that are needed to protect personnel
It is also recommended that a Security Forum be developed that incorporates assets and business processes. Policies also communicate a consensus of
key members of the Business Management Team, at which key security issues commitment to security from management.
can be discussed and key security decisions agreed. It is the key opportunity
for the Security Manager to raise security issues with King Abdulaziz Center for Security procedures define detailed actions required for a wide range of specific
Knowledge & Culture’s Business Manager(s). incidents and provide a quick reference in a time of crisis. As security procedures
are developed, it is possible to identify ‘points of failure’, such as employees,
Responsibilities for that forum should include: equipment or processes that are critical to business continuity; this will help in the
construction of Disaster Recovery and Crisis Management Plans.
• Maintain awareness of the security threats to King Abdulaziz Center for
Knowledge & Culture and update the security procedures to reflect new 3.9.10.4 Crisis Management Plans
needs
• Manage security related issues Appropriate early response to an incident can make the difference between
• Develop and approve the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture continuance of core activities and disaster recovery. The general perception is that
security policy and procedures in the event of an incident or disaster the emergency services (fire, police and
• Review the reports provided by the Security Management Team covering the ambulance) will always attend and save staff, property and assets within a few
status of the King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture security posture minutes. However, this may not always be the case, during an incident there will
• Review and report on any security incidents and the results of any be an initial window of opportunity to prevent a disaster, or at worst, minimise the
investigations carried out and implement improvements/remedial action effect. It is therefore essential that the Center has clear Crisis Management Plans
• Record and document the minutes of each meeting and a nucleus of well-trained personnel capable of attending and dealing with all
incidents and emergencies; these personnel are often referred to as the
The responsibilities of individual staff members across the Center include: Emergency Response Teams. They will be responsible for:
• Compliance with the Security policy • Saving lives

• Compliance with the Security procedures • Activating the Incident Management procedures
• Reporting all Security incidents to the Security Managers • Preventing further injury and damage
• Reporting all security weaknesses to the Security Managers • Assessing damage to lives and property
• Determining the availability of resources
• Identifying and prioritising problems The console will facilitate the following duties:
• Communicating critical information
• Display and operation of CCTV camera system
In order to manage an incident effectively, a set of post incident management • Live recording of incidents being monitored
procedures must be established. It will not be possible to define each and every • Administration of the security access control system
incident that could occur but if some basic principles are adopted they can be used • All alarm point monitoring
in full or part as required. • Radio and intercom communication systems
3.9.10.5 Disaster Recovery Plans 3.9.10.8 Replay Suite
In the event of an incident being too large or being of significant effect, it may be The replay suite will only be operated when evidence is required of a known or
that the processes or essential services of the Center have been disrupted to an suspected incident, or as a management activity. The office will be used for the
unacceptable level and recovery has to be made. A comprehensive Disaster front end of the Digital Video Recorder (DVR). There should be room for a
Recovery Plan must be produced to speed up the process of recovery in a supervisor and three additional people such as managers, police and witnesses.
sustainable and controlled manner. This will minimise the effect on the business Confidentiality and integrity of the recorded evidence should be maintained.
processes and will optimise recovery resources.
3.9.10.9 Access Control
3.9.10.6 Security Control Room Design
Security rooms must be kept secure at all times. Access to the main Security
The Security Control Room is a collection of rooms containing security controls and Control Room, which is continuously manned, will be controlled from within the
front-end systems. The control room will have the facility to monitor and operate room. This is to prevent the room from being left unattended. Should this system
all cameras, alarms and communication systems. It is best practice for security fail, an override key to the control room will be kept in a break glass box in a
equipment and controls to be kept separate and secure from the rest of the site separate secure location. If room allows, access control to the main control room
management systems. Restricting access to these areas will help to protect the should be through an ‘airlock’ system of interlocking doors. In this way, each door
operators and equipment, especially at night. Increasing operators’ security will may only be operated electronically, if the others are locked.
give them greater ability to perform their tasks effectively. It also creates a
professional environment and helps to maintain the integrity of each room for its
purpose. The Security Control Room should comprise of the following separate
areas:
• Main Control Room –Where security systems are monitored and controlled.
To be continuously staffed
• Equipment Room – Security control equipment to be rack mounted. Access
for maintenance staff only
• Replay Suite – An office, which could be located adjacent to the main
control room, for reviewing incidents
3.9.10.7 Main Control Room
The control room will normally only ever be occupied by Security staff actively
operating and monitoring the security systems. To this end, it will contain a
security console ergonomically designed around operator numbers with fully
adjustable seating, lighting, heating and venting.
Figure 8: Control Room
3.9.11 Security Standards • LPS1175-6 - Requirements and testing procedures for the LPCB approval and
listing of intruder resistant building components, strong points, security
The list below is not exhaustive and all relevant BS, ISO & EN standards/guidance enclosures and free-standing barriers. Issue 6 dated 24/05/07
notes are to be used: • DD 243 (2004) – Code of Practise for management of False Alarms
• PD 6662 2004 – Scheme for the application of European Standards for
General intruder and hold-up alarm systems
• NACOSS – National Approval Council for Security Systems Vehicle Blockers

• Home Office Scientific Development Branch CCTV Publications
• PD 0008 2004 - Legal Admissibility and Evidential Weight of Information • PAS 68 - Testing standard for UK Vehicle Blocker
Stored Electronically • PAS 69 - Installation standard for UK Vehicle Blocker
• SD-STD-02.01 - US Dept of State's Physical Security STD-02.01 Guidelines,
CCTV Revision B - K4 / K8 / K12
• BS EN 50132-7 - CCTV surveillance systems for use in Security applications. Mifare Standard (Smart Cards (Proximity))
Part 7: Application guidelines
• BS 7958 - CCTV Management and Operation, Code of Practice • ISO/IEC 14443-1:2000 Part 1 - Physical characteristics
• BSIA Form No. 191 - Code of Practice for the digital recording systems for • ISO/IEC 14443-2:2001 Part 2 - Radio frequency power and signal interface
the purpose of image export to be used as evidence • ISO/IEC 14443-3:2001 Part 3 - Initialization and anti-collision
• ISO/IEC 14443-4:2001 Part 4 - Transmission protocol
Access Control Systems
Doors
• BS EN 50133-1 - Access Control Systems for use in security applications,
system requirements • LPS 1175 SR 2 or 3 – Security Door
• BS EN 50133-2-1 - Access Control Systems for use in security applications,
general requirements for components Windows
• BS EN 50133-7 - Access Control Systems for use in security applications,
application guidelines • BS EN ISO 12543:1998 laminated glass - Ground floor (accessible) glazing
• BSIA Guide No. 173 - Access Control Systems guide to assist in compliance • BS EN 356 or BS EN 1063 Class P1A to P5A (resistance to attack) - Anti-
with the Disability Discrimination Act vandal/bandit
• NACP 20 – Code of Practice for Planning, Installation and Maintenance of • BS 952-1:1995 - 2nd floor (inaccessible) and above glazing
Access Control Systems
Locks
Intruder Detection Systems
• BS EN 3621:2007 - Thief resistant lock assembly. Key egress
• BS EN 50131-1:2006 - Intrusion and hold-up systems, system requirements
• BS EN 50131-6:2008 - Intrusion and hold-up systems, power supplies
• BS EN 50136-1-1 - Alarm transmission systems and equipment, general
requirements for alarm transmission systems
• BS EN 50136-1-2 - Alarm transmission systems and equipment,
requirements for systems using dedicated alarm paths
• BS EN 50136-1-3 - Alarm transmission systems and equipment,
requirements for systems with digital communicators using the public
switched telephone network
3.9.12 Indicative Access Control and CCTV Coverage
Level -03
Level -02
Level -01
Level 00
Level 01
Level 02
Level 03
Level 04
Level 05
Level 06
3.10 ACOUSTIC ENGINEERING
Table of Contents
3.10.2 Auditorium
3.10.2.1 Brief
3.10.2.2 Design Considerations
3.10.2.3 Acoustic Design Features
3.10.2.4 Design Development
3.10.2.5 Sound Insulation
3.10.3 Great Hall Cinema and Cinema
3.10.3.1 Brief and Design Criteria

3.10.3.2 Building Envelope Sound Insulation
3.10.3.3 Internal Sound Insulation
3.10.3.4 Room Acoustics
3.10.4 Library

3.10.4.5 Mechanical Services Noise Control
3.10.5 Museum and Plaza


3.10.1 Codes and Standards • International Organisation of Standardisation (ISO)
• British Standards Institution (BS)
Various codes and standards have been used to develop the design of the centre. • Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers Guides (CIBSE)
In the first instance, the design of the building will comply with Saudi Aramco • American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
Standard SAES-A-105 “Noise Control”. Table 1 is applicable to “desired” internal (ASHRAE)
noise levels in buildings from mechanical services and is copied below. • British Council for Offices (BCO)
Category Area and Acoustic Requirements Noise Criterion Curve In this report, a discussion of relevant acoustic design criteria for each space is
provided in the following sections. Some general comments regarding criteria and
Bedrooms, sleeping quarters, rating systems are provided below.
1 hospitals, residences, apartments, NC-20 to NC-30
etc, (for good listening conditions) Sound Insulation
In this report we are using Sound Reduction Index, Rw to rate the sound insulation
Auditoriums, theatres, large meeting of partition types rather than the US Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating. The
2 rooms, large conference rooms. etc. NC-20 to NC-30 sound reduction index is determined according to ISO standards 140 Part 3. Test
(for good listening conditions) results are rated according to ISO 717 Part 1. The American STC rating is similar
Private offices, small conference to the Rw rating and for the purposes of this report can be regarded as
3 rooms, classrooms, libraries, etc. NC-30 to NC-35 interchangeable.
(for good listening conditions)
Mechanical Services Noise
Large offices, reception areas, In accordance with the Aramco standards shown in the table opposite, mechanical
4 cafeterias etc (for fair listening NC-35 to NC-40 services noise levels will be rated in terms of the Noise Criterion (NC) using the
conditions) ambient level (Leq).
Lobbies, laboratory work spaces,
drafting and engineering rooms, Classification of Absorption
5 NC-40 to NC-50 In this report we refer to the sound absorption class of acoustic finishes to provide
maintenance shops, etc for fair
listening conditions absorption. This follows international standard ISO 11654 which classifies
absorbers into one of five categories, A to E in terms of the weighted absorption
Kitchens, laundries, shops, garages, coefficient, αw. A material with an absorption coefficient of 1.00 absorbs 100% of
machinery spaces, power plant the incident sound. Similarly a material with an absorption coefficient of 0.15
6 control rooms, etc. (for minimum NC-45 to NC-55 absorbs only 15% of the sound such that 85% is reflected. The sound absorption
acceptable speech communication
class categories and the weighted absorption coefficients αw are shown below:
with no risk of hearing damage)
The NC rating system is a series of limiting curves against which the noise
spectrum is compared. The NC rating is the lowest curve that is not exceeded.
Therefore to achieve NC-30 for example, the noise level (Leq) in each octave
frequency band must be below the NC-30 curve value at that frequency.
However in many instances, there is no applicable Aramco standard for the

acoustic design. Instead, acoustic design criteria have been set on the basis of
good practice and other recognized guidance, including that from following
organisations:
Sound αw according to ISO 11654
Absorption Class
A 0.90, 0.95, 1.00
B 0.80, 0.85
C 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75
D 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55
E 0.15, 0.20, 0.25
Unclassified 0.00, 0.05, 0.10
In the American rating system, the noise reduction coefficient is similar but not
interchangeable.
3.10.2 Auditorium through the proscenium on the forestage lifts and into the audience chamber
giving better direct communication and intimacy. A demountable orchestra
3.10.2.1 Brief shell, of the Wenger type, should be supplied with suitable off stage storage.
Overhead reflective soffits shall be suspended within the stage house when this
shell is in place. It is recommended these are trippable to a vertical position and
A brief for the auditorium must be agreed so that a design can be optimised
flown within the stage house for storage.”
according to the various proposed uses. A draft brief was provided by Theatre
Projects Ltd on 27th May 2008. This must be agreed with the client. The brief
This brief must be agreed with the client.
states that the theatre will be used for the following performance types:
3.10.2.2 Design Considerations
“Primary Uses
• Musicals
Acoustics for Speech and Music
• Traditional Dance
Achieving good acoustics in an auditorium depends on five key factors:
• Classical Ballet
• Medium scale drama
1. Low noise levels
• Amplified Music
2. Appropriate reverberation time (s)
3. A sufficient direct sound level
Secondary Uses
4. Sufficient early reflections
• Orchestral concerts
5. Absences of acoustic faults such as focussing or echoes.
• Acoustic concerts
• Traditional acoustic music
These factors are now discussed in turn.
• Conferences and lectures”
Low background noise
In view of the above, the auditorium has been designed as a proscenium theatre
The noise level in an auditorium is usually determined by the ingress of
which will tend to favour the primary uses. In terms of acoustics, the draft brief
environmental noise from the outside and by plant noise.
states the following:
A standard recommendation for a large auditorium for natural speech, is for the
“The wide range of performance types will require an adjustable acoustic. It
services noise level to be within NC-20. For orchestral music, lower noise levels
should be possible to vary the acoustical reverberation time of the room within a
are often required, NC-15 and below. Achieving NC-15 requires significant
range of 0.8-1.0 and 1.4-1.6 seconds at mid-frequency. Ideally, this should be
attention to detail including noise from air diffusers and lighting. Currently as
achieved by introduction of absorbent materials. The use of coupled volumes
orchestral music is designated as a secondary use, designing to lower than NC-20
should be carefully considered as the closing off can involve considerable
would not seem to be appropriate.
capital and maintenance costs. Based on the range of performance types listed for
this theatre a background noise criteria of no less than NC20 should be the design
Appropriate Reverberation Time
aim.
Reverberation describes the decay of sound once a sound source is abruptly
stopped. In a reverberant room, sounds take a long time to decay and successive
An orchestra pit will be required for certain performances like live musicals or
sounds blur into each other. For speech, too much reverberation will reduce
non-taped dance. The pit should be flexible to accommodate between 12-60
intelligibility but for orchestral music and for singing, reverberation can enhance
musicians in optimised conditions. A stage overhang could be considered
the quality of the sound. Reverberation can be described by the reverberation
provided that this does not exceed 2m of closed pit or 1/3 of the total pit depth;
time, which is defined as the time taken for sound to decay by 60 dB. The
whichever is the lesser.
reverberation time is directly proportional to the volume of the room and inversely
proportional to the amount of acoustic absorption within the room. It can be
Orchestral concerts are considered a secondary performance type but there will be
calculated from the Sabine equation as follows:
a need to optimise the staging facilities to accommodate an orchestra of up to
80 musicians. This should be considered in part by bringing the orchestra
0.16V Absence of acoustic faults
RT =
A As mentioned above, discrete echoes will be heard if they are too strong and too
late. This is a common feature of domes and other concave surfaces which tend to
where V is the volume and A, the acoustic absorption in the room. focus sound at a particular location. This will give rise to a particularly strong
sound at this location, with the possibility of false localisation. The other areas will
For speech, a reverberation time of under 1 second is required. However for have only a weak sound level since they receive no reflected sound. Concave
orchestral music, the reverberation time should be around two seconds. Since the surfaces are therefore best avoided if possible. Where this is not possible, the
requirements for speech and music differ, some form of variable acoustics is focus point for the reflections must lie outside the audience plane.
desirable in multi-purpose auditoria. From the equation above, it can be seen that
the reverberation time can be varied by changing the volume or by changing the Acoustic Design Parameters
absorption. The table below summarises some of the typical design parameters for concert
halls, theatres and venues with amplified music or speech.
Direct Sound
Direct sound describes the sound that travels directly from the source to listener. Design Parameter Drama Theatre Concert Hall Amplified Music /
A good level of direct sound is important for speech and music. Achieving a good (Orchestral Music) Speech
level of direct sound for a theatre requires speaker to listener distances to be Reverberation 0.8 – 1.0 (secs) 1.8 – 2.2 (secs) 0.5 – 1 (secs)
limited to less than around 20 - 25m. For orchestral music or for amplified music Time
this distance is less critical. Good sightlines are also important for speech and Max distance from 20 – 25m 35 – 40 m Determined by
music. audience (metres) Visual Demands
Diffusion Not Needed Some Some
Reflected Sound Early Reflections Yes - Ceiling & Yes but preference No – can “colour”
Reflected sounds are those that reach the listener as a reflection off the wall, Side Walls (Max. for Side Walls sound system
ceiling or floor surfaces. For speech, research has shown that reflected sounds are useful delay 50 (Max. useful delay
heard as one with the direct sound if they arrive within 50 milliseconds of the milliseconds) 80 milliseconds) –
direct sound. Therefore early reflections, those arriving within 50 milliseconds, avoid strong, early
generally improve speech intelligibility. If the reflections arrive more than 50 ceiling reflections
milliseconds after the direct sound, the effect is to blur speech syllables together Balconies (D = D ≤2.5H D ≤H No Design Rule
with reduced intelligibility. The speed of sound in air is around 343 m/s, and depth of overhung
therefore the distance between the direct sound path and the reflected sound path seating, H =
should be less than 17 metres. Height of opening)
Services Noise NC-20 for > 500 NC-15 NC-30
For music, reflections arriving within 80 milliseconds of the arrival of the direct Level (NC Rating) seats
sound are usually regarded as early reflections. Providing early reflections from Max Seat Capacity 800 - 1200 1500 – 2500 ???
the sides (as opposed to the ceiling) is crucial to the experience of being enveloped Proscenium Usually / No – stage and Yes – to create
by the music. Strong overhead reflections should be avoided because of the risk of traditionally to auditorium separate
coloured sound or false localisation. “frame” the volumes must not auditorium and
drama – typically be separate stage sound fields
Of course, a listener will also receive late reflections but these should be reduced in 8m high
level, having undergone several reflections. Such late reflections contribute to the Form Seating within Preference for Determined by
general level of reverberation in the room but the individual reflection paths should 120° - permits a parallel side walls visual
not be discriminated. However if the late reflection is too strong there is a risk fan shape – “shoebox” form requirements
that it will be heard as an echo. is most common.
Fan shapes are
bad.
It can be seen that the design parameters for the three types of venues vary 10 – 12m. One possibility, for architectural continuity, is to replicate the ceiling
considerably and it is not possible to design one space to satisfy all of the above panels which will form part of the shell. These will mostly likely have a convex
requirements. Designing for the conflicting requirements inevitably involves a curve. It will still be necessary to angle this reflector when in theatre mode
compromise and this compromise must reflect the frequency and relative however.
importance of each event. • Reflectors underneath the lighting bridges will reflect sound to the seating areas
including the balconies. The sketch opposite has the trailing edges splayed
3.10.2.3 Acoustic Design Features (Room Acoustics) upwards by 20° but most likely again they will have a gentle convex curve
profile. This is preferred, to spread the reflection over a large area to fill in the
The acoustic design of the auditorium has been based on a proscenium theatre. gaps and reduce the strength. All reflections shown are within 50 milliseconds
This will provide a suitable space for the “primary” uses discussed above. Variable of the direct sound and therefore will increase speech intelligibility.
acoustics will be provided to enhance the conditions for orchestral use. Variable • There are gaps in between the reflectors which will allow reverberant sound to
acoustic absorption is also provided to increase the acoustic absorption for use with enter the void. This should increase the reverberation time while providing
amplified music. A long section showing the ceiling reflections is shown below. acceptable conditions for speech because of the early reflections.
• The volume of the auditorium is also over-sized for speech use. Curtains (serge
drapes) will be provided to run along the backs of the lighting bridges for use
when in theatre or amplified music mode so that sound in the void is absorbed.
• Absorbent drapes will also be provided on the side walls under the balcony
levels as shown below. This is mainly provided for amplified music since for
speech the side walls must be reflective.
Absorptive
Drapes for
Amplified Music
Key features of the auditorium are:
• A variable height forestage reflector with a variable height proscenium. For

theatre mode, the forestage reflector must be angled at around 30° from the
proscenium opening at 8m, to provide reflections to the stalls. For music use
and for amplified music, the reflector will be flat and retracted to its full height,
3.10.2.4 Design Development
• With the drapes retracted (and stowed in a box). Balconies wrap around the When the brief is confirmed, further design work will be required to develop the
side to provide lateral reflections down to the audience. auditorium design. A computer model will be set up to investigate the reflection
• An orchestra shell is provided for natural music use to prevent sound being lost patterns in more detail. The following issues must be addressed.
in the flytower and to increase the effective volume of the space when in
concert hall mode. This will be a proprietary installation such as the Wenger • At the request of Snøhetta, the auditorium will be reduced in length and
“Diva” shell (an example of which is shown below). The overhead elements will increased in width to bring people closer to the stage and to increase intimacy.
be flown from the flytower; the vertical elements are towers on air casters Currently the last row on the upper circle is almost 30m from the proscenium.
which can be nested for efficient storage. This exceeds the maximum 20 - 25m suggested as the design parameter above
• The orchestra pit is provided. Note that the internal surfaces of overhang (soffit for natural speech. It may be that the theatre is not used at full capacity for
and walls) should be lined with mineral fibre to reduce noise levels in the pit. natural speech-based events however.
• Absorbent seats should be provided with absorbent undersides so that in tipped • The acoustic ceiling reflectors and the light bridges will need to be co-ordinated.
up position useful absorption is provided, thus minimising differences in the In particular, the follow spot room interferes with the ceiling reflections to the
occupied and unoccupied reverberation. upper circle as shown in the sketch section above, although it should noted that
the room is not continuous across the width of the auditorium. If the follow
With the orchestra shell and the variable absorption, an optimistic design goal spot room were sited behind the last row of the upper circle then reflections
would be to vary the reverberation time from 1.5 seconds to around 1.0 seconds. from the main ceiling would reach the upper circle without the need for a
Therefore with the use of these features, a worthwhile increase in reverberation suspended reflector. This may be more acceptable if the auditorium is reduced
could be possible while maintaining acceptable conditions for speech, although the in length.
ideal 2 second RT target for orchestral music would not be met. • The balcony fronts will need careful study as they create a concave curvature
which is often undesirable. On the other hand, the side balcony fronts should
be able to provide lateral reflections provided that most of the side is inclined
down towards the audience. Snøhetta’s proposed design with vertical stripes or
grooves between the timber surfaces might allow the balcony fronts to be
absorptive, by making openings in the stripes to expose the sound to mineral
fibre concealed within the balcony fronts. This would be especially desirable at
the corners where the focussing effects are at their strongest.
• The reverberation time for several arrangements must be checked – with and
without the orchestra shell and with and without drapes. The coupling between
the two spaces must be studied.
• Consideration of the sound system should be made when studying reflection
paths. The sound system designers should co-ordinate the locations with
Snøhetta, Theatre Projects and Buro Happold Acoustics.
• The orchestra shell will need to be designed and specified.
3.10.2.5 Sound Insulation
The auditorium is protected by a 300mm concrete wall around it. Lobbied doors
are provided to all entrances. The effectiveness of the lobby must be increased by
providing absorption between the two sets of doors, including the walls, floor and
ceiling.
Wenger “Diva” Orchestra Shell

The concrete wall around the auditorium is a structural wall. To improve the sound
insulation from the surrounding areas an isolation break is provided. This is done
by supporting the surrounding foyer spaces and corridors on elastomeric bearings
supported on corbels from the main wall. The bearings should be specified with a
resonance frequency of 10 Hz. The isolation joint is important to control noise
from the lifts and stairs. The lifts shafts must have their own concrete or
blockwork enclosure which must be fully independent of the auditorium wall. All
services passing across the isolation line must also have an appropriate isolation
joint.
The main plant space is provided above the auditorium, in addition to the 200mm
concrete slab which forms the auditorium ceiling. The plant must be supported on
a concrete floating floor on isolation bearings. A studwork enclosure should be
built around the plant to form the plantroom walls.
Interpretation booths and control rooms will require good sound insulation. The
sound insulation of the back-of-house areas will need to be studied. It is assumed
that these will be formed with stud partitions.
mass of 20 kg/m2. This could be plywood, plasterboard etc. The sound insulation
3.10.3 The Great Hall and Cinema will therefore increase to around 50 dB Rw which will be adequate.
3.10.3.1 Brief and Design Criteria 3.10.3.3 Internal Sound Insulation
The Great Hall is also adjacent to Gallery 2 of the museum. It is presumed that
A brief for the Great Hall must also be provided. We understand it is likely to be
the façade will continue at this point to form the interface between these two
used for large exhibitions and for banquets but many other uses are likely.
spaces. Therefore sound insulation reasonable sound insulation should be
Snøhetta require a space with “efterklang” (reverberation) and for the uses
achieved.
mentioned above, it is unlikely that acoustics for speech intelligibility is the
determining factor. We understand that conferences are not a primary use. The
We suggest a door lobby is provided between the great hall and the back of house
hall is too large for natural speech and therefore it is assumed that a sound system
corridor to minimise disruption from these activities. The inner set of door should
will be used for speeches during banquets etc. Nevertheless, a brief for the great
be provided with a hold open facility for rapid access to the reheat kitchen etc. We
hall must be agreed so that a design can be developed. In the absence of such a
would not propose lobbied doors for the public access. However these doors
document we propose the following design criteria for the Great Hall:
should be specified with a sound insulation rating of 30 dB Rw.
Reverberation Time Limit: 2 seconds (occupied)
The cinema entrances and exits should be lobbied. Absorption should be provided
This is set primarily to allow the sound system to function with reasonable speech
within the lobbies.
intelligibility. Achieving this target will still require significant absorption, although
we have allowed for the effect of people seated at a banquet and therefore when
the hall is empty the reverberation time will be much higher. The occupancy will
also affect the reverberation time and therefore some guidance should be provided
For the Great Hall, to achieve the two second target we will require around 800 m2
by the client on occupancy levels for banquets. In particular, we would require the
of sound absorption to be distributed fairly evenly round the hall. It is necessary
minimum occupancy level for a speech-based event such as a formal banquet with
for this to be provided on the walls as well as the ceiling. It should be also
speech.
provided at the internal corners where the concave curves could give rise to
focussing effects.
Mechanical Services Noise NC-30
This is a reasonable noise limit for a large space and is compatible with the
Several options have been considered for the Great Hall. Timber panels and Corian
majority of uses. If there was a clear desire for a large number of speech-based
have been discussed. The chosen product must allow for some absorption to be
events then NC-25 could be considered.
provided. For timber this can be done by perforating the panels and by providing
50mm mineral fibre behind. The inner skin of the Great Hall would then comprise:
The cinema will require low noise levels and a low reverberation time of around 0.8
timber panels perforated where necessary to provide absorption, 50mm mineral
seconds. Mechanical services noise should be within NC-25. Note that some
fibre backed with two layers of board achieving a combined surface mass of 20
cinema operators have their own acoustic design criteria and stringent acoustic
kg/m2 for sound insulation.
requirements are set by Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Film (THX) for cinemas
certified according to their standards. It is assumed that such criteria do not apply
The cinema will require absorbent seats, a carpet floor and sound absorbing panels
here.
on the walls and ceiling. Usually fabric-faced panels are used for the walls with
suspended ceiling tiles. However alternative finishes could be investigated.
The outer shell of the Great Hall features a lightweight sandwich panel comprising
two layers of steel sheet with high density mineral fibre in between. This is likely
to have a sound insulation value of around 30 dB Rw. This must be increased and
therefore the inner shell must provide two layers of board with a combined surface
3.10.4 Library required sound insulation, the inner shell of the library pebble can be acoustic
transparent – this is required in any case for the control of reverberation.
Client Guidance 3.10.4.3 Internal Sound Insulation

The following additional guidance for the library design has been passed from the
client’s advisors based on the following publication: Anders C. Dahlgren, Public As discussed above there are no full height partitions which separate one space
Library Space Needs: A Planning Outline (Wisconsin Department of Public from another space, except for the core area. The current drawings show various
Instruction, 1998). booths identified as meeting areas, video instruction and offices etc. We
understand that these spaces will be semi-enclosed with partitions up to around
2.4m height but there will be no ceiling provided. Therefore while it will be
“Acoustics
Modern libraries have active, interactive environments; yet quiet study space is still expected possible to achieve around 10dB screening from external noise, it will not be
as well. Consider carpeting for reading rooms with acoustical ceiling tile having a high noise possible to achieve the STC standards. Nevertheless, reasonable privacy will be
reduction coefficient. provided since the partitions will screen the direct noise path and the absorbent
ceiling (discussed below) will limit reflections from the ceiling.
Requirements for Sound Transmission Class (STC), recommendations for libraries:
Space Rating The library is open to the foyer below. Therefore some noise transfer is inevitable.
Most areas STC 35 We would propose that the ceiling of the foyer is provided with acoustic absorption
Office areas STC 40 to control noise levels. The foyer soffit is effectively the outer skin of the library
Conference & meeting rooms STC 50 pebble. Mineral fibre should be provided above the mesh outer skin of the pebble
Mechanical equipment rooms STC 50” to provide absorption to the soffit of the foyer.
Note that the Sound Transmission Class requirements stated above relate to sound 3.10.4.4 Room Acoustics
insulation requirements for partitions between the space and the adjacent areas.
This library has no partitioned spaces as such. The inner shell of the library pebble and the ceilings of the intermediate floors are
being designed to take into account the acoustic requirements. The inner shell will
Mechanical Services Noise also form the walls of the library. The current intention for the inner shell is to use
Design Criteria for mechanical services noise can be taken from SAES-A-105 as a perforated panel with holes of varying sizes, 1cm to 30cm. Acoustic absorption
follows: can then be provided behind the perforated panel, that is, between the shotcrete
and perforated panel.
Space Noise Criterion
The absorption can either comprise 100mm mineral fibre or 100mm melatech
Library Space (Throughout) NC-35 foam. It would not necessarily need to be fixed to the back of the panel nor would
Toilets NC-45 it need fill the entire void. Areas of no absorption would be acceptable for ducts,
lighting or sprinklers etc, or to allow natural light to percolate through. We would
Plantrooms NC-65 expect around 80% of the surface area to be backed with absorption however.
The perforated panel should have an average 30% open area. It would be
3.10.4.2 Building Envelope Sound Insulation beneficial to increase the concentration of holes to perhaps 45% where there are
tight internal corners as they might otherwise create focussing effects.
One option for the façade design has a shotcrete layer between the outer mesh
and the inner shell of the library envelope. This will provide good sound insulation We understand that the ceilings of the intermediate floors will also adopt this
from extraneous noise. The glazed lens must achieve around 40 dB Rw sound concept so that high levels of sound absorption can be achieved.
insulation. This will require very thick glass. Since the shotcrete provides the
This solution is compatible with the client’s guidance to provide “an acoustical
ceiling tile with a high noise reduction coefficient”. Furthermore the design of the
pebble is such that this treatment can also be taken down the walls.
We understand the library floors will predominantly be of timber. Some areas of

discrete rugs will possibly be used. The rugs will be beneficial in reducing noise
from footfall, but would not be necessary to control reverberation. The proposed
perforated inner shell will be sufficient in this regard. In the event of disturbing
footstep noise from heavily trafficked areas, rugs could also be retrospectively
fitted.
Having solid balcony fronts will form a partial barrier to sound from the foyer which
is transmitted through the void. From an acoustic view point, the best solution
would be to provide solid, but absorptive balcony fronts. However the current
proposals favour a hard reflective aesthetic. This matter will require further
investigating. The angle of the balcony fronts is another factor that might make a
difference to the noise transfer. It will be possible to study the reflection paths
into the library using a computer model. This will be done at detailed design
stage.
Achieving the design criterion of NC-35 in the library will be a straightforward

matter. As for the open plan offices in the Tower, some “masking” noise will be
beneficial and therefore the design should aim to meet NC-35 without a safety
factor. Diffusers must be carefully selected to provide some background noise.
The escalators are effectively part of the main space and therefore must be
carefully specified in terms of noise and without squeaks and other disturbing
characteristics.
3.10.5 Museum and Plaza The exhibition designer will also be able to affect the room acoustics. Absorption
can be integrated into display boards and suspended elements. “Acoustic Art
3.10.5.1 Design Criteria Panels” or Microsorber can provide acoustic panels with any design printed on the
fabric. This might be a possibility for display boards and other features.
There are no established design criteria for museums. We suggest that mechanical
services noise levels are limited to NC-35 in the gallery spaces and NC-30 in the Plaza Ceiling
orientation theatre. Some of the museum spaces will have interactive exhibitions
and therefore the galleries may become noisy. The reverberation time should As discussed above, it will be desirable for the plaza ceiling to be absorptive to
ideally be less than 1.5 seconds. Note however that galleries 1 & 2 are open to the control noise levels within this large space. Currently various options are being
plaza and therefore it might not be possible to achieve this. investigated including a Barrisol stretched fabric ceiling. This can achieve useful
absorption. A microsorber foil is another possibility.
Galleries 1 and 2 are open to the plaza and the source via the entrance ramps.
The opportunities for sound insulation are limited. It should be possible to enclose
gallery 3 however and we suggest this is provided with doors from the ramp /
source and that a partition with 60 dB Rw sound insulation is provided between
Galleries 2 and 3. This might allow Gallery 3 to be used for either especially noisy
events or for quiet events independently of the other two gallery spaces. Impact
sound control will be required from the plaza level to Gallery 3. This is best
provided using a suspended plasterboard ceiling below the slab.
Galleries 1 and 2 will have permanent exhibitions and some of these might be
interactive with loudspeakers and noisy, active participation rather than quiet
contemplation. Therefore some control over reverberation / noise would be
beneficial. The ceilings are the best location for absorption. The ceiling for
Galleries 1 and 2 share a ceiling with the plaza and therefore the plaza ceiling
should be absorptive – see below. Gallery 3 will have some sort of suspended
ceiling. It might be most appropriate to replicate the plaza ceiling. Alternatively,
an acoustic sprayed plaster such as the Sto Silent Panel could be used. This could
be sprayed on the plasterboard ceiling which is required for impact sound control.
We would recommend an acoustic ceiling achieving a minimum sound absorption
coefficient of Class C.
In addition we suggest the undersides of the ramps are treated with absorption, for
example using acoustic plaster.
For the glazing to the source, it might be able to a micro-perforated transparent

foil available from Microsorber in Germany. This could be provided behind the
timber grid.
There are few sound insulation issues to consider. Acceptable sound insulation
Design Criteria for mechanical services noise have been taken from SAES-A-105 from floor to floor will be provided by the concrete slab. However care must be
and are as follows: taken that the detail at the slab edge does not degrade the sound insulation.
Therefore all gaps must be well sealed. Large gaps should be packed with
Rockwool.
Space Noise Criterion
Video Conferencing# NC-25 3.10.6.4 Room Acoustics
Other Conference Rooms / Meeting Rooms# NC-30
The offices will be provided with a suspended ceiling. This should ideally be
Media Centre, Executive Office NC-35 specified at Sound Absorption Class A when rated according to ISO 11654. Most
types of suspended ceiling can meet this requirement including mineral / glass
Keystone: Digital Media, Reading Room, Mezzanine NC-35
fibre tiles and metal perforated tiles.
Open Plan Offices NC-38
Some areas of perforated plasterboard ceilings are also proposed. These are less
Reception, Restaurant, Circulation NC-40
effective absorbers but can be acceptable in offices. These must specified to
Kitchens, Toilets NC-45 achieve sound absorption Class C. Not all types of perforated plasterboard can
achieve this.
Technical Floors NC-65*
Notes: 3.10.6.5 Mechanical Services Noise Control
# - These rooms are not shown on the current plans but a criterion is given in
case they will be provided. We have provided design criteria based on Saudi Aramco standard. It will be a
* - The “desired” Aramco standard for machinery spaces (NC-55) is probably straightforward matter to achieve these requirements by provision of standard
not achievable in the technical floors due to the equipment, nor is this noise control equipment. For open plan offices, some background noise is useful
necessary as it will not be an occupied space. as it can mask more intrusive sounds such as voices. Therefore care should be
taken not to over-specify equipment.
Criteria for sound insulation can be found in the British Council for Offices A rating of NC-65 is suggested for the technical floors. It is unlikely that the
guidelines and in BS 8233: 1999. The BCO advises that a minimum level of 50 dB “machinery room” Aramco standard can be met. Depending on the equipment
DnT,w should be provided between office floors. British Standard BS 8233: 1999 selected it may also be difficult to achieve our higher proposed standard.
indicates a minimum level of 38 Dw between office assuming privacy is not
required and 48 dB Dw where privacy is required. In this case the office floors are
largely open plan but the guidance could apply to any meeting rooms provided.
External noise levels are not expected to be significant. The sound insulation will
be limited to that provided by the inner skin, either pre-fabricated, lightweight
panels or thermal double glazing. In both cases a sound insulation rating of 30 dB
Rw / STC is expected. This will be acceptable for office use. The lightweight panels
should be specified with a sound insulation value of 30 dB Rw as tested according
to ISO 140-3 and rated according to ISO 717-1.
3.11 SPECIALIST LIGHTING
3.11.14 Great Hall
Table of Contents
3.11.15 Museum and Exhibition Spaces

3.11.16 Statutory Levels

3.11.2 How to Use This Document
3.11.17 Lamp Tyres and Sources

3.11.3 Introduction
3.11.18 Lighting Control

3.11.19 General Notes on Specification

3.11.5 Architectural Lighting – Interior Spaces
3.11.21 Typical Luminaire Types and Associated Equipment

3.11.7 Design Process
3.11.8 Lighting Standards
3.11.9 Lighting Design Criteria
3.11.10 Landscape and Building Façade
3.11.11 Entrance, Plaza and Public Area
3.11.12 Library
3.11.13 Auditorium
3.11 Executive Summary • Great Hall
• Museum and exhibition areas
This document sets out to establish the lighting requirements for key internal and 3.11.5 Architectural Lighting – Interior Spaces
external areas of the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre.
It aims to deliver a framework on which to base and deliver a coordinated lighting The illumination of the internal spaces will be a constantly changing experience.
design package for principle areas and a code of good practice to use throughout Daylight will in certain months overpower or negate the need for artificial light
the following phases of design and engineering whereas, conversely, seasonal changes will bring about a reliance on artificial light.
During the hours of darkness the artificial lighting solution should stimulate the
mind to the same extent as natural light.
3.11.2 How to use this document
The Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre requires flexibility in the lighting infrastructure
to meet this diversity of environment, artificial light should reveal the forms of the
This document provides relevant guidance in clear and descriptive terminology to
architecture, the scale of the spaces and aid the communication of the buildings
aid the delivery of original and sustainable designs for the principle areas.
experiences. Lighting will bolster qualities and emphasise experiences.
Following this guide will ensure “best practice” methods are adopted for the areas
The lighting design solution will be developed in line with the following five
in question and expectations are met
principles of good practice:
3.11.3 Introduction
Conceptualise the design intent
Designing the lighting for the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre creates a number of
Express and explore
challenges.
Essentially the project can be summarised as a large collection of spaces with
Improve the quality of the experience
mixed uses. It can not be easily classified as a particular building and like cultures
it has many different qualities and personalities. Each space therefore has a
Provide focus
dedicated use, a dedicated form and a dedicated lighting approach.
Our approach sees lighting as a function allowing people to experience the
Manage and maintain the concept
environment they are within, it must provide functional light but must strive to
The strategy aims to deliver high quality illumination that is appropriate to the
deliver increased awareness and enjoyment of a space. The approach will address
space and develops the codes above during its inception. The use of
practical considerations relating to access, maintenance, energy use and light
predominately white light will provide good colour rendering and visual acuity to
pollution
allow the visitors to experience the shapes, forms, colours and textures of the
architecture. Coloured light will help emphasise areas of particular interest and
dynamism.
Our appointment is primarily concerned with the following areas and these are the
Contrast
areas concerned within this document. Many of the areas out with those listed in
An appropriate balance of luminance levels across the vertical and horizontal
this document can benefit from the good practice and advice detailed within the
surfaces of different spaces to aid visual stimulation whilst ensuring safe
following chapters
movement and sensory acuity.
Highlighting certain features within spaces to increase drama and contrast thus
• Façade,
adding to identity and feature qualities of the day lit and night time environment.
• Landscape, greater landscape, circulation routes and approach-ways
SACC will stand out at night as it will largely adopt it’s own unique character in the
• Entrance Area and Plaza, entrance area and movement to the Plaza,
surrounding landscape, is will be seen as an Oasis of architecture and light in the
ticketing and information points
night time hours
• Library
• Auditorium
Texture have a definite impact on the local area it should therefore be considered to be a
The building is rich in texture and the lighting should be capable of revealing this delicate area lending itself to a certain considered approach, although it would
form both during day lit hours and during the evening, the difference between the irresponsible to assume a building of this nature will not affect the local area, it’s
two qualities of light can reveal different aspects to the texture of a surface. character and atmosphere it should be considered it should only do so in a tasteful
manner.
Colour
The appropriate use of coloured light within specific spaces will ensure visual focus The lighting should consider the hierarchy of the building and its use. Way finding
and drama; coloured light should only be used where it is seen to be necessary. It should become a priority with easy identification of entrances and routes. Natural
must work with the architecture and not against it, light must have a purpose and elements which have vertical standing should be emphasised to help vertical
be more than an application of another finish. Coloured light can help to reveal illumination improve the perceived brightness of an area. The façade and structure
depths and also mask them; the use of coloured light has a massive implication on should be tastefully lit (but) it need not be lit during every hour of each day.
perception. The weighting given to the artificial scheme should be to celebrate the structure
internally and externally while providing useable light, where possible to an
Spectacle attractive goal sees functional and architectural light combined into a common
The character of a building can take on many different forms with flexible lighting, approach and treatment.
the spectacle should be flexible and temporary lighting equipment can help the
building to change and adapt to new roles. Special effect lighting can be built into
architectural details to aid this transformation when required. 3.11.7 Design process
Feasibility
Formulate the Lighting Brief
A substantial; emphasis has been placed on good lighting design and the delivery Understand the requirements of the Client, Building and Architect
of good lighting design, more people scrutinise lighting as more people become
aware of how important it has become in our lives. Supporting this increased Concept Lighting Design
scrutiny is an ever increasing regulatory responsibility for the designer to meet
and/or exceed, lighting design as a profession has developed in recent years to Formulate the concepts
meet this new focus. Produce outline Masterplan of Key Areas
The regulatory guidelines have been formulated to ensure projects conform to Establish practicalities
responsible energy use, have appropriate light levels and are maintainable. Select generic luminaire types
However, responding to regulatory requirements can influence an average quality
on a design negating the requirement for an original balanced and holistic lighting Co-ordinated Design
scheme. Successful projects balance the need for regulatory compliance with the
need for original thinking and responsible design, therefore this Masterplan Develop Scheme Design
document sets out a framework which is a responsible representation of statutory Prepare lighting presentation images and boards
requirements and creative thinking. Layout Plans
A balanced approach to lighting offers the end user, for little comparative capital Run lighting calculations
cost, the ability to increase the level on enjoyment experienced by the visitors to a Review areas requiring detail integration and coordinate
project, it offers a relatively large return in material benefit and improvement for Formulate lighting control strategy and performance specification
the associated costs involved in adopting a cohesive lighting design. Provide cost estimations (equipment only)
The Masterplan will carefully consider the visual appearance of the building and it’s
associated spaces by day and night. Given the location will be in an area of very
low district brightness at night the scheme will benefit from a more subtle
approach and use of lower brightness equipment. Any illumination at night will
Detail Information Packages Conflicts and Deviations
The lighting designer shall, on discovery of any conflicts between this standard and
Finalise Lighting Design other applicable Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (SAESs), Materials System
Produce Lighting layouts Specifications (SAMSSs), Standard Drawings (SASDs), or industry standard, codes
Provide full specification of luminaires seek resolution on the matter from the Manager, Consulting Services Department
Provide full installation details of Saudi Aramco, Dhahran.
Produce final lighting calculations
Provide coordination feedback 3.11.9 Lighting Design Criteria
Specify lighting Control Systems or approve performance of tendered systems
Provide lamps details to assist in future maintenance The success of the night time identity of the building and the spaces within will
depend upon the correct approach being adopted for each aspect, good practice
Post Works commissioning and handover dictates it is not merely a case to ensure horizontal illuminance is maintained to a
certain level but also vertical illuminance is maintained where appropriate. It is a
Confirm installed lighting meets specification and performance creative requirement for the lighting designer and architect to identify which
Discuss with design team and end users overall scheme and visual effects vertical areas require attention as often vertical illuminance has a perceived
Record lessons learnt for best practice greater effect than horizontal illuminance. Ensuring ambience, character, image,
spectacle and accessibility are created and maintained is key to this success
3.11.8 Lighting Standards internally and externally.
The lighting designer should achieve an appropriate balance between regulatory
The lighting designer will follow the codes laid out within the references to the criteria and creative input based on the specific requirements of the formulated
Saudi Aramco engineering standards below: and within Saudi Aramco Engineering brief.
Standard document (SAES) SAES P-123
Amenity
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America The right quality of light should be provided with a suitable aesthetic.
IESNA Lighting Handbook Artificial lighting allows us to see the environment around us in times of darkness.
IESNA LEM-3 Design Considerations for Effective Building The right level of light needs to be achieved to allow us to use spaces effectively.
Lighting Energy Utilization This should not be done in isolation but should encompass the areas around and
IESNA LM-5 Guide for Photometric Measurements of Area and the greater environment, moving from one space to another, needs to be visually
Sports Lighting Installations comfortable and stimulating.
IESNA LM-64 Guide for Photometric Measurements of Parking The lighting design should avoid areas passing from one extreme of brightness to a
IESNA RP-1 Practice for Office Lighting lower level, the eye finds differential levels of light uncomfortable and adjust slowly
IESNA RP-7 Practice for Industrial Lighting to them. In practice the eye can adjust to levels in the region of 100,000 lux to
IESNA RP-8 Practice for Roadway Lighting levels as low as ½ lux, however this takes time. An effort should be made to
IESNA RP-16 Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating control and the environment to allow the eye to adjust to different levels.
IESNA RP-20 Lighting for Parking Facilities Particular attention should be placed on the entrance and exit areas and the
IESNA RP-24 Practice for Lighting Offices Containing circulation spaces leading to them.
Computer Visual Display Terminals The light should be of an appropriate quality to determine texture and contrast
IESNA RR-96 Lighting Ready Reference / Energy Management varieties, in particular the colour rendering ability of the source should allow
colours to be rendered effectively. Sources should have a correlated CRI (Colour
See Appendix for IESNA lighting Reference and Application guides. Ninth Edition Rendering Index) of 85 or greater. Where particular areas require the very best
exert. CRI tungsten sources should be used. This may be of particular note in the
Museum and Archive Library spaces.
Ambience Buildability
The visual aesthetic should have meaning and character. The lighting designer must ensure their proposals remain practical and access to
Ambience is the delivery of a character full environment and light is major luminaires can be achieved without risk or excessive burden. The lighting designer
contributory factor in this. We gain the ability to move within a space using light will undertake NO responsibility or liability for any associated activity but will use
but the method should provoke sensory response and enjoyment. The senses may this logic in the spirit of best practice.
need to helped with visual stimuli and correlating colour temperature in tune with
an external environment is an appropriate way of delivering this, the Diurnal cycle Maintenance
promotes natural responses from the simulation of coloured and dynamically The lighting scheme must address overall maintainability. Lamp life should be
changing light mimicking the change in daylight qualities during a 24 hour cycle. investigated and appropriate sources used particularly at high level. Where custom
This may be of particular benefit where exposure to natural light is at a minimum. detail or particularly low profile and small fittings are used lamp replacement and
the practicality of lamp replacement must be considered. Maintenance concerns
Legibility must also address the fixture and potential gear failings, items must be accessible
The form of space needs to be revealed by the artificial lighting scheme this should at any level. As Built drawings for each area should be formulated along with a
be done in such a way as to promote the identity of the building and it’s specification of lamps to assist the re-lamping programme.
architecture. Vertical and horizontal surfaces should be lit appropriately to deliver
this. Environmental impacts
Measures to negate any adverse environmental impact must be put in place as a
Accessibility measure of good practice.
Lighting must address the requirements of people with special accessibility needs. Sky glow and light pollution should be addressed through luminaire selection and
An access consultant should be addressed for a full breakdown of these needs and location and appropriate measures taken to negate this adverse effect. Where any
the lighting scheme adapted to offer these provisions. effects introduce purposeful light spill (search light effects etc) their operation
must be minimised and energy savings during operation elsewhere in the building
Safety should be sought.
The lighting design must allow the safe movement of people from one end of the Sky glow shall not exceed the figures detailed in the Saudi Aramco standards
site to another and from space to space. Lighting levels should never fall below a documentation as the area is in a particularly low district brightness.
level which inhibits the use of an area in the hours of darkness, utmost attention
should be given to visual comfort influencing the feeling of security. Energy Consumption
The lighting designer must undertake responsible measures to ensure energy used
Security is not excessive and can be properly maintained. The use of high efficacy sources
The lighting scheme should take into account the security lighting provisions for should receive the utmost focus at all times and lower efficacy sources must only
CCTV and follow the Saudi Aramco code for these areas. Lumen depreciation and be used where absolutely necessary. Systems should be linked in an appropriate
calculated degradation of luminaire efficiency should be considered and such architectural dimming system programmed to monitor daylight entry and dim the
allowances designed into the scheme, particularly where light levels are operating light fittings accordingly.
closely to the minimum levels in which the systems can function. Energy losses through old technology gears and poorer quality lamps should be
eradicated. Only modern electronic high frequency gears or only selected low loss
Cost magnetic gears should be used. The use or certain light sources is completely
The lighting design will deliver a scheme which meets the brief and is cost prohibited, see definitions of sources.
effective. The delivery of quality is key and of paramount importance, the lighting
design should seek to deliver all aspects of the brief and good practice and 3.11.10 Landscape and Building Façade
represent value for money. Whole life costs should be considered especially where
the future replacement on LED and Cold Cathode sources in considered. The building façade and landscape lighting will be the first element of spectacle
visitors will experience during the hours of darkness, the reflected light arriving to
the retina will reveal the architecture and lighting effects to the mind. It is as much
a means of revealing form as it is a method of communication, the lighting should
support and communicate the design intentions instilled by the architect and
lighting designer.
Approach Road and Roadways

The experience should begin at the start of the journey – the approach to the
building. We have an opportunity to make this more than a road and pedestrian
route, we can deliver the start of this special experience at ground level. The
roadway lighting should be subtle and conform to regulations, we should use high
colour rendering sources such as Ceramic Discharge Metal halide or LED, in spirit
with the modernity of the building the source should be modern and efficient and
have an identity. Emphasise should be given to energy efficiency and
We-Ef OLC range Siteco Cobra High CRi Source road lighting
maintainability, the solution should be suitable for long term effective use.
New developments have resulted in viable solid state lighting options in street
lighting equipment. LED sources can now deliver 100 lumens per watt or more in a
long life (50,000 hours +) package. Efficacy ratings are higher than CDM-T
technologies and similar or better than Sodium sources. White light LEDS (4000-
6500K) offer a high associated colour rendering ability by nature.
It is possible to save more energy using an LED based scheme, these luminaires
can be linked to a photocell which can activate active dimming in response to
changing light levels at dusk and dawn. Further too, luminaires can reduce their
operating light levels to a standby level suitable for pedestrian use if road traffic is
not present; fittings would instantly increase their output to the required level as a
car approaches. This system could be effectively managed from most Building
Management Automation systems.
Enforcing Identity
The use of a custom made column will help to reinforce the identity of the site and
a cranked structure could be employed to envelop the sweeping curve of the road
and the similar organic shapes of the building, certain manufacturers are able to
The main avenue and approach roads/paths should celebrate the experience and crank/bend columns to facilitate this aesthetic. Immediately upon approaching the
reflect the architecture, the road lighting should be appropriate to the task and site the functional lighting enforces the speciality and spectacle ahead
meet the relevant Aramco standards, to enforce the graphic identity of the building
and the significance of the project the road lighting equipment should reflect this
by supporting a modern aesthetic
Where appropriate lighting should be at low level and subtle, levels should reflect
the use of higher quality white light offering lower light levels for higher visual
acuity.
Architectural detailing of lighting into street furniture and sculptural elements will
help keep the landscape free of too many foreign objects and cement the lighting
concept into the architectural scheme, an effort should be made in the
development of street furniture to allow for integral lighting.
Cranked columns in Cor-ten steel, offer unique identity opertunities
Public Paths
The journey through the landscape environment should similarly support the
building aesthetic and concepts. Large expanses of open ground are often difficult
to light effectively and very energy demanding, often an appropriate way to deal
with such areas is to concentrate areas of lighting to routes and paths – building a
sense of intimacy through local low level lighting while maintaining views out
across any expanses of ground and not interrupting vistas. Flat glass and indirect
shielded optics offer efficiency where the preservations of night time views and
uninterrupted vistas are concerned
Integral illumination to street furniture and architectural elements
Oasis
At night the Oasis should reflect the speciality of this natural occurrence, subtle
lighting to emphasise the richness of the area will help reinforce the bridge
between man-made structures and nature. Warm colour temperatures should be
Wide Warm white light output Erco Panorama bollard with indirect
used to help foliage and plant matter look at their best in what will normally be an
optic
inhospitable climate cycle. Fittings should be discreetly mounted to preserve a
natural look to the area and a timeless atmosphere. Colour change should be
Feature Landscape Lighting
avoided to help reinforce the connection with nature. Overall the look should focus
Objects within the landscape need to be considered within the cohesive strategy, it
on simplicity and sympathy.
may not be economical to light all objects but the emphasis should be focused
towards maintaining vistas and not interrupting views with lit structures or objects.
Again, where possible fittings should be detailed in to fixed elements such as
furniture and particularly low level path lighting luminaires should be used to help
way find and navigate the space in the hours of darkness, vertical bollards if used
should discrete and use natural materials to help them blend into the landscape.
Subtly up lit trees and internally lit trees
Building Identity – Façade

The night time identity of the building is based upon dynamic effects emanating
from the façade mesh, the system will be flexible allowing the identity to change
Animated strips of addressable LED nodes broadcasting flexible media
within the context of building and interact with special occasions and times of the
The system will be flexible enough to allow custom animated paths or simply raw
year. It is proposed to detail dynamic addressable modules into the façade mesh in
Digital Video footage to be broadcast on the external envelope; this will be made
order to create strips of responsive dynamic “media wall”.
of individually addressable LED nodes on a ribbon wire system. Particular attention
will be paid to the general specification of the equipment to ensure it is robust
enough to withstand the daily rigours of the climate and the contraction and
expansion of the metallic materials it is mounted to.
DV footage broadcast on media façade and detail of similar system

Each LED node will be fixed to point within the metallic mesh, with supporting gear
and electrical connections being fixed behind the mesh, this will allow complete
flexibility to follow the curves of the building façade; a linear system would be too
restrictive with a building of this shape.
GKD metallic mesh concept with iColor Flex SL nodes fixed at a predetermined
spacing.
Flexibility
The system can work with several different sources and is not complicated to Numerous effects can be achieved and programmed. A user friendly front end
operate. A front end computer would be used to accept feeds from the following allows effortless reprogramming and adaptability at short notice and without
sources: specialist programmers.
Digital Video - DV or direct from a DVD
Adobe Flash animation LED Sources.
JPEG, TIFF pictures (static or using built-in software to blend between images) By using LED sources we can ensure the system is maintainable. Each node (50
RS232 signal converted to DMX – digital barometer, building capacity monitor, nodes per flexible ribbon) has an approximated life of 75,000 hours and is
astronomic time clock etc… designed for use in higher than normal ambient temperatures. Similar systems
have been installed in projects in the Middle East and have proved to be reliable.
By nature of the modularity of the system, each component could be replaced
upon failure and inline failures will not affect other fixtures on the same circuit or
Ethernet channel.
provides a smooth transition when entering the site and gives visitors a clear
direction of where they should go.
The use of coloured lighting is limited to specific areas, such as the Tickets and
Info area (main entrance) and Café area (plaza), to create interest and dynamism.
It is assumed the coloured lighting will be limited to effect lighting built into certain
elements of street furniture. It will not conflict with the general ambience of cool
white lighting and will simply act as a visual focal point for specific areas. Colours
should be cool and dynamic.
The areas determined by colour temperature are:

3000k- outdoor entrance
4000k- outside of main gate, inter space (general lighting of main entrance, plaza)
Coloured- Tickets and Info area, café area
It is envisaged that in general internal lighting employ the similar colour
temperature of 4200k
System diagram of wiring and control logic
3.11.11 Entrance, Plaza and Public Areas
Guidance
The main entrance is singularly one of the most important areas in the project, it is
the transition point from the exterior environment to the interior experience, it is a
sensory experience and visually rich.
The journey from the external environment to the internal environment should be
carefully considered as a subtle transition mindful of visual comfort and apparent
atmospheric comfort.
The use of different colour temperatures of lamps within the main entrance and
plaza creates a visual hierarchy, responding to its local context and brings out the
different character and ambience of proposed areas.
The use of warm white colour temperature with high colour rendering rate in the
outdoor entrance area provides a distinct vision of a pedestrian gateway. The
warm white colour temperature reflects the hot climate in Saudi Arabia and General zoning of Entrance area and public (plaza) areas
textures are displayed clearly with high colour rendering lamps.
The use of a cool white colour temperature with high colour rendering rate in the Entrance Features
outer main gate provides a strong contrast between internal (cool) and external The illumination of the Entrance Water Wall will provide animated vertical
(warm) spaces. The purpose of this contrast is to attract people into a ‘cool’ place illumination creating visual interest; this would be delivered by using ground burial
from a hot climate. The similar colour temperature to the corridor in this area up lights grazing the feature. Employing warm white 35/70W Metal Halide CDMT
lamps (3000k). Warm White light has a good colour rendering ability and will
reveal the texture of the wall using the correct lamp/reflector combination. The
fixture will be focused towards the wall and should be louvered to eliminate visual
distraction, light pollution and light trespass.
Artificially warm white light up lighting wall at regular intervals
Entrance Gateway
The lighting of main gateway provides an opportunity for highlighting entrance of
building. Lighting needs to provide clear articulation of the gateway without
becoming a visually dominant component of the after-dark environment. The
visually noticeable difference in colour temperature (warm white light to cool white
light) will entice people into the space as it will promote an atmosphere of haven
and comfort.
This particular water feature will be lit in such a way as to animate the moving
water with light, the rippling water will cascade over the light and create inter
reflection and diffraction on the surfaces near by. This effect will bolster the
dynamically changing façade treatments detailed in the Façade chapter.
Entrance Gateways at the ends of the site

The journey should also be visually comfortable allowing time for the eye to adjust
Architects concept image showing the water feature and possible effect created by from the high lux levels associated with a summer sun in Saudi Arabia, these levels
point source up lighting. The texture becomes particularly evident when the – measured in thousands of lux will need to be slowly balanced against internal
luminaire is close to the target surface. levels to allow the eye time to adjust to the contrast. Levels under the canopy
should be moderately high slowly dropping through the portico to a maintained
level in the plaza area. The transition should be as smooth as possible with areas
of darkness eradicated and contrast levels reduced to “smooth” the appearance
out. The effect should be one of a gentle gradient of light form entrance to the
internal environment.
Architects concept image showing vertically trained grass and sculptural makeup of
wall
The architectural concept image shows the entrance being in shadow; however this Orientation and ticketing area
may be too harsh a contrast for young and older eyes to cope with. It need not be colour changing but should evoke sensory stimulation and
enjoyment. It could take many forms but LED media wall offer s flexibility and
creates a definite feel of spectacle to the area. The flexibility is further increased by
nature of the broadcasting ability of the media wall to adapt to ever changing
patterns, text and video. This concept offers further continuity with the points of
light and media systems proposed for the façade.
In essence the entrance gateways should be brightly lit with the transition to a
darker cooler environment taking place internally within a controllable
environment.
Varying backdrops to the orientation area employing LED media equipment
Ticket Area and Visitor Orientation Areas
The illumination of this area needs to be inviting, it should be distinguishable from Corridor
the surrounding circulation areas by glowing in a warm light, this will contrast The illumination of the corridor will provide a safe, secure and positive environment
effectively against the back drop of cooler light to be experienced in this area. in which to guide visitors directly into the main Plaza.
Dynamic colourful lighting can further add interest and draw the visitor’s attention The lighting concept requires to build a colour temperature contrast between the
to this area. Tickets and Information area (warm) and it’s surroundings (cool). The purpose of
this contrast is to distinguish the different functions taking place in these zones -
within the same volume.
cycle is natural sensory evoking activity. This effect could be recreated in the hours
of darkness by adapting the shafts to include white light colour temperature in
response to mimicking the diurnal cycle.
Corridor spaces marked in blue
Architects concept image showing daylight shafts
Concept images show the regular ray of lighting in corridor providing a clear Natural and artificial skylights, colour temperatures mimicking the cooler qualities
direction to visitors. of daylight in the late afternoon – approx 4000 -6500K
Plaza Light Pipe

The Plaza, although effectively subterranean retains it’s link to the outside world Light Pipe offers distinct advantages to illuminaite the subterrainian environment
and environment through shafts of daylight permeating into the space, this natural during the day, it offers a true alternative to artifical electric light. By nature the
and ever changing light comforts the user and reaffirms the natural link. system channels light down a reflective pipe into the target area. It employs a
curved dome to help collect the light in the external environemnt form all possible
sun angles. Particualr benefits include a direct energy saving from the alternative
use of electric light however the illumination of the space relies on approraite
amounts of sun light being avaiblle . Although this should not be a problem in the
Saudi Arabian climate an alternative source should be detailed into the pipe as a
standby system for passing cloud during the day and also to help recreate the
efect at night.
Plaza zone
As the day cycle passes each shaft of light changes with the suns path, intensities
change as does the colour temperature of the light. This cycle, called the Diurnal
Approximation of system components
Conceptual system detailing a light source within the daylight capturing light pipes.
Pictures do not show the right type of equipment, they merely detail the concept.
Daylight Handling
In order to control the daylight entry to the Plaza area a dedicated system for
controlling daylight is required, daylight can be harsh and create unwanted
contrast and excessive amounts of light and heat gain.. The Barajas project
(Madrid airport) provides a good example of using a daylight (sun) reflector to
control daylight; the Toyonokuni libraries (Oita, Japan) employs a curved ceiling
plane to smooth the transition of daylight into the space, these systems condition
the daylight by reflecting some (or diffusing) light onto the ceiling to eliminate
harsh contrast between the actual aperture and the normally silhouetted ceiling
Light Pipe systems to different forms, they can be exposed or entirely hidden with plane.
just simple ceiling apertures left visible.
In order to achieve a day lit space, it is worth considering the performance of the
light pipe system, light pipe can make ceilings dark by nature of heightening
contrast by appearing very bright in the ceiling and not reflecting enough light
back onto the underside of the ceiling. A reflector system should be considered to
work in tandem with the light pipe and reflect some of the light back on to the
ceiling plane. The daylight factor will increase and the appearance of the space will
be more comfortable.
Artificial light within the Light Pipe System The Toyonokuni library building, North elevation view (light tube on the top)
In order to maintain the holistic approach used for day lighting the concept uses a
similar effect for illumination in the evening (or when levels fall below a
predetermined level). The light pipe structure would be detailed to accept an
artificial source such as a metal halide projector, the activation of this source would
be controlled by a comprehensive lighting control system capable of monitoring
day light lux levels. The source would use a cool colour temperature lamp and
behave in much the same way as the day light entering the space would in mid
afternoon – although not necessarily to such a high level. This source would sit
behind the ceiling plane and behind the
Ambient Light
There will have to be a fairly high and even level of illumination throughout the
library. However to create visual interest and avoid the space appearing ‘too flat’ it
is important to vary light levels, increasing them locally where required and
emphasising or accentuating areas of architectural interest.
One way to achieve an even level of ambient base illumination would be to have a
grid of down lighters throughout the library. These should be specified to have a
low glare optic and have a high cut-off angle to allow them to blend into the
architecture as much as possible and make them ‘visually’ fade into the
background. The fittings should be dimmable to allow for light levels to be adjusted
during the day and maximise lamp life as much as possible. To keep energy
consumption down the use of compact fluorescent lamps should be considered.
Curved ceiling with light entering through Light Pipe. Illuminated ceiling place
A different approach might consist of using the luminaires as a tool to create visual
reducing contrast between internal and external environments.
interest on the ceiling planes. The down lighters could for example be arranged in
a way to create random or regular patterns across the ceiling thereby being honest
about their existence rather than making them visually disappear. In this instance
the patterns created should relate as much as possible to the architecture of the
space, for example the fittings could be radiating outwards from the central
skylight or relate to the ceiling panel grid if appropriate. It is important to ensure
that light levels remain acceptable and a reasonably even illumination is achieved.
Further, the ceiling might be illuminated by means of integral sections of
translucent materials such as glass, acrylic or Barrisol that are backlit. The
geometry of this should again relate to the architecture, while making sure the
required light levels on the working surfaces remain acceptable.
Barajas Airport (Madrid) day light handling system, louvers control light entering
space and direct light on to the ceiling plane to increase the day lit effect
3.11.12 Library
The current library design allows for a reasonable amount of daylight entering the
space through a central skylight as well as a series of circular apertures in both
wall and ceiling planes. While natural daylight will help general light levels and
enhance the feel of the space, it will require some form of diffusion or control
which can be varied and adjusted throughout the day. To make the space appear
more uniform and avoid any sharp contrasts the natural daylight will need to be
complemented and supplemented with artificial light. A flexible control system
should be applied to adjust ambient light levels depending on the season, the time Section showing artificial skylight effects distributed throughout building skin,
of day and the general light levels. Any sharp contrasts in light levels should be general wash light emanating from specialised ceiling detail ad architectural up
avoided and be balanced out sufficiently as they can cause glare and discomfort. lighting and effect lighting of core and escalator area. In all, the systems will
Localised task lighting should be applied where higher light levels are required such provide surface wash lighting and enforce the architectural identity of the space.
as around the book cases or in areas that are allocated for reading. Bookcases will be internally lit to allow for a mix of light levels. Users will be able
to select books in a high level and move through a zone of a lower more subtle
level to a reading area which supports the levels appropriate to the task. In the
back ground the architectural lighting will provide a subtle a tasteful backdrop in
which to relax and read.
Barrisol stretched ceiling elements can be sculpturally arranged to support the
concept of artificial sky lights, this purpose made membrane is stretched out over
an invisible frame work and backlit accordingly. The resulting effect is a continuous
glowing ceiling plane which follows the architecture and offers a link to the outside
world.
Barrisol can offer direct soft lighting with the correct type of light source used
behind it, the demountable panel system offers easier access to lamps for
maintenance than previous earlier systems.
Artificial skylight effects systems using Barrisol stretched membrane ceiling

systems.
Lighting to reinforce architecture

The system uses an aluminium light weight frame to stretch the membrane taught. The wall and ceiling surfaces of what’s referred to as the Pebble Wall are punctured
Membranes offer thermal and acoustic benefits in certain environments and the with a random pattern of circular apertures to allow natural daylight into the space.
acoustic benefits may lend themselves to the library environment. To balance this natural light, as well as to carry the effect through to the hours of
low daylight levels or even into the hours of darkness, it is proposed to mimic
these apertures with artificial light.
Careful consideration has to be given to the maintenance aspect of this as some of
these luminaires will potentially be very difficult to access. The fittings integral to
the vertical/wall surfaces will not be required to provide any downward light and
could therefore be considered to be effect lighting only. The use of LEDs, which are
very low in maintenance, might therefore be appropriate in these locations. While
the ceiling integral luminaires should also be low maintenance, they will be qualities. This would contrast with certain approaches to light warmer materials
required to provide some illumination to the floor areas below. Due to their varying and finishes such as timber with warmer colour temperatures of light.
mounting heights fittings that utilise metal halide lamps should be considered for
these locations. Task Lighting
The book cases as well as the areas allocated for reading will require higher light
levels and fairly even, low contrast illumination to improve visual performance. To
achieve this it is proposed to have some form of lighting integrated into the book
cases and the loose furniture in order to boost light levels locally and where
required. Further too, the use of free-standing luminaires or task lights might need
to be considered where appropriate.
Mixed diameters of artificial apertures and day lit apertures
Internal lighting systems to bookcase structure, Book spines washed with

appropriate amount of light and warmer colour temperatures to bolster perceived
colour and the richness of the space. This will contrast with the colour sources
being used to simulate day light entering the space from skylight apertures and
artificial apertures.
Artificial apertures would use circular or compact fluorescent sources to replicate

natural daylight openings. Cooler colour temperatures would be used to simulate
the qualities of day light and enforce a cooler environment in terms of visual
Images of two auditoria detailing vertical illuminance of walls and vertical
structures, focused down lights provide satisfactory light levels on the floor. The
Bookcases illuminated with luminaires fixed directly to structure, reading desks
theatrical lighting is largely out of view and this helps reinforce architectural
with individual controllable task lighting.
splendour of such spaces.
Seat and Passageways

The lighting in the auditorium address the different room surfaces, which are
coloured, and absorb, reflect or transform light. The illuminated surrounding the
balconies that provide warm, pleasant light. It is composed by general lighting on
the top of seats area, seats linear strip light and the track of spotlights at the
passage way.
On the top of seats provide the general lighting which dim during the show. The
general lighting is used before and after the performance and during the intervals.
Illumination should be provided for each seat row and a linear LED system could be
mounted underneath the seating behind each row to cast light onto the floor
Bespoke fixtures for reading stations and desk areas allow for localised areas of surface. Keeping this lighting below eye level but directed onto the surface where it
appropriate light which allowing lesser areas of circulation to be lit to a lower level. is needed will help reduce visual clutter and nuisance light. A dedicated system of
This will emphasise the bookcases and reading areas as being zones of importance. lighting seat rows could also be considered, this will allow ambient levels of light to
be slightly lower and more intimate. Focus will be directed towards the
3.11.13 Auditorium architectural features without the base lighting adding distraction.
The Auditorium requires dedicated lighting to suit the function and lighting to suit
the architectural form, although not in detailed design currently the following
chapter provides some comments on good practice and approaches.
Much like the Great Hall lighting will be integrated into the architectural ceiling
detail, it will have several different functions, it should illuminate and be
sympathetic to the architecture and provide useable light to allow people to find
their seats and use the space during features. The lighting therefore should be
dimmable to facilitate low levels of lighting in certain lighting states.
Circulatory lighting and dedicated seat lighting built into furniture

A certain amount of maintained lighting should be available at foot level to ceiling will provide this light and can also be used to contribute towards the stage
maintain a level of comfort – particularly for those seated deeply within each row. lighting.
Moving from one end of a row to another in darkness can be quite a daunting task Control of the architectural lighting should be handled by the architectural dimmers
for some and the lighting scheme should facilitate the ease of use of this area. and stage lighting from dedicated theatrical equipment. However, the architectural
dimmers should be capable of receiving RS232 commands from the theatrical
board to gain control from ONE location during performances and general use.
Delineation of changes of level is an important feature for this space
Vertical treatments
In keeping with the vertical illumination systems proposed for the façade and
library areas a vertical matrix of LED could be integrated into some of the
auditorium surfaces, it would provide spectacle which is directly related to the
architecture and a visual marker for the eye (in darkness during shows) which
would not compete against the focal point – the stage.
Other vertical treatments should respond to the architecture and where possible be
detailed into concealable zones. Vertical illuminance helps a large area feel brighter Recessed ceiling fixtures providing vertical and horizontal illuminance detailed into
than it may actually be. ceiling plane discreetly.
Reducing Glare
As mentioned in the opening Plaza chapters, glare in low light levels can create
unwanted contrast between high and low levels of light, the effect being a
reduction of perceived brightness to areas of light that happen to be lower (1:3
ratio or lower) than the surrounding environment. To reduce this reflector design
should be efficient and double focus shielding should be employed for all high level
high power sources.
End refracting fibre optics or LED can be employed to create a sparkling blanket on
the vertical surfaces
Stage Apron
The main focus of the entire Auditorium is the stage; it should be the focal point of
all lighting scenes and should be bright and stand out against the more subtle
architectural treatments elsewhere in the space. Lighting should be concentrated
on the apron area and back wall, recessed down lights discreetly mounted in the
irregular spacings yet retain flexibility. Certain ceiling panels may require
architectural illumination too and certain systems will be required to back light
panels.
The ceiling panels can be adapted to house light fixtures and mechanical serving,
gaps within the ceiling panels could be used to hide retractable lighting bar for
further expansion and support theatrical effect lighting.
Effect Lighting
To complement ambient light levels, accent areas of architectural interest and add
drama, theatre projectors located above the ceiling plane might be focused
through gaps between the ceiling panels. It could be considered to design the
ceiling panelling as a kind of 3 dimensional relief, made up of geometric shapes of
Double focus technology for high level lighting will reduce glare and increase visual different sizes, materials or textures and mounted at various heights.
comfort. Alternatively a series of slots or cut-outs of various shapes and sizes could be
detailed into the ceiling plane to allow for projector fittings to be suspended in
3.11.14 Great Hall these locations as and when required. The number of cut-outs as well as their
location and size will need to be carefully considered in order to allow for maximum
The Great Hall has been designed as one open plan area which is to be used for a flexibility.
variety of different functions such as exhibitions, presentations, concerts and
banquets. To cater for such a variety of different uses the lighting design requires
to be highly flexible as each requires quite a different approach. The lighting
approach needs to reflect the splendour in the architecture and be adaptable to
support creative uses and tasteful to reflect the grandeur of certain occasions.
General Light
To provide a general level of ambient light it is proposed to have a minimum
amount of fixed down lighting integral with the ceiling plane. The down lighting
needs to be dimmable, preferably with each luminaire being addressable
individually for maximum flexibility. Failing that the luminaires should be grouped
into a number of logical zones to allow for the Great Hall to be separated off into
different areas depending on how the space is being used at the time. Due to the Slots cut into the new Scottish Parliament project meeting rooms house retractable
great mounting heights it is proposed to specify luminaires that can be maintained projectors
from an access area above the ceiling plane.
Temporary Event Lighting
For functions such as concerts or presentations the lighting will require to be highly
flexible and quite possibly animated. To achieve this it is proposed to have a
flexible theatre-type rigging system that can be suspended through gaps between
the ceiling panels or attached within cut-outs in the ceiling plane. The suspended
trusses would support and provide power to theatre projectors or track luminaires.
This system could also be used to suspend objects or banners from depending on
the occasion.
Ceiling recessed projectors should be discrete and maintainable from the service
void, the ceiling may not be regular and the lighting may need to respond to
proposed to light the access area above the suspended ceiling panels in a strong
colour that would bleed out between the gaps.
Light emanating from gaps within the ceiling. Colour should be muted an in
keeping with the setting.
Scene setting within the Great Hall

Demountable and retractable trusses being used for a large scale event. Trusses
housed in faceted ceiling
Exhibition Lighting
For temporary exhibitions it will be required to have a combination of spot lighting
as well as localised lighting integral to display cases or attached to partitioning. As
mentioned previously a suspendable truss system would provide a large degree of
flexibility with this. To facilitate low level lighting a generous arrangement of floor
recessed power outlets is a necessity. High level area illumination from down lights within the ceiling structure. Wall wash
to Mezzanine level
Task Lighting from high level with Wall Wash to Mezzanine Level
Effect Lighting
As well as the functional lighting it is proposed to have an amount of effect lighting
for additional interest as well as to enhance the architecture of the space. It is
Best practice dictates therefore any object should be lit accordingly, this may or
may not have a bearing on the actual light level (in lux) but ought to steer the
lighting designer to use lower UV output sources and limit unnecessary exposure to
daylight.
Retractable trusses lowered for banquet or presentation purposes, high level area
illumination maintained
Modern Museum Spaces of large internal volume lit from high level
UV Control
The architecture of the SACC responds to being lit with daylight when available and
it is important to retain this light source as a means of naturally illuminating the
shapes and forms of the interior spaces; however this can still be achieved while
Retractable trusses lowered for exhibition lighting purposes, 50 lux average reducing the UV through put of the glass with and appropriate specification. It may
maintained and point sources focused on exhibits also be beneficial to use a neutral density specification to limit the actual amount
of daylight entering the space without altering the feel of a day lit environment.
3.11.15 Museum & Exhibition Spaces During the day light levels can switch between many thousands of lux without the
eye detecting any apparent change. The eye sees brightness as a relative
In many respects the illumination of a museum can be a tricky prospect, objects environment and this supports daylight control.
require to be cared for and visible to the visiting public and in many respects this Architectural features such as the mesh will have a bearing on the daylight
can be a contradictory exercise. entering the space, this coupled with an appropriate level of glazing will help
alleviate excessive UV exposure however a quantitive survey and simulation should
Form and function be carried out to determine the quantity of UV exposure these areas are exposed
Items are required to stand out and this promotes the need for higher levels of to, this coupled with input of the exhibition designer will determine what measures,
illumination compared to any background level. The eye resolves contrast (light if any need to be taken to avoid any potential degradation.
and dark) at a ration close to three to one. Therefore, illuminating an object either
requires a substantial level of light or a lower background level in order to achieve
a layered separation. In the museum environment the former takes precedence
where conservation object are found and the lighting designer must select an
appropriate range of equipment to resolve this object. So the process involved
becomes a balancing act formed around the exhibits needs.
A great deal of damage can be done to an object with excess light and consequent
UV exposure, some object in the SACC will not be regarded as conservation
objects, they may be of new origin or a robust material. However, it is worth
asking the question, “will it become (eventually) a conservation classed object?”
Textiles lit to 50 lux but not isolated from a light back ground, objects look dull and
lack contrast. Objects lit to 50 lux but isolated from surrounded light levels take on
a different appearance.
Display cases and glare

We anticipate glare will become a problem where exhibits are housed in display
cases. The illumination of cases is best handled internally however this is not
always possible due to limitations of scale and internal air environment limitations.
The surrounding architecture, in particular the ceilings should be up lit evenly to
help provide an even wash of light on all surfaces, this is best done using
continuous runs of fixtures. This suits in particular 2d objects in cases and cases
with a box like construction, cases formed with angles side panels tend to act as
mirrors, reflecting images of sources hidden in the ceiling or wall back to the Flat wash and side light approaches for sculpture, systems should be flexible to
viewer. adapt to different exhibits
Light quality
Museums exhibit a rich variety of objects and in many cases each object is a visual
feast of detail, colour and shape. We are entirely dependant on light as it is the
means to reveal visual detail. Being mindful of the fact the eye does not respond
well to colour differences under 50 lux the best possible colour rendering light
source should be used on conservation type objects. Tungsten Halogen lamps offer
the highest CRi (Colour Rendering Index) available in an artificial and affordable
source however the trade off is their relative efficacy of only producing 10-18 lamp
lumens per lamp watt. Tungsten halogen reflector lamps last typically between
2002-3000 hours however, they are best dimmed to 90% operating voltage, this
prolongs the life of the filament and enables lamp life to be increased. Dimming to
90% will often nearly double lamp life.
Effective display case illumination using fibre optic harnesses Metal Halide and Fluorescent sources are also used increasingly in Museum spaces
but are limited to certain applications:
3d Objects Metal Halide has certain qualities best suited for wall washing and projection. The
3d objects are not suited to this approach and more dramatic effects are often small point source allows for very accurate reflectors with precise beam control, it
called for, in this case theatrical equipment or architectural equipment of a is particularly suited to creating drama and areas of increased contrast for non
theatrical nature are often applied to give the object relief and form. The approach conservation sculpture and larger industrial objects. The CRi is relatively high (80-
is dictated by the status of the object and almost any source providing a focused 85) for a 4000K lamp but a weighting of colour response is present where different
beam of light is suitable where the object is not considered to be a conservation lamp colour temperatures are concerned. This is partly because of an imbalanced
concern. However where the durability of the object is a concern measures to spectral output favouring wither Red or Blue ends of the spectrum. It is also
isolate the object from areas of relatively high vertical illuminance must be taken, suitable for maintaining a good quality of wash light an can be sued for wall
the object needs to stand out of lower ambient light in order to reveal form. This washing areas of modern art. Again non conservation standard. Metal Halide
may influence the orientation and zoning of the exhibition plan and/or architectural currently can not be reliably dimmed without serious and negative colour shifting.
features. Metal Halide sources (CDM-T) have a high efficacy figure, typically in the region of
85-95 lamp lumens per lamp watt.
Fluorescent sources are well suited to wash lighting. They provide a soft wash of
high CRi illumination and are easily dimmed without any negative colour shifts.
They are not suited by virtue of being unable to provide a point source of offering
precise beam control. Modern fluorescent sources and gear offer flicker free
operation and long lamp life (10,000 hours +) and instantly restart on switch 3.11.17 Lamp Types and Sources
operation or power failure. As a result they offer a convenient way to allow for
emergency illumination without adding extra sources into a sensitive space. Lamp selection plays an important part in the delivery of a successful scheme,
Fluorescent sources have a high efficacy figure, typically in the region of 85-100 several different technologies of lamp exist with newer technologies on the horizon,
lamp lumens per lamp watt. with that in mind the lighting designer must use the selection responsibly but
creatively. Long life and low energy use should always be goal where selection is
At this juncture it worth noting which methods are appropriate in order to gain concerned however the lighting designer must strive to create the wonder and
control of lighting levels, lamp wattage must be carefully selected to match the spectacle the client and building requires and approach this with a fresh mind with
target object’s needs. There is no point in selected too high a wattage and effect as a primary focus.
assuming the source will still perform satisfactorily when dimmed. Tungsten Where possible and practical sources of high efficacy should be used. Particular
Halogen lighting will alter colour, becoming substantially warmer the lower it is attention should be paid to ongoing maintenance and accessibility as this may
dimmed, this will have an adverse effect on the viewing pleasure of certain objects. influence lamp selection. Visual comfort and acuity should be maintained with
If the selected wattage remains too high, mesh filters or neutral density filters lamps (and luminaires) selected to provide low glare high quality white light,
should be employed to help reduce the intensity without affecting the colour sources of a colour rendering factor greater than 85 are preferential and sources
temperature of the beam. with lower factor should be monitored closely and controlled. The use of sodium
Using this analysis the following summary can be formed and used as an adoptable sources should be avoided in all areas, sodium sources are generally regarded as
approach to the SACC Museum and Gallery spaces. being one of the few sources which can deliver figures of 100 lamp lumens per
watt or greater, however , modern CDM-T Metal halide lamps offer figures close to
92 lamp lumens per watt. Although marginally lower the CDM-T lamp offers the
lighting designer the ability to use a lower wattage of lamp with a better quality of
light.
Summary of lamp technologies and their respective qualities:
Compact Fluorescent
The se lamps provide good quality flicker free light when used with electronic
ballasts. They can be used for general area lighting but are best suited in lower
ceiling heights (3500mm or less). Lamp Colour temperature may vary between
2700 & 4000K depending on application requirements. This source provides a flat
3.11.16 Statutory Levels even light by it’s diffused nature. CFL is not suited to spotlighting. Failure rates are
low with most commercially installed CFL’s operating to a two year maintenance
Lighting calculations strategy. They can be adversely affected by low temperatures, reduced light output
Lighting calculations shall be carried out in strict accordance with the requirements and darkening of the lamp tube may be a problem in colder climates.
of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IESNA Lighting Handbook
Lighting calculations for all areas shall be based on the IESNA lighting codes Linear Fluorescent T5
requirements for the calculation of maintained illuminance. Initial values should be The T5 (also known as T16) fluorescent lamp provides good colour rendering and
modified to account for the following factors: high efficacy. They are suitable for use in many general lighting applications.
• Reflectance values of surfaces Lamps are available with different colour temperatures, typically between 2700
• Task type and duration and 4500K. The light is soft and diffused reducing shadows but creating a ‘flat’ and
• Task importance even light. Mortality rates are good with recommended replacement cycle being
• Lamp output characteristics over time approximately 3 years based on an average operating cycle of 8 hours per day.
• Lamp change period Again, they can be adversely affected by low temperatures, reduced light output
• Cleaning periods. and darkening of the lamp tube may be a problem in colder climates.
local switching will be used in all back of house areas. Advanced scene setting will
Ceramic Arc Metal Halide be used to offer added dynamism to areas and maximum flexibility.
CDM-T are increasingly popular for all areas of building illumination, they have Scene setting will be done in such a way to maximise flexibility and interest, in
become a mainstay for external lighting and the illumination of highs spaces and general though there should be four primary scenes time clocks can operate from.
areas requiring focused bright beams of light. They have a particularly high efficacy • Early Morning
figure for their colour rendering ability (high 80’s). Failure rates are very • Early Afternoon
favourable and they are not adversely affected by low temperatures. They can • Late Afternoon
however be affected by higher temperatures but this is more akin to high IP rated • Dusk/Evening
luminaires being used in high ambient temperatures during the daylit hours. Light Each area should be given at least one user interface from which to recall scenes,
is emitted from the lamp via a small arc tube and it performs well as a point source selected areas will benefit from extra units or tablet control and added scenes. All
in reflectors. Typical maintenance regimes see lamp replacements being carried areas predicted to receive large amounts of continuous daylight should use
out every two years. dimming on compatible loads coupled with photocell control to maintain
appropriate light levels and achieve any possible energy saving. User interfaces
LEDs should be key controlled if located within the public realm or direct view.
These light sources are being increasingly used in a wide range of applications. Presence detection should be used in certain public areas and where appropriate in
Comparatively they use small amounts of energy and require very little back of house areas. Areas should not be left in darkness but a minimum setting
maintenance. Due their relatively low light output they are often limited to should be used and then brought up to full power when the PIR is triggered.
decorative architectural applications and way-finding though new developments Externally the minimum requirement should be photocell control with time clock
are increasingly seeing high output versions providing useable levels of illumination monitoring. Manual override should be possible from the building. Garden areas
that can be employed externally and internally. and feature landscape should be controlled from the architectural dimming system
either with relay control or dimming control where appropriate.
These light sources are widely used in interior and exterior applications. The lamps Dimming of Metal Halide and discharge sources will generally not recommended
have a low profile section and can be shaped onsite by specialist contractors; this unless particularly necessary. Should the need arise the latest technologies will be
makes them ideal for signage and customised architectural details. Light output is investigated and recommendations sought from end users.
relatively low for a standard unit when compared to linear fluorescent lamps. Cold Where DMX, AMX, LoN Works etc are used for specialist control, their supporting
cathode lamps have a very long associated life span, they are testing extensively system must be stand alone and linked back to the lighting control system. The
and hand made, ensuring best possible quality is maintained before leaving the system should be capable of using translated RS232 serial commands and
factory. Cold Cathode lamps generally offer 15 years + duration when operating at prompts. Optical networking of RS232 commands is not recommended.
the standard daily cycle.
All control gear must be checked with the lighting controls manufacturer for
Prohibited Sources compatibility.
The use of the following lamp sources must not be used: Any lighting control system should be checked for future compatibility.
• Induction lighting Manufacturers with modular upgradable systems with a track record of backward
• Conventional metal halide compatible products should receive favourable review.
• High pressure sodium
• Low pressure sodium 3.11.19 General Notes on Specification
• Mercury
• White Sodium General Conditions
3.11.18 Lighting Control Samples and Prototypes

Should a sample of a standard or custom made fixture be requested the
Lighting control from a system separate to the BMS will be used for all front of manufacturer will bill the client or the clients pre-nominated representative as
house of areas, executive areas and areas of primary importance. BMS control or agreed. Returned samples of standard fixtures should be credited however this
must be arranged and agreed upon before any order is placed.
Any luminaire prototypes or proposed variants must be submitted to the lighting Construction Coordinated RCP. The lighting designers drawings must not be used
designer for approval, comment and evaluation. FULL photometric data inc for construction.
software files (LDT, ies or TM14) must also be submitted. Approval can not be
given without accurate data. Control Gear
Only control gear of the manufacturers’ specification or having gained approval by
Standards of Compliance the manufacturer of the lamp and luminaire will be sued. Gears should be of
The lighting design will comply with the codes laid down in the Saudi Armaco modern low loss design and should use electronic HF circuitry. Where magnetic
Cultural Centre document: gears must be used they should be of low loss design with a timed igniter circuit.
SAES-P-123 All control gears used should be fully compatible with the technologies used by the
Conformity to the regulations of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia must be adhered to dimming manufacturer. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure final
at all times by all parties entering into supply agreements on this project. It is the compatibility between manufacturers. The lighting designer will review any
responsibility of the contractor of manufacturers to ensure all relevant compatibility issues prior to installation at the contractor’s request.
conformities are met.
Protection
Manufacturers will be requested to ensure all equipment is suitably packed to avoid UL 48 Electric Signs
damage during delivery. UL 153 Portable Luminaires
Luminaires with vulnerable exposed finished should have protective films applied to UL 496 Edison-Base Lamp holders
ensure they are not damaged during unpacking and installation. Contractors should UL 542 Lamp holders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
use cotton gloves to install luminaires with exposed reflectors and for lamping. This
UL 635 Insulating Bushings (Strain Relief)
will help prolong the lamp life and prevent snagging issues.
UL 676 Underwater Luminaires and Submersible Junction Boxes
Warranties UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
Manufacturers tendering to supply equipment on the SACC project shall agree to UL 935 Fluorescent - Lamp Ballasts Product Categories
provide a warranty of duration, no less than 12 months after practical completion UL
High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts Product Categories
or 18 months after the date of delivery onto site. Contractors must make suppliers 1029
aware of this. UL
Stage and Studio Luminaires and Connector Strips
1573
Technical Requirements UL
Track Lighting Systems
Luminaires and Best Practice 1574
Luminaires and associated equipment specified by the lighting designer will have UL
been selected for performance, suitability, aesthetics and reliability. It should be Luminaires
1598
acknowledged this equipment is deemed to be the most appropriate for the task. UL
Should alternative equipment to be offered full details must be supplied to the Nightlights
1786
lighting designers in time for full review. UL
Any variants of standard luminaires should be manufactured by the original Self-Ballasted Lamps and Lamp Adapters
1993
manufacturer to the same standard as the catalogue product.
UL
Manufactures remain obliged to ensure all products; specials, conversion etc meet Low Level Path Marking and Lighting Systems
1994
all local codes for safety and specification.
If any special luminaires and associated equipment are required, these will be the UL
(Cold Cathode) Neon Transformers and Power Supplies
subject of a separate specification, a copy of which will be enclosed with this 2161
document.
Final luminaire location will only be shown on the Architect’s coordinated RCP.
Drawings supplied by the lighting designers are for use in collating the
3.11.21 Typical Luminaire Types and Associated Equipment
3.12 ENGINEERING DISCUSSION OF REVISED
TOWER CORE
Table of Contents
3.12.1 Introduction
3.12.2 MEP Engineering
3.12.3 Structural Engineering
3.12.4 Fire Engineering
3.12.5 Single Stair Arrangement
3.12.7 Single Stair Arrangement Sketch
3.12.8 MEP Engineering Sketches 1-4

• The proposed core has reduced by approximately a third in length and hence
3.12 Engineering Discussion of Revised Tower Core has a significant reduction in both strength and stiffness of the core. The
revised proposal would not be sufficient on its own without alternative means
of providing stability. This may take the form of reinforced braced bays or
3.12.1 Introduction alternatively considering the external perimeter of the building as a lattice to
form a rigid tube. Forming a rigid tube would form a significant change to the
The following is intended to provide an overview of the implications of the structural principals currently developed and would need detailed co-
proposed revised core within the Tower building. ordination with the architectural envelope to minimise the impact on the
The following is a review of the engineering related aspects. useable floor plate close to facades.
• Mechanical Electrical and Public Health Engineering It is planned to investigate the overall viability of the revised proposals against all
• Structural Engineering considerations in the early stages of detail design.
• Fire Engineering
• Vertical Trasportation 3.12.4 Fire Engineering
Due to programme limitations it has not been possible to develop this proposal Please find attached our over-marked comments on the two Tower options (sketch
fully; however an initial assessment has raised the following issues. no.1 single stair arrangement). The information provided for the single stair
arrangement is similar to that which was submitted to the Loss Prevention and Fire
Prevention Departments of Saudi Aramco for consideration/approval. It should be
3.12.2 MEP Engineering noted that the single stair arrangement will not be formally reviewed, or
commented on by the relevant parties until DD stage. However, initial feedback is
Refer to MEP Sketches positive, as we appear to be showing reasonable justification at this stage – we do
however need to back this up in more detail.
Key issues are the reduction in available usable space in the Technical Floors. The
space available has reduced by approximately 3m across the tower width. 3.12.5 Single Stair Arrangement
Services distribution zone restricted between structural columns and core. This The major item which stands out is the width of the Tower escape stair provided:
may cause difficulties with distribution.
• Currently we estimate that the stair width provided is between 1300 and
Elevator lobby width is very narrow and has reduced from 2.3m on SD scheme. 1500mm (clear width between handrails);
Typically 1.5 x car depth is required but reference should be made to IBC. Space • A 1300mm wide stair can accommodate a total of (1300 / 5.08) 255
for wheelchair turning should be reviewed. occupants;
• A 1500mm wide stair can accommodate a total of (1500 / 5.08) 295
Additional MEP risers are required at rear of core. occupants;
• Based on your total occupancy figure (350, Keystone not included) the Tower
MEP riser requires access, currently not shown on drawing. stair width required (clear width measured between handrails) is (5.08 x
350) 1778mm;
3.12.3 Structural Engineering • If the Tower occupancy is to be more than 350, we need to be quite specific
as to how we calculate this occupancy figure and the clients knows the
During scheme design an alternative core arrangement has been proposed which implications a single stair approach may present (i.e. limit/control occupancy
offers an increase in useable floor area on each level by removing one elevator and within Tower);
one staircase. • There is potentially some scope to devise an evacuation strategy based on
the single stair width you have shown, which will be investigated further
• MEP risers would need to be co-ordinated such that structural floor plates during DD stage (see note 1 below).
connect to the concrete wall elements.
Note 1 (alternative evacuation strategy considerations):
• The Keystone should be fire compartmented/separated from the Tower (and If shaft depth is an issue certain manufacturers sizes are 2500 x 2000 per lift
Library) by 2 hour fire construction (i.e. walls and doors); shaft. So you might need a shaft size of 8000mm x 2000mm overall.
• Each floor of the Tower (and where possible within the Keystone) should be
designed as a 2 hour fire compartment/separating floors; With the new option do we not take away the option to have a lift for stretcher
• Occupant escape from the Tower on levels 3, 4 and 5 also provided via the use? Space for corridor in front of lifts needs to be allowed to meet the IFC and
Keystone to the Library; IBC.
• Voice alarm warning and actions/directions to follow in event of
fire/evacuation; and IBC 2003 states requires that the elevator car accommodate an ambulance
• Phased evacuation considerations (i.e. initially evacuate fire floor and each stretcher and the car shall be sized as a minimum 610 mm by 1930 mm
floor above and below fire floor only, then fully evacuate Tower after a
delayed period) – stair sized to accommodated worst-case scenario (i.e.
restaurant plus gallery and kitchen);
• Assume increased occupancy of: 100 (restaurant) + 150 (gallery/viewing
deck) + 30 (kitchen) = 280 x 5.08 = 1422mm (clear width stair required).
Based on the original occupancies a 3 lift combination to work very efficiently.
Car size needs to be 1250kg with 1100m doors or 1600kg to get average waiting
times around 15sec which is very good.
We would not recommend going to a smaller lift at this time as the figures jump
significantly.
Based on the sketch below the overall shaft size would be 7100mm x 2250mm but
you should try to achieve 7700mm x 2250mm to make sure we get the 1100mm
doors. The shaft size drawn is smaller that this in width and depth.
3.12.7 Single Stair Arrangement (sketch no.1)
3.12.8 MEP Engineering Sketches (sketch no 1)
MEP Engineering Sketches (sketch no 2)
3.13 AUDITORIUM PROPOSED DESIGN CHANGE
Table of Contents
3.13.1 Introduction
3.13.2 Structural Implications

3.13.2.1 Roof Trusses
3.13.2.2 Circle Cantilevers
3.13.2.3 Fly-Tower Steelwork
3.13.2.4 Circulation Areas
3.13.4 Specialist implications

3.13.4.1 Fire
3.13.4.2 Acoustics
3.13 Auditorium Proposed Design Change 3.13.2.3 Fly-Tower Steelwork
The steel trusses supporting the fly-tower roof span from proscenium wall to the
3.13.1 Introduction back of the stage. Hence the increase in stage depth will increase the span of these
trusses.
In order to make the auditorium work better as a theatre it is proposed to shorten
If the length of these trusses increases by 3m this represents 16% increase in
the length of the auditorium whilst widening it.
length. Thus larger steel sections and increased weights will be required. I would
expect a 20% increase in steel weights for this area.
The effect of this proposal will bring more seats closer to the stage and will
increase the effect of the audience being involved with the show.
3.13.2.4 Circulation Areas
This proposal actually does not make the auditorium overall any shorter as the size
The structural stability of the circulation areas relies upon the floor plates acting as
of the stage is to be increased therefore the change in reality moves the
diaphragms transferring the wind loads to stability frames along either side of the
proscenium wall further towards the audience.
auditorium. Where there are no floors we have introduced wind girders.
The proposal is to widen the auditorium by 2m thus allowing an additional row of
It is likely that the floor plates will continue to work as before with no significant
seating along each side
impact upon the structure.
3.13.2 Structural Implications The wind girders are now spanning an increased length and hence will require
larger sections and include more steel. I would estimate an increase in steel
3.13.2.1 Roof Trusses weights of 20%
The upper roof trusses will be increased in span and hence will require larger top The stability frames along either side of the auditorium will now be resisting 2m
and bottom chord sections sizes. Connection forces will be higher necessitating additional width of the structure and hence loads will increase. The net result is
more bolts per connection and potentially thicker welds. I would envisage an that vertical and diagonal members will increase in section size and weight. I would
increase in steel weights of no more than 10%. envisage 25% increase in steel for these elements. This load will be transferred
down to the foundations leading to an increase in the size of the foundations for
The inner roof truss will increase in span by 2m this represents an increase of less the stability frames. Allow for an increase of 25% in the size of the foundations
than 10% however this will increase loads and lead to an increase in the sizes of below the stability frames.
sections required. I would envisage an increase in steel weights of around 10%.
3.13.2.2 Circle Cantilevers

Each of the side spans of the 1st and 2nd Circle cantilevers will increase by
Generally there would be no impact on the services strategy as we are generally
approximately 1m This represents a 25% increase in span from around 3.75m up
supplying from the underside of the galleries above.
to 4.75m. Our structural solution in this area relies upon a flat slab solution where
this is supported by the reinforced concrete auditorium walls. It is unlikely that this
The air conditioning strategy relies upon dumping air from below the circles that
solution will still be applicable and so would envisage a change of design to one
will fall to the stalls. As the circles are increasing in span then the residual area
where we would introduce reinforced concrete ribs as per the cantilevered section
within the auditorium remains unchanged as a result it is unlikely to affect the
at the rear of the auditorium. Hence the effect is to create a more complicated
design.
structure to build that will include additional downstand beams and concrete. My
estimate is a potential doubling of the complexity and volume of these elements.
3.13.4 Specialist Implications
3.13.4.1 Fire
No effects on the fire strategy.
3.13.4.2 Facades
There will be an overall increase in area of the façade equivalent to a 2m width

over the entire cross section.
3.13.4.3 Acoustics
Widening the auditorium will generally be beneficial as at the moment the

auditorium is too long for natural speech. Although it is believed that for most
"natural" speech events it would be unlikely that the theatre would be at full
capacity.
However the auditorium cannot be too wide.
The audience must be within a 140º angle of a speaker. We would also require a
splay at the proscenium rather than a step change so that every audience member
can receive a lateral reflection - though this is of course dependent on the design.
It is clear that the most significant impact of the proposed change of shape of the
auditorium is on the structure.
There is no significant impact upon any other Buro Happold discipline and in fact it
appears that acoustics would prefer the changed shape.
It is our recommendation that we carry out a revised schematic design for the
structure which can then be costed by DLSS however it is believed that whilst the
costs will go up it will be by a small amount and hence as a value engineering
exercise we would recommend that this change be implemented.
Saudi Aramco 2617-ENG (04/2001)
PERIOD ENDING DRAFTING SCHED. END OF LAST PERIOD PROJECT ENG. PLANT NO. BUDGET ITEM WORK ORDER NO. EWO NO. JOB ORDER NO.
DRAFTING OFFICE PROGRESS
DRAWING TO END OF THIS PERIOD
START COMPL DESIGN ENG.
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL SNØHETTA - OSLO 13th JUNE 2008
feb 08 march 09
DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE
WHEN READY FOR CHECKING
STARTING COMPLETION TRANSMITTED

DRAWING SHEET REV.
DATE PERCENT COMPLETE DATE*
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
DRAWING TITLES TO FIELD REMARKS
NUMBER
SCHED. ACTUAL 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 SCHED. ACTUAL SCHED. ACTUAL NO. DATE LETTER DATE
HA-161624 001 00 Tower and keystone plan 00
HA-161624 007 00 Tower and keystone plan 06 - 11
HA-161624 008 00 Tower and keystone plan 12 - 15
HA-161625 001 00 Master section A-A (all items)
HA-161625 002 00 Master section B-B (all items)
HA-161626 001 00 Auditorium section A-A
HA-161626 002 00 Auditorium section B-B
HA-161627 001 00 Great hall section A-A
HA-161627 002 00 Great hall section B-B
HA-161628 001 00 Library section A-A
HA-161628 002 00 Library section B-B
HA-161635 001 00 Elevation south
HA-161635 002 00 Elevation east
HA-161635 003 00 Elevation west
HA-161635 004 00 Elevation north
HA-161636 001 00 Typical section - mesh facade, wall type A with window
HA-161636 002 00 Typical section - mesh facade, wall type A, solid wall
HA-161636 003 00 Typical section - mesh facade, wall type B
HA-161636 004 00 Typical section - plan, pebbel type A
HA-161636 005 00 Typical floor section - pebbel type A
HA-161636 006 00 Typical detail section - scale facade, wall type A
HA-161636 007 00 Detail elevation for mesh and scale facade
HA-161636 008 00 Floor section with scales, tower
HA-161636 009 00 Typical section - scale facade, wall type A, solid wall
NOTES: 1) LIST DRAWINGS BY INDEX IN NUMERICAL ORDER. DRAWING CONTROL FOR DWG TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHEET NO. REV NO.
2) *NORMALLY THE FIELD ETA OF DRAWINGS CAN BE OBTAINED BY
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture - Schematic design 30% ARC N38 R HD- 161614 002 OF 009 V00
ADDING 2 TO 3 WEEKS TO THE SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE ABOVE.
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL SNØHETTA - OSLO 13th JUNE 2008
feb 08 march 09
DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-161614 001 - 009 00 Drawing sheet control (for all the drawings)
HA-161617 001 00 Master plan -03
HA-161617 002 00 Master plan -02
HA-161617 003 00 Master plan -01
HA-161617 004 00 Master plan 00
HA-161617 005 00 Master plan 01
HA-161617 006 00 Master plan 02
HA-161617 007 00 Master plan 03
HA-161617 008 00 Master plan 04
HA-161617 009 00 Master plan 05
HA-161617 010 00 Master plan 06 - 11
HA-161617 011 00 Master plan 12 - 15
HA-161617 012 00 Master roof plan
HA-161618 001 00 Landscape illustration plan
HA-161618 002 00 Landscape technical plan
HA-161619 001 00 Auditorium plan -01
HA-161619 002 00 Auditorium plan 00
HA-161620 001 00 Great hall plan 00
HA-161620 002 00 Great hall plan 01
HA-161621 001 00 Library plan 01
HA-161622 001 00 Museum plan -03
HA-161622 002 00 Museum plan -02
HA-161622 003 00 Museum plan -01
HA-161622 004 00 Museum plan 00
HA-161623 001 00 Plaza plan 00 - part I
HA-161623 002 00 Plaza plan 00 - part II
HA-161623 003 00 Plaza plan 01 - part I
HA-161623 004 00 Plaza plan 01 - part II
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture - Schematic design 30% ARC N38 R HD- 161614 001 OF 009 V00
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL BURO HAPPOLD - BELFAST 13th JUNE 2008 DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-162117 001 00 BASEMENT - LEVEL -01 (SD2-SA-101)
HA-162117 002 00 GROUND FLOOR - LEVEL 00 (SD2-SA-102)
HA-162117 003 00 UPPER GROUND FLOOR 01 (SD2-SA-103)
HA-162117 004 00 1ST CIRCLE - LEVEL 02 (SD2-SA-104)
HA-162117 005 00 2ND CIRCLE INCLUDING TECHNICAL BRIDGES - LEVEL 03 (SD2-SA-105)
HA-162117 006 00 BOTTOM CHORD TRUSS LAYOUT (SD2-SA-106)
HA-162117 007 00 TOP CHORD TRUSS LAYOUT (SD2-SA-107)
HA-162117 008 00 PLANT ROOM LAYOUT (SD2-SA-108)
HA-162117 009 00 MIDDLE ROOF LAYOUT (SD2-SA-109)
HA-162117 010 00 SECTIONS (SD2-SA-201)
HA-162117 011 00 SECTIONS (SD2-SA-202)
HA-162117 012 00 SECTIONS (SD2-SA-203)
HA-162117 013 00 ROOF TRUSS ELEVATIONS (SD2-SA-204)
HA-162117 014 00 ROOF TRUSS ELEVATIONS (SD2-SA-205)
HA-162117 015 00 SECTION AND DETAILS (SD2-SA-301)
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture - Schematic design 30% N38 HD- 161614 003 OF 009 00
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
END OF LAST PERIOD PROJECT ENG. PLANT NO. BUDGET ITEM WORK ORDER NO. EWO NO. JOB ORDER NO.
DRAFTING OFFICE PERIOD ENDING DRAFTING SCHED. PROGRESS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL BURO HAPPOLD - NEW YORK 13th JUNE 2008 DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
DATE
PERCENT COMPLETE DATE*
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-162114 001 00 SD2 DRAWING NOTES & SCHEDULES SD2-SN-101
HA-162115 001 00 STRUCTURAL SITE PLAN SD2-SS-101
HA-162118 001 00 GREAT HALL LEVEL 00 FOUNDATION SD2-SP-101F
HA-162118 002 00 GREAT HALL LEVEL 00 SLAB SD2-SP-102F
HA-162118 003 00 GREAT HALL LEVEL 01 SLAB SD2-SP-102S
HA-162118 004 00 GREAT HALL ROOF LEVEL SD2-SP-103F
HA-162118 005 00 GREAT HALL PART PLANS SD2-SP-103S
HA-162118 006 00 GREAT HALL TYPICAL TRUSS SECTION SD2-SP-104F
SD2-SP-104S
HA-162121 001 00 PLAZA LEVEL (-3) FOUNDATION MAT SD2-SP-105S
HA-162121 002 00 PLAZA LEVEL (-2) FOUNDATION SD2-SP-106S
HA-162121 003 00 PLAZA LEVEL (-2) SLAB SD2-SP-201
HA-162121 004 00 PLAZA LEVEL (-1) FOUNDATION SD2-SP-202
HA-162121 005 00 PLAZA LEVEL (-1) SLAB SD2-SC-101F
HA-162121 006 00 PLAZA LEVEL 00 FOUNDATION SD2-SC-101S
HA-162121 007 00 PLAZA LEVEL 00 SLAB SD2-SC-102S
HA-162121 008 00 PLAZA LEVEL 01 SLAB SD2-SC-103S
HA-162121 009 00 PLAZA ROOF LEVEL SD2-SE-101F
HA-162121 010 00 PLAZA SECTIONS SD2-SE-101S
HA-162121 011 00 GALLERY 2 / GREAT HALL SECTION SD2-SE-102S
HA-162122 001 00 ENERGY CENTRE LEVEL 00 FOUNDATION SD2-SE-103S
HA-162122 002 00 ENERGY CENTRE LEVEL 00 SLAB SD2-SB-101F
HA-162122 003 00 ENERGY CENTRE LEVEL 01 SLAB SD2-SB-101S
HA-162122 004 00 ENERGY CENTRE ROOF LEVEL SD2-SB -102S
HA-162122 005 00 BACK OF HOUSE LEVEL 00 FOUNDATION SD2-SB -103S
HA-162122 006 00 BACK OF HOUSE LEVEL 00 SLAB SD2-SG-101F
HA-162122 007 00 BACK OF HOUSE LEVEL 01 SLAB SD2-SG-101S
HA-162122 008 00 BACK OF HOUSE ROOF LEVEL SD2-SG-103S
HA-162123 001 00 CAR PARK LEVEL 00 FOUNDATION SD2-SG-104S
HA-162123 002 00 CAR PARK LEVEL 00 SLAB SD2-SG-201
HA-162123 003 00 CAR PARK LEVEL 01 SLAB SD2-SG-202
HA-162123 004 00 CAR PARK ROOF LEVEL
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL BURO HAPPOLD - GLASGOW 13th JUNE 2008 DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-162119 001 00 LEVEL 0 PLAN - LIBRARY (SD2-SL-101S)
HA-162119 006 00 ROOF PLAN - LIBRARY (SD2-SL-106S)
HA-162119 007 00 SECTION A-A - LIBRARY (SD2-SL-201)
HA-162119 008 00 SECTION B-B - LIBRARY (SD2-SL-202)
HA-162119 009 00 SECTIONS CC- FF (SD2-SL-203)
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-162120 001 00 Level 01 Plan - Tower (SD2-ST-101S)
HA-162120 016 00 Level 16 (Roof) Plan - Tower (SD2-ST-116S)
HA-162120 017 00 Tower & Keystone Sections Thro (SD2-ST-201)
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA-162124 001 00 ROAD & CAR PARK LAYOUT
HA-162124 002 00 LAYOUT PLAN ROAD 01
HA-162124 003 00 LAYOUT PLAN ROAD 02
HA-162124 004 00 STORMWATER LAYOUT
HA-162124 005 00 FOUL WATER LAYOUT
HA-162124 010 00 LONGITUDINAL SECTIONS SHEET 1 OF 2
HA-162124 011 00 LONGITUDINAL SECTIONS SHEET 2 OF 2
HA-162124 020 00 TYPICAL CROSS SECTIONS
HA-162124 030 00 EARTHWORKS ISOPACHYTE PLAN
HA-162124 040 00 VEHICULAR TURNING MOVEMENTS
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL BURO HAPPOLD 13th JUNE 2008 DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA - 162365 001 00 Auditorium Level -01 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KA-101)
HA - 162365 002 00 Auditorium Level 00 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KA-102)
HA - 162365 008 00 Auditorium Ventilation Section (SD2-KA-108)
HA - 162365 009 00 Auditorium Level -01 Containment Layout (SD2-PA-101)
HA - 162365 010 00 Auditorium Level 00 Containment Layout (SD2-PA-102)
HA - 162365 016 00 Auditorium LV Schematic (SD2-PA-108)
HA - 162366 001 00 Cinema Level 00 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KM-101)
HA - 162366 002 00 Cinema Level 01 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KM-102)
HA - 162366 003 00 Cinema Level 00 Containment Layout (SD2-PM-101)
HA - 162366 004 00 Cinema Level 01 Containment Layout (SD2-PM-102)
HA - 162366 005 00 Cinema LV Schematic (SD2-PM-103)
HA - 162367 001 00 Great Hall Level 01 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KG-101)
HA - 162367 002 00 Great Hall Ventilation Section (SD2-KG-102)
HA - 162367 003 00 Great Hall Level 00 Containment Layout (SD2-PG-101)
HA - 162367 004 00 Great Hall Level 01 Containment Layout (SD2-PG-102)
HA - 162367 005 00 Great Hall Containment Section (SD2-PG-103)
HA - 162367 006 00 Great Hall LV Schematic (SD2-PG-104)
HA - 162368 001 00 Library Level 01 Ventilation Layout (SD2-KL-101)
HA - 162368 002 00 Library Induction Ventilation System (SD2-KL-102)
HA - 162368 003 00 Library Displacement Ventilation System (SD2-KL-103)
HA - 162368 004 00 Library AC & Ventilation Schematic No.1 (SD2-KL-104)
HA - 162368 005 00 Library Level 01 DB/Comms Space Allocation Layout (SD2-PL-101)
HA - 162368 009 00 Library Containment Section (SD2-PL-105)
HA - 162368 010 00 Library LV Schematic (SD2-PL-106)
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
N38 10-07575 10-07575-0001
CONTROL BURO HAPPOLD 13th JUNE 2008 DRAWING IS CONSIDERED 65% COMPLETE

DRAWING SHEET REV.
HOURS REVISION
NO. NO.
NUMBER
HA - 162369 001 00 Plaza Level -01 Fire Protection Layout (SD2-BP-101)
HA - 162369 002 00 Plaza Level 01 Fire Protection Layout (SD2-BP-102)
HA - 162369 003 00 Plaza Level -01 Chilled Water Layout (SD2-KP-101)
HA - 162369 004 00 Plaza Level 01 Chilled Water Layout (SD2-KP-102)
HA - 162369 005 00 Plaza AHU Details (SD2-KP-103)
HA - 162369 006 00 Plaza Cooling Tower Yard Layout (SD2-KP-104)
HA - 162369 007 00 Plaza HVAC Plantroom Layout No.1 (SD2-KP-105)
HA - 162369 008 00 Plaza HVAC Plantroom Layout No.2 (SD2-KP-106)
HA - 162369 009 00 Plaza Chilled Water Schematic (SD2-KP-107)
HA - 162369 010 00 Plaza AC & Ventilation Plant Schematic No.1 (SD2-KP-108)
HA - 162369 013 00 Plaza Museum, Gallaries 1, 2 & BOH AC & Ventilation Schematic (SD2-KP-111)
HA - 162369 014 00 Plaza Fire Protection Schematic (SD2-KP-112)
HA - 162369 015 00 Plaza Level -01 Energy Centre Layout Option 1 (SD2-KP-113)
HA - 162369 016 00 Plaza Level -01 Energy Centre Layout Option 2 (SD2-KP-114)
HA - 162369 017 00 Plaza Level 00 Substation "B" (SD2-KP-115)
HA - 162369 018 00 Plaza Water Supply Schematic (SD2-LP-101)
HA - 162369 019 00 Plaza Sanitary & Storm Drainage Schematic (SD2-LP-102)
HA - 162369 020 00 Plaza Proposed Water Utilities (SD2-LP-103)
HA - 162369 021 00 Plaza Proposed Sewerage Connection (SD2-LP-104)
HA - 162369 022 00 Plaza Level -01 Indicative Electrical Submain Routes (SD2-PP-101)
HA - 162369 023 00 Plaza Level 00 Indicative Electrical Submain Routes (SD2-PP-102)
HA - 162369 024 00 Plaza Level 01 Indicative Electrical Submain Routes (SD2-PP-103)
HA - 162369 025 00 Plaza MV Network Line Diagram (SD2-SP-101)
HA - 162369 026 00 Plaza Proposed External HV Network Utilities (SD2-SP-102)
HA - 162370 001 00 Tower Level 01 (SD2-KT-101)
HA - 162370 006 00 Tower Ventilation Distribution Diagram (SD2-KT-106)
HA - 162370 007 00 Tower HVAC Pipework Distribution Diagram (SD2-KT-107)
HA - 162370 008 00 Tower Public Health Distribution Diagram No.1 (SD2-LT-101)
HA - 162370 009 00 Tower Public Health Distribution Diagram No.2 (SD2-LT-102)
HA - 162370 010 00 Tower Electrical Distribution Diagram (SD2-PT-101)
HA - 162370 011 00 Tower IT Distribution Diagram (SD2-PT-102)
HA - 162370 012 00 Tower Electrical Distribution Schematic (SD2-PT-103)
EDSD/2617-0401.XLS
Chapter 06 VALUE ENGINEERING
SAUDI ARAMCO CULTURAL CENTRE
Value Management Workshop
28 - 29 April 2008 & 22 May 2008
WORKSHOP PROCESS REPORT
UPDATED 4 JUNE 2008
Schematic Design Stage
Davis Langdon LLP

MidCity Place
71 High Holborn
London
WC1V 6QS
Tel: 020 7061 7000

Fax: 020 7061 7061
Document Control
Document Name: Workshop Process Report
Date: 4 June 2008
Version: Final Version.2
Author: Maria Kliniotou/Beatrice Esprit

Checked by:
Davis Langdon LLP

\\Dllonnas2\shared_vm\JOBS\2008\Aramco Cultural Centre\PostWorkshop\REPORT\Report No2\A3\Report Aramco Cultural Centre_3.doc
CONTENTS
1.0 Executive Summary
2.0 The Workshop Process
Appendices
Appendix A1 - Workshop Participants
Appendix A2 - Wrap-up Meeting Participants
Appendix B - DL Value Profile
Appendix C1 - Costed & Consolidate Ideas List
Appendix C2 - Full Creative Idea Listing
Appendix D - Relevant Proposal Forms
Appendix E - DL Workshop Presentation
Appendix F- Buro Happold presentations
Davis Langdon LLP

Workshop Process Report
1.0 Proceedings Summary
1.1 Davis Langdon (DL) was appointed to undertake the first value management study for the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre. The workshop took place
over a 2 day period.
During the first day key representatives from Saudi Aramco and the design team agreed the workshop scope and the key project objectives. The
second day was a full workshop where participants brainstormed and identified new ideas, evaluated these ideas and selected the most feasible for
development prior to the wrap-up meeting held in Bahrain on 22 May 2008. The participants in the workshop and wrap-up meeting are given in
Appendix A1 & A2.
1.2 The purpose of the workshop was :-
To identify the project objectives and primary value drivers in order to set up the framework for the value engineering activities, and
To optimise the design solutions in order to reduce capital and life cycle costs and enhance the project value drivers.
1.3 The project scope was limited to the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre as defined in the 1. SACC Document, Appendix A to C (July 2007), 2. Schematic
Design Cost Estimate, Part 1 (April 2008), 3. PEP, (15/04/2008, Rev. 2), 4. Site & Surroundings document. We understand that the scope of the project
has already evolved and these changes were highlighted during pre-workshop presentations for Snǿhetta and Buro Happold.
1.4 Prior to the workshop DL analysed the proposed design and prepared a draft value profile model. This was validated by the participants during the Day
1 of the workshop in Oslo.
1.5 The objective of the Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre is articulated in the following statement:-
♦ To create a world class centre in Dhahran that contributes to the intellectual and cultural activities in Saudi Arabia and acts as a catalyst for
change by embracing the past and future of the Kingdom
♦ To use state of the art technology to construct an iconic building that enhances the position of Saudi Arabia on the cultural map
♦ To promote Aramco's commitment to the local communities and human resources development by providing new knowledge opportunities
and enjoyable experiences for all ages
♦ To open in November 2011 within an approved budget
♦ To be a worldwide symbol of environmentally friendly practice
♦ To follow best practice standards
Davis Langdon LLP Page 1

1.6 The primary value drivers as identified and validated by those participating in the workshop that will fulfil the above objective are listed below in order of
priority:-
1. Enhance Cultural Life of the Kingdom (7)

2. Image (4)
3. Functionality (3)
4. Productivity (2)
5. An exemplar of ‘Green Buildings’ (2)
6. Follow Best Practice
These are articulated in further detail in Appendix B.
1.7 The following areas were identified as ‘givens’ to the project and consequently aspects of the scheme that cannot be challenged.
1 The site location

2 Minimum life span of the centre sign of 50 years
3 The Design Concept
1.8 At the end of Day 1 Snǿhetta presented to all Aramco representatives the current concept. Buro Happold Structures and MEP presented their
proposals at the beginning of Day 2. The Buro Happold presentations are attached in Appendix F.
1.9 During the presentations DL recorded a number of Value Engineering ideas raised by the various participants. DL presented these to the workshop
group and the most feasible were selected for further development using the following evaluation criteria:-
A Enhances the Value Drivers

B Reduces Capital Costs
C Reduce LCC/Running Costs and Maintainability
D Health & Safety
E Improves Schedule
Following evaluation of the previously identified ideas the team identified new ideas to add value on the project. All ideas were prioritised according to
the degree of fit to the above evaluation criteria.
3=develop before follow-up meeting on 22/05/2008

2=develop after wrap-up meeting
1=consider for future development
0 = reject
BC= Base Case

Ideas form part of the SD2 Stage/cont’d
Subject No Description Owner

23 Reduce acoustic standards for auditorium from 20dB (symphony orchestra venue standards) BH
Acoustics
61 Auditorium: Rationalize structure to acoustic brief BH
40 Weathered and fractured limestone/sandstone - reduce structure of museum to 8m below grade, source 12m, rationalise Sno
Sub- excavation area
Structure
82 Review ground water control solutions BH
30 Review technical rooms location in the Tower BH

47 Review Tower functions Sno
Tower 77 Combine tower functions to enhance functionality/services/vertical circulation Sno
87 Distribute offices of Tower elsewhere Sno
91 Turn Tower into an observation platform Sno
Cladding 17 Agree material selection for external cladding (and related ideas) Sno
62 Found the buildings on raft foundations (avoid piles) BH

45 Foundations can be grade as structure separated from museum structure BH
Piling
66 Geotechnical Investigation ongoing! BH
67 Site Topographical Survey required / building levels BH
7 Review options for smoke control systems BH

FEDRA
78 Review Aramco codes for Fire Engineering BH
Vehicular 106 Improve connections to Highway BH

Access
Design 113 Co-locate Design Team in one office this task force to avoid mis-coordination Sno
Team
114 Consolidate a priority list on key equipment at opening date with allowance of later re-trofit so that it does not impact Aramco
FF&E building experience

1.16 The following ideas were ranked 1 at the workshop and will be considered during Design Development Stage:
No Description Owner
33 Build in the landscape solar panels as stand alone BH
39 Junction of Plaza slab and pebble structure important detail - proposed waffle slab solution Sno
85 Provide external lift to Tower Sno
88 No underground facilities Sno
90 Remove the solar Sno
94 Re-introduce tunnelled entrance Sno
95 Make one entrance direct / more functional Sno
99 Maximise pre-cast solutions BH
100 Standardise the precast of columns BH
102 Expose ceiling areas, remove false ceilings where appropriate Sno
107 Improve the Ring Road to enable accessibility to Center BH
108 Optimise waterproofing membranes and insulation BH
109 Provide meeting and conference rooms within centre for the use of the public Sno
110 Re-distribute staff facilities closer to the hub areas Sno
111 Open plan offices Sno
1.17 Davis Langdon would like to thank all the delegates for their positive contributions to the VE studies.

2.0 The Workshop Process
2.1 General
Davis Langdon (DL) conducted the Value Engineering study customising their standard Value Engineering Process, to suit the status of the project and
the number of constraints that had to be respected to minimise the development process and reduce delay costs. The standard process is shown below.
The workshop addressed the steps highlighted (See Appendix E for the workshop presentation).
VE Study Process
Pre-study Preparation
Briefing Agree Develop

objectives Value
Workshop Function Challenge
Profile Analysis status quo Evaluate &
review
Develop
proposals
Review & Decision

Selection building
Outcomes
Reporting to Client

Appendix A1
The Workshop Participants (Oslo)
Tuesday 29 April 2008

Name Function Organisation
Nour Al-Hussain Client Representative AOC
Faisal Al Dossary Project Engineer AOC
Ahmed Husseini S/A Project Engineer AOC
Hisham Malaika Architect Consultant Saudi Aramco
Nabih Al-Ibrahim Lead Project Engineer Saudi Aramco
Mohammed Al Eady Admin Operations Saudi Aramco
Bahaa Taleb Planning Engineer Saudi Aramco
Hisham Abu-Adas Structural Engineer Aramco/CSD
Al-Khalifa M A Project Engineer SAPMT
Rob Greenwood Project Director Snøhetta
Kjetil Thorsen Project Director Snøhetta
Thorbjorn Slaaun Management Consultant Snøhetta
Frank Nodland Coordinator 2D Plan Snøhetta
Allan Follett MEP Engineer Buro Happold
Graham Hayne Project Director Buro Happold
Bruce Brace Structures Engineer Buro Happold
Alex Melgar Structure Engineer Buro Happold
Catherine Tanner Facility Planning Lord Cultural Resources
Stephen Gee Cost Consultant Davis Langdon
Ned Barran Design Project Manager Davis Langdon Schumann Smith (London)
Maria Kliniotou Lead Facilitator Davis Langdon
Beatrice Esprit Co-Facilitator Davis Langdon
Davis Langdon LLP

Appendix A2
Wrap-up Meeting Participants (Dhahran)
Thursday 22 May 2008

Name Organisation Tel/Fax #
Nour Al-Hussain SAPMT/AOC +47 9483 4601
Hisham Malaika Saudi Aramco +9665 0568 5974
Nabih Al-Ibrahim SAPMT/ETHRA +9663 862 5369
Mohammed Al Eady Saudi Aramco Cultural Center +9663 872 4443

Cirilito B Cariaga UD/Saudi Aramco +9663 872 6741
David K Churches CS/Saudi Aramco +9663 876 3289
Wafa Al Zaid Saudi Aramco/Museum +9665 059 2876
Mona Hassan Saudi Aramco Cultural Center +9665 0590 6621
Michelle Alireza Saudi Aramco Knowledge Center +9665 0588 0383
Sahar Al-Rowaily Saudi Aramco Cultural Center +9663 872 0042
Greg Noakes Saudi Aramco Public Relations +9663 874 7292

Waleed Al-Helal Saudi Aramco +9663 872 1923
Hisham Abu-Adas Saudi Aramco/CSD +9663 874 6908
Fuad Therman Kirg Abdulaziz Center +9663 873 5225
Khalid Al-Rashid PMT +9663 862 5279
Fatmah Al-Rashid Saudi Aramco Utilities Dept Design Gr +9663 872 2787
Sayed Hegazy Abdulhadi & Al-Mooibed Consultancy +9663 858 8877

Rob Greenwood Snøhetta +47 9320 0017
Astrid Renata Van Veen Snøhetta +47 911 36 424
Graham Hayne Buro Happold +44 7753 829 631
Ned Barran Davis Langdon Schumann Smith (London) +44 207 061 7000
Raj Tailor Davis Langdon Bahrain +973 3934 4622
Hussein Al Abbad Davis Langdon Bahrain +973 3966 1909
Davis Langdon LLP

Appendix B
Value Profile
Davis Langdon LLP

ARAMCO CULTURAL CENTRE
PROJECT OBJECTIVES
TO CREATE A WORLD CLASS CENTRE IN DHAHRAN THAT CONTRIBUTES TO INTELLECTUAL AND CULTURAL ACTIVITIES IN SAUDI ARABIA AND ACTS AS A CATALYST FOR CHANGE BY EMBRACING THE PAST AND FUTURE OF THE KINGDOM
USE STATE OF THE ART TECHNOLOGY TO CONSTRUCT AN ICONIC BUILDING THAT ENHANCES SAUDI ARABIA ON THE CULTURAL MAP
PROMOTE ARAMCO'S COMMITMENT TO LOCAL COMMUNITIES AND HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT BY PROVIDING NEW KNOWLEDGE OPPORTUNITIES AND ENJOYABLE EXPERIENCES FOR ALL AGES
TO OPEN IN NOVEMBER 2011 WITHIN AN APPROVED BUDGET
TO BE A WORLDWIDE SYMBOL OF ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY PRACTICE
TO FOLLOW BEST PRACTICE STANDARDS
VALUE DRIVERS
(long term
IMAGE ENHANCE CULTURAL LIFE OF THE KINGDOM FUNCTIONALITY PRODUCTIVITY USE BEST SCHEDULE SUSTAINABILI
outcomes sufficient PRACTICE TY
and necessary to
deliver the Project
Objectives in full)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
RESPON PROVIDE A REFLECT INFORM CELEBRATE ASPIRE OPTIMISE APPROPRIATE INVITING ADEQUATE PROVIDE A PROVIDE MAXIMISE PROVIDE A OPTIMISE INNOVATIVE ACCOMMODATE DELIVER FOR WORLWIDE
D TO SYMBOL FOR ARAMCO'S ABOUT THE THE PRESENT FOR THE VISITOR CO-LOCATION ACCESS BACK OF SAFE AND APPROPRIA OPERATIONAL GOOD WHOLE LIFE TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS 2011 4RTH EXEMPLAR OF
THE THE FUTURE VALUES & PAST FUTURE EXPERIENCE OF CULTURAL HOUSE SECURE TE & SPATIAL WORKING COSTS SOLUTIONS OF PLANNING, QUARTER "GREEN"
LOCAL IMAGE HUBS FACILITIES CONTROLLED FLEXIBILITY EFFICIENCY ENVIRONMENT GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS
CONTEXT ENVIRONMENT POLICY, ARAMCO
CODES, LOCAL
PRACTICES, IBC
AND OTHERS
DESERT ARABIC SYMBOL OF HIGH MUSEUM ARCHIVE & VISITOR AUDITORIUM CINEMA GREAT HALL PUBLIC CHILDREN DINING PLAZA GARDENS RETAIL OBSERVATIO THE LANDSCAPE ADEQUATE DELIVERIES OFFICES/ WORKSHOP/
LOCATION HERITAGE SUSTAINABLE
TECHNOLOGY BUILDING SPECIAL & MEDIA LIBRARY & TEEN FACILITIES FACILITIE N DECK SOURCE APPROACH PARKING ADMIN STORAGE
PRACTICES
BUILDING COLLECTION CENTRE EDUCATION S (WELL) SUPPORT
AREA CENTRE STAFF
Worldwide Worldwide Worldwide Degree of Degree of fit Degree Degree of fit Degree Degree of fit Degree of Degree of Number of Number of Number of Degree of Number of Number of Degree of fit to Degree of fit Incident Log Operating Costs Staff Turnover Yearly Electronic Status of Planning Open on time LEED Platinum
MEASURES
symbol symbol symbol for fit to SoR to SoR of fit to to SoR of fit to to SoR fit to SoR fit to SoR visitors visitors visitors facility sharing visitors visitors SoR to SoR (including maintenance record and Other Rating or
Aramco SoR SoR staff) expenditure exchange, Consents equivalent
electronic
data
IMPORTANCE 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2
WEIGHT
DESIGN APPROPRIATE Energy Conservation

CONSIDERATIONS
SEGREGATION FOR
VIPS
Davis Langdon LLP Appendix B - Aramco Value Profile\FA Workshop

Appendix C1
Costed & Consolidated Ideas List
Davis Langdon LLP

SAUDI ARAMCO
CULTURAL CENTER
CREATIVE IDEA LISTING
Evaluation Criteria Key to ranking

A Enhances the Value 3=develop before follow-up meeting (22/05/2008)
Drivers
B Reduces Capital Costs 2=develop after wrap-up meeting
C Reduce LCC/Running Costs 1=consider for future development

and Maintainability
D Health & Safety 0 = reject
E Improves Schedule BC= Base Case
Subject
Subject No Description Rank Owner Saving Comment 22/5 AOC Comment DT Comment
Rank
1 Balance the cut and fill 3 BH Nil This assumption was Ongoing part of base design
bulk earthworks on site taken under Schematic
Design 1 (SD1)
Big Dig 3
57 Museum: Rationalize the 3 BH (1,250,000)
‘big dig’ – depth and
footprint
46 Allow 3m of book stacks 3 BH ? Awaiting structural

throughout space. details to enable
Reduce/review allowance costing. Costing
in certain areas - reduce information following
Structure, flexibility completion of SD2
3
Library
59 Library: Rationalize loads 3 BH See item 46 See #5 above
49 Support Keystone from 3 BH Awaiting SD2 for Ongoing part of base design
Library not Auditorium costing information
11/06/2008 1
Subject
Rank
5 Review floor loadings for 3 BH ? Awaiting SD2 for Structural floor loads for library & BH continuing with design based
all areas costing information museum should allow for flexibility to upon the client brief. This issue
rearrange book stacks / exhibits as will be reviewed wit the client
needed. BH to proceed on this following SD2
assumption but to report on cost
impact in order to finalize decision; if
cost prohibitive or excessive then
alternate solution may be found.
16 Develop landscape 3 BH ? Awaiting SD2 for The fire fighting vehicle access This issue is being developed
geometry and emergency costing information - proposal must comply with IFC between FEDRA and the clients
vehicle access potentially additional Chapter 5. Access should be provided loss prevention team
requirements (fire truck) costs for fire vehicle to within 150 ft of the
building perimeter. The current
perimeter road is too far from the
buildings to be considered as suitable
at this moment in time.
It would be acceptable not to demark
the fire fighting road across the
landscaping / podium, however the
podium would require to be able to
structurally carry the weight of the
fire appliances travelling over it.
Structure, Due to the high rise tower a high
3 reach (fire appliance with extending
General
ladder) will be needed.
Any alternative solution being
proposed from the code requirements
would have to consider an operational
fire fighting pre-plan.
A class1 standpipe system is required
in the buildings.
Buro Happold should come up with a
fire fighting vehicle access plan for
the site.
36 Flat slab 3 BH Not viable See 5

option
60 Tower: Evaluate concrete 3 BH (825,000) See 5
option
38 Rationalise landscaped 3 Sno (250,000) Part of SD2 Soil depth reduced 1m-0.5m
'dome' over car park Being developed as part of SD2
loadings (in earth and
water and usage
65 Landscaping: confirm 3 BH See item 38 Soil depth reduced 1m-0.5m
‘dome’ geometry / loads (see 5)
11/06/2008 2
Subject
Rank
12 Explore/pursue the 'single' 3 Sno (500,000) Part of SD2 Being developed as part of SD2
structure idea for the roof (see latest dwgs
system in the Great Hall
41 Rationalise sub-structure Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for see latest dwgs

(Great Hall) costing information
42 Optimise lower and upper Sno See item 12 see latest dwgs
Structure, structure (Great Hall)
3
Great Hall single or double
43 Truss to follow shape of Sno See item 12 In principle this is acceptable but this see latest dwgs
Great Hall decision should be made jointly with
Snohetta as it affects the
architectural design.
58 Great Hall: Rationalize to Sno See item 12 see latest dwgs
a ‘single’ structure
15 Review options for car 3 BH ? Awaiting SD2 for On-going

park roof slab type and costing information
foundations
63 Car Park / Plaza: confirm Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for Fire truck access confirmed
roof access loads costing information
64 Car Park: confirm parking 3 Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for see latest dwgs
and service access layout costing information
83 Reduce footprint of BH ? Awaiting SD2 for

underground car park and costing information
include surface car park
Car Parking 3
89 Surface shaded car parks 3 Sno See item 83 To developed
& delete or reduce
underground car park
93 Use existing car park and 3 Sno See item 85 Awaiting SD2 for The general direction SA would like to To developed
satellite buses to centre costing information follow is for the “Cultural Park” area
to be a car-free zone with visitors
shuttled to their destination from a
surrounding parking area to key
locations within the Cultural Park (i.e.
the Cultural Center, the Aramco
Exhibit etc.)
11/06/2008 3
Subject
Rank
23 Reduce acoustic standards 3 BH ? Awaiting SD2 for In principle 20db is acceptable
for auditorium from 20dB costing information however BH to report on pros and
(symphony orchestra cons of NC 15db vs. NC20db for
venue standards) auditorium to make informed final
Acoustics 3
decision.
61 Auditorium: Rationalize BH See item 23
structure to acoustic brief
40 Weathered and fractured 3 Sno See item 57 Items 40 & 82 should see latest dwgs
limestone/sandstone - result in a reduction in
reduce structure of excavation costs
museum to 8m below
Sub- grade, source 12m,
3
Structure rationalise excavation area
82 Review ground water BH See item 57 Awaiting SD2 for

control solutions costing information
30 Review technical rooms 3 BH ? Awaiting SD2 for Technical floors in tower should
location in the Tower costing information ideally be reduced to 2 floors (instead
of 3).
47 Review Tower functions 3 Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for on-going by client
costing information
72 Review number of lifts in 3 Sno (275,000) Number of lifts needs to be evaluated on-going from 4 to 3
the Tower based on the new tower theme
(“lifelong learning” facilities) to be
implemented.
74 Review kitchens at high Sno Nil Kitchen retained Assuming a fine dining facility will be n/a retain kitchen
level in The Tower retained within the tower then the
kitchen should be located in
proximity.
Staff offices are recommended to be
reallocated from tower to another
location (i.e. around plaza level).
Tower 3 75 Have staff controlled lifts Sno See item 72 on-going by client
77 Combine tower functions Sno See item 47 The tower functions are being re- on-going by client
to enhance evaluated however in general core
functionality/services/verti configuration should be as efficient
cal circulation and tight as possible to maximize
available net floor area.
84 Review location of tower Sno See item 73 The fine dining facility (with n/a
rooftop restaurant associated kitchen) is required.
86 No restaurant facility at Sno See item 73 Make Tower more See #84 above. n/a
Tower public - Review on
30/04/08
87 Distribute offices of Tower Sno See item 47 See Above (Split office See #74 above. on-going by client
elsewhere function not kept
centralised)
11/06/2008 4
Subject
Rank
91 Turn Tower into an Sno See item 47 Tower 90m at 17 on-going by client
observation platform levels
8 Create dedicated spaces 3 BH (213,000) Particularly Museum & Gallery #3 only should allow for
for special exhibits for Library controlled conditions to accommodate
museum cooling and Aramco to define level special exhibits.
services loads of flexibility required in
the various functional
hubs
9 Review Great Hall BH (236,000)

environmental control
MEP 3
79 Review Museum cooling BH See item 8 See #8 above.
and services loads
80 Exhibition Hall briefing BH 236,000 The Great Hall program is still under
requires close development and requirement for
environmental control controlled conditions still undefined
however it’s unlikely that stringent
environmental conditions (similar to
museum gallery #3 will be required)
17 Agree material selection 2 Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for

for external cladding costing information
18 Reduce extent of external 2 Sno (750,000)

cladding
19 Cladding systems Sno See item 17
34 Use stainless steel mesh Sno ? Awaiting SD2 for

for cladding costing information
Cladding 2 51 Lighten structure by using Sno See item 17 See steel cladding
either concrete, steel or systems
precast as alternatives to
support cladding
73 Review façade options in Sno See item 17

the Tower
97 Use Teflon material for Sno See item 17

cladding /mesh
48 RC core and structural 2 BH See item 60

steel frame, composite
Tower floor decking. (RC, post-
2 tensioned option) -
Structure
Evaluate steel and
concrete options
11/06/2008 5
Subject
Rank
2 Use secant piles or similar 2 BH (1,600,000) Part of Design
short retaining systems for Development.
the tiered basement Undertake
excavation comprehensive
geotech investigations
to inform
Snohetta to provide
exact coordinates for
footprint to Aramco
62 Found the buildings on BH ? Awaiting SD2 for
Piling 2 raft foundations (avoid costing information
piles)
45 Foundations can be grade BH Information
as structure separated
from museum structure
66 Geotechnical BH Information
Investigation ongoing!
67 Site Topographical Survey BH Information
required / building levels
7 Review options for smoke 2 BH Information Review impact of

control systems diverging
78 Review Aramco codes for 2 BH Information IBC & IFC 2003 Edition should be
FEDRA 2
Fire Engineering applied in deriving the fire strategy.
The later editions of these documents
are not applicable.
District 11 Review District Cooling 2 BH (2,471,000) Review running costs Proceed per the DBSP, a proposal of
2 provision (MEP) the District Cooling is in progress
Cooling
106 Improve connections to 2 BH Awaiting SD2 Traffic study will be Traffic report study is ongoing & will
Vehicular
2 Highway for costing undertaken be provided as soon as it is
Access
information completed
113 2 Sno Information

Design Co-locate Design Team in
2
Team one office this task force
to avoid mis-coordination
114 Consolidate a priority list 2 Aramco Information Aramco to define the This will be developed and discussed
on key equipment at level of quality and with Snohetta.
opening date with experience at the day
FF&E 2 allowance of later re-trofit of opening and discuss
so that it does not impact with Snohetta
building experience
11/06/2008 6
Appendix C2
Full Creative Idea Listing
Davis Langdon LLP

SAUDI ARAMCO
CULTURAL CENTER
CREATIVE IDEA LISTING
Evaluation Criteria Key to ranking

A Enhances the Value Drivers 3=develop before follow-up meeting (22/05/2008)
B Reduces Capital Costs 2=develop after wrap-up meeting
C Reduce LCC/Running Costs and Maintainability 1=consider for future development
D Health & Safety 0 = reject
E Improves Schedule BC= Base Case
No. Description Rank Owner Cross Ref Comment

1 Balance the cut and fill bulk earthworks on site 3 BH See 57
2 Use secant piles or similar short retaining systems for the 2 BH / Aramco See 62 Part of Design Development. Undertake comprehensive geotech
tiered basement excavation investigations to inform
Snohetta to provide exact coordinates for footprint to Aramco
3 Downgrade acoustic separation for the auditorium structure 0 Look at Optimising before downgrading - look at double structure for Best
(part of Base Case) Practice
4 Use masonry walls in lieu of concrete (except in load BC Part of Design Development
bearing situations)
5 Review floor loadings for all areas 3 BH See 8, 46, 59, Particularly Museum & Library
65 Aramco to define level of flexibility required in the various functional hubs
6 Foundations review (after GI report in May) See 2, 66, 67
7 Review options for smoke control systems 2 BH See 78 Review impact of diverging
8 Create dedicated spaces for special exhibits for museum 3 BH Particularly Museum & Library
cooling and services loads Aramco to define level of flexibility required in the various functional hubs
9 Review Great Hall environmental control See 8
10 Back of House areas to be normally accepted standards BC
11 Review District Cooling provision 2 BH Review running costs (MEP)
12 Explore/pursue the 'single' structure idea for the roof system 3 Sno See 41, 42, 43,
in the Great Hall 58
13 Use the ramp slab to laterally prop the permanent retaining 0
walls in the museum
14 Review provision of the Energy Centre in terms of location, See 35, 56
size and use
15 Review options for car park roof slab type and foundations 3 BH See 63 On-going
16 Develop landscape geometry and emergency vehicle 3 BH Review Fire Protection requirements
access requirements (fire truck)
17 Agree material selection for external cladding 2 Sno See 34, 18, 19,
73, 97
18 Reduce extent of external cladding 2 Sno See 17
19 Cladding systems See 17
20 Material selection for interior finishes 1 Sno Presently 4 categories in place and is a Base Case
21 Increase car park number to 1000 capacity BC Sno See 53, 54, 55
22 Reduce the level of auditorium flexibility 0
23 Reduce acoustic standards for auditorium from 20dB 3 BH See 61 BH to report on standard vs. costs
(symphony orchestra venue standards)
24 Museum - Access strategy to gallery exhibits (avoid use of 0
ramps)
Davis Langdon LLP Page 1 Saudi Aramco Cultural Center

25 Junction of inner façade to ramp edge/source 0
26 Auditorium/Museum – auditorium rear stage area and 0
gallery 1 clash therefore compromising useable area of
gallery 1
27 Use Auditorium only for conferences in lieu of multiple use 0
28 Use Auditorium only as a concert hall 0

29 Great Hall to be used for external performances, outdoor BC
theatre or other use
30 Review technical rooms location in the Tower 3 BH
31 Remove all offices from lower floors connected to Public BC See 87
Spaces, Plaza and Function and relocate
32 Use Observation deck as an exterior balcony 0
33 Build in the landscape solar panels as stand alone 1 BH Option that is currently being worked on but may not be approved
May impact MEP design
34 Use stainless steel mesh for cladding See 17
35 Move energy centre further into complex See 14
36 Flat slab See 5
37 Beam and slab 0
38 Rationalise landscaped 'dome' over car park loadings (in 3 Sno
earth and water and usage
39 Junction of Plaza slab and pebble structure important detail - Design Development
proposed waffle slab solution
40 Weathered and fractured limestone/sandstone - reduce 3 Sno See 82
structure of museum to 8m below grade, source 12m,
rationalise excavation area
41 Rationalise sub-structure (Great Hall) See 12
42 Optimise lower and upper structure (Great Hall) single or See 12
double
43 Truss to follow shape of Great Hall See 12
44 9m grid proposed for Library - to consider pre-cast wider Structural options Design Development
span options
45 Foundations can be grade as structure separated from See 6
museum structure
46 Allow 3m of book stacks throughout space. Reduce/review See 5
allowance in certain areas - reduce flexibility
47 Review Tower functions 3 Sno See 74, 77, 86,

87, 91
48 RC core and structural steel frame, composite floor decking. 2 BH See 36
(RC, post-tensioned option) - Evaluate steel and concrete
options
49 Support Keystone from Library not Auditorium 3 Sno
50 High level of acoustic separation for the Auditorium BC
51 Lighten structure by using either concrete, steel or precast See steel cladding systems
as alternatives to support cladding
52 Lighten structure by using either concrete, steel or precast 0
as alternatives to support cladding
53 Car Park: Reduce landscape / confirm roof access loads See 21
54 Car Park: Optimize roof structure and foundations See 21
55 Car Park: second level? (to be studied) See 21 See above, consider as option of reviewing car park

56 Energy Centre: Rationalize location and depth See 14
57 Museum: Rationalize the ‘big dig’ – depth and footprint See 1
58 Great Hall: Rationalize to a ‘single’ structure See 12
59 Library: Rationalize loads See 5
60 Tower: Evaluate concrete option See 5
61 Auditorium: Rationalize structure to acoustic brief See 23
62 Found the buildings on raft foundations (avoid piles) See 2
63 Car Park / Plaza: confirm roof access loads See 15
64 Car Park: confirm parking and service access layout 3 Sno Consider a study for reviewing turning circles
65 Landscaping: confirm ‘dome’ geometry / loads See 5
66 Geotechnical Investigation ongoing! See 6
67 Site Topographical Survey required / building levels See 6
68 Update coordination and building relationships / detail Technical development
69 Cladding skin / plaza interfaces Design development
70 Tower: resolve stability, deflection Design development
71 Auditorium: resolve back of stage load transfer Design development
72 Review number of lifts in the Tower 3 Sno See 75
73 Review façade options in the Tower See 17
74 Review kitchens at high level in The Tower See 47
75 Have staff controlled lifts See 72
76 Have 2 cores in Tower 0 Already considered but size of floor plate does not lend itself to
complications of 2 cores
77 Combine tower functions to enhance See 47
functionality/services/vertical circulation
78 Review Aramco codes for Fire Engineering See 7
79 Review Museum cooling and services loads See 8
80 Exhibition Hall briefing requires close environmental control See 8
81 Review renewable energy options See 33 Link to solar control idea

82 Review ground water control solutions See 40, 66
83 Reduce footprint of underground car park and include See 15
surface car park
84 Review location of tower rooftop restaurant See 47
85 Provide external lift to Tower 1 Sno
86 No restaurant facility at Tower See 47 Make Tower more public - Review on 30/04/08
87 Distribute offices of Tower elsewhere See 31, 47 See Above (Split office function not kept centralised)
88 No underground facilities 1 Sno Not a construction cost
89 Surface shaded car parks & delete or reduce underground 3 Sno See 83
car park
90 Remove the solar 1 Sno
91 Turn Tower into an observation platform See 47 Tower 90m at 17 levels
92 Restrict elevator prior to tower observation 0 Due to Disability Discrimination Act provision requirements
93 Use existing car park and satellite buses to centre 3 Sno
94 Re-introduce tunnelled entrance 1 Sno See 95 Design Development
95 Make one entrance direct / more functional 1 Sno See 94 Design Development
96 Make Observation Tower rotate 0
97 Use Teflon material for cladding /mesh See 17
98 Limit special façade treatment to the tower only 0
99 Maximise pre-cast solutions 1 BH Design Development
100 Standardise the precast of columns 1 BH Design Development

101 Enhance appearance level of fit-out of Great Hall BC
102 Expose ceiling areas, remove false ceilings where 1 Sno
appropriate
103 Reduce museum capacity to 1500sqm 0
104 Conference/cinema in keystone building 0
105 Remove tilted columns (source, library, great hall) 0
106 Improve connections to Highway 2 BH Traffic study will be undertaken
107 Improve the Ring Road to enable accessibility to Center 1 BH Design Development
108 Optimise waterproofing membranes and insulation 1 BH Design Development, to include the superstructure
109 Provide meeting and conference rooms within centre for the 1 Sno
use of the public
110 Re-distribute staff facilities closer to the hub areas 1 Sno
111 Open plan offices 1 Sno
112 Use fibre-optics for communication BC BH
113 Co-locate Design Team 2 Sno
114 Consolidate a priority list on key equipment at opening date 2 Aramco Aramco to define the level of quality and experience at the day of opening
with allowance of later re-trofit so that it does not impact and discuss with Snohetta
building experience

Appendix D
Relevant Proposal Forms
Davis Langdon LLP

PROPOSAL
SUMMARY Sheet No. 1 of 6

Project: Aramco Cultural Centre Proposal No:
Creative Idea: Date:
Description of Original
Function Performed:
Description of Proposal
Function Performed:
Advantages of Proposal/Opportunities (In terms of agreed Evaluation Criteria)
Disadvantages / Risks of Proposal (In terms of agreed Evaluation Criteria)
Value Driver Ranking: + (increases value), 0 (no effect), - (reduces value)

1) Reduces Capital Cost ( ) 5) Imrpoves Productivity ( )
2) Enhances Image ( ) 6) Improves Best Practice requirements ( )
3) Enhances Cultural Life Aspect ( ) 7) Enhances Sustainability Provision ( )
4) Improves Functionality ( )
Implementation Plan
Comments (before presentation)
SUMMARY OF IMPACTS (on agreed Evaluation Criteria)

1) CAPEX TOTALS 2) Schedule
A Original Capital Costs (Page 4)
B Less Proposed Capital Costs (Page 5)
C Equals Capital Cost savings
D Plus Operating and Maintenance Savings (Page 6)
E Equals Total Proposed Savings C+D
3) OPEX - Lifecycle Costs (Energy Use, Waste) 4) Health & Safety
5) Constructibility
DISCUSSION AT WRAP-UP MEETING
RECOMMENDATION CATEGORY
Davis Langdon LLP Page 1 Appendix D - Evaluation Form.xls\Proposal_overview

PROPOSAL
ORIGINAL DESIGN Sheet No. 2 of 6

Sketch of Original/Calculation Sheet
Davis Langdon LLP Page 1 Appendix D - Evaluation Form.xls\Proposal1

PROPOSAL
PROPOSED DESIGN Sheet No. 3 of 6

Sketch of Proposed/Calculation Sheet

PROPOSAL
ORIGINAL CAPITAL COST Sheet No. 4 of 6

Original Capital Cost Estimate Estimate by:

Quantity Unit Rate Total
TOTAL TO PROPOSAL SUMMARY SHEET 1, A - Original Capital Costs

PROPOSAL
PROPOSED CAPITAL COST Sheet No. 5 of 6

Proposed Capital Cost Estimate Estimate by:

Quantity Unit Rate Total
TOTAL TO PROPOSAL SUMMARY SHEET 1, B - Proposed Capital Costs

PROPOSAL
LIFE CYCLE COSTING PRO FORMA Sheet No. 6 of 6

Discount rate Life Base year Original Proposed

INITIAL COSTS
Deduct Salvage
Total of Initial Costs

PERIODIC COSTS Frequency
REPLACEMENTS & REFURBISHMENT Original Proposed
Total of Periodic Costs (NPC)

ANNUAL COSTS Original Proposed
Total of Annual Costs (NPC)

Total Net Present Costs £ £
TOTAL TO PROPOSAL SUMMARY SHEET 1 C- NPC reduction (addition) £

Appendix E
DL Workshop Presentation
Davis Langdon LLP

Roles VE Process Agenda Pre-workshop Activities
Function Analysis
Define Project Objectives
Presentations on
The facilitator’s role is to manage an effective forum for group Identify Value Drivers
previous VE ideas
Develop & Present Ideas (Wish List) Priorities between the Value Drivers
learning and decision making
Agree principles for Life Cycle Costing
Agree the Givens to the project
Your role is to contribute positively, share your knowledge and
try to understand and respect the views of others
Mortimer Street Function Analysis
PROJECT OBJECTIVES
To release the potential of the current site by
constructing a versatile and high quality office
Together we seek to achieve your stated objectives Idea Evaluation Idea Generation
building with a mix of uses in keeping with the
character of the surrounding area.
VALUE DRIVERS IMAGE MARKETABILITY HERITAGE DESIGN ENVIRONMENT PROFITABILITY NON-OFFICE USES PLANNING
(long term (built)
outcomes
Provide self-
sufficient and Provide a strong Versatile office
Retain a
Provide a
To produce a cost
contained
necessary to similar Innovative effective design New build to
impact at ground building design pleasant working residential
character to and high which maximises comply with
deliver the Project floor level and a to allow let to a
other quality
environment in a
short and long
accommodation
planning
Objectives in full) strong identity single tenant or low maintenance and retail /
buildings in finishes term revenue requirements
through interiors to many building wholesale
the area generation
showrooms
20% 20% 20%

Weighting
Retai n facades of Fl oor to cei ling hei ghts
DESIGN Cavendish House to be capable of
CONSIDERATIONS and 32-34 Great accommodating
Titchfiel d St displ acement
ventil ation and
optimisi ng natural
day light
Use materials in
keeping wi th the
conservation area
GIVENS
Value Zone Team Presentations (items that the Study will NOT address)
The earlier the better!

The site location
Potential for Resistance to Cost of change Short presentation (5 minutes approx)
change change
Life span of facility – 50 years
Cost
Representatives of key stakeholders to highlight - new information, Design Concept

main issues, gaps in information or perceived constraints:
Buro Happold Structure & M&E
Davis Langdon
The value
zone
Concept Design Construction/ installation Use
Time
Opportunities reduce with time
80% of costs are committed at concept stage
Scope for Workshop What is Value?
The VE study process
Pre-study Preparation
SACC Document, Appendix A to C (July 2007)
Schematic Design Cost Estimate, Part 1 (April 2008)
VALUE ≠ COST
PEP, (15/04/2008, Rev. 2) Briefing Agree Develop
objectives Value Function
Site & Surroundings document Workshop Profile Analysis
Challenge
status quo Evaluate &
review
Development Develop
proposals
Review & Decision

Selection building
Outcomes
Reporting to project
How to Improve Value?

TO CREATE A WORLD CLASS CENTRE IN DHAHRAN THAT CONTRIBUTES
TO INTELLECTUAL AND CULTURAL ACTIVITIES IN SAUDI ARABIA AND
ACTS AS A CATALYST FOR CHANGE BY EMBRACING THE PAST AND FUTURE OF THE KINGDOM
Function + Quality
Value Management Value = USE STATE OF THE ART TECHNOLOGY TO CONSTRUCT AN ICONIC BUILDING THAT PLACES SAUDI ARABIA ON THE CULTURAL
MAP
A systematic process to define what value means for Clients,
communicate it clearly to the project delivery team
Cost
PROMOTE ARAMCO'S COMMITMENT TO LOCAL COMMUNITIES AND HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT BY PROVIDING NEW
to maximise the Project Benefits and minimise the Resources used
KNOWLEDGE OPPORTUNITIES AND ENJOYABLE EXPERIENCES FOR ALL AGES
Functions Quality Life Cycle Value

Value Engineering Costs TO OPEN IN NOVEMBER 2011 WITHIN AN APPROVED BUDGET
A systematic technique to deliver the required
functionality at lowest cost to give best value for money TO BE A WORLDWIDE SYMBOL OF ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY PRACTICE
1 TO FOLLOW BEST PRACTICE STANDARDS
Doing more of the right things for less 3
“There is no point in doing the wrong thing more cheaply”

Peter Drucker
Function Analysis the Paradigm Shift
The Project Objectives
TO CREATE A WORLD CLASS CENTRE IN DHAHRAN THAT CONTRIBUTES From: What things are
TO INTELLECTUAL AND CULTURAL ACTIVITIES IN SAUDI ARABIA AND
Wish List Presentation
ACTS AS A CATALYST FOR CHANGE BY EMBRACING THE PAST AND FUTURE OF THE
KINGDOM
To: What things do

USE STATE OF THE ART TECHNOLOGY TO CONSTRUCT AN ICONIC BUILDING THAT
PLACES SAUDI ARABIA ON THE CULTURAL MAP
PROMOTE ARAMCO'S COMMITMENT TO LOCAL COMMUNITIES AND HUMAN Excludes weather

RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT BY PROVIDING NEW KNOWLEDGE OPPORTUNITIES AND
Enhances appearance
ENJOYABLE EXPERIENCES FOR ALL AGES
Retains heat
TO OPEN IN NOVEMBER 2011 WITHIN AN APPROVED BUDGET Provides light
TO BE A WORLDWIDE SYMBOL OF ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY PRACTICE Provides ventilation
TO FOLLOW BEST PRACTICE STANDARDS
Function Analysis is the Key to Value Management
Value Profile Pareto’s 80-20 distribution rule
Enhance Cultural Life of the Kingdom (7)

20% of components account for 80% of the cost
80% of the value comes from 20% of the proposals
Idea Generation – Challenging
Image (4) 80% of sales come from 20% of clients the status quo
Functionality (3)
Productivity (2)
An exemplar of ‘Green Buildings’ (2)
Follow Best Practice
Areas for Brainstorming Teamwork Creative Thinking
Who are the most creative thinkers in the world?
Individual Efforts
Sub-structure PM Designer Owner User Engineers
Structure
Cultural Hubs
Museum
Archive Area
Cinema/ Keystone
Great Hall Team Effort
Auditorium
Library
Children Area
The Source
Cladding SOLUTIONS
External Works/ Landscape
Have you heard these lately ? Guidelines for Brainstorming

Team Communication
That’s impossible !
We don’t do things that way ! • No criticism
High
We tried something like that before, and it didn’t work ! • Quantity before quality
(Win/Win )
We would be laughed at ! • Piggy-back ideas
Trust
It’s against our…. ! • Innovate

(Compromise)
Please, be serious ! • Combine, add
It can’t be done ! • Think laterally
It’s my job ! (Win/Lose or Lose/Win )
We’re different !
Low
I know that boss won’t like it ! Defer evaluation

We have been doing it for the last 15 years, why Low High
change! Cooperation
Idea description Forgotten anything? Evaluate and Review
Be succinct Group discussion of ideas

Identify idea connectivity
Use of Verb – Noun discipline
Screen ideas to check feasibility and remove nonsense, e.g.:
1st Filter Ranking:
3 - Develop further before wrap-up meeting
PASSIVE ACTIVE
2 - Develop after wrap-up meeting

Provide Support Support Weight 1 - Review some time in the future
0 - Reject
Seek Approval Approve Procedure
BC – Base Case
Submit Budget Budget Expenses
Rank all ideas in spreadsheet
Determine Resolution Identify Champions for best ideas for further development
Resolve Problem
Generate Ideas Life Cycle Costing Principles
To Excel Sheet
Idea Evaluation and Suggested Discount Rate for Net Present Value
Interest rate
Development Inflation rate
Capital cost of each item
Life of each item (frequency of replacement/ refurbishment)
Annual costs
Apply to sheet No 6 of proposal development form

Develop Proposals Proposal Development Any Questions?
Develop best proposals further
Champion forms Proposal Teams
Proposals developed in more detail, to contain: Scenarios
Assess impact of alternative scenarios on value
Description of idea Select most advantageous scenarios
Advantages (benefits) and disadvantages (risks)
Impact on Value and Programme
Presentation Preparation
Use Evaluation Forms
Rank proposals
Present proposals to decision making group (at end of Day 2) Complete summary sheets
Prepare visual aids
Proposals Review
Proposal Development Wrap up meeting Next Steps
Develop each Proposal to show

Description of proposed alternative Recommendations presented by Owners
Cross reference to other ideas/proposals
Any change in Function Identify Owners to work further on selected Proposals
Advantages, Disadvantages, Technical appraisal Summarise Implementation Plan
Impacts on Cost, Schedule and Quality
Assess whether Proposal can be implemented Date for Wrap-up meeting to be agreed after the workshop
Include working papers
Send to DL to assess costs
Agree date for wrap-up meeting

Study Report
Summary and key outcomes of study

Project Synopsis
Overview of study process and proceedings
Detailed implementation recommendations
Appendices containing
Participants
Value Profile
Function Cost Analysis
Ideas Generated
Study Information
Value Engineering Proposals
Appendix F
Buro Happold Presentations
Davis Langdon LLP

Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre
MEP Engineering Utilities
• Allan Follett - MEP Team Leader Utilities to site boundary by Saudi Aramco
• Electricity
• Project split into 4 Engineering teams located in • Water
Glasgow, Edinburgh, Dubai • Sewerage
Buro Happold Buildings • District Cooling (being evaluated)
Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre
Design Team Update 29 April 2008
Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre Saudi Aramco Cultural Centre
Utilities Utilities Museum
Centralised Energy Centre Cooling Towers located off access road • Close environmental control for Museum
Located on North Side of Site • Possible use of Dry Air Coolers being reveiwed • Location ‘in ground’ good for services
• Location for • Ventilation plant located at Level -1
• Main Electrical Switchgear Possible Renewable Energy Options?
• Chillers Solar PV Farm
• Water Storage Solar Thermal Electric
1
Auditorium
• Main Air Plantroom at roof level

• Two options for ventilation
• Occupant Comfort
• Acoustics
Great Hall & Cinema Library Tower & Teens Areas
• Programme calls for close environmental control • Stable Environmental Control • Plantrooms on 4 levels
• Multifunction Space • Air Supply from floor level & via ‘Nodes’ • Various ventilation options
• Great Hall main Air Plantroom at mezzanine level • Air plantrooms at Level 0 or Level -1 • Façade key issue
• High Level induction system • Overall volume and voids used as air paths • Kitchen poses challenge
• Acoustic challenge from Plaza
Cinema • Fire Engineering issues
• Development ongoing as space moves location
2
Value Engineering Options
• Fire Engineering has been based on Code Compliance
• Museum cooling and services loads.
• The Great Hall briefing requires close environmental control
• Renewable Energy options should be reviewed
• SA are providing utilities to site. Recent correspondence has

highlighted District Cooling as an option
3
Structural Engineering - Status Car Park
Where we are - Structural SD1 (baseline)

Value Engineering Opportunities
Current Risks / Issues
Buro Happold Buildings

Structural Engineering – Status - April 29 2008
Car Park – Roof Options Car Park Roof – Landscaped ‘Dome’ Car Park Roof – Load Assumptions!
Earth Load = 22 kN/m2
Live Load = 10 kN/m2
Total Load = 32 kN/m2
Beam and Slab (90%)
Flat Slab (100%) Waffle Slab (60%) x 15 x6

(PT Slab = 70%)
1
Plaza Plaza – Roof Options Museum – The ‘Big-Dig’
Beam and Slab (140%)
Shoring system to be determined?

Flat Slab (200%) Waffle Slab (100%)
Museum – The ‘Big-Dig’ Great Hall Library
Rationalize!
Dig previously -14.5m / -23.0m (plus foundation)

Dig proposed -9m / -12m? (plus foundation)
2
Library Library Tower
7.6kN/m2
Tower Tower Auditorium

D
ddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddd
D
D
D
D
D
d
gggggg
g
3
Auditorium Auditorium Auditorium
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
D
D
D
D
Foundations Summary of Key VE Opportunities Summary of Key Risks / Issues

Deep foundations ideally comprise a raft only (omit piles) Car Park: Reduce landscape / confirm roof access loads Car Park / Plaza: confirm roof access loads
Car Park: Optimize roof structure and foundations Car Park: confirm parking and service access layout
Shallow foundations ideally comprise pad or strip footings Car Park: second level? (to be studied) Landscaping: confirm ‘dome’ geometry / loads
(omit raft) Energy Centre: Rationalize location and depth
Geotechnical Investigation ongoing!
Museum: Rationalize the ‘big dig’ – depth and footprint
Site Topographical Survey required / building levels
Subject to satisfactory results from additional Ground Great Hall: Rationalize to a ‘single’ structure
Library: Rationalize loads Update coordination and building relationships / detail
Investigation:
Tower: Evaluate concrete option Cladding skin / plaza interfaces
Ground water level (current and future)
Auditorium: Rationalize structure to acoustic brief Tower: resolve stability, deflection
Collapsible nature of upper silty sands?
Found the buildings on raft foundations (avoid piles) Auditorium: resolve back of stage load transfer
Presence / nature of recently graded material?
Resolving Tower stability (tension) forces
4
Chapter 07 PROCUREMENT, LONG LEAD ITEMS
Chapter 07 07.0 Procurement, Long Lead Items
07.1 Two Stage Procurement Approach Flowchart
07.2 Benefits of the Procurement Route
07.3 Issues to Consider
07.3.1 First Stage Tender

07.3.2 Second Stage Tender

07.1 T w o S tag e P roc urem en t A pproac h F low c h art
T w o S tage T im eline J une 2008 to J une 2009

End of Februar y 2 009
No t To E xc e ed Figure
D esign D e velop me nt C ons truc tion D oc u men ta tion

Start July 2008
Mid Au gust 200 8
Phas e 3 End O ctober 2008 Mid June 2 00 9
P has e 6 Mid M ar ch 200 9
Issue Preferred Agree men t of C on trac t S u m
1 st Sta ge Te nder Sec ond S tag e Ten der Issue
P requa lific ation C ontrac tor Selec ted C ontrac t Sig ned
Phas e 1 & 2
P has e 4 & 5
Phas e 7
Phas e 8 PRE CONTRACT STAGE C o n s truc tio n P ha se
F irs t S ta ge A p po in tm e n t s p lit in to 8 P ha ses ; P re fe rre d C o n tra c to r Le a d Ite m s ; S c o pe to be

de te rmine d As P e r
P ha s e 1 & 2 S ho rtlis t o f Po te ntia l C o ntra cto rs & • P ro c ure me nt o f E a rly W o rks P ac ka ges to
M a in C o ntrac t
pre pa re P re qua lifica tio n D oc s (4 we e ks ) c o m me nc e o nce Co ntrac to r a ppo inte d
P ha s e 3 Iss ue P re qua lifica tio n D oc ume nta tio n • P ro c ure Lo ng L ea d Ite ms
P ha s e 4 & 5 P re qua lific atio n P e rio d & • B uilda bility / C oo rdina tio n
E v a lua tio n (6 we e ks )
• Agre e a No t to E xce e d figure
P ha s e 6 1s t S ta ge Te nde r Is s ue
• M a rke t Te s ting by C o ntrac to r
P ha s e 7 1 s t S ta ge Te nde r Pe rio d (6 w ee ks )
• Tho ro ug h un de rs ta nding o f pro jec t c o mple xitie s
P ha s e 8 E va lua tio n a nd Ap po int P re fe rre d
• Agre e Te r ms a nd C o nditio ns
C o ntra cto r (4 we e ks )
• L o gis tic s/ R is k/ H& S

During Schematic Design, the Design Team has investigated a series of possible
procurement routes. This investigation has been carried out in collaboration with
the Client team and a series of meetings has been held to determine the Client’s 07.3.2 Second Stage Tender
expectations and requirements for the project. The procurement route
recommended in this chapter is the current stage of work in progress and will be • Main Contractor procurement strategy and construction programme to be
developed and finalised during Design Development stage. defined prior to commencement of second stage.
• Design Team to participate in sub-contractor selection process.
• Responsibility for preparation and sorting of trade packages is held by the
07.2 Benefits of the Recommended Procurement Route Main Contractor based on available Design Team information.
• Commercial and design responses from sub-contractors should be ‘open-
• Allows the Main Contractor to be appointed early in the process and book’ and unrestricted.
participate alongside the Design Team. • Main Contractor will expect payment during second stage.
• Allows a more collaborative approach to problem solving, buildability and • Contract should be signed on agreement of lump sum and satisfaction of
development of the cost plan. abilities.
• The Main Contractor has a greater opportunity to understand the
complexities of the project, thus reducing risk and potential surprises.
• Responsibility for construction and management of sub-contractors held by a
single Main Contractor.
• Allows procurement of early works packages such as enabling works under
the responsibility of a single Main Contractor rather than separately Client
appointed trade contractors.
• Allows early procurement of long lead items. Long lead items that have been
raised within the design team include:
• Cladding.
• MEP and structural systems to be confirmed.
• A not to be exceeded figure can be provided in February 2009 and finalised

in June 2009.
07. 3 Issues to Consider
07.3.1 First Stage Tender
• Tender shortlist to be made based on experience, resources, approach to

quality and ability to carry out work in KSA.
• In order to minimise cost of tendering and facilitate selection early, tender
documentation should be unambiguous, concise and expectations clearly
defined.
• Schematic Design Report to be included in tender documentation.
• The Main Contractor would be appointed based upon agreement of a
schedule of rates and establishment of basis for negotiation during the
second stage.
• Cost of preparing tender to be borne by the Contractors.

Chapter 08 DD DESIGN SCHEDULE AND DELIVERABLES
Chapter 08 08.0 Design Development Schedule and Deliverables
08.1 Design Development Schedule
08.2 Design Development Deliverables

08.01 Design Development Schedule

KING ABDULAZIZ CENTER DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE
2008
Line Name Start Duration End
June July August September October
16 23 30 7 14 21 28 4 11 18 25 1 8 15 22 29 6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Design Development
1 Issue of Schematic Design Report 13/06/2008 13/06/2008 1
2 Draft Procurement Strategy 13/06/2008 13/06/2008 2
3 Design Review (Dharan/ Oslo/ Glasgow) 16/06/2008 2d 17/06/2008 3
4 Oslo Presentation 27/06/2008 1d 27/06/2008 4
5 Cladding Finish Confirmed 30/06/2008 30/06/2008 5
6 Brief/ Programe Defined 30/06/2008 30/06/2008 6
7 SD Report Options Confirmed 30/06/2008 30/06/2008 7
8 Finalised Procurement Report 30/06/2008 30/06/2008 8
9 Design Workshop (Oslo) 09/07/2008 1d 09/07/2008 9
10 Engineering Design Review and Calcs 13/06/2008 4w 4d 16/07/2008 10
11 Design Co-ordination 13/06/2008 4w 4d 16/07/2008 11
12 Dahran Technical Review of SD Report 15/07/2008 3d 17/07/2008 12
13 IT Strategy Confirmed 17/07/2008 17/07/2008 13
14 Acoustic Strategy Confirmed 17/07/2008 17/07/2008 14
15 Fire Strategy Confirmed 17/07/2008 17/07/2008 15
16 Security Strategy Confirmed 17/07/2008 17/07/2008 16
17 Sustainability Strategy Confirmed 17/07/2008 17/07/2008 17
18 Updated Design Information 17/07/2008 2w 1d 31/07/2008 18

Updated Architectural Drawing Issue to
19 01/08/2008 01/08/2008 19
Client
21 Design Co-ordination 01/08/2008 7w 18/09/2008 21
22 Market Testing 01/08/2008 7w 18/09/2008 22
24 Draft Architectural Drawing Issue 19/09/2008 19/09/2008 24
25 DD Design Freeze 19/09/2008 19/09/2008 25
26 Checking/ Report Preparation 19/09/2008 3w 09/10/2008 26
27 DD Report Issue 10/10/2008 10/10/2008 27
Activities
Design Team KSA meeting Oslo meeting Client
Drawn by: GD Date. 12/06/2008 Revision No. 00 Notes:

Project Ref. H:\Clients\Snohetta\Aramco Cultural Center\06 Programmes\Programme\05 Design Development\Design Development rev.00.pp
• Draft 3D model for Interior and External Views
08.02 Design Development Deliverables
Month 8
Deliverables to be issued during Design Development to meet the requirements of
the contract will be as follows: • Weekly Reports
• Monthly Report
Month 5 • Design Development Report
• Material analysis/ option review
• Weekly Reports • Material selection diagram
• Monthly Report • List of Long Lead Materials with Specifications
• Draft Procurement Report • Outline Specification: material types, internal and external finishes
• Building Statistics
Month 6 • Specification - materials/ system types/ submittals/ drawings required/
testing, etc.
• Weekly Reports • Door & ironmongery schedules
• Monthly Report • Update of statutory requirements
• Procurement Report • Summary of approvals - processed and pending
• Summary of pending Actions/ decisions required
Month 7 • Site plans
• Site sections and details
• Weekly Reports • Building floor plans/ structural column layout/ solid walls/ level changes/
• Monthly Report furniture- fittings
• Draft Material analysis/ option review • Elevations floor/ ground/ roof/ materials/ cladding identification
• Draft Material selection diagram • Building sections floor slabs/ ceiling to floor design/ level changes
• List of Long Lead Materials with Specifications • Typical wall/ roof sections
• Draft Outline Specification: material types, internal and external finishes • Reflected ceiling plan - material identification
• Draft Building Statistics • Stair/ ramp details
• Draft Specification - materials/ system types/ submittals/ drawings required/ • Lift & Escalators
testing, etc. • Bathroom details
• Draft Door & ironmongery schedules • Furniture & Fittings
• Draft Update of statutory requirements • 3D model for Interior and External Views
• Draft Summary of approvals - processed and pending • Civil/ structural calculation submittals
• Summary of pending Actions/ decisions required • Structural layouts indicating primary structure
• Draft Site plans • Civil/ structural layouts of façade structure
• Draft Site sections and details • Civil/ structural sections and details to compliment layouts
• Draft Building floor plans/ structural column layout/ solid walls/ level • Civil/ structural Specifications
changes/ furniture- fittings • Civil/ structural Drainage layouts
• Draft Elevations floor/ ground/ roof/ materials/ cladding identification • Civil/ structural Road layouts
• Draft Building sections floor slabs/ ceiling to floor design/ level changes • Layouts of all major services
• Draft Typical wall/ roof sections • MEP Detailed design
• Draft Reflected ceiling plan - material identification • MEP layouts
• Draft Stair/ ramp details • Finalise negotiations with municipality
• Draft Lift & Escalators • Detailed indoor climate design simulations to support MEP design and
• Draft Bathroom details validate environmental design concepts
• Draft Furniture & Fittings • Fire Strategy Report

• Evacuation plans Level 01 Plan 1:200
• Finalisation of calculations and models Roof Plan 1:200
• Acoustic Engineering Report Partial Plans 1:50
Specific Foundation Details 1:20
• Production of drawings/ sketches/ input into outline specifications on façade
Column Schedule NA
options chosen
Shear Wall Plans & Details 1:50
• Review/ audit of architectural drawings Retaining Wall Sections 1:20
Ramp Sections & Details 1:20
For further clarification, Design Development structural drawings are attached and Specific Sections & Details 1:20
will be confirmed once the design phase commences.
Remote Car Park (R)
Foundation Plan 1:200
Level 00 Slab Plan 1:200
King Abdulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture
Roof Plan 1:200
Partial Plans 1:50
Preliminary Structural Drawing
List
Column Schedule NA
Buro Happold # 023329
Retaining Wall Sections 1:20
Drawing Titles Scale SD2 Issue Specific Sections & Details 1:20
General / Common Plaza (P) & Museum (M)

General Notes NA Key Foundation Plan 1:200
Index of Drawings NA Raft Foundation Plan 1:200
Key Site Plan 1:500 Level (-3) Slab Plan 1:200
General Excavation Plan 1:200 Level (-2) Foundation Plan 1:200
General Foundation Shoring TBD Level (-2) Slab Plan 1:200
Typical Foundation Details 1:20 Level (-1) Foundation Plan 1:200
Typical Concrete Details 1:20 Northwest Foundation Plan 1:100
Reinforced Concrete 1:20 Southwest Foundation Plan 1:100
Post-Tensioned Concrete 1:20 Southeast Foundation Plan 1:100
Masonry 1:20 Northeast Foundation Plan 1:100
Typical Steel Details 1:10 Level (-1) Key Slab Plan 1:200
Level 00 Foundation Plan 1:200
Energy Centre (E) Level 00 Key Slab Plan 1:200
Foundation Plan 1:200 Level 00 NW Slab Plan 1:100
Level 00 Slab Plan 1:200 Level 00 SW Slab Plan 1:100
Level 01 Mezzanine Plan 1:200 Level 00 SE Slab Plan 1:100
Roof Plan 1:200 Level 00 NE Slab Plan 1:100
Partial Plans 1:50 Level 01 Mezzanine Plan 1:200
Specific Foundation Details 1:20 Level 01 NW Mezzanine Plan 1:100
Column Schedule NA Level 01 SW Mezzanine Plan 1:100
Shear Wall Plans & Details 1:50 Level 01 SE Mezzanine Plan 1:100
Retaining Wall Sections 1:20 Level 01 NE Mezzanine Plan 1:100
Specific Sections & Details 1:20 Roof Plan 1:200
Northwest Roof Plan 1:100
Car Park (C) Southwest Roof Plan 1:100
Foundation Plan 1:200 Southeast Roof Plan 1:100
Level 00 Slab Plan 1:200 Northeast Roof Plan 1:100

Plaza Column Schedule NA Level 12 Plan 1:100
Tower Column Schedule NA Level 13 Plan 1:100
Library Column Schedule NA Level 14 Plan 1:100
Special Column Sections & Details 1:20 Level 15 Plan 1:100
Plaza Shear Wall Plans & Details 1:50 Level 16 Plan 1:100
Tower Shear Wall Plans & Details 1:50 Level 17 Plan (Main Roof) 1:100
Retaining Wall Sections 1:20 EMR Plan 1:100
Tunnel Sections & Details 1:20 EMR Roof 1:100
Oasis Sections & Details 1:20 High Roof Frame Elevations 1:100
Concrete Beam Sections & Details NA Partial Plan 1:50
Specific Sections & Details 1:20 Column Schedule NA
Great Hall (G) Braced Frame Elevations & Details 1:100
Foundation Plan 1:200 Specific Sections & Details 1:20
Level 00 Slab Plan 1:200
Level 01 Mezzanine Plan 1:200 Keystone (K)
Roof Plan 1:200 Axonometric Views NA
Specific Foundation Details 1:20 Lower Plan 1:100
Column Schedule NA Upper Plan 1:100
Frame Elevations 1:100 Roof Structure 1:100
Truss Elevations 1:100 Keystone Elevations 1:100
Steel Sections & Details 1:10 Frame Elevations 1:50
Specific Sections & Details 1:10 Connections, Sections & Details to
Library 1:20
Library (L) Connections, Sections & Details to
Level 01 Plan 1:200 Tower 1:20
Level 02 Plan 1:200
Level 03 Plan 1:200 Auditorium (A)
Level 04 Plan 1:200 Foundation Plan
Level 05 Plan 1:200 Level 0 Plan
Column Schedule NA Level 1 Plan (1st Circle)
Special Column Sections & Details 1:20 Level 2 Plan (2nd Circle)
Keystone Braced Frame Details TBD Technical Gallery Plan
Shear Wall Plans & Details 1:50 Flytower block support steelwork grid
Façade Frame Elevations TBD Flytower lighting gantry support grid
Steel Sections & Details 1:10 Lower Roof Truss Layout
Specific Sections & Details 1:20 Upper Roof Truss Layout
Plant Room Plan
Tower (T) Middle Roof Plan
Level 01 Plan 1:100 Outer Roof Plan
Level 02 Plan 1:100 Longitudinal Section
Level 03 Plan 1:100 Cross Section through Auditorium
Level 04 Plan 1:100 Cross Section through Stage
Level 05 Plan 1:100 Column Schedule
Level 06 Plan 1:100 Truss schedules & Sections
Level 07 Plan 1:100 Circle Concrete Sections and Details
Level 08 Plan 1:100 Circle Steel Sections and Details
Level 09 Plan 1:100 Shear Wall Plans & Details
Level 10 Plan 1:100 Façade Frame Elevations
Level 11 Plan 1:100 Roof Truss Elevations

Foundation Sections & Details
Ground Floor Sections & Details
Circle Steel Sections & Details
Truss / Roofs Sections and Details
Concrete Sections & Details
Façade Sections and Details
Steel Sections & Details
Typical Details
Specific Sections & Details
Preliminary Specifications List

Buro Happold # 023329
Section (format to be confirmed) Title Format
033000 Cast-in-place concrete A4

Unbonded post-tensioned
033816 concrete A4
042000 Unit masonry A4
051200 Structural steel framing A4
053100 Steel decking A4
TBD Basement waterproofing A4


Israe اثراء

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Israe اثراء

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

King Adbulaziz Center for Knowledge & Culture

Schematic Design II Report

Chapter 04 COST PLAN

Chapter 05 LIST OF DRAWINGS FOR SD

Chapter 06 VALUE ENGINEERING

Chapter 07 PROCUREMENT, LONG LEED ITEMS

Chapter 08 DD DESIGN SCEDULE AND DELIVERABLES

01.3 The Project Team

01.4 Requests For Information (RFIs)

• The Musalla has been replaced by a 450 m² Mosque to be situated in the

02.5.4.2 Conveying system. 02.04.08: April Design Team Workshop, Oslo.

02.5.4.3 Library structure. 07.04.08: Completion of Schematic Design Phase I

Museum: 02.6.4.1 The Source. 18.04.08: Design Team Workshop, Glasgow.

02.8.4.2 Tower core. 22.05.08: Value Engineering Follow-Up Workshop, Dhahran.

02.8.4.4 Tower structure. 13.06.08: Completion of Schematic Design, 30% Submission.

02.8.4.5 Third Oasis.

02.8.4.6 Keystone scope.

01.2.5 The Brief:

Kjetil Thorsen Frode Degvold Peter Dang

ASTRID VAN VEEN

Landscape & Tower & Keystone Façade Group Interiors &

Structural Engineer Structural Engineer Geotechnical Civil Engineering MEP

Steve Gee Catharine Tanner Sami Abdulghani

Raj Tailor Project Manager/ Architect/ Project

Project Manager Project Principal

Project Manager Project Manager

Buro Happold – Glasgow/ Buro Happold –

02.4 Great hall and Cinema

02.7 Plaza and Childrens

02.8 Tower and Keystone

02.10 Interior - overall concept

02.11 Architectural Specification

Foundation Cermony, team in front of model - foto: Hisham Mailaka

The Past and the Future

Introvert and Extrovert

Repository and Beacon

Diversity and Unity

Refined garden - untouched desert

Inclusion of existing facilities within the scheme

(Description of concept from the competition)

THE VOYAGE THE MONOSURFACE WITH LUSH GARDEN - LUSH GARDEN -

Inspirational images: Tree of life

Materials: Concrete, stone.

Differentiated finishes, warm colours Ref. Accessibility

Main materials: Patterned stone and concrete

Ref. image. Man leaving traces

Main materials: Wood

Ref. image. Emphasising beauty and vulnerability

Ref. images. Bridging over

(For the dualism with the paths, see chapter above.)

Reflecting the brightness of traditional textiles and festivities

The northwestern and southwestern regions are densely veg-

However, plants have several adaptations that help them to

Reflecting the importance of coexistence

Emphasising the nuances, and experiencing scale in the desertscape

Ref. Stimulating interaction, learning and sensing

EXISTING PARK TRANSITION ZONE SHADED WALKWAY

A drop-off zone is incorporated in the entrance Plaza.

Ref. image. Shading construction Ref. image. Modeling the terrain

Main materials main road: Asphalt, stone curbes.

The Alley MAIN ACCESS

Main materials secondary road: Asphalt, stone curbes

Changing perspectives, viewpoint 2. Images by Snohetta Viewpoint 5

Fabergé Easter Egg for Tsar Nikaolai